REJ09B0234-0500 The revision list can be viewed directly by clicking the title page. The revision list summarizes the locations of revisions and additions. Details should always be checked by referring to the relevant text. 16 H8S/2633 Group, H8S/2633 F-ZTAT, H8S/2633R F-ZTAT, H8S/2695 Hardware Manual Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer H8S Family/H8S/2600 Series H8S/2633 H8S/2632 H8S/2631 H8S/2633R H8S/2695 Rev. 5.00 Revision Date: Mar 28, 2005 HD6432633 HD64F2633 HD6432632 HD6432631 HD64F2633R HD6432695 Keep safety first in your circuit designs! 1. Renesas Technology Corp. puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable, but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them. Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury, fire or property damage. Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs, with appropriate measures such as (i) placement of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of nonflammable material or (iii) prevention against any malfunction or mishap. Notes regarding these materials 1. These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas Technology Corp. product best suited to the customer's application; they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights, or any other rights, belonging to Renesas Technology Corp. or a third party. 2. Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, or infringement of any thirdparty's rights, originating in the use of any product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, or circuit application examples contained in these materials. 3. All information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs and algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials, and are subject to change by Renesas Technology Corp. without notice due to product improvements or other reasons. It is therefore recommended that customers contact Renesas Technology Corp. or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp. product distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product listed herein. The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability, or other loss rising from these inaccuracies or errors. Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corp. by various means, including the Renesas Technology Corp. Semiconductor home page (http://www.renesas.com). 4. When using any or all of the information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs, and algorithms, please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products. Renesas Technology Corp. assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability or other loss resulting from the information contained herein. 5. Renesas Technology Corp. semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake. Please contact Renesas Technology Corp. or an authorized Renesas Technology Corp. product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes, such as apparatus or systems for transportation, vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea repeater use. 6. The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corp. is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials. 7. If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions, they must be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination. Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and/or the country of destination is prohibited. 8. Please contact Renesas Technology Corp. for further details on these materials or the products contained therein. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page ii of lxii General Precautions on Handling of Product 1. Treatment of NC Pins Note: Do not connect anything to the NC pins. The NC (not connected) pins are either not connected to any of the internal circuitry or are used as test pins or to reduce noise. If something is connected to the NC pins, the operation of the LSI is not guaranteed. 2. Treatment of Unused Input Pins Note: Fix all unused input pins to high or low level. Generally, the input pins of CMOS products are high-impedance input pins. If unused pins are in their open states, intermediate levels are induced by noise in the vicinity, a passthrough current flows internally, and a malfunction may occur. 3. Processing before Initialization Note: When power is first supplied, the product’s state is undefined. The states of internal circuits are undefined until full power is supplied throughout the chip and a low level is input on the reset pin. During the period where the states are undefined, the register settings and the output state of each pin are also undefined. Design your system so that it does not malfunction because of processing while it is in this undefined state. For those products which have a reset function, reset the LSI immediately after the power supply has been turned on. 4. Prohibition of Access to Undefined or Reserved Addresses Note: Access to undefined or reserved addresses is prohibited. The undefined or reserved addresses may be used to expand functions, or test registers may have been be allocated to these addresses. Do not access these registers; the system’s operation is not guaranteed if they are accessed. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page iii of lxii Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page iv of lxii Preface These LSIs are high-performance microcomputers with a 32-bit H8S/2600 CPU core and a variety of built-in peripheral functions necessary for a system configuration. The built-in peripheral devices include a 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU), a programmable pulse generator (PPG)*1, a watchdog timer (WDT), 8-bit timers, a 14-bit PWM timer (PWM)*1, serial communication interfaces (SCI, IrDA*1), an A/D converter, a D/A converter*1, and I/O ports. An I2C bus interface (IIC)*1 can also be incorporated as an option. An on-chip DMA controller (DMAC)*1 and data transfer controller (DTC)*1 perform high-speed data transfer without using the CPU, enabling use of these LSIs as embedded microcomputers in various advanced control systems. Two types of internal ROM-flash memory (F-ZTAT™*2) and mask ROM-are available, providing a quick and flexible response to conditions from ramp-up through full-scale volume production, even for applications with frequently changing specifications. Notes: 1. This function is not available in the H8S/2695. 2. F-ZTAT is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp. Target Users: This manual was written for users who will be using the H8S/2633 Group, H8S/2633R, or H8S/2695 in the design of application systems. Readers are expected to understand the fundamentals of electrical circuits, logic circuits, and microcomputers. Objective: This manual was written to provide users with an explanation of the hardware functions and electrical characteristics of the H8S/2633 Group, H8S/2633R, and H8S/2695. Refer to the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Programming Manual for a detailed description of the instruction set. Notes on reading this manual: • In order to understand the overall functions of the chip Read the manual according to the contents. This manual is broadly divided into parts covering the CPU, system control functions, peripheral functions, and electrical characteristics. • In order to understand the details of the CPU's functions Refer to the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Programming Manual. Example: Bit order: The MSB is on the left and the LSB is on the right. Related Manuals: The latest versions of all related manuals are available from our website. Please ensure that you have the latest versions of all documents you require. http://www.renesas.com/eng/ Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page v of lxii H8S/2633 Group manuals: Document Title Document No. H8S/2633 Group Hardware Manual This manual H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Programming Manual REJ09B0139 Users manuals for development tools: Document Title Document No. H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler, Assembler, Optimized Linkage Editor User's Manual REJ10B0058 H8S, H8/300 Series Simulator/Debugger (for Windows) User's Manual ADE-702-037 High-performance Embedded Workshop User's Manual ADE-702-201 Application Notes: Document Title Document No. H8S Family Technical Q & A REJ05B0397 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page vi of lxii Comparison of H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633F-ZTAT, H8S/2633RF-ZTAT, and H8S/2695 Product Specifications A comparative listing of the specifications of the H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633FZTAT, H8S/2633RF-ZTAT, and H8S/2695 is provided below. Comparison of H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633F-ZTAT, H8S/2633RF-ZTAT, and H8S/2695 Product Specifications H8S/2633 Group H8S/2633R Group H8S/2633F-ZTAT H8S/2633 H8S/2632 Model HD64F2633F25 HD64F2633TE25 HD64F2633F16 HD64F2633TE16 HD6432633F25 HD6432633TE25 HD6432633F16 HD6432633TE16 HD6432632F25 HD6432632TE25 HD6432632F16 HD6432632TE16 HD6432631F25 HD64F2633RF28 HD6432695F28 HD6432631TE25 HD64F2633RTE28 HD6432631F16 HD6432631TE16 RAM 16 kbytes 16 kbytes 12 kbytes 8 kbytes 16 kbytes 8 kbytes ROM 256-kbyte flash memory 256-kbyte mask ROM 192-kbyte mask ROM 128-kbyte mask ROM 256-kbyte flash memory 192-kbyte mask ROM On-chip ROM (256 kbytes) On-chip ROM (192 kbytes) On-chip ROM (128 kbytes) On-chip ROM (256 kbytes) On-chip ROM (192 kbytes) On-chip RAM (16k-64)bytes On-chip RAM (12k-64)bytes On-chip RAM (8k-64)bytes On-chip RAM (16k-64)bytes On-chip RAM (8k-64)bytes On-chip RAM (64 bytes) On-chip RAM (64 bytes) On-chip RAM (64 bytes) On-chip RAM (64 bytes) On-chip RAM (64 bytes) ROM, RAM memory map H'000000 H'01FFFF H8S/2631 H8S/2633RF-ZTAT H8S/2695 H'02FFFF H'03FFFF H'FFB000 H'FFC000 H'FFD000 H'FFEFBF H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFFF Input clock 2 to 25 MHz* (2 to 16 MHz for 16 MHz operation version) frequency range Operating 25 MHz operation version: 2 to 25 MHz frequency 16 MHz operation version: 2 to 16 MHz range 2 to 28 MHz* Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page vii of lxii H8S/2633 Group H8S/2633F-ZTAT H8S/2633 H8S/2632 H8S/2633R Group H8S/2631 Operating 25 MHz operation version voltage PVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, VCC = PLLVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, Vref = 4.5 V to AVCC range 16 MHz operation version (low-voltage version) PVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, VCC = PLLVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V [When using A/D or D/A] AVCC = 3.6 V to 5.5 V, Vref = 3.6 V to AVCC [When not using A/D or D/A] AVCC = 3.3 V to 5.5 V, Vref = 3.3 V to AVCC Power supply pins 2 power supply configurations, PVCC (5 V power supply) and VCC (3 V power supply), PLLVCC is 3 V power supply H8S/2633RF-ZTAT H8S/2695 PVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V (Single power supply version lacking VCC and PLLVCC pins) AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V Vref = 4.5 V to AVCC • PVCC (5 V power supply) single power supply configuration • Do not connect the VCL pin to the power supply. Instead, connect it to a ground via a 0.1 µF power supply stabilizer capacitor (which should be mounted close to the pin). • Do not connect the VCC power supply to the VCL pin. • Note that the VCL pin is located in the same position as the VCC pin on the older H8S/2633 Group and H8S/2633F. External capacitor 0.1 µF VCL (pin 11: FP128B) (pin 7: TFP120) VSS (pin 9: FP128B) (pin 5: TFP120) • There is no PLLVCC power supply pin. EXTAL VIH: VCC × 0.8 V to VCC + 0.3 V input level V : –0.3 V to V × 0.2 V IL CC (VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V) Interrupt sources External interrupts: NMLIRQ7 to IRQ0 Internal interrupts: 72 sources VIH: PVCC × 0.8 V to PVCC + 0.3 V VIL: –0.3 V to PVCC × 0.2 V (PVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V) External interrupts: NMLIRQ7 to IRQ0 Internal interrupts: 49 sources 32 kHz oscillator Yes (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode supported) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page viii of lxii No (subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode not supported) H8S/2633 Group H8S/2633F-ZTAT Method of fixing OSC pin when 32 kHz oscillator not used H8S/2633 H8S/2632 H8S/2633R Group H8S/2631 VCC power supply H8S/2633RF-ZTAT OSC1 OSC1 OSC2 OSC2 GND Open Open Properties Output of pins 34 and 35 is normally NMOS push-pull output, but is NMOS open-drain output of multiwhen the IIC bus drive function is selected. use pins (pins 34 and 35) RecomSee section 23A, Clock Oscillator (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, mended H8S/2633F). external PLL circuit H8S/2695 No 32 kHz oscillator. The HD6432695 is the HD6432633. The pins corresponding to OSC1 and OSC2 in the HD64F2633 are NC pins in the HD6432695. No IIC function. Pins 34 and 35 output is CMOS output. See section 23B, Clock Oscillator (H8S/2633R, H8S/2695). PC break controller (PBC) Yes No DRAM interface Yes No DMA controller (DMAC) Yes No Data transfer controller (DTC) Yes No I/O ports Functions of H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633F, and H8S/2633R are identical. See section 10A, I/O Ports, for details. Some functions of the H8S/2633 Group have been eliminated. See section 10B, I/O Ports, for details. Programmable pulse generator (PPG) Yes No 8-bit timer (TMR) Yes No 14-bit PWM timer Yes No WDTI Yes No IrDA Yes No Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page ix of lxii H8S/2633 Group H8S/2633F-ZTAT I2C bus interface (IIC) H8S/2633 H8S/2632 Yes [option] D/A converter Yes H8S/2633R Group H8S/2631 H8S/2633RF-ZTAT H8S/2695 Yes No No Note: * The input clock frequency range is 2 to 25 MHz (2 to 16 MHz on 16 MHz operation version: H8S/2633 Group only). For 25 MHz < φ ≤ 28 MHz operation on the H8S/2633R and H8S/2695, make sure to use a PLL with a multiplying factor set to ×2 or ×4 (φ = operating frequency). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page x of lxii Notes on H8S/2695 1. Notes on P35 Pin Functions (SCK1, SCK4) in H8S/2695 The following restrictions apply to the functions of P35 (SCK1, SCK4) in the H8S/2695. The functions indicated by *2 below cannot be used in the H8S/2695, and these combinations must not be set. (1) P35 Pin Functions in H8S/2633 Group and H8S/2633R ICE 0 CKE1(SCI1) CKE1(SCI4) 0 0 C/A(SCI1) C/A(SCI4) 0 0 CKE0(SCI1) CKE0(SCI4) P35DDR Pin function 1 0 0 0, 1, 1 1, 0, 1 0, 1, 1 1, 0, 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 P35 input pin P35 output pin*1 SCK1/SCK4 output pin*1 SCK1/SCK4 output pin*1 SCK1/SCK4 input pin SCL0 input/output pin IRQ5 input (2) P35 Pin Functions in H8S/2695 CKE1(SCI1) CKE1(SCI4) C/A(SCI1) C/A(SCI4) Pin function 0 0 0 1 P35 input pin P35 output pin 2 1* 2 0* 1 1 1 1 0, 1, 1 1, 0, 1 0* SCK1/SCK4 input pin 0 0 CKE0(SCI1) CKE0(SCI4) P35DDR 2 0* 2 1* 0 0 SCK1/SCK4 SCK1/SCK4 output pin output pin 3 IRQ5 input Notes: 1. The output type is normally NMOS push-pull output, but NMOS open-drain output when P35ODR = 1. 2. These combinations must not be set. 3. If SCK1 and SCK4 are used as input (clock input) pins on the H8S/2695, P35DDR must be cleared to 0. 2. Notes on H8S/2695 Development (Using H8S/2633 Emulator Chip) The H8S/2695 is not equipped with an I2C bus function and output from pins 34 and 35 is CMOS output (unless P34ODR or P35ODR is set to 1, respectively). These pins are used for NMOS push-pull output on the H8S/2633 emulator chip, so the output characteristics of these pins are different than is the case with the H8S/2695. If it is necessary to use pins 34 and 35 for CMOS output, use an appropriate resistance to pull up pins 34 and 35 of the H8S/2633 emulator chip. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xi of lxii Manual Reference Pages H8S/2633 Group H8S/2633F-ZTAT H8S/2633 RAM See section 21, RAM ROM See section 22, ROM H8S/2632 H8S/2633R Group H8S/2631 H8S/2633RF-ZTAT H8S/2695 Interrupt Controller See section 5, Interrupt Controller (INT) PC Break Controller See section 6, PC Break Controller (PBC) (PBC) — DRAM Interface See section 7, Bus Controller — DMA Controller (DMAC) See section 8, DMA Controller (DMAC) — Data Transfer Controller (DTC) See section 9, Data Transfer Controller (DTC) — I/O Ports See section 10A, I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) See section 11, 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) See section 12, Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) See section 10B, I/O Ports (H8S/2695) — 8-Bit Timers (TMR) See section 13, 8-Bit Timers (TMR) — 14-Bit PWM D/A See section 14, 14-Bit PWM D/A — WDT0 See section 15, Watchdog Timer WDT1 See section 15, Watchdog Timer Serial Communication Interface (SCI) See section 16, Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) IrDA See section 16, Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) Smart Card Interface See section 17, Smart Card Interface I2C Bus Interface (IIC) See section 18, I2C Bus Interface (IIC) A/D Converter See section 19, A/D Converter — — — D/A Converter See section 20, D/A Converter 32 kHz oscillator See section 23A, Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633F) See section 23B, Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633R, H8S/2695) Clock Pulse Generator See section 23A, Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633F) See section 23B, Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633R, H8S/2695) EXTAL input level See section 25, Electrical Characteristics (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633F) See section 26, Electrical Characteristics (H8S/2633R) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xii of lxii — — See section 27, Electrical Characteristics (H8S/2695) H8S/2633 Group H8S/2633F-ZTAT H8S/2633 H8S/2632 H8S/2633R Group H8S/2631 Recommended See section 23A, Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633, external PLL circuit H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633F) Interrupt processing See section 5, Interrupt Controller vector table See table 5.4 (a) H8S/2633RF-ZTAT H8S/2695 See section 23B, Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633R, H8S/2695) See section 5, Interrupt Controller See table 5.4 (b) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xiii of lxii Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xiv of lxii Main Revisions in This Edition Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 1.1 Overview 1 Description amended (Before) (SCI, IrDA)*2 → (After) (SCI, IrDA*2) Table 1.1 Overview 2 Note *1 added 1 1 Possible to connect* PC break controller* 3 Note *1 added Programmable pulse generator (PPG)*1 8 Figure amended 14-bit PWM timer D/A converter A/D converter Port 9 PPG P47 /AN7/ DA1 P46 /AN6/ DA0 P45 /AN5 P44 /AN4 P43 /AN3 P42 /AN2 P41 /AN1 P40 /AN0 P33/TxD1/SCL1 P32/SCK0/SDA1/IRQ4 P31/RxD0/IrRxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD P97/AN15/DA3 P96/AN14/DA2 P95/AN13 P94/AN12 P93/AN11 P92/AN10 P91/AN9 P90/AN8 TPU 14-bit PWM timer D/A converter A/D converter Port 9 PPG Port 1 Port 4 P33/TxD1/SCL1 P32/SCK0/SDA1/IRQ4 P31/RxD0/IrRxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD P97/AN15/DA3 P96/AN14/DA2 P95/AN13 P94/AN12 P93/AN11 P92/AN10 P91/AN9 P90/AN8 P47 / AN7/ DA1 P46 / AN6/ DA0 P45 / AN5 P44 / AN4 P43 / AN3 P42 / AN2 P41 / AN1 P40 / AN0 P77/TxD3 P76/RxD3 P75/TMO3/SCK3 P74/TMO2/MRES P73/TMO1/TEND1/CS7 P72/TMO0/TEND0/CS6 P71/TMR23/TMC23/DREQ1/CS5 P70/TMR01/TMC01/DREQ0/CS4 Port Figure amended Vref AVCC AVSS 9 Vref AVCC AVSS Port 4 P17 / PO15/ TIOCB2 /PWM3/ TCLKD P16 / PO14/ TIOCA2/PWM2/IRQ1 P15 / PO13/ TIOCB1 /TCLKC P14 / PO12/ TIOCA1/IRQ0 P13 / PO11/ TIOCD0 / TCLKB/A23 P12 / PO10/ TIOCC0 / TCLKA/A22 P11 / PO9/ TIOCB0 /DACK1/A21 P10 / PO8/ TIOCA0 /DACK0/A20 Port 1 Port 7 Figure 1.1 (b) H8S/2633R Internal Block Diagram TPU Port 7 P77/TxD3 P76/RxD3 P75/TMO3/SCK3 P74/TMO2/MRES P73/TMO1/TEND1/CS7 P72/TMO0/TEND0/CS6 P71/TMR23/TMC23/DREQ1/CS5 P70/TMR01/TMC01/DREQ0/CS4 Figure 1.1 (a) H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, H8S/2631 Internal Block Diagram Port Specification of Power-down mode amended • Subclock operation*1 (subactive mode, subsleep mode, watch mode) P17 / PO15/ TIOCB2 /PWM3/ TCLKD P16 / PO14/ TIOCA2/PWM2/IRQ1 P15 / PO13/ TIOCB1 / TCLKC P14 / PO12/ TIOCA1/IRQ0 P13 / PO11/ TIOCD0 / TCLKB/A23 P12 / PO10/ TIOCC0 / TCLKA/A22 P11 / PO9/ TIOCB0 /DACK1/A21 P10 / PO8/ TIOCA0 /DACK0/A20 1.3.2 Internal Block Diagram 5 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xv of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 1.3.1 Pin Arrangement 11 Figures amended 112 pin (Before) P72/TMO0/TEND0/CS6/SYNCI → (After) P72/TMO0/TEND0/CS6 Figure 1.2 (a) H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, H8S/2631 Pin Arrangement (TFP120: Top View) 12 Figure 1.2 (b) H8S/2633R Pin Arrangement (TFP120: Top View) Figure 1.3 (a) H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, H8S/2631 Pin Arrangement (FP-128B: Top View) 13 Figure 1.3 (b) H8S/2633R Pin Arrangement (TFP-128B: Top View) 14 1.3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode 16 Table 1.2 (a) Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode (H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, H8S/2631) Figures amended 122 pin (Before) P72/TMO0/TEND0/CS6/SYNCI → (After) P72/TMO0/TEND0/CS6 Table amended Pin No. Pin Name TFP-120 FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 11 15 VSS VSS VSS VSS 12 16 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/TIOCA3 13 17 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 14 18 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/TIOCB3 15 19 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB2/TIOCC3 16 20 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/TIOCD3 17 21 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/TIOCA4 18 22 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/TIOCB4 19 23 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/TIOCA5 20 24 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/TIOCB5 21 25 PA0/A16 PA0/A16 PA0/A16 PA0 22 26 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/TxD2 23 27 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/RxD2 24 28 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/SCK2 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xvi of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 1.3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode 17 Table amended, note *1 added NC*1 Pin No. Table 1.2 (a) Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode (H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, H8S/2631) Pin Name TFP-120 FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 33 39 P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ PWM3/TCLKD P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ PWM3/TCLKD P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ PWM3/TCLKD P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ PWM3/TCLKD 34 40 PE0/D0 PE0/D0 PE0/D0 PE0 35 41 PE1/D1 PE1/D1 PE1/D1 PE1 36 42 PE2/D2 PE2/D2 PE2/D2 PE2 37 43 PE3/D3 PE3/D3 PE3/D3 PE3 38 44 PE4/D4 PE4/D4 PE4/D4 PE4 39 45 PE5/D5 PE5/D5 PE5/D5 PE5 40 46 PE6/D6 PE6/D6 PE6/D6 PE6 41 47 PE7/D7 PE7/D7 PE7/D7 PE7 42 48 VSS VSS VSS VSS 18 NC*1 FWE*2 19 NC*1 Pin No. Pin Name TFP-120 FP-128B Mode 4 20 86 94 87 95 PF3/ 88 96 PF2/ Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 PF4 / / / / PF3/ PF2/ / / / / PF3/ PF2/ / / / PF3/ / PF2 / NC*1 Pin No. Pin Name TFP-120 FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 111 121 P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ / / / 112 122 P72/TMO0/ / P72/TMO0/ / P72/TMO0/ / P72/TMO0/ 113 123 P73/TMO1/ / P73/TMO1/ / P73/TMO1/ / P73/TMO1/ Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xvii of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 1.3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode 21 Table amended, note *1 added Pin No. Table 1.2 (b) Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode (H8S/2633R) 22 Pin Name TFP-120 FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 11 15 VSS VSS VSS VSS 12 16 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/TIOCA3 13 17 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 14 18 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/TIOCB3 15 19 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/TIOCD3 17 21 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/TIOCA4 18 22 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/TIOCB4 19 23 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/TIOCA5 20 24 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/TIOCB5 21 25 PA0/A16 PA0/A16 PA0/A16 PA0 22 26 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/TxD2 23 27 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/RxD2 24 28 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/SCK2 25 29 VSS VSS VSS VSS NC*1 Pin No. 23 24 Pin Name TFP-120 FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 33 39 P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ PWM3/TCLKD P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ PWM3/TCLKD P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ PWM3/TCLKD P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ PWM3/TCLKD 34 40 PE0/D0 PE0/D0 PE0/D0 PE0 35 41 PE1/D1 PE1/D1 PE1/D1 PE1 36 42 PE2/D2 PE2/D2 PE2/D2 PE2 37 43 PE3/D3 PE3/D3 PE3/D3 PE3 38 44 PE4/D4 PE4/D4 PE4/D4 PE4 39 45 PE5/D5 PE5/D5 PE5/D5 PE5 40 46 PE6/D6 PE6/D6 PE6/D6 PE6 41 47 PE7/D7 PE7/D7 PE7/D7 PE7 42 48 VSS VSS VSS VSS NC*1 NC*1 Pin No. Pin Name TFP-120 FP-128B Mode 4 25 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 86 94 87 95 PF3/ 88 96 PF2/ 111 121 P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ / / / 112 122 P72/TMO0/ NC*1 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xviii of lxii PF4 / / / / PF3/ PF2/ / / / / P72/TMO0/ / PF3/ PF2/ / / / / P72/TMO0/ PF3/ / PF2 / / P72/TMO0/ Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 1.3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode 26 Table amended, note *1 added Pin No. Table 1.2 (c) Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode (H8S/2695) 27 Pin Name FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 15 VSS VSS VSS VSS 16 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/TIOCA3 17 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 18 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/TIOCB3 19 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB2/TIOCC3 20 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/TIOCD3 21 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/TIOCA4 22 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/TIOCB4 23 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/TIOCA5 24 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/TIOCB5 25 PA0/A16 PA0/A16 PA0/A16 PA0 26 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/TxD2 27 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/RxD2 28 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/SCK2 29 VSS VSS VSS VSS FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 39 P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD 40 PE0/D0 PE0/D0 PE0/D0 PE0 41 PE1/D1 PE1/D1 PE1/D1 PE1 42 PE2/D2 PE2/D2 PE2/D2 PE2 43 PE3/D3 PE3/D3 PE3/D3 PE3 44 PE4/D4 PE4/D4 PE4/D4 PE4 45 PE5/D5 PE5/D5 PE5/D5 PE5 46 PE6/D6 PE6/D6 PE6/D6 PE6 47 PE7/D7 PE7/D7 PE7/D7 PE7 48 VSS VSS VSS VSS NC*1 Pin No. Pin Name Mode 6 Mode 7 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xix of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 1.3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode 28 Table amended, note *1 added Pin No. Table 1.2 (c) Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode (H8S/2695) Pin Name FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 65 P35/SCK1/SCK4/ P35/SCK1/SCK4/ P35/SCK1/SCK4/ P35/SCK1/SCK4/ 66 P36/RxD4 P36/RxD4 P36/RxD4 P36/RxD4 67 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 68 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 69 P37/TxD4 P37/TxD4 P37/TxD4 P37/TxD4 70 PG0/ PG0/ PG0/ PG0/ 71 PG1/ 72 PG2/ PG2/ PG2/ PG2 73 PG3/ PG3/ PG3/ PG3 74 PG4/ PG4/ PG4/ PG4 76 NC* NC* NC* NC* 77 PLLCAP PLLCAP PLLCAP PLLCAP 78 PLLVSS PLLVSS PLLVSS PLLVSS NMI NMI NMI NMI / PG1/ / PG1/ Mode 7 / PG1/ 75 1 1 1 1 79 80 81 29 82 NC* NC* 83 XTAL XTAL XTAL XTAL 84 NC* NC* NC* NC* 85 EXTAL 86 VSS VSS VSS VSS 87 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 88 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 89 PVCC1 PVCC1 FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 95 PF3/ / 96 PF2/ / 2 1 NC* 2 1 EXTAL 1 EXTAL 2 1 EXTAL PVCC1 PVCC1 NC*1 Pin No. 30 NC* 2 Pin Name / Mode 6 PF3/ / PF2/ / / Mode 7 PF3/ / PF2/ / / PF3/ / PF2 NC*1 Notes: 1. NC pins should be connected to VSS or left open. 2. In the flash memory version this is the FWE pin. In the mask ROM version this pin should be connected to VSS or left open. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xx of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 1.3.3 Pin Functions 35 Table amended Table 1.3 (a) Pin Functions (H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, H8S/2631) Table 1.3 (b) Pin Functions (H8S/2633R) 2.6.1 Overview 41 66 Table 2.1 Instruction Classification 2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes Table 2.2 Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes Type Symbol I/O Name and Function Serial communication interface (SCI)/ Smart Card interface TxD4, TxD3, TxD2, TxD1, TxD0 Output Transmit data (channel 0 to 4): Data output pins. RxD4, RxD3, Input RxD2, RxD1, RxD0 Receive data (channel 0 to 4): Data input pins. SCK4, SCK3, I/O SCK2, SCK1, SCK0 Serial clock (channel 0 to 4): Clock I/O pins. SCK0 output type is NMOS push-pull. Table amended Type Symbol I/O Name and Function Serial communication interface (SCI)/ Smart Card interface TxD4, TxD3, TxD2, TxD1, TxD0 Output Transmit data (channel 0 to 4): Data output pins. RxD4, RxD3, Input RxD2, RxD1, RxD0 Receive data (channel 0 to 4): Data input pins. SCK4, SCK3, I/O SCK2, SCK1, SCK0 Serial clock (channel 0 to 4): Clock I/O pins. SCK0 output type is NMOS push-pull. IrDA-equipped SCI 1 channel (SCI0) IrTxD IrRxD Output/ Input IrDA transmission data/receive data: Input/output pins for the data encoded for the IrDA. I2C bus interface (IIC) (optional) SCL0 SCL1 I/O 2 I C clock input (channel 1, 0): I2C clock input/output pins. These functions have a bus driving function. SCL0's output format is an NMOS open drain. SDA0 SDA1 I/O I2C data input/output (channel 1, 0): I2C clock input/output pins. These functions have a bus driving function. SCL0's output format is an NMOS open drain. Note *5 added STM*5 • LDM*5 Note: 5. Only register ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. 67, 68 Note *3 added STM*3 LDM*3 Note: 3. Only register ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxi of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 2.6.3 Table of Instructions Classified by Function 70 Note *2 added STM*2 • LDM*2 71 TAS*3 Table 2.3 Instructions Classified by Function 77 Note: 2. Only register ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. 2.8.1 Overview 86 00 00 3. When using the TAS instruction, ... Figure 2.14 Processing States Note * amended Note: * The power-down state also includes a medium- speed mode, module stop mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode. (In the H8S/2695, the subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode are not available.) Figure 2.15 State Transitons 87 2.10.2 STM/LDM Instruction 95 2.10.2 added 2.10.3 Bit Manipulation Instructions 95 2.10.3 added 3.4 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode 105 Table amended Note: 3. Apart from these states, there are also the watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode. (In the H8S/2695, the watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode are not available.) See section ... Port Port 1 M P10 P11 to P13 Table 3.3 Pin Functions in Each Mode 3.5 Address Map in Each Operating Mode Note *3 amended Port A PA4 to PA0 Port B 107 to 110 ode 4 P/A* Mode 5 P/A* Mode 6 P*/A P*/A P/A* P*/A P/A* P/A* P/A* P*/A P*/A P*/A Mode 7 P P P P Figures amended (Before) External area → (After) External address space Figure 3.1 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode in the H8S/2633, H8S/2633R to Figure 3.4 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode in the H8S/2695 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxii of lxii Item Page 5.2.2 Interrupt 127 Priority Registers A t L, O (IPRA to IPRL, IPRO) Revision (See Manual for Details) Note * added DMAC* Refresh timer* Table 5.3 Correspondence between Interrupt Sources and IPR Settings 133 5.3.3 Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table Table title amended Table 5.4 (a) Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities (H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 5.5.5 IRQ Interrupt 154 5.5.5 added 5.5.6 NMI Interrupt 154 Usage Notes 5.5.6 added 7.1.1 Features Note * added 172 • Other features Refresh counter* (refresh timer) can be used as an interval timer ... 7.2.4 Bus Control 183 Register H (BCRH) Note * added to bit table DRAM space* Contiguous DRAM space* Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Only 0 may be written to RMTS2, RMTS1, or RMTS0. 7.2.5 Bus Control Register L (BCRL) 184 Note * amended Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. In writing to OES, DDS, RCTS, the initial value should be written to these bits. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxiii of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 10A.1 Overview 373 SYNCI deleted from table Table 10A.1 Port Functions Port Description Port 7 • 8-bit I/O port Pins Mode 4 P77/TxD3 P76/RxD3 P75/TMO3/SCK3 P74/TMO2/ P73/TMO1/ / P72/TMO0/ / Mode 5 P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ / P70/TMRI01/TMCI01/ / 10A.2.1 Overview 377 Mode 6 8-bit I/O port also functioning as 8-bit timer I/O pins (TMRI01, TMCI01, TMRI23, TMCI23, TMO0, TMO1, TMO2, TMO3), DMAC I/O pins , , , ), bus ( control output pins ( to ), SCI I/O pins (SCK3, RxD3, TxD3), and the manual reset input pin ( ) Mode 7 8-bit I/O port also functioning as 8-bit timer I/O pins (TMRI01, TMCI01, TMRI23, TMCI23, TMO0, TMO1, TMO2, TMO3), DMAC I/O pins ( , , , ), SCI I/O pins (SCK3, RxD3, TxD3), and the manual reset input pin ( ) Description amended ... Port 1 pins also function as PPG output pins, ... (PWM2 and PWM3), external interrupt input pins (IRQ0, IRQ1), and address bus output pins (A23 to A20). ... 10A.2.2 Register Configuration 378 Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR) Description amended Because PPG, TPU, DMAC, and PWM are initialized at a manual reset, pin states are determined by P1DDR and P1DR. 10A.3.2 Register Configuration 393 Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR) Description amended ... in hardware standby mode. The previous state is maintained by a manual reset and in software standby mode. In manual reset SCI and IIC are initialized, so the pin state is determined by the specification of P3DDR and P3DR. 10A.3.3 Pin Functions 394 Description amended The port 3 pins double as SCI I/O input pins (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0, IrTxD, IrRxD, TxD1, RxD1, SCK1, TxD4, RxD4, SCK4), external interrupt input pins (IRQ4, IRQ5), and IIC I/O pins (SCL0, SDA0, SCL1, SDA1). The functions ... Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxiv of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 10A.3.3 Pin Functions 395 Table amended Pin Table 10A.5 Port 3 Pin Functions Selection Method and Pin Functions Switches as follows according to combinations of ICCR0 ICE bit of IIC0, SMR C/ P35/SCK1/ SCK4/SCL0/ bit of SCI1 or SCI4, SCR CKE0 and CKE1 bits, and the P35DDR bit. When used as a SCL0 I/O pin, always be sure to clear the following bits to 0: SMR C/ bits of SCI1 or SCI4, and SCR CKE0 and CKE1 bits. Do not set SCK1 and SCK4 to simultaneous output. The SCL0 output format is NMOS open drain output, enabling direct bus driving. ICE 0 1 CKE1 (SCI1) CKE1 (SCI4) 0 0 C/ (SCI1) C/ (SCI4) 0 0 CKE0 (SCI1) CKE0 (SCI4) 0 0 P35DDR Pin function 0 P35 input pin 1 0, 1, 1 1, 0, 1 0 0 1 1 — 0 0 2 0, 1, 1 * 2 1, 0, 1 * — — 0 0 — — — P35 SCK1/SCK4 SCK1/SCK4 SCK1/SCK4 1 1 1 output pin* output pin* output pin* input pin — SCL0 I/O pin input Notes: 1. Output type is NMOS push-pull. When P35ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output. 2. SCK1 and SCK4 must not be output simultaneously. 10A.5.1 Overview 400 Description amended ... The port 7 is a multipurpose port for the 8-bit timer I/O pins (TMRI01, TMCI01, TMRI23, TMCI23, TMO0, TMO1, TMO2, and TMO3), DMAC I/O pins (DREQ0, TEND0, DREQ1, and TEND1), bus control output pins (CS4 to CS7), SCI I/O pins (SCK3, RxD3, and TxD3), and manual reset input pins (MRES). ... Figure 10A.4 Port 7 Pin Functions Figure amended Port 7 10A.5.3 Pin Functions 403 Port 7 pins Pin functions in modes 4 to 6 P77 / TxD3 P77 (I/O) / TxD3 (output) P76 / RxD3 P76 (I/O) / RxD3 (input) P75 / TMO3 / SCK3 P75 (I/O) / TMO3 (output) / SCK3 (I/O) P74 / TMO2 / MRES P74 (I/O) / TMO2 (output) / MRES (input) P73 / TMO1 / TEND1 / CS7 P73 (input) / TMO1 (output) / TEND1 (output) / CS7 (output) P72 / TMO0 / TEND0 / CS6 P72 (input) / TMO0 (output) / TEND0 (output) / CS6 (output) P71 / TMRI23 / TMCI23 / DREQ1 / CS5 P71 (input) / TMRI23 (input) / TMCI23 (input) / DREQ1 (input) / CS5 (output) P70 / TMRI01 / TMCI01 / DREQ0 / CS4 P70 (input) / TMRI01 (input) / TMCI01 (input) / DREQ0 (input) / CS4 (output) Description amended The port 7 are mulipurpose pins which function as 8-bit timer I/O pins, (TMRI01, TMCI01, TMRI23, TMCI23, TMO0, TMO1, TMO2, and TMO3), DMAC I/O pins (DREQ0, TEND0, DREQ1, and TEND1), bus control output pins (CS4 to CS7), SCI I/O pins (SCK3, RxD3, and TxD3), and manual reset input pins (MRES). ... Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxv of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 10A.5.3 Pin Functions 404 SYNCI deleted from table Table 10A.8 Port 7 Pin Functions Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P72/TMO0/ / Switches as follows according to combinations of operating mode and DMATCR TEE0 bit of DMAC, OS3 to OS0 bits of 8-bit timer TCSR0, and the P72DDR bit. Modes 4 to 6 Operating Mode TEE0 0 OS3 to OS0 P72DDR Pin function 10A.7.2 Register Configuration 409 All 0 0 P72 input pin 1 0 Any is 1 — — — 0 output P72 input pin 1 output pin M ode 7 TMO0 output All 0 1 Any is 1 — 1 — — P72 output pin TMO0 output output Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR) Description amended •Modes 4 to 6 … irrespective of the value of bits PA3DDR to PA0DDR. When pins are not used as address outputs, … 410 Port A Data Register (PADR) Description amended PADR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port A pins (PA3 to PA0). … Port A Register (PORTA) Description amended … Writing of output data for the port A pins (PA3 to PA0) must always be performed on PADA. … 411 Port A Open Drain Control Register (PAODR) Description amended PAODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls whether PMOS is on or off for each port A pin (PA3 to PA0). … Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxvi of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 10A.9.1 Overview 420 Figure amended Figure 10A.12 Port C Pin Functions Port C 10A.13.2 Register Configuration 444 Port C pins Pin functions in modes 4 and 5 PC7/A7/PWM1 A7 (output) PC6/A6/PWM0 A6 (output) PC5/A5 A5 (output) PC4/A4 A4 (output) PC3/A3 A3 (output) PC2/A2 A2 (output) PC1/A1 A1 (output) PC0/A0 A0 (output) Pin functions in mode 6 Pin functions in mode 7 When PCDDR = 1 When PCDDR = 0 PC7 (I/O) / PWM1 (output) A7 (output) PC7 (input) / PWM1 (output) PC6 (I/O) / PWM0 (output) A6 (output) PC6 (input) / PWM0 (output) PC5 (I/O) A5 (output) PC5 (input) PC4 (I/O) A4 (output) PC4 (input) PC3 (I/O) A3 (output) PC3 (input) PC2 (I/O) A2 (output) PC2 (input) PC1 (I/O) A1 (output) PC1 (input) PC0 (I/O) A0 (output) PC0 (input) Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR) Description amended ... In modes 4 and 5, the PGDDR bits are initialized to H'10 ... 10B.3.3 Pin Functions 472 10B.4.1 Overview 475 Description amended The port 3 pins double as SCI I/O input pins (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0, TxD1, RxD1, SCK1, TxD4, RxD4, SCK4), external interrupt input pins (IRQ4, IRQ5). The functions ... Description amended ... Port 4 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins (AN0 to AN7). ... 10B.5.3 Pin Functions Table 10B.8 Port 7 Pin Functions 481 Table amended Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P72/ Switches as follows according to combinations of operating mode and the P72DDR bit. P72DDR Pin function Mode 7 Modes 4 to 6 Operating Mode 0 P72 input pin 1 output pin 0 1 P72 input pin P72 output pin Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxvii of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 10B.7.2 Register Configuration 486 Port A Data Register (PADR) Description amended PADR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port A pins (PA3 to PA0). … Port A Register (PORTA) Description amended … Writing of output data for the port A pins (PA3 to PA0) must always be performed on PADA. … 487 Port A Open Drain Control Register (PAODR) Description amended 00 00 00 PAODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls whether PMOS is on or off for each port A pin (PA3 to PA0). … 10B.9.1 Overview 496 Figure amended Figure 10B.12 Port C Pin Functions Port C 10B.13.2 Register Configuration 519 Port C pins Pin functions in modes 4 and 5 PC7/A7 A7 (output) PC6/A6 A6 (output) PC5/A5 A5 (output) PC4/A4 A4 (output) PC3/A3 A3 (output) PC2/A2 A2 (output) PC1/A1 A1 (output) PC0/A0 A0 (output) Pin functions in mode 6 Pin functions in mode 7 When PCDDR = 1 When PCDDR = 0 PC7 (I/O) A7 (output) PC7 (input) PC6 (I/O) A6 (output) PC6 (input) PC5 (I/O) A5 (output) PC5 (input) PC4 (I/O) A4 (output) PC4 (input) PC3 (I/O) A3 (output) PC3 (input) PC2 (I/O) A2 (output) PC2 (input) PC1 (I/O) A1 (output) PC1 (input) PC0 (I/O) A0 (output) PC0 (input) Port G Data Direction Register (PGDDR) Description amended ... In modes 4 and 5, the PGDDR bits are initialized to H'10 ... Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxviii of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 11.2.1 Timer Control Register (TCR) 534 Bits 4 and 3Clock Edge 1 and 0 (CKEG1, CKEG0) 11.7 Usage Notes 615 Note of bit table amended Note: Internal clock edge selection is valid when the input clock is φ/4 or slower. This setting is ignored if the input clock is φ/1, or when overflow/underflow of another channel is selected. (The clock is counted at the falling edge when φ/1 is selected.) Figure 11.57 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow 15.1.2 Block Diagram Figure amended TCNT H'FFFF M Prohibited TCFV flag 684 Note *2 added Overflow Figure 15.1 (a) Block Diagram of WDT0 WOVI 0 (interrupt request signal) WDTOVF Internal reset signal*1 φ/2*2 φ/64*2 φ/128*2 φ/512*2 φ/2048*2 φ/8192*2 φ/32768*2 φ/131072*2 Interrupt control Clock Reset control Clock select Internal clock sources Notes: 1. The type of internal reset signal depends on a register setting. 2. The φ in the subactive and subsleep mode is φSUB. 15.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) 691 WDT0 Input Clock Select Note *2 added Clock*2 Overflow Period*1 Notes: 1. An overflow period is the time interval ... 2. The φ in the subactive and subsleep mode is φSUB. 16.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode Figure 16.7 Sample Serial Reception Data Format 746 Note * added DMAC* DTC* Note: * The DMAC and DTC are not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxix of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 16.5 Usage Notes 776 Operation in Case of Mode Transmission • Transmission Note * added Operation should be also stopped ... before making a transition from transmission by DTC* transfer to module stop mode, software standby mode, watch mode*, subactive mode*, or subsleep mode* transition. To perform transmission with the DTC* after the relevant mode is cleared, setting TE and TIE to 1 will set the TXI flag and start DTC* transimmsion. Note: * The DTC is not available in the H8S/2695. 779 Figure 16.28 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Reception 17.3.6 Data Transfer Operations 803 Note * added [2] Includes module stop mode, watch mode*, subactive mode*, and subsleep mode*. Note: * In the H8S/2695, the watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode are not available. Serial Data Transmission (Except Block Transfer Mode) Note * added DMAC* DTC* Note: * The DMAC and DTC are not available in the H8S/2695. 807 Serial Data Reception (Except Block Transfer Mode) Note * added DMAC* DTC* Note: * The DMAC and DTC are not available in the H8S/2695. 18.2.2 Slave Address Register (SAR) 825 Description amended Bit 0 Format Select (FS): Used together with the FSX bit in SARX to select the communication format. 826 Bit table amended SAR Bit 0 SARX Bit 0 FS FSX Operating Mode 0 0 I C bus format 2 • 1 1 0 1 • SAR slave address recognized • SARX slave address ignored 2 I C bus format • SAR slave address ignored • SARX slave address recognized Synchronous serial format • Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxx of lxii SAR and SARX slave addresses recognized 2 I C bus format SAR and SARX slave addresses ignored (Initial value) Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 18.2.3 Second Slave Address Register (SARX) 826 Bit 0 Format Select X (FSX): 18.2.5 I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR) 832 18.2.6 I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR) 842 Description amended Used together with the FS bit in SAR to select the communication format. Bit 4 Transmit/Receive Select (TRS) No.4 description deleted from clearing conditions Description amended Bit 0 Acknowledge Bit (ACKB) ... the value set by internal software is read. In addition, writing to this bit overwrites the setting for acknowledge data sent when receiving data, regardless of the TRS value. In this case the value loaded from the receive device is maintained unchanged, so caution is necessary when using instructions that manipulate the bits in this register. 18.3.2 Initial Setting 848 Figure 18.6 Flowchart for IIC Initialization (Example) Figure amended Start initialization Set MSTP4 = 0 (IIC0) MSTP3 = 0 (IIC1) (MSTPCRL) Clear module stop. Set IICE = 1 (STCR) Enable CPU access by IIC control register and data register. Set DDCSWR 18.3.4 Master Receive Operation 853 Clear IIC internal latch Figure amended Master receive mode Figure 18.10 Flowchart for Master Receive Mode (Receiving Multiple Bytes) (WAIT = 1) (Example) Set TRS = 0 (ICCR) Set ACKB = 0 (ICSR) [1] Set to receive mode. Set WAIT = 1 (ICMR) 855 Description amended [1] Clear the TRS bit in ICCR to 0 to switch from transmit mode to receive mode. Clear the ACKB bit in ICSR to 0 (acknowledge data setting). Then set the WAIT bit in ICMR to 1. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxxi of lxii Item Page 18.3.11 Initialization 869 of Internal State Revision (See Manual for Details) Description amended To prevent problems ... the IC state. 1. Execute initialization of the internal state according to the setting of bits CLR3 to CLR0. 2. Clear of bits BC2 to BC0. 3. Execute a stop condition issuance instruction ... 4. R-execute initialization of internal state according to the setting of bits CLR3 to CLR0. 5. Initialize (reset) the IIC registers. 18.4 Usage Notes 871 Table 18.7 Permissible SCL Rise Time (tSr) Values Table amended Time Indication 2 I C Bus Specification φ = (Max.) 5 MHz tcyc IICX Indication 0 7.5tcyc φ= 8 MHz φ= φ= φ= φ= φ= 10 MHz 16 MHz 20 MHz 25 MHz 28 MHz Standard mode 1000 ns 1000 ns 937 ns 750 ns 468 ns 375 ns — — High-speed mode 300 ns 300 ns 300 ns 300 ns 300 ns — — 300 ns Note: When 7.5 tcyc is selected as the transfer rate, the actual transfer rate may be extended if φ exceeds 20 MHz. 878, 879 Notes on Arbitration Lost in Master Mode Description added 19.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) 886 Description and note * amende Bit 7 A/D End Flag (ADF) [Clearing conditions] ... • When the DMAC* or DTC* is activated by an ADI interrupt and ADDR is read Note: * The DMAC and DTC functions are not available in the H8S/2695. 20.1.4 Register Configuration 907 Address of MSTPCRA amended (Before) H'FDF8 → (After) H'FDE8 Table 20.2 D/A Converter Registers 22.1 Overview 917 Description amended The H8S/2633 Group and H8S/2633R have 256-kbytes of on-chip flash memory, or 256 kbytes of on-chip mask ROM, the H8S/2632, H8S/2695 have 192 kbytes of mask ROM, and H8S/2631 has 128 kbytes of mask ROM. The ROM is ... Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxxii of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 22.11.1 Socket Adapter and Memory Map 961 Description replaced Table 22.14 Socket Adapter Models Table 22.14 added Figure of Socket Adapter Pin Correspondence Diagram deleted 22.14 Note on 980 Switching from FZTAT Version to mask ROM Version Table amended Table 22.27 Registers Present in F-ZTAT Version but Absent in mask ROM Version 23A.2.2 LowPower Control Register (LPWRCR) 984 23B.2.2 LowPower Control Register (LPWRCR) 997 24.1 Overview 1006 Table 24.1 LSI Internal States in Each Operating Mode Register Abbreviation Address Flash memory control register 1 FLMCR1 H'FFA8 Flash memory control register 2 FLMCR2 H'FFA9 Erase block register 1 EBR1 H'FFAA Erase block register 2 EBR2 H'FFAB Note amended Bits 1 and 0Frequency Multiplication Factor (STC1, STC0) Note: A system clock frequency multiplied by the multiplication factor (STC1 and STC0) should not exceed the maximum operating frequency defined in section 25, Electrical Characteristics. Current consumption and noise can be reduced by using this function’s PLL ×4 setting and lowering the external clock frequency. Note amended Bits 1 and 0Frequency Multiplication Factor (STC1, STC0) 00 00 Note: A system clock frequency multiplied by the multiplication factor (STC1 and STC0) should not exceed the maximum operating frequency defined in sections 26 and 27, Electrical Characteristics. Current consumption and noise can be reduced by using this function’s PLL ×4 setting and lowering the external clock frequency. The input clock frequency ... Note 6 amended Note: 6. With the exception of ports D and E, an I/O port always returns a value of 1 when read in the H8S/2633 Group and H8S/2633R. Use as an output port is possible. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxxiii of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 24.6.3 Setting Oscillation Stabilization Time after Clearing Software Standby Mode 1024 Description amended 24.10.3 Usage Notes 1033 Using a Crystal Oscillator: Set bits STS2 to STS0 so that the standby time is at least 8 ms (the oscillation stabilization time) (at least 5 ms for the H8S/2633R or H8S/2695). (2) Interrupt sources and subactive mode/watch mode transition Description amended For on-Chip peripheral modules that stop operating in subactive mode (DMAC, DTC, TPU, PCB, IIC), a corresponding interrupt cannot be cleared in subactive mode. ... 24.12 φ Clock Output Disabling Function 1034 Description amended, note * added ... in each processing state. Using the on-chip PLL circuit to lower the oscillator frequency or prohibiting external φ clock output also have the effect of reducing unwanted electromagnetic interference*. Therefore, consideration should be given to these options when deciding on system board settings. Note: * Electromagnetic interference: EMI (Electro Magnetic Interference) 25.3.1 Clock Timing 1045 Table amended Table 25.5 Clock Timing 25.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics Table 25.11 A/D Conversion Characteristics Condition A Condition B 16MHz 1071 25MHz Item Symbol Min Max Min Max Unit Clock fall time tCf — 12 — 5 ns Test Conditions Clock oscillator settling time at reset (crystal) tOSC1 20 — 10 — ms Figure 25.3 Clock oscillator settling time in software standby (crystal) tOSC2 10 — 8 — ms Figure 24.3 External clock output stabilization delay time tDEXT 2 — 2 — ms Figure 25.3 Table condition amended and notes *1, *2 added Condition A: VCC = PLLVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, PVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.6 V to 5.5 V*1, Vref = 3.6 V to AVCC*2, VSS = AVSS = PLLVSS = 0 V, φ = 32.768 kHz, 2 to 16 MHz, ... Condition B: ... φ = 32.768 kHz, 2 to 25 MHz, ... Notes: 1. AVCC = 3.3 V to 5.5 V if the A/D and D/A converters are not used (used as I/O ports). 2. Vref = 3.3 V to AVCC if the A/D and D/A converters are not used (used as I/O ports). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxxiv of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) 25.5 D/A Conversion Characteristics 1072 Table condition amended and notes *1, *2 added Condition A: VCC = PLLVCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, PVCC = 3.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 3.6 V to 5.5 V*1, Vref = 3.6 V to AVCC*2, VSS = AVSS = PLLVSS = 0 V, φ = 32.768 kHz, 2 to 16 MHz, ... Table 25.12 D/A Conversion Characteristics Condition B: ... φ = 32.768 kHz, 2 to 25 MHz, ... Notes: 1. AVCC = 3.3 V to 5.5 V if the A/D and D/A converters are not used (used as I/O ports). 2. Vref = 3.3 V to AVCC if the A/D and D/A converters are not used (used as I/O ports). A.1 Instruction List 1137 (1) Data Transfer Instructions Table A.1 Instruction Set Note *4 added LDM*4 STM*4 1156 Notes *4, [10], [11] added Notes: 4. Only register ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. [10] MAC instruction results are indicated in the flags when the STMAC instruction is executed. [11] A maximum of three additional states are required for execution of one of these instructions within three states after execution of a MAC instruction. For example, if there is a one-state instruction (such as NOP) between a MAC instruction and one of these instructions, that instruction will be two states longer. A.2 Instruction Codes 1165 Note *3 added LDM*3 Table A.2 Instruction Codes 1170 STM*3 1171 Note: 3. Only register ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. 1166 Table amended (Before) MOV.L #xx:32,Rd → (After) MOV.L #xx:32,ERd A.4 Number of 1184 States Required for Instruction 1188 Execution Table A.5 Number 1189 of Cycles in Instruction Execution Note *5 added 5 LDM* STM*5 Note: 5. Only register ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxxv of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) A.5 Bus States during Instruction Execution 1197 Note *9 added LDM.L @SP+, (ERn-ERn+1)*9 LDM.L @SP+, (ERn-ERn+2)*9 1202 LDM.L @SP+, (ERn-ERn+3)*9 STM.L (ERn-ERn+1), @-SP*9 STM.L (ERn-ERn+2), @-SP *9 STM.L (ERn-ERn+3), @-SP *9 A.6 Condition Code Modification Table A.7 Condition Code Modification 1203 Note: 9. Only register ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. 1206 Note *2 added LDM*2 1208 STM*2 TAS*2 1209 Notes: 1. This instruction should be used with ... 2. Only register ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. B.1A Addresses (H8S/2633 Group, H8S/2633F, H8S/2633R) 1210 Table amended Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 H'FDB0 IrCR IrE IrCKS2 IrCKS1 IrCKS0 — — — — SCI0, IrDA H'FDB4 SCRX — IICX1 IICX0 IICE FLSHE — — — IIC 8 H'FDB5 DDCSWR — — — — CLR3 CLR2 CLR1 CLR0 IIC 8 H'FDB8 DADRAH0/ DA13/ DACR0 TEST DA12/ PWME DA11/ — DA10/ — DA9/ OEB DA8/ OEA DA7/ OS DA6/ CKS PWM0 8 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxxvi of lxii Module Name Data Bus Width (bits) Register Address Name 8 Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) B.2 Functions 1228 SCRX H'FDB4 IIC Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — IICX1 IICX0 IICE FLSHE — — — 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Flash memory control register enable 0 Excludes addresses H'FFFFA8 to H'FFFFAC as flash control registers. (Initial value) 1 Selects addresses H'FFFFA8 to H'FFFFAC as flash control registers. I2C master enable 0 1 2 Disables CPU access of I C bus interface data register and control register. 2 Enables CPU access of I C bus interface data register and control register. I2C transfer rate select 1, 0 Selects the transfer rate in master mode in conjunction with CKS2 to CKS0 in ICMR. See the section on the I2C bus mode register (ICMR) for details. 1246 MDCA H'FDE7 System Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — — — MDS2 MDS1 MDS0 1 0 0 0 0 —* —* —* R/W — — — — R R R Mode select 2 to 0 * Input level determined by mode pins. Note: * Determined by pins MD2 to MD0. MSTPCRA H'FDE8 System Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTPA7 MSTPA6 MSTPA5 MSTPA4 MSTPA3 MSTPA2 MSTPA1 MSTPA0 Initial value : R/W : 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Module stop 0 Module stop mode is cleared. 1 Module stop mode is set. MSTPCRB H'FDE9 System Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTPB7 MSTPB6 MSTPB5 MSTPB4 MSTPB3 MSTPB2 MSTPB1 MSTPB0 Initial value : R/W : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Module stop 0 Module stop mode canceled. 1 Module stop mode enabled. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxxvii of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) B.2 Functions 1247 MSTPCRC H'FDEA System Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTPC7 MSTPC6 MSTPC5 MSTPC4 MSTPC3 MSTPC2 MSTPC1 MSTPC0 Initial value : R/W : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Module stop 1249 0 Module stop mode canceled. 1 Module stop mode enabled. LPWRCR H'FDEC System Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 DTON*1 LSON*1 NESEL*1 SUBSTP*1 RFCUT*1 Initial value : R/W : 2 1 0 — STC1 STC0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Frequency multiplier STC1 0 1 STC0 0 1 0 1 Description × 1 (initial value) ×2 ×4 Do not set. Note: A system clock frequency multiplied by the multiplication factor (STC1 and STC0) should not exceed the maximum operating frequency defined in sections 25, 26, and 27, Electrical Characteristics. Current consumption and noise can be reduced by using this function’s PLL ×4 setting and lowering the external clock frequency. 1279 Description amended TCNT3Timer Counter 3 H'FE86 TPU3 (Up Counter) TCNT4Timer Counter 4 H'FE96 TPU4 (Up/Down Counter*) TCNT5Timer Counter 5 H'FEA6 TPU5 (Up/Down Counter*) TCNT0Timer Counter 0 H'FF16 TPU0 (Up Counter) TCNT1Timer Counter 1 H'FF26 TPU1 (Up/Down Counter*) TCNT2Timer Counter 2 H'FF36 TPU2 (Up/Down Counter*) 1286 Note * added Refresh timer* Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxxviii of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) C.4 Port 7 Block Diagram 1341 Figure amended RDR7 8-bit timer Figure C.4 (b) Port 7 Block Diagram (Pin P72) C.12 Port G Block Diagram Timer output TMO0 Timer output enable RPOR7 1366 Figure amended OE output OE output enable Figure C.12 (b) Port G Block Diagram (Pin PG1) Bus controller Chip select RDRG RPORG IRQ interrupt input C.16 Port 7 Block Diagram 1384 Figure title amended Figure of Port 7 Block Diagram (Pin P72) deleted Figure of Port 7 Block Diagram (Pin P73) deleted 1395 Figure title amended Figure of Port C Block Diagram (Pins PC6 and PC7) deleted Figure C.16 (a) Port 7 Block Diagram (Pins P70 to P73) C.20 Port C Block Diagram Figure C.20 Port C Block Diagram (Pins PC0 to PC7) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xxxix of lxii Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details) C.24 Port G Block Diagram 1407 Figure amended Bus controller Figure C.24 (b) Port G Block Diagram (Pin PG1) Chip select RDRG RPORG IRQ interrupt input Appendix G Package Dimensions 1420 Figure G.1 replaced 1421 Figure G.2 replaced Figure G.1 TFP-120 Package Dimensions Figure G.2 FP-128B Package Dimensions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xl of lxii Contents Section 1 Overview............................................................................................................. 1.1 1.2 1.3 Overview........................................................................................................................... Internal Block Diagram..................................................................................................... Pin Description ................................................................................................................. 1.3.1 Pin Arrangement.................................................................................................. 1.3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode ............................................................... 1.3.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 1 1 7 11 11 16 31 Section 2 CPU ...................................................................................................................... 49 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 Overview........................................................................................................................... 2.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 2.1.2 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU .................................. 2.1.3 Differences from H8/300 CPU ............................................................................ 2.1.4 Differences from H8/300H CPU ......................................................................... CPU Operating Modes...................................................................................................... Address Space................................................................................................................... Register Configuration...................................................................................................... 2.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 2.4.2 General Registers................................................................................................. 2.4.3 Control Registers ................................................................................................. 2.4.4 Initial Register Values ......................................................................................... Data Formats..................................................................................................................... 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats............................................................................ 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats......................................................................................... Instruction Set................................................................................................................... 2.6.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes..................................................................... 2.6.3 Table of Instructions Classified by Function ...................................................... 2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats .................................................................................... Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation..................................................... 2.7.1 Addressing Mode................................................................................................. 2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation ............................................................................. Processing States .............................................................................................................. 2.8.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 2.8.2 Reset State ........................................................................................................... 2.8.3 Exception-Handling State .................................................................................... 2.8.4 Program Execution State ..................................................................................... 49 49 50 51 52 52 57 58 58 59 60 62 63 63 65 66 66 67 69 77 79 79 82 86 86 87 88 90 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xli of lxii 2.8.5 Bus-Released State .............................................................................................. 2.8.6 Power-Down State ............................................................................................... 2.9 Basic Timing..................................................................................................................... 2.9.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 2.9.2 On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM)......................................................................... 2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing ...................................................... 2.9.4 External Address Space Access Timing .............................................................. 2.10 Usage Note ....................................................................................................................... 2.10.1 TAS Instruction ................................................................................................... 2.10.2 STM/LDM Instruction......................................................................................... 2.10.3 Usage Notes on Bit Manipulation Instructions .................................................... 91 91 92 92 92 93 95 95 95 95 95 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes .................................................................................. 97 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 Overview........................................................................................................................... 3.1.1 Operating Mode Selection ................................................................................... 3.1.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) ......................................................................... 3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR)...................................................................... 3.2.3 Pin Function Control Register (PFCR) ................................................................ Operating Mode Descriptions ........................................................................................... 3.3.1 Mode 4................................................................................................................. 3.3.2 Mode 5................................................................................................................. 3.3.3 Mode 6................................................................................................................. 3.3.4 Mode 7................................................................................................................. Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode ............................................................................ Address Map in Each Operating Mode............................................................................. 97 97 98 98 98 99 101 104 104 104 104 105 105 106 Section 4 Exception Handling ......................................................................................... 111 4.1 4.2 4.3 Overview........................................................................................................................... 4.1.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority............................................................... 4.1.2 Exception Handling Operation ............................................................................ 4.1.3 Exception Vector Table ....................................................................................... Reset ................................................................................................................................. 4.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 4.2.2 Types of Reset ..................................................................................................... 4.2.3 Reset Sequence .................................................................................................... 4.2.4 Interrupts after Reset............................................................................................ 4.2.5 State of On-Chip Supporting Modules after Reset Release ................................. Traces................................................................................................................................ Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xlii of lxii 111 111 112 112 114 114 114 115 117 118 118 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 Interrupts........................................................................................................................... Trap Instruction ................................................................................................................ Stack Status after Exception Handling.............................................................................. Notes on Use of the Stack................................................................................................. 119 120 121 122 Section 5 Interrupt Controller .......................................................................................... 123 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 Overview........................................................................................................................... 5.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 5.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 5.1.3 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................ 5.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 5.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR)...................................................................... 5.2.2 Interrupt Priority Registers A to L, O (IPRA to IPRL, IPRO)............................. 5.2.3 IRQ Enable Register (IER) .................................................................................. 5.2.4 IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL)..................................... 5.2.5 IRQ Status Register (ISR).................................................................................... Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 5.3.1 External Interrupts ............................................................................................... 5.3.2 Internal Interrupts ................................................................................................ 5.3.3 Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table......................................................... Interrupt Operation ........................................................................................................... 5.4.1 Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation................................................ 5.4.2 Interrupt Control Mode 0..................................................................................... 5.4.3 Interrupt Control Mode 2..................................................................................... 5.4.4 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence .............................................................. 5.4.5 Interrupt Response Times .................................................................................... Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 5.5.1 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling..................................... 5.5.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts...................................................................... 5.5.3 Times when Interrupts are Disabled .................................................................... 5.5.4 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction ......................................... 5.5.5 IRQ Interrupt ....................................................................................................... 5.5.6 NMI Interrupt Usage Notes ................................................................................. DTC and DMAC Activation by Interrupt (DMAC and DTC functions are not available in the H8S/2695)...................................... 5.6.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 5.6.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 5.6.3 Operation (DMAC and DTC functions are not available in the H8S/2695) ........ 123 123 124 125 125 126 126 127 128 129 130 131 131 132 132 142 142 146 148 150 151 152 152 153 153 154 154 154 155 155 156 157 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xliii of lxii Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) .................................... 159 6.1 6.2 6.3 Overview........................................................................................................................... 6.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 6.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 6.1.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 6.2.1 Break Address Register A (BARA) ..................................................................... 6.2.2 Break Address Register B (BARB) ..................................................................... 6.2.3 Break Control Register A (BCRA) ...................................................................... 6.2.4 Break Control Register B (BCRB) ...................................................................... 6.2.5 Module Stop Control Register C (MSTPCRC) ................................................... Operation .......................................................................................................................... 6.3.1 PC Break Interrupt Due to Instruction Fetch ....................................................... 6.3.2 PC Break Interrupt Due to Data Access .............................................................. 6.3.3 Notes on PC Break Interrupt Handling................................................................ 6.3.4 Operation in Transitions to Power-Down Modes ................................................ 6.3.5 PC Break Operation in Continuous Data Transfer............................................... 6.3.6 When Instruction Execution is Delayed by One State ......................................... 6.3.7 Additional Notes.................................................................................................. 159 159 160 161 161 161 161 162 164 164 165 165 166 166 167 168 169 170 Section 7 Bus Controller ................................................................................................... 171 7.1 7.2 7.3 Overview........................................................................................................................... 7.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 7.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 7.1.3 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................ 7.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 7.2.1 Bus Width Control Register (ABWCR)............................................................... 7.2.2 Access State Control Register (ASTCR) ............................................................. 7.2.3 Wait Control Registers H and L (WCRH, WCRL).............................................. 7.2.4 Bus Control Register H (BCRH) ......................................................................... 7.2.5 Bus Control Register L (BCRL) .......................................................................... 7.2.6 Pin Function Control Register (PFCR) ................................................................ 7.2.7 Memory Control Register (MCR)........................................................................ 7.2.8 DRAM Control Register (DRAMCR) ................................................................. 7.2.9 Refresh Timer Counter (RTCNT)........................................................................ 7.2.10 Refresh Time Constant Register (RTCOR) ......................................................... Overview of Bus Control.................................................................................................. 7.3.1 Area Partitioning.................................................................................................. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xliv of lxii 171 171 173 174 175 176 176 177 178 181 184 186 189 191 193 193 194 194 7.3.2 Bus Specifications ............................................................................................... 7.3.3 Memory Interfaces............................................................................................... 7.3.4 Interface Specifications for Each Area ................................................................ 7.3.5 Chip Select Signals .............................................................................................. 7.4 Basic Bus Interface ........................................................................................................... 7.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 7.4.2 Data Size and Data Alignment............................................................................. 7.4.3 Valid Strobes ....................................................................................................... 7.4.4 Basic Timing........................................................................................................ 7.4.5 Wait Control ........................................................................................................ 7.5 DRAM Interface (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) .................................. 7.5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 7.5.2 Setting up DRAM Space...................................................................................... 7.5.3 Address Multiplexing .......................................................................................... 7.5.4 Data Bus .............................................................................................................. 7.5.5 DRAM Interface Pins .......................................................................................... 7.5.6 Basic Timing........................................................................................................ 7.5.7 Precharge State Control ....................................................................................... 7.5.8 Wait Control ........................................................................................................ 7.5.9 Byte Access Control ............................................................................................ 7.5.10 Burst Operation.................................................................................................... 7.5.11 Refresh Control.................................................................................................... 7.6 DMAC Single Address Mode and DRAM Interface (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) .............................................................. 7.6.1 DDS=1 ................................................................................................................. 7.6.2 DDS=0 ................................................................................................................. 7.7 Burst ROM Interface ........................................................................................................ 7.7.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 7.7.2 Basic Timing........................................................................................................ 7.7.3 Wait Control ........................................................................................................ 7.8 Idle Cycle.......................................................................................................................... 7.8.1 Operation ............................................................................................................. 7.8.2 Pin States in Idle Cycle........................................................................................ 7.9 Write Data Buffer Function .............................................................................................. 7.10 Bus Release....................................................................................................................... 7.10.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 7.10.2 Operation ............................................................................................................. 7.10.3 Pin States in External Bus Released State ........................................................... 7.10.4 Transition Timing ................................................................................................ 7.10.5 Notes.................................................................................................................... 195 196 197 198 199 199 199 201 202 210 212 212 212 213 213 214 214 216 217 219 221 225 229 229 230 231 231 231 233 234 234 238 239 240 240 240 241 242 243 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xlv of lxii 7.11 Bus Arbitration (DMAC and DTC functions are not available in the H8S/2695) ........... 7.11.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 7.11.2 Operation ............................................................................................................. 7.11.3 Bus Transfer Timing............................................................................................ 7.12 Resets and the Bus Controller........................................................................................... 244 244 244 245 245 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) .................................... 247 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 Overview........................................................................................................................... 8.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 8.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 8.1.3 Overview of Functions ........................................................................................ 8.1.4 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................ 8.1.5 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions (1) (Short Address Mode).............................................................. 8.2.1 Memory Address Registers (MAR) ..................................................................... 8.2.2 I/O Address Register (IOAR) .............................................................................. 8.2.3 Execute Transfer Count Register (ETCR) ........................................................... 8.2.4 DMA Control Register (DMACR) ...................................................................... 8.2.5 DMA Band Control Register (DMABCR) .......................................................... Register Descriptions (2) (Full Address Mode)................................................................ 8.3.1 Memory Address Register (MAR)....................................................................... 8.3.2 I/O Address Register (IOAR) .............................................................................. 8.3.3 Execute Transfer Count Register (ETCR) ........................................................... 8.3.4 DMA Control Register (DMACR) ...................................................................... 8.3.5 DMA Band Control Register (DMABCR) .......................................................... Register Descriptions (3) .................................................................................................. 8.4.1 DMA Write Enable Register (DMAWER).......................................................... 8.4.2 DMA Terminal Control Register (DMATCR) .................................................... 8.4.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR).......................................................... Operation .......................................................................................................................... 8.5.1 Transfer Modes.................................................................................................... 8.5.2 Sequential Mode .................................................................................................. 8.5.3 Idle Mode............................................................................................................. 8.5.4 Repeat Mode........................................................................................................ 8.5.5 Single Address Mode........................................................................................... 8.5.6 Normal Mode....................................................................................................... 8.5.7 Block Transfer Mode........................................................................................... 8.5.8 DMAC Activation Sources.................................................................................. 8.5.9 Basic DMAC Bus Cycles .................................................................................... Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xlvi of lxii 247 247 248 249 251 252 253 254 255 256 258 262 268 268 268 269 271 275 280 280 283 284 285 285 287 290 293 297 300 303 309 312 8.5.10 8.5.11 8.5.12 8.5.13 8.5.14 8.6 8.7 DMAC Bus Cycles (Dual Address Mode)........................................................... DMAC Bus Cycles (Single Address Mode) ........................................................ Write Data Buffer Function ................................................................................. DMAC Multi-Channel Operation........................................................................ Relation between External Bus Requests, Refresh Cycles, the DTC, and the DMAC..................................................................................................... 8.5.15 NMI Interrupts and DMAC ................................................................................. 8.5.16 Forced Termination of DMAC Operation ........................................................... 8.5.17 Clearing Full Address Mode................................................................................ Interrupts........................................................................................................................... Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 313 321 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) .................................... 339 9.1 9.2 9.3 Overview........................................................................................................................... 9.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 9.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 9.1.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 9.2.1 DTC Mode Register A (MRA) ............................................................................ 9.2.2 DTC Mode Register B (MRB)............................................................................. 9.2.3 DTC Source Address Register (SAR).................................................................. 9.2.4 DTC Destination Address Register (DAR).......................................................... 9.2.5 DTC Transfer Count Register A (CRA) .............................................................. 9.2.6 DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB)............................................................... 9.2.7 DTC Enable Registers (DTCER)......................................................................... 9.2.8 DTC Vector Register (DTVECR)........................................................................ 9.2.9 Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) ................................................... Operation .......................................................................................................................... 9.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 9.3.2 Activation Sources............................................................................................... 9.3.3 DTC Vector Table ............................................................................................... 9.3.4 Location of Register Information in Address Space ............................................ 9.3.5 Normal Mode....................................................................................................... 9.3.6 Repeat Mode........................................................................................................ 9.3.7 Block Transfer Mode........................................................................................... 9.3.8 Chain Transfer ..................................................................................................... 9.3.9 Operation Timing................................................................................................. 9.3.10 Number of DTC Execution States ....................................................................... 9.3.11 Procedures for Using DTC .................................................................................. 339 339 340 341 342 342 343 344 345 345 346 346 347 348 349 349 351 353 357 358 359 360 362 363 364 366 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xlvii of lxii 9.4 9.5 9.3.12 Examples of Use of the DTC............................................................................... 367 Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 370 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 370 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) ............................... 371 10A.1 10A.2 10A.3 10A.4 10A.5 10A.6 10A.7 10A.8 10A.9 Overview....................................................................................................................... Port 1 ............................................................................................................................. 10A.2.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10A.2.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10A.2.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ Port 3 ............................................................................................................................. 10A.3.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10A.3.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10A.3.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ Port 4 ............................................................................................................................. 10A.4.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10A.4.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10A.4.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ Port 7 ............................................................................................................................. 10A.5.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10A.5.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10A.5.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ Port 9 ............................................................................................................................. 10A.6.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10A.6.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10A.6.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ Port A ............................................................................................................................ 10A.7.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10A.7.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10A.7.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ 10A.7.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function ....................................................................... Port B ............................................................................................................................ 10A.8.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10A.8.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10A.8.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ 10A.8.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function ....................................................................... Port C ............................................................................................................................ 10A.9.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10A.9.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xlviii of lxii 371 377 377 378 379 392 392 392 394 398 398 399 399 400 400 401 403 406 406 407 407 408 408 409 412 413 414 414 415 418 419 420 420 421 10A.10 10A.11 10A.12 10A.13 10A.9.3 Pin Functions for Each Mode ....................................................................... 10A.9.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function ....................................................................... Port D ............................................................................................................................ 10A.10.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10A.10.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10A.10.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ 10A.10.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function ....................................................................... Port E............................................................................................................................. 10A.11.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10A.11.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10A.11.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ 10A.11.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function ....................................................................... Port F............................................................................................................................. 10A.12.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10A.12.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10A.12.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ Port G ............................................................................................................................ 10A.13.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10A.13.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10A.13.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ 424 426 427 427 428 430 431 432 432 433 435 436 437 437 438 440 443 443 444 446 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) ................................................................................. 449 10B.1 10B.2 10B.3 10B.4 10B.5 10B.6 Overview....................................................................................................................... Port 1 ............................................................................................................................. 10B.2.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10B.2.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10B.2.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ Port 3 ............................................................................................................................. 10B.3.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10B.3.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10B.3.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ Port 4 ............................................................................................................................. 10B.4.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10B.4.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10B.4.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ Port 7 ............................................................................................................................. 10B.5.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10B.5.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10B.5.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ Port 9 ............................................................................................................................. 449 454 454 455 457 469 469 469 472 475 475 476 476 477 477 478 479 482 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page xlix of lxii 10B.7 10B.8 10B.9 10B.10 10B.11 10B.12 10B.13 10B.6.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10B.6.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10B.6.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ Port A ............................................................................................................................ 10B.7.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10B.7.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10B.7.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ 10B.7.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function ....................................................................... Port B ............................................................................................................................ 10B.8.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10B.8.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10B.8.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ 10B.8.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function ....................................................................... Port C ............................................................................................................................ 10B.9.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10B.9.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10B.9.3 Pin Functions for Each Mode ....................................................................... 10B.9.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function ....................................................................... Port D ............................................................................................................................ 10B.10.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10B.10.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10B.10.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ 10B.10.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function ....................................................................... Port E............................................................................................................................. 10B.11.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10B.11.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10B.11.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ 10B.11.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function ....................................................................... Port F............................................................................................................................. 10B.12.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10B.12.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10B.12.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ Port G ............................................................................................................................ 10B.13.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10B.13.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 10B.13.3 Pin Functions ................................................................................................ 482 483 483 484 484 485 488 489 490 490 491 494 495 496 496 497 500 502 503 503 504 506 507 508 508 509 511 512 513 513 514 516 518 518 519 521 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU).................................................................. 523 11.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 523 11.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 523 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page l of lxii 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 11.1.3 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................ 11.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 11.2.1 Timer Control Register (TCR)............................................................................. 11.2.2 Timer Mode Register (TMDR)............................................................................ 11.2.3 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR)..................................................................... 11.2.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER).............................................................. 11.2.5 Timer Status Register (TSR)................................................................................ 11.2.6 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................ 11.2.7 Timer General Register (TGR) ............................................................................ 11.2.8 Timer Start Register (TSTR) ............................................................................... 11.2.9 Timer Synchro Register (TSYR) ......................................................................... 11.2.10 Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) ................................................... Interface to Bus Master..................................................................................................... 11.3.1 16-Bit Registers ................................................................................................... 11.3.2 8-Bit Registers ..................................................................................................... Operation .......................................................................................................................... 11.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 11.4.2 Basic Functions.................................................................................................... 11.4.3 Synchronous Operation ....................................................................................... 11.4.4 Buffer Operation.................................................................................................. 11.4.5 Cascaded Operation ............................................................................................. 11.4.6 PWM Modes........................................................................................................ 11.4.7 Phase Counting Mode.......................................................................................... Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 11.5.1 Interrupt Sources and Priorities ........................................................................... 11.5.2 DTC/DMAC Activation (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) ......... 11.5.3 A/D Converter Activation.................................................................................... Operation Timing.............................................................................................................. 11.6.1 Input/Output Timing............................................................................................ 11.6.2 Interrupt Signal Timing ....................................................................................... Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 527 528 530 532 532 537 539 552 555 559 560 561 562 563 564 564 564 566 566 567 573 576 580 582 588 595 595 597 597 598 598 602 606 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) .................................. 617 12.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 12.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 12.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 12.1.3 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................ 617 617 618 619 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page li of lxii 12.1.4 Registers .............................................................................................................. 12.2 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 12.2.1 Next Data Enable Registers H and L (NDERH, NDERL)................................... 12.2.2 Output Data Registers H and L (PODRH, PODRL)............................................ 12.2.3 Next Data Registers H and L (NDRH, NDRL).................................................... 12.2.4 Notes on NDR Access ......................................................................................... 12.2.5 PPG Output Control Register (PCR) ................................................................... 12.2.6 PPG Output Mode Register (PMR) ..................................................................... 12.2.7 Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR)............................................................. 12.2.8 Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) ................................................... 12.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 12.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 12.3.2 Output Timing ..................................................................................................... 12.3.3 Normal Pulse Output ........................................................................................... 12.3.4 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output ........................................................................... 12.3.5 Inverted Pulse Output .......................................................................................... 12.3.6 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture............................................................ 12.4 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 620 621 621 622 623 623 625 627 630 630 631 631 632 633 635 638 639 639 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) .................................. 641 13.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 13.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 13.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 13.1.3 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................ 13.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 13.2 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 13.2.1 Timer Counters 0 to 3 (TCNT0 to TCNT3)......................................................... 13.2.2 Time Constant Registers A0 to A3 (TCORA0 to TCORA3)............................... 13.2.3 Time Constant Registers B0 to B3 (TCORB0 to TCORB3) ............................... 13.2.4 Timer Control Registers 0 to 3 (TCR0 to TCR3) ................................................ 13.2.5 Timer Control/Status Registers 0 to 3 (TCSR0 to TCSR3) ................................. 13.2.6 Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) ................................................... 13.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 13.3.1 TCNT Incrementation Timing ............................................................................. 13.3.2 Compare Match Timing....................................................................................... 13.3.3 Timing of External RESET on TCNT ................................................................. 13.3.4 Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting ............................................................. 13.3.5 Operation with Cascaded Connection.................................................................. 13.4 Interrupts........................................................................................................................... Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page lii of lxii 641 641 642 643 644 645 645 645 646 646 649 652 653 653 654 656 656 657 658 13.4.1 Interrupt Sources and DTC Activation (The H8S/2695 does not have a DTC function or an 8-bit timer)........................ 13.4.2 A/D Converter Activation.................................................................................... 13.5 Sample Application........................................................................................................... 13.6 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 13.6.1 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear........................................................ 13.6.2 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment ................................................ 13.6.3 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare Match ...................................... 13.6.4 Contention between Compare Matches A and B ................................................. 13.6.5 Switching of Internal Clocks and TCNT Operation ........................................... 13.6.6 Interrupts and Module Stop Mode ....................................................................... 658 658 659 660 660 661 662 663 663 665 Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) .................................. 667 14.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 14.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 14.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 14.1.3 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................ 14.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 14.2 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 14.2.1 PWM D/A Counter (DACNT)............................................................................. 14.2.2 PWM D/A Data Registers A and B (DADRA and DADRB) .............................. 14.2.3 PWM D/A Control Register (DACR).................................................................. 14.2.4 Module Stop Control Register B (MSTPCRB) ................................................... 14.3 Bus Master Interface......................................................................................................... 14.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 667 667 668 669 669 670 670 671 672 674 675 679 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) ............. 15.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 15.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 15.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 15.1.3 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................ 15.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 15.2 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 15.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT)........................................................................................ 15.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR)................................................................ 15.2.3 Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR)............................................................ 15.2.4 Pin Function Control Register (PFCR) ................................................................ 15.2.5 Notes on Register Access .................................................................................... 15.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 683 683 683 684 686 686 687 687 688 693 694 695 697 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page liii of lxii 15.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation ................................................................................. 15.3.2 Interval Timer Operation ..................................................................................... 15.3.3 Timing of Setting Overflow Flag (OVF) ............................................................. 15.3.4 Timing of Setting of Watchdog Timer Overflow Flag (WOVF) ......................... 15.4 Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 15.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 15.5.1 Contention between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment..................... 15.5.2 Changing Value of PSS and CKS2 to CKS0 ....................................................... 15.5.3 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode................ 15.5.4 System Reset by Signal...................................................................... 15.5.5 Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode............................................................. 15.5.6 OVF Flag Clearing in Interval Timer Mode ........................................................ WDTOVF 697 699 699 700 701 701 701 702 702 702 702 703 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) (The H8S/2695 is not equipped with an IrDA function) .................... 705 16.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 16.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 16.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 16.1.3 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................ 16.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 16.2 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 16.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) .............................................................................. 16.2.2 Receive Data Register (RDR).............................................................................. 16.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR)............................................................................. 16.2.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR) ............................................................................ 16.2.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) ............................................................................... 16.2.6 Serial Control Register (SCR) ............................................................................. 16.2.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................ 16.2.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ...................................................................................... 16.2.9 Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR).................................................................... 16.2.10 IrDA Control Register (IrCR).............................................................................. 16.2.11 Module Stop Control Registers B and C (MSTPCRB, MSTPCRC) ................... 16.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 16.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 16.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode ....................................................................... 16.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication Function ........................................................... 16.3.4 Operation in Clocked Synchronous Mode........................................................... 16.3.5 IrDA Operation.................................................................................................... 16.4 SCI Interrupts.................................................................................................................... 16.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page liv of lxii 705 705 707 708 709 711 711 711 712 712 713 716 720 724 732 734 735 737 737 739 750 758 767 770 772 Section 17 Smart Card Interface ..................................................................................... 17.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 17.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 17.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 17.1.3 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................ 17.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 17.2 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 17.2.1 Smart Card Mode Register (SCMR).................................................................... 17.2.2 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................ 17.2.3 Serial Mode Register (SMR) ............................................................................... 17.2.4 Serial Control Register (SCR) ............................................................................. 17.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 17.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 17.3.2 Pin Connections................................................................................................... 17.3.3 Data Format ......................................................................................................... 17.3.4 Register Settings .................................................................................................. 17.3.5 Clock.................................................................................................................... 17.3.6 Data Transfer Operations..................................................................................... 17.3.7 Operation in GSM Mode ..................................................................................... 17.3.8 Operation in Block Transfer Mode ...................................................................... 17.4 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 783 783 783 784 785 786 787 787 789 791 793 794 794 795 796 798 800 802 810 811 812 Section 18 I2C Bus Interface [Option] (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) .................................. 817 18.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 18.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 18.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 18.1.3 Input/Output Pins................................................................................................. 18.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 18.2 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 18.2.1 I2C Bus Data Register (ICDR)............................................................................. 18.2.2 Slave Address Register (SAR)............................................................................. 18.2.3 Second Slave Address Register (SARX) ............................................................. 18.2.4 I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR) .......................................................................... 18.2.5 I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR) ........................................................................ 18.2.6 I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR) ........................................................................... 18.2.7 Serial Control Register X (SCRX)....................................................................... 18.2.8 DDC Switch Register (DDCSWR)...................................................................... 18.2.9 Module Stop Control Register B (MSTPCRB) ................................................... 18.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 817 817 818 820 821 822 822 825 826 827 829 838 843 844 845 846 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page lv of lxii 18.3.1 I2C Bus Data Format............................................................................................ 18.3.2 Initial Setting ....................................................................................................... 18.3.3 Master Transmit Operation.................................................................................. 18.3.4 Master Receive Operation ................................................................................... 18.3.5 Slave Receive Operation...................................................................................... 18.3.6 Slave Transmit Operation .................................................................................... 18.3.7 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control ................................................................ 18.3.8 Operation Using the DTC .................................................................................... 18.3.9 Noise Canceler..................................................................................................... 18.3.10 Sample Flowcharts............................................................................................... 18.3.11 Initialization of Internal State .............................................................................. 18.4 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 846 848 848 852 858 861 863 864 865 865 868 869 Section 19 A/D Converter................................................................................................. 881 19.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 19.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 19.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 19.1.3 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................ 19.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 19.2 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 19.2.1 A/D Data Registers A to D (ADDRA to ADDRD) ............................................. 19.2.2 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ............................................................... 19.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ............................................................................ 19.2.4 Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) ................................................... 19.3 Interface to Bus Master..................................................................................................... 19.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 19.4.1 Single Mode (SCAN = 0) .................................................................................... 19.4.2 Scan Mode (SCAN = 1)....................................................................................... 19.4.3 Input Sampling and A/D Conversion Time ......................................................... 19.4.4 External Trigger Input Timing............................................................................. 19.5 Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 19.6 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 881 881 882 883 884 885 885 886 889 890 891 892 892 894 896 897 898 899 Section 20 D/A Converter (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) .................................. 905 20.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 20.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 20.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 20.1.3 Input and Output Pins .......................................................................................... 20.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page lvi of lxii 905 905 906 907 907 20.2 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 20.2.1 D/A Data Registers 0 to 3 (DADR0 to DADR3)................................................. 20.2.2 D/A Control Register 01 and 23 (DACR01 and DACR23) ................................. 20.2.3 Module Stop Control Register A and C (MSTPCRA and MSTPCRC)............... 20.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 908 908 908 910 912 Section 21 RAM .................................................................................................................. 21.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 21.1.1 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 21.1.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 21.2 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 21.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR)...................................................................... 21.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 21.4 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 913 913 913 914 914 914 915 915 Section 22 ROM .................................................................................................................. 22.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 22.1.1 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 22.1.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 22.2 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 22.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) ......................................................................... 22.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 22.4 Flash Memory Overview .................................................................................................. 22.4.1 Features................................................................................................................ 22.4.2 Overview.............................................................................................................. 22.4.3 Flash Memory Operating Modes ......................................................................... 22.4.4 On-Board Programming Modes........................................................................... 22.4.5 Flash Memory Emulation in RAM ...................................................................... 22.4.6 Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode ................................. 22.4.7 Block Configuration ............................................................................................ 22.4.8 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................ 22.4.9 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 22.5 Register Descriptions........................................................................................................ 22.5.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) .................................................... 22.5.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) .................................................... 22.5.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) ........................................................................... 22.5.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) ........................................................................... 22.5.5 RAM Emulation Register (RAMER)................................................................... 22.5.6 Flash Memory Power Control Register (FLPWCR)............................................ 22.5.7 Serial Control Register X (SCRX)....................................................................... 917 917 917 917 918 918 918 921 921 922 923 924 926 927 928 928 929 930 930 933 934 935 936 938 938 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page lvii of lxii 22.6 On-Board Programming Modes........................................................................................ 22.6.1 Boot Mode ........................................................................................................... 22.6.2 User Program Mode............................................................................................. 22.7 Programming/Erasing Flash Memory............................................................................... 22.7.1 Program Mode ..................................................................................................... 22.7.2 Program-Verify Mode ......................................................................................... 22.7.3 Erase Mode .......................................................................................................... 22.7.4 Erase-Verify Mode .............................................................................................. 22.8 Protection.......................................................................................................................... 22.8.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................ 22.8.2 Software Protection ............................................................................................. 22.8.3 Error Protection ................................................................................................... 22.9 Flash Memory Emulation in RAM ................................................................................... 22.10 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory....................................... 22.11 Flash Memory Programmer Mode.................................................................................... 22.11.1 Socket Adapter and Memory Map....................................................................... 22.11.2 Programmer Mode Operation .............................................................................. 22.11.3 Memory Read Mode ............................................................................................ 22.11.4 Auto-Program Mode............................................................................................ 22.11.5 Auto-Erase Mode................................................................................................. 22.11.6 Status Read Mode ................................................................................................ 22.11.7 Status Polling ....................................................................................................... 22.11.8 Programmer Mode Transition Time .................................................................... 22.11.9 Notes on Memory Programming ......................................................................... 22.12 Flash Memory and Power-Down States............................................................................ 22.12.1 Note on Power-Down States................................................................................ 22.13 Flash Memory Programming and Erasing Precautions..................................................... 22.14 Note on Switching from F-ZTAT Version to Mask ROM Version .................................. 939 940 944 946 947 948 952 952 954 954 955 956 958 960 960 961 962 963 967 969 971 972 972 973 974 974 975 980 Section 23A Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633F) ............................... 981 23A.1 23A.2 23A.3 Overview....................................................................................................................... 23A.1.1 Block Diagram.............................................................................................. 23A.1.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. Register Descriptions .................................................................................................... 23A.2.1 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR).................................................... 23A.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR).................................................... Oscillator....................................................................................................................... 23A.3.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator ................................................................... 23A.3.2 External Clock Input..................................................................................... Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page lviii of lxii 981 981 982 982 982 983 984 984 987 23A.4 23A.5 23A.6 23A.7 23A.8 23A.9 PLL Circuit.................................................................................................................... Medium-Speed Clock Divider....................................................................................... Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit .............................................................................. Subclock Oscillator ....................................................................................................... Subclock Waveform Shaping Circuit............................................................................ Note on Crystal Resonator ............................................................................................ 989 989 990 990 991 991 Section 23B Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633R, H8S/2695) .............................. 993 23B.1 23B.2 23B.3 23B.4 23B.5 23B.6 23B.7 23B.8 23B.9 Overview....................................................................................................................... 993 23B.1.1 Block Diagram.............................................................................................. 994 23B.1.2 Register Configuration ................................................................................. 994 Register Descriptions .................................................................................................... 995 23B.2.1 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR).................................................... 995 23B.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR).................................................... 996 Oscillator....................................................................................................................... 997 23B.3.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator ................................................................... 997 23B.3.2 External Clock Input................................................................................... 1000 PLL Circuit.................................................................................................................. 1002 Medium-Speed Clock Divider..................................................................................... 1002 Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit ............................................................................ 1003 Subclock Oscillator (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) ........................ 1003 Subclock Waveform Shaping Circuit.......................................................................... 1004 Note on Crystal Resonator .......................................................................................... 1004 Section 24 Power-Down Modes.................................................................................... 24.1 Overview......................................................................................................................... 24.1.1 Register Configuration....................................................................................... 24.2 Register Descriptions...................................................................................................... 24.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) .................................................................. 24.2.2 System Clock Control Register (SCKCR) ......................................................... 24.2.3 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) ......................................................... 24.2.4 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR).............................................................. 24.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)........................................................ 24.3 Medium-Speed Mode ..................................................................................................... 24.4 Sleep Mode ..................................................................................................................... 24.4.1 Sleep Mode ........................................................................................................ 24.4.2 Exiting Sleep Mode ........................................................................................... 24.5 Module Stop Mode ......................................................................................................... 24.5.1 Module Stop Mode ............................................................................................ 24.5.2 Usage Notes....................................................................................................... 1005 1005 1010 1011 1011 1013 1014 1017 1018 1019 1020 1020 1020 1021 1021 1023 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page lix of lxii 24.6 Software Standby Mode.................................................................................................. 24.6.1 Software Standby Mode .................................................................................... 24.6.2 Exiting Software Standby Mode........................................................................ 24.6.3 Setting Oscillation Stabilization Time after Clearing Software Standby Mode. 24.6.4 Software Standby Mode Application Example.................................................. 24.6.5 Usage Notes....................................................................................................... 24.7 Hardware Standby Mode ................................................................................................ 24.7.1 Hardware Standby Mode ................................................................................... 24.7.2 Hardware Standby Mode Timing....................................................................... 24.8 Watch Mode (This function is not available in the H8S/2695)....................................... 24.8.1 Watch Mode ...................................................................................................... 24.8.2 Exiting Watch Mode.......................................................................................... 24.8.3 Notes.................................................................................................................. 24.9 Subsleep Mode (This function is not available in the H8S/2695)................................... 24.9.1 Subsleep Mode .................................................................................................. 24.9.2 Exiting Subsleep Mode...................................................................................... 24.10 Subactive Mode (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) ................................. 24.10.1 Subactive Mode ................................................................................................. 24.10.2 Exiting Subactive Mode .................................................................................... 24.10.3 Usage Notes....................................................................................................... 24.11 Direct Transitions (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) .............................. 24.11.1 Overview of Direct Transitions ......................................................................... 24.12 φ Clock Output Disabling Function ................................................................................ 1023 1023 1024 1024 1025 1026 1027 1027 1027 1028 1028 1029 1030 1031 1031 1031 1032 1032 1032 1033 1033 1033 1034 Section 25 Electrical Characteristics (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633F) ................................. 1035 25.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ........................................................................................... 25.2 DC Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 25.3 AC Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 25.3.1 Clock Timing ..................................................................................................... 25.3.2 Control Signal Timing ....................................................................................... 25.3.3 Bus Timing ........................................................................................................ 25.3.4 DMAC Timing................................................................................................... 25.3.5 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules........................................................... 25.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics ..................................................................................... 25.5 D/A Conversion Characteristics ..................................................................................... 25.6 Flash Memory Characteristics ........................................................................................ 25.7 Usage Note ..................................................................................................................... Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page lx of lxii 1035 1036 1044 1045 1047 1049 1059 1063 1071 1072 1073 1074 Section 26 Electrical Characteristics (H8S/2633R) ................................................ 26.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ........................................................................................... 26.2 DC Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 26.3 AC Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 26.3.1 Clock Timing ..................................................................................................... 26.3.2 Control Signal Timing ....................................................................................... 26.3.3 Bus Timing ........................................................................................................ 26.3.4 DMAC Timing................................................................................................... 26.3.5 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules........................................................... 26.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics ..................................................................................... 26.5 D/A Conversion Characteristics ..................................................................................... 26.6 Flash Memory Characteristics ........................................................................................ 26.7 Usage Note ..................................................................................................................... 1075 1075 1076 1081 1082 1084 1086 1096 1100 1107 1108 1109 1110 Section 27 Electrical Characteristics (H8S/2695).................................................... 27.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ........................................................................................... 27.2 DC Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 27.3 AC Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 27.3.1 Clock Timing ..................................................................................................... 27.3.2 Control Signal Timing ....................................................................................... 27.3.3 Bus Timing ........................................................................................................ 27.3.4 Timing of On-Chip Supporting Modules........................................................... 27.4 A/D Conversion Characteristics ..................................................................................... 27.5 Usage Note ..................................................................................................................... 1111 1111 1112 1115 1116 1118 1120 1128 1131 1131 Appendix A Instruction Set ............................................................................................ 1133 A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 Instruction List................................................................................................................ Instruction Codes ............................................................................................................ Operation Code Map....................................................................................................... Number of States Required for Instruction Execution.................................................... Bus States during Instruction Execution......................................................................... Condition Code Modification ......................................................................................... 1133 1157 1172 1176 1190 1204 Appendix B Internal I/O Register ................................................................................. 1210 B.1A Addresses (H8S/2633 Group, H8S/2633F, H8S/2633R) ................................................ 1210 B.1B Addresses (H8S/2695) .................................................................................................... 1220 B.2 Functions ........................................................................................................................ 1227 Appendix C I/O Port Block Diagrams ........................................................................ 1325 C.1 Port 1 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 1325 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page lxi of lxii C.2 C.3 C.4 C.5 C.6 C.7 C.8 C.9 C.10 C.11 C.12 C.13 C.14 C.15 C.16 C.17 C.18 C.19 C.20 C.21 C.22 C.23 C.24 Port 3 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port 4 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port 7 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port 9 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port A Block Diagram .................................................................................................... Port B Block Diagram..................................................................................................... Port C Block Diagram..................................................................................................... Port D Block Diagram .................................................................................................... Port E Block Diagram..................................................................................................... Port F Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port G Block Diagram .................................................................................................... Port 1 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port 3 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port 4 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port 7 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port 9 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port A Block Diagram .................................................................................................... Port B Block Diagram..................................................................................................... Port C Block Diagram..................................................................................................... Port D Block Diagram .................................................................................................... Port E Block Diagram..................................................................................................... Port F Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... Port G Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 1331 1339 1340 1347 1348 1352 1353 1355 1356 1357 1365 1369 1375 1383 1384 1389 1390 1394 1395 1396 1397 1398 1406 Appendix D Pin States ..................................................................................................... 1410 D.1 Port States in Each Mode................................................................................................ 1410 Appendix E Timing of Transition to and Recovery from Hardware Standby Mode ............................................................................................. 1418 Appendix F Product Code Lineup ................................................................................ 1419 Appendix G Package Dimensions ................................................................................. 1420 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page lxii of lxii Section 1 Overview Section 1 Overview 1.1 Overview The H8S/2633 Group is a series of microcomputers (MCUs: microcomputer units), built around the H8S/2600 CPU, employing Renesas’ proprietary architecture, and equipped with peripheral functions on-chip. The H8S/2600 CPU has an internal 32-bit architecture, is provided with sixteen 16-bit general registers and a concise, optimized instruction set designed for high-speed operation, and can address a 16-Mbyte linear address space. The instruction set is upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPU instructions at the object-code level, facilitating migration from the H8/300, H8/300L, or H8/300H Series. On-chip peripheral functions required for system configuration include DMA controller (DMAC)*2, data transfer controller (DTC)*2 bus masters, ROM and RAM memory, a 16-bit timer-pulse unit (TPU), programmable pulse generator (PPG)*2, 8-bit timer*2, 14-bit PWM timer (PWM)*2, watchdog timer (WDT), serial communication interface (SCI, IrDA*2), A/D converter, D/A converter*2, and I/O ports. It is also possible to incorporate an on-chip PC bus interface (IIC)*2 as an option. On-chip ROM is available as 256-kbyte flash memory (F-ZTAT™ version)*1 or as 256-, 128-, or 64-kbyte mask ROM. ROM is connected to the CPU via a 16-bit data bus, enabling both byte and word data to be accessed in one state. Instruction fetching has been speeded up, and processing speed increased. Four operating modes, modes 4 to 7, are provided, and there is a choice of single-chip mode or external expansion mode. The features of the H8S/2633 Group are shown in table 1.1. Notes: 1. F-ZTAT™ is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp. 2. This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 1 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Table 1.1 Overview Item Specification CPU • General-register machine Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) • High-speed operation suitable for realtime control Maximum clock rate: 25 MHz (H8S/2633 Group, H8S/2633F), 28 MHz (H8S/2633R, H8S/2695) High-speed arithmetic operations 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract 16 × 16-bit register-register multiply 16 × 16 + 42-bit multiply and accumulate 32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide • : 40 ns, 35 ns : 160 ns, 140 ns : 160 ns, 140 ns : 800 ns, 700 ns Instruction set suitable for high-speed operation Sixty-nine basic instructions 8/16/32-bit move/arithmetic and logic instructions Unsigned/signed multiply and divide instructions Multiply-and accumulate instruction Powerful bit-manipulation instructions • Two CPU operating modes Normal mode: 64-kbyte address space (cannot be used in the H8S/2633 Group) Advanced mode: 16-Mbyte address space Bus controller • Address space divided into 8 areas, with bus specifications settable independently for each area • Choice of 8-bit or 16-bit access space for each area • 2-state or 3-state access space can be designated for each area • Number of program wait states can be set for each area • Burst ROM directly connectable Possible to connect*1 a maximum of 8 MB of DRAM (alternatively, it is • also possible to use an interval timer) • External bus release function PC break controller*1 • Supports debugging functions by means of PC break interrupts • Two break channels Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 2 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Item Specification DMA controller 1 (DMAC)* • Short address mode and full address mode selectable • Short address mode: 4 channels Full address mode: 2 channels • Transfer possible in repeat mode/block transfer mode • Activation by internal interrupt possible • Can be activated by internal interrupt or software • Multiple transfers or multiple types of transfer possible for one activation source • Transfer possible in repeat mode, block transfer mode, etc. • Request can be sent to CPU for interrupt that activated DTC • 6-channel 16-bit timer on-chip • Pulse I/O processing capability for up to 16 pins' • Automatic 2-phase encoder count capability • Maximum 16-bit pulse output possible with TPU as time base • Output trigger selectable in 4-bit groups • Non-overlap margin can be set • Direct output or inverse output setting possible • 8-bit up counter (external event count possible) Transfer possible in single address mode Data transfer controller (DTC)*1 16-bit timer-pulse unit (TPU) Programmable pulse generator (PPG)*1 8-bit timer*1 4 channels • Time constant register × 2 • 2 channel connection possible Watchdog timer 2 channels*2 • Watchdog timer or interval timer selectable • Operation using sub-clock supported (WDT1 only) 14-bit PWM timer (PWM)*1 • Maximum of 4 outputs • Resolution: 1/16384 • Maximum carrier frequency: 390.6 kHz (operating at 25 MHz), 437.6 kHz (operating at 28 MHz) • Asynchronous mode or synchronous mode selectable • Multiprocessor communication function • Smart card interface function Serial communication interface (SCI) 5 channels (SCI0 to SCI4) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 3 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Item Specification IrDA-equipped SCI*1 • 1 channel (SCI0) • Supports IrDA standard version 1.0 TxD and RxD encoding/decoding in IrDA format • Start/stop synchronization mode or clock synchronization mode selectable • Multiprocessor communications function • Smart card interface function • Resolution: 10 bits • Input: 16 channels • High-speed conversion: 10.72 µs minimum conversion time (at 25-MHz operation) • Single or scan mode selectable • Sample and hold circuit • A/D conversion can be activated by external trigger or timer trigger • Resolution: 8 bits • Output: 4 channels I/O ports • 73 I/O pins, 16 input-only pins Memory • PROM or mask ROM • High-speed static RAM A/D converter D/A converter*1 Interrupt controller Product Name ROM RAM H8S/2633 256 kbytes 16 kbytes H8S/2632 192 kbytes 12 kbytes H8S/2631 128 kbytes 8 kbytes H8S/2633R 256 kbytes 16 kbytes H8S/2695 192 kbytes 8 kbytes • Nine external interrupt pins (NMI, IRQ0 to IRQ7) • 72 internal interrupt sources (including options), 49 interrupt sources in the H8S/2695 • Eight priority levels settable Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 4 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Item Specification Power-down state • Medium-speed mode • Sleep mode • Module stop mode • Software standby mode • Hardware standby mode 1 Subclock operation* (subactive mode, subsleep mode, watch mode) • Operating modes Clock pulse generator Four MCU operating modes External Data Bus CPU Operating Mode Mode Description On-Chip ROM Initial Value Maximu m Value 4 On-chip ROM disabled expansion mode Disabled 16 bits 16 bits 5 On-chip ROM disabled expansion mode Disabled 8 bits 16 bits 6 On-chip ROM enabled expansion mode Enabled 8 bits 16 bits 7 Single-chip mode Enabled — — Advanced H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631 • On-chip PLL circuit (×1, ×2, ×4) • Input clock frequency: 2 to 25 MHz H8S/2633R, H8S/2695 Packages 2 I C bus interface 1 (IIC)* 2 channels (optional) • On-chip PLL circuit (×1, ×2, ×4): 2 to 25 MHz (×2, ×4): 25 to 28 MHz • Input clock frequency: 2 to 25 MHz • 120-pin plastic TQFP (TFP-120) • 128-pin plastic QFP (FP-128B) • Conforms to I2C bus interface type advocated by Philips • Single master mode/slave mode • Possible to determine arbitration lost conditions • Supports two slave addresses Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 5 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Item Specification Product lineup H8S/2633 Group, H8S/2633F, H8S/2633R, H8S/2695 Operating Frequencies and Voltages 28-MHz Operation Version 25-MHz Operation Version 16-MHz Operation Version Input clock frequency range 2 to 25 MHz 2 to 25 MHz 2 to 16 MHz Operating frequency range 2 to 25 MHz 2 to 25 MHz (For 25 to 28 MHz operation, make sure to use a PLL with a multiplying factor set to ×2 or ×4.) 2 to 16 MHz Operating voltage range PVCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V (This is a single power supply and has no Vcc pin. Refer to sections 26 and 27, for details.) PVCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V PVCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V VCC = 3.0 to 3.6 V AVCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V [When using A/D or D/A]*2 AVCC = 3.6 to 5.5 V Vref = 3.6 V to AVCC Vref = 4.5 to AVCC AVCC = 4.5 to 5.5 V Vref = 4.5 to AVCC Flash version Model (ROM/RAM) Mask version Model (ROM/RAM) [When not using A/D or D/A]*2 AVCC = 3.3 to 5.5 V Vref = 3.3 V to AVCC HD64F2633RF28 (256 kbytes/16 kbytes) HD64F2633F25 (256 kbytes/16 kbytes) HD64F2633F16 (256 kbytes/16 kbytes) HD64F2633RTE28 (256 kbytes/16 kbytes) HD64F2633TE25 (256 kbytes/16 kbytes) HD64F2633TE16 (256 kbytes/16 kbytes) HD6432695F28*1 (192 kbytes/8 kbytes) HD6432633F25 (256 kbytes/16 kbytes) HD6432633F16 (256 kbytes/16 kbytes) HD6432633TE25 (256 kbytes/16 kbytes) HD6432633TE16 (256 kbytes/16 kbytes) HD6432632F25 (192 kbytes/12 kbytes) HD6432632F16 (192 kbytes/12 kbytes) HD6432632TE25 (192 kbytes/12 kbytes) HD6432632TE16 (192 kbytes/12 kbytes) HD6432631F25 (128 kbytes/8 kbytes) HD6432631F16 (128 kbytes/8 kbytes) HD6432631TE25 (128 kbytes/8 kbytes) HD6432631TE16 (128 kbytes/8 kbytes) Notes: 1. The module configuration of the HD6432695 differs from that of the HD6432633, HD64F2633, and HD64F2633R. (For information on the module configuration refer to comparison of H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633F-ZTAT, H8S/2633RF-ZTAT, and H8S/2695 Product Specifications. 2. In the case of the 16-MHz operation version, the operating power supply ranges differ depending on whether A/D or D/A conversion is used. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 6 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Item Specification Product lineup Models and Corresponding Packages Model Name Package HD64F2633F25 FP-128B HD64F2633F16 HD6432633F25 HD6432633F16 HD6432632F25 HD6432632F16 HD6432631F25 HD6432631F16 HD64F2633RF28 HD6432695F28 HD64F2633TE25 TFP-120 HD64F2633TE16 HD6432633TE25 HD6432633TE16 HD6432632TE25 HD6432632TE16 HD6432631TE25 HD6432631TE16 HD64F2633RTE28 Notes: 1. This function is not available in the H8S/2695. 2. The watchdog timer in the H8S/2695 has one channel only. 1.2 Internal Block Diagram Figure 1.1 (a) shows an internal block diagram of the H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, and H8S/2631. Figure 1.1 (b) shows the internal block diagram of the H8S/2633R. Figure 1.1 (c) shows the internal block diagram of the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 7 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Port A Port B PC7/A7/PWM1 PC6/A6/PWM0 PC5/A5 PC4/A4 PC3/A3 PC2/A2 PC1/A1 PC0/A0 8bit timer × 4 channels SCI × 5 channels (IrDA × 1channel) I2C bus interface (option) TPU Port C WDT × 2 channels RAM PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB3 / A11/TIOCD3 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 14-bit PWM timer Port 3 Port F DMAC ROM (Mask ROM, flash memory*1) Peripheral address bus Bus controller PC break controller (2 channels) Peripheral data bus PE7 / D7 PE6 / D6 PE5 / D5 PE4 / D4 PE3 / D3 PE2 / D2 PE1 / D1 PE0 / D0 Internal data bus Internal address bus PD7 / D15 PD6 / D14 PD5 / D13 PD4 / D12 PD3 / D11 PD2 / D10 PD1 / D9 PD0 / D8 DTC PA3/A19/SCK2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA0/A16 D/A converter A/D converter Port 9 PPG Port 4 Vref AVCC AVSS P17 / PO15/ TIOCB2 /PWM3/ TCLKD P16 / PO14/ TIOCA2/PWM2/IRQ1 P15 / PO13/ TIOCB1 / TCLKC P14 / PO12/ TIOCA1/IRQ0 P13 / PO11/ TIOCD0 /TCLKB/A23 P12 / PO10/ TIOCC0 /TCLKA/A22 P11 / PO9/ TIOCB0 /DACK1/A21 P10 / PO8/ TIOCA0 /DACK0/A20 Port 1 P37/TxD4 P36/RxD4 P35/SCK1/SCK4/SCL0/IRQ5 P34/RxD1/SDA0 P33/TxD1/SCL1 P32/SCK0/SDA1/IRQ4 P31/RxD0/IrRxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD P97/AN15/DA3 P96/AN14/DA2 P95/AN13 P94/AN12 P93/AN11 P92/AN10 P91/AN9 P90/AN8 P47 / AN7/DA1 P46 / AN6/DA0 P45 / AN5 P44 / AN4 P43 / AN3 P42 / AN2 P41 / AN1 P40 / AN0 P77/TxD3 P76/RxD3 P75/TMO3/SCK3 P74/TMO2/MRES P73/TMO1/TEND1/CS7 P72/TMO0/TEND0/CS6 P71/TMR23/TMC23/DREQ1/CS5 P70/TMR01/TMC01/DREQ0/CS4 Port E H8S/2600 CPU Port G PG4/CS0 PG3/CS1 PG2/CS2 PG1/CS3/OE/IRQ7 PG0/CAS/IRQ6 Port D Interrupt controller Port 7 PF7/φ PF6/AS/LCAS PF5/RD PF4/HWR PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3 PF2/LCAS /WAIT/BREQO PF1/BACK/BUZZ PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 PLL MD2 MD1 MD0 OSC2 OSC1 EXTAL XTAL PLLVCC PLLCAP PLLVSS STBY RES WDTOVF NMI FWE*2 Clock pulse generator PVCC1 PVCC2 VCC VCC VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS Section 1 Overview Notes: 1. Applies to the H8S/2633 only. 2. The FWE pin is used only in the flash memory version. Figure 1.1 (a) H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, H8S/2631 Internal Block Diagram Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 8 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Port A PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB3 / A11/TIOCD3 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PC7/A7/PWM1 PC6/A6/PWM0 PC5/A5 PC4/A4 PC3/A3 PC2/A2 PC1/A1 PC0/A0 14-bit PWM timer Port 3 8bit timer × 4 channels SCI × 5 channels (IrDA × 1channel) I2C bus interface (option) TPU Port B WDT × 2 channels RAM PA3/A19/SCK2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA0/A16 Port C Bus controller ROM (flash memory) Peripheral address bus Port F DMAC Peripheral data bus PE7 / D7 PE6 / D6 PE5 / D5 PE4 / D4 PE3 / D3 PE2 / D2 PE1 / D1 PE0 / D0 Internal data bus Internal address bus PD7 / D15 PD6 / D14 PD5 / D13 PD4 / D12 PD3 / D11 PD2 / D10 PD1 / D9 PD0 / D8 DTC PC break controller (2 channels) D/A converter A/D converter Port 9 PPG P37/TxD4 P36/RxD4 P35/SCK1/SCK4/SCL0/IRQ5 P34/RxD1/SDA0 P33/TxD1/SCL1 P32/SCK0/SDA1/IRQ4 P31/RxD0/IrRxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD P97/AN15/DA3 P96/AN14/DA2 P95/AN13 P94/AN12 P93/AN11 P92/AN10 P91/AN9 P90/AN8 P47 / AN7/ DA1 P46 / AN6/ DA0 P45 / AN5 P44 / AN4 P43 / AN3 P42 / AN2 P41 / AN1 P40 / AN0 Port 4 Vref AVCC AVSS Port 1 P17 / PO15/ TIOCB2 /PWM3/ TCLKD P16 / PO14/ TIOCA2/PWM2/IRQ1 P15 / PO13/ TIOCB1 / TCLKC P14 / PO12/ TIOCA1/IRQ0 P13 / PO11/ TIOCD0 / TCLKB/A23 P12 / PO10/ TIOCC0 / TCLKA/A22 P11 / PO9/ TIOCB0 / DACK1/A21 P10 / PO8/ TIOCA0 / DACK0/A20 P77/TxD3 P76/RxD3 P75/TMO3/SCK3 P74/TMO2/MRES P73/TMO1/TEND1/CS7 P72/TMO0/TEND0/CS6 P71/TMR23/TMC23/DREQ1/CS5 P70/TMR01/TMC01/DREQ0/CS4 Port E H8S/2600 CPU Port G PG4/CS0 PG3/CS1 PG2/CS2 PG1/CS3/OE/IRQ7 PG0/CAS/IRQ6 Port D Interrupt controller Port 7 PF7/φ PF6/AS/LCAS PF5/RD PF4/HWR PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3 PF2/LCAS /WAIT/BREQO PF1/BACK/BUZZ PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 PLL MD2 MD1 MD0 OSC2 OSC1 EXTAL XTAL PLLVCC PLLCAP PLLVSS STBY RES WDTOVF NMI FWE VCL Clock pulse generator PVCC1 PVCC2 VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS Section 1 Overview Figure 1.1 (b) H8S/2633R Internal Block Diagram Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 9 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 PE7/D7 PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 Port A Port B PB7 / A 1 5 /TIOCB5 PB6 / A 1 4 /TIOCA5 PB5 / A 1 3 /TIOCB4 PB4 / A 1 2 /TIOCA4 PB3 / A 1 1 /TIOCD3 PB2 / A 1 0 /TIOCC3 PB1 / A 9 /TIOCB3 PB0 / A 8 /TIOCA3 Port C PC7 / A 7 PC6 / A 6 PC5 / A 5 PC4 / A 4 PC3 / A 3 PC2 / A 2 PC1 / A 1 PC0 / A 0 Peripheral address bus Peripheral data bus Port F ROM (Mask ROM) PA3 /A19/SCK2 PA2 /A18/RxD2 PA1 /A17/TxD2 PA0 / A16 WDT × 1 channel Port G RAM Port 3 SCI × 5 channels TPU Port 9 A/D converter Port 4 Vref AVCC AVSS P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1 P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0 P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23 P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22 P11/TIOCB0/A21 P10/TIOCA0/A20 Port 1 P47/AN7 P46/AN6 P45/AN5 P44/AN4 P43/AN3 P42/AN2 P41/AN1 P40/AN0 P77 / T x D 3 P76 / R x D 3 P75 /SCK3 P74 /MRES P73 / CS7 P72 / CS6 P71 / CS5 P70 / CS4 Interrupt controller Port 7 PG4 / CS0 PG3 / CS1 PG2 / CS2 PG1 / CS3/IRQ7 PG0 /IRQ6 H8S/2600 CPU Internal address bus PLL PLLCAP PLLVSS STBY RES WDTOVF NMI PF7 / φ PF6 / AS PF5 / RD PF4 / HWR PF3 / LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3 PF2 / WAIT/ BREQO PF1 / BACK PF0 / BREQ/IRQ2 Clock pulse generator VCL MD2 MD1 MD0 EXTAL XTAL Port E Internal data bus Port D Bus controller PVCC PVCC VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS VSS PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PD0/D8 Section 1 Overview Figure 1.1 (c) H8S/2695 Internal Block Diagram Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 10 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 P37 / TxD4 P36 / RxD4 P35 / SCK1/SCK4/IRQ5 P34 / RxD1 P33 / TxD1 P32 / SCK0/IRQ4 P31 / RxD0 P30 / TxD0 P97 / AN15 P96 / AN14 P95 / AN13 P94 / AN12 P93 / AN11 P92 / AN10 P91 / AN9 P90 / AN8 Section 1 Overview 1.3 Pin Description 1.3.1 Pin Arrangement STBY NMI RES PLLVSS PLLCAP PLLVCC WDTOVF PG4/CS0 PG3/CS1 PG2/CS2 PG1/CS3/OE/IRQ7 PG0/CAS/IRQ6 P37/TxD4 TOP VIEW (TFP-120) 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 P36/RxD4 P35/SCK1/SCK4/SCL0/IRQ5 P34/RxD1/SDA0 P33/TxD1/SCL1 VSS P32/SCK0/SDA1/IRQ4 PVCC2 P31/RxD0/IrRxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PVCC1 PD0/D8 VSS PE7/D7 PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 P17/PO15/TIOCB2/PWM3/TCKLD P16/PO14/TIOCA2/PWM2/IRQ1 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 VSS PC4/A4 VCC PC5/A5 PC6/A6/PWM0 PC7/A7/PWM1 VSS PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PVCC1 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PA0/A16 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA3/A19/SCK2 VSS P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0/A20 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1/A21 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23 P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0 AVCC Vref P40/AN0 P41/AN1 P42/AN2 P43/AN3 P44/AN4 P45/AN5 P46/AN6/DA0 P47/AN7/DA1 P90/AN8 P91/AN9 P92/AN10 P93/AN11 P94/AN12 P95/AN13 P96/AN14/DA2 P97/AN15/DA3 AVSS P70/TMRI01/TMCI01/DREQ0/CS4 P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/DREQ1/CS5 P72/TMO0/TEND0/CS6 P73/TMO1/TEND1/CS7 P74/TMO2/MRES P75/TMO3/SCK3 P76/RxD3 P77/TxD3 MD0 MD1 MD2 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 PF1/BACK/BUZZ PF2/LCAS/WAIT/BREQO PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3 PF4/HWR PF5/RD PF6/AS/LCAS VSS PF7/φ PVCC1 OSC2 OSC1 VSS EXTAL VCC XTAL FWE* Figures 1.2 (a) and 1.3 (a) show the pin arrangement of the H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, and H8S/2631. Figures 1.2 (b) and 1.3 (b) show the pin arrangement of the H8S/2633R. Figure 1.3 (c) shows the pin arrangement of the H8S/2695. Note: * The FWE pin is used only in the flash memory version. In the mask ROM version the FWE pin is an NC pin, and should be left open or connected to VSS. Figure 1.2 (a) H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, H8S/2631 Pin Arrangement (TFP-120: Top View) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 11 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 STBY NMI RES PLLVSS PLLCAP NC WDTOVF PG4/CS0 PG3/CS1 PG2/CS2 PG1/CS3/OE/IRQ7 PG0/CAS/IRQ6 P37/TxD4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 TOP VIEW (TFP-120) 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 P36/RxD4 P35/SCK1/SCK4/SCL0/IRQ5 P34/RxD1/SDA0 P33/TxD1/SCL1 VSS P32/SCK0/SDA1/IRQ4 PVCC2 P31/RxD0/IrRxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PVCC1 PD0/D8 VSS PE7/D7 PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 P17/PO15/TIOCB2/PWM3/TCKLD P16/PO14/TIOCA2/PWM2/IRQ1 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 VSS PC4/A4 VCL PC5/A5 PC6/A6/PWM0 PC7/A7/PWM1 VSS PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PVCC1 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PA0/A16 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA3/A19/SCK2 VSS P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0/A20 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1/A21 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23 P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0 AVCC Vref P40/AN0 P41/AN1 P42/AN2 P43/AN3 P44/AN4 P45/AN5 P46/AN6/DA0 P47/AN7/DA1 P90/AN8 P91/AN9 P92/AN10 P93/AN11 P94/AN12 P95/AN13 P96/AN14/DA2 P97/AN15/DA3 AVSS P70/TMRI01/TMCI01/DREQ0/CS4 P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/DREQ1/CS5 P72/TMO0/TEND0/CS6 P73/TMO1/TEND1/CS7 P74/TMO2/MRES P75/TMO3/SCK3 P76/RxD3 P77/TxD3 MD0 MD1 MD2 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 PF1/BACK/BUZZ PF2/LCAS/WAIT/BREQO PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3 PF4/HWR PF5/RD PF6/AS/LCAS VSS PF7/φ PVCC1 OSC2 OSC1 VSS EXTAL NC XTAL FWE* Section 1 Overview 0.1µF Note: * The FWE pin is used only in the flash memory version. In the mask ROM version the FWE pin is an NC pin, and should be left open or connected to VSS. Figure 1.2 (b) H8S/2633R Pin Arrangement (TFP-120: Top View) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 12 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 TOP VIEW (FP-128B) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 P34/RxD1/SDA0 P33/TxD1/SCL1 VSS P32/SCK0/SDA1/IRQ4 PVCC2 P31/RxD0/IrRxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PVCC1 PD0/D8 VSS PE7/D7 PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 P17/PO15/TIOCB2/PWM3/TCLKD MD1 MD2 NC NC PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 VSS PC4/A4 VCC PC5/A5 PC6/A6/PWM0 PC7/A7/PWM1 VSS PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PVCC1 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PA0/A16 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA3/A19/SCK2 VSS P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0/A20 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1/A21 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23 P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0 NC NC P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC P16/PO14/TIOCA2/PWM2/IRQ1 P40/AN0 P41/AN1 P42/AN2 P43/AN3 P44/AN4 P45/AN5 P46/AN6/DA0 P47/AN7/DA1 P90/AN8 P91/AN9 P92/AN10 P93/AN11 P94/AN12 P95/AN13 P96/AN14/DA2 P97/AN15/DA3 AVSS P70/TMRI01/TMCI01/DREQ0/CS4 P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/DREQ1/CS5 P72/TMO0/TEND0/CS6 P73/TMO1/TEND1/CS7 P74/TMO2/MRES P75/TMO3/SCK3 P76/RxD3 P77/TxD3 MD0 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 Vref AVCC NC NC PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 PF1/BACK/BUZZ PF2/LCAS/WAIT/BREQO PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3 PF4/HWR PF5/RD PF6/AS/LCAS VSS PF7/φ PVCC1 OSC2 OSC1 VSS EXTAL VCC XTAL FWE* STBY NMI RES PLLVSS PLLCAP PLLVCC WDTOVF PG4/CS0 PG3/CS1 PG2/CS2 PG1/CS3/OE/IRQ7 PG0/CAS/IRQ6 P37/TxD4 NC NC P36/RxD4 P35/SCK1/SCK4/SCL0/IRQ5 Section 1 Overview Note: * The FWE pin is used only in the flash memory version. In the mask ROM version the FWE pin is an NC pin, and should be left open or connected to VSS. Figure 1.3 (a) H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, H8S/2631 Pin Arrangement (FP-128B: Top View) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 13 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 TOP VIEW (FP-128B) 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 P34/RxD1/SDA0 P33/TxD1/SCL1 VSS P32/SCK0/SDA1/IRQ4 PVCC2 P31/RxD0/IrRxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PVCC1 PD0/D8 VSS PE7/D7 PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 P17/PO15/TIOCB2/PWM3/TCLKD MD1 MD2 NC NC PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 VSS PC4/A4 VCL PC5/A5 PC6/A6/PWM0 PC7/A7/PWM1 VSS PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PVCC1 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PA0/A16 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA3/A19/SCK2 VSS P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0/A20 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1/A21 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23 P14/PO12/TIOCA1/IRQ0 NC NC P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC P16/PO14/TIOCA2/PWM2/IRQ1 P40/AN0 P41/AN1 P42/AN2 P43/AN3 P44/AN4 P45/AN5 P46/AN6/DA0 P47/AN7/DA1 P90/AN8 P91/AN9 P92/AN10 P93/AN11 P94/AN12 P95/AN13 P96/AN14/DA2 P97/AN15/DA3 AVSS P70/TMRI01/TMCI01/DREQ0/CS4 P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/DREQ1/CS5 P72/TMO0/TEND0/CS6 P73/TMO1/TEND1/CS7 P74/TMO2/MRES P75/TMO3/SCK3 P76/RxD3 P77/TxD3 MD0 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 Vref AVCC NC NC PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 PF1/BACK/BUZZ PF2/LCAS/WAIT/BREQO PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3 PF4/HWR PF5/RD PF6/AS/LCAS VSS PF7/φ PVCC1 OSC2 OSC1 VSS EXTAL NC XTAL FWE* STBY NMI RES PLLVSS PLLCAP NC WDTOVF PG4/CS0 PG3/CS1 PG2/CS2 PG1/CS3/OE/IRQ7 PG0/CAS/IRQ6 P37/TxD4 NC NC P36/RxD4 P35/SCK1/SCK4/SCL0/IRQ5 Section 1 Overview 0.1µF Note: * The FWE pin is used only in the flash memory version. In the mask ROM version the FWE pin is an NC pin, and should be left open or connected to VSS. Figure 1.3 (b) H8S/2633R Pin Arrangement (FP-128B: Top View) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 14 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 TOP VIEW (FP-128B) P34/RxD1 P33/TxD1 VSS P32/SCK0/IRQ4 PVCC P31/RxD0 P30/TxD0 PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PVCC PD0/D8 VSS PE7/D7 PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD MD1 MD2 NC NC PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 VSS PC4/A4 VCL PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 VSS PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PVCC PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PA0/A16 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA3/A19/SCK2 VSS P10/TIOCA0/A20 P11/TIOCB0/A21 P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA/A22 P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB/A23 P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0 NC NC P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1 P40/AN0 P41/AN1 P42/AN2 P43/AN3 P44/AN4 P45/AN5 P46/AN6 P47/AN7 P90/AN8 P91/AN9 P92/AN10 P93/AN11 P94/AN12 P95/AN13 P96/AN14 P97/AN15 AVSS P70/CS4 P71/CS5 P72/CS6 P73/CS7 P74/MRES P75/SCK3 P76/RxD3 P77/TxD3 MD0 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 Vref AVCC NC NC PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 PF1/BACK PF2/WAIT/BREQO PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3 PF4/HWR PF5/RD PF6/AS VSS PF7/φ PVCC NC NC VSS EXTAL NC XTAL NC* STBY NMI RES PLLVSS PLLCAP NC WDTOVF PG4/CS0 PG3/CS1 PG2/CS2 PG1/CS3/IRQ7 PG0/IRQ6 P37/TxD4 NC NC P36/RxD4 P35/SCK1/SCK4/IRQ5 Section 1 Overview 0.1µF Note: * In the flash memory version this is the FWE pin. In the mask ROM version this pin should be left open or connected to VSS. Figure 1.3 (c) H8S/2695 Pin Arrangement (FP-128B: Top View) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 15 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview 1.3.2 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode Table 1.2 (a) shows the pin functions of the H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, and H8S/2631 in each of the operating modes. Table 1.2 (b) shows the pin functions of the H8S/2633R in each of the operating modes. Table 1.2 (c) shows the pin functions of the H8S/2695 in each of the operating modes. Table 1.2 (a) Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode (H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, H8S/2631) Pin No. Pin Name TFP-120 FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 1 5 A0 A0 PC0/A0 PC0 2 6 A1 A1 PC1/A1 PC1 3 7 A2 A2 PC2/A2 PC2 4 8 A3 A3 PC3/A3 PC3 5 9 VSS VSS VSS VSS 6 10 A4 A4 PC4/A4 PC4 7 11 VCC VCC VCC VCC 8 12 A5 A5 PC5/A5 PC5 9 13 A6 A6 PC6/A6/PWM0 PC6/PWM0 10 14 A7 A7 PC7/A7/PWM1 PC7/PWM1 11 15 VSS VSS VSS VSS 12 16 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/TIOCA3 13 17 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 14 18 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/TIOCB3 15 19 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB2/TIOCC3 16 20 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/TIOCD3 17 21 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/TIOCA4 18 22 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/TIOCB4 19 23 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/TIOCA5 20 24 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/TIOCB5 21 25 PA0/A16 PA0/A16 PA0/A16 PA0 22 26 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/TxD2 23 27 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/RxD2 24 28 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/SCK2 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 16 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Pin Name TFP-120 FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 25 29 VSS VSS VSS VSS 26 30 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/ DACK0/A20 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/ DACK0/A20 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/ DACK0/A20 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/ 27 31 DACK1/A21 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/ P11/PO9/TIOCB0/ DACK1/A21 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/ DACK1/A21 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/ 28 32 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/ TCLKA/A22 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/ TCLKA/A22 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/ TCLKA/A22 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/ TCLKA 29 33 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/ TCLKB/A23 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/ TCLKB/A23 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/ TCLKB/A23 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/ TCLKB 30 34 P14/PO12/TIOCA1/ P14/PO12/TIOCA1/ P14/PO12/TIOCA1/ P14/PO12/TIOCA1/ 1 NC* 1 NC* NC* 1 IRQ0 IRQ0 IRQ0 DACK0 DACK1 IRQ0 — 35 1 NC* — 36 NC* NC* NC* NC* 31 37 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/ TCLKC P15/PO13/TIOCB1/ TCLKC P15/PO13/TIOCB1/ TCLKC P15/PO13/TIOCB1/ TCLKC 32 38 P16/PO14/TIOCA2/ PWM2/IRQ1 P16/PO14/TIOCA2/ PWM2/IRQ1 P16/PO14/TIOCA2/ PWM2/IRQ1 P16/PO14/TIOCA2/ PWM2/IRQ1 33 39 P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ PWM3/TCLKD P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ PWM3/TCLKD P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ PWM3/TCLKD P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ PWM3/TCLKD 34 40 PE0/D0 PE0/D0 PE0/D0 PE0 35 41 PE1/D1 PE1/D1 PE1/D1 PE1 36 42 PE2/D2 PE2/D2 PE2/D2 PE2 37 43 PE3/D3 PE3/D3 PE3/D3 PE3 38 44 PE4/D4 PE4/D4 PE4/D4 PE4 39 45 PE5/D5 PE5/D5 PE5/D5 PE5 40 46 PE6/D6 PE6/D6 PE6/D6 PE6 41 47 PE7/D7 PE7/D7 PE7/D7 PE7 42 48 VSS VSS VSS VSS 43 49 D8 D8 D8 PD0 44 50 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 45 51 D9 D9 D9 PD1 46 52 D10 D10 D10 PD2 47 53 D11 D11 D11 PD3 48 54 D12 D12 D12 PD4 49 55 D13 D13 D13 PD5 1 1 1 1 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 17 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Pin Name TFP-120 FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 50 56 D14 D14 D14 PD6 51 57 D15 D15 D15 PD7 52 58 P30/TxD0/IrTxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD 53 59 P31/RxD0/IrRxD P31/RxD0/IrRxD P31/RxD0/IrRxD P31/RxD0/IrRxD 54 60 PVCC2 PVCC2 PVCC2 PVCC2 55 61 P32/SCK0/SDA1/ P32/SCK0/SDA1/ P32/SCK0/SDA1/ P32/SCK0/SDA1/ 56 62 VSS VSS VSS VSS 57 63 P33/TxD1/SCL1 P33/TxD1/SCL1 P33/TxD1/SCL1 P33/TxD1/SCL1 58 64 P34/RxD1/SDA0 P34/RxD1/SDA0 P34/RxD1/SDA0 P34/RxD1/SDA0 59 65 P35/SCK1/SCK4/ SCL0/IRQ5 P35/SCK1/SCK4/ SCL0/IRQ5 P35/SCK1/SCK4/ SCL0/IRQ5 P35/SCK1/SCK4/ SCL0/IRQ5 60 66 P36/RxD4 P36/RxD4 P36/RxD4 P36/RxD4 IRQ4 *1 IRQ4 *1 NC* 1 1 67 NC — 68 NC* NC* NC* NC* 61 69 P37/TxD4 P37/TxD4 P37/TxD4 P37/TxD4 62 70 PG0/CAS/IRQ6 PG0/CAS/IRQ6 PG0/CAS/IRQ6 PG0/IRQ6 63 71 PG1/CS3/OE/IRQ7 PG1/CS3/OE/IRQ7 PG1/CS3/OE/IRQ7 PG1/IRQ7 64 72 PG2/CS2 PG2/CS2 PG2/CS2 PG2 65 73 PG3/CS1 PG3/CS1 PG3/CS1 PG3 66 74 PG4/CS0 PG4/CS0 PG4/CS0 PG4 67 75 WDTOVF WDTOVF WDTOVF WDTOVF 68 76 PLLVCC PLLVCC PLLVCC PLLVCC 69 77 PLLCAP PLLCAP PLLCAP PLLCAP 70 78 PLLVSS PLLVSS PLLVSS PLLVSS 71 79 RES RES RES RES 72 80 NMI NMI NMI NMI 73 81 STBY STBY STBY *2 1 *2 NC IRQ4 — 1 NC *1 IRQ4 STBY 74 82 FWE FWE FWE FWE*2 75 83 XTAL XTAL XTAL XTAL 76 84 VCC VCC VCC VCC 77 85 EXTAL EXTAL EXTAL EXTAL Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 18 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 *2 1 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Pin Name TFP-120 FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 78 86 VSS VSS VSS VSS 79 87 OSC1 OSC1 OSC1 OSC1 80 88 OSC2 OSC2 OSC2 OSC2 81 89 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 82 90 PF7/φ PF7/φ PF7/φ PF7/φ 83 91 VSS VSS VSS VSS 84 92 85 93 86 94 87 95 88 96 89 97 90 98 AS/LCAS RD HWR PF3/LWR/ADTRG/ IRQ3 PF2/LCAS/WAIT/ BREQO PF1/BACK/BUZZ PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 AS/LCAS RD HWR PF3/LWR/ADTRG/ IRQ3 PF2/LCAS/WAIT/ BREQO PF1/BACK/BUZZ PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 AS/LCAS RD HWR PF3/LWR/ADTRG/ IRQ3 PF2/LCAS/WAIT/ BREQO PF1/BACK/BUZZ PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 — 99 NC*1 NC*1 NC*1 — 100 NC* NC* NC* NC* 91 101 AVCC AVCC AVCC AVCC 92 102 Vref Vref Vref Vref 93 103 P40/AN0 P40/AN0 P40/AN0 P40/AN0 94 104 P41/AN1 P41/AN1 P41/AN1 P41/AN1 95 105 P42/AN2 P42/AN2 P42/AN2 P42/AN2 96 106 P43/AN3 P43/AN3 P43/AN3 P43/AN3 97 107 P44/AN4 P44/AN4 P44/AN4 P44/AN4 98 108 P45/AN5 P45/AN5 P45/AN5 P45/AN5 99 109 P46/AN6/DA0 P46/AN6/DA0 P46/AN6/DA0 P46/AN6/DA0 1 1 1 PF6 PF5 PF4 PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3 PF2 PF1/BUZZ PF0/IRQ2 NC*1 1 100 110 P47/AN7/DA1 P47/AN7/DA1 P47/AN7/DA1 P47/AN7/DA1 101 111 P90/AN8 P90/AN8 P90/AN8 P90/AN8 102 112 P91/AN9 P91/AN9 P91/AN9 P91/AN9 103 113 P92/AN10 P92/AN10 P92/AN10 P92/AN10 104 114 P93/AN11 P93/AN11 P93/AN11 P93/AN11 105 115 P94/AN12 P94/AN12 P94/AN12 P94/AN12 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 19 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Pin Name TFP-120 FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 106 116 P95/AN13 P95/AN13 P95/AN13 P95/AN13 107 117 P96/AN14/DA2 P96/AN14/DA2 P96/AN14/DA2 P96/AN14/DA2 108 118 P97/AN15/DA3 P97/AN15/DA3 P97/AN15/DA3 P97/AN15/DA3 109 119 AVSS AVSS AVSS AVSS 110 120 111 121 112 122 113 123 114 124 DREQ1/CS5 DREQ1/CS5 DREQ1/CS5 DREQ1 P72/TMO0/TEND0/ P72/TMO0/TEND0/ P72/TMO0/TEND0/ P72/TMO0/TEND0 CS6 CS6 CS6 P73/TMO1/TEND1/ P73/TMO1/TEND1/ P73/TMO1/TEND1/ P73/TMO1/TEND1 CS7 CS7 CS7 P74/TMO2/MRES P74/TMO2/MRES P74/TMO2/MRES P74/TMO2/MRES 115 125 P75/TMO3/SCK3 P75/TMO3/SCK3 P75/TMO3/SCK3 P75/TMO3/SCK3 116 126 P76/RxD3 P76/RxD3 P76/RxD3 P76/RxD3 P70/TMRI01/TMCI01/ P70/TMRI01/TMCI01/ P70/TMRI01/TMCI01/ P70/TMRI01/TMCI01/ DREQ0/CS4 DREQ0/CS4 DREQ0 DREQ0/CS4 P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ 117 127 P77/TxD3 P77/TxD3 P77/TxD3 P77/TxD3 118 128 MD0 MD0 MD0 MD0 119 1 MD1 MD1 MD1 MD1 120 2 MD2 MD2 MD2 MD2 — 3 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* NC* — 4 NC* 1 NC* 1 1 NC* NC* 1 1 Notes: 1. NC pins should be connected to VSS or left open. 2. FWE is used only in the flash memory version. Leave open or connect VSS in the mask ROM version. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 20 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Table 1.2 (b) Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode (H8S/2633R) Pin No. Pin Name TFP-120 FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 1 5 A0 A0 PC0/A0 PC0 2 6 A1 A1 PC1/A1 PC1 3 7 A2 A2 PC2/A2 PC2 4 8 A3 A3 PC3/A3 PC3 5 9 VSS VSS VSS VSS 6 10 A4 A4 PC4/A4 PC4 7 11 VCL VCL VCL VCL 8 12 A5 A5 PC5/A5 PC5 9 13 A6 A6 PC6/A6/PWM0 PC6/PWM0 10 14 A7 A7 PC7/A7/PWM1 PC7/PWM1 11 15 VSS VSS VSS VSS 12 16 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/TIOCA3 13 17 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 14 18 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/TIOCB3 15 19 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/TIOCD3 17 21 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/TIOCA4 18 22 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/TIOCB4 19 23 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/TIOCA5 20 24 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/TIOCB5 21 25 PA0/A16 PA0/A16 PA0/A16 PA0 22 26 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/TxD2 23 27 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/RxD2 24 28 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/SCK2 25 29 VSS VSS VSS VSS 26 30 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/ DACK0/A20 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/ DACK0/A20 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/ DACK0/A20 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/ 27 31 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/ DACK1/A21 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/ DACK1/A21 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/ DACK1/A21 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/ 28 32 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/ TCLKA/A22 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/ TCLKA/A22 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/ TCLKA/A22 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/ TCLKA 29 33 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/ TCLKB/A23 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/ TCLKB/A23 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/ TCLKB/A23 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/ TCLKB DACK0 DACK1 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 21 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Pin Name TFP-120 FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 30 34 P14/PO12/TIOCA1/ P14/PO12/TIOCA1/ P14/PO12/TIOCA1/ P14/PO12/TIOCA1/ — 35 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* NC* — 36 NC* NC* NC* 1 NC* 31 37 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/ TCLKC P15/PO13/TIOCB1/ TCLKC P15/PO13/TIOCB1/ TCLKC P15/PO13/TIOCB1/ TCLKC 32 38 P16/PO14/TIOCA2/ PWM2/IRQ1 P16/PO14/TIOCA2/ PWM2/IRQ1 P16/PO14/TIOCA2/ PWM2/IRQ1 P16/PO14/TIOCA2/ PWM2/IRQ1 33 39 P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ PWM3/TCLKD P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ PWM3/TCLKD P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ PWM3/TCLKD P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ PWM3/TCLKD 34 40 PE0/D0 PE0/D0 PE0/D0 PE0 35 41 PE1/D1 PE1/D1 PE1/D1 PE1 36 42 PE2/D2 PE2/D2 PE2/D2 PE2 37 43 PE3/D3 PE3/D3 PE3/D3 PE3 38 44 PE4/D4 PE4/D4 PE4/D4 PE4 39 45 PE5/D5 PE5/D5 PE5/D5 PE5 40 46 PE6/D6 PE6/D6 PE6/D6 PE6 41 47 PE7/D7 PE7/D7 PE7/D7 PE7 42 48 VSS VSS VSS VSS 43 49 D8 D8 D8 PD0 IRQ0 1 IRQ0 1 IRQ0 IRQ0 1 1 44 50 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 45 51 D9 D9 D9 PD1 46 52 D10 D10 D10 PD2 47 53 D11 D11 D11 PD3 48 54 D12 D12 D12 PD4 49 55 D13 D13 D13 PD5 50 56 D14 D14 D14 PD6 51 57 D15 D15 D15 PD7 52 58 P30/TxD0/IrTxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD P30/TxD0/IrTxD 53 59 P31/RxD0/IrRxD P31/RxD0/IrRxD P31/RxD0/IrRxD P31/RxD0/IrRxD 54 60 PVCC2 PVCC2 PVCC2 PVCC2 55 61 P32/SCK0/SDA1/ P32/SCK0/SDA1/ P32/SCK0/SDA1/ P32/SCK0/SDA1/ 56 62 VSS VSS VSS VSS IRQ4 IRQ4 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 22 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 IRQ4 IRQ4 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Pin Name TFP-120 FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 57 63 P33/TxD1/SCL1 P33/TxD1/SCL1 P33/TxD1/SCL1 P33/TxD1/SCL1 58 64 P34/RxD1/SDA0 P34/RxD1/SDA0 P34/RxD1/SDA0 P34/RxD1/SDA0 59 65 P35/SCK1/SCK4/ SCL0/IRQ5 P35/SCK1/SCK4/ SCL0/IRQ5 P35/SCK1/SCK4/ SCL0/IRQ5 P35/SCK1/SCK4/ SCL0/IRQ5 60 66 P36/RxD4 P36/RxD4 P36/RxD4 P36/RxD4 *1 NC* 1 1 67 NC — 68 NC* NC* NC* NC* 61 69 P37/TxD4 P37/TxD4 P37/TxD4 P37/TxD4 62 70 PG0/CAS/IRQ6 PG0/CAS/IRQ6 PG0/CAS/IRQ6 PG0/IRQ6 63 71 PG1/CS3/OE/IRQ7 PG1/CS3/OE/IRQ7 PG1/CS3/OE/IRQ7 PG1/IRQ7 64 72 PG2/CS2 PG2/CS2 PG2/CS2 PG2 65 73 PG3/CS1 PG3/CS1 PG3/CS1 PG3 66 74 PG4/CS0 PG4/CS0 PG4/CS0 PG4 67 75 WDTOVF WDTOVF WDTOVF WDTOVF 68 76 NC*1 NC*1 NC*1 NC*1 69 77 PLLCAP PLLCAP PLLCAP PLLCAP 70 78 PLLVSS PLLVSS PLLVSS PLLVSS 71 79 RES RES RES RES 72 80 NMI NMI NMI NMI 73 81 STBY STBY STBY STBY 74 82 FWE FWE FWE FWE 75 83 XTAL XTAL XTAL XTAL 76 84 NC*1 NC*1 NC*1 NC*1 77 85 EXTAL EXTAL EXTAL EXTAL 1 NC *1 — 1 NC *1 1 78 86 VSS VSS VSS VSS 79 87 OSC1 OSC1 OSC1 OSC1 80 88 OSC2 OSC2 OSC2 OSC2 81 89 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 82 90 PF7/φ PF7/φ PF7/φ PF7/φ 83 91 84 92 85 93 VSS VSS VSS AS/LCAS RD AS/LCAS RD AS/LCAS RD VSS PF6 PF5 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 23 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Pin Name TFP-120 FP-128B Mode 4 86 94 87 95 88 96 89 97 90 98 HWR PF3/LWR/ADTRG/ IRQ3 PF2/LCAS/WAIT/ BREQO PF1/BACK/BUZZ PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 *1 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 HWR HWR PF4 PF3/LWR/ADTRG/ PF3/LWR/ADTRG/ PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3 IRQ3 PF2/LCAS/WAIT/ BREQO PF1/BACK/BUZZ PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 PF1/BUZZ PF0/IRQ2 *1 NC* 1 1 99 NC — 100 NC* NC* NC* NC* 91 101 AVCC AVCC AVCC AVCC 92 102 Vref Vref Vref Vref 93 103 P40/AN0 P40/AN0 P40/AN0 P40/AN0 94 104 P41/AN1 P41/AN1 P41/AN1 P41/AN1 95 105 P42/AN2 P42/AN2 P42/AN2 P42/AN2 96 106 P43/AN3 P43/AN3 P43/AN3 P43/AN3 97 107 P44/AN4 P44/AN4 P44/AN4 P44/AN4 1 NC PF2 — 1 NC *1 IRQ3 PF2/LCAS/WAIT/ BREQO PF1/BACK/BUZZ PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 1 98 108 P45/AN5 P45/AN5 P45/AN5 P45/AN5 99 109 P46/AN6/DA0 P46/AN6/DA0 P46/AN6/DA0 P46/AN6/DA0 100 110 P47/AN7/DA1 P47/AN7/DA1 P47/AN7/DA1 P47/AN7/DA1 101 111 P90/AN8 P90/AN8 P90/AN8 P90/AN8 102 112 P91/AN9 P91/AN9 P91/AN9 P91/AN9 103 113 P92/AN10 P92/AN10 P92/AN10 P92/AN10 104 114 P93/AN11 P93/AN11 P93/AN11 P93/AN11 105 115 P94/AN12 P94/AN12 P94/AN12 P94/AN12 106 116 P95/AN13 P95/AN13 P95/AN13 P95/AN13 107 117 P96/AN14/DA2 P96/AN14/DA2 P96/AN14/DA2 P96/AN14/DA2 108 118 P97/AN15/DA3 P97/AN15/DA3 P97/AN15/DA3 P97/AN15/DA3 109 119 AVSS AVSS AVSS AVSS 110 120 111 121 112 122 P70/TMRI01/TMCI01/ P70/TMRI01/TMCI01/ P70/TMRI01/TMCI01/ P70/TMRI01/TMCI01/ DREQ0/CS4 DREQ0/CS4 DREQ0 DREQ0/CS4 P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ DREQ1/CS5 DREQ1/CS5 DREQ1/CS5 DREQ1 P72/TMO0/TEND0/ P72/TMO0/TEND0/ P72/TMO0/TEND0/ P72/TMO0/TEND0 CS6 CS6 CS6 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 24 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Pin Name TFP-120 FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 113 123 P73/TMO1/TEND1/ P73/TMO1/TEND1/ P73/TMO1/TEND1/ P73/TMO1/TEND1 114 124 P74/TMO2/MRES P74/TMO2/MRES P74/TMO2/MRES P74/TMO2/MRES CS7 CS7 CS7 115 125 P75/TMO3/SCK3 P75/TMO3/SCK3 P75/TMO3/SCK3 P75/TMO3/SCK3 116 126 P76/RxD3 P76/RxD3 P76/RxD3 P76/RxD3 117 127 P77/TxD3 P77/TxD3 P77/TxD3 P77/TxD3 118 128 MD0 MD0 MD0 MD0 119 1 MD1 MD1 MD1 MD1 120 2 MD2 MD2 MD2 MD2 — 3 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* — 4 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 1 Note: 1. NC pins should be connected to VSS or left open. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 25 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Table 1.2 (c) Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode (H8S/2695) Pin No. Pin Name FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 5 A0 A0 PC0/A0 PC0 6 A1 A1 PC1/A1 PC1 7 A2 A2 PC2/A2 PC2 8 A3 A3 PC3/A3 PC3 9 VSS VSS VSS VSS 10 A4 A4 PC4/A4 PC4 11 VCL VCL VCL VCL 12 A5 A5 PC5/A5 PC5 13 A6 A6 PC6/A6 PC6 14 A7 A7 PC7/A7 PC7 15 VSS VSS VSS VSS 16 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 PB0/TIOCA3 17 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 18 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB1/TIOCB3 19 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB2/TIOCC3 20 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3/TIOCD3 21 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4/TIOCA4 22 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5/TIOCB4 23 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6/TIOCA5 24 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7/TIOCB5 25 PA0/A16 PA0/A16 PA0/A16 PA0 26 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1/TxD2 27 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2/RxD2 28 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3/SCK2 29 VSS VSS VSS VSS 30 P10/TIOCA0/A20 P10/TIOCA0/A20 P10/TIOCA0/A20 P10/TIOCA0 31 P11/TIOCB0/A21 P11/TIOCB0/A21 P11/TIOCB0/A21 P11/TIOCB0 32 P12/TIOCC0/ TCLKA/A22 P12/TIOCC0/ TCLKA/A22 P12/TIOCC0/ TCLKA/A22 P12/TIOCC0/ TCLKA 33 P13/TIOCD0/ TCLKB/A23 P13/TIOCD0/ TCLKB/A23 P13/TIOCD0/ TCLKB/A23 P13/TIOCD0/ TCLKB Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 26 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Pin No. FP-128B Pin Name Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 34 P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0 P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0 P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0 P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0 35 NC* 36 NC* 37 P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC 38 P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1 39 P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD 40 PE0/D0 PE0/D0 PE0/D0 PE0 41 PE1/D1 PE1/D1 PE1/D1 PE1 42 PE2/D2 PE2/D2 PE2/D2 PE2 43 PE3/D3 PE3/D3 PE3/D3 PE3 44 PE4/D4 PE4/D4 PE4/D4 PE4 45 PE5/D5 PE5/D5 PE5/D5 PE5 46 PE6/D6 PE6/D6 PE6/D6 PE6 47 PE7/D7 PE7/D7 PE7/D7 PE7 48 VSS VSS VSS VSS 49 D8 D8 D8 PD0 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1 1 NC* 1 NC* P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1 1 1 P16/TIOCA2/IRQ1 50 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 51 D9 D9 D9 PD1 52 D10 D10 D10 PD2 53 D11 D11 D11 PD3 54 D12 D12 D12 PD4 55 D13 D13 D13 PD5 56 D14 D14 D14 PD6 57 D15 D15 D15 PD7 58 P30/TxD0 P30/TxD0 P30/TxD0 P30/TxD0 59 P31/RxD0 P31/RxD0 P31/RxD0 P31/RxD0 60 PVCC2 PVCC2 PVCC2 PVCC2 61 P32/SCK0/IRQ4 P32/SCK0/IRQ4 P32/SCK0/IRQ4 P32/SCK0/IRQ4 62 VSS VSS VSS VSS 63 P33/TxD1 P33/TxD1 P33/TxD1 P33/TxD1 64 P34/RxD1 P34/RxD1 P34/RxD1 P34/RxD1 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 27 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Pin Name FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 65 P35/SCK1/SCK4/ P35/SCK1/SCK4/ P35/SCK1/SCK4/ P35/SCK1/SCK4/ 66 P36/RxD4 P36/RxD4 P36/RxD4 P36/RxD4 67 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* NC* 68 NC *1 *1 *1 NC* 69 P37/TxD4 P37/TxD4 P37/TxD4 P37/TxD4 70 PG0/IRQ6 PG0/IRQ6 PG0/IRQ6 PG0/IRQ6 71 PG1/CS3/IRQ7 PG1/CS3/IRQ7 PG1/CS3/IRQ7 PG1/IRQ7 72 PG2/CS2 PG2/CS2 PG2/CS2 PG2 73 PG3/CS1 PG3/CS1 PG3/CS1 PG3 74 PG4/CS0 PG4/CS0 PG4/CS0 PG4 75 WDTOVF WDTOVF WDTOVF WDTOVF 76 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* NC* IRQ5 IRQ5 NC IRQ5 NC IRQ5 1 1 1 77 PLLCAP PLLCAP PLLCAP PLLCAP 78 PLLVSS PLLVSS PLLVSS PLLVSS 79 RES RES RES RES 80 NMI NMI NMI NMI 81 STBY STBY STBY STBY 82 NC*2 NC*2 NC*2 NC*2 83 XTAL 84 NC* NC* NC* NC* 85 EXTAL EXTAL EXTAL EXTAL 86 VSS VSS VSS VSS 87 NC*1 NC*1 NC*1 NC*1 88 NC*1 NC*1 NC*1 NC*1 89 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 PVCC1 90 PF7/φ PF7/φ PF7/φ PF7/φ 91 VSS VSS VSS VSS AS RD HWR AS RD HWR AS RD HWR 92 93 94 1 XTAL 1 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 28 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 XTAL 1 XTAL 1 PF6 PF5 PF4 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Pin Name FP-128B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 95 PF3/LWR/ADTRG/ PF3/LWR/ADTRG/ PF3/LWR/ADTRG/ PF3/ADTRG/IRQ3 96 97 98 IRQ3 PF2/WAIT/BREQO PF1/BACK PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 *1 IRQ3 PF2/WAIT/BREQO PF1/BACK PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 PF1 PF0/IRQ2 *1 NC* 1 1 NC 100 NC* NC* NC* NC* 101 AVCC AVCC AVCC AVCC 102 Vref Vref Vref Vref 103 P40/AN0 P40/AN0 P40/AN0 P40/AN0 104 P41/AN1 P41/AN1 P41/AN1 P41/AN1 105 P42/AN2 P42/AN2 P42/AN2 P42/AN2 106 P43/AN3 P43/AN3 P43/AN3 P43/AN3 107 P44/AN4 P44/AN4 P44/AN4 P44/AN4 108 P45/AN5 P45/AN5 P45/AN5 P45/AN5 109 P46/AN6 P46/AN6 P46/AN6 P46/AN6 110 P47/AN7 P47/AN7 P47/AN7 P47/AN7 111 P90/AN8 P90/AN8 P90/AN8 P90/AN8 112 P91/AN9 P91/AN9 P91/AN9 P91/AN9 113 P92/AN10 P92/AN10 P92/AN10 P92/AN10 114 P93/AN11 P93/AN11 P93/AN11 P93/AN11 115 P94/AN12 P94/AN12 P94/AN12 P94/AN12 116 P95/AN13 P95/AN13 P95/AN13 P95/AN13 117 P96/AN14 P96/AN14 P96/AN14 P96/AN14 1 NC PF2 99 1 NC *1 IRQ3 PF2/WAIT/BREQO PF1/BACK PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 1 118 P97/AN15 P97/AN15 P97/AN15 P97/AN15 119 AVSS AVSS AVSS AVSS 120 P70/CS4 P70/CS4 P70/CS4 P70 121 P71/CS5 P71/CS5 P71/CS5 P71 122 P72/CS6 P72/CS6 P72/CS6 P72 123 P73/CS7 P73/CS7 P73/CS7 P73 124 P74/MRES P74/MRES P74/MRES P74/MRES 125 P75/SCK3 P75/SCK3 P75/SCK3 P75/SCK3 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 29 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Pin No. Pin Name FP-128B Mode 4 126 P76/RxD3 P76/RxD3 P76/RxD3 P76/RxD3 127 P77/TxD3 P77/TxD3 P77/TxD3 P77/TxD3 128 MD0 MD0 MD0 MD0 1 MD1 MD1 MD1 MD1 2 MD2 MD2 MD2 MD2 3 1 NC* 1 NC* 1 NC* NC* 4 NC* 1 NC* 1 Mode 5 1 NC* Mode 6 NC* Mode 7 1 1 Notes: 1. NC pins should be connected to VSS or left open. 2. In the flash memory version this is the FWE pin. In the mask ROM version this pin should be connected to VSS or left open. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 30 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview 1.3.3 Pin Functions Table 1.3 (a) outlines the pin functions of the H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, and H8S/2631. Table 1.3 (b) outlines the pin functions of the H8S/2633R. Table 1.3 (c) outlines the pin functions of the H8S/2695. Table 1.3 (a) Pin Functions (H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, H8S/2631) Type Symbol I/O Name and Function Power VCC Input Power supply: For connection to the power supply. All VCC pins should be connected to the system power supply. PVCC1, PVCC2 Input Port power supply pin. Connect all pins to the same power supply. VSS Input Ground: For connection to ground (0 V). All VSS pins should be connected to the system power supply (0 V). PLLVCC Input PLL power supply: Power supply for on-chip PLL oscillator. PLLVSS Input PLL ground: Ground for on-chip PLL oscillator. PLLCAP Input PLL capacitance: External capacitance pin for on-chip PLL oscillator. XTAL Input Connects to a crystal oscillator. See section 23A, Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633F), for typical connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator and external clock input. EXTAL Input Connects to a crystal oscillator. The EXTAL pin can also input an external clock. See section 23A, Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633F), for typical connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator and external clock input. OSC1 Input Subclock: Connects to a 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator. See section 23A, Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633F), for examples of connections to a crystal oscillator. OSC2 Input Subclock: Connects to a 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator. See section 23A, Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633F), for examples of connections to a crystal oscillator. Clock Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 31 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Type Symbol I/O Name and Function Clock φ Output System clock: Supplies the system clock to an external device. Operating mode control MD2 to MD0 Input Mode pins: These pins set the operating mode. The relation between the settings of pins MD2 to MD0 and the operating mode is shown below. These pins should not be changed while the H8S/2633 Group is operating. MD2 MD1 MD0 Operating Mode 0 0 0 — 1 — 0 — 1 — 0 Mode 4 1 Mode 5 0 Mode 6 1 Mode 7 1 1 0 1 System control RES Input Reset input: When this pin is driven low, the chip is reset. MRES Input Manual reset: When this pin is driven low, a transmission is made to manual reset mode. STBY Input Standby: When this pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. BREQ Input Bus request: Used by an external bus master to issue a bus request to the H8S/2633 Group. BREQO Output Bus request output: The external bus request signal used when an internal bus master accesses external space in the external bus-released state. BACK Output Bus request acknowledge: Indicates that the bus has been released to an external bus master. FWE Input Flash write enable: Pin for flash memory use (in planning stage). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 32 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Type Symbol I/O Name and Function Interrupts NMI Input Nonmaskable interrupt: Requests a nonmaskable interrupt. When this pin is not used, it should be fixed high. IRQ7 to IRQ0 Input Interrupt request 7 to 0: These pins request a maskable interrupt. Address bus A23 to A0 Output Address bus: These pins output an address. Data bus D15 to D0 I/O Data bus: These pins constitute a bidirectional data bus. Output Chip select: Selection signal for areas 0 to 7. Output Address strobe: When this pin is low, it indicates that address output on the address bus is enabled. RD Output Read: When this pin is low, it indicates that the external address space can be read. HWR Output High write/write enable/upper write enable: A strobe signal that writes to external space and indicates that the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is enabled. The 2CAS type DRAM write enable signal. The 2WE type DRAM upper write enable signal. LWR Output Low write/lower column address strobe/lower write enable: A strobe signal that writes to external space and indicates that the lower half (D7 to D0) of the data bus is enabled. The 2CAS type (LCASS = 1) DRAM lower column address strobe signal. The 2WE type DRAM lower write enable signal. CAS Output Upper column address strobe/column address strobe: The 2CAS type DRAM upper column address strobe signal. LCAS Output Lower column address strobe: The 2CAS type DRAM lower column address strobe signal. OE Output Output enable: Output enable signal for DRAM space read access. WAIT Input Wait: Requests insertion of a wait state in the bus cycle when accessing external 3-state address space. Bus control CS7 to CS0 AS Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 33 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Type DMA controller (DMAC) 16-bit timerpulse unit (TPU) Symbol I/O Name and Function Input DMA request 1,0: Requests DMAC activation. Output DMA transfer completed 1,0: Indicates DMAC data transfer end. Output DMA transfer acknowledge 1,0: DMAC single address transfer acknowledge pin. TCLKD to TCLKA Input Clock input D to A: These pins input an external clock. TIOCA0, TIOCB0, TIOCC0, TIOCD0 I/O Input capture/ output compare match A0 to D0: The TGR0A to TGR0D input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. TIOCA1, TIOCB1 I/O Input capture/ output compare match A1 and B1: The TGR1A and TGR1B input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. TIOCA2, TIOCB2 I/O Input capture/ output compare match A2 and B2: The TGR2A and TGR2B input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCC3, TIOCD3 I/O Input capture/ output compare match A3 to D3: The TGR3A to TGR3D input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. TIOCA4, TIOCB4 I/O Input capture/output compare match A4 and B4: The TGR4A and TGR4B input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. TIOCA5, TIOCB5 I/O Input capture/output compare match A5 and B5: The TGR5A and TGR5B input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. DREQ1, DREQ0 TEND1, TEND0 DACK1, DACK0 Programmable pulse generator (PPG) PO15 to PO8 Output 8-bit timer TMO0 to TMO3 Output Compare match output: The compare match output pins. TMCI01, TMCI23 Input Counter external clock input: Input pins for the external clock input to the counter. TMRI01, TMRI23 Input Counter external reset input: The counter reset input pins. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 34 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Pulse output 15 to 8: Pulse output pins. Section 1 Overview Type Symbol I/O Name and Function Output PWMX timer output: PWM D/A pulse output pins. WDTOVF Output Watchdog timer overflows: The counter overflows signal output pin in watchdog timer mode. BUZZ Output BUZZ output: Output pins for the pulse divided by the watchdog timer. TxD4, TxD3, TxD2, TxD1, TxD0 Output Transmit data (channel 0 to 4): Data output pins. 14-bit PWM timer PWM0 to (PWMX) PWM3 Watchdog timer (WDT) Serial communication interface (SCI)/ Smart Card interface RxD4, RxD3, Input RxD2, RxD1, RxD0 Receive data (channel 0 to 4): Data input pins. SCK4, SCK3, I/O SCK2, SCK1, SCK0 Serial clock (channel 0 to 4): Clock I/O pins. SCK0 output type is NMOS push-pull. IrTxD IrRxD Output/ Input IrDA transmission data/receive data: Input/output pins for the data encoded for the IrDA. I2C bus interface SCL0 (IIC) (optional) SCL1 I/O I2C clock input (channel 1, 0): 2 I C clock input/output pins. These functions have a bus driving function. SCL0's output format is an NMOS open drain. SDA0 SDA1 I/O I2C data input/output (channel 1, 0): 2 I C clock input/output pins. These functions have a bus driving function. SCL0's output format is an NMOS open drain. IrDA-equipped SCI 1 channel (SCI0) A/D converter AN15 to AN0 Input Analog 15 to 0: Analog input pins. ADTRG Input A/D conversion external trigger input: Pin for input of an external trigger to start A/D conversion. D/A converter DA3 to DA0 Output Analog output: Analog output pins for D/A converter. A/D converter, D/A converter AVCC Input A/D converter and D/A converter power supply pin. When the A/D converter and D/A converter are not used, this pin should be connected to the system power supply (+5 V). AVSS Input Analog circuit ground and reference voltage A/D converter and D/A converter ground and reference voltage. Connect to system power supply (0 V). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 35 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Type Symbol I/O Name and Function A/D converter, D/A converter Vref Input A/D converter and D/A converter reference voltage input pin. When the A/D converter and D/A converter are not used, this pin should be connected to the system power supply (+5 V). I/O ports P17 to P10 I/O Port 1: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port 1 data direction register (P1DDR). P37 to P30 I/O Port 3: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port 3 data direction register (P3DDR). P47 to P40 Input Port 4: An 8-bit input port. P77 to P70 I/O Port 7: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port 7 data direction register (P7DDR). P97 to P90 Input Port 9: An 8-bit input port. PA3 to PA0 I/O Port A: A 4-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port A data direction register (PADDR). PB7 to PB0 I/O Port B: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port B data direction register (PBDDR). PC7 to PC0 I/O Port C: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port C data direction register (PCDDR). PD7 to PD0 I/O Port D: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port D data direction register (PDDDR). PE7 to PE0 I/O Port E: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port E data direction register (PEDDR). PF7 to PF0 I/O Port F: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port F data direction register (PFDDR). PG4 to PG0 I/O Port G: An 5-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port G data direction register (PGDDR). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 36 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Table 1.3 (b) Pin Functions (H8S/2633R) Type Symbol I/O Name and Function Power VCL Output On-chip power supply stabilizer pin: The VCL pin need not be connected to the power supply. Connect this pin to VSS via a 0.1 µF capacitor (placed close to the pins). PVCC1, PVCC2 Input Port power supply pin. Connect all pins to the same power supply. VSS Input Ground: For connection to ground (0 V). All VSS pins should be connected to the system power supply (0 V). PLLVSS Input PLL ground: Ground for on-chip PLL oscillator. PLLCAP Input PLL capacitance: External capacitance pin for on-chip PLL oscillator. XTAL Input Connects to a crystal oscillator. See section 23B, Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633R, H8S/2695), for typical connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator and external clock input. EXTAL Input Connects to a crystal oscillator. The EXTAL pin can also input an external clock. See section 23B, Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633R, H8S/2695), for typical connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator and external clock input. OSC1 Input Subclock: Connects to a 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator. See section 23B, Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633R, H8S/2695), for examples of connections to a crystal oscillator. OSC2 Input Subclock: Connects to a 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator. See section 23B, Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633R, H8S/2695), for examples of connections to a crystal oscillator. φ Output System clock: Supplies the system clock to an external device. Clock Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 37 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Type Symbol I/O Name and Function Operating mode control MD2 to MD0 Input Mode pins: These pins set the operating mode. The relation between the settings of pins MD2 to MD0 and the operating mode is shown below. These pins should not be changed while the H8S/2633 Group is operating. MD2 MD1 MD0 Operating Mode 0 0 0 — 1 — 0 — 1 — 0 Mode 4 1 Mode 5 0 Mode 6 1 Mode 7 1 1 0 1 System control Interrupts Address bus RES Input Reset input: When this pin is driven low, the chip is reset. MRES Input Manual reset: When this pin is driven low, a transmission is made to manual reset mode. STBY Input Standby: When this pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. BREQ Input Bus request: Used by an external bus master to issue a bus request to the H8S/2633 Group. BREQO Output Bus request output: The external bus request signal used when an internal bus master accesses external space in the external bus-released state. BACK Output Bus request acknowledge: Indicates that the bus has been released to an external bus master. FWE Input Flash write enable: Pin for flash memory use (in planning stage). NMI Input Nonmaskable interrupt: Requests a nonmaskable interrupt. When this pin is not used, it should be fixed high. IRQ7 to IRQ0 Input Interrupt request 7 to 0: These pins request a maskable interrupt. A23 to A0 Output Address bus: These pins output an address. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 38 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Type Symbol I/O Name and Function Data bus D15 to D0 I/O Data bus: These pins constitute a bidirectional data bus. Output Chip select: Selection signal for areas 0 to 7. Output Address strobe: When this pin is low, it indicates that address output on the address bus is enabled. RD Output Read: When this pin is low, it indicates that the external address space can be read. HWR Output High write/write enable/upper write enable: A strobe signal that writes to external space and indicates that the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is enabled. The 2CAS type DRAM write enable signal. The 2WE type DRAM upper write enable signal. LWR Output Low write/lower column address strobe/lower write enable: A strobe signal that writes to external space and indicates that the lower half (D7 to D0) of the data bus is enabled. The 2CAS type (LCASS = 1) DRAM lower column address strobe signal. The 2WE type DRAM lower write enable signal. CAS Output Upper column address strobe/column address strobe: The 2CAS type DRAM upper column address strobe signal. LCAS Output Lower column address strobe: The 2CAS type DRAM lower column address strobe signal. OE Output Output enable: Output enable signal for DRAM space read access. WAIT Input Wait: Requests insertion of a wait state in the bus cycle when accessing external 3-state address space. Input DMA request 1,0: Requests DMAC activation. Output DMA transfer completed 1,0: Indicates DMAC data transfer end. Output DMA transfer acknowledge 1,0: DMAC single address transfer acknowledge pin. Bus control DMA controller (DMAC) CS7 to CS0 AS DREQ1, DREQ0 TEND1, TEND0 DACK1, DACK0 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 39 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Type Symbol I/O Name and Function 16-bit timerpulse unit (TPU) TCLKD to TCLKA Input Clock input D to A: These pins input an external clock. TIOCA0, TIOCB0, TIOCC0, TIOCD0 I/O Input capture/ output compare match A0 to D0: The TGR0A to TGR0D input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. TIOCA1, TIOCB1 I/O Input capture/ output compare match A1 and B1: The TGR1A and TGR1B input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. TIOCA2, TIOCB2 I/O Input capture/ output compare match A2 and B2: The TGR2A and TGR2B input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCC3, TIOCD3 I/O Input capture/ output compare match A3 to D3: The TGR3A to TGR3D input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. TIOCA4, TIOCB4 I/O Input capture/output compare match A4 and B4: The TGR4A and TGR4B input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. TIOCA5, TIOCB5 I/O Input capture/output compare match A5 and B5: The TGR5A and TGR5B input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. Programmable pulse generator (PPG) PO15 to PO8 Output Pulse output 15 to 8: Pulse output pins. 8-bit timer TMO0 to TMO3 Output Compare match output: The compare match output pins. TMCI01, TMCI23 Input Counter external clock input: Input pins for the external clock input to the counter. TMRI01, TMRI23 Input Counter external reset input: The counter reset input pins. Output PWMX timer output: PWM D/A pulse output pins. WDTOVF Output Watchdog timer overflows: The counter overflows signal output pin in watchdog timer mode. BUZZ Output BUZZ output: Output pins for the pulse divided by the watchdog timer. 14-bit PWM timer PWM0 to (PWMX) PWM3 Watchdog timer (WDT) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 40 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Type Symbol I/O Name and Function Serial communication interface (SCI)/ Smart Card interface TxD4, TxD3, TxD2, TxD1, TxD0 Output Transmit data (channel 0 to 4): Data output pins. RxD4, RxD3, Input RxD2, RxD1, RxD0 Receive data (channel 0 to 4): Data input pins. SCK4, SCK3, I/O SCK2, SCK1, SCK0 Serial clock (channel 0 to 4): Clock I/O pins. SCK0 output type is NMOS push-pull. IrTxD IrRxD Output/ Input IrDA transmission data/receive data: Input/output pins for the data encoded for the IrDA. I2C bus interface SCL0 (IIC) (optional) SCL1 I/O I2C clock input (channel 1, 0): 2 I C clock input/output pins. These functions have a bus driving function. SCL0's output format is an NMOS open drain. SDA0 SDA1 I/O I2C data input/output (channel 1, 0): I2C clock input/output pins. These functions have a bus driving function. SCL0's output format is an NMOS open drain. IrDA-equipped SCI 1 channel (SCI0) A/D converter AN15 to AN0 Input ADTRG Input Analog 15 to 0: Analog input pins. A/D conversion external trigger input: Pin for input of an external trigger to start A/D conversion. D/A converter DA3 to DA0 Output Analog output: Analog output pins for D/A converter. A/D converter, D/A converter AVCC Input A/D converter and D/A converter power supply pin. When the A/D converter and D/A converter are not used, this pin should be connected to the system power supply (+5 V). AVSS Input Analog circuit ground and reference voltage A/D converter and D/A converter ground and reference voltage. Connect to system power supply (0 V). Vref Input A/D converter and D/A converter reference voltage input pin. When the A/D converter and D/A converter are not used, this pin should be connected to the system power supply (+5 V). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 41 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Type Symbol I/O Name and Function I/O ports P17 to P10 I/O Port 1: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port 1 data direction register (P1DDR). P37 to P30 I/O Port 3: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port 3 data direction register (P3DDR). P47 to P40 Input Port 4: An 8-bit input port. P77 to P70 I/O Port 7: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port 7 data direction register (P7DDR). P97 to P90 Input Port 9: An 8-bit input port. PA3 to PA0 I/O Port A: A 4-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port A data direction register (PADDR). PB7 to PB0 I/O Port B: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port B data direction register (PBDDR). PC7 to PC0 I/O Port C: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port C data direction register (PCDDR). PD7 to PD0 I/O Port D: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port D data direction register (PDDDR). PE7 to PE0 I/O Port E: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port E data direction register (PEDDR). PF7 to PF0 I/O Port F: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port F data direction register (PFDDR). PG4 to PG0 I/O Port G: An 5-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port G data direction register (PGDDR). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 42 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Table 1.3 (c) Pin Functions (H8S/2695) Type Symbol I/O Name and Function Power VCL Output On-chip power supply stabilizer pin: The VCL pin need not be connected to the power supply. Connect this pin to VSS via a 0.1 µF capacitor (placed close to the pins). PVCC Input Port power supply pin. Connect all pins to the same power supply. VSS Input Ground: For connection to ground (0 V). All VSS pins should be connected to the system power supply (0 V). PLLVSS Input PLL ground: Ground for on-chip PLL oscillator. PLLCAP Input PLL capacitance: External capacitance pin for on-chip PLL oscillator. XTAL Input Connects to a crystal oscillator. See section 23B, Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633R, H8S/2695), for typical connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator and external clock input. EXTAL Input Connects to a crystal oscillator. The EXTAL pin can also input an external clock. See section 23B, Clock Pulse Generator (H8S/2633R, H8S/2695), for typical connection diagrams for a crystal oscillator and external clock input. φ Output System clock: Supplies the system clock to an external device. MD2 to MD0 Input Mode pins: These pins set the operating mode. The relation between the settings of pins MD2 to MD0 and the operating mode is shown below. These pins should not be changed while the H8S/2633 Group is operating. Clock Operating mode control MD2 MD1 MD0 Operating Mode 0 0 0 — 1 — 1 0 — 1 — 1 0 1 0 Mode 4 1 Mode 5 0 Mode 6 1 Mode 7 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 43 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Type Symbol I/O Name and Function System control RES Input Reset input: When this pin is driven low, the chip is reset. MRES Input Manual reset: When this pin is driven low, a transmission is made to manual reset mode. STBY Input Standby: When this pin is driven low, a transition is made to hardware standby mode. BREQ Input Bus request: Used by an external bus master to issue a bus request to the H8S/2633 Group. BREQO Output Bus request output: The external bus request signal used when an internal bus master accesses external space in the external bus-released state. BACK Output Bus request acknowledge: Indicates that the bus has been released to an external bus master. NMI Input Nonmaskable interrupt: Requests a nonmaskable interrupt. When this pin is not used, it should be fixed high. IRQ7 to IRQ0 Input Interrupt request 7 to 0: These pins request a maskable interrupt. Address bus A23 to A0 Output Address bus: These pins output an address. Data bus D15 to D0 I/O Data bus: These pins constitute a bidirectional data bus. Output Chip select: Selection signal for areas 0 to 7. Output Address strobe: When this pin is low, it indicates that address output on the address bus is enabled. RD Output Read: When this pin is low, it indicates that the external address space can be read. HWR Output High write/write enable/upper write enable: A strobe signal that writes to external space and indicates that the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is enabled. The 2CAS type DRAM write enable signal. The 2WE type DRAM upper write enable signal. Interrupts Bus control CS7 to CS0 AS Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 44 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Type Symbol I/O Name and Function Bus control LWR Output Low write/lower column address strobe/lower write enable: A strobe signal that writes to external space and indicates that the lower half (D7 to D0) of the data bus is enabled. The 2CAS type (LCASS = 1) DRAM lower column address strobe signal. The 2WE type DRAM lower write enable signal. WAIT Input Wait: Requests insertion of a wait state in the bus cycle when accessing external 3-state address space. TCLKD to TCLKA Input Clock input D to A: These pins input an external clock. TIOCA0, TIOCB0, TIOCC0, TIOCD0 I/O Input capture/ output compare match A0 to D0: The TGR0A to TGR0D input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. TIOCA1, TIOCB1 I/O Input capture/ output compare match A1 and B1: The TGR1A and TGR1B input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. TIOCA2, TIOCB2 I/O Input capture/ output compare match A2 and B2: The TGR2A and TGR2B input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCC3, TIOCD3 I/O Input capture/ output compare match A3 to D3: The TGR3A to TGR3D input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. TIOCA4, TIOCB4 I/O Input capture/output compare match A4 and B4: The TGR4A and TGR4B input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. TIOCA5, TIOCB5 I/O Input capture/output compare match A5 and B5: The TGR5A and TGR5B input capture input or output compare output, or PWM output pins. Output Watchdog timer overflows: The counter overflows signal output pin in watchdog timer mode. 16-bit timerpulse unit (TPU) Watchdog timer (WDT) WDTOVF Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 45 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Type Symbol I/O Name and Function Serial communication interface (SCI)/ Smart Card interface TxD4, TxD3, TxD2, TxD1, TxD0 Output Transmit data (channel 0, 1, 2): Data output pins. A/D converter RxD4, RxD3, Input RxD2, RxD1, RxD0 Receive data (channel 0, 1, 2): Data input pins. SCK4, SCK3, I/O SCK2, SCK1, SCK0 Serial clock (channel 0, 1, 2): Clock I/O pins. SCK0 output type is NMOS push-pull. AN15 to AN0 Input Analog 15 to 0: Analog input pins. ADTRG Input A/D conversion external trigger input: Pin for input of an external trigger to start A/D conversion. AVCC Input A/D converter power supply pin. When the A/D converter are not used, this pin should be connected to the system power supply (+5 V). AVSS Input Analog circuit ground and reference voltage A/D converter ground and reference voltage. Connect to system power supply (0 V). Vref Input A/D converter reference voltage input pin. When the A/D converter are not used, this pin should be connected to the system power supply (+5 V). I/O ports P17 to P10 I/O Port 1: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port 1 data direction register (P1DDR). P37 to P30 I/O Port 3: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port 3 data direction register (P3DDR). P47 to P40 Input Port 4: An 8-bit input port. P77 to P70 I/O Port 7: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port 7 data direction register (P7DDR). P97 to P90 Input Port 9: An 8-bit input port. PA3 to PA0 I/O Port A: A 4-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port A data direction register (PADDR). PB7 to PB0 I/O Port B: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port B data direction register (PBDDR). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 46 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Type Symbol I/O Name and Function I/O ports PC7 to PC0 I/O Port C: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port C data direction register (PCDDR). PD7 to PD0 I/O Port D: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port D data direction register (PDDDR). PE7 to PE0 I/O Port E: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port E data direction register (PEDDR). PF7 to PF0 I/O Port F: An 8-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port F data direction register (PFDDR). PG4 to PG0 I/O Port G: An 5-bit I/O port. Input or output can be designated for each bit by means of the port G data direction register (PGDDR). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 47 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 1 Overview Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 48 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Section 2 CPU 2.1 Overview The H8S/2600 CPU is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that is upward-compatible with the H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs. The H8S/2600 CPU has sixteen 16-bit general registers, can address a 16-Mbyte (architecturally 4-Gbyte) linear address space, and is ideal for realtime control. 2.1.1 Features The H8S/2600 CPU has the following features. • Upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs Can execute H8/300 and H8/300H object programs • General-register architecture Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) • Sixty-nine basic instructions 8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions Multiply and divide instructions Powerful bit-manipulation instructions Multiply-and-accumulate instruction • Eight addressing modes Register direct [Rn] Register indirect [@ERn] Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:32,ERn)] Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @–ERn] Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32] Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32] Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)] Memory indirect [@@aa:8] • 16-Mbyte address space Program: 16 Mbytes Data: 16 Mbytes (4 Gbytes architecturally) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 49 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU • High-speed operation All frequently-used instructions execute in one or two states Maximum clock rate: 25 MHz (H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, H8S/2631), 28 MHz (H8S/2633R, H8S/2695) 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 40 ns (25 MHz), 35 ns (28 MHz) 8 × 8-bit register-register multiply: 120 ns (25 MHz), 105 ns (28 MHz) 16 ÷ 8-bit register-register divide: 480 ns (25 MHz), 420 ns (28 MHz) 16 × 16-bit register-register multiply: 160 ns (25 MHz), 140 ns (28 MHz) 32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide: 800 ns (25 MHz), 700 ns (28 MHz) • Two CPU operating modes Normal mode* Advanced mode Note: * Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. • Power-down state Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction CPU clock speed selection 2.1.2 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU The differences between the H8S/2600 CPU and the H8S/2000 CPU are as shown below. • Register configuration The MAC register is supported only by the H8S/2600 CPU. • Basic instructions The four instructions MAC, CLRMAC, LDMAC, and STMAC are supported only by the H8S/2600 CPU. • Number of execution states The number of execution states of the MULXU and MULXS instructions is different in each CPU. Execution States Instruction Mnemonic H8S/2600 H8S/2000 MULXU MULXU.B Rs, Rd 3 12 MULXS MULXU.W Rs, ERd 4 20 MULXS.B Rs, Rd 4 13 MULXS.W Rs, ERd 5 21 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 50 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU In addition, there are differences in address space, CCR and EXR register functions, power-down modes, etc., depending on the model. 2.1.3 Differences from H8/300 CPU In comparison to the H8/300 CPU, the H8S/2600 CPU has the following enhancements. • More general registers and control registers Eight 16-bit expanded registers, and one 8-bit and two 32-bit control registers, have been added. • Expanded address space Normal mode* supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the H8/300 CPU. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte address space. Note: * Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. • Enhanced addressing The addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-Mbyte address space. • Enhanced instructions Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced. Signed multiply and divide instructions have been added. A multiply-and-accumulate instruction has been added. Two-bit shift instructions have been added. Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added. A test and set instruction has been added. • Higher speed Basic instructions execute twice as fast. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 51 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU 2.1.4 Differences from H8/300H CPU In comparison to the H8/300H CPU, the H8S/2600 CPU has the following enhancements. • Additional control register One 8-bit and two 32-bit control registers have been added • Enhanced instructions Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced A multiply-and-accumulate instruction has been added Two-bit shift instructions have been added Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added A test and set instruction has been added • Higher speed Basic instructions execute twice as fast 2.2 CPU Operating Modes The H8S/2600 CPU has two operating modes: normal and advanced. Normal mode* supports a maximum 64-kbyte address space. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte total address space (architecturally a maximum 16-Mbyte program area and a maximum of 4 Gbytes for program and data areas combined). The mode is selected by the mode pins of the microcontroller. Note: * Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. Normal mode* Maximum 64 kbytes, program and data areas combined CPU operating modes Advanced mode Maximum 16-Mbytes for program and data areas combined Note: * Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. Figure 2.1 CPU Operating Modes Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 52 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU (1) Normal Mode (Not Available in the H8S/2633 Group) The exception vector table and stack have the same structure as in the H8/300 CPU. Address Space: A maximum address space of 64 kbytes can be accessed. Extended Registers (En): The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers. When En is used as a 16-bit register it can contain any value, even when the corresponding general register (Rn) is used as an address register. If the general register is referenced in the register indirect addressing mode with pre-decrement (@–Rn) or post-increment (@Rn+) and a carry or borrow occurs, however, the value in the corresponding extended register (En) will be affected. Instruction Set: All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Only the lower 16 bits of effective addresses (EA) are valid. Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses: In normal mode the top area starting at H'0000 is allocated to the exception vector table. One branch address is stored per 16 bits (figure 2.2). The exception vector table differs depending on the microcontroller. For details of the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception Handling. H'0000 H'0001 H'0002 H'0003 H'0004 H'0005 H'0006 H'0007 H'0008 H'0009 H'000A H'000B Power-on reset exception vector Manual reset exception vector (Reserved for system use) Exception vector table Exception vector 1 Exception vector 2 Figure 2.2 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode) The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that contains a branch address. In normal mode the operand is a 16-bit word operand, providing a 16Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 53 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU bit branch address. Branch addresses can be stored in the top area from H'0000 to H'00FF. Note that this area is also used for the exception vector table. Stack Structure: When the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the PC, condition-code register (CCR), and extended control register (EXR) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.3. When EXR is invalid, it is not pushed onto the stack. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling. SP PC (16 bits) EXR*1 Reserved*1*3 CCR CCR*3 SP *2 (SP ) PC (16 bits) (a) Subroutine Branch (b) Exception Handling Notes: 1. When EXR is not used it is not stored on the stack. 2. SP when EXR is not used. 3. Ignored when returning. Figure 2.3 Stack Structure in Normal Mode (2) Advanced Mode Address Space: Linear access is provided to a 16-Mbyte maximum address space (architecturally a maximum 16-Mbyte program area and a maximum 4-Gbyte data area, with a maximum of 4 Gbytes for program and data areas combined). Extended Registers (En): The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit segments of 32-bit registers or address registers. Instruction Set: All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 54 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses: In advanced mode the top area starting at H'00000000 is allocated to the exception vector table in units of 32 bits. In each 32 bits, the upper 8 bits are ignored and a branch address is stored in the lower 24 bits (figure 2.4). For details of the exception vector table, see section 4, Exception Handling. H'00000000 Reserved Power-on reset exception vector H'00000003 H'00000004 Reserved Manual reset exception vector H'00000007 H'00000008 Exception vector table H'0000000B (Reserved for system use) H'0000000C H'00000010 Reserved Exception vector 1 Figure 2.4 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode) The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that contains a branch address. In advanced mode the operand is a 32-bit longword operand, providing a 32-bit branch address. The upper 8 bits of these 32 bits are a reserved area that is regarded as H'00. Branch addresses can be stored in the area from H'00000000 to H'000000FF. Note that the first part of this range is also the exception vector table. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 55 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Stack Structure: In advanced mode, when the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the PC, condition-code register (CCR), and extended control register (EXR) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as shown in figure 2.5. When EXR is invalid, it is not pushed onto the stack. For details, see section 4, Exception Handling. EXR*1 Reserved*1*3 CCR SP SP Reserved PC (24 bits) (a) Subroutine Branch *2 (SP ) PC (24 bits) (b) Exception Handling Notes: 1. When EXR is not used it is not stored on the stack. 2. SP when EXR is not used. 3. Ignored when returning. Figure 2.5 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 56 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU 2.3 Address Space Figure 2.6 shows a memory map of the H8S/2600 CPU. The H8S/2600 CPU provides linear access to a maximum 64-kbyte address space in normal mode, and a maximum 16-Mbyte (architecturally 4-Gbyte) address space in advanced mode. H'0000 H'00000000 H'FFFF Program area H'00FFFFFF Data area Cannot be used by the H8S/2633 Group H'FFFFFFFF (b) Advanced Mode (a) Normal Mode* Note: * Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. Figure 2.6 Memory Map Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 57 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU 2.4 Register Configuration 2.4.1 Overview The CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.7. There are two types of registers: general registers and control registers. General Registers (Rn) and Extended Registers (En) 15 07 07 0 ER0 E0 R0H R0L ER1 E1 R1H R1L ER2 E2 R2H R2L ER3 E3 R3H R3L ER4 E4 R4H R4L ER5 E5 R5H R5L ER6 E6 R6H R6L ER7 (SP) E7 R7H R7L Control Registers (CR) 23 0 PC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EXR T — — — — I2 I1 I0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CCR I UI H U N Z V C 41 63 Sign extension MAC 32 MACH MACL 31 Legend: SP: PC: EXR: T: I2 to I0: CCR: I: UI: 0 Stack pointer Program counter Extended control register Trace bit Interrupt mask bits Condition-code register Interrupt mask bit User bit or interrupt mask bit* H: U: N: Z: V: C: MAC: Half-carry flag User bit Negative flag Zero flag Overflow flag Carry flag Multiply-accumulate register Note: * Cannot be used as an interrupt mask bit in the H8S/2633 Group. Figure 2.7 CPU Registers Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 58 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU 2.4.2 General Registers The CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally alike and can be used as both address registers and data registers. When a general register is used as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. When the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or address registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7). The ER registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R (R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 16-bit registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers. The R registers divide into 8-bit general registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and RL (R0L to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 8-bit registers. Figure 2.8 illustrates the usage of the general registers. The usage of each register can be selected independently. • Address registers • 32-bit registers • 16-bit registers • 8-bit registers E registers (extended registers) (E0 to E7) RH registers (R0H to R7H) ER registers (ER0 to ER7) R registers (R0 to R7) RL registers (R0L to R7L) Figure 2.8 Usage of General Registers General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2.9 shows the stack. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 59 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Free area SP (ER7) Stack area Figure 2.9 Stack 2.4.3 Control Registers The control registers are the 24-bit program counter (PC), 8-bit extended control register (EXR), 8-bit condition-code register (CCR), and 64-bit multiply-accumulate register (MAC). (1) Program Counter (PC) This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored. (When an instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0.) (2) Extended Control Register (EXR) This 8-bit register contains the trace bit (T) and three interrupt mask bits (I2 to I0). Bit 7—Trace Bit (T): Selects trace mode. When this bit is cleared to 0, instructions are executed in sequence. When this bit is set to 1, a trace exception is generated each time an instruction is executed. Bits 6 to 3—Reserved: They are always read as 1. Bits 2 to 0—Interrupt Mask Bits (I2 to I0): These bits designate the interrupt mask level (0 to 7). For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller. Operations can be performed on the EXR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. All interrupts, including NMI, are disabled for three states after one of these instructions is executed, except for STC. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 60 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU (3) Condition-Code Register (CCR) This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit (I) and half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags. Bit 7—Interrupt Mask Bit (I): Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1. (NMI is accepted regardless of the I bit setting.) The I bit is set to 1 by hardware at the start of an exceptionhandling sequence. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller. Bit 6—User Bit or Interrupt Mask Bit (UI): Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. This bit can also be used as an interrupt mask bit. For details, refer to section 5, Interrupt Controller. Bit 5—Half-Carry Flag (H): When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B, or NEG.B instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.L, SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Bit 4—User Bit (U): Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. Bit 3—Negative Flag (N): Stores the value of the most significant bit (sign bit) of data. Bit 2—Zero Flag (Z): Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data. Bit 1—Overflow Flag (V): Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 at other times. Bit 0—Carry Flag (C): Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Used by: • Add instructions, to indicate a carry • Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow • Shift and rotate instructions, to store the value shifted out of the end bit The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit manipulation instructions. Some instructions leave some or all of the flag bits unchanged. For the action of each instruction on the flag bits, refer to Appendix A.1, Instruction List. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 61 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching conditions for conditional branch (Bcc) instructions. (4) Multiply-Accumulate Register (MAC) This 64-bit register stores the results of multiply-and-accumulate operations. It consists of two 32bit registers denoted MACH and MACL. The lower 10 bits of MACH are valid; the upper bits are a sign extension. 2.4.4 Initial Register Values Reset exception handling loads the CPU's program counter (PC) from the vector table, clears the trace bit in EXR to 0, and sets the interrupt mask bits in CCR and EXR to 1. The other CCR bits and the general registers are not initialized. In particular, the stack pointer (ER7) is not initialized. The stack pointer should therefore be initialized by an MOV.L instruction executed immediately after a reset. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 62 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU 2.5 Data Formats The CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword) data. Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, …, 7) of byte operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit BCD data. 2.5.1 General Register Data Formats Figure 2.10 shows the data formats in general registers. Data Type Register Number Data Format 1-bit data RnH 7 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Don’t care Don’t care 7 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1-bit data 4-bit BCD data RnL RnH 4 3 7 Upper 4-bit BCD data 0 Lower Don’t care RnL Byte data RnH 4 3 7 Upper Don’t care 7 0 Lower 0 Don’t care MSB Byte data LSB RnL 7 0 Don’t care MSB LSB Figure 2.10 General Register Data Formats Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 63 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Data Type Register Number Word data Rn Word data En Data Format 15 0 MSB 15 LSB 0 MSB LSB Longword data ERn 31 16 15 MSB En 0 Rn Legend: ERn: En: Rn: RnH: RnL: MSB: LSB: General register ER General register E General register R General register RH General register RL Most significant bit Least significant bit Figure 2.10 General Register Data Formats (cont) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 64 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 LSB Section 2 CPU 2.5.2 Memory Data Formats Figure 2.11 shows the data formats in memory. The CPU can access word data and longword data in memory, but word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, no address error occurs but the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so the access starts at the preceding address. This also applies to instruction fetches. Data Type Data Format Address 7 1-bit data Address L Byte data Address L MSB Word data 7 0 6 5 4 2 1 0 LSB Address 2M MSB Address 2M + 1 Longword data 3 LSB Address 2N MSB Address 2N + 1 Address 2N + 2 Address 2N + 3 LSB Figure 2.11 Memory Data Formats When ER7 is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word size or longword size. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 65 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU 2.6 Instruction Set 2.6.1 Overview The H8S/2600 CPU has 69 types of instructions. The instructions are classified by function in table 2.1. Table 2.1 Instruction Classification Function Instructions Size Types Data transfer MOV POP*1, PUSH*1 BWL 5 LDM*5, STM*5 MOVFPE*3, MOVTPE*3 L ADD, SUB, CMP, NEG BWL ADDX, SUBX, DAA, DAS B INC, DEC BWL Arithmetic operations WL B 23 ADDS, SUBS L MULXU, DIVXU, MULXS, DIVXS BW EXTU, EXTS TAS*4 WL B MAC, LDMAC, STMAC, CLRMAC — Logic operations AND, OR, XOR, NOT BWL 4 Shift SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL, ROTXR BWL 8 Bit manipulation B 14 Branch BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BLD, BILD, BST, BIST, BAND, BIAND, BOR, BIOR, BXOR, BIXOR Bcc*2, JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS — 5 System control TRAPA, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, XORC, NOP — 9 Block data transfer EEPMOV — 1 Legend: B: Byte W: Word L: Longword Notes: 1. POP.W Rn and PUSH.W Rn are identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn and MOV.W Rn, @-SP. POP.L ERn and PUSH.L ERn are identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn and MOV.L ERn, @-SP. 2. Bcc is the general name for conditional branch instructions. 3. Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. 4. When using the TAS instruction, use register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5. 5. Only register ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 66 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Arithmetic operations — L BWL B — ADDX, SUBX ADDS, SUBS BWL BWL — — — — TAS*2 MAC CLRMAC LDMAC, STMAC — — NEG BW — EXTU, EXTS BW — MULXU, DIVXU MULXS, DIVXS L — — — WL B — — INC, DEC DAA, DAS B BWL BWL WL — ADD, CMP MOVEPE*1, MOVTPE*1 — BWL Rn SUB — — LDM*3, STM*3 BWL — #xx MOV BWL @ERn — — — B — — — — — — — — — — — — — BWL @(d:16,ERn) — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — BWL @(d:32,ERn) — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — BWL @–ERn/@ERn+ — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — B @aa:8 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — BWL @aa:16 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — B — — — @aa:24 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — BWL @aa:32 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — @(d:8,PC) — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — @(d:16,PC) — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — @@aa:8 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — L WL Table 2.2 POP, PUSH Instruction 2.6.2 Data transfer Function Addressing Modes Section 2 CPU Instructions and Addressing Modes Table 2.2 indicates the combinations of instructions and addressing modes that the H8S/2600 CPU can use. Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 67 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 68 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 — — NOP Block data transfer — @ERn — — — W W — — — — — — B — — — @(d:16,ERn) — — — W W — — — — — — — — — — @(d:32,ERn) — — — W W — — — — — — — — — — — — — W W — — — — — — — — — — @–ERn/@ERn+ Notes: 1. Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. 2. When using the TAS instruction, use register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5. 3. Only register ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. Legend: B: Byte W: Word L: Longword — — B ANDC, ORC, XORC B B B — LDC — — — — RTE SLEEP — — — — RTS TRAPA STC System control — — JMP, JSR — — Bcc, BSR B — Bit manipulation Branch BWL BWL — NOT BWL — BWL #xx AND, OR, XOR Instruction Rn Shift Logic operations Function Addressing Modes @aa:8 — — — — — — — — — — — B — — — @aa:16 — — — W W — — — — — — B — — — @aa:24 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — @aa:32 — — — W W — — — — — — B — — — @(d:8,PC) — — — — — — — — — — — — — — @(d:16,PC) — — — — — — — — — — — — — — @@aa:8 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — BW — — — — — — — — — Section 2 CPU Section 2 CPU 2.6.3 Table of Instructions Classified by Function Table 2.3 summarizes the instructions in each functional category. The notation used in table 2.3 is defined below. Operation Notation Rs General register (destination)* General register (source)* Rn General register* Rd ERn General register (32-bit register) MAC Multiply-accumulate register (32-bit register) (EAd) Destination operand (EAs) Source operand EXR Extended control register CCR Condition-code register N N (negative) flag in CCR Z Z (zero) flag in CCR V V (overflow) flag in CCR C C (carry) flag in CCR PC Program counter SP Stack pointer #IMM Immediate data disp Displacement + Addition – Subtraction × Multiplication ÷ Division ∧ Logical AND ∨ Logical OR ⊕ Logical exclusive OR → Move ¬ NOT (logical complement) :8/:16/:24/:32 8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length Note: * General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0 to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers (ER0 to ER7). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 69 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Table 2.3 Instructions Classified by Function Type Instruction Size*1 Function Data transfer MOV B/W/L (EAs) → Rd, Rs → (Ead) Moves data between two general registers or between a general register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register. MOVFPE B Cannot be used in the H8S/2633 Group. MOVTPE B Cannot be used in the H8S/2633 Group. POP W/L @SP+ → Rn Pops a register from the stack. POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn. POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn. PUSH W/L Rn → @–SP Pushes a register onto the stack. PUSH.W Rn is identical to MOV.W Rn, @–SP. PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @–SP. LDM*2 L @SP+ → Rn (register list) Pops two or more general registers from the stack. STM*2 L Rn (register list) → @–SP Pushes two or more general registers onto the stack. ADD SUB B/W/L Rd ± Rs → Rd, Rd ± #IMM → Rd Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. (Immediate byte data cannot be subtracted from byte data in a general register. Use the SUBX or ADD instruction.) ADDX SUBX B Rd ± Rs ± C → Rd, Rd ± #IMM ± C → Rd Performs addition or subtraction with carry or borrow on byte data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. INC DEC B/W/L Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (Byte operands can be incremented or decremented by 1 only.) ADDS SUBS L Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd, Rd ± 4 → Rd Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register. DAA DAS B Rd decimal adjust → Rd Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by referring to the CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data. Arithmetic operations Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 70 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Type Instruction Size*1 Function Arithmetic operations MULXU B/W Rd × Rs → Rd Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits. MULXS B/W Rd × Rs → Rd Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits. DIVXU B/W Rd ÷ Rs → Rd Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits ÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit quotient and 16bit remainder. DIVXS B/W Rd ÷ Rs → Rd Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits ÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit quotient and 16bit remainder. CMP B/W/L Rd – Rs, Rd – #IMM Compares data in a general register with data in another general register or with immediate data, and sets CCR bits according to the result. NEG B/W/L 0 – Rd → Rd Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a general register. EXTU W/L Rd (zero extension) → Rd Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by padding with zeros on the left. EXTS W/L Rd (sign extension) → Rd Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by extending the sign bit. TAS*3 B @ERd – 0, 1 → (<bit 7> of @Erd) Tests memory contents, and sets the most significant bit (bit 7) to 1. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 71 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Type Instruction Size*1 Function Arithmetic operations MAC — (EAs) × (EAd) + MAC → MAC Performs signed multiplication on memory contents and adds the result to the multiply-accumulate register. The following operations can be performed: 16 bits × 16 bits + 32 bits → 32 bits, saturating 16 bits × 16 bits + 42 bits → 42 bits, non-saturating CLRMAC — 0 → MAC Clears the multiply-accumulate register to zero. LDMAC STMAC L Rs → MAC, MAC → Rd Transfers data between a general register and a multiply-accumulate register. AND B/W/L Rd ∧ Rs → Rd, Rd ∧ #IMM → Rd Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. OR B/W/L Rd ∨ Rs → Rd, Rd ∨ #IMM → Rd Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. XOR B/W/L Rd ⊕ Rs → Rd, Rd ⊕ #IMM → Rd Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. NOT B/W/L ¬ (Rd) → (Rd) Takes the one's complement of general register contents. SHAL SHAR B/W/L Rd (shift) → Rd Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents. 1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible. SHLL SHLR B/W/L Rd (shift) → Rd Performs a logical shift on general register contents. 1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible. ROTL ROTR B/W/L Rd (rotate) → Rd Rotates general register contents. 1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible. ROTXL ROTXR B/W/L Rd (rotate) → Rd Rotates general register contents through the carry flag. 1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible. Logic operations Shift operations Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 72 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Type Instruction Size*1 Function Bitmanipulation instructions BSET B 1 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 1. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register. BCLR B 0 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 0. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register. BNOT B ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register. BTST B ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and sets or clears the Z flag accordingly. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register. BAND B C ∧ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C ANDs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. BIAND B C ∧ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C ANDs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. BOR B C ∨ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. BIOR B C ∨ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 73 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Type Instruction Size*1 Function Bitmanipulation instructions BXOR B C ⊕ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. BIXOR B C ⊕ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. BLD B (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C Transfers a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to the carry flag. BILD B ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C Transfers the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to the carry flag. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. BST B C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) Transfers the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. BIST B ¬ C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) Transfers the inverse of the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 74 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Type Instruction Size*1 Function Branch instructions Bcc — Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true. The branching conditions are listed below. Mnemonic Description Condition BRA(BT) Always (true) Always BRN(BF) Never (false) Never BHI High C∨Z=0 BLS Low or same C∨Z=1 BCC(BHS) Carry clear (high or same) C=0 BCS(BLO) Carry set (low) C=1 BNE Not equal Z=0 BEQ Equal Z=1 BVC Overflow clear V=0 BVS Overflow set V=1 BPL Plus N=0 BMI Minus N=1 BGE Greater or equal N⊕V=0 BLT Less than N⊕V=1 BGT Greater than Z∨(N ⊕ V) = 0 BLE Less or equal Z∨(N ⊕ V) = 1 JMP — Branches unconditionally to a specified address. BSR — Branches to a subroutine at a specified address. JSR — Branches to a subroutine at a specified address. RTS — Returns from a subroutine. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 75 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Type Size*1 Function — Starts trap-instruction exception handling. — Returns from an exception-handling routine. SLEEP — Causes a transition to a power-down state. LDC B/W (EAs) → CCR, (EAs) → EXR Moves the source operand contents or immediate data to CCR or EXR. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid. STC B/W CCR → (EAd), EXR → (EAd) Transfers CCR or EXR contents to a general register or memory. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size transfers are performed between them and memory. The upper 8 bits are valid. ANDC B CCR ∧ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∧ #IMM → EXR Logically ANDs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. ORC B CCR ∨ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∨ #IMM → EXR Logically ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. XORC B CCR ⊕ #IMM → CCR, EXR ⊕ #IMM → EXR Logically exclusive-ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data. NOP — PC + 2 → PC Only increments the program counter. Instruction System control TRAPA instructions RTE Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 76 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Type Instruction Size*1 Function Block data transfer instruction EEPMOV.B — if R4L ≠ 0 then Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+ R4L–1 → R4L Until R4L = 0 else next; EEPMOV.W — if R4 ≠ 0 then Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+ R4–1 → R4 Until R4 = 0 else next; Transfers a data block according to parameters set in general registers R4L or R4, ER5, and ER6. R4L or R4: size of block (bytes) ER5: starting source address ER6: starting destination address Execution of the next instruction begins as soon as the transfer is completed. Notes: 1. Size refers to the operand size. B: Byte W: Word L: Longword 2. Only register ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction. 3. When using the TAS instruction, use register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5. 2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats The H8S/2633 Group instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an operation field (op field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (EA field), and a condition field (cc). (1) Operation Field: Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried out on the operand. The operation field always includes the first 4 bits of the instruction. Some instructions have two operation fields. (2) Register Field: Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, data registers by 3 bits or 4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register field. (3) Effective Address Extension: Eight, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 77 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU (4) Condition Field: Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions. Figure 2.12 shows examples of instruction formats. (1) Operation field only op NOP, RTS, etc. (2) Operation field and register fields op rm rn ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc. (3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension op rn rm MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm, etc. EA (disp) (4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field op cc EA (disp) BRA d:16, etc. Figure 2.12 Instruction Formats (Examples) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 78 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU 2.7 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation 2.7.1 Addressing Mode The CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.4. Each instruction uses a subset of these addressing modes. Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and immediate modes. Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program-counter relative and memory indirect. Bit manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or absolute addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and BTST instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand. Table 2.4 Addressing Modes No. Addressing Mode Symbol 1 Register direct Rn 2 Register indirect @ERn 3 Register indirect with displacement @(d:16,ERn)/@(d:32,ERn) 4 Register indirect with post-increment Register indirect with pre-decrement @ERn+ @–ERn 5 Absolute address @aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24/@aa:32 6 Immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 7 Program-counter relative @(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC) 8 Memory indirect @@aa:8 (1) Register Direct—Rn: The register field of the instruction specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register containing the operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to E7 can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit registers. (2) Register Indirect—@ERn: The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the address of the operand on memory. If the address is a program instruction address, the lower 24 bits are valid and the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). (3) Register Indirect with Displacement—@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn): A 16-bit or 32-bit displacement contained in the instruction is added to an address register (ERn) specified by the register field of the instruction, and the sum gives the address of a memory operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 79 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU (4) Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement—@ERn+ or @-ERn: • Register indirect with post-increment—@ERn+ The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address register contents and the sum is stored in the address register. The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word transfer instruction, or 4 for longword transfer instruction. For word or longword transfer instruction, the register value should be even. • Register indirect with pre-decrement—@-ERn The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register field in the instruction code, and the result becomes the address of a memory operand. The result is also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word transfer instruction, or 4 for longword transfer instruction. For word or longword transfer instruction, the register value should be even. (5) Absolute Address—@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32: The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24), or 32 bits long (@aa:32). To access data, the absolute address should be 8 bits (@aa:8), 16 bits (@aa:16), or 32 bits (@aa:32) long. For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 24 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF). For a 16-bit absolute address the upper 16 bits are a sign extension. A 32-bit absolute address can access the entire address space. A 24-bit absolute address (@aa:24) indicates the address of a program instruction. The upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). Table 2.5 indicates the accessible absolute address ranges. Table 2.5 Absolute Address Access Ranges Normal Mode* Advanced Mode 8 bits (@aa:8) H'FF00 to H'FFFF H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF 16 bits (@aa:16) H'0000 to H'FFFF H'000000 to H'007FFF, H'FF8000 to H'FFFFFF Absolute Address Data address 32 bits (@aa:32) Program instruction address 24 bits (@aa:24) Note: * Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 80 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 H'000000 to H'FFFFFF Section 2 CPU (6) Immediate—#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32: The instruction contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an operand. The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. Some bit manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a bit number. The TRAPA instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in its instruction code, specifying a vector address. (7) Program-Counter Relative—@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC): This mode is used in the Bcc and BSR instructions. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the instruction is sign-extended and added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate a branch address. Only the lower 24 bits of this branch address are valid; the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00). The PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction, so the possible branching range is –126 to +128 bytes (–63 to +64 words) or –32766 to +32768 bytes (–16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should be an even number. (8) Memory Indirect—@@aa:8: This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-bit absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory operand contains a branch address. The upper bits of the absolute address are all assumed to be 0, so the address range is 0 to 255 (H'0000 to H'00FF in normal mode, H'000000 to H'0000FF in advanced mode). In normal mode* the memory operand is a word operand and the branch address is 16 bits long. In advanced mode the memory operand is a longword operand, the first byte of which is assumed to be all 0 (H'00). Note that the first part of the address range is also the exception vector area. For further details, refer to section 4, Exception Handling. Note: * Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 81 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Specified by @aa:8 Branch address Specified by @aa:8 Reserved Branch address (a) Normal Mode* (b) Advanced Mode Note: * Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. Figure 2.13 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode If an odd address is specified in word or longword memory access, or as a branch address, the least significant bit is regarded as 0, causing data to be accessed or instruction code to be fetched at the address preceding the specified address. (For further information, see section 2.5.2, Memory Data Formats.) 2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation Table 2.6 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode. In normal mode* the upper 8 bits of the effective address are ignored in order to generate a 16-bit address. Note: * Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 82 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 4 3 rm rn r r disp r op r • Register indirect with pre-decrement @–ERn op Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement • Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+ op Register indirect with displacement @(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn) op Register indirect (@ERn) op Register direct (Rn) Addressing Mode and Instruction Format disp 1 2 4 0 1, 2, or 4 General register contents Byte Word Longword 0 0 0 0 1, 2, or 4 General register contents Sign extension General register contents General register contents Operand Size Value added 31 31 31 31 31 Effective Address Calculation 24 23 24 23 24 23 24 23 Don’t care 31 Don’t care 31 Don’t care 31 Don’t care 31 Operand is general register contents. Effective Address (EA) 0 0 0 0 Table 2.6 2 1 No. Section 2 CPU Effective Address Calculation Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 83 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 84 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 6 op op abs abs abs op IMM Immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 @aa:32 op @aa:24 @aa:16 op abs Absolute address 5 @aa:8 Addressing Mode and Instruction Format No. Effective Address Calculation 24 23 24 23 24 23 24 23 87 16 15 Sign extension H'FFFF Operand is immediate data. Don’t care 31 Don’t care 31 Don’t care 31 Don’t care 31 Effective Address (EA) 0 0 0 0 Section 2 CPU abs op abs • Advanced mode op • Normal mode* Memory indirect @@aa:8 op @(d:8, PC)/@(d:16, PC) Program-counter relative disp Addressing Mode and Instruction Format Note: * Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. 8 7 No. 31 31 31 87 abs 87 abs Memory contents 15 Memory contents H'000000 H'000000 disp PC contents Sign extension 23 23 Effective Address Calculation 0 0 0 0 0 0 24 23 24 23 24 23 Don’t care 31 Don’t care 31 Don’t care 31 H'00 16 15 Effective Address (EA) 0 0 0 Section 2 CPU Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 85 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU 2.8 Processing States 2.8.1 Overview The CPU has five main processing states: the reset state, exception handling state, program execution state, bus-released state, and power-down state. Figure 2.14 shows a diagram of the processing states. Figure 2.15 indicates the state transitions. Reset state The CPU and all on-chip supporting modules have been initialized and are stopped. Exception-handling state A transient state in which the CPU changes the normal processing flow in response to a reset, interrupt, or trap instruction. Processing states Program execution state The CPU executes program instructions in sequence. Bus-released state The external bus has been released in response to a bus request signal from a bus master other than the CPU. Sleep mode Power-down state CPU operation is stopped to conserve power.* Software standby mode Hardware standby mode Note: * The power-down state also includes a medium-speed mode, module stop mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode. (In the H8S/2695, the subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode are not available.) Figure 2.14 Processing States Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 86 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU End of bus request Bus request Program execution state SLEEP instruction with SSBY = 0 ion ha nd lin g s bu t of est es d En requ requ s Bu Sleep mode SLEEP instruction with SSBY = 1 e pt r rru Inte st que En d o ha f ex nd ce lin pti g on Re qu es tf or ex ce pt Bus-released state Exception handling state External interrupt request Software standby mode RES= High MRES= High STBY= High, RES= Low Manual reset state*1 Power-on reset state*1 Reset state*1 Hardware standby mode*2 Power-down state*3 Notes: 1. From any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the power-on reset state occurs whenever RES goes low. From any state except hardware standby mode and power-on reset mode, a transition to the manual reset state occurs whenever MRES goes low. A transition can also be made to the reset state when the watchdog timer overflows. 2. From any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when STBY goes low. 3. Apart from these states, there are also the watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode. (In the H8S/2695, the watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode are not available.) See section 24, Power-Down States. Figure 2.15 State Transitions 2.8.2 Reset State The CPU enters the reset state when the RES pin goes low, or when the MRES pin goes low while manual resets are enabled by the MRESE bit. In the reset state, currently executing processing is halted and all interrupts are disabled. For details of MRESE bit setting, see section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR). Reset exception handling starts when the RES or MRES pin* changes from low to high. The reset state can also be entered in the event of watchdog timer overflow. For details see section 15, Watchdog Timer. Note: * MRES pin in the case of a manual reset. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 87 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU 2.8.3 Exception-Handling State The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal processing flow due to a reset, interrupt, or trap instruction. The CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and branches to that address. (1) Types of Exception Handling and Their Priority Exception handling is performed for traces, resets, interrupts, and trap instructions. Table 2.7 indicates the types of exception handling and their priority. Trap instruction exception handling is always accepted, in the program execution state. Exception handling and the stack structure depend on the interrupt control mode set in SYSCR. Table 2.7 Exception Handling Types and Priority Priority Type of Exception Detection Timing Start of Exception Handling High Reset Synchronized with clock Exception handling starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES pin, or when the watchdog timer overflows. Trace End of instruction execution or end of exception-handling sequence*1 When the trace (T) bit is set to 1, the trace starts at the end of the current instruction or current exception-handling sequence Interrupt End of instruction execution or end of exception-handling sequence*2 When an interrupt is requested, exception handling starts at the end of the current instruction or current exception-handling sequence Trap instruction When TRAPA instruction is executed Exception handling starts when a trap (TRAPA) instruction is executed*3 Low Notes: 1. Traces are enabled only in interrupt control mode 2. Trace exception-handling is not executed at the end of the RTE instruction. 2. Interrupts are not detected at the end of the ANDC, ORC, XORC, and LDC instructions, or immediately after reset exception handling. 3. Trap instruction exception handling is always accepted, in the program execution state. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 88 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU (2) Reset Exception Handling After the RES pin has gone low and the reset state has been entered, when RES pin goes high again, reset exception handling starts. After the reset state has been entered by driving the MRES pin low while manual resets are enabled by the MRESE bit, reset exception handling starts when MRES pin is driven high again. The CPU enters the power-on reset state when the RES pin is low, and enters the manual reset state when the MRES pin is low. When reset exception handling starts the CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and starts program execution from that address. All interrupts, including NMI, are disabled during reset exception handling and after it ends. (3) Traces Traces are enabled only in interrupt control mode 2. Trace mode is entered when the T bit of EXR is set to 1. When trace mode is established, trace exception handling starts at the end of each instruction. At the end of a trace exception-handling sequence, the T bit of EXR is cleared to 0 and trace mode is cleared. Interrupt masks are not affected. The T bit saved on the stack retains its value of 1, and when the RTE instruction is executed to return from the trace exception-handling routine, trace mode is entered again. Trace exceptionhandling is not executed at the end of the RTE instruction. Trace mode is not entered in interrupt control mode 0, regardless of the state of the T bit. (4) Interrupt Exception Handling and Trap Instruction Exception Handling When interrupt or trap-instruction exception handling begins, the CPU references the stack pointer (ER7) and pushes the program counter and other control registers onto the stack. Next, the CPU alters the settings of the interrupt mask bits in the control registers. Then the CPU fetches a start address (vector) from the exception vector table and program execution starts from that start address. Figure 2.16 shows the stack after exception handling ends. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 89 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Normal mode*2 EXR Reserved*1 SP SP CCR CCR*1 CCR CCR*1 PC (16 bits) PC (16 bits) (a) Interrupt control mode 0 (b) Interrupt control mode 2 Advanced mode SP SP EXR Reserved*1 CCR CCR PC (24 bits) PC (24 bits) (c) Interrupt control mode 0 (d) Interrupt control mode 2 Notes: 1. Ignored when returning. 2. Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. Figure 2.16 Stack Structure after Exception Handling (Examples) 2.8.4 Program Execution State In this state the CPU executes program instructions in sequence. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 90 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU 2.8.5 Bus-Released State This is a state in which the bus has been released in response to a bus request from a bus master other than the CPU. While the bus is released, the CPU halts operations. Bus masters other than the CPU are DMA controller (DMAC)* and data transfer controller (DTC)*. For further details, refer to section 7, Bus Controller. Note: * DMAC and DTC functions are not available in the H8S/2695. 2.8.6 Power-Down State The power-down state includes both modes in which the CPU stops operating and modes in which the CPU does not stop. There are five modes in which the CPU stops operating: sleep mode, software standby mode, hardware standby mode, subsleep mode*1, and watch mode*1. There are also three other power-down modes: medium-speed mode, module stop mode, and subactive mode*1. In medium-speed mode the CPU and other bus masters operate on a medium-speed clock. Module stop mode permits halting of the operation of individual modules, other than the CPU. Subactive mode*1, subsleep mode*1, and watch mode*1 are power-down states using subclock input. For details, refer to section 24, Power-Down Modes. (1) Sleep Mode: A transition to sleep mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the software standby bit (SSBY) in the standby control register (SBYCR) is cleared to 0. In sleep mode, CPU operations stop immediately after execution of the SLEEP instruction. The contents of CPU registers are retained. (2) Software Standby Mode: A transition to software standby mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the LSON bit in LPWRCR is set to 0, and the PSS bit in TCSR (WDT1)*2 is set to 0. In software standby mode, the CPU and clock halt and all MCU operations stop. As long as a specified voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU registers and on-chip RAM are retained. The I/O ports also remain in their existing states. (3) Hardware Standby Mode: A transition to hardware standby mode is made when the STBY pin goes low. In hardware standby mode, the CPU and clock halt and all MCU operations stop. The on-chip supporting modules are reset, but as long as a specified voltage is supplied, on-chip RAM contents are retained. Notes: 1. This function is not available in the H8S/2695. 2. WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 91 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU 2.9 Basic Timing 2.9.1 Overview The H8S/2600 CPU is driven by a system clock, denoted by the symbol φ. The period from one rising edge of φ to the next is referred to as a "state." The memory cycle or bus cycle consists of one, two, or three states. Different methods are used to access on-chip memory, on-chip supporting modules, and the external address space. 2.9.2 On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM) On-chip memory is accessed in one state. The data bus is 16 bits wide, permitting both byte and word transfer instruction. Figure 2.17 shows the on-chip memory access cycle. Figure 2.18 shows the pin states. Bus cycle T1 φ Internal address bus Read access Address Internal read signal Internal data bus Read data Internal write signal Write access Internal data bus Write data Figure 2.17 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 92 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Bus cycle T1 φ Address bus Unchanged AS High RD High HWR, LWR High Data bus High-impedance state Figure 2.18 Pin States during On-Chip Memory Access 2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing The on-chip supporting modules are accessed in two states. The data bus is either 8 bits or 16 bits wide, depending on the particular internal I/O register being accessed. Figure 2.19 shows the access timing for the on-chip supporting modules. Figure 2.20 shows the pin states. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 93 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Bus cycle T1 T2 φ Internal address bus Address Internal read signal Read access Read data Internal data bus Internal write signal Write access Internal data bus Write data Figure 2.19 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Cycle Bus cycle T1 T2 φ Address bus Unchanged AS High RD High HWR, LWR High Data bus High-impedance state Figure 2.20 Pin States during On-Chip Supporting Module Access Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 94 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU 2.9.4 External Address Space Access Timing The external address space is accessed with an 8-bit or 16-bit data bus width in a two-state or three-state bus cycle. In three-state access, wait states can be inserted. For further details, refer to section 7, Bus Controller. 2.10 Usage Note 2.10.1 TAS Instruction Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. The TAS instruction is not generated by the Renesas H8S and H8/300 series C/C++ compilers. If the TAS instruction is used as a user-defined intrinsic function, ensure that only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 is used. 2.10.2 STM/LDM Instruction With the STM or LDM instruction, the ER7 register is used as the stack pointer, and thus cannot be used as a register that allows save (STM) or restore (LDM) operation. With a single STM or LDM instruction, two to four registers can be saved or restored. The available registers are as follows: For two registers: ER0 and ER1, ER2 and ER3, or ER4 and ER5 For three registers: ER0 to ER2, or ER4 to ER6 For four registers: ER0 to ER3 For the Renesas H8S or H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler, the STM/LDM instruction including ER7 is not created. 2.10.3 Usage Notes on Bit Manipulation Instructions The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions are used to read data in byte-wise, operate the data in bit-wise, and write the result of the bit-wise operation in bit-wise again. Therefore, special care is necessary to use these instructions for the registers and the ports that include writeonly bit. The BCLR instruction can be used to clear to 0 the flags in the internal I/O registers. In this time, if it is obvious that the flag has been set to 1 in the interrupt handler, there is no need to read the flag beforehand. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 95 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 2 CPU Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 96 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.1 Overview 3.1.1 Operating Mode Selection The H8S/2633 Group has four operating modes (modes 4 to 7). These modes enable selection of the CPU operating mode, enabling/disabling of on-chip ROM, and the initial bus width setting, by setting the mode pins (MD2 to MD0). Table 3.1 lists the MCU operating modes. Table 3.1 MCU Operating Mode Selection External Data Bus MCU CPU Operating Operating Mode MD2 MD1 MD0 Mode Description 0* 1* 0 1 7 — — — — 0 1 1 0 5 6 0 Max. Width 1 2* 3* 4 0 On-Chip Initial ROM Width 0 1 1 Advanced On-chip ROM disabled, Disabled 16 bits expanded mode 8 bits 0 On-chip ROM enabled, Enabled 8 bits expanded mode 1 Single-chip mode 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits — Note: * Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. The CPU’s architecture allows for 4 Gbytes of address space, but the H8S/2633 Group actually accesses a maximum of 16 Mbytes. Modes 4 to 6 are externally expanded modes that allow access to external memory and peripheral devices. The external expansion modes allow switching between 8-bit and 16-bit bus modes. After program execution starts, an 8-bit or 16-bit address space can be set for each area, depending on the bus controller setting. If 16-bit access is selected for any one area, 16-bit bus mode is set; if 8bit access is selected for all areas, 8-bit bus mode is set. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 97 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Note that the functions of each pin depend on the operating mode. The H8S/2633 Group can be used only in modes 4 to 7. This means that the mode pins must be set to select one of these modes. Do not change the inputs at the mode pins during operation. 3.1.2 Register Configuration The H8S/2633 Group has a mode control register (MDCR) that indicates the inputs at the mode pins (MD2 to MD0), and a system control register (SYSCR) that controls the operation of the H8S/2633 Group. Table 3.2 summarizes these registers. Table 3.2 MCU Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Mode control register MDCR R/W Undetermined H'FDE7 System control register SYSCR R/W H'01 H'FDE5 Pin function control register PFCR R/W H'0D/H'00 H'FDEB Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. 3.2 Register Descriptions 3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — — — MDS2 MDS1 MDS0 1 0 0 0 0 —* —* —* R/W — — — — R R R Note: * Determined by pins MD2 to MD0. MDCR is an 8-bit register that indicates the current operating mode of the H8S/2633 Group. Bit 7—Reserved: Only 1 should be written to this bit. Bits 6 to 3—Reserved: These bits always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Bits 2 to 0—Mode Select 2 to 0 (MDS2 to MDS0): These bits indicate the input levels at pins MD2 to MD0 (the current operating mode). Bits MDS2 to MDS0 correspond to MD2 to MD0. MDS2 to MDS0 are read-only bits-they cannot be written to. The mode pin (MD2 to MD0) input Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 98 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes levels are latched into these bits when MDCR is read. These latches are cancelled by a power-on reset, but maintained by a manual reset. 3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MACS — INTM1 INTM0 NMIEG MRESE — RAME 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 R/W — R/W R/W R/W R/W — R/W : Initial value : R/W : SYSCR is an 8-bit readable-writable register that selects saturating or non-saturating calculation for the MAC instruction, selects the interrupt control mode, selects the detected edge for NMI, pin input, and enables or disables on-chip RAM. enables or disables MRES SYSCR is initialized to H'01 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. MACS, INTM1, INTM0, NMIEG, and RAME bits are initialized in manual reset mode, but the MRESE bit is not initialized. SYSCR is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 7—MAC Saturation (MACS): Selects either saturating or non-saturating calculation for the MAC instruction. Bit 7 MACS Description 0 Non-saturating calculation for MAC instruction 1 Saturating calculation for MAC instruction (Initial value) Bit 6—Reserved: This bit always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Bits 5 and 4—Interrupt Control Mode 1 and 0 (INTM1, INTM0): These bits select the control mode of the interrupt controller. For details of the interrupt control modes, see section 5.4.1, Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation. Bit 5 Bit 4 INTM1 INTM0 Interrupt Control Mode Description 0 0 0 Control of interrupts by I bit 1 — Setting prohibited 0 2 Control of interrupts by I2 to I0 bits and IPR 1 — Setting prohibited 1 (Initial value) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 99 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Bit 3—NMI Edge Select (NMIEG): Selects the valid edge of the NMI interrupt input. Bit 3 NMIEG Description 0 An interrupt is requested at the falling edge of NMI input 1 An interrupt is requested at the rising edge of NMI input (Initial value) Bit 2—Manual Reset Selection Bit (MRESE): Enables or disables manual reset input. It is pin to the manual reset input ( ). possible to set the P74/TM02/ MRES MRES Table 3.3 shows the relationship between the MRES pin power-on reset and manual reset. Bit 2 MRESE Description 0 Disables manual reset. Possible to use P74/TM02*/ 1 Enables manual reset. Possible to use P74/TM02*/ MRES pin as P74/TM02* input pin. (Initial value) MRES pin as MRES input pin. Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Table 3.3 Relationship Between Power-On Reset and Manual Reset Pin RES MRES Reset Type 0 * Power-on reset 1 0 Manual reset 1 1 Operation state (Initial state) *: Don’t care Bit 1—Reserved: This bit always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 100 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Bit 0—RAM Enable (RAME): Enables or disables the on-chip RAM. The RAME bit is initialized when the reset status is released. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 0 RAME Description 0 On-chip RAM is disabled 1 On-chip RAM is enabled (Initial value) Note: When the DTC* is used, the RAME bit must be set to 1. * The DTC function is not available in the H8S/2695. 3.2.3 Bit Pin Function Control Register (PFCR) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CSS07 CSS36 BUZZE LCASS AE3 AE2 AE1 AE0 0 0 0 0 1/0 1/0 0 1/0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W : Initial value : R/W : PFCR is an 8-bit readable-writable register that carries out CS selection control for PG4 and PG1 pins, LCAS selection control for PF2 and PF6 pins, and address output control during extension modes with ROM. PFCR is initialized by H'0D/H'00 by a power-on reset or a hardware standby mode. The immediately previous state is maintained in manual reset or software standby mode. Bit 7—CS0/CS7 Select (CSS07): Selects the CS output content for PG4 pin. In modes 4 to 6, the selected CS is output by setting the corresponding DDR to 1. Bit 7 CSS07 Description 0 Select 1 Select CS0 CS7 (Initial value) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 101 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Bit 6—CS3/CS6 Select (CSS36): Selects the CS output content for PG1 pin. In modes 4 to 6, the selected CS is output by setting the corresponding DDR to 1. Bit 6 CSS36 Description 0 Select 1 CS3 Select CS6 (Initial value) Bit 5—BUZZ Output Enable (BUZZE)*: Disables/enables BUZZ output of PF1 pin. Input clock of WDT1 selected by PSS, CKS2 to CKS0 bits is output as a BUZZ signal. Bit 5 BUZZE Description 0 Functions as PF1 input pin 1 Functions as BUZZ output pin (Initial value) Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. This bit should not be set to 1. Bit 4—LCAS Output Pin Selection Bit (LCASS)*: Selects the LCAS signal output pin. Bit 4 LCASS Description 0 Outputs LCAS signal from PF2 1 Outputs LCAS signal from PF6 (Initial value) Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. This bit should not be set to 1. Bits 3 to 0—Address Output Enable 3 to 0 (AE3–AE0): These bits select enabling or disabling of address outputs A8 to A23 in ROMless expanded mode and modes with ROM. When a pin is enabled for address output, the address is output regardless of the corresponding DDR setting. When a pin is disabled for address output, it becomes an output port when the corresponding DDR bit is set to 1. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 102 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 AE3 AE2 AE1 AE0 Description 0 0 0 0 A8–A23 address output disabled 1 A8 address output enabled; A9–A23 address output disabled 0 A8, A9 address output enabled; A10–A23 address output disabled 1 A8–A10 address output enabled; A11–A23 address output disabled 0 A8–A11 address output enabled; A12–A23 address output disabled 1 A8–A12 address output enabled; A13–A23 address output disabled 0 A8–A13 address output enabled; A14–A23 address output disabled 1 A8–A14 address output enabled; A15–A23 address output disabled 0 A8–A15 address output enabled; A16–A23 address output disabled 1 A8–A16 address output enabled; A17–A23 address output disabled 0 A8–A17 address output enabled; A18–A23 address output disabled 1 A8–A18 address output enabled; A19–A23 address output disabled 0 A8–A19 address output enabled; A20–A23 address output disabled 1 A8–A20 address output enabled; A21–A23 address output disabled (Initial value*) 0 A8–A21 address output enabled; A22, A23 address output disabled 1 A8–A23 address output enabled 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 (Initial value*) Note: * In expanded mode with ROM, bits AE3 to AE0 are initialized to B'0000. In ROMless expanded mode, bits AE3 to AE0 are initialized to B'1101. Address pins A0 to A7 are made address outputs by setting the corresponding DDR bits to 1. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 103 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.3 Operating Mode Descriptions 3.3.1 Mode 4 The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is disabled. Ports 1, A, B, and C, function as an address bus, ports D and E function as a data bus, and part of port F carries bus control signals. The initial bus mode after a reset is 16 bits, with 16-bit access to all areas. However, note that if 8bit access is designated by the bus controller for all areas, the bus mode switches to 8 bits. 3.3.2 Mode 5 The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is disabled. Ports 1, A, B, and C, function as an address bus, ports D and E function as a data bus, and part of port F carries bus control signals. The initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. However, note that if 16bit access is designated by the bus controller for any area, the bus mode switches to 16 bits and port E becomes a data bus. 3.3.3 Mode 6 The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled. Ports 1, A, B, and C, function as input port pins immediately after a reset. Address output can be performed by setting the corresponding DDR (data direction register) bits to 1. Port D function as a data bus, and part of port F carries data bus signals. The initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. However, note that if 16bit access is designated by the bus controller for any area, the bus mode switches to 16 bits and port E becomes a data bus. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 104 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.3.4 Mode 7 The CPU can access a 16-Mbyte address space in advanced mode. The on-chip ROM is enabled, but external addresses cannot be accessed. All I/O ports are available for use as input-output ports. 3.4 Pin Functions in Each Operating Mode The pin functions of ports A to G vary depending on the operating mode. Table 3.4 shows their functions in each operating mode. Table 3.4 Pin Functions in Each Mode Port Port 1 P10 P11 to P13 Port A PA4 to PA0 Port B Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 P/A* P*/A P/A* P*/A P*/A P*/A P P/A* P/A* P/A* P/A* P*/A P*/A P P P P P Port C A A P*/A Port D D Port E D P*/D PF7 P/D* P/C* D P*/D P/C* P/C* PF6 to PF4 C PF3 P/C* P*/C C P*/C C P*/C P*/C P*/C P*/C P P*/C P Port F PF2 to PF0 Port G PG4 PG3 to PG0 C P*/C C P*/C P P*/C P Legend: P: I/O port A: Address bus output D: Data bus I/O C: Control signals, clock I/O *: After reset Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 105 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes 3.5 Address Map in Each Operating Mode An address map of the H8S/2633, H8S/2633R are shown in figure 3.1, and an address map of the H8S/2632 in figure 3.2, and an address map of the H8S/2631 in figure 3.3, and an address map of the H8S/2695 in figure 3.4. The address space is 16 Mbytes in modes 4 to 7 (advanced modes). The address space is divided into eight areas for modes 4 to 7. For details, see section 7, Bus Controller. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 106 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Modes 4 and 5 (advanced expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled) H'000000 Mode 6 (advanced expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) H'000000 Mode 7 (advanced single-chip mode) H'000000 On-chip ROM External address space On-chip ROM H'03FFFF H'040000 H'FFB000 External address space H'FFB000 On-chip RAM*1 H'FFB000 On-chip RAM*1 On-chip RAM H'FFEFBF H'FFEFC0 External address space H'FFF800 H'FFEFC0 Internal I/O registers*2 H'FFFF40 H'FFFF60 H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFFF External address space H'FFF800 External address space Internal I/O registers On-chip RAM*1 H'FFF800 Internal I/O registers*2 H'FFFF40 H'FFFF60 H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFFF Internal I/O registers*2 H'FFFF3F External address space Internal I/O registers On-chip RAM*1 H'FFFF60 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFFF On-chip RAM Notes: 1. External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. Area H'FFF800 to H'FFFDAB is reserved, and must not be accessed. Figure 3.1 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode in the H8S/2633, H8S/2633R Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 107 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Modes 4 and 5 (advanced expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled) H'000000 Mode 6 (advanced expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) Mode 7 (advanced single-chip mode) H'000000 H'000000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM External address space H'02FFFF H'030000 Reserved area H'FFB000 H'FFC000 Reserved area H'040000 External address space H'FFB000 H'FFC000 Reserved area On-chip RAM*1 H'FFC000 On-chip RAM On-chip RAM*1 H'FFEFBF H'FFEFC0 External address space H'FFF800 H'FFEFC0 Internal I/O registers*2 H'FFFF40 H'FFFF60 H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFFF External address space H'FFF800 External address space Internal I/O registers On-chip RAM*1 H'FFF800 Internal I/O registers*2 H'FFFF40 Internal I/O registers*2 H'FFFF3F External address space H'FFFF60 Internal I/O registers H'FFFF60 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFFF H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFFF On-chip RAM*1 On-chip RAM Notes: 1. External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. Area H'FFF800 to H'FFFDAB is reserved, and must not be accessed. Figure 3.2 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode in the H8S/2632 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 108 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Modes 4 and 5 (advanced expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled) H'000000 Mode 6 (advanced expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) Mode 7 (advanced single-chip mode) H'000000 H'000000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM H'01FFFF H'020000 External address space Reserved area H'FFB000 H'FFD000 Reserved area H'040000 External address space H'FFB000 H'FFD000 Reserved area On-chip RAM*1 H'FFD000 On-chip RAM On-chip RAM*1 H'FFEFBF H'FFEFC0 External address space H'FFF800 H'FFEFC0 Internal I/O registers*2 H'FFFF40 H'FFFF60 H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFFF External address space H'FFF800 External address space Internal I/O registers On-chip RAM*1 H'FFF800 Internal I/O registers*2 H'FFFF40 Internal I/O registers*2 H'FFFF3F External address space H'FFFF60 Internal I/O registers H'FFFF60 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFFF H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFFF On-chip RAM*1 On-chip RAM Notes: 1. External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. Area H'FFF800 to H'FFFDAB is reserved, and must not be accessed. Figure 3.3 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode in the H8S/2631 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 109 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 3 MCU Operating Modes Modes 4 and 5 (advanced expanded modes with on-chip ROM disabled) H'000000 Mode 6 (advanced expanded mode with on-chip ROM enabled) Mode 7 (advanced single-chip mode) H'000000 H'000000 On-chip ROM On-chip ROM External address space H'02FFFF H'030000 Reserved area H'FFB000 H'FFD000 Reserved area H'040000 External address space H'FFB000 H'FFD000 Reserved area On-chip RAM*1 H'FFD000 On-chip RAM On-chip RAM*1 H'FFEFBF H'FFEFC0 External address space H'FFF800 H'FFEFC0 Internal I/O registers*2 H'FFFF40 H'FFFF60 H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFFF External address space H'FFF800 External address space Internal I/O registers On-chip RAM*1 H'FFF800 Internal I/O registers*2 H'FFFF40 Internal I/O registers*2 H'FFFF3F External address space H'FFFF60 Internal I/O registers H'FFFF60 Internal I/O registers H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFFF H'FFFFC0 H'FFFFFF On-chip RAM*1 On-chip RAM Notes: 1. External addresses can be accessed by clearing the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. 2. Area H'FFF800 to H'FFFDAB is reserved, and must not be accessed. Figure 3.4 Memory Map in Each Operating Mode in the H8S/2695 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 110 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 4 Exception Handling Section 4 Exception Handling 4.1 Overview 4.1.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority As table 4.1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, direct transition, trap instruction, or interrupt. Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4.1. If two or more exceptions occur simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in order of priority. Trap instruction exceptions are accepted at all times, in the program execution state. Exception handling sources, the stack structure, and the operation of the CPU vary depending on the interrupt control mode set by the INTM0 and INTM1 bits of SYSCR. Table 4.1 Exception Types and Priority Priority Exception Type High Reset Low Start of Exception Handling Starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES pin or MRES pin, or when the watchdog overflows. The CPU enters the power-on reset state when the RES pin is low, and the manual reset state when the MRES pin is low Trace*1 Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception handling ends, if the trace (T) bit is set to 1 Direct transition Starts when a direct transition occurs due to execution of a SLEEP instruction Interrupt Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued*2 Trap instruction (TRAPA)*3 Started by execution of a trap instruction (TRAPA) Notes: 1. Traces are enabled only in interrupt control mode 2. Trace exception handling is not executed after execution of an RTE instruction. 2. Interrupt detection is not performed on completion of ANDC, ORC, XORC, or LDC instruction execution, or on completion of reset exception handling. 3. Trap instruction exception handling requests are accepted at all times in program execution state. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 111 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.1.2 Exception Handling Operation Exceptions originate from various sources. Trap instructions and interrupts are handled as follows: 1. The program counter (PC), condition code register (CCR), and extended register (EXR) are pushed onto the stack. 2. The interrupt mask bits are updated. The T bit is cleared to 0. 3. A vector address corresponding to the exception source is generated, and program execution starts from that address. For a reset exception, steps 2 and 3 above are carried out. 4.1.3 Exception Vector Table The exception sources are classified as shown in figure 4.1. Different vector addresses are assigned to different exception sources. Table 4.2 lists the exception sources and their vector addresses. Power-on reset Reset Manual reset Trace Exception sources External interrupts: NMI, IRQ7 to IRQ0 Interrupts Internal interrupts: 72 interrupt sources in on-chip supporting modules Trap instruction Figure 4.1 Exception Sources Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 112 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 4 Exception Handling Table 4.2 Exception Vector Table Vector Address*1 Exception Source Vector Number Advanced Mode Power-on reset Manual reset*3 0 H'0000 to H'0003 1 H'0004 to H'0007 Reserved for system use 2 H'0008 to H'000B 3 H'000C to H'000F 4 H'0010 to H'0013 Trace 5 H'0014 to H'0017 Direct transition*3 6 H'0018 to H'001B 7 H'001C to H'001F 8 H'0020 to H'0023 9 H'0024 to H'0027 10 H'0028 to H'002B 11 H'002C to H'002F 12 H'0030 to H'0033 13 H'0034 to H'0037 14 H'0038 to H'003B 15 H'003C to H'003F IRQ0 16 H'0040 to H'0043 IRQ1 17 H'0044 to H'0047 IRQ2 18 H'0048 to H'004B IRQ3 19 H'004C to H'004F IRQ4 20 H'0050 to H'0053 IRQ5 21 H'0054 to H'0057 IRQ6 22 H'0058 to H'005B IRQ7 23 H'005C to H'005F 24 H'0060 to H'0063 External interrupt NMI Trap instruction (4 sources) Reserved for system use External interrupt Internal interrupt*2 127 H'01FC to H'01FF Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. For details of internal interrupt vectors, see section 5.3.3, Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table. 3. See section 24.11, Direct Transitions, for details on direct transitions. This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 113 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.2 Reset 4.2.1 Overview A reset has the highest exception handling priority. There are two kinds of reset: a power-on reset executed via the RES pin, and a manual reset executed via the MRES pin. When the RES or MRES pin* goes low, currently executing processing is halted and the chip enters the reset state. A reset initializes the internal state of the CPU and the registers of on-chip supporting modules. Immediately after a reset, interrupt control mode 0 is set. Reset exception handling starts when the RES or MRES pin* changes from low to high. The reset state can also be entered in the event of watchdog timer overflow. For details see section 15, Watchdog Timer. Note: * MRES pin in the case of a manual reset. 4.2.2 Types of Reset There are two types of reset: power-on reset and manual reset. Table 4.3 shows the types of reset. When turning power on, do so as a power-on reset. Both power-on reset and manual reset initialize the internal state of the CPU. In a power-on reset, all of the registers of the built-in vicinity modules are initialized, while in a manual reset, the registers of the built-in vicinity models except for bus controllers and I/O ports are initialized. The states of the bus controllers and I/O ports are maintained. During a manual reset built-in vicinity modules are initialized, and ports used as input pins for built-in vicinity modules switch to the input ports controlled by DDR and DR. If using manual reset, set the MRESE bit to 1 beforehand, thereby enabling manual resets. See section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR) for settings of the MRESE bit. There are also power-on resets and manual resets as the two types of reset carried out by the watchdog timer. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 114 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 4 Exception Handling Table 4.3 Types of Reset Conditions for Transition to Reset Internal State Type MRES RES CPU Built-in vicinity module Power-on reset * Low Initialization Initialization Manual reset Low High Initialization Initialization except for bus controller and I/O port *: Don't Care 4.2.3 Reset Sequence This LSI enters reset state when the RES pin or MRES pin goes low. To ensure that this LSI is reset, hold the RES pin or the MRES pin low for at least 20 ms at powerup. To reset during operation, hold the RES pin or the MRES pin low for at least 20 states. When the RES pin or the MRES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, this LSI starts reset exception handling as follows. 1. The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are initialized, the T bit is cleared to 0 in EXR, and the I bit is set to 1 in EXR and CCR. 2. The reset exception handling vector address is read and transferred to the PC, and program execution starts from the address indicated by the PC. Figures 4.2 and 4.3 show examples of the reset sequence. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 115 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 4 Exception Handling Vector fetch * Internal processing Prefetch of first program instruction * * φ RES, MRES Address bus (1) (3) (5) RD High HWR, LWR D15 to D0 (2) (4) (6) (1) (3) Reset exception handling vector address (when power-on reset, (1) = H'000000*, (3) = H'000002; when manual reset, (1)= H'000004, (3)= H'000006) (2) (4) Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address) (5) Start address ((5) = (2) (4)) (6) First program instruction Note: * 3 program wait states are inserted. Figure 4.2 Reset Sequence (Modes 4 and 5) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 116 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 4 Exception Handling Prefetch of Internal first program processing instruction Vector fetch φ RES, MRES Internal address bus (3) (1) (5) Internal read signal High Internal write signal Internal data bus (2) (4) (6) (1) (3) Reset exception handling vector address (when power-on reset, (1) = H'000000, (3) = H'000002) (2) (4) Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address) (5) Start address ((5) = (2) (4)) (6) First program instruction Figure 4.3 Reset Sequence (Modes 6 and 7) 4.2.4 Interrupts after Reset If an interrupt is accepted after a reset but before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the PC and CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests, including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. Since the first instruction of a program is always executed immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction initializes the stack pointer (example: MOV.L #xx: 32, SP). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 117 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.2.5 State of On-Chip Supporting Modules after Reset Release After reset release, MSTPCRA to MSTPCRC are initialized to H'3F, H'FF, and H'FF, respectively, and all modules except the DMAC* and DTC*, enter module stop mode. Consequently, on-chip supporting module registers cannot be read or written to. Register reading and writing is enabled when module stop mode is exited. Note: * DMAC and DTC functions are not available in the H8S/2695. 4.3 Traces Traces are enabled in interrupt control mode 2. Trace mode is not activated in interrupt control mode 0, irrespective of the state of the T bit. For details of interrupt control modes, see section 5, Interrupt Controller. If the T bit in EXR is set to 1, trace mode is activated. In trace mode, a trace exception occurs on completion of each instruction. Trace mode is canceled by clearing the T bit in EXR to 0. It is not affected by interrupt masking. Table 4.4 shows the state of CCR and EXR after execution of trace exception handling. Interrupts are accepted even within the trace exception handling routine. The T bit saved on the stack retains its value of 1, and when control is returned from the trace exception handling routine by the RTE instruction, trace mode resumes. Trace exception handling is not carried out after execution of the RTE instruction. Table 4.4 Status of CCR and EXR after Trace Exception Handling Interrupt Control Mode CCR I 0 2 EXR UI I2 to I0 T Trace exception handling cannot be used. 1 Legend: 1: Set to 1 0: Cleared to 0 —: Retains value prior to execution Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 118 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 — — 0 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.4 Interrupts Interrupt exception handling can be requested by nine external sources (NMI, IRQ7 to IRQ0) and 72 internal sources in the on-chip supporting modules. Figure 4.4 classifies the interrupt sources and the number of interrupts of each type. The on-chip supporting modules that can request interrupts include the watchdog timer (WDT), 16-bit timer-pulse unit (TPU), 8-bit timer*, serial communication interface (SCI), data transfer controller (DTC)*, DMA controller (DMAC)*, PC break controller (PBC)*, A/D converter, and I2C bus interface (IIC)*. Each interrupt source has a separate vector address. NMI is the highest-priority interrupt. Interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. The interrupt controller has two interrupt control modes and can assign interrupts other than NMI to eight priority/mask levels to enable multiplexed interrupt control. For details of interrupts, see section 5, Interrupt Controller. Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. External interrupts Interrupts Internal interrupts Notes: NMI (1) IRQ7 to IRQ0 (8) WDT*1 (2) Refresh timer*2 *3 (1) TPU (26) 8-bit timer*3 (12) SCI (20) DTC*3 (1) DMAC*3 (4) PBC*3 (1) A/D converter (1) IIC*3 (4) (Option) Numbers in parentheses are the numbers of interrupt sources. 1. When the watchdog timer is used as an interval timer, it generates an interrupt request at each counter overflow. 2. When refresh timer is used as an interval time, an interrupt request is generated by compare match. 3. This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Figure 4.4 Interrupt Sources and Number of Interrupts Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 119 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.5 Trap Instruction Trap instruction exception handling starts when a TRAPA instruction is executed. Trap instruction exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state. The TRAPA instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector number from 0 to 3, as specified in the instruction code. Table 4.5 shows the status of CCR and EXR after execution of trap instruction exception handling. Table 4.5 Status of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling CCR EXR Interrupt Control Mode I UI I2 to I0 T 0 1 — — — 2 1 — — 0 Legend: 1: Set to 1 0: Cleared to 0 —: Retains value prior to execution Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 120 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.6 Stack Status after Exception Handling Figure 4.5 shows the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and interrupt exception handling. SP SP CCR CCR* PC (16 bits) (a) Interrupt control mode 0 EXR Reserved* CCR CCR* PC (16 bits) (b) Interrupt control mode 2 Note: * Ignored on return. Figure 4.5 (1) Stack Status after Exception Handling (Normal Modes: Not Available in the H8S/2633 Group) SP SP CCR EXR Reserved* CCR PC (24 bits) PC (24 bits) (a) Interrupt control mode 0 (b) Interrupt control mode 2 Note: * Ignored on return. Figure 4.5 (2) Stack Status after Exception Handling (Advanced Modes) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 121 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 4 Exception Handling 4.7 Notes on Use of the Stack When accessing word data or longword data, the H8S/2633 Group assumes that the lowest address bit is 0. The stack should always be accessed by word transfer instruction or longword transfer instruction, and the value of the stack pointer (SP, ER7) should always be kept even. Use the following instructions to save registers: PUSH.W Rn (or MOV.W Rn, @-SP) PUSH.L ERn (or MOV.L ERn, @-SP) Use the following instructions to restore registers: POP.W Rn (or MOV.W @SP+, Rn) POP.L ERn (or MOV.L @SP+, ERn) Setting SP to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. Figure 4.6 shows an example of what happens when the SP value is odd. CCR SP R1L SP PC PC SP H'FFFEFA H'FFFEFB H'FFFEFC H'FFFEFD H'FFFEFF TRAP instruction executed MOV.B R1L, @–ER7 SP set to H'FFFEFF Data saved above SP Contents of CCR lost Legend: CCR: Condition code register PC: Program counter R1L: General register R1L SP: Stack pointer Note: This diagram illustrates an example in which the interrupt control mode is 0, in advanced mode. Figure 4.6 Operation when SP Value is Odd Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 122 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.1 Overview 5.1.1 Features The H8S/2633 Group controls interrupts by means of an interrupt controller. The interrupt controller has the following features: • Two interrupt control modes Any of two interrupt control modes can be set by means of the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in the system control register (SYSCR) • Priorities settable with IPR An interrupt priority register (IPR) is provided for setting interrupt priorities. Eight priority levels can be set for each module for all interrupts except NMI NMI is assigned the highest priority level of 8, and can be accepted at all times • Independent vector addresses All interrupt sources are assigned independent vector addresses, making it unnecessary for the source to be identified in the interrupt handling routine • Nine external interrupts NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is accepted at all times. Rising edge or falling edge can be selected for NMI Falling edge, rising edge, or both edge detection, or level sensing, can be selected for IRQ7 to IRQ0 • DTC* and DMAC* control DTC and DMAC activation is performed by means of interrupts Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 123 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.1.2 Block Diagram A block diagram of the interrupt controller is shown in Figure 5.1. CPU INTM1, INTM0 SYSCR NMIEG NMI input NMI input unit IRQ input IRQ input unit ISR ISCR IER Interrupt request Vector number Priority determination I Internal interrupt request SWDTEND to TEI4 I2 to I0 IPR Interrupt controller Legend: ISCR: IER: ISR: IPR: SYSCR: IRQ sense control register IRQ enable register IRQ status register Interrupt priority register System control register Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 124 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 CCR EXR Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 5.1 summarizes the pins of the interrupt controller. Table 5.1 Interrupt Controller Pins Name Symbol I/O Function Nonmaskable interrupt NMI Input Nonmaskable external interrupt; rising or falling edge can be selected External interrupt requests 7 to 0 IRQ7 5.1.4 to IRQ0 Input Maskable external interrupts; rising, falling, or both edges, or level sensing, can be selected Register Configuration Table 5.2 summarizes the registers of the interrupt controller. Table 5.2 Interrupt Controller Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address*1 System control register SYSCR R/W H'01 H'FDE5 IRQ sense control register H ISCRH R/W H'00 H'FE12 IRQ sense control register L ISCRL R/W H'00 H'FE13 IRQ enable register IER R/W H'00 H'FE14 IRQ status register ISR R/(W)*2 H'00 H'FE15 Interrupt priority register A IPRA R/W H'77 H'FEC0 Interrupt priority register B IPRB R/W H'77 H'FEC1 Interrupt priority register C IPRC R/W H'77 H'FEC2 Interrupt priority register D IPRD R/W H'77 H'FEC3 Interrupt priority register E IPRE R/W H'77 H'FEC4 Interrupt priority register F IPRF R/W H'77 H'FEC5 Interrupt priority register G IPRG R/W H'77 H'FEC6 Interrupt priority register H IPRH R/W H'77 H'FEC7 Interrupt priority register I IPRI R/W H'77 H'FEC8 Interrupt priority register J IPRJ R/W H'77 H'FEC9 Interrupt priority register K IPRK R/W H'77 H'FECA Interrupt priority register L IPRL R/W H'77 H'FECB Interrupt priority register O IPRO R/W H'77 H'FECE Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Can only be written with 0 for flag clearing. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 125 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.2 Register Descriptions 5.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MACS — INTM1 INTM0 NMIEG MRESE — RAME 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 R/W — R/W R/W R/W R/W — R/W SYSCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the interrupt control mode, and the detected edge for NMI. Only bits 5 to 3 are described here; for details of the other bits, see section 3.2.2, System Control Register (SYSCR). SYSCR is initialized to H'01 by a power-on reset, manual reset, and in hardware standby mode. SYSCR is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 5 and 4—Interrupt Control Mode 1 and 0 (INTM1, INTM0): These bits select one of two interrupt control modes for the interrupt controller. Bit 5 Bit 4 INTM1 INTM0 Interrupt Control Mode Description 0 0 0 Interrupts are controlled by I bit 1 — Setting prohibited 0 2 Interrupts are controlled by bits I2 to I0, and IPR 1 — Setting prohibited 1 (Initial value) Bit 3—NMI Edge Select (NMIEG): Selects the input edge for the NMI pin. Bit 3 NMIEG Description 0 Interrupt request generated at falling edge of NMI input 1 Interrupt request generated at rising edge of NMI input Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 126 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.2.2 Bit Interrupt Priority Registers A to L, O (IPRA to IPRL, IPRO) : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — IPR6 IPR5 IPR4 — IPR2 IPR1 IPR0 Initial value : 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 R/W — R/W R/W R/W — R/W R/W R/W : The IPR registers are thirteen 8-bit readable/writable registers that set priorities (levels 7 to 0) for interrupts other than NMI. The correspondence between IPR settings and interrupt sources is shown in table 5.3. The IPR registers set a priority (level 7 to 0) for each interrupt source other than NMI. The IPR registers are initialized to H'77 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 and 3—Reserved: These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Table 5.3 Correspondence between Interrupt Sources and IPR Settings Bits Register 6 to 4 2 to 0 IPRA IRQ0 IRQ1 IPRB IRQ2 IRQ3 IPRC IRQ6 IRQ7 IRQ4 IRQ5 DTC* IPRD IPRE Watchdog timer 0 PC break* A/D converter, watchdog timer 1* IPRF TPU channel 0 TPU channel 1 IPRG TPU channel 2 TPU channel 3 IPRH TPU channel 4 TPU channel 5 IPRI 8-bit timer channel 0* 8-bit timer channel 1* IPRJ DMAC* SCI channel 0 IPRK SCI channel 1 IPRL 8-bit timer 2, 3* SCI channel 2 IIC (Option)* IPRO SCI channel 3 SCI channel 4 Refresh timer* Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 127 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller As shown in table 5.3, multiple interrupts are assigned to one IPR. Setting a value in the range from H'0 to H'7 in the 3-bit groups of bits 6 to 4 and 2 to 0 sets the priority of the corresponding interrupt. The lowest priority level, level 0, is assigned by setting H'0, and the highest priority level, level 7, by setting H'7. When interrupt requests are generated, the highest-priority interrupt according to the priority levels set in the IPR registers is selected. This interrupt level is then compared with the interrupt mask level set by the interrupt mask bits (I2 to I0) in the extend register (EXR) in the CPU, and if the priority level of the interrupt is higher than the set mask level, an interrupt request is issued to the CPU. 5.2.3 Bit IRQ Enable Register (IER) : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IRQ7E IRQ6E IRQ5E IRQ4E IRQ3E IRQ2E IRQ1E IRQ0E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W IER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls enabling and disabling of interrupt requests IRQ7 to IRQ0. IER is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 0—IRQ7 to IRQ0 Enable (IRQ7E to IRQ0E): These bits select whether IRQ7 to IRQ0 are enabled or disabled. Bit n IRQnE Description 0 IRQn interrupts disabled 1 IRQn interrupts enabled (Initial value) (n = 7 to 0) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 128 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.2.4 IRQ Sense Control Registers H and L (ISCRH, ISCRL) ISCRH Bit 15 : 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 IRQ7SCB IRQ7SCA IRQ6SCB IRQ6SCA IRQ5SCB IRQ5SCA IRQ4SCB IRQ4SCA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value : R/W ISCRL Bit IRQ3SCB IRQ3SCA IRQ2SCB IRQ2SCA IRQ1SCB IRQ1SCA IRQ0SCB IRQ0SCA Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The ISCR registers are 16-bit readable/writable registers that select rising edge, falling edge, or both edge detection, or level sensing, for the input at pins IRQ7 to IRQ0. The ISCR registers are initialized to H'0000 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 15 to 0: IRQ7 Sense Control A and B (IRQ7SCA, IRQ7SCB) to IRQ0 Sense Control A and B (IRQ0SCA, IRQ0SCB) Bits 15 to 0 IRQ7SCB to IRQ0SCB IRQ7SCA to IRQ0SCA 0 0 Interrupt request generated at IRQ7 to IRQ0 input low level (initial value) 1 Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ7 to IRQ0 input 1 Description 0 Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ7 to IRQ0 input 1 Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ7 to IRQ0 input Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 129 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.2.5 Bit IRQ Status Register (ISR) : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IRQ7F IRQ6F IRQ5F IRQ4F IRQ3F IRQ2F IRQ1F IRQ0F 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. ISR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates the status of IRQ7 to IRQ0 interrupt requests. ISR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 0—IRQ7 to IRQ0 flags (IRQ7F to IRQ0F): These bits indicate the status of IRQ7 to IRQ0 interrupt requests. Bit n IRQnF Description 0 [Clearing conditions] (Initial value) • Cleared by reading IRQnF flag when IRQnF = 1, then writing 0 to IRQnF flag • When interrupt exception handling is executed when low-level detection is set (IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA = 0) and IRQn input is high • When IRQn interrupt exception handling is executed when falling, rising, or bothedge detection is set (IRQnSCB = 1 or IRQnSCA = 1) • When the DTC* is activated by an IRQn interrupt, and the DISEL bit in MRB of the DTC* is cleared to 0 1 [Setting conditions] • When IRQn input goes low when low-level detection is set (IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA = 0) • When a falling edge occurs in IRQn input when falling edge detection is set (IRQnSCB = 0, IRQnSCA = 1) • When a rising edge occurs in IRQn input when rising edge detection is set (IRQnSCB = 1, IRQnSCA = 0) • When a falling or rising edge occurs in IRQn input when both-edge detection is set (IRQnSCB = IRQnSCA = 1) (n = 7 to 0) Note: * The DTC function is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 130 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.3 Interrupt Sources Interrupt sources comprise external interrupts (NMI and IRQ7 to IRQ0) and internal interrupts (72 sources). 5.3.1 External Interrupts There are nine external interrupts: NMI and IRQ7 to IRQ0. Of these, NMI and IRQ7 to IRQ0 can be used to restore the H8S/2633 Group from software standby mode. NMI Interrupt: NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is always accepted by the CPU regardless of the interrupt control mode or the status of the CPU interrupt mask bits. The NMIEG bit in SYSCR can be used to select whether an interrupt is requested at a rising edge or a falling edge on the NMI pin. The vector number for NMI interrupt exception handling is 7. IRQ7 to IRQ0 Interrupts: Interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 are requested by an input signal at pins IRQ7 to IRQ0. Interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 have the following features: • Using ISCR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is generated by a low level, falling edge, rising edge, or both edges, at pins IRQ7 to IRQ0. • Enabling or disabling of interrupt requests IRQ7 to IRQ0 can be selected with IER. • The interrupt priority level can be set with IPR. • The status of interrupt requests IRQ7 to IRQ0 is indicated in ISR. ISR flags can be cleared to 0 by software. A block diagram of interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 is shown in figure 5.2. IRQnE IRQnSCA, IRQnSCB IRQnF Edge/level detection circuit IRQn interrupt S Q request R IRQn input Clear signal Note: n: 7 to 0 Figure 5.2 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ7 to IRQ0 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 131 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Figure 5.3 shows the timing of setting IRQnF. φ IRQn input pin IRQnF Figure 5.3 Timing of Setting IRQnF The vector numbers for IRQ7 to IRQ0 interrupt exception handling are 23 to 16. Detection of IRQ7 to IRQ0 interrupts does not depend on whether the relevant pin has been set for input or output. However, when a pin is used as an external interrupt input pin, do not clear the corresponding DDR to 0 and use the pin as an I/O pin for another function. 5.3.2 Internal Interrupts There are 72*1 sources for internal interrupts from on-chip supporting modules. • For each on-chip supporting module there are flags that indicate the interrupt request status, and enable bits that select enabling or disabling of these interrupts. If both of these are set to 1 for a particular interrupt source, an interrupt request is issued to the interrupt controller. • The interrupt priority level can be set by means of IPR. • The DMAC*2 and DTC*2 can be activated by a TPU, 8-bit timer*2, SCI, or other interrupt request. When the DMAC*2 and DTC*2 are activated by an interrupt, the interrupt control mode and interrupt mask bits are not affected. Notes: 1. The H8S/2695 has 54 sources for internal interrupts from on-chip supporting modules. 2. This function is not available in the H8S/2695. 5.3.3 Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table Tables 5.4(a) and 5.4(b) show interrupt exception handling sources, vector addresses, and interrupt priorities. For default priorities, the lower the vector number, the higher the priority. Priorities among modules can be set by means of the IPR. The situation when two or more modules are set to the same priority, and priorities within a module, are fixed as shown in table 5.4. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 132 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Table 5.4 (a) Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities (H8S/2633, H8S/2633F, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Interrupt Source NMI IRQ0 Origin of Interrupt Source External pin Vector Address* Vector Number Advanced Mode 7 H'001C IPR High 16 H'0040 IPRA6 to 4 IRQ1 17 H'0044 IPRA2 to 0 IRQ2 IRQ3 18 19 H'0048 H'004C IPRB6 to 4 IRQ4 IRQ5 20 21 H'0050 H'0054 IPRB2 to 0 IRQ6 IRQ7 22 23 H'0058 H'005C IPRC6 to 4 SWDTEND (software activation interrupt end) DTC 24 H'0060 IPRC2 to 0 WOVI0 (interval timer) Watchdog timer 0 25 H'0064 IPRD6 to 4 Reserved — 26 H'0068 IPRD2 to 0 PC break PC break 27 H'006C IPRE6 to 4 ADI (A/D conversion end) A/D 28 H'0070 IPRE2 to 0 WOVI1 (interval timer) Watchdog timer 1 29 H'0074 Reserved — 30 31 H'0078 H'007C TGI0A (TGR0A input capture/compare match) TPU channel 0 32 H'0080 TGI0B (TGR0B input capture/compare match) 33 H'0084 TGI0C (TGR0C input capture/compare match) 34 H'0088 TGI0D (TGR0D input capture/compare match) 35 H'008C 36 H'0090 37 38 39 H'0094 H'0098 H'009C TCI0V (overflow 0) Reserved — Priority IPRF6 to 4 Low Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 133 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Interrupt Source Origin of Interrupt Source TGI1A (TGR1A input capture/compare match) TPU channel 1 Vector Address* Vector Number Advanced Mode IPR Priority 40 H'00A0 IPRF2 to 0 High TGI1B (TGR1B input capture/compare match) 41 H'00A4 TCI1V (overflow 1) 42 H'00A8 TCI1U (underflow 1) 43 H'00AC 44 H'00B0 TGI2B (TGR2B input capture/compare match) 45 H'00B4 TCI2V (overflow 2) 46 H'00B8 47 H'00BC 48 H'00C0 TGI3B (TGR3B input capture/compare match) 49 H'00C4 TGI3C (TGR3C input capture/compare match) 50 H'00C8 TGI3D (TGR3D input capture/compare match) 51 H'00CC TCI3V (overflow 3) 52 H'00D0 TGI2A (TGR2A input capture/compare match) TPU channel 2 TCI2U (underflow 2) TGI3A (TGR3A input capture/compare match) TPU channel 3 Reserved — 53 54 55 H'00D4 H'00D8 H'00DC TGI4A (TGR4A input capture/compare match) TPU channel 4 56 H'00E0 TGI4B (TGR4B input capture/compare match) 57 H'00E4 TCI4V (overflow 4) 58 H'00E8 TCI4U (underflow 4) 59 H'00EC Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 134 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 IPRG6 to 4 IPRG2 to 0 IPRH6 to 4 Low Section 5 Interrupt Controller Interrupt Source Origin of Interrupt Source TGI5A (TGR5A input capture/compare match) TPU channel 5 Vector Address* Vector Number Advanced Mode IPR Priority 60 H'00F0 IPRH2 to 0 High TGI5B (TGR5B input capture/compare match) 61 H'00F4 TCI5V (overflow 5) 62 H'00F8 TCI5U (underflow 5) 63 H'00FC 64 H'0100 65 H'0104 66 H'0108 CMIA0 (compare match A0) CMIB0 (compare match B0) 8-bit timer channel 0 OVI0 (overflow 0) Reserved — 67 H'010C CMIA1 (compare match A1) 8-bit timer channel 1 68 H'0110 69 H'0114 70 H'0118 71 72 H'011C H'0120 DEND0B (channel 0B transfer end) 73 H'0124 DEND1A (channel 1/channel 1A transfer end) 74 H'0128 DEND1B (channel 1B transfer end) 75 H'012C CMIB1 (compare match B1) OVI1 (overflow 1) Reserved DED0A (channel 0/channel 0A transfer end) — DMAC Reserved — 76 77 78 79 H'0130 H'0134 H'0138 H'013C ERI0 (receive error 0) SCI channel 0 80 H'0140 81 H'0144 TXI0 (transmit data empty 0) 82 H'0148 TEI0 (transmission end 0) 83 H'014C 84 H'0150 85 H'0154 TXI1 (transmit data empty 1) 86 H'0158 TEI1 (transmission end 1) 87 H'015C RXI0 (reception completed 0) ERI1 (receive error 1) RXI1 (reception completed 1) SCI channel 1 IPRI6 to 4 IPRI2 to 0 IPRJ6 to 4 IPRJ2 to 0 IPRK6 to 4 Low Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 135 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Interrupt Source ERI2 (receive error 2) RXI2 (reception completed 2) Origin of Interrupt Source SCI channel 2 Vector Address* Vector Number Advanced Mode IPR Priority 88 H'0160 IPRK2 to 0 High 89 H'0164 TXI2 (transmit data empty 2) 90 H'0168 TEI2 (transmission end 2) 91 H'016C 92 H'0170 93 H'0174 94 H'0178 CMIA0 (compare match A2) CMIB0 (compare match B2) 8 bit timer channel 2 OVI0 (overflow 2) Reserved — 95 H'017C CMIA1 (compare match A3) 8 bit timer channel 3 96 H'0180 97 H'0184 98 H'0188 CMIB1 (compare match B3) OVI1 (overflow 3) Reserved — IICI0 (1 byte transmission/reception completed) IIC channel 100 0 (optional) H'0190 101 H'0194 IIC channel 102 1 (optional) H'0198 103 H'019C DDCSW1 (format switch) IICI1 (1 byte transmission/reception completed) Reserved 99 IPRL6 to 4 H'018C IPRL2 to 0 Reserved — 104 105 106 107 H'01A0 H'01A4 H'01A8 H'01AC IPRM6 to 4 Reserved — 108 109 110 111 H'01B0 H'01B4 H'01B8 H'01BC IPRM2 to 0 Reserved — 112 113 114 115 H'01C0 H'01C4 H'01C8 H'01CC IPRN6 to 4 Reserved — 116 117 118 119 H'01D0 H'01D4 H'01D8 H'01DC IPRN2 to 0 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 136 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Low Section 5 Interrupt Controller Origin of Interrupt Source Vector Address* Vector Number Advanced Mode IPR Priority 120 H'01E0 IPRO6 to 4 High 121 H'01E4 TXI3 (transmission data empty 3) 122 H'01E8 TEI3 (transmission end 3) 123 H'01EC 124 H'01F0 125 H'01F4 TXI4 (transmission data empty 4) 126 H'01F8 TEI4 (transmission end 4) 127 H'01FC Interrupt Source ERI3 (reception error 3) RXI3 (reception completed 3) ERI4 (reception error 4) RXI4 (reception completed 4) SCI channel 3 SCI channel 4 IPRO2 to 0 Low Note: * Lower 16 bits of the start address. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 137 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Table 5.4 (b) Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities (H8S/2695) Interrupt Source NMI Origin of Interrupt Source Vector Number Advanced Mode IPR 7 H'001C 16 H'0040 IPRA6 to 4 IRQ1 17 H'0044 IPRA2 to 0 IRQ2 IRQ3 18 19 H'0048 H'004C IPRB6 to 4 IRQ4 IRQ5 20 21 H'0050 H'0054 IPRB2 to 0 IRQ6 IRQ7 22 23 H'0058 H'005C IPRC6 to 4 IRQ0 External pin Vector Address* High Reserved — 24 H'0060 IPRC2 to 0 WOVI0 (interval timer) Watchdog timer 0 25 H'0064 IPRD6 to 4 Reserved — 26 H'0068 IPRD2 to 0 27 H'006C IPRE6 to 4 IPRE2 to 0 ADI (A/D conversion end) A/D 28 H'0070 Reserved — 29 30 31 H'0074 H'0078 H'007C TGI0A (TGR0A input capture/compare match) TPU channel 0 32 H'0080 TGI0B (TGR0B input capture/compare match) 33 H'0084 TGI0C (TGR0C input capture/compare match) 34 H'0088 TGI0D (TGR0D input capture/compare match) 35 H'008C TCI0V (overflow 0) 36 H'0090 37 38 39 H'0094 H'0098 H'009C Reserved — Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 138 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Priority IPRF6 to 4 Low Section 5 Interrupt Controller Interrupt Source Origin of Interrupt Source TGI1A (TGR1A input capture/compare match) TPU channel 1 Vector Address* Vector Number Advanced Mode IPR Priority 40 H'00A0 IPRF2 to 0 High TGI1B (TGR1B input capture/compare match) 41 H'00A4 TCI1V (overflow 1) 42 H'00A8 TCI1U (underflow 1) 43 H'00AC 44 H'00B0 TGI2B (TGR2B input capture/compare match) 45 H'00B4 TCI2V (overflow 2) 46 H'00B8 47 H'00BC 48 H'00C0 TGI3B (TGR3B input capture/compare match) 49 H'00C4 TGI3C (TGR3C input capture/compare match) 50 H'00C8 TGI3D (TGR3D input capture/compare match) 51 H'00CC TCI3V (overflow 3) 52 H'00D0 TGI2A (TGR2A input capture/compare match) TPU channel 2 TCI2U (underflow 2) TGI3A (TGR3A input capture/compare match) TPU channel 3 Reserved — 53 54 55 H'00D4 H'00D8 H'00DC TGI4A (TGR4A input capture/compare match) TPU channel 4 56 H'00E0 TGI4B (TGR4B input capture/compare match) 57 H'00E4 TCI4V (overflow 4) 58 H'00E8 TCI4U (underflow 4) 59 H'00EC IPRG6 to 4 IPRG2 to 0 IPRH6 to 4 Low Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 139 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Interrupt Source Origin of Interrupt Source TGI5A (TGR5A input capture/compare match) TPU channel 5 Vector Address* Vector Number Advanced Mode IPR Priority 60 H'00F0 IPRH2 to 0 High TGI5B (TGR5B input capture/compare match) 61 H'00F4 TCI5V (overflow 5) 62 H'00F8 TCI5U (underflow 5) 63 H'00FC Reserved — 64 65 66 67 H'0100 H'0104 H'0108 H'010C IPRI6 to 4 Reserved — 68 69 70 71 H'0110 H'0114 H'0118 H'011C IPRI2 to 0 Reserved — 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 H'0120 H'0124 H'0128 H'012C H'0130 H'0134 H'0138 H'013C IPRJ6 to 4 ERI0 (receive error 0) SCI channel 0 80 H'0140 IPRJ2 to 0 81 H'0144 TXI0 (transmit data empty 0) 82 H'0148 TEI0 (transmission end 0) 83 H'014C 84 H'0150 85 H'0154 TXI1 (transmit data empty 1) 86 H'0158 TEI1 (transmission end 1) 87 H'015C 88 H'0160 89 H'0164 TXI2 (transmit data empty 2) 90 H'0168 TEI2 (transmission end 2) 91 H'016C RXI0 (reception completed 0) ERI1 (receive error 1) RXI1 (reception completed 1) ERI2 (receive error 2) RXI2 (reception completed 2) SCI channel 1 SCI channel 2 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 140 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 IPRK6 to 4 IPRK2 to 0 Low Section 5 Interrupt Controller Interrupt Source Origin of Interrupt Source Reserved Vector Address* Vector Number Advanced Mode — 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 Reserved — Reserved IPR Priority H'0170 H'0174 H'0178 H'017C H'0180 H'0184 H'0188 H'018C IPRL6 to 4 High 100 101 102 103 H'0190 H'0194 H'0198 H'019C IPRL2 to 0 — 104 105 106 107 H'01A0 H'01A4 H'01A8 H'01AC IPRM6 to 4 Reserved — 108 109 110 111 H'01B0 H'01B4 H'01B8 H'01BC IPRM2 to 0 Reserved — 112 113 114 115 H'01C0 H'01C4 H'01C8 H'01CC IPRN6 to 4 Reserved — 116 117 118 119 H'01D0 H'01D4 H'01D8 H'01DC IPRN2 to 0 ERI3 (reception error 3) SCI channel 3 120 H'01E0 IPRO6 to 4 121 H'01E4 TXI3 (transmission data empty 3) 122 H'01E8 TEI3 (transmission end 3) 123 H'01EC 124 H'01F0 125 H'01F4 TXI4 (transmission data empty 4) 126 H'01F8 TEI4 (transmission end 4) 127 H'01FC RXI3 (reception completed 3) ERI4 (reception error 4) RXI4 (reception completed 4) SCI channel 4 IPRO2 to 0 Low Note: * Lower 16 bits of the start address. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 141 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.4 Interrupt Operation 5.4.1 Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation Interrupt operations in the H8S/2633 Group differ depending on the interrupt control mode. NMI interrupts are accepted at all times except in the reset state and the hardware standby state. In the case of IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts, an enable bit is provided for each interrupt. Clearing an enable bit to 0 disables the corresponding interrupt request. Interrupt sources for which the enable bits are set to 1 are controlled by the interrupt controller. Table 5.5 shows the interrupt control modes. The interrupt controller performs interrupt control according to the interrupt control mode set by the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in SYSCR, the priorities set in IPR, and the masking state indicated by the I and UI bits in the CPU’s CCR, and bits I2 to I0 in EXR. Table 5.5 Interrupt Control Modes SYSCR Interrupt Priority Setting Control Mode INTM1 INTM0 Registers Interrupt Mask Bits Description 0 0 — 2 — 1 0 — I Interrupt mask control is performed by the I bit. 1 — — Setting prohibited 0 IPR I2 to I0 8-level interrupt mask control is performed by bits I2 to I0. 8 priority levels can be set with IPR. 1 — — Setting prohibited Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 142 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Figure 5.4 shows a block diagram of the priority decision circuit. Interrupt control mode 0 I Interrupt acceptance control Default priority determination Interrupt source Vector number 8-level mask control IPR I2 to I0 Interrupt control mode 2 Figure 5.4 Block Diagram of Interrupt Control Operation Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 143 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller (1) Interrupt Acceptance Control In interrupt control mode 0, interrupt acceptance is controlled by the I bit in CCR. Table 5.6 shows the interrupts selected in each interrupt control mode. Table 5.6 Interrupts Selected in Each Interrupt Control Mode (1) Interrupt Mask Bits Interrupt Control Mode I Selected Interrupts 0 0 All interrupts 1 NMI interrupts * All interrupts 2 Legend: *: Don’t care (2) 8-Level Control In interrupt control mode 2, 8-level mask level determination is performed for the selected interrupts in interrupt acceptance control according to the interrupt priority level (IPR). The interrupt source selected is the interrupt with the highest priority level, and whose priority level set in IPR is higher than the mask level. Table 5.7 Interrupts Selected in Each Interrupt Control Mode (2) Interrupt Control Mode Selected Interrupts 0 All interrupts 2 Highest-priority-level (IPR) interrupt whose priority level is greater than the mask level (IPR > I2 to I0) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 144 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller (3) Default Priority Determination When an interrupt is selected by 8-level control, its priority is determined and a vector number is generated. If the same value is set for IPR, acceptance of multiple interrupts is enabled, and so only the interrupt source with the highest priority according to the preset default priorities is selected and has a vector number generated. Interrupt sources with a lower priority than the accepted interrupt source are held pending. Table 5.8 shows operations and control signal functions in each interrupt control mode. Table 5.8 Operations and Control Signal Functions in Each Interrupt Control Mode Interrupt Control Mode Interrupt Acceptance Control Setting INTM1 INTM0 I 0 0 0 2 1 0 IM —*1 X 8-Level Control X Default Priority Determination T (Trace) I2 to I0 IPR — —*2 — IM PR T Legend: : Interrupt operation control performed X: No operation (All interrupts enabled) IM: Used as interrupt mask bit PR: Sets priority —: Not used Notes: 1. Set to 1 when interrupt is accepted. 2. Keep the initial setting. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 145 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.4.2 Interrupt Control Mode 0 Enabling and disabling of IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts can be set by means of the I bit in the CPU’s CCR. Interrupts are enabled when the I bit is cleared to 0, and disabled when set to 1. Figure 5.5 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case. [1] If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. [2] The I bit is then referenced. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the interrupt request is accepted. If the I bit is set to 1, only an NMI interrupt is accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending. [3] Interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, the highest-ranked interrupt according to the priority system is accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending. [4] When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. [5] The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the interrupt handling routine. [6] Next, the I bit in CCR is set to 1. This masks all interrupts except NMI. [7] A vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 146 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Program execution status No Interrupt generated? Yes Yes NMI No No I=0 Hold pending Yes No IRQ0 Yes No IRQ1 Yes TEI4 Yes Save PC and CCR I←1 Read vector address Branch to interrupt handling routine Figure 5.5 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 0 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 147 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.4.3 Interrupt Control Mode 2 Eight-level masking is implemented for IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts by comparing the interrupt mask level set by bits I2 to I0 of EXR in the CPU with IPR. Figure 5.6 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case. [1] If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. [2] When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, the interrupt with the highest priority according to the interrupt priority levels set in IPR is selected, and lower-priority interrupt requests are held pending. If a number of interrupt requests with the same priority are generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority according to the priority system shown in table 5.4 is selected. [3] Next, the priority of the selected interrupt request is compared with the interrupt mask level set in EXR. An interrupt request with a priority no higher than the mask level set at that time is held pending, and only an interrupt request with a priority higher than the interrupt mask level is accepted. [4] When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. [5] The PC, CCR, and EXR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the interrupt handling routine. [6] The T bit in EXR is cleared to 0. The interrupt mask level is rewritten with the priority level of the accepted interrupt. If the accepted interrupt is NMI, the interrupt mask level is set to H'7. [7] A vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 148 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Program execution status Interrupt generated? No Yes Yes NMI No Level 7 interrupt? No Yes Mask level 6 or below? Yes No Level 6 interrupt? No Yes Level 1 interrupt? No Mask level 5 or below? No Yes Yes Mask level 0? No Yes Save PC, CCR, and EXR Hold pending Clear T bit to 0 Update mask level Read vector address Branch to interrupt handling routine Figure 5.6 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in Interrupt Control Mode 2 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 149 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 150 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (1) (2) (4) (3) Internal operation Instruction prefetch address (Not executed. This is the contents of the saved PC, the return address.) (2) (4) Instruction code (Not executed.) (3) Instruction prefetch address (Not executed.) (5) SP-2 (7) SP-4 (1) Internal data us Internal write signal Internal read signal Internal address bus Interrupt request signal φ Instruction prefetch (5) (7) (8) (9) (10) Vector fetch (12) (11) Internal operation (14) (13) Interrupt service routine instruction prefetch (6) (8) Saved PC and saved CCR (9) (11) Vector address (10) (12) Interrupt handling routine start address (vector address contents) (13) Interrupt handling routine start address ((13) = (10) (12)) (14) First instruction of interrupt handling routine (6) Stack 5.4.4 Interrupt level determination Wait for end of instruction Interrupt acceptance Section 5 Interrupt Controller Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence Figure 5.7 shows the interrupt exception handling sequence. The example shown is for the case where interrupt control mode 0 is set in advanced mode, and the program area and stack area are in on-chip memory. Figure 5.7 Interrupt Exception Handling Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.4.5 Interrupt Response Times The H8S/2633 Group is capable of fast word transfer instruction to on-chip memory, and the program area is provided in on-chip ROM and the stack area in on-chip RAM, enabling highspeed processing. Table 5.9 shows interrupt response times—the interval between generation of an interrupt request and execution of the first instruction in the interrupt handling routine. The execution status symbols used in table 5.9 are explained in table 5.10. Table 5.9 Interrupt Response Times Normal Mode*5 Advanced Mode No. Execution Status INTM1 = 0 INTM1 = 1 INTM1 = 0 INTM1 = 1 1 Interrupt priority determination*1 3 3 3 3 2 Number of wait states until executing 1 to instruction ends*2 (19+2·SI) 1 to (19+2·SI) 1 to (19+2·SI) 1 to (19+2·SI) 3 PC, CCR, EXR stack save 2·SK 3·SK 2·SK 3·SK 4 Vector fetch SI SI 2·SI 2·SI 5 Instruction fetch*3 2·SI 2·SI 2·SI 2·SI 6 Internal processing*4 Total (using on-chip memory) Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2 2 2 2 11 to 31 12 to 32 12 to 32 13 to 33 Two states in case of internal interrupt. Refers to MULXS and DIVXS instructions. Prefetch after interrupt acceptance and interrupt handling routine prefetch. Internal processing after interrupt acceptance and internal processing after vector fetch. Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 151 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Table 5.10 Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution Statuses Object of Access External Device 8 Bit Bus Symbol Instruction fetch SI Branch address read SJ Stack manipulation SK 16 Bit Bus Internal Memory 2-State Access 3-State Access 2-State Access 3-State Access 1 4 6+2m 2 3+m Legend: m: Number of wait states in an external device access. 5.5 Usage Notes 5.5.1 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 to disable interrupts, the disabling becomes effective after execution of the instruction. In other words, when an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 by an instruction such as BCLR or MOV, if an interrupt is generated during execution of the instruction, the interrupt concerned will still be enabled on completion of the instruction, and so interrupt exception handling for that interrupt will be executed on completion of the instruction. However, if there is an interrupt request of higher priority than that interrupt, interrupt exception handling will be executed for the higher-priority interrupt, and the lower-priority interrupt will be ignored. The same also applies when an interrupt source flag is cleared to 0. Figure 5.8 shows an example in which the CMIEA bit in the TMR’s TCR register is cleared to 0. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 152 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller TCR write cycle by CPU CMIA exception handling φ Internal address bus TCR address Internal write signal CMIEA CMFA CMIA interrupt signal Figure 5.8 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling The above contention will not occur if an enable bit or interrupt source flag is cleared to 0 while the interrupt is masked. 5.5.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts Instructions that disable interrupts are LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC. After any of these instructions is executed, all interrupts including NMI are disabled and the next instruction is always executed. When the I bit is set by one of these instructions, the new value becomes valid two states after execution of the instruction ends. 5.5.3 Times when Interrupts are Disabled There are times when interrupt acceptance is disabled by the interrupt controller. The interrupt controller disables interrupt acceptance for a 3-state period after the CPU has updated the mask level with an LDC, ANDC, ORC, or XORC instruction. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 153 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.5.4 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction Interrupt operation differs between the EEPMOV.B instruction and the EEPMOV.W instruction. With the EEPMOV.B instruction, an interrupt request (including NMI) issued during the transfer is not accepted until the move is completed. With the EEPMOV.W instruction, if an interrupt request is issued during the transfer, interrupt exception handling starts at a break in the transfer cycle. The PC value saved on the stack in this case is the address of the next instruction. Therefore, if an interrupt is generated during execution of an EEPMOV.W instruction, the following coding should be used. L1: 5.5.5 EEPMOV.W MOV.W R4,R4 BNE L1 IRQ Interrupt When operating by clock input, acceptance of input to an IRQ is synchronized with the clock. In software standby mode, the input is accepted asynchronously. For details on the input conditions, see section 25.3.2, Control Signal Timing. 5.5.6 NMI Interrupt Usage Notes The NMI interrupt is part of the exception processing performed cooperatively by the LSI’s internal interrupt controller and the CPU when the system is operating normally under the specified electrical conditions. No operations, including NMI interrupts, are guaranteed when operation is not normal (runaway status) due to software problems or abnormal input to the LSI’s pins. In such cases, the LSI may be restored to the normal program execution state by applying an external reset. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 154 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.6 DTC and DMAC Activation by Interrupt (DMAC and DTC functions are not available in the H8S/2695) 5.6.1 Overview The DTC and DMAC can be activated by an interrupt. In this case, the following options are available: • • • • Interrupt request to CPU Activation request to DTC Activation request to DMAC Selection of a number of the above For details of interrupt requests that can be used with to activate the DTC and DMAC, see section 9, Data Transfer Controller (DTC) and section 8, DMA Controller (DMAC). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 155 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.6.2 Block Diagram Figure 5.9 shows a block diagram of the DTC and DMAC interrupt controller. Interrupt request IRQ interrupt On-chip supporting module Interrupt source clear signal Clear signal Disenable signal DMAC* DTC activation request vector number Selection circuit Select signal Clear signal DTCER Control logic DTC* Clear signal DTVECR SWDTE clear signal Determination of priority CPU interrupt request vector number CPU I, I2 to I0 Interrupt controller Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Figure 5.9 Interrupt Control for DTC* and DMAC* Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 156 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller 5.6.3 Operation (DMAC and DTC functions are not available in the H8S/2695) The interrupt controller has three main functions in DTC and DMAC control. (1) Selection of Interrupt Source: DMAC inputs activation factor directly to each channel. The activation factors for each channel of DMAC are selected by DTF3 to DTF0 bits of DMACR. The DTA bit of DMABCR can be used to select whether the selected activation factors are managed by DMAC. By setting the DTA bit to 1, the interrupt factor which were the activation factor for that DMAC do not act as the DTC activation factor or the CPU interrupt factor. Interrupt factors other than the interrupts managed by the DMAC are selected as DTC activation request or CPU interrupt request by the DTCERA to DTCERF of DTC and the DTCE bit of DTCERI. By specifying the DISEL bit of the DTC's MRB, it is possible to clear the DTCE bit to 0 after DTC data transfer, and request a CPU interrupt. If DTC carries out the designate number of data transfers and the transfer counter reads 0, after DTC data transfer, the DTCE bit is also cleared to 0, and a CPU interrupt requested. (2) Determination of Priority: The DTC activation source is selected in accordance with the default priority order, and is not affected by mask or priority levels. See section 8.6, Interrupts, and section 9.3.3, DTC Vector Table for the respective priority. (3) Operation Order: If the same interrupt is selected as a DTC activation source and a CPU interrupt source, the DTC data transfer is performed first, followed by CPU interrupt exception handling. If the same interrupt is selected as the DMAC activation factor and as the DTC activation factor or CPU interrupt factor, these operate independently. They operate in accordance with the respective operating states and bus priorities. Table 5.11 shows the interrupt factor clear control and selection of interrupt factors by specification of the DTA bit of DMAC's DMABCR, DTC's DTCERA to DTCERF, DTCERI's DTCE bits, and the DISEL bit of DTC's MRB. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 157 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 5 Interrupt Controller Table 5.11 Interrupt Source Selection and Clearing Control Settings *1 DTC*1 DMAC *1 *1 Interrupt Source Selection/Clearing Control DTC*1 CPU * X 0 ∆ ∆ DTA DTCE DISEL 0 0 1 *1 DMAC*1 1 1 * * ∆ X X ∆ X Legend: ∆: The relevant interrupt is used. Interrupt source clearing is performed. (The CPU should clear the source flag in the interrupt handling routine.) : The relevant interrupt is used. The interrupt source is not cleared. X: The relevant bit cannot be used. *: Don’t care Note: 1. This function is not available in the H8S/2695. (4) Notes on Use: SCI and A/D converter interrupt sources are cleared when the DMAC* or DTC* reads or writes to the prescribed register, and are not dependent upon the DTA*, DTCE*, and DISEL* bits. Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 158 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 6.1 Overview The PC break controller (PBC) provides functions that simplify program debugging. Using these functions, it is easy to create a self-monitoring debugger, enabling programs to be debugged with the chip alone, without using an in-circuit emulator. Four break conditions can be set in the PBC: instruction fetch, data read, data write, and data read/write. 6.1.1 Features The PC break controller has the following features: • Two break channels (A and B) • The following can be set as break compare conditions: 24 address bits Bit masking possible Bus cycle Instruction fetch Data access: data read, data write, data read/write Bus master Either CPU or CPU/DTC can be selected • The timing of PC break exception handling after the occurrence of a break condition is as follows: Immediately before execution of the instruction fetched at the set address (instruction fetch) Immediately after execution of the instruction that accesses data at the set address (data access) • Module stop mode can be set The initial setting is for PBC operation to be halted. Register access is enabled by clearing module stop mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 159 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 6.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 6.1 shows a block diagram of the PC break controller. BARA Mask control Output control BCRA Control logic Comparator Match signal Internal address Control logic Comparator Match signal Mask control BARB Output control Access status PC break interrupt BCRB Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of PC Break Controller Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 160 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 6.1.3 Register Configuration Table 6.1 shows the PC break controller registers. Table 6.1 PC Break Controller Registers Initial Value Name Abbreviation R/W Power-On Reset Manual Reset Break address register A BARA R/W H'XX000000 Retained H'FE00 Break address register B BARB Break control register A BCRA H'FE08 Break control register B BCRB R/W H'XX000000 Retained R/(W)*2 H'00 Retained 2 R/(W)* H'00 Retained Module stop control register C MSTPCRC R/W H'FDEA H'FF Retained Address*1 H'FE04 H'FE09 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. 6.2 Register Descriptions 6.2.1 Break Address Register A (BARA) Bit : 31 ••• 24 — ••• — Initial value : Undefined : — R/W ••• ••• 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Unde- 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 fined — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W ••• ••• ••• ••• 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA BAA 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W BARA is a 32-bit readable/writable register that specifies the channel A break address. BAA23 to BAA0 are initialized to H'000000 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. Bits 31 to 24—Reserved: These bits return an undefined value if read, and cannot be modified. Bits 23 to 0—Break Address A23 to A0 (BAA23 to BAA0): These bits hold the channel A PC break address. 6.2.2 Break Address Register B (BARB) BARB is the channel B break address register. The bit configuration is the same as for BARA. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 161 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 6.2.3 Bit Break Control Register A (BCRA) : Initial value : R/W 7 6 CMFA CDA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W : R/(W)* 5 4 3 2 1 BAMRA2 BAMRA1 BAMRA0 CSELA1 CSELA0 0 BIEA Note: * Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. BCRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls channel A PC breaks. BCRA (1) selects the break condition bus master, (2) specifies bits subject to address comparison masking, and (3) specifies whether the break condition is applied to an instruction fetch or a data access. It also contains a condition match flag. BCRA is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7—Condition Match Flag A (CMFA): Set to 1 when a break condition set for channel A is satisfied. This flag is not cleared to 0. Bit 7 CMFA Description 0 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written to CMFA after reading CMFA = 1 1 (Initial value) [Setting condition] When a condition set for channel A is satisfied Bit 6—CPU Cycle/DTC Cycle Select A (CDA): Selects the channel A break condition bus master. Bit 6 CDA Description 0 PC break is performed when CPU is bus master 1 PC break is performed when CPU or DTC is bus master (Initial value) Bits 5 to 3—Break Address Mask Register A2 to A0 (BAMRA2–BAMRA0): These bits specify which bits of the break address (BAA23 to BAA0) set in BARA are to be masked. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 162 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 BAMRA2 BAMRA1 BAMRA0 Description 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 All BARA bits are unmasked and included in break conditions (Initial value) 1 BAA0 (lowest bit) is masked, and not included in break conditions 0 BAA1 to BAA0 (lower 2 bits) are masked, and not included in break conditions 1 BAA2 to BAA0 (lower 3 bits) are masked, and not included in break conditions 0 BAA3 to BAA0 (lower 4 bits) are masked, and not included in break conditions 1 BAA7 to BAA0 (lower 8 bits) are masked, and not included in break conditions 0 BAA11 to BAA0 (lower 12 bits) are masked, and not included in break conditions 1 BAA15 to BAA0 (lower 16 bits) are masked, and not included in break conditions Bits 2 and 1—Break Condition Select A (CSELA1, CSELA0): These bits selection an instruction fetch, data read, data write, or data read/write cycle as the channel A break condition. Bit 2 Bit 1 CSELA1 CSELA0 Description 0 0 Instruction fetch is used as break condition 1 Data read cycle is used as break condition 0 Data write cycle is used as break condition 1 Data read/write cycle is used as break condition 1 (Initial value) Bit 0—Break Interrupt Enable A (BIEA): Enables or disables channel A PC break interrupts. Bit 0 BIEA Description 0 PC break interrupts are disabled 1 PC break interrupts are enabled (Initial value) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 163 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 6.2.4 Break Control Register B (BCRB) BCRB is the channel B break control register. The bit configuration is the same as for BCRA. 6.2.5 Bit Module Stop Control Register C (MSTPCRC) : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTPC7 MSTPC6 MSTPC5 MSTPC4 MSTPC3 MSTPC2 MSTPC1 MSTPC0 Initial value : R/W : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCRC is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control. When the MSTPC4 bit is set to 1, PC break controller operation is stopped at the end of the bus cycle, and module stop mode is entered. Register read/write accesses are not possible in module stop mode. For details, see section 24.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCRC is initialized to H'FF by a power on reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized by a manual reset and in software standby mode. Bit 4—Module Stop (MSTPC4): Specifies the PC break controller module stop mode. Bit 4 MSTPC4 Description 0 PC break controller module stop mode is cleared 1 PC break controller module stop mode is set Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 164 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 6.3 Operation The operation flow from break condition setting to PC break interrupt exception handling is shown in sections 6.3.1, PC Break Interrupt Due to Instruction Fetch, and 6.3.2, PC Break Interrupt Due to Data Access, taking the example of channel A. 6.3.1 PC Break Interrupt Due to Instruction Fetch (1) Initial settings Set the break address in BARA. For a PC break caused by an instruction fetch, set the address of the first instruction byte as the break address. Set the break conditions in BCRA. BCRA bit 6 (CDA): With a PC break caused by an instruction fetch, the bus master must be the CPU. Set 0 to select the CPU. BCRA bits 5 to 3 (BAMA2 to BAMA0): Set the address bits to be masked. BCRA bits 2 to 1 (CSELA1 to CSELA0): Set 00 to specify an instruction fetch as the break condition. BCRA bit 0 (BIEA): Set to 1 to enable break interrupts. (2) Satisfaction of break condition When the instruction at the set address is fetched, a PC break request is generated immediately before execution of the fetched instruction, and the condition match flag (CMFA) is set. (3) Interrupt handling After priority determination by the interrupt controller, PC break interrupt exception handling is started. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 165 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 6.3.2 PC Break Interrupt Due to Data Access (1) Initial settings Set the break address in BARA. For a PC break caused by a data access, set the target ROM, RAM, I/O, or external address space address as the break address. Stack operations and branch address reads are included in data accesses. Set the break conditions in BCRA. BCRA bit 6 (CDA): Select the bus master. BCRA bits 5 to 3 (BAMA2 to BAMA0): Set the address bits to be masked. BCRA bits 2 to 1 (CSELA1 to CSELA0): Set 01, 10, or 11 to specify data access as the break condition. BCRA bit 0 (BIEA): Set to 1 to enable break interrupts. (2) Satisfaction of break condition After execution of the instruction that performs a data access on the set address, a PC break request is generated and the condition match flag (CMFA) is set. (3) Interrupt handling After priority determination by the interrupt controller, PC break interrupt exception handling is started. 6.3.3 Notes on PC Break Interrupt Handling (1) The PC break interrupt is shared by channels A and B. The channel from which the request was issued must be determined by the interrupt handler. (2) The CMFA and CMFB flags are not cleared to 0, so 0 must be written to CMFA or CMFB after first reading the flag while it is set to 1. If the flag is left set to 1, another interrupt will be requested after interrupt handling ends. (3) A PC break interrupt generated when the DTC is the bus master is accepted after the bus has been transferred to the CPU by the bus controller. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 166 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 6.3.4 Operation in Transitions to Power-Down Modes The operation when a PC break interrupt is set for an instruction fetch at the address after a SLEEP instruction is shown below. (1) When the SLEEP instruction causes a transition from high-speed (medium-speed) mode to sleep mode, or from subactive mode to subsleep mode: After execution of the SLEEP instruction, a transition is not made to sleep mode or subsleep mode, and PC break interrupt handling is executed. After execution of PC break interrupt handling, the instruction at the address after the SLEEP instruction is executed (figure 6.2 (A)). (2) When the SLEEP instruction causes a transition from high-speed (medium-speed) mode to subactive mode: After execution of the SLEEP instruction, a transition is made to subactive mode via direct transition exception handling. After the transition, PC break interrupt handling is executed, then the instruction at the address after the SLEEP instruction is executed (figure 6.2 (B)). (3) When the SLEEP instruction causes a transition from subactive mode to high-speed (mediumspeed) mode: After execution of the SLEEP instruction, and following the clock oscillation settling time, a transition is made to high-speed (medium-speed) mode via direct transition exception handling. After the transition, PC break interrupt handling is executed, then the instruction at the address after the SLEEP instruction is executed (figure 6.2 (C)). (4) When the SLEEP instruction causes a transition to software standby mode or watch mode: After execution of the SLEEP instruction, a transition is made to the respective mode, and PC break interrupt handling is not executed. However, the CMFA or CMFB flag is set (figure 6.2 (D)). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 167 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) SLEEP instruction execution SLEEP instruction execution SLEEP instruction execution SLEEP instruction execution PC break exception handling System clock → subclock Subclock → system clock, oscillation settling time Transition to respective mode Execution of instruction after sleep instruction Direct transition exception handling Direct transition exception handling (D) (A) PC break exception handling Subactive mode PC break exception handling Execution of instruction after sleep instruction Execution of instruction after sleep instruction (B) (C) High-speed (medium-speed) mode Figure 6.2 Operation in Power-Down Mode Transitions 6.3.5 PC Break Operation in Continuous Data Transfer If a PC break interrupt is generated when the following operations are being performed, exception handling is executed on completion of the specified transfer. (1) When a PC break interrupt is generated at the transfer address of an EEPMOV.B instruction: PC break exception handling is executed after all data transfers have been completed and the EEPMOV.B instruction has ended. (2) When a PC break interrupt is generated at a DTC transfer address: PC break exception handling is executed after the DTC has completed the specified number of data transfers, or after data for which the DISEL bit is set to 1 has been transferred. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 168 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 6.3.6 When Instruction Execution is Delayed by One State Caution is required in the following cases, as instruction execution is one state later than usual. (1) When the PBC is enabled (i.e. when the break interrupt enable bit is set to 1), execution of a one-word branch instruction (Bcc d:8, BSR, JSR, JMP, TRAPA, RTE, or RTS) located in onchip ROM or RAM is always delayed by one state. (2) When break interruption by instruction fetch is set, the set address indicates on-chip ROM or RAM space, and that address is used for data access, the instruction that executes the data access is one state later than in normal operation. (3) When break interruption by instruction fetch is set and a break interrupt is generated, if the executing instruction immediately preceding the set instruction has one of the addressing modes shown below, and that address indicates on-chip ROM or RAM, and that address is used for data access, the instruction will be one state later than in normal operation. @ERn, @(d:16,ERn), @(d:32,ERn), @-ERn/ERn+, @aa:8, @aa:24, @aa:32, @(d:8,PC), @(d:16,PC), @@aa:8 (4) When break interruption by instruction fetch is set and a break interrupt is generated, if the executing instruction immediately preceding the set instruction is NOP or SLEEP, or has #xx,Rn as its addressing mode, and that instruction is located in on-chip ROM or RAM, the instruction will be one state later than in normal operation. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 169 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 6 PC Break Controller (PBC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 6.3.7 Additional Notes (1) When a PC break is set for an instruction fetch at the address following a BSR, JSR, JMP, TRAPA, RTE, or RTS instruction: Even if the instruction at the address following a BSR, JSR, JMP, TRAPA, RTE, or RTS instruction is fetched, it is not executed, and so a PC break interrupt is not generated by the instruction fetch at the next address. (2) When the I bit is set by an LDC, ANDC, ORC, or XORC instruction, a PC break interrupt becomes valid two states after the end of the executing instruction. If a PC break interrupt is set for the instruction following one of these instructions, since interrupts, including NMI, are disabled for a 3-state period in the case of LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC, the next instruction is always executed. For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller. (3) When a PC break is set for an instruction fetch at the address following a Bcc instruction: A PC break interrupt is generated if the instruction at the next address is executed in accordance with the branch condition, but is not generated if the instruction at the next address is not executed. (4) When a PC break is set for an instruction fetch at the branch destination address of a Bcc instruction: A PC break interrupt is generated if the instruction at the branch destination is executed in accordance with the branch condition, but is not generated if the instruction at the branch destination is not executed. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 170 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Section 7 Bus Controller 7.1 Overview The H8S/2633 Group has a built-in bus controller (BSC) that manages the external address space divided into eight areas. The bus specifications, such as bus width and number of access states, can be set independently for each area, enabling multiple memories to be connected easily. The bus controller also has a bus arbitration function, and controls the operation of the internal bus masters: the CPU, DMA controller (DMAC)*, and data transfer controller (DTC)*. Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. 7.1.1 Features The features of the bus controller are listed below. • Manages external address space in area units Manages the external space as 8 areas of 2 Mbytes Bus specifications can be set independently for each area DRAM/Burst ROM interface can be set • Basic bus interface Chip selects (CS0 to CS7) can be output for areas 0 to 7 8-bit access or 16-bit access can be selected for each area 2-state access or 3-state access can be selected for each area Program wait states can be inserted for each area • DRAM interface* DRAM interface can be set for areas 2 to 5 (in advanced mode) Multiplexed output of row and column addresses (8/9/10 bit) 2 CAS method Burst operation (in high-speed mode) Insertion of TP cycle to secure RAS precharge time Selection of CAS-before-RAS refresh and self refresh • Burst ROM interface Burst ROM interface can be set for area 0 Choice of 1- or 2-state burst access Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 171 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller • Idle cycle insertion An idle cycle can be inserted in case of an external read cycle between different areas An idle cycle can be inserted in case of an external write cycle immediately after an external read cycle • Write buffer functions External write cycle and internal access can be executed in parallel DMAC* single-address mode and internal access can be executed in parallel • Bus arbitration function Includes a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus mastership among the CPU, DMAC* and DTC* • Other features Refresh counter* (refresh timer) can be used as an interval timer External bus release function Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 172 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 7.1 shows a block diagram of the bus controller. CS0 to CS7 Internal address bus Area decoder ABWCR External bus control signals ASTCR BCRH BCRL BACK Internal data bus BREQ Bus controller BREQO Wait controller WAIT Internal control signals Bus mode signal WCRH WCRL DRAM controller MCR* External DRAM control signal DRAMCR* RTCNT* RTCOR* CPU bus request signal DTC* bus request signal Bus arbiter DMAC* bus request signal CPU bus acknowledge signal DTC* bus acknowledge signal DMAC* bus acknowledge signal Legend: ABWCR: ASTCR: BCRH: BCRL: WCRH: WCRL: Bus width control register Access state control register Bus control register H Bus control register L Wait control register H Wait control register L MCR*: DRAMCR*: RTCNT*: RTCOR*: Memory control register DRAM control register Refresh timer counter Refresh time constand register Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Figure 7.1 Block Diagram of Bus Controller Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 173 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 7.1 summarizes the pins of the bus controller. Table 7.1 Bus Controller Pins Name Symbol I/O Function Address strobe AS Output Strobe signal indicating that address output on address bus is enabled. Read RD Output Strobe signal indicating that external space is being read. HWR Output Strobe signal indicating that external space is to be written, and upper half (D15 to D8) of data bus is enabled. 2CAS method DRAM with enable signal*. LWR Output Strobe signal indicating that external space is to be written, and lower half (D7 to D0) of data bus is enabled. Output Strobe signal showing selection of area 0 Output Strobe signal showing selection of area 1 Output Strobe signal showing selection of area 2. When area 2 is allocated to DRAM space, this is the row address strobe signal for DRAM*. When areas 2 to 5 are contiguous DRAM space, this is the row address strobe signal for DRAM*. CS3/OE* Output Strobe signal showing selection of area 3. When area 3 is allocated to DRAM space, this is the row address strobe signal for DRAM*. When only area 2 is allocated to DRAM space, or when areas 2 to 5 are contiguous DRAM space, this is output enable signal*. CS4 Output Strobe signal showing selection of area 4. When area 4 is allocated to DRAM space, this is the row address strobe signal for DRAM*. CS5 Output Strobe signal showing selection of area 5. When area 5 is allocated to DRAM space, this is the row address strobe signal for DRAM*. Output Strobe signal showing selection of area 6 Output Strobe signal showing selection of area 7 Output 2 CAS method DRAM upper column address strobe signal* High write/ write enable* Low write Chip select 0 Chip select 1 Chip select 2/row address strobe 2* Chip select 3/row address strobe 3* Chip select 4/row address strobe 4* Chip select 5/row address strobe 5* Chip select 6 Chip select 7 Upper column address strobe* CS0 CS1 CS2 CS6 CS7 CAS* Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 174 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Name Lower column strobe* Wait Symbol I/O Function LCAS* Output DRAM lower column address strobe signal* WAIT Input Wait request signal when accessing external 3-state access space. Input Request signal that releases bus to external device. Output Acknowledge signal indicating that bus has been released. Output External bus request signal used when internal bus master accesses external space when external bus is released. BREQ BACK Bus request Bus request acknowledge Bus request output BREQO Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. 7.1.4 Register Configuration Table 7.2 summarizes the registers of the bus controller. Table 7.2 Bus Controller Registers Initial Value Name Abbreviation R/W Power-On Reset Manual Reset Address*1 Bus width control register ABWCR R/W H'FF/H'00*2 Retained H'FED0 Access state control register ASTCR R/W H'FF Retained H'FED1 Wait control register H WCRH R/W H'FF Retained H'FED2 Wait control register L WCRL R/W H'FF Retained H'FED3 Bus control register H BCRH R/W H'D0 Retained H'FED4 Bus control register L BCRL R/W H'08 Retained H'FED5 Pin function control register PFCR MCR*3 R/W H'0D/H'00 Retained H'FDEB Memory control register R/W H'00 Retained H'FED6 R/W H'00 Retained H'FED7 Refresh timer counter DRAMCR*3 RTCNT*3 R/W H'00 Retained H'FED8 Refresh time constant register RTCOR*3 R/W H'FF Retained H'FED9 DRAM control register Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Determined by the MCU operating mode. 3. This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 175 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.2 Register Descriptions 7.2.1 Bus Width Control Register (ABWCR) Bit : Modes 5 to 7 Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ABW7 ABW6 ABW5 ABW4 ABW3 ABW2 ABW1 ABW0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Mode 4 Initial value : R/W : ABWCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that designates each area for either 8-bit access or 16-bit access. ABWCR sets the data bus width for the external memory space. The bus width for on-chip memory and internal I/O registers is fixed regardless of the settings in ABWCR. In normal mode, the settings of bits ABW7 to ABW1 have no effect on operation. After a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, ABWCR is initialized to H'FF in modes 5 to 7, and to H'00 in mode 4. It is not initialized by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 0—Area 7 to 0 Bus Width Control (ABW7 to ABW0): These bits select whether the corresponding area is to be designated for 8-bit access or 16-bit access. Bit n ABWn Description 0 Area n is designated for 16-bit access 1 Area n is designated for 8-bit access (n = 7 to 0) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 176 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.2.2 Bit Access State Control Register (ASTCR) : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 AST7 AST6 AST5 AST4 AST3 AST2 AST1 AST0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W ASTCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that designates each area as either a 2-state access space or a 3-state access space. ASTCR sets the number of access states for the external memory space. The number of access states for on-chip memory and internal I/O registers is fixed regardless of the settings in ASTCR. In normal mode, the settings of bits AST7 to AST1 have no effect on operation. ASTCR is initialized to H'FF by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Bits 7 to 0—Area 7 to 0 Access State Control (AST7 to AST0): These bits select whether the corresponding area is to be designated as a 2-state access space or a 3-state access space. Wait state insertion is enabled or disabled at the same time. Bit n ASTn Description 0 Area n is designated for 2-state access Wait state insertion in area n external space is disabled 1 Area n is designated for 3-state access (Initial value) Wait state insertion in area n external space is enabled (n = 7 to 0) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 177 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.2.3 Wait Control Registers H and L (WCRH, WCRL) WCRH and WCRL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that select the number of program wait states for each area. Program waits are not inserted in the case of on-chip memory or internal I/O registers. WCRH and WCRL are initialized to H'FF by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. They are not initialized by a manual reset or in software standby mode. (1) WCRH Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 W71 W70 W61 W60 W51 W50 W41 W40 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Bits 7 and 6—Area 7 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W71, W70): These bits select the number of program wait states when area 7 in external space is accessed while the AST7 bit in ASTCR is set to 1. Bit 7 Bit 6 W71 W70 Description 0 0 Program wait not inserted when external space area 7 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 7 is accessed 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 7 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 7 is accessed (Initial value) 1 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 178 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Bits 5 and 4—Area 6 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W61, W60): These bits select the number of program wait states when area 6 in external space is accessed while the AST6 bit in ASTCR is set to 1. Bit 5 Bit 4 W61 W60 Description 0 0 Program wait not inserted when external space area 6 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 6 is accessed 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 6 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 6 is accessed (Initial value) 1 Bits 3 and 2—Area 5 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W51, W50): These bits select the number of program wait states when area 5 in external space is accessed while the AST5 bit in ASTCR is set to 1. Bit 3 Bit 2 W51 W50 Description 0 0 Program wait not inserted when external space area 5 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 5 is accessed 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 5 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 5 is accessed (Initial value) 1 Bits 1 and 0—Area 4 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W41, W40): These bits select the number of program wait states when area 4 in external space is accessed while the AST4 bit in ASTCR is set to 1. Bit 1 Bit 0 W41 W40 Description 0 0 Program wait not inserted when external space area 4 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 4 is accessed 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 4 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 4 is accessed (Initial value) 1 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 179 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller (2) WCRL Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 W31 W30 W21 W20 W11 W10 W01 W00 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Bits 7 and 6—Area 3 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W31, W30): These bits select the number of program wait states when area 3 in external space is accessed while the AST3 bit in ASTCR is set to 1. Bit 7 Bit 6 W31 W30 Description 0 0 Program wait not inserted when external space area 3 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 3 is accessed 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 3 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 3 is accessed (Initial value) 1 Bits 5 and 4—Area 2 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W21, W20): These bits select the number of program wait states when area 2 in external space is accessed while the AST2 bit in ASTCR is set to 1. Bit 5 Bit 4 W21 W20 Description 0 0 Program wait not inserted when external space area 2 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 2 is accessed 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 2 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 2 is accessed (Initial value) 1 Bits 3 and 2—Area 1 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W11, W10): These bits select the number of program wait states when area 1 in external space is accessed while the AST1 bit in ASTCR is set to 1. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 180 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Bit 3 Bit 2 W11 W10 Description 0 0 Program wait not inserted when external space area 1 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 1 is accessed 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 1 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 1 is accessed (Initial value) 1 Bits 1 and 0—Area 0 Wait Control 1 and 0 (W01, W00): These bits select the number of program wait states when area 0 in external space is accessed while the AST0 bit in ASTCR is set to 1. Bit 1 Bit 0 W01 W00 Description 0 0 Program wait not inserted when external space area 0 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 0 is accessed 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 0 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 0 is accessed (Initial value) 1 7.2.4 Bit Bus Control Register H (BCRH) : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 ICIS1 ICIS0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 5 4 3 2 0 1 BRSTRM BRSTS1 BRSTS0 RMTS2* RMTS1* RMTS0* BCRH is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects enabling or disabling of idle cycle insertion, and the memory interface for area 0. BCRH is initialized to H'D0 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Note: * DRAM interface is not available in the H8S/2695. Only a 0 may be written to RMTS2, RMTS1, or RMTS0. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 181 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Bit 7—Idle Cycle Insert 1 (ICIS1): Selects whether or not one idle cycle state is to be inserted between bus cycles when successive external read cycles are performed in different areas. Bit 7 ICIS1 Description 0 Idle cycle not inserted in case of successive external read cycles in different areas 1 Idle cycle inserted in case of successive external read cycles in different areas (Initial value) Bit 6—Idle Cycle Insert 0 (ICIS0): Selects whether or not one idle cycle state is to be inserted between bus cycles when successive external read and external write cycles are performed . Bit 6 ICIS0 Description 0 Idle cycle not inserted in case of successive external read and external write cycles 1 Idle cycle inserted in case of successive external read and external write cycles (Initial value) Bit 5—Burst ROM Enable (BRSTRM): Selects whether area 0 is used as a burst ROM interface. Bit 5 BRSTRM Description 0 Area 0 is basic bus interface 1 Area 0 is burst ROM interface (Initial value) Bit 4—Burst Cycle Select 1 (BRSTS1): Selects the number of burst cycles for the burst ROM interface. Bit 4 BRSTS1 Description 0 Burst cycle comprises 1 state 1 Burst cycle comprises 2 states Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 182 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 7 Bus Controller Bit 3—Burst Cycle Select 0 (BRSTS0): Selects the number of words that can be accessed in a burst ROM interface burst access. Bit 3 BRSTS0 Description 0 Max. 4 words in burst access 1 Max. 8 words in burst access (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0—RAM Type Select (RMTS2 to RMTS0): In advanced mode, these bits select the memory interface for areas 2 to 5. When DRAM space* is selected, the appropriate area becomes the DRAM interface*. Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Only a 0 may be written to RMTS2, RMTS1, or RMTS0. Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 RMTS2 RMTS1 RMTS0 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 0 0 0 Normal space Normal space Normal space 1 Normal space Normal space Normal space DRAM space* 1 0 1 1 1 1 Description Normal space Normal space Normal space DRAM space* DRAM space* DRAM space* DRAM space* DRAM space* DRAM space* Contiguous Contiguous Contiguous Contiguous DRAM space* DRAM space* DRAM space* DRAM space* Note: When all areas selected in DRAM are 8-bit space, the PF2 pin can be used as an I/O port and for BREQO and WAIT. When contiguous RAM is selected set the appropriate bus width and number of access states (the number of programmable waits) to the same values for all of areas 2 to 5. Do not set other than the above combinations. * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Only a 0 may be written to RMTS2, RMTS1, or RMTS0. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 183 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.2.5 Bit Bus Control Register L (BCRL) : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 BRLE BREQOE — OES* DDS* RCTS* WDBE WAITE 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 R/W R/W — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. In writing to OES, DDS, RCTS, the initial value should be written to these bits. BCRL is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs selection of the external bus-released state protocol, enabling or disabling of the write data buffer function, and enabling or disabling of WAIT pin input. BCRL is initialized to H'08 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Bit 7—Bus Release Enable (BRLE): Enables or disables external bus release. Bit 7 BRLE Description 0 External bus release is disabled. BREQ, BACK and BREQO can be used as I/O ports (Initial value) 1 External bus release is enabled Bit 6—BREQO Pin Enable (BREQOE): Outputs a signal that requests the external bus master to drop the bus request signal (BREQ) in the external bus release state, when an internal bus master performs an external space access, or when a refresh request is generated. Bit 6 BREQOE 0 1 Description BREQO output disabled. BREQO can be used as I/O port BREQO output enabled Bit 5—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 0. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 184 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 7 Bus Controller Bit 4—OE Select (OES): Selects the CS3 pin as the OE pin. Bit 4 OES Description 0 Uses the CS3 pin as the port or as CS3 signal output 1 (Initial value) When only area 2 is set for DRAM, or when areas 2 to 5 are set as contiguous DRAM space, the CS3 pin is used as the OE pin Bit 3—DACK Timing Select (DDS): When using the DRAM interface, this bit selects the DMAC single address transfer bus timing. Bit 3 DDS Description 0 When performing DMAC single address transfers to DRAM, always execute full access. The DACK signal is output as a low-level signal from the Tr or T1 cycle 1 Burst access is also possible when performing DMAC single address tranfers to DRAM. The DACK signal is output as a low-level signal from the TC1 or T2 cycle (Initial value) Bit 2—Read CAS Timing Select (RCTS): Selects the CAS signal output timing. Bit 2 RCTS 0 1 Description CAS signal output timing is same when reading and writing (Initial value) When reading, CAS signal is asserted half cycle earlier than when writing Bit 1—Write Data Buffer Enable (WDBE): This bit selects whether or not to use the write buffer function in the external write cycle or the DMAC* single address cycle. Bit 1 WDBE Description 0 Write data buffer function not used 1 Write data buffer function used (Initial value) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 185 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Bit 0—WAIT Pin Enable (WAITE): Selects enabling or disabling of wait input by the WAIT pin. Bit 0 WAITE Description 0 Wait input by WAIT pin disabled. WAIT pin can be used as I/O port (Initial value) Wait input by WAIT pin enabled 1 7.2.6 Bit Pin Function Control Register (PFCR) : 7 CSS07 Initial value : R/W : 6 5 4 CSS36 BUZZE* LCASS* 3 2 1 0 AE3 AE2 AE1 AE0 0 0 0 0 1/0 1/0 0 1/0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Only 0 should be written to the BUZZE and LCASS bits. PFCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the CS selection of pins PG4 and PG1, controls LCAS selection of pins PF2 and PF6, and controls the address output in expanded mode with ROM. PFCR is initialized to H'0D/H'00 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. It retains its previous state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Bit 7—CS0/CS7 Select (CSS07): This bit selects the contents of CS output via the PG4 pin. In modes 4, 5, and 6, setting the corresponding DDR to 1 outputs the selected CS. Bit 7 CSS07 Description 0 Selects CS0 1 Selects CS7 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 186 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 7 Bus Controller Bit 6—CS3/CS6 Select (CSS36): This bit selects the contents of CS output via the PG1 pin. In modes 4, 5, and 6, setting the corresponding DDR to 1 outputs the selected CS. Bit 6 CSS36 Description 0 Selects CS3 1 (Initial value) Selects CS6 Bit 5—BUZZ Output Enable (BUZZE): This bit enables/disables BUZZ output via the PF1 pin. The WDT1 input clock, selected with PSS and CKS2 to CKS0, is output as the BUZZ signal. See section 15.2.4, Pin Function Control Register (PFCR) for details of BUZZ output. Bit 5 BUZZE Description 0 Functions as PF1 input pin 1 Functions as BUZZ output pin (Initial value) Bit 4—LCAS Output Pin Select Bit (LCASS): Selects output pin for LCAS signal. Bit 4 LCASS Description 0 Outputs LCAS signal from PF2 1 Outputs LCAS signal from PF6 (Initial value) Bits 3 to 0—Address Output Enable 3 to 0 (AE3 to AE0): These bits select enabling or disabling of address outputs A8 to A23 in ROMless expanded mode and modes with ROM. When a pin is enabled for address output, the address is output regardless of the corresponding DDR setting. When a pin is disabled for address output, it becomes an output port when the corresponding DDR bit is set to 1. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 187 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 AE3 AE2 AE1 AE0 Description 0 0 0 0 A8 to A23 address output disabled 1 A8 address output enabled; A9 to A23 address output disabled 0 A8, A9 address output enabled; A10 to A23 address output disabled 1 A8 to A10 address output enabled; A11 to A23 address output disabled 0 A8 to A11 address output enabled; A12 to A23 address output disabled 1 A8 to A12 address output enabled; A13 to A23 address output disabled 0 A8 to A13 address output enabled; A14 to A23 address output disabled 1 A8 to A14 address output enabled; A15 to A23 address output disabled 0 A8 to A15 address output enabled; A16 to A23 address output disabled 1 A8 to A16 address output enabled; A17 to A23 address output disabled 0 A8 to A17 address output enabled; A18 to A23 address output disabled 1 A8 to A18 address output enabled; A19 to A23 address output disabled 0 A8 to A19 address output enabled; A20 to A23 address output disabled 1 A8 to A20 address output enabled; A21 to A23 address output disabled (Initial value*) 0 A8 to A21 address output enabled; A22, A23 address output disabled 1 A8 to A23 address output enabled 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 (Initial value*) Note: * In expanded mode with ROM, bits AE3 to AE0 are initialized to B'0000. In ROMless expanded mode, bits AE3 to AE0 are initialized to B'1101. Address pins A0 to A7 are made address outputs by setting the corresponding DDR bits to 1. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 188 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.2.7 Bit Memory Control Register (MCR)* : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TPC BE RCDM CW2 MXC1 MXC0 RLW1 RLW0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The MCR is an 8-bit read/write register that, when areas 2 to 5 are set as the DRAM interface, controls the DRAM strobe method, number of precharge cycles, access mode, address multiplex shift amount, and number of wait states to be inserted when a refresh is performed. The MCR is initialized to H'00 at a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized at a manual reset or in software standby mode. Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Bit 7—TP Cycle Control (TPC): When accessing areas 2 to 5, allocated to DRAM, this bit selects whether the precharge cycle (TP) is 1 state or 2 states. Bit 7 TPC Description 0 Insert 1 precharge cycle 1 Insert 2 precharge cycles (Initial value) Bit 6—Burst Access Enable (BE): This bit enables/disables burst access of areas 2 to 5, allocated as DRAM space. DRAM space burst access is in high-speed page mode. When using EDO type in this case, either select OE output or RAS up mode. Bit 6 BE Description 0 Burst disabled (always full access) 1 Access DRAM space in high-speed page mode (Initial value) Bit 5—RAS Down Mode (RCDM): When areas 2 to 5 are allocated to DRAM space, this bit selects whether the RAS signal level remains Low while waiting for the next DRAM access (RAS down mode) or the RAS signal level returns to High (RAS up mode), when DRAM access is discontinued. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 189 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Bit 5 RCDM Description 0 DRAM interface: selects RAS up mode 1 DRAM interface: selects RAS down mode (Initial value) Bit 4—Reserved (CW2): Only write 0 to this bit. Bits 3 and 2—Multiplex shift counts 1 and 0 (MXC1 and MXC0): These bits select the shift amount to the low side of the row address of the multiplexed row/column address in DRAM interface mode. They also select the row address to be compared in burst operation of the DRAM interface. Bit 3 Bit 2 MXC1 MXC0 0 0 Description 8-bit shift (Initial value) (1) 8-bit access space: target row addresses for comparison are A23 to A8 (2) 16-bit access space: target row addresses for comparison are A23 to A9 1 9-bit shift (1) 8-bit access space: target row addresses for comparison are A23 to A9 (2) 16-bit access space: target row addresses for comparison are A23 to A10 1 0 10-bit shift (1) 8-bit access space: target row addresses for comparison are A23 to A10 (2) 16-bit access space: target row addresses for comparison are A23 to A11 1 — Bits 1 and 0—Refresh Cycle Wait Control 1 and 0 (RLW1 and RLW0): These bits select the number of wait states to be inserted in the CAS-before-RAS refresh cycle of the DRAM interface. The selected number of wait states is applied to all areas set as DRAM space. Wait input via the WAIT pin is disabled. Bit 1 Bit 0 RLW1 RLW0 Description 0 0 Do not insert wait state 1 Insert 1 wait state 0 Insert 2 wait states 1 Insert 3 wait states 1 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 190 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 7 Bus Controller 7.2.8 Bit DRAM Control Register (DRAMCR)* : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RFSHE CBRM RMODE CMF CMIE CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The DRAMCR is an 8-bit read/write register that selects DRAM refresh mode, the refresh counter clock, and sets the refresh timer control. The DRAMCR is initialized to H'00 at a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized at a manual reset or in software standby mode. Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Bit 7—Refresh Control (RFSHE): This bit selects whether or not to perform refresh control. When not performing refresh control, the refresh timer can be used as an interval timer. Bit 7 RFSHE Description 0 Do not perform refresh control 1 Perform refresh control (Initial value) Bit 6—CBR Refresh Mode (CBRM): This bit selects whether CBR refresh is performed in parallel with other external access, or only CBR refresh is performed. Bit 6 CBRM Description 0 Enables external access during CAS-before-RAS refresh 1 Disables external access during CAS-before-RAS refresh (Initial value) Bit 5—Refresh Mode (RMODE): This bit selects whether or not to perform a self refresh in software standby mode when performing refresh control (RFSHE=1). Bit 5 RMODE Description 0 Do not perform self-refresh in software standby mode 1 Perform self-refresh in software standby mode (Initial value) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 191 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Bit 4—Compare Match Flag (CMF): This status flag shows a match between RTCNT and RTCOR values. When performing refresh control (RFSHE=1), write 1 to CMF when writing to the DRAMCR. Bit 4 CMF Description 0 [Clearing] When CMF=1, read the CMF flag, then clear the CMF flag to 0 1 (Initial value) [Setting] CMF is set when RTCNT=RTCOR Bit 3—Compare Match Interrupt Enable (CMIE): This bit enables/disables the CMF flag interrupt request (CMI) when the DRAMCR CMF flag is set to 1. CMIE is always 0 when performing refresh control (RFSHE = 1). Bit 3 CMIE Description 0 Disables CMF flag interrupt requests (CMI) 1 Enables CMF flag interrupt requests (CMI) (Initial value) Bits 2 to 0—Refresh Counter Clock Select (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits select from the seven internal clocks derived by dividing the system clock (φ) to be input to RTCNT. The RTCNT count up starts when CKS2 to CKS0 are set to select the input clock. Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description 0 Stops count 1 Counts on φ/2 0 Counts on φ/8 1 Counts on φ/32 0 Counts on φ/128 1 Counts on φ/512 0 Counts on φ/2048 1 Counts on φ/4096 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 192 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 7 Bus Controller 7.2.9 Refresh Timer Counter (RTCNT)* : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Bit R/W : RTCNT is an 8-bit read/write up-counter. RTCNT counts up using the internal clock selected by the DRAMCR CKS2 to CKS0 bits. When RTCNT matches the value in RTCOR (compare match), the DRAMCR CMF flag is set to 1 and RTCNT is cleared to H'00. If, at this point, DRAMCR RFSHE is set to 1, the refresh cycle starts. When the DRAMCR CMIE bit is set to 1, a compare match interrupt (CMI) is also generated. RTCNT is initialized to H'00 at a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized at a manual reset or in software standby mode. Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. 7.2.10 Refresh Time Constant Register (RTCOR)* : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Bit R/W : RTCOR is an 8-bit read/write register that sets the RTCNT compare match cycle. The values of RTCOR and RTCNT are constantly compared and, when both value match, the DRAMCR CMF flag is set to 1 and RTCNT is cleared to H'00. RTCOR is initialized to H'FF at a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized at a manual reset or in software standby mode. Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 193 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.3 Overview of Bus Control 7.3.1 Area Partitioning In advanced mode, the bus controller partitions the 16 Mbytes address space into eight areas, 0 to 7, in 2-Mbyte units, and performs bus control for external space in area units. A chip select signal (CS0 to CS7) can be output for each area. In normal mode*, it controls a 64-kbyte address space comprising part of area 0. Figure 7.2 shows an outline of the memory map. Note: * Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. H'000000 H'0000 Area 0 (2 Mbytes) H'1FFFFF H'200000 Area 1 (2 Mbytes) H'3FFFFF H'400000 Area 2 (2 Mbytes) H'FFFF H'5FFFFF H'600000 Area 3 (2 Mbytes) H'7FFFFF H'800000 Area 4 (2 Mbytes) H'9FFFFF H'A00000 Area 5 (2 Mbytes) H'BFFFFF H'C00000 Area 6 (2 Mbytes) H'DFFFFF H'E00000 Area 7 (2 Mbytes) H'FFFFFF (1) Advanced mode (2) Normal mode* Note: * Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. Figure 7.2 Overview of Area Partitioning Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 194 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.3.2 Bus Specifications The external space bus specifications consist of three elements: bus width, number of access states, and number of program wait states. The bus width and number of access states for on-chip memory and internal I/O registers are fixed, and are not affected by the bus controller. (1) Bus Width: A bus width of 8 or 16 bits can be selected with ABWCR. An area for which an 8-bit bus is selected functions as an 8-bit access space, and an area for which a 16-bit bus is selected functions as a16-bit access space. If all areas are designated for 8-bit access, 8-bit bus mode is set; if any area is designated for 16-bit access, 16-bit bus mode is set. When the burst ROM interface is designated, 16-bit bus mode is always set. (2) Number of Access States: Two or three access states can be selected with ASTCR. An area for which 2-state access is selected functions as a 2-state access space, and an area for which 3state access is selected functions as a 3-state access space. With the DRAM interface* or the burst ROM interface, the number of access states may be determined without regard to ASTCR. When 2-state access space is designated, wait insertion is disabled. Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. (3) Number of Program Wait States: When 3-state access space is designated by ASTCR, the number of program wait states to be inserted automatically is selected with WCRH and WCRL. From 0 to 3 program wait states can be selected. Table 7.3 shows the bus specifications for each basic bus interface area. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 195 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Table 7.3 Bus Specifications for Each Area (Basic Bus Interface) ABWCR ASTCR WCRH, WCRL ABWn ASTn Wn1 Wn0 Bus Width Program Wait Access States States 0 0 — — 16 2 0 1 0 0 3 0 1 1 7.3.3 1 1 0 2 1 3 0 — — 1 0 0 1 Bus Specifications (Basic Bus Interface) 8 2 0 3 0 1 1 0 2 1 3 Memory Interfaces The H8S/2633 Group memory interfaces comprise a basic bus interface that allows direct connection or ROM, SRAM, and so on, DRAM interface* with direct DRAM connection and a burst ROM interface that allows direct connection of burst ROM. The memory interface can be selected independently for each area. An area for which the basic bus interface is designated functions as normal space, and areas set for DRAM interface are DRAM spaces an area for which the burst ROM interface is designated functions as burst ROM space. Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 196 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.3.4 Interface Specifications for Each Area The initial state of each area is basic bus interface, 3-state access space. The initial bus width is selected according to the operating mode. The bus specifications described here cover basic items only, and the sections on each memory interface (section 7.4, Basic Bus Interface, section 7.5, DRAM Interface, and section 7.7, Burst ROM Interface) should be referred to for further details. Area 0: Area 0 includes on-chip ROM, and in ROM-disabled expansion mode, all of area 0 is external space. In ROM-enabled expansion mode, the space excluding on-chip ROM is external space. A CS0 signal can be output when accessing area 0 external space. Either basic bus interface or burst ROM interface can be selected for area 0. Areas 1 and 6: In external expansion mode, all of areas 1 and 6 is external space. CS1 and CS6 pin signals can be output when accessing the area 1 and 6 external space. Only the basic bus interface can be used for areas 1 and 6. Areas 2 to 5: In external expansion mode, all of areas 2 to 5 is external space. CS2 to CS5 signals can be output when accessing area 2 to 5 external space. The standard bus interface or DRAM interface* can be selected for areas 2 to 5. In DRAM interface mode, signals CS2 to CS5 are used as RAS signals. Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Area 7: Area 7 includes the on-chip RAM and internal I/O registers. In external expansion mode, the space excluding the on-chip RAM and internal I/O registers is external space. The on-chip RAM is enabled when the RAME bit in the system control register (SYSCR) is set to 1; when the RAME bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip RAM is disabled and the corresponding space becomes external space. A CS7 signal can be output when accessing area 7 external space. Only the basic bus interface can be used for the area 7. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 197 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.3.5 Chip Select Signals This LSI allows chip select signals (CS0 to CS7) to be output for each of areas 0 to 7. The level of these signals is set Low when accessing the external space of the respective area. Figure 7.3 shows example CSn (where n = 0 to 7) signal output timing. The output of the CSn signal can be enabled or disabled by the data direction register (DDR) of the port of the corresponding CSn pin. In ROM-disabled expanded mode, the CS0 pin is set for output after a power-on reset. The CS1 to CS7 pins are set for input after a power-on reset, so the corresponding DDR must be set to 1 to allow the output of CS1 to CS7 signals. In ROM-disabled expanded mode, all of pins CS0 to CS7 are set for input after a power-on reset, so the corresponding DDR must be set to 1 to allow the output of CS0 to CS7 signals. See sections 10A and 10B, I/O Ports for details. When areas 2 to 5 are set as DRAM* space, CS2 to CS5 outputs are used as RAS signals. Note: * DRAM interface is not available in the H8S/2695. Bus cycle T1 T2 T3 φ Address bus Area n external address CSn Figure 7.3 CSn Signal Output Timing (where n=0 to 7) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 198 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.4 Basic Bus Interface 7.4.1 Overview The basic bus interface enables direct connection of ROM, SRAM, and so on. The bus specifications can be selected with ABWCR, ASTCR, WCRH, and WCRL (see table 7.3). 7.4.2 Data Size and Data Alignment Data sizes for the CPU and other internal bus masters are byte, word, and longword. The bus controller has a data alignment function, and when accessing external space, controls whether the upper data bus (D15 to D8) or lower data bus (D7 to D0) is used according to the bus specifications for the area being accessed (8-bit access space or 16-bit access space) and the data size. 8-Bit Access Space: Figure 7.4 illustrates data alignment control for the 8-bit access space. With the 8-bit access space, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) is always used for accesses. The amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte: a word transfer instruction is performed as two byte accesses, and a longword transfer instruction, as four byte accesses. Upper data bus Lower data bus D15 D8 D7 D0 Byte size Word size 1st bus cycle 2nd bus cycle 1st bus cycle Longword size 2nd bus cycle 3rd bus cycle 4th bus cycle Figure 7.4 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (8-Bit Access Space) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 199 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 16-Bit Access Space: Figure 7.5 illustrates data alignment control for the 16-bit access space. With the 16-bit access space, the upper data bus (D15 to D8) and lower data bus (D7 to D0) are used for accesses. The amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte or one word, and a longword transfer instruction is executed as two word transfer instructions. In byte access, whether the upper or lower data bus is used is determined by whether the address is even or odd. The upper data bus is used for an even address, and the lower data bus for an odd address. Lower data bus Upper data bus D15 D8 D7 D0 Byte size • Even address Byte size • Odd address Word size Longword size 1st bus cycle 2nd bus cycle Figure 7.5 Access Sizes and Data Alignment Control (16-Bit Access Space) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 200 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.4.3 Valid Strobes Table 7.4 shows the data buses used and valid strobes for the access spaces. In a read, the RD signal is valid without discrimination between the upper and lower halves of the data bus. In a write, the HWR signal is valid for the upper half of the data bus, and the LWR signal for the lower half. Table 7.4 Area 8-bit access space Data Buses Used and Valid Strobes Access Read/ Size Write Address Byte Read — Write — 16-bit access Byte space Read Even RD HWR RD Even Odd Read — Write — Upper Data Bus (D15 to D8) Lower data bus (D7 to D0) Valid Invalid Hi-Z Odd Write Word Valid Strobe HWR LWR RD HWR, LWR Valid Invalid Invalid Valid Valid Hi-Z Hi-Z Valid Valid Valid Valid Valid Notes: Hi-Z: High impedance. Invalid: Input state; input value is ignored. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 201 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.4.4 Basic Timing 8-Bit 2-State Access Space: Figure 7.6 shows the bus timing for an 8-bit 2-state access space. When an 8-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used. The LWR pin is fixed high. Wait states cannot be inserted. Bus cycle T2 T1 φ Address bus CSn AS RD Read D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Invalid HWR LWR High Write D15 to D8 D7 to D0 Valid High impedance Note: n = 0 to 7 Figure 7.6 Bus Timing for 8-Bit 2-State Access Space Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 202 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 8-Bit 3-State Access Space: Figure 7.7 shows the bus timing for an 8-bit 3-state access space. When an 8-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used. The LWR pin is fixed high. Wait states can be inserted. Bus cycle T1 T2 T3 φ Address bus CSn AS RD Read D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Invalid HWR LWR High Write D15 to D8 D7 to D0 Valid High impedance Note: n = 0 to 7 Figure 7.7 Bus Timing for 8-Bit 3-State Access Space Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 203 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 16-Bit 2-State Access Space: Figures 7.8 to 7.10 show bus timings for a 16-bit 2-state access space. When a 16-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used for the even address, and the lower half (D7 to D0) for the odd address. Wait states cannot be inserted. Bus cycle T2 T1 φ Address bus CSn AS RD Read D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Invalid HWR LWR High Write D15 to D8 D7 to D0 Valid High impedance Note: n = 0 to 7 Figure 7.8 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 2-State Access Space (1) (Even Address Byte Access) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 204 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Bus cycle T1 T2 φ Address bus CSn AS RD Read D15 to D8 Invalid D7 to D0 Valid HWR High LWR Write D15 to D8 D7 to D0 High impedance Valid Note: n = 0 to 7 Figure 7.9 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 2-State Access Space (2) (Odd Address Byte Access) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 205 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Bus cycle T1 T2 φ Address bus CSn AS RD Read D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Valid HWR LWR Write D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Valid Note: n = 0 to 7 Figure 7.10 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 2-State Access Space (3) (Word Access) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 206 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 16-Bit 3-State Access Space: Figures 7.11 to 7.13 show bus timings for a 16-bit 3-state access space. When a 16-bit access space is accessed, the upper half (D15 to D8) of the data bus is used for the even address, and the lower half (D7 to D0) for the odd address. Wait states can be inserted. Bus cycle T2 T1 T3 φ Address bus CSn AS RD Read D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Invalid HWR LWR High Write D15 to D8 D7 to D0 Valid High impedance Note: n = 0 to 7 Figure 7.11 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 3-State Access Space (1) (Even Address Byte Access) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 207 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Bus cycle T1 T2 T3 φ Address bus CSn AS RD Read D15 to D8 Invalid D7 to D0 Valid HWR High LWR Write D15 to D8 D7 to D0 High impedance Valid Note: n = 0 to 7 Figure 7.12 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 3-State Access Space (2) (Odd Address Byte Access) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 208 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Bus cycle T1 T2 T3 φ Address bus CSn AS RD Read D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Valid HWR LWR Write D15 to D8 Valid D7 to D0 Valid Note: n = 0 to 7 Figure 7.13 Bus Timing for 16-Bit 3-State Access Space (3) (Word Access) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 209 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.4.5 Wait Control When accessing external space, the H8S/2633 Group can extend the bus cycle by inserting one or more wait states (Tw). There are two ways of inserting wait states: program wait insertion and pin wait insertion using the WAIT pin. Program Wait Insertion From 0 to 3 wait states can be inserted automatically between the T2 state and T3 state on an individual area basis in 3-state access space, according to the settings of WCRH and WCRL. Pin Wait Insertion Setting the WAITE bit in BCRL to 1 enables wait insertion by means of the WAIT pin. Program wait insertion is first carried out according to the settings in WCRH and WCRL. Then, if the WAIT pin is low at the falling edge of φ in the last T2 or Tw state, a Tw state is inserted. If the WAIT pin is held low, Tw states are inserted until it goes high. This is useful when inserting four or more Tw states, or when changing the number of Tw states for different external devices. The WAITE bit setting applies to all areas. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 210 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Figure 7.14 shows an example of wait state insertion timing. By program wait T1 T2 Tw By WAIT pin Tw Tw T3 φ WAIT Address bus AS RD Read Data bus Read data HWR, LWR Write Data bus Note: Write data indicates the timing of WAIT pin sampling. Figure 7.14 Example of Wait State Insertion Timing The settings after a power-on reset are: 3-state access, 3 program wait state insertion, and WAIT input disabled. At a manual reset, the bus control register values are retained and wait control continues as before the reset. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 211 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.5 DRAM Interface (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 7.5.1 Overview This LSI allows area 2 to 5 external space to be set as DRAM space and DRAM interfacing to be performed. With the DRAM interface, DRAM can be directly connected to the LSI. BCRH RMTS2 to RMTS0 allow the setting up of 2, 4, or 8MB DRAM space. Burst operation is possible using high-speed page mode. 7.5.2 Setting up DRAM Space To set up areas 2 to 5 as DRAM space, set the RMTS2 to RMTS0 bits of BCRH. Table 7.5 shows the relationship between the settings of the RMTS2 to RMTS0 bits and DRAM space. You can select (1) one area (area 2), (2) two areas (areas 2 and 3), or (3) four areas (areas 2 to 5). Using 16 64M DRAMs requires a 4M word (8MB) contiguous space. Setting RMTS2 to RMTS0 to 1 allows areas 2 to 5 to be configured as one contiguous DRAM space. The RAS signal can be output from the CS2 pin, and CS3 to CS5 can be used as input ports. In this configuration, the bus widths are the same for areas 2 to 5. Table 7.5 RMTS2 to RMTS0 Settings vs DRAM Space RMTS2 RMTS1 RMTS0 Area 5 0 0 1 Normal space 1 0 Normal space 1 DRAM space 1 Contiguous DRAM space 1 1 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 212 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Normal space Normal space DRAM space Normal space DRAM space DRAM space DRAM space DRAM space DRAM space Contiguous DRAM space Contiguous DRAM space Contiguous DRAM space Section 7 Bus Controller 7.5.3 Address Multiplexing In the case of DRAM space, the row address and column address are multiplexed. With address multiplexing, the MXC1 and MXC0 bits of the MCR select the amount of shift in the row address. Table 7.6 shows the relationship between MXC1 and MXC0 settings and the shift amount. Table 7.6 MXC1 and MXC0 Settings vs Address Multiplexing MCR Shift MXC1 MXC0 Amount Address Pin A23 to A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 A8 Row 0 address 0 8 bits A23 to A13 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 1 9 bits A23 to A13 A12 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 1 0 10 bits A23 to A13 A12 A11 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 1 Do not set — — — — — — — — — — — — — A23 to A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 Column — address 7.5.4 — — — Data Bus Setting the ABWCR bit of an area set as DRAM space to 1 sets the corresponding area as 8-bit DRAM space. Clearing the ABWCR bit to 0 sets the area as 16-bit DRAM. 16-bit DRAMs can be directly connected in the case of 16-bit DRAM space. With 8-bit DRAM space, the high data bus byte (D15 to D8) is valid. With 16-bit DRAM space, the high and low data bus bytes (D15 to D0) are valid. The access size and data alignment are the same as for the standard bus interface. See section 7.4.2, Data Size and Data Alignment for details. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 213 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.5.5 DRAM Interface Pins Table 7.7 shows the pins used for the DRAM interface, and their functions. Table 7.7 DRAM Interface Pin Configuration Pin In DRAM Mode Name Direction Function HWR WE Write enable Output Write enable when accessing DRAM space in 2 CAS mode LCAS LCAS CS2 Lower column address Output strobe Lower column address strobe signal when accessing 16-bit DRAM space RAS2 Row address strobe 2 Output Row address strobe when area 2 set as DRAM space CS3 RAS3 Row address strobe 3 Output Row address strobe when area 3 set as DRAM space CS4 RAS4 Row address strobe 4 Output Row address strobe when area 4 set as DRAM space CS5 RAS5 Row address strobe 5 Output Row address strobe when area 5 set as DRAM space CAS UCAS Upper column address Output strobe Upper column address strobe when accessing DRAM space WAIT WAIT Wait Input Wait request signal A12 to A0 A12 to A0 Address pin Output Multiplexed output of row address and column address D15 to D0 D15 to D0 OE* Data pin Input/output Data input/output pin Output enable pin Output OE Output enable signal when accessing DRAM space in read mode Note: * Valid when OES bit set to 1. 7.5.6 Basic Timing Figure 7.15 shows the basic access timing for DRAM space. There are four basic DRAM timing states. In contrast to the standard bus interface, the corresponding ASTCR bit only controls the enabling/disabling of wait insertion and has no effect on the number of access states. When the corresponding ASTCR bit is cleared to 0, no wait states can be inserted in the DRAM access cycle. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 214 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller The four basic timing states are as follows: TP (precharge cycle) 1 state, Tr (row address output cycle) 1 state, Tc1 and Tc2 (column address output cycle) two states. When RCTS is set to 1, the CAS signal timing differs when reading and writing, being asserted Ω cycle earlier when reading. Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 φ A23 to A0 row column AS CSn (RAS) RCTS= 0 CAS, LCAS RCTS= 1 HWR (WE) Read RD D15 toD0 CAS, LCAS HWR (WE) Write RD D15 to D0 Note: n = 2 to 5 Figure 7.15 Basic Access Timing Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 215 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.5.7 Precharge State Control When accessing DRAM, it is essential to secure a time for RAS precharging. In this LSI, it is therefore necessary to insert 1 TP state when accessing DRAM space. By setting the TPC bit of the MCR to 1, TP can be changed from 1 state to 2 states. Set the appropriate number of TP cycles according to the type of DRAM connected and the operation frequency of the LSI. Figure 7.16 shows the timing when TP is set for 2 states. Setting the TPC bit to 1 also sets the refresh cycle TP to 2 states. Tp1 Tp2 Tr Tc1 Tc2 φ A23 to A0 row column CSn (RAS) RCTS = 0 CAS, LCAS RCTS = 1 Read HWR (WE) D15 to D0 CAS, LCAS Write HWR (WE) D15 to D0 Note: n = 2 to 5 Figure 7.16 Timing With Two Precharge Cycles Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 216 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.5.8 Wait Control There are two methods of inserting wait states in DRAM access: (1) insertion of program wait states, and (2) insertion of pin waits via WAIT pin. (1) Insertion of Program Wait States Setting the ASTCR bit of an area set for DRAM to 1 automatically inserts from 0 to 3 wait states, as set by WCRH and WCRL, between the Tc1 state and Tc2 state. When a program wait is inserted, the write wait function is activated and only the CAS signal is output only during the Tc2 state when writing. Figure 7.17 shows example timing for the insertion of program waits. Program waits Tp Tr Tc1 Tw Tw Tc2 φ Address bus AS CSn (RAS) RCTS = 0 CAS, LCAS RCTS = 1 Read RD Data bus Read data CAS, LCAS Write HWR (WE) Data bus Write data Note: ↓ shows timing for WAIT pin sampling. n = 2 to 5 Figure 7.17 Example Program Wait Insertion Timing (Wait 2 State Insertion) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 217 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller (2) Insertion of Pin Waits When the WAITE bit of BCRH is set to 1, wait input via the WAIT pin is valid regardless of the ASTCR AST bit. In this state, a program wait is inserted when the DRAM space is accessed. If the WAIT pin level is Low at the fall in φ in the final Tc1 or Tw state, a further Tw is inserted. If the level of the WAIT pin is kept Low, Tw is inserted until the level of the WAIT pin changes to High. When wait states are inserted via the WAIT pin, the CAS when writing is output after the Tw state. Figure 7.18 shows example timing for the insertion of wait states via the WAIT pin. Tp Tr Program waits Tc1 Tw WAIT pin wait states Tw Tc2 φ Address bus AS CSn (RAS) RCTS = 0 CAS, LCAS RCTS = 1 Read RD Data bus Read data CAS, LCAS Write HWR (WE) Data bus Write data Note: ↓ shows timing for WAIT pin sampling. n = 2 to 5 Figure 7.18 Example Timing for Insertion of Wait States via WAIT Pin Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 218 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.5.9 Byte Access Control When 16-bit DRAMs are connected, the 2 CAS method can be used as the control signal required for byte access. Figure 7.19 shows the 2 CAS method control timing. Figure 7.20 shows an example of connecting DRAM in high-speed page mode. When all areas selected as DRAM space are set as 8-bit space, the LCAS pin functions as an I/O port. Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 φ A23 to A0 row column CSn (RAS) CAS Byte control LCAS HWR (WE) Note: n = 2 to 5 Figure 7.19 2 CAS Method Control Timing (For High Byte Write Access) When using DRAM EDO page mode, either use OE to control the read data or, as shown in figure 7.20, select RAS up mode. Figure 7.21 is an example of DRAM connection in EDO page mode when OES=1. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 219 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller This LSI (address shift set to 9 bits) CS (RAS) 2CAS 4-Mbit DRAM 256 kbytes × 16-bit configuration 9-bit column address RAS CAS UCAS LCAS LCAS HWR (WE) WE A9 A8 A8 A7 A7 A6 A6 A5 (Column address input: A8 to A0) A5 A4 A4 A3 A3 A2 A2 A1 A1 A0 D15 to D0 (Row address input: A8 to A0) D15 to D0 OE Figure 7.20 High-speed Page Mode DRAM Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 220 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller This LSI (address shift set to 10 bits) CS2 (RAS) RAS CAS UCAS LCAS LCAS HWR (WE) A10 CS3 (OE) 2CAS 16-Mbit DRAM 1 Mbyte × 16-bit configuration 10-bit column address WE A9 A9 A8 A8 A7 A7 A6 A6 (Row address input: A9 to A0) A5 (Column address input: A9 to A0) A5 A4 A4 A3 A3 A2 A2 A1 A1 A0 D15 to D0 D15 to D0 OE Figure 7.21 Example Connection of EDO Page Mode DRAM (OES=1) 7.5.10 Burst Operation In addition to full DRAM access (normal DRAM access), in which the row address is output each time the data in DRAM is accessed, there is also a high-speed page mode that allows high-speed access (burst access). In this method, if the same row address is accessed successively, the row address is output once and then only the column address is changed. Burst access is selected by setting the BE bit of the MCR to 1. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 221 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller (1) Operation Timing for Burst Access (High-Speed Page Mode) Figure 7.22 shows the operation timing for burst access. When the DRAM space is successively accessed, the CAS signal and column address output cycle (2 states) are continued as long as the row address is the same in the preceding and succeeding access cycles. The MXC1 and MXC0 bits of the MCR specify which row address is compared. Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 Tc1 Tc2 φ A23 to A0 row column1 column2 AS CSn (RAS) RCTS = 0 CAS, LCAS RCTS = 1 HWR (WE) Read OE* D15 to D0 CAS, LCAS HWR (WE) Write OE D15 to D0 Notes: n = 2 to 5 * OE is enabled when OES = 1. Figure 7.22 Operating Timing in High-Speed Page Mode The bus cycle can also be extended in burst access by inserting wait states. The method and timing of inserting the wait states is the same as in full access. For details, see section 7.5.8, Wait Control. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 222 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller (2) RAS Down Mode and RAS Up Mode Even when burst operation is selected, DRAM access may not be continuous, but may be interrupted by accessing another area. In this case, burst operation can be continued by keeping the RAS signal level Low while the other area is accessed and then accessing the same row address in the DRAM space. • RAS down mode To select RAS down mode, set the RCDM bit of the MCR to 1. When DRAM access is interrupted and another area accessed, the RAS signal level is kept Low and, if the row address is the same as previously when the DRAM space is again accessed, burst access is continued. Figure 7.23 shows example RAS down mode timing. Note that if the refresh operation occurs when RAS is down, the RAS signal level changes to High. DRAM read access Tp Tr External space read access Tc1 Tc2 T1 T2 DRAM write access Tc1 Tc2 φ A23 to A0 RD HWR (WE) CSn (RAS) RCTS = 0 CAS, LCAS RCTS = 1 OE* D15 to D0 Notes: n = 2 to 5 * OE is enabled when OES = 1. Figure 7.23 Example Operation Timing in RAS Down Mode Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 223 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller • RAS up mode To select RAS up mode, clear the RCDM bit of the MCR to 0. If DRAM access is interrupted to access another area, the RAS signal level returns to High. Burst operation is only possible when the DRAM space is contiguous. Figure 7.24 shows example timing in RAS up mode. Note that the RAS signal level does not return to High in burst ROM space access. Tp DRAM write access Tr Tc1 Tc2 DRAM read access Tc1 Tc2 External space write access T1 T2 φ A23 to A0 RD HWR (WE) CSn (RAS) CAS, LCAS D15 to D0 Note: n = 2 to 5 Figure 7.24 Example Operation Timing in RAS Up Mode Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 224 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.5.11 Refresh Control This LSI has a DRAM refresh control function. There are two refresh methods: (1) CAS-beforeRAS (CBR) and (2), self refresh. (1) CAS-Before-RAS (CBR) Refresh To select CBR refresh, set the RFSHE bit of DRAMCR to 1 and clear the RMODE bit to 0. In CBR refresh, the input clock selected with the CKS2 to CKS0 bits of DRAMCR are used for the RTCNT count-up. Refresh control is performed when the count reaches the value set in RTCOR (compare match). The RTCNT is then reset and the count again started from H'00. That is, the refresh is repeated at the set interval determined by RTCOR and CKS2 to CKS0. Set RTCOR and CKS2 to CKS0 to satisfy the refresh cycle for the DRAM being used. The RTCNT count up starts when the CKS2 to CKS0 bits are set. The RTCNT and RTCOR values should therefore be set before setting CKS2 to CKS0. When a value is set in RTCOR, RTCNT is cleared. When RTCNT is set at the same time that it is reset by a compare match, the value written to RTCNT takes precedence. When performing refresh control (RFSHE = 1), do not clear the CMF flag. Figure 7.25 shows RTCNT operation. Figure 7.26 shows compare match timing. And figure 7.27 show CBR refresh timing. Some types of DRAM do not allow the WE signal to be changed during the refresh cycle. In this case, set CBRM to 1. Figure 7.28 shows the timing. The CS signal is not controlled and a Low level is output when an access request occurs. Note that other normal spaces are accessed during the CBR refresh cycle. RTCNT RTCOR H'00 Refresh request Figure 7.25 RTCNT Operation Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 225 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller φ RTCNT N H'00 RTCOR N Refresh request signal and CMF bit setting signal Figure 7.26 Compare Match Timing Read access of normal space Write access of normal space φ A23 to A0 CS AS RD HWR (WE) Refresh cycle RAS CAS Figure 7.27 Example CBR Refresh Timing (CBRM=0) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 226 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Normal space access request φ A23 to A0 CS AS RD HWR (WE) Refresh cycle RAS CAS Figure 7.28 Example CBR Refresh Timing (CBRM=1) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 227 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller (2) Self-Refresh One of the DRAM standby modes is the self-refresh mode (battery backup mode), in which the DRAM generates its own refresh timing and refresh address. To select self-refresh, set the RFSHE bit and RMODE bits of the DRAMCR to 1. Next, execute a SLEEP instruction to make a transition to software standby mode. As shown in figure 7.29, the CAS and RAS signals are output and the DRAM enters self-refresh mode. When you exit software standby mode, the RMODE bit is cleared to 0 and self-refresh mode is exited. When making a transition to software standby mode, self-refresh mode starts after a CBR refresh, providing there is a CBR refresh request. CBR refresh requests occurring immediately before entering software standby mode are cleared on completion of the self-refresh when the software standby mode is exited. Software standby TRp TRcr TRc3 φ CSn (RAS) CAS, LCAS HWR (WE) High level Note: n = 2 to 5 Figure 7.29 Self-Refresh Timing Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 228 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.6 DMAC Single Address Mode and DRAM Interface (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) When burst mode is set for the DRAM interface, the DDS bit selects the output timing for the DACK signal. It also selects whether or not to perform burst access when accessing the DRAM space in DMAC single address mode. 7.6.1 DDS=1 Burst access is performed on the basis of the address only, regardless of the bus master. The DACK output level changes to Low afer the Tc1 state in the case of the DRAM interface. Figure 7.30 shows the DACK output timing for the DRAM interface when DDS = 1. Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 φ A23 to A0 row column CSn (RAS) CAS (UCAS) LCAS (LCAS) RCTS = 0 RCTS = 1 Read HWR (WE) D15 to D0 CAS (UCAS) LCAS (LCAS) Write HWR (WE) D15 to D0 DACK Note: n = 2 to 5 Figure 7.30 DACK Output Timing when DDS=1 (Example Showing DRAM Access) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 229 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.6.2 DDS=0 When the DRAM space is accessed in DMAC single address mode, always perform full access (normal access). The DACK output level changes to Low afer the Tr state in the case of the DRAM interface. In other than DMAC signle address mode, burst access is possible when the DRAM space is accessed. Figure 7.31 shows the DACK output timing for the DRAM interface when DDS = 0. Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 φ A23 to A0 row column CSn (RAS) RCTS = 0 CAS (UCAS) LCAS (LCAS) RCTS = 1 Read HWR (WE) D15 to D0 CAS (UCAS) LCAS (LCAS) Write HWR (WE) D15 to D0 DACK Note: n = 2 to 5 Figure 7.31 DACK Output Timing when DDS=0 (Example Showing DRAM Access) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 230 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.7 Burst ROM Interface 7.7.1 Overview In this LSI, the area 0 external space can be set as burst ROM space and burst ROM interfacing performed. Burst ROM space interfacing allows 16-bit ROM capable of burst access to be accessed at high-speed. The BRSTRM bit of BCRH sets area 0 as burst ROM space. CPU instruction fetches (only) can be performed using a maximum of 4-word or 8-word continuous burst access. 1 state or 2 states can be selected in the case of burst access. 7.7.2 Basic Timing The AST0 bit of ASTCR sets the number of access states in the initial cycle (full access) of the burst ROM interface. Wait states can be inserted when the AST0 bit is set to 1. The burst cycle can be set for 1 state or 2 sttes by setting the BRSTS1 bit of BCRH. Wait states cannot be inserted. When area 0 is set as burst ROM space, area 0 is a 16-bit access space regardless of the ABW0 bit of ABWCR. When the BRSTS0 bit of BCRH is cleared to 0, 4-word max. burst access is performed. When the BRSTS0 bit is set to 1, 8-word max. burst access is performed. Figures 7.32 (a) and (b) show the basic access timing for the burst ROM space. Figure 7.32 (a) is an example when both the AST0 and BRSTS1 bits are set to 1. Figure 7.32 (b) is an example when both the AST0 and BRSTS1 bits are set to 0. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 231 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Full access T1 T2 Burst access T3 T1 T2 T1 T2 φ Low address only changes Address bus CS0 AS RD Data bus Read data Read data Read data Figure 7.32 (a) Example Burst ROM Access Timing (AST0=BRSTS1=1) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 232 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Full access T1 T2 Burst access T1 T1 φ Low address only changes Address bus CS0 AS RD Data bus Read data Read data Read data Figure 7.32 (b) Example Burst ROM Access Timing (AST0=BRSTS1=0) 7.7.3 Wait Control As with the basic bus interface, either program wait insertion or pin wait insertion using the WAIT pin can be used in the initial cycle (full access) of the burst ROM interface. See section 7.4.5, Wait Control. Wait states cannot be inserted in the burst cycle. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 233 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.8 Idle Cycle 7.8.1 Operation When the H8S/2633 Group accesses external space, it can insert a 1-state idle cycle (TI) between bus cycles in the following two cases: (1) when read accesses between different areas occur consecutively, and (2) when a write cycle occurs immediately after a read cycle. By inserting an idle cycle it is possible, for example, to avoid data collisions between ROM, with a long output floating time, and high-speed memory, I/O interfaces, and so on. (1) Consecutive Reads between Different Areas If consecutive reads between different areas occur while the ICIS1 bit in BCRH is set to 1, an idle cycle is inserted at the start of the second read cycle. Figure 7.33 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a read cycle from ROM with a long output floating time, and bus cycle B is a read cycle from SRAM, each being located in a different area. In (a), an idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in cycle B between the read data from ROM and that from SRAM. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data collision is prevented. Bus cycle A φ T1 T2 Bus cycle B T3 T1 Bus cycle A T2 φ Address bus Address bus CS (area A) CS (area A) CS (area B) CS (area B) RD RD Data bus Data bus Long output floating time T1 T2 T3 Bus cycle B TI T1 Data collision (a) Idle cycle not inserted (ICIS1 = 0) (b) Idle cycle inserted (Initial value ICIS1 = 1) Figure 7.33 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (1) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 234 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 T2 Section 7 Bus Controller (2) Write after Read If an external write occurs after an external read while the ICIS0 bit in BCRH is set to 1, an idle cycle is inserted at the start of the write cycle. Figure 7.34 shows an example of the operation in this case. In this example, bus cycle A is a read cycle from ROM with a long output floating time, and bus cycle B is a CPU write cycle. In (a), an idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in cycle B between the read data from ROM and the CPU write data. In (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data collision is prevented. Bus cycle A φ T1 T2 T3 Bus cycle B T1 T2 Bus cycle A φ Address bus Address bus CS (area A) CS (area A) CS (area B) CS (area B) RD RD T1 T2 T3 Bus cycle B TI T1 T2 Possibility of overlap between CS (area B) and RD (a) Idle cycle not inserted (ICIS1 = 0) (b) Idle cycle inserted (Initial value ICIS1 = 1) Figure 7.34 Example of Idle Cycle Operation (2) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 235 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller (3) Relationship between Chip Select (CS) Signal and Read (RD) Signal Depending on the system’s load conditions, the RD signal may lag behind the CS signal. An example is shown in figure 7.35. In this case, with the setting for no idle cycle insertion (a), there may be a period of overlap between the bus cycle A RD signal and the bus cycle B CS signal. Setting idle cycle insertion, as in (b), however, will prevent any overlap between the RD and CS signals. In the initial state after reset release, idle cycle insertion (b) is set. Bus cycle A φ T1 T2 Bus cycle B T3 T1 Bus cycle A T2 φ Address bus Address bus CS (area A) CS (area A) CS (area B) CS (area B) RD RD HWR HWR Data bus Data bus Long output floating time T1 T2 T3 Bus cycle B TI T1 Data collision (a) Idle cycle not inserted (ICIS1 = 0) (b) Idle cycle inserted (Initial value ICIS1 = 1) Figure 7.35 Relationship between Chip Select (CS) and Read (RD) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 236 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 T2 Section 7 Bus Controller (4) Notes The setting of the ICIS0 and ICIS1 bits is invalid when accessing the DRAM space. For example, if the 2nd of successive reads of different areas is a DRAM access, only the TP cycle is inserted, not the T1 cycle. Figure 7.36 shows the timing. Note, however, that ICIS0 and ICIS1 settings are valid in burst access in RAS down mode, and an idle cycle is inserted. Figures 7.37 (a) and (b) show the timing. External read T1 T2 T3 DRAM space read Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 φ Address bus RD Data bus Figure 7.36 Example of DRAM Access after External Read External read DRAM space read Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 T1 T1 T2 DRAM space read T3 Tc1 Tc1 Tc2 EXTAL Address RD RAS CAS, LCAS Data bus Idle cycle Figure 7.37 (a) Example Idle Cycle Operation in RAS Down Mode (ICIS1=1) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 237 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller External read DRAM space read Tp Tr Tc1 Tc2 T1 T1 T2 DRAM space read T3 Tc1 Tc1 Tc2 EXTAL Address RD HWR RAS CAS, LCAS Data bus Idle cycle Figure 7.37 (b) Example Idle Cycle Operation in RAS Down Mode (ICIS0=1) 7.8.2 Pin States in Idle Cycle Table 7.8 shows pin states in an idle cycle. Table 7.8 Pin States in Idle Cycle Pins Pin State A23 to A0 Contents of next bus cycle D15 to D0 High impedance High* CSn CAS AS RD HWR LWR DACKn High High High High High High Note: * Remains low in DRAM space RAS down mode or a refresh cycle. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 238 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.9 Write Data Buffer Function The H8S/2633 Group has a write data buffer function in the external data bus. Using the write data buffer function enables external writes and DMA single address mode transmission to be executed in parallel with internal accesses. The write data buffer function is made available by setting the WDBE bit in BCRL to 1. Figure 7.38 shows an example of the timing when the write data buffer function is used. When this function is used, if an external write and DMA single address mode transmission continues for 2 states or longer, and there is an internal access next, only an external write is executed in the first state, but from the next state onward an internal access (on-chip memory or internal I/O register read/write) is executed in parallel with the external write rather than waiting until it ends. On-chip memory read Internal I/O register read External write cycle T1 T2 TW TW T3 Internal address bus Internal memory Internal I/O register address Internal read signal A23 to A0 External space write External address CSn HWR, LWR D15 to D0 Figure 7.38 Example of Timing when Write Data Buffer Function is Used Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 239 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.10 Bus Release 7.10.1 Overview The H8S/2633 Group can release the external bus in response to a bus request from an external device. In the external bus released state, the internal bus master continues to operate as long as there is no external access. If an internal bus master wants to make an external access and when a refresh request occurs in the external bus released state, it can issue a bus request off-chip. 7.10.2 Operation In external expansion mode, the bus can be released to an external device by setting the BRLE bit in BCRL to 1. Driving the BREQ pin low issues an external bus request to the H8S/2633 Group. When the BREQ pin is sampled, at the prescribed timing the BACK pin is driven low, and the address bus, data bus, and bus control signals are placed in the high-impedance state, establishing the external bus-released state. In the external bus released state, an internal bus master can perform accesses using the internal bus. When an internal bus master wants to make an external access, it temporarily defers activation of the bus cycle, and waits for the bus request from the external bus master to be dropped. Also, when a refresh request occurs in the external bus released state, refresh control is deferred until the external bus master drops the bus request. If the BREQOE bit in BCRL is set to 1, when an internal bus master wants to make an external access and when a refresh request occurs in the external bus released state, the BREQO pin is driven low and a request can be made off-chip to drop the bus request. When the BREQ pin is driven high, the BACK pin is driven high at the prescribed timing and the external bus released state is terminated. The following shows the order of priority when an external bus release request, refresh request, and external access by the internal bus master occur simultaneously: When CBRM=1 (High) Refresh > External bus release > External access by internal bus master (Low) When CBRM=0 (High) Refresh > External bus release (Low) (High) External bus release > External access by internal bus master (Low) Note: A refresh can be executed at the same time as external access by the internal bus master. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 240 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.10.3 Pin States in External Bus Released State Table 7.9 shows pin states in the external bus released state. Table 7.9 Pin States in Bus Released State Pins Pin State A23 to A0 High impedance D15 to D0 High impedance CSn CAS AS RD HWR LWR DACKn High impedance High impedance High impedance High impedance High impedance High impedance High Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 241 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.10.4 Transition Timing Figure 7.39 shows the timing for transition to the bus-released state. CPU cycle T0 T1 CPU cycle External bus released state T2 φ High impedance Address bus Address High impedance Data bus High impedance CSn High impedance AS High impedance RD High impedance HWR, LWR BREQ BACK BREQO* Minimum 1 state [1] [2] [3] [1] Low level of BREQ pin is sampled at rise of T2 state. [2] BACK pin is driven low at end of CPU read cycle, releasing bus to external [4] bus master. [3] BREQ pin state is still sampled in external bus released state. [4] High level of BREQ pin is sampled. [5] BACK pin is driven high, ending bus release cycle. [6] BREQO signal goes high 1.5 clocks after BACK signal goes high. Note: * Output only when BREQOE is set to 1. Figure 7.39 Bus-Released State Transition Timing Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 242 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 [5] [6] Section 7 Bus Controller DRAM space read access External bus released φ A23 to A0 CS AS RD RAS CAS BREQ BACK Figure 7.40 Example Bus Release Transition Timing After DRAM Access (Reading DRAM) 7.10.5 Notes The external bus release function is deactivated when MSTPCR is set to H'FFFFFF or H'EFFFFF and a transition is made to sleep mode. To use the external bus release function in sleep mode, do not set MSTPCR to H'FFFFFF and H'EFFFFF. When the CBRM bit is set to 1 to use the CBR refresh function, set the BREQ = 1 width greater than the number of the slowest external access states. Otherwise, CBR refresh requests from the refresh timer may not be performed. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 243 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.11 Bus Arbitration (DMAC and DTC functions are not available in the H8S/2695) 7.11.1 Overview The H8S/2633 Group has a bus arbiter that arbitrates bus master operations. There are two bus masters, the CPU, DTC, and DMAC which perform read/write operations when they have possession of the bus. Each bus master requests the bus by means of a bus request signal. The bus arbiter determines priorities at the prescribed timing, and permits use of the bus by means of a bus request acknowledge signal. The selected bus master then takes possession of the bus and begins its operation. 7.11.2 Operation The bus arbiter detects the bus masters’ bus request signals, and if the bus is requested, sends a bus request acknowledge signal to the bus master making the request. If there are bus requests from more than one bus master, the bus request acknowledge signal is sent to the one with the highest priority. When a bus master receives the bus request acknowledge signal, it takes possession of the bus until that signal is canceled. The order of priority of the bus masters is as follows: (High) DMAC > DTC > CPU (Low) An internal bus access by an internal bus master, external bus release, and refresh can be executed in parallel. In the event of simultaneous external bus release request, refresh request, and internal bus master external access request generation, the order of priority is as follows: When CBRM = 1 (High) Refresh > External bus release > External access by internal bus master (Low) When CBRM = 0 (High) Refresh > External bus release (Low) (High) External bus release > External access by internal bus master (Low) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 244 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller 7.11.3 Bus Transfer Timing Even if a bus request is received from a bus master with a higher priority than that of the bus master that has acquired the bus and is currently operating, the bus is not necessarily transferred immediately. There are specific times at which each bus master can relinquish the bus. CPU: The CPU is the lowest-priority bus master, and if a bus request is received from the DTC and DMAC, the bus arbiter transfers the bus to the bus master that issued the request. The timing for transfer of the bus is as follows: • The bus is transferred at a break between bus cycles. However, if a bus cycle is executed in discrete operations, as in the case of a longword-size access, the bus is not transferred between the operations. See appendix A.5, Bus States During Instruction Execution, for timings at which the bus is not transferred. • If the CPU is in sleep mode, it transfers the bus immediately. DTC: The DTC sends the bus arbiter a request for the bus when an activation request is generated. The DTC can release the bus after a vector read, a register information read (3 states), a single data transfer, or a register information write (3 states). It does not release the bus during a register information read (3 states), a single data transfer, or a register information write (3 states). DMAC: When a start request occurs, the DMAC requests the bus arbiter for bus privileges. The DMAC releases bus privileges on completion of one transmission in short address mode, normal mode external requests, and cycle steal mode. The DMAC releases the bus on completion of the transmission of one block in block transmission mode, or after a transmission in burst mode. 7.12 Resets and the Bus Controller In a power-on reset, the H8S/2633 Group, including the bus controller, enters the reset state at that point, and an executing bus cycle is discontinued. The bus controller registers and internal states are retained at a manual reset. The current external bus cycle is executed to completion. The WAIT input is ignored. Write data is not retained. Also, because the DMAC* is initialized at a manual reset, DACK* and TEND* outputs are disabled and function as I/O ports controlled by DDR and DR. Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 245 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 7 Bus Controller Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 246 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.1 Overview The H8S/2633 Group has a built-in DMA controller (DMAC) which can carry out data transfer on up to 4 channels. 8.1.1 Features The features of the DMAC are listed below. • Choice of short address mode or full address mode Short address mode Maximum of 4 channels can be used Choice of dual address mode or single address mode In dual address mode, one of the two addresses, transfer source and transfer destination, is specified as 24 bits and the other as16 bits In single address mode, transfer source or transfer destination address only is specified as 24 bits In single address mode, transfer can be performed in one bus cycle Choice of sequential mode, idle mode, or repeat mode for dual address mode and single address mode Full address mode Maximum of 2 channels can be used Transfer source and transfer destination address specified as 24 bits Choice of normal mode or block transfer mode • 16-Mbyte address space can be specified directly • Byte or word can be set as the transfer unit • Activation sources: internal interrupt, external request, auto-request (depending on transfer mode) Six 16-bit timer-pulse unit (TPU) compare match/input capture interrupts Serial communication interface (SCI0, SCI1) transmit-data-empty interrupt, reception complete interrupt A/D converter conversion end interrupt External request Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 247 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Auto-request • Module stop mode can be set The initial setting enables DMAC registers to be accessed. DMAC operation is halted by setting module stop mode 8.1.2 Block Diagram A block diagram of the DMAC is shown in figure 8.1. Internal address bus Address buffer DMAWER DMACR0A DMACR0B DMACR1A DMACR1B DMABCR Channel 1 DMATCR Data buffer Internal data bus Legend: DMAWER: DMATCR: DMABCR: DMACR: MAR: IOAR: ETCR: DMA write enable register DMA terminal control register DMA band control register (for all channels) DMA control register Memory address register I/O address register Executive transfer counter register Figure 8.1 Block Diagram of DMAC Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 248 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 MAR0A IOAR0A ETCR0A MAR0B IOAR0B ETCR0B MAR1A IOAR1A ETCR1A MAR1B IOAR1B ETCR1B Module data bus Control logic Channel 0 Processor Channel 1B Channel 1A Channel 0B Channel 0A Internal interrupts TGI0A TGI1A TGI2A TGI3A TGI4A TGI5A TXI0 RXI0 TXI1 RXI1 ADI External pins DREQ0 DREQ1 TEND0 TEND1 DACK0 DACK1 Interrupt signals DEND0A DEND0B DEND1A DEND1B Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.1.3 Overview of Functions Tables 8.1 (1) and (2) summarize DMAC functions in short address mode and full address mode, respectively. Table 8.1 (1) Overview of DMAC Functions (Short Address Mode) Address Register Bit Length Transfer Mode Transfer Source Dual address mode • TPU channel 0 to 24/16 5 compare match/input capture A interrupt • SCI transmit-dataempty interrupt • SCI reception complete interrupt • A/D converter conversion end interrupt • External request • External request • Sequential mode 1-byte or 1-word transfer executed for one transfer request Memory address incremented/decremented by 1 or 2 1 to 65536 transfers • Idle mode 1-byte or 1-word transfer executed for one transfer request Memory address fixed Source Destination 16/24 1 to 65536 transfers • Repeat mode 1-byte or 1-word transfer executed for one transfer request Memory address incremented/ decremented by 1 or 2 After specified number of transfers (1 to 256), initial state is restored and operation continues Single address mode • 1-byte or 1-word transfer executed for one transfer request • Transfer in 1 bus cycle using DACK pin in place of address specifying I/O • Specifiable for sequential, idle, and repeat modes 24/DACK DACK/24 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 249 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Table 8.1 (2) Overview of DMAC Functions (Full Address Mode) Address Register Bit Length Transfer Mode Transfer Source Source Destination • • Auto-request 24 24 • External request • TPU channel 0 to 24 5 compare match/input capture A interrupt 24 Either source or destination specifiable as block area • SCI transmit-dataempty interrupt Block size: 1 to 256 bytes or words • SCI reception complete interrupt • External request • A/D converter conversion end interrupt Normal mode Auto-request Transfer request retained internally Transfers continue for the specified number of times (1 to 65536) Choice of burst or cycle steal transfer External request 1-byte or 1-word transfer executed for one transfer request 1 to 65536 transfers • Block transfer mode Specified block size transfer executed for one transfer request 1 to 65536 transfers Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 250 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.1.4 Pin Configuration Table 8.2 summarizes the DMAC pins. In short address mode, external request transfer, single address transfer, and transfer end output are not performed for channel A. The DMA transfer acknowledge function is used in channel B single address mode in short address mode. When the DREQ pin is used, do not designate the corresponding port for output. With regard to the DACK pins, setting single address transfer automatically sets the corresponding port to output, functioning as a DACK pin. With regard to the TEND pins, whether or not the corresponding port is used as a TEND pin can be specified by means of a register setting. Table 8.2 DMAC Pins Channel Pin Name Symbol I/O Function 0 DMA request 0 DREQ0 Input DMAC channel 0 external request DMA transfer acknowledge 0 DACK0 Output DMAC channel 0 single address transfer acknowledge TEND0 DREQ1 Output DMAC channel 0 transfer end DMA request 1 Input DMAC channel 1 external request DMA transfer acknowledge 1 DACK1 Output DMAC channel 1 single address transfer acknowledge DMA transfer end 1 TEND1 Output DMAC channel 1 transfer end DMA transfer end 0 1 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 251 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.1.5 Register Configuration Table 8.3 summarizes the DMAC registers. Table 8.3 DMAC Registers Channel Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value 0 Memory address register 0A MAR0A R/W Undefined H'FEE0 16 bits I/O address register 0A IOAR0A R/W Undefined H'FEE4 16 bits Transfer count register 0A ETCR0A R/W Undefined H'FEE6 16 bits Memory address register 0B MAR0B R/W Undefined H'FEE8 16 bits I/O address register 0B IOAR0B R/W Undefined H'FEEC 16 bits Transfer count register 0B ETCR0B R/W Undefined H'FEEE 16 bits Memory address register 1A MAR1A R/W Undefined H'FEF0 16 bits I/O address register 1A IOAR1A R/W Undefined H'FEF4 16 bits Transfer count register 1A ETCR1A R/W Undefined H'FEF6 16 bits Memory address register 1B MAR1B R/W Undefined H'FEF8 16 bits I/O address register 1B IOAR1B R/W Undefined H'FEFC 16 bits Transfer count register 1B ETCR1B R/W Undefined H'FEFE 16 bits DMA write enable register DMAWER R/W H'00 H'FF60 8 bits DMA terminal control register DMATCR R/W H'00 H'FF61 8 bits DMA control register 0A DMACR0A R/W H'00 H'FF62 16 bits DMA control register 0B DMACR0B R/W H'00 H'FF63 16 bits DMA control register 1A DMACR1A R/W H'00 H'FF64 16 bits DMA control register 1B DMACR1B R/W H'00 H'FF65 16 bits DMA band control register DMABCR R/W H'0000 H'FF66 16 bits R/W H'3F H'FDE8 8 bits 1 0, 1 Module stop control register A MSTPCRA Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 252 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Address* Bus Width Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.2 Register Descriptions (1) (Short Address Mode) Short address mode transfer can be performed for channels A and B independently. Short address mode transfer is specified for each channel by clearing the FAE bit in DMABCR to 0, as shown in table 8.4. Short address mode or full address mode can be selected for channels 1 and 0 independently by means of bits FAE1 and FAE0. Table 8.4 Short Address Mode and Full Address Mode (For 1 Channel: Example of Channel 0) 0 Short address mode specified (channels A and B operate independently) MAR0A MAR0B Specifies transfer source/transfer destination address IOAR0A Specifies transfer destination/transfer source address ETCR0A Specifies number of transfers DMACR0A Specifies transfer size, mode, activation source, etc. Specifies transfer source/transfer destination address IOAR0B Specifies transfer destination/transfer source address ETCR0B Specifies number of transfers DMACR0B Specifies transfer size, mode, activation source, etc. Full address mode specified (channels A and B operate in combination) Channel 0 1 Channel 0A Description Channel 0B FAE0 MAR0A Specifies transfer source address MAR0B Specifies transfer destination address IOAR0A IOAR0B ETCR0A ETCR0B DMACR0A DMACR0B Not used Not used Specifies number of transfers Specifies number of transfers (used in block transfer mode only) Specifies transfer size, mode, activation source, etc. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 253 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.2.1 Memory Address Registers (MAR) Bit : 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 MAR 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 * * * * * * * * : — — — — — — — — Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W : — — — — — — — — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Bit : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MAR : * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Initial value : R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W *: Undefined MAR is a 32-bit readable/writable register that specifies the transfer source address or destination address. The upper 8 bits of MAR are reserved: they are always read as 0, and cannot be modified. Whether MAR functions as the source address register or as the destination address register can be selected by means of the DTDIR bit in DMACR. MAR is incremented or decremented each time a byte or word transfer is executed, so that the address specified by MAR is constantly updated. For details, see section 8.2.4, DMA Control Register (DMACR). MAR is not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 254 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.2.2 I/O Address Register (IOAR) Bit : IOAR : Initial value : R/W 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W *: Undefined IOAR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the lower 16 bits of the transfer source address or destination address. The upper 8 bits of the transfer address are automatically set to H'FF. Whether IOAR functions as the source address register or as the destination address register can be selected by means of the DTDIR bit in DMACR. IOAR is invalid in single address mode. IOAR is not incremented or decremented each time a transfer is executed, so that the address specified by IOAR is fixed. IOAR is not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 255 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.2.3 Execute Transfer Count Register (ETCR) ETCR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the number of transfers. The setting of this register is different for sequential mode and idle mode on the one hand, and for repeat mode on the other. (1) Sequential Mode and Idle Mode Transfer Counter Bit : ETCR : Initial value : R/W 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W *: Undefined In sequential mode and idle mode, ETCR functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (with a count range of 1 to 65536). ETCR is decremented by 1 each time a transfer is performed, and when the count reaches H'0000, the DTE bit in DMABCR is cleared, and transfer ends. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 256 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) (2) Repeat Mode Transfer Number Storage Bit : ETCRH : Initial value : R/W : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 * * * * * * * * R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Transfer Counter Bit : ETCRL : Initial value : R/W : 7 * * * * * * * * R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W *: Undefined In repeat mode, ETCR functions as transfer counter ETCRL (with a count range of 1 to 256) and transfer number storage register ETCRH. ETCRL is decremented by 1 each time a transfer is performed, and when the count reaches H'00, ETCRL is loaded with the value in ETCRH. At this point, MAR is automatically restored to the value it had when the count was started. The DTE bit in DMABCR is not cleared, and so transfers can be performed repeatedly until the DTE bit is cleared by the user. ETCR is not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 257 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.2.4 DMA Control Register (DMACR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DMACR : DTSZ DTID RPE DTDIR DTF3 DTF2 DTF1 DTF0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial value : R/W : DMACR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the operation of each DMAC channel. DMACR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode. Bit 7—Data Transfer Size (DTSZ): Selects the size of data to be transferred at one time. Bit 7 DTSZ Description 0 Byte-size transfer 1 Word-size transfer (Initial value) Bit 6—Data Transfer Increment/Decrement (DTID): Selects incrementing or decrementing of MAR every data transfer in sequential mode or repeat mode. In idle mode, MAR is neither incremented nor decremented. Bit 6 DTID Description 0 MAR is incremented after a data transfer 1 • When DTSZ = 0, MAR is incremented by 1 after a transfer • When DTSZ = 1, MAR is incremented by 2 after a transfer MAR is decremented after a data transfer • When DTSZ = 0, MAR is decremented by 1 after a transfer • When DTSZ = 1, MAR is decremented by 2 after a transfer Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 258 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 5—Repeat Enable (RPE): Used in combination with the DTIE bit in DMABCR to select the mode (sequential, idle, or repeat) in which transfer is to be performed. Bit 5 DMABCR RPE DTIE Description 0 0 Transfer in sequential mode (no transfer end interrupt) 1 Transfer in sequential mode (with transfer end interrupt) 0 Transfer in repeat mode (no transfer end interrupt) 1 Transfer in idle mode (with transfer end interrupt) 1 (Initial value) For details of operation in sequential, idle, and repeat mode, see section 8.5.2, Sequential Mode, section 8.5.3, Idle Mode, and section 8.5.4, Repeat Mode. Bit 4—Data Transfer Direction (DTDIR): Used in combination with the SAE bit in DMABCR to specify the data transfer direction (source or destination). The function of this bit is therefore different in dual address mode and single address mode. DMABCR Bit 4 SAE DTDIR Description 0 0 Transfer with MAR as source address and IOAR as destination address (Initial value) 1 Transfer with IOAR as source address and MAR as destination address 0 Transfer with MAR as source address and DACK pin as write strobe 1 1 Transfer with DACK pin as read strobe and MAR as destination address Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 259 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bits 3 to 0—Data Transfer Factor (DTF3 to DTF0): These bits select the data transfer factor (activation source). There are some differences in activation sources for channel A and for channel B. Channel A Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DTF3 DTF2 DTF1 DTF0 Description 0 0 0 0 — 1 Activated by A/D converter conversion end interrupt 1 0 — 1 — 0 Activated by SCI channel 0 transmit-data-empty interrupt 1 Activated by SCI channel 0 reception complete interrupt 0 Activated by SCI channel 1 transmit-data-empty interrupt 1 Activated by SCI channel 1 reception complete interrupt 0 Activated by TPU channel 0 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1 Activated by TPU channel 1 compare match/input capture A interrupt 0 Activated by TPU channel 2 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1 Activated by TPU channel 3 compare match/input capture A interrupt 0 Activated by TPU channel 4 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1 Activated by TPU channel 5 compare match/input capture A interrupt 0 — 1 — 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 260 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Channel B Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DTF3 DTF2 DTF1 DTF0 Description 0 0 0 0 — 1 Activated by A/D converter conversion end interrupt Activated by DREQ pin falling edge input* 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 (Initial value) 1 Activated by DREQ pin low-level input 0 Activated by SCI channel 0 transmit-data-empty interrupt 1 Activated by SCI channel 0 reception complete interrupt 0 Activated by SCI channel 1 transmit-data-empty interrupt 1 Activated by SCI channel 1 reception complete interrupt 0 Activated by TPU channel 0 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1 Activated by TPU channel 1 compare match/input capture A interrupt 0 Activated by TPU channel 2 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1 Activated by TPU channel 3 compare match/input capture A interrupt 0 Activated by TPU channel 4 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1 Activated by TPU channel 5 compare match/input capture A interrupt 0 — 1 — Note: * Detected as a low level in the first transfer after transfer is enabled. The same factor can be selected for more than one channel. In this case, activation starts with the highest-priority channel according to the relative channel priorities. For relative channel priorities, see section 8.5.13, DMAC Multi-Channel Operation. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 261 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.2.5 Bit DMA Band Control Register (DMABCR) : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 DMABCRH : FAE1 FAE0 SAE1 SAE0 DTA1B DTA1A DTA0B DTA0A Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W : Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DMABCRL : DTE1B DTE1A DTE0B DTE0A DTIE1B DTIE1A DTIE0B DTIE0A Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W : DMABCR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that controls the operation of each DMAC channel. DMABCR is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode. Bit 15—Full Address Enable 1 (FAE1): Specifies whether channel 1 is to be used in short address mode or full address mode. In short address mode, channels 1A and 1B are used as independent channels. Bit 15 FAE1 Description 0 Short address mode 1 Full address mode (Initial value) Bit 14—Full Address Enable 0 (FAE0): Specifies whether channel 0 is to be used in short address mode or full address mode. In short address mode, channels 0A and 0B are used as independent channels. Bit 14 FAE0 Description 0 Short address mode 1 Full address mode Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 262 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 13—Single Address Enable 1 (SAE1): Specifies whether channel 1B is to be used for transfer in dual address mode or single address mode. Bit 13 SAE1 Description 0 Transfer in dual address mode 1 Transfer in single address mode (Initial value) This bit is invalid in full address mode. Bit 12—Single Address Enable 0 (SAE0): Specifies whether channel 0B is to be used for transfer in dual address mode or single address mode. Bit 12 SAE0 Description 0 Transfer in dual address mode 1 Transfer in single address mode (Initial value) This bit is invalid in full address mode. Bits 11 to 8—Data Transfer Acknowledge (DTA): These bits enable or disable clearing, when DMA transfer is performed, of the internal interrupt source selected by the data transfer factor setting. When DTE = 1 and DTA = 1, the internal interrupt source selected by the data transfer factor setting is cleared automatically by DMA transfer. When DTE = 1 and DTA = 1, the internal interrupt source selected by the data transfer factor setting does not issue an interrupt request to the CPU or DTC. When DTE = 1 and DTA = 0, the internal interrupt source selected by the data transfer factor setting is not cleared when a transfer is performed, and can issue an interrupt request to the CPU or DTC in parallel. In this case, the interrupt source should be cleared by the CPU or DTC transfer. When DTE = 0, the internal interrupt source selected by the data transfer factor setting issues an interrupt request to the CPU or DTC regardless of the DTA bit setting. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 263 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 11—Data Transfer Acknowledge 1B (DTA1B): Enables or disables clearing, when DMA transfer is performed, of the internal interrupt source selected by the channel 1B data transfer factor setting. Bit 11 DTA1B Description 0 Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of DMA transfer is disabled (Initial value) 1 Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of DMA transfer is enabled Bit 10—Data Transfer Acknowledge 1A (DTA1A): Enables or disables clearing, when DMA transfer is performed, of the internal interrupt source selected by the channel 1A data transfer factor setting. Bit 10 DTA1A Description 0 Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of DMA transfer is disabled (Initial value) 1 Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of DMA transfer is enabled Bit 9—Data Transfer Acknowledge 0B (DTA0B): Enables or disables clearing, when DMA transfer is performed, of the internal interrupt source selected by the channel 0B data transfer factor setting. Bit 9 DTA0B Description 0 Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of DMA transfer is disabled (Initial value) 1 Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of DMA transfer is enabled Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 264 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 8—Data Transfer Acknowledge 0A (DTA0A): Enables or disables clearing, when DMA transfer is performed, of the internal interrupt source selected by the channel 0A data transfer factor setting. Bit 8 DTA0A Description 0 Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of DMA transfer is disabled (Initial value) 1 Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of DMA transfer is enabled Bits 7 to 4—Data Transfer Enable (DTE): When DTE = 0, data transfer is disabled and the activation source selected by the data transfer factor setting is ignored. If the activation source is an internal interrupt, an interrupt request is issued to the CPU or DTC. If the DTIE bit is set to 1 when DTE = 0, the DMAC regards this as indicating the end of a transfer, and issues a transfer end interrupt request to the CPU or DTC. The conditions for the DTE bit being cleared to 0 are as follows: • When initialization is performed • When the specified number of transfers have been completed in a transfer mode other than repeat mode • When 0 is written to the DTE bit to forcibly abort the transfer, or for a similar reason When DTE = 1, data transfer is enabled and the DMAC waits for a request by the activation source selected by the data transfer factor setting. When a request is issued by the activation source, DMA transfer is executed. The condition for the DTE bit being set to 1 is as follows: • When 1 is written to the DTE bit after the DTE bit is read as 0 Bit 7—Data Transfer Enable 1B (DTE1B): Enables or disables data transfer on channel 1B. Bit 7 DTE1B Description 0 Data transfer disabled 1 Data transfer enabled (Initial value) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 265 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 6—Data Transfer Enable 1A (DTE1A): Enables or disables data transfer on channel 1A. Bit 6 DTE1A Description 0 Data transfer disabled 1 Data transfer enabled (Initial value) Bit 5—Data Transfer Enable 0B (DTE0B): Enables or disables data transfer on channel 0B. Bit 5 DTE0B Description 0 Data transfer disabled 1 Data transfer enabled (Initial value) Bit 4—Data Transfer Enable 0A (DTE0A): Enables or disables data transfer on channel 0A. Bit 4 DTE0A Description 0 Data transfer disabled 1 Data transfer enabled (Initial value) Bits 3 to 0—Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable (DTIE): These bits enable or disable an interrupt to the CPU or DTC when transfer ends. If the DTIE bit is set to 1 when DTE = 0, the DMAC regards this as indicating the end of a transfer, and issues a transfer end interrupt request to the CPU or DTC. A transfer end interrupt can be canceled either by clearing the DTIE bit to 0 in the interrupt handling routine, or by performing processing to continue transfer by setting the transfer counter and address register again, and then setting the DTE bit to 1. Bit 3—Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable 1B (DTIE1B): Enables or disables the channel 1B transfer end interrupt. Bit 3 DTIE1B Description 0 Transfer end interrupt disabled 1 Transfer end interrupt enabled Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 266 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 2—Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable 1A (DTIE1A): Enables or disables the channel 1A transfer end interrupt. Bit 2 DTIE1A Description 0 Transfer end interrupt disabled 1 Transfer end interrupt enabled (Initial value) Bit 1—Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable 0B (DTIE0B): Enables or disables the channel 0B transfer end interrupt. Bit 1 DTIE0B Description 0 Transfer end interrupt disabled 1 Transfer end interrupt enabled (Initial value) Bit 0—Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable 0A (DTIE0A): Enables or disables the channel 0A transfer end interrupt. Bit 0 DTIE0A Description 0 Transfer end interrupt disabled 1 Transfer end interrupt enabled (Initial value) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 267 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.3 Register Descriptions (2) (Full Address Mode) Full address mode transfer is performed with channels A and B together. For details of full address mode setting, see table 8.4. 8.3.1 Memory Address Register (MAR) Bit : 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 MAR : — — — — — — — — 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 * * * * * * * * Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W : — — — — — — — — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Bit : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MAR : * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Initial value : R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W *: Undefined MAR is a 32-bit readable/writable register; MARA functions as the transfer source address register, and MARB as the destination address register. MAR is composed of two 16-bit registers, MARH and MARL. The upper 8 bits of MARH are reserved: they are always read as 0, and cannot be modified. MAR is incremented or decremented each time a byte or word transfer is executed, so that the source or destination memory address can be updated automatically. For details, see section 8.3.4, DMA Control Register (DMACR). MAR is not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. 8.3.2 I/O Address Register (IOAR) IOAR is not used in full address transfer. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 268 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.3.3 Execute Transfer Count Register (ETCR) ETCR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the number of transfers. The function of this register is different in normal mode and in block transfer mode. ETCR is not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. (1) Normal Mode ETCRA Transfer Counter Bit : ETCR : Initial value : R/W 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W *: Undefined In normal mode, ETCRA functions as a 16-bit transfer counter. ETCRA is decremented by 1 each time a transfer is performed, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. ETCRB is not used at this time. ETCRB ETCRB is not used in normal mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 269 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) (2) Block Transfer Mode ETCRA Holds block size Bit : ETCRAH : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 * * * * * * * * R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 * * * * * * * * R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial value : R/W : Block size counter Bit : ETCRAL : Initial value : R/W : *: Undefined ETCRB Block Transfer Counter Bit : ETCRB : Initial value : R/W 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W In block transfer mode, ETCRAL functions as an 8-bit block size counter and ETCRAH holds the block size. ETCRAL is decremented each time a 1-byte or 1-word transfer is performed, and when the count reaches H'00, ETCRAL is loaded with the value in ETCRAH. So by setting the block size in ETCRAH and ETCRAL, it is possible to repeatedly transfer blocks consisting of any desired number of bytes or words. ETCRB functions in block transfer mode, as a 16-bit block transfer counter. ETCRB is decremented by 1 each time a block is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 270 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.3.4 DMA Control Register (DMACR) DMACR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that controls the operation of each DMAC channel. In full address mode, DMACRA and DMACRB have different functions. DMACR is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode. DMACRA Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 DMACRA : DTSZ SAID SAIDE BLKDIR BLKE — — — Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DMACRB : — DAID DAIDE — DTF3 DTF2 DTF1 DTF0 Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W : DMACRB Bit R/W : Bit 15—Data Transfer Size (DTSZ): Selects the size of data to be transferred at one time. Bit 15 DTSZ Description 0 Byte-size transfer 1 Word-size transfer (Initial value) Bit 14—Source Address Increment/Decrement (SAID) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 271 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 13—Source Address Increment/Decrement Enable (SAIDE): These bits specify whether source address register MARA is to be incremented, decremented, or left unchanged, when data transfer is performed. Bit 14 Bit 13 SAID SAIDE Description 0 0 MARA is fixed 1 MARA is incremented after a data transfer 1 (Initial value) • When DTSZ = 0, MARA is incremented by 1 after a transfer • When DTSZ = 1, MARA is incremented by 2 after a transfer 0 MARA is fixed 1 MARA is decremented after a data transfer • When DTSZ = 0, MARA is decremented by 1 after a transfer • When DTSZ = 1, MARA is decremented by 2 after a transfer Bit 12—Block Direction (BLKDIR) Bit 11—Block Enable (BLKE): These bits specify whether normal mode or block transfer mode is to be used. If block transfer mode is specified, the BLKDIR bit specifies whether the source side or the destination side is to be the block area. Bit 12 Bit 11 BLKDIR BLKE Description 0 0 Transfer in normal mode 1 Transfer in block transfer mode, destination side is block area 0 Transfer in normal mode 1 Transfer in block transfer mode, source side is block area 1 For operation in normal mode and block transfer mode, see section 8.5, Operation. Bits 10 to 7—Reserved: Can be read or written to. Bit 6—Destination Address Increment/Decrement (DAID) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 272 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 5—Destination Address Increment/Decrement Enable (DAIDE): These bits specify whether destination address register MARB is to be incremented, decremented, or left unchanged, when data transfer is performed. Bit 6 Bit 5 DAID DAIDE Description 0 0 MARB is fixed 1 MARB is incremented after a data transfer 1 (Initial value) • When DTSZ = 0, MARB is incremented by 1 after a transfer • When DTSZ = 1, MARB is incremented by 2 after a transfer 0 MARB is fixed 1 MARB is decremented after a data transfer • When DTSZ = 0, MARB is decremented by 1 after a transfer • When DTSZ = 1, MARB is decremented by 2 after a transfer Bit 4—Reserved: Can be read or written to. Bits 3 to 0—Data Transfer Factor (DTF3 to DTF0): These bits select the data transfer factor (activation source). The factors that can be specified differ between normal mode and block transfer mode. • Normal Mode Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DTF3 DTF2 DTF1 DTF0 Description 0 0 0 0 — 1 — 0 Activated by DREQ pin falling edge input 1 1 1 * (Initial value) 1 Activated by DREQ pin low-level input 0 * — 1 0 Auto-request (cycle steal) 1 Auto-request (burst) * — * *: Don't care Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 273 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) • Block Transfer Mode Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DTF3 DTF2 DTF1 DTF0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description 0 — 1 Activated by A/D converter conversion end interrupt Activated by DREQ pin falling edge input* 0 (Initial value) 1 Activated by DREQ pin low-level input 0 Activated by SCI channel 0 transmit-data-empty interrupt 1 Activated by SCI channel 0 reception complete interrupt 0 Activated by SCI channel 1 transmit-data-empty interrupt 1 Activated by SCI channel 1 reception complete interrupt 0 Activated by TPU channel 0 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1 Activated by TPU channel 1 compare match/input capture A interrupt 0 Activated by TPU channel 2 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1 Activated by TPU channel 3 compare match/input capture A interrupt 0 Activated by TPU channel 4 compare match/input capture A interrupt 1 Activated by TPU channel 5 compare match/input capture A interrupt 0 — 1 — Note: * Detected as a low level in the first transfer after transfer is enabled. The same factor can be selected for more than one channel. In this case, activation starts with the highest-priority channel according to the relative channel priorities. For relative channel priorities, see section 8.5.13, DMAC Multi-Channel Operation. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 274 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.3.5 Bit DMA Band Control Register (DMABCR) : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 DMABCRH : FAE1 FAE0 — — DTA1 — DTA0 — Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W : Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DMABCRL : DTME1 DTE1 DTME0 DTE0 DTIE1B DTIE1A DTIE0B DTIE0A Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W : DMABCR is a 16-bit readable/writable register that controls the operation of each DMAC channel. DMABCR is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode. Bit 15—Full Address Enable 1 (FAE1): Specifies whether channel 1 is to be used in short address mode or full address mode. In full address mode, channels 1A and 1B are used together as a single channel. Bit 15 FAE1 Description 0 Short address mode 1 Full address mode (Initial value) Bit 14—Full Address Enable 0 (FAE0): Specifies whether channel 0 is to be used in short address mode or full address mode. In full address mode, channels 0A and 0B are used together as a single channel. Bit 14 FAE0 Description 0 Short address mode 1 Full address mode (Initial value) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 275 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bits 13 and 12—Reserved: Can be read or written to. Bits 11 and 9—Data Transfer Acknowledge (DTA): These bits enable or disable clearing, when DMA transfer is performed, of the internal interrupt source selected by the data transfer factor setting. When DTE = 1 and DTA = 1, the internal interrupt source selected by the data transfer factor setting is cleared automatically by DMA transfer. When DTE = 1 and DTA = 1, the internal interrupt source selected by the data transfer factor setting does not issue an interrupt request to the CPU or DTC. When the DTE = 1 and the DTA = 0, the internal interrupt source selected by the data transfer factor setting is not cleared when a transfer is performed, and can issue an interrupt request to the CPU or DTC in parallel. In this case, the interrupt source should be cleared by the CPU or DTC transfer. When the DTE = 0, the internal interrupt source selected by the data transfer factor setting issues an interrupt request to the CPU or DTC regardless of the DTA bit setting. The state of the DTME bit does not affect the above operations. Bit 11—Data Transfer Acknowledge 1 (DTA1): Enables or disables clearing, when DMA transfer is performed, of the internal interrupt source selected by the channel 1 data transfer factor setting. Bit 11 DTA1 Description 0 Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of DMA transfer is disabled (Initial value) 1 Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of DMA transfer is enabled Bit 9—Data Transfer Acknowledge 0 (DTA0): Enables or disables clearing, when DMA transfer is performed, of the internal interrupt source selected by the channel 0 data transfer factor setting. Bit 9 DTA0 Description 0 Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of DMA transfer is disabled (Initial value) 1 Clearing of selected internal interrupt source at time of DMA transfer is enabled Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 276 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bits 10 and 8—Reserved: Can be read or written to. Bits 7 and 5—Data Transfer Master Enable (DTME): Together with the DTE bit, these bits control enabling or disabling of data transfer on the relevant channel. When both the DTME bit and the DTE bit are set to 1, transfer is enabled for the channel. If the relevant channel is in the middle of a burst mode transfer when an NMI interrupt is generated, the DTME bit is cleared, the transfer is interrupted, and bus mastership passes to the CPU. When the DTME bit is subsequently set to 1 again, the interrupted transfer is resumed. In block transfer mode, however, the DTME bit is not cleared by an NMI interrupt, and transfer is not interrupted. The conditions for the DTME bit being cleared to 0 are as follows: • When initialization is performed • When NMI is input in burst mode • When 0 is written to the DTME bit The condition for DTME being set to 1 is as follows: • When 1 is written to DTME after DTME is read as 0 Bit 7—Data Transfer Master Enable 1 (DTME1): Enables or disables data transfer on channel 1. Bit 7 DTME1 Description 0 Data transfer disabled. In burst mode, cleared to 0 by an NMI interrupt 1 Data transfer enabled (Initial value) Bit 5—Data Transfer Master Enable 0 (DTME0): Enables or disables data transfer on channel 0. Bit 5 DTME0 Description 0 Data transfer disabled. In normal mode, cleared to 0 by an NMI interrupt (Initial value) 1 Data transfer enabled Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 277 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bits 6 and 4—Data Transfer Enable (DTE): When DTE = 0, data transfer is disabled and the activation source selected by the data transfer factor setting is ignored. If the activation source is an internal interrupt, an interrupt request is issued to the CPU or DTC. If the DTIE bit is set to 1 when DTE = 0, the DMAC regards this as indicating the end of a transfer, and issues a transfer end interrupt request to the CPU. The conditions for the DTE bit being cleared to 0 are as follows: • When initialization is performed • When the specified number of transfers have been completed • When 0 is written to the DTE bit to forcibly abort the transfer, or for a similar reason When DTE = 1 and DTME = 1, data transfer is enabled and the DMAC waits for a request by the activation source selected by the data transfer factor setting. When a request is issued by the activation source, DMA transfer is executed. The condition for the DTE bit being set to 1 is as follows: • When 1 is written to the DTE bit after the DTE bit is read as 0 Bit 6—Data Transfer Enable 1 (DTE1): Enables or disables data transfer on channel 1. Bit 6 DTE1 Description 0 Data transfer disabled 1 Data transfer enabled (Initial value) Bit 4—Data Transfer Enable 0 (DTE0): Enables or disables data transfer on channel 0. Bit 4 DTE0 Description 0 Data transfer disabled 1 Data transfer enabled (Initial value) Bits 3 and 1—Data Transfer Interrupt Enable B (DTIEB): These bits enable or disable an interrupt to the CPU or DTC when transfer is interrupted. If the DTIEB bit is set to 1 when DTME = 0, the DMAC regards this as indicating a break in the transfer, and issues a transfer break interrupt request to the CPU or DTC. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 278 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) A transfer break interrupt can be canceled either by clearing the DTIEB bit to 0 in the interrupt handling routine, or by performing processing to continue transfer by setting the DTME bit to 1. Bit 3—Data Transfer Interrupt Enable 1B (DTIE1B): Enables or disables the channel 1 transfer break interrupt. Bit 3 DTIE1B Description 0 Transfer break interrupt disabled 1 Transfer break interrupt enabled (Initial value) Bit 1—Data Transfer Interrupt Enable 0B (DTIE0B): Enables or disables the channel 0 transfer break interrupt. Bit 1 DTIE0B Description 0 Transfer break interrupt disabled 1 Transfer break interrupt enabled (Initial value) Bits 2 and 0—Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable A (DTIEA): These bits enable or disable an interrupt to the CPU or DTC when transfer ends. If DTIEA bit is set to 1 when DTE = 0, the DMAC regards this as indicating the end of a transfer, and issues a transfer end interrupt request to the CPU or DTC. A transfer end interrupt can be canceled either by clearing the DTIEA bit to 0 in the interrupt handling routine, or by performing processing to continue transfer by setting the transfer counter and address register again, and then setting the DTE bit to 1. Bit 2—Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable 1A (DTIE1A): Enables or disables the channel 1 transfer end interrupt. Bit 2 DTIE1A Description 0 Transfer end interrupt disabled 1 Transfer end interrupt enabled (Initial value) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 279 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 0—Data Transfer End Interrupt Enable 0A (DTIE0A): Enables or disables the channel 0 transfer end interrupt. Bit 0 DTIE0A Description 0 Transfer end interrupt disabled 1 Transfer end interrupt enabled 8.4 Register Descriptions (3) 8.4.1 DMA Write Enable Register (DMAWER) (Initial value) The DMAC can activate the DTC with a transfer end interrupt, rewrite the channel on which the transfer ended using a DTC chain transfer, and reactivate the DTC. DMAWER applies restrictions so that only specific bits of DMACR for the specific channel and also DMATCR and DMABCR can be changed to prevent inadvertent changes being made to registers other than those for the channel concerned. The restrictions applied by DMAWER are valid for the DTC. Figure 8.2 shows the transfer areas for activating the DTC with a channel 0A transfer end interrupt, and reactivating channel 0A. The address register and count register area is re-set by the first DTC transfer, then the control register area is re-set by the second DTC chain transfer. When re-setting the control register area, perform masking by setting bits in DMAWER to prevent modification of the contents of the other channels. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 280 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) MAR0A First transfer area IOAR0A ETCR0A MAR0B IOAR0B ETCR0B MAR1A DTC IOAR1A ETCR1A MAR1B IOAR1B ETCR1B DMAWER DMATCR DMACR0A DMACR0B DMACR1A DMACR1B Second transfer area using chain transfer DMABCR Figure 8.2 Areas for Register Re-Setting by DTC (Example: Channel 0A) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DMAWER : — — — — WE1B WE1A WE0B WE0A Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W — — — — R/W R/W R/W R/W : DMAWER is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls enabling or disabling of writes to the DMACR, DMABCR, and DMATCR by the DTC. DMAWER is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode. Bits 7 to 4—Reserved: These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 281 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 3—Write Enable 1B (WE1B): Enables or disables writes to all bits in DMACR1B, bits 11, 7, and 3 in DMABCR, and bit 5 in DMATCR by the DTC. Bit 3 WE1B Description 0 Writes to all bits in DMACR1B, bits 11, 7, and 3 in DMABCR, and bit 5 in DMATCR are disabled (Initial value) 1 Writes to all bits in DMACR1B, bits 11, 7, and 3 in DMABCR, and bit 5 in DMATCR are enabled Bit 2—Write Enable 1A (WE1A): Enables or disables writes to all bits in DMACR1A, and bits 10, 6, and 2 in DMABCR by the DTC. Bit 2 WE1A Description 0 Writes to all bits in DMACR1A, and bits 10, 6, and 2 in DMABCR are disabled (Initial value) 1 Writes to all bits in DMACR1A, and bits 10, 6, and 2 in DMABCR are enabled Bit 1—Write Enable 0B (WE0B): Enables or disables writes to all bits in DMACR0B, bits 9, 5, and 1 in DMABCR, and bit 4 in DMATCR. Bit 1 WE0B Description 0 Writes to all bits in DMACR0B, bits 9, 5, and 1 in DMABCR, and bit 4 in DMATCR are disabled (Initial value) 1 Writes to all bits in DMACR0B, bits 9, 5, and 1 in DMABCR, and bit 4 in DMATCR are enabled Bit 0—Write Enable 0A (WE0A): Enables or disables writes to all bits in DMACR0A, and bits 8, 4, and 0 in DMABCR. Bit 0 WE0A Description 0 Writes to all bits in DMACR0A, and bits 8, 4, and 0 in DMABCR are disabled (Initial value) 1 Writes to all bits in DMACR0A, and bits 8, 4, and 0 in DMABCR are enabled Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 282 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Writes by the DTC to bits 15 to 12 (FAE and SAE) in DMABCR are invalid regardless of the DMAWER settings. These bits should be changed, if necessary, by CPU processing. In writes by the DTC to bits 7 to 4 (DTE) in DMABCR, 1 can be written without first reading 0. To reactivate a channel set to full address mode, write 1 to both Write Enable A and Write Enable B for the channel to be reactivated. MAR, IOAR, and ETCR are always write-enabled regardless of the DMAWER settings. When modifying these registers, the channel for which the modification is to be made should be halted. 8.4.2 Bit DMA Terminal Control Register (DMATCR) : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DMATCR : — — TEE1 TEE0 — — — — Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W — — R/W R/W — — — — : DMATCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls enabling or disabling of DMAC transfer end pin output. A port can be set for output automatically, and a transfer end signal output, by setting the appropriate bit. DMATCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode. Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Bit 5—Transfer End Enable 1 (TEE1): Enables or disables transfer end pin 1 (TEND1) output. Bit 5 TEE1 0 1 Description TEND1 pin output disabled TEND1 pin output enabled (Initial value) Bit 4—Transfer End Enable 0 (TEE0): Enables or disables transfer end pin 0 (TEND0) output. Bit 4 TEE0 0 1 Description TEND0 pin output disabled TEND0 pin output enabled (Initial value) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 283 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) The TEND pins are assigned only to channel B in short address mode. The transfer end signal indicates the transfer cycle in which the transfer counter reached 0, regardless of the transfer source. An exception is block transfer mode, in which the transfer end signal indicates the transfer cycle in which the block counter reached 0. Bits 3 to 0—Reserved: These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified. 8.4.3 Bit Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTPA7 MSTPA6 MSTPA5 MSTPA4 MSTPA3 MSTPA2 MSTPA1 MSTPA0 Initial value : R/W : 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCRA is a 8-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control. When the MSTPA7 bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, the DMAC operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 24.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCRA is initialized to H'3F by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized by a manual reset and in software standby mode. Bit 7—Module Stop (MSTP7): Specifies the DMAC module stop mode. Bits 7 MSTPA7 Description 0 DMAC module stop mode cleared 1 DMAC module stop mode set Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 284 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.5 Operation 8.5.1 Transfer Modes Table 8.5 lists the DMAC modes. Table 8.5 DMAC Transfer Modes Transfer Mode Short address mode Transfer Source (1) Sequential mode • Dual address (2) Idle mode mode (3) Repeat mode • TPU channel 0 to 5 compare match/input capture A interrupt Remarks • Up to 4 channels can operate independently • External request applies to channel B only SCI transmit-dataempty interrupt • SCI reception complete • interrupt • A/D converter conversion end interrupt • External request • External request • Auto-request • TPU channel 0 to 5 compare match/input capture A interrupt Single address mode applies to channel B only • Modes (1), (2), and (3) can also be specified for single address mode • Max. 2-channel operation, combining channels A and B • With auto-request, burst mode transfer or cycle steal transfer can be selected (4) Single address mode Full address mode (5) Normal mode (6) Block transfer mode • SCI transmit-dataempty interrupt • SCI reception complete interrupt • A/D converter conversion end interrupt • External request Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 285 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Operation in each mode is summarized below. (1) Sequential mode In response to a single transfer request, the specified number of transfers are carried out, one byte or one word at a time. An interrupt request can be sent to the CPU or DTC when the specified number of transfers have been completed. One address is specified as 24 bits, and the other as 16 bits. The transfer direction is programmable. (2) Idle mode In response to a single transfer request, the specified number of transfers are carried out, one byte or one word at a time. An interrupt request can be sent to the CPU or DTC when the specified number of transfers have been completed. One address is specified as 24 bits, and the other as 16 bits. The transfer source address and transfer destination address are fixed. The transfer direction is programmable. (3) Repeat mode In response to a single transfer request, the specified number of transfers are carried out, one byte or one word at a time. When the specified number of transfers have been completed, the addresses and transfer counter are restored to their original settings, and operation is continued. No interrupt request is sent to the CPU or DTC. One address is specified as 24 bits, and the other as 16 bits. The transfer direction is programmable. (4) Single address mode In response to a single transfer request, the specified number of transfers are carried out between external memory and an external device, one byte or one word at a time. Unlike dual address mode, source and destination accesses are performed in parallel. Therefore, either the source or the destination is an external device which can be accessed with a strobe alone, using the DACK pin. One address is specified as 24 bits, and for the other, the pin is set automatically. The transfer direction is programmable. Modes (1), (2) and (3) can also be specified for single address mode. (5) Normal mode • Auto-request By means of register settings only, the DMAC is activated, and transfer continues until the specified number of transfers have been completed. An interrupt request can be sent to the CPU or DTC when transfer is completed. Both addresses are specified as 24 bits. Cycle steal mode: The bus is released to another bus master every byte or word transfer. Burst mode: The bus is held and transfer continued until the specified number of transfers have been completed. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 286 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) • External request In response to a single transfer request, the specified number of transfers are carried out, one byte or one word at a time. An interrupt request can be sent to the CPU or DTC when the specified number of transfers have been completed. Both addresses are specified as 24 bits. (6) Block transfer mode In response to a single transfer request, a block transfer of the specified block size is carried out. This is repeated the specified number of times, once each time there is a transfer request. At the end of each single block transfer, one address is restored to its original setting. An interrupt request can be sent to the CPU or DTC when the specified number of block transfers have been completed. Both addresses are specified as 24 bits. 8.5.2 Sequential Mode Sequential mode can be specified by clearing the RPE bit in DMACR to 0. In sequential mode, MAR is updated after each byte or word transfer in response to a single transfer request, and this is executed the number of times specified in ETCR. One address is specified by MAR, and the other by IOAR. The transfer direction can be specified by the DTDIR bit in DMACR. Table 8.6 summarizes register functions in sequential mode. Table 8.6 Register Functions in Sequential Mode Function Register DTDIR = 0 DTDIR = 1 Initial Setting 23 0 Source address register MAR 23 15 H'FF Destination Start address of Incremented/ address transfer destination decremented every register or transfer source transfer 0 Destination Source IOAR 15 address register address register 0 Transfer counter ETCR Operation Start address of Fixed transfer source or transfer destination Number of transfers Decremented every transfer; transfer ends when count reaches H'0000 Legend: MAR: Memory address register IOAR: I/O address register ETCR: Transfer count register DTDIR: Data transfer direction bit Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 287 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) MAR specifies the start address of the transfer source or transfer destination as 24 bits. MAR is incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 each time a byte or word is transferred. IOAR specifies the lower 16 bits of the other address. The 8 bits above IOAR have a value of H'FF. Figure 8.3 illustrates operation in sequential mode. Transfer Address T IOAR 1 byte or word transfer performed in response to 1 transfer request Legend: Address T = L Address B = L + (–1)DTID · (2DTSZ · (N–1)) Where: L = Value set in MAR N = Value set in ETCR Address B Figure 8.3 Operation in Sequential Mode The number of transfers is specified as 16 bits in ETCR. ETCR is decremented by 1 each time a transfer is executed, and when its value reaches H'0000, the DTE bit is cleared and transfer ends. If the DTIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU or DTC. The maximum number of transfers, when H'0000 is set in ETCR, is 65,536. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 288 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Transfer requests (activation sources) consist of A/D converter conversion end interrupts, external requests, SCI transmission complete and reception complete interrupts, and TPU channels 0 to 5 compare match/input capture A interrupts. External requests can be set for channel B only. Figure 8.4 shows an example of the setting procedure for sequential mode. [1] Set each bit in DMABCRH. • Clear the FAE bit to 0 to select short address mode. • Specify enabling or disabling of internal interrupt clearing with the DTA bit. Sequential mode setting Set DMABCRH [1] [2] Set the transfer source address and transfer destination address in MAR and IOAR. [3] Set the number of transfers in ETCR. Set transfer source and transfer destination addresses [2] Set number of transfers [3] Set DMACR [4] [4] Set each bit in DMACR. • Set the transfer data size with the DTSZ bit. • Specify whether MAR is to be incremented or decremented with the DTID bit. • Clear the RPE bit to 0 to select sequential mode. • Specify the transfer direction with the DTDIR bit. • Select the activation source with bits DTF3 to DTF0. [5] Read the DTE bit in DMABCRL as 0. Read DMABCRL [5] Set DMABCRL [6] [6] Set each bit in DMABCRL. • Specify enabling or disabling of transfer end interrupts with the DTIE bit. • Set the DTE bit to 1 to enable transfer. Sequential mode Figure 8.4 Example of Sequential Mode Setting Procedure Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 289 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.5.3 Idle Mode Idle mode can be specified by setting the RPE bit and DTIE bit in DMACR to 1. In idle mode, one byte or word is transferred in response to a single transfer request, and this is executed the number of times specified in ETCR. One address is specified by MAR, and the other by IOAR. The transfer direction can be specified by the DTDIR bit in DMACR. Table 8.7 summarizes register functions in idle mode. Table 8.7 Register Functions in Idle Mode Function Register DTDIR = 0 DTDIR = 1 Initial Setting 23 0 Source address register MAR 23 15 H'FF Destination Start address of Fixed address transfer destination register or transfer source 0 Destination Source IOAR 15 address register address register 0 Transfer counter ETCR Operation Start address of Fixed transfer source or transfer destination Number of transfers Decremented every transfer; transfer ends when count reaches H'0000 Legend: MAR: Memory address register IOAR: I/O address register ETCR: Transfer count register DTDIR: Data transfer direction bit MAR specifies the start address of the transfer source or transfer destination as 24 bits. MAR is neither incremented nor decremented each time a byte or word is transferred. IOAR specifies the lower 16 bits of the other address. The 8 bits above IOAR have a value of H'FF. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 290 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Figure 8.5 illustrates operation in idle mode. MAR Transfer IOAR 1 byte or word transfer performed in response to 1 transfer request Figure 8.5 Operation in Idle Mode The number of transfers is specified as 16 bits in ETCR. ETCR is decremented by 1 each time a transfer is executed, and when its value reaches H'0000, the DTE bit is cleared and transfer ends. If the DTIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU or DTC. The maximum number of transfers, when H'0000 is set in ETCR, is 65,536. Transfer requests (activation sources) consist of A/D converter conversion end interrupts, external requests, SCI transmission complete and reception complete interrupts, and TPU channels 0 to 5 compare match/input capture A interrupts. External requests can be set for channel B only. When the DMAC is used in single address mode, only channel B can be set. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 291 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Figure 8.6 shows an example of the setting procedure for idle mode. [1] Set each bit in DMABCRH. • Clear the FAE bit to 0 to select short address mode. • Specify enabling or disabling of internal interrupt clearing with the DTA bit. Idle mode setting Set DMABCRH [1] [2] Set the transfer source address and transfer destination address in MAR and IOAR. [3] Set the number of transfers in ETCR. Set transfer source and transfer destination addresses [2] Set number of transfers [3] Set DMACR [4] [4] Set each bit in DMACR. • Set the transfer data size with the DTSZ bit. • Specify whether MAR is to be incremented or decremented with the DTID bit. • Set the RPE bit to 1. • Specify the transfer direction with the DTDIR bit. • Select the activation source with bits DTF3 to DTF0. [5] Read the DTE bit in DMABCRL as 0. [6] Set each bit in DMABCRL. • Set the DTIE bit to 1. • Set the DTE bit to 1 to enable transfer. Read DMABCRL [5] Set DMABCRL [6] Idle mode Figure 8.6 Example of Idle Mode Setting Procedure Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 292 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.5.4 Repeat Mode Repeat mode can be specified by setting the RPE bit in DMACR to 1, and clearing the DTIE bit to 0. In repeat mode, MAR is updated after each byte or word transfer in response to a single transfer request, and this is executed the number of times specified in ETCR. On completion of the specified number of transfers, MAR and ETCRL are automatically restored to their original settings and operation continues. One address is specified by MAR, and the other by IOAR. The transfer direction can be specified by the DTDIR bit in DMACR. Table 8.8 summarizes register functions in repeat mode. Table 8.8 Register Functions in Repeat Mode Function Register DTDIR = 0 DTDIR = 1 Initial Setting 23 0 Source address register MAR 23 15 H'FF Destination Start address of Incremented/ address transfer destination decremented every register or transfer source transfer. Initial setting is restored when value reaches H'0000 0 Destination Source address register IOAR 7 address register 0 Holds number of Fixed Start address of transfer source or transfer destination Number of transfers Fixed transfers ETCRH 7 Operation 0 Transfer counter ETCRL Number of transfers Decremented every transfer. Loaded with ETCRH value when count reaches H'00 Legend: MAR: Memory address register IOAR: I/O address register ETCR: Transfer count register DTDIR: Data transfer direction bit Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 293 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) MAR specifies the start address of the transfer source or transfer destination as 24 bits. MAR is incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 each time a byte or word is transferred. IOAR specifies the lower 16 bits of the other address. The 8 bits above IOAR have a value of H'FF. The number of transfers is specified as 8 bits by ETCRH and ETCRL. The maximum number of transfers, when H'00 is set in both ETCRH and ETCRL, is 256. In repeat mode, ETCRL functions as the transfer counter, and ETCRH is used to hold the number of transfers. ETCRL is decremented by 1 each time a transfer is executed, and when its value reaches H'00, it is loaded with the value in ETCRH. At the same time, the value set in MAR is restored in accordance with the values of the DTSZ and DTID bits in DMACR. The MAR restoration operation is as shown below. MAR = MAR – (–1)DTID · 2DTSZ · ETCRH The same value should be set in ETCRH and ETCRL. In repeat mode, operation continues until the DTE bit is cleared. To end the transfer operation, therefore, you should clear the DTE bit to 0. A transfer end interrupt request is not sent to the CPU or DTC. By setting the DTE bit to 1 again after it has been cleared, the operation can be restarted from the transfer after that terminated when the DTE bit was cleared. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 294 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Figure 8.7 illustrates operation in repeat mode. Address T Transfer IOAR 1 byte or word transfer performed in response to 1 transfer request Address B Legend: Address T = L Address B = L + (–1)DTID · (2DTSZ · (N–1)) Where: L = Value set in MAR N = Value set in ETCR Figure 8.7 Operation in Repeat mode Transfer requests (activation sources) consist of A/D converter conversion end interrupts, external requests, SCI transmission complete and reception complete interrupts, and TPU channels 0 to 5 compare match/input capture A interrupts. External requests can be set for channel B only. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 295 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Figure 8.8 shows an example of the setting procedure for repeat mode. [1] Set each bit in DMABCRH. • Clear the FAE bit to 0 to select short address mode. • Specify enabling or disabling of internal interrupt clearing with the DTA bit. Repeat mode setting Set DMABCRH [1] [2] Set the transfer source address and transfer destination address in MAR and IOAR. [3] Set the number of transfers in both ETCRH and ETCRL. Set transfer source and transfer destination addresses [2] Set number of transfers [3] Set DMACR [4] [4] Set each bit in DMACR. • Set the transfer data size with the DTSZ bit. • Specify whether MAR is to be incremented or decremented with the DTID bit. • Set the RPE bit to 1. • Specify the transfer direction with the DTDIR bit. • Select the activation source with bits DTF3 to DTF0. [5] Read the DTE bit in DMABCRL as 0. Read DMABCRL [5] Set DMABCRL [6] [6] Set each bit in DMABCRL. • Clear the DTIE bit to 0. • Set the DTE bit to 1 to enable transfer. Repeat mode Figure 8.8 Example of Repeat Mode Setting Procedure Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 296 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.5.5 Single Address Mode Single address mode can only be specified for channel B. This mode can be specified by setting the SAE bit in DMABCR to 1 in short address mode. One address is specified by MAR, and the other is set automatically to the data transfer acknowledge pin (DACK). The transfer direction can be specified by the DTDIR in DMACR. Table 8.9 summarizes register functions in single address mode. Table 8.9 Register Functions in Single Address Mode Function Register DTDIR = 0 DTDIR = 1 Initial Setting 23 0 Source MAR DACK pin 15 Operation Destination Start address of address transfer destination register or transfer source * address register Write strobe Read strobe (Set automatically by SAE bit; IOAR is invalid) Strobe for external device Number of transfers * 0 Transfer counter ETCR Legend: MAR: Memory address register IOAR: I/O address register ETCR: Transfer count register DTDIR: Data transfer direction bit DACK: Data transfer acknowledge Note: * See the operation descriptions in sections 8.5.2, Sequential Mode, 8.5.3, Idle Mode, and 8.5.4, Repeat Mode. MAR specifies the start address of the transfer source or transfer destination as 24 bits. IOAR is invalid; in its place the strobe for external devices (DACK) is output. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 297 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Figure 8.9 illustrates operation in single address mode (when sequential mode is specified). Address T Transfer DACK 1 byte or word transfer performed in response to 1 transfer request Address B Legend: Address T = L Address B = L + (–1)DTID · (2DTSZ · (N–1)) Where: L = Value set in MAR N = Value set in ETCR Figure 8.9 Operation in Single Address Mode (When Sequential Mode is Specified) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 298 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Figure 8.10 shows an example of the setting procedure for single address mode (when sequential mode is specified). Single address mode setting Set DMABCRH Set transfer source and transfer destination addresses [1] [1] Set each bit in DMABCRH. • Clear the FAE bit to 0 to select short address mode. • Set the SAE bit to 1 to select single address mode. • Specify enabling or disabling of internal interrupt clearing with the DTA bit. [2] Set the transfer source address/transfer destination address in MAR. [2] Set number of transfers [3] Set DMACR [4] [3] Set the number of transfers in ETCR. [4] Set each bit in DMACR. • Set the transfer data size with the DTSZ bit. • Specify whether MAR is to be incremented or decremented with the DTID bit. • Clear the RPE bit to 0 to select sequential mode. • Specify the transfer direction with the DTDIR bit. • Select the activation source with bits DTF3 to DTF0. [5] Read the DTE bit in DMABCRL as 0. Read DMABCRL [5] Set DMABCRL [6] [6] Set each bit in DMABCRL. • Specify enabling or disabling of transfer end interrupts with the DTIE bit. • Set the DTE bit to 1 to enable transfer. Single address mode Figure 8.10 Example of Single Address Mode Setting Procedure (When Sequential Mode is Specified) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 299 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.5.6 Normal Mode In normal mode, transfer is performed with channels A and B used in combination. Normal mode can be specified by setting the FAE bit in DMABCR to 1 and clearing the BLKE bit in DMACRA to 0. In normal mode, MAR is updated after each byte or word transfer in response to a single transfer request, and this is executed the number of times specified in ETCRA. The transfer source is specified by MARA, and the transfer destination by MARB. Table 8.10 summarizes register functions in normal mode. Table 8.10 Register Functions in Normal Mode Register Function 23 0 Source address MARA 23 register 0 Destination MARB 15 address register 0 Transfer counter ETCRA Initial Setting Operation Start address of transfer source Incremented/decremented every transfer, or fixed Start address of transfer destination Incremented/decremented every transfer, or fixed Number of transfers Decremented every transfer; transfer ends when count reaches H'0000 Legend: MARA: Memory address register A MARB: Memory address register B ETCRA: Transfer count register A MARA and MARB specify the start addresses of the transfer source and transfer destination, respectively, as 24 bits. MAR can be incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 each time a byte or word is transferred, or can be fixed. Incrementing, decrementing, or holding a fixed value can be set separately for MARA and MARB. The number of transfers is specified by ETCRA as 16 bits. ETCRA is decremented each time a transfer is performed, and when its value reaches H'0000 the DTE bit is cleared and transfer ends. If the DTIE bit is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU or DTC. The maximum number of transfers, when H'0000 is set in ETCRA, is 65,536. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 300 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Figure 8.11 illustrates operation in normal mode. Address TA Transfer Address TB Address BB Address BA Legend: Address Address Address Address Where: TA TB BA BB LA LB N = LA = LB = LA + SAIDE · (–1)SAID · (2DTSZ · (N–1)) = LB + DAIDE · (–1)DAID · (2DTSZ · (N–1)) = Value set in MARA = Value set in MARB = Value set in ETCRA Figure 8.11 Operation in Normal Mode Transfer requests (activation sources) are external requests and auto-requests. With auto-request, the DMAC is only activated by register setting, and the specified number of transfers are performed automatically. With auto-request, cycle steal mode or burst mode can be selected. In cycle steal mode, the bus is released to another bus master each time a transfer is performed. In burst mode, the bus is held continuously until transfer ends. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 301 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) For setting details, see section 8.3.4, DMA Controller Register (DMACR). Figure 8.12 shows an example of the setting procedure for normal mode. [1] Set each bit in DMABCRH. • Set the FAE bit to 1 to select full address mode. • Specify enabling or disabling of internal interrupt clearing with the DTA bit. Normal mode setting Set DMABCRH [1] [2] Set the transfer source address in MARA, and the transfer destination address in MARB. [3] Set the number of transfers in ETCRA. Set transfer source and transfer destination addresses [2] Set number of transfers [3] Set DMACR [4] [4] Set each bit in DMACRA and DMACRB. • Set the transfer data size with the DTSZ bit. • Specify whether MARA is to be incremented, decremented, or fixed, with the SAID and SAIDE bits. • Clear the BLKE bit to 0 to select normal mode. • Specify whether MARB is to be incremented, decremented, or fixed, with the DAID and DAIDE bits. • Select the activation source with bits DTF3 to DTF0. [5] Read DTE = 0 and DTME = 0 in DMABCRL. Read DMABCRL [5] Set DMABCRL [6] [6] Set each bit in DMABCRL. • Specify enabling or disabling of transfer end interrupts with the DTIE bit. • Set both the DTME bit and the DTE bit to 1 to enable transfer. Normal mode Figure 8.12 Example of Normal Mode Setting Procedure Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 302 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.5.7 Block Transfer Mode In block transfer mode, transfer is performed with channels A and B used in combination. Block transfer mode can be specified by setting the FAE bit in DMABCR and the BLKE bit in DMACRA to 1. In block transfer mode, a transfer of the specified block size is carried out in response to a single transfer request, and this is executed the specified number of times. The transfer source is specified by MARA, and the transfer destination by MARB. Either the transfer source or the transfer destination can be selected as a block area (an area composed of a number of bytes or words). Table 8.11 summarizes register functions in block transfer mode. Table 8.11 Register Functions in Block Transfer Mode Register Function 23 0 Source address register MARA 23 0 Destination address register MARB 7 0 Holds block ETCRAH Initial Setting Operation Start address of transfer source Incremented/decremented every transfer, or fixed Start address of Incremented/decremented transfer destination every transfer, or fixed Block size Fixed Block size Decremented every transfer; ETCRH value copied when count reaches H'00 Number of block transfers Decremented every block transfer; transfer ends when count reaches H'0000 size Block size 0 counter 7 ETCRAL 15 0 Block transfer ETCRB Legend: MARA: MARB: ETCRA: ETCRB: counter Memory address register A Memory address register B Transfer count register A Transfer count register B MARA and MARB specify the start addresses of the transfer source and transfer destination, respectively, as 24 bits. MAR can be incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 each time a byte or word is transferred, or can be fixed. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 303 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Incrementing, decrementing, or holding a fixed value can be set separately for MARA and MARB. Whether a block is to be designated for MARA or for MARB is specified by the BLKDIR bit in DMACRA. To specify the number of transfers, if M is the size of one block (where M = 1 to 256) and N transfers are to be performed (where N = 1 to 65,536), M is set in both ETCRAH and ETCRAL, and N in ETCRB. Figure 8.13 illustrates operation in block transfer mode when MARB is designated as a block area. Address TB Address TA 1st block 2nd block Transfer Consecutive transfer of M bytes or words is performed in response to one request Block area Address BB Nth block Address BA Legend: Address Address Address Address Where: TA TB BA BB LA LB N M = LA = LB = LA + SAIDE · (–1)SAID · (2DTSZ · (M·N–1)) = LB + DAIDE · (–1)DAID · (2DTSZ · (N–1)) = Value set in MARA = Value set in MARB = Value set in ETCRB = Value set in ETCRAH and ETCRAL Figure 8.13 Operation in Block Transfer Mode (BLKDIR = 0) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 304 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Figure 8.14 illustrates operation in block transfer mode when MARA is designated as a block area. Address TA Address TB Block area 1st block Transfer Consecutive transfer of M bytes or words is performed in response to one request Address BA 2nd block Nth block Address BB Legend: Address Address Address Address Where: TA TB BA BB LA LB N M = LA = LB = LA + SAIDE · (–1)SAID · (2DTSZ · (N–1)) = LB + DAIDE · (–1)DAID · (2DTSZ · (M·N–1)) = Value set in MARA = Value set in MARB = Value set in ETCRB = Value set in ETCRAH and ETCRAL Figure 8.14 Operation in Block Transfer Mode (BLKDIR = 1) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 305 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) ETCRAL is decremented by 1 each time a byte or word transfer is performed. In response to a single transfer request, burst transfer is performed until the value in ETCRAL reaches H'00. ETCRAL is then loaded with the value in ETCRAH. At this time, the value in the MAR register for which a block designation has been given by the BLKDIR bit in DMACRA is restored in accordance with the DTSZ, SAID/DAID, and SAIDE/DAIDE bits in DMACR. ETCRB is decremented by 1 every block transfer, and when the count reaches H'0000 the DTE bit is cleared and transfer ends. If the DTIE bit is set to 1 at this point, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU or DTC. Figure 8.15 shows the operation flow in block transfer mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 306 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Start (DTE = DTME = 1) Transfer request? No Yes Acquire bus Read address specified by MARA MARA=MARA+SAIDE·(–1)SAID·2DTSZ Write to address specified by MARB MARB=MARB+DAIDE·(–1)DAID ·2DTSZ ETCRAL=ETCRAL–1 ETCRAL=H'00 No Yes Release bus ETCRAL=ETCRAH No BLKDIR=0 Yes MARB=MARB–DAIDE·(–1)DAID·2DTSZ·ETCRAH MARA=MARA–SAIDE·(–1)SAID·2DTSZ·ETCRAH ETCRB=ETCRB–1 No ETCRB=H'0000 Yes Clear DTE bit to 0 to end transfer Figure 8.15 Operation Flow in Block Transfer Mode Transfer requests (activation sources) consist of A/D converter conversion end interrupts, external requests, SCI transmission complete and reception complete interrupts, and TPU channels 0 to 5 compare match/input capture A interrupts. For details, see section 8.3.4, DMA Control Register (DMACR). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 307 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Figure 8.16 shows an example of the setting procedure for block transfer mode. [1] Set each bit in DMABCRH. • Set the FAE bit to 1 to select full address mode. • Specify enabling or disabling of internal interrupt clearing with the DTA bit. Block transfer mode setting Set DMABCRH Set transfer source and transfer destination addresses [1] [2] Set number of transfers [3] Set DMACR [4] Read DMABCRL [5] [2] Set the transfer source address in MARA, and the transfer destination address in MARB. [3] Set the block size in both ETCRAH and ETCRAL. Set the number of transfers in ETCRB. [4] Set each bit in DMACRA and DMACRB. • Set the transfer data size with the DTSZ bit. • Specify whether MARA is to be incremented, decremented, or fixed, with the SAID and SAIDE bits. • Set the BLKE bit to 1 to select block transfer mode. • Specify whether the transfer source or the transfer destination is a block area with the BLKDIR bit. • Specify whether MARB is to be incremented, decremented, or fixed, with the DAID and DAIDE bits. • Select the activation source with bits DTF3 to DTF0. [5] Read DTE = 0 and DTME = 0 in DMABCRL. Set DMABCRL Block transfer mode [6] [6] Set each bit in DMABCRL. • Specify enabling or disabling of transfer end interrupts to the CPU with the DTIE bit. • Set both the DTME bit and the DTE bit to 1 to enable transfer. Figure 8.16 Example of Block Transfer Mode Setting Procedure Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 308 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.5.8 DMAC Activation Sources DMAC activation sources consist of internal interrupts, external requests, and auto-requests. The activation sources that can be specified depend on the transfer mode and the channel, as shown in table 8.12. Table 8.12 DMAC Activation Sources Short Address Mode Activation Source Internal Interrupts External Requests Channels 0A and 1A Channels 0B and 1B Full Address Mode Normal Mode ADI X TXI0 X RXI0 X TXI1 X RXI1 X TGI0A X TGI1A X TGI2A X TGI3A X TGI4A X TGI5A X DREQ pin falling edge input DREQ pin low-level input Auto-request Block Transfer Mode X X X X X Legend: : Can be specified X: Cannot be specified Activation by Internal Interrupt: An interrupt request selected as a DMAC activation source can be sent simultaneously to the CPU and DTC. For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller. With activation by an internal interrupt, the DMAC accepts the request independently of the interrupt controller. Consequently, interrupt controller priority settings are not accepted. If the DMAC is activated by a CPU interrupt source or an interrupt source that is not used as a DTC activation source (DTA = 1), the interrupt source flag is cleared automatically by the DMA transfer. With ADI, TXI, and RXI interrupts, however, the interrupt source flag is not cleared Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 309 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) unless the prescribed register is accessed in a DMA transfer. If the same interrupt is used as an activation source for more than one channel, the interrupt request flag is cleared when the highestpriority channel is activated first. Transfer requests for other channels are held pending in the DMAC, and activation is carried out in order of priority. When DTE = 0, such as after completion of a transfer, a request from the selected activation source is not sent to the DMAC, regardless of the DTA bit. In this case, the relevant interrupt request is sent to the CPU or DTC. In case of overlap with a CPU interrupt source or DTC activation source (DTA = 0), the interrupt request flag is not cleared by the DMAC. Activation by External Request: If an external request (DREQ pin) is specified as an activation source, the relevant port should be set to input mode in advance. Level sensing or edge sensing can be used for external requests. External request operation in normal mode (short address mode or full address mode) is described below. When edge sensing is selected, a 1-byte or 1-word transfer is executed each time a high-to-low transition is detected on the DREQ pin. The next transfer may not be performed if the next edge is input before transfer is completed. When level sensing is selected, the DMAC stands by for a transfer request while the DREQ pin is held high. While the DREQ pin is held low, transfers continue in succession, with the bus being released each time a byte or word is transferred. If the DREQ pin goes high in the middle of a transfer, the transfer is interrupted and the DMAC stands by for a transfer request. Activation by Auto-Request: Auto-request activation is performed by register setting only, and transfer continues to the end. With auto-request activation, cycle steal mode or burst mode can be selected. In cycle steal mode, the DMAC releases the bus to another bus master each time a byte or word is transferred. DMA and CPU cycles usually alternate. In burst mode, the DMAC keeps possession of the bus until the end of the transfer, and transfer is performed continuously. Single Address Mode: The DMAC can operate in dual address mode in which read cycles and write cycles are separate cycles, or single address mode in which read and write cycles are executed in parallel. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 310 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) In dual address mode, transfer is performed with the source address and destination address specified separately. In single address mode, on the other hand, transfer is performed between external space in which either the transfer source or the transfer destination is specified by an address, and an external device for which selection is performed by means of the DACK strobe, without regard to the address. Figure 8.17 shows the data bus in single address mode. RD HWR, LWR A23 to A0 Address bus External memory H8S/2633 D15 to D0 (high impedance) Data bus (Read) (Write) External device DACK Figure 8.17 Data Bus in Single Address Mode When using the DMAC for single address mode reading, transfer is performed from external memory to the external device, and the DACK pin functions as a write strobe for the external device. When using the DMAC for single address mode writing, transfer is performed from the external device to external memory, and the DACK pin functions as a read strobe for the external device. Since there is no directional control for the external device, one or other of the above single directions should be used. Bus cycles in single address mode are in accordance with the settings of the bus controller for the external memory area. On the external device side, DACK is output in synchronization with the address strobe. For details of bus cycles, see section 8.5.11, DMAC Bus Cycles (Single Address Mode). Do not specify internal space for transfer addresses in single address mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 311 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.5.9 Basic DMAC Bus Cycles An example of the basic DMAC bus cycle timing is shown in figure 8.18. In this example, wordsize transfer is performed from 16-bit , 2-state access space to 8-bit, 3-state access space. When the bus is transferred from the CPU to the DMAC, a source address read and destination address write are performed. The bus is not released in response to another bus request, etc., between these read and write operations. As with CPU cycles, DMA cycles conform to the bus controller settings. CPU cycle DMAC cycle (1-word transfer) T1 T2 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 CPU cycle T3 φ Source address Destination address Address bus RD HWR LWR Figure 8.18 Example of DMA Transfer Bus Timing The address is not output to the external address bus in an access to on-chip memory or an internal I/O register. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 312 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.5.10 DMAC Bus Cycles (Dual Address Mode) Short Address Mode: Figure 8.19 shows a transfer example in which TEND output is enabled and byte-size short address mode transfer (sequential/idle/repeat mode) is performed from external 8-bit, 2-state access space to internal I/O space. DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA dead φ Address bus RD HWR LWR TEND Bus release Bus release Bus release Last transfer cycle Bus release Figure 8.19 Example of Short Address Mode Transfer A one-byte or one-word transfer is performed for one transfer request, and after the transfer the bus is released. While the bus is released one or more bus cycles are inserted by the CPU or DTC. In the transfer end cycle (the cycle in which the transfer counter reaches 0), a one-state DMA dead cycle is inserted after the DMA write cycle. In repeat mode, when TEND output is enabled, TEND output goes low in the transfer cycle in which the transfer counter reaches 0. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 313 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Full Address Mode (Cycle Steal Mode): Figure 8.20 shows a transfer example in which TEND output is enabled and word-size full address mode transfer (cycle steal mode) is performed from external 16-bit, 2-state access space to external 16-bit, 2-state access space. DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA dead φ Address bus RD HWR LWR TEND Bus release Bus release Bus release Last transfer cycle Bus release Figure 8.20 Example of Full Address Mode (Cycle Steal) Transfer A one-byte or one-word transfer is performed, and after the transfer the bus is released. While the bus is released one bus cycle is inserted by the CPU or DTC. In the transfer end cycle (the cycle in which the transfer counter reaches 0), a one-state DMA dead cycle is inserted after the DMA write cycle. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 314 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Full Address Mode (Burst Mode): Figure 8.21 shows a transfer example in which TEND output is enabled and word-size full address mode transfer (burst mode) is performed from external 16bit, 2-state access space to external 16-bit, 2-state access space. DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA dead φ Address bus RD HWR LWR TEND Last transfer cycle Bus release Bus release Burst transfer Figure 8.21 Example of Full Address Mode (Burst Mode) Transfer In burst mode, one-byte or one-word transfers are executed consecutively until transfer ends. In the transfer end cycle (the cycle in which the transfer counter reaches 0), a one-state DMA dead cycle is inserted after the DMA write cycle. If a request from another higher-priority channel is generated after burst transfer starts, that channel has to wait until the burst transfer ends. If an NMI is generated while a channel designated for burst transfer is in the transfer enabled state, the DTME bit is cleared and the channel is placed in the transfer disabled state. If burst transfer has already been activated inside the DMAC, the bus is released on completion of a one-byte or one-word transfer within the burst transfer, and burst transfer is suspended. If the last transfer cycle of the burst transfer has already been activated inside the DMAC, execution continues to the end of the transfer even if the DTME bit is cleared. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 315 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Full Address Mode (Block Transfer Mode): Figure 8.22 shows a transfer example in which TEND output is enabled and word-size full address mode transfer (block transfer mode) is performed from internal 16-bit, 1-state access space to external 16-bit, 2-state access space. DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA dead DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA dead φ Address bus RD HWR LWR TEND Bus release Block transfer Bus release Last block transfer Bus release Figure 8.22 Example of Full Address Mode (Block Transfer Mode) Transfer A one-block transfer is performed for one transfer request, and after the transfer the bus is released. While the bus is released, one or more bus cycles are inserted by the CPU or DTC. In the transfer end cycle of each block (the cycle in which the transfer counter reaches 0), a onestate DMA dead cycle is inserted after the DMA write cycle. One block is transmitted without interruption. NMI generation does not affect block transfer operation. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 316 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) DREQ Pin Falling Edge Activation Timing: Set the DTA bit for the channel for which the DREQ pin is selected to 1. Figure 8.23 shows an example of DREQ pin falling edge activated normal mode transfer. DMA read DMA write Transfer source Transfer destination Bus release Bus release DMA read DMA write Transfer source Transfer destination Bus release φ DREQ Address bus DMA control Channel Read Idle [2] [3] Read Idle Request clear period Request Minimum of 2 cycles [1] Write Write Idle Request clear period Request Minimum of 2 cycles [4] [5] Acceptance resumes [6] [7] Acceptance resumes Acceptance after transfer enabling; the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of φ, and the request is held. [2] [5] The request is cleared at the next bus break, and activation is started in the DMAC. [3] [6] Start of DMA cycle; DREQ pin high level sampling on the rising edge of φ starts. [4] [7] When the DREQ pin high level has been sampled, acceptance is resumed after the write cycle is completed. (As in [1], the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of φ, and the request is held.) [1] Note: In write data buffer mode, bus breaks from [2] to [7] may be hidden, and not visible. Figure 8.23 Example of DREQ Pin Falling Edge Activated Normal Mode Transfer DREQ pin sampling is performed every cycle, with the rising edge of the next φ cycle after the end of the DMABCR write cycle for setting the transfer enabled state as the starting point. When the DREQ pin low level is sampled while acceptance by means of the DREQ pin is possible, the request is held in the DMAC. Then, when activation is initiated in the DMAC, the request is cleared, and DREQ pin high level sampling for edge detection is started. If DREQ pin high level sampling has been completed by the time the DMA write cycle ends, acceptance resumes after the end of the write cycle, DREQ pin low level sampling is performed again, and this operation is repeated until the transfer ends. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 317 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Figure 8.24 shows an example of DREQ pin falling edge activated block transfer mode transfer. 1 block transfer 1 block transfer DMA read Bus release DMA write DMA Bus dead release DMA read DMA write Transfer source Transfer destination DMA dead Bus release φ DREQ Transfer source Address bus DMA control Channel Read Idle Request [2] Dead Write Request clear period Minimun of 2 cycles [1] Transfer destination [3] Idle Read Write Dead Idle Request clear period Request Minimun of 2 cycles [4] [5] Acceptance resumes [6] [7] Acceptance resumes Acceptance after transfer enabling; the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of φ, and the request is held. [2] [5] The request is cleared at the next bus break, and activation is started in the DMAC. [3] [6] Start of DMA cycle; DREQ pin high level sampling on the rising edge of φ starts. [4] [7] When the DREQ pin high level has been sampled, acceptance is resumed after the dead cycle is completed. (As in [1], the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of φ, and the request is held.) [1] Note: In write data buffer mode, bus breaks from [2] to [7] may be hidden, and not visible. Figure 8.24 Example of DREQ Pin Falling Edge Activated Block Transfer Mode Transfer DREQ pin sampling is performed every cycle, with the rising edge of the next φ cycle after the end of the DMABCR write cycle for setting the transfer enabled state as the starting point. When the DREQ pin low level is sampled while acceptance by means of the DREQ pin is possible, the request is held in the DMAC. Then, when activation is initiated in the DMAC, the request is cleared, and DREQ pin high level sampling for edge detection is started. If DREQ pin high level sampling has been completed by the time the DMA dead cycle ends, acceptance resumes after the end of the dead cycle, DREQ pin low level sampling is performed again, and this operation is repeated until the transfer ends. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 318 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) DREQ Level Activation Timing (Normal Mode): Set the DTA bit for the channel for which the DREQ pin is selected to 1. Figure 8.25 shows an example of DREQ level activated normal mode transfer. DMA read DMA write Transfer source Transfer destination Bus release Bus release DMA read DMA write Transfer source Transfer destination Bus release φ DREQ Address bus DMA control Channel Read Idle Request [2] [3] Read Idle Request clear period Minimum of 2 cycles [1] Write Write Idle Request clear period Request Minimum of 2 cycles [4] [5] [6] Acceptance resumes [7] Acceptance resumes Acceptance after transfer enabling; the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of φ, and the request is held. [2] [5] The request is cleared at the next bus break, and activation is started in the DMAC. [3] [6] The DMA cycle is started. [4] [7] Acceptance is resumed after the write cycle is completed. (As in [1], the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of φ, and the request is held.) [1] Note: In write data buffer mode, bus breaks from [2] to [7] may be hidden, and not visible. Figure 8.25 Example of DREQ Level Activated Normal Mode Transfer DREQ pin sampling is performed every cycle, with the rising edge of the next φ cycle after the end of the DMABCR write cycle for setting the transfer enabled state as the starting point. When the DREQ pin low level is sampled while acceptance by means of the DREQ pin is possible, the request is held in the DMAC. Then, when activation is initiated in the DMAC, the request is cleared. After the end of the write cycle, acceptance resumes, DREQ pin low level sampling is performed again, and this operation is repeated until the transfer ends. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 319 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Figure 8.26 shows an example of DREQ level activated block transfer mode transfer. 1 block transfer DMA read Bus release 1 block transfer DMA right DMA Bus dead release DMA read DMA right DMA dead Bus release φ DREQ Transfer source Address bus DMA control Channel Read Idle Transfer destination Dead Write Request clear period Request Minimum of 2 cycles [1] [2] Transfer source Idle Read Write Transfer destination Dead Idle Request clear period Request Minimum of 2 cycles [3] [4] [5] Acceptance resumes [6] [7] Acceptance resumes Acceptance after transfer enabling; the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of φ, and the request is held. [2] [5] The request is cleared at the next bus break, and activation is started in the DMAC. [3] [6] The DMA cycle is started. [4] [7] Acceptance is resumed after the dead cycle is completed. (As in [1], the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of φ, and the request is held.) [1] Note: In write data buffer mode, bus breaks from [2] to [7] may be hidden, and not visible. Figure 8.26 Example of DREQ Level Activated Block Transfer Mode Transfer DREQ pin sampling is performed every cycle, with the rising edge of the next φ cycle after the end of the DMABCR write cycle for setting the transfer enabled state as the starting point. When the DREQ pin low level is sampled while acceptance by means of the DREQ pin is possible, the request is held in the DMAC. Then, when activation is initiated in the DMAC, the request is cleared. After the end of the dead cycle, acceptance resumes, DREQ pin low level sampling is performed again, and this operation is repeated until the transfer ends. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 320 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.5.11 DMAC Bus Cycles (Single Address Mode) Single Address Mode (Read): Figure 8.27 shows a transfer example in which TEND output is enabled and byte-size single address mode transfer (read) is performed from external 8-bit, 2-state access space to an external device. DMA read DMA read DMA read DMA DMA read dead φ Address bus RD DACK TEND Bus release Bus release Bus release Bus Last transfer release cycle Bus release Figure 8.27 Example of Single Address Mode (Byte Read) Transfer Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 321 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Figure 8.28 shows a transfer example in which TEND output is enabled and word-size single address mode transfer (read) is performed from external 8-bit, 2-state access space to an external device. DMA read DMA read DMA read DMA dead φ Address bus RD DACK TEND Bus release Bus release Bus release Last transfer cycle Bus release Figure 8.28 Example of Single Address Mode (Word Read) Transfer A one-byte or one-word transfer is performed for one transfer request, and after the transfer the bus is released. While the bus is released, one or more bus cycles are inserted by the CPU or DTC. In the transfer end cycle (the cycle in which the transfer counter reaches 0), a one-state DMA dead cycle is inserted after the DMA write cycle. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 322 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Single Address Mode (Write): Figure 8.29 shows a transfer example in which TEND output is enabled and byte-size single address mode transfer (write) is performed from an external device to external 8-bit, 2-state access space. DMA write DMA write DMA write DMA DMA write dead φ Address bus HWR LWR DACK TEND Bus release Bus release Bus release Bus Last transfer release cycle Bus release Figure 8.29 Example of Single Address Mode (Byte Write) Transfer Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 323 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Figure 8.30 shows a transfer example in which TEND output is enabled and word-size single address mode transfer (write) is performed from an external device to external 8-bit, 2-state access space. DMA write DMA write DMA write DMA dead φ Address bus HWR LWR DACK TEND Bus release Bus release Bus release Last transfer cycle Bus release Figure 8.30 Example of Single Address Mode (Word Write) Transfer A one-byte or one-word transfer is performed for one transfer request, and after the transfer the bus is released. While the bus is released one or more bus cycles are inserted by the CPU or DTC. In the transfer end cycle (the cycle in which the transfer counter reaches 0), a one-state DMA dead cycle is inserted after the DMA write cycle. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 324 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) DREQ Pin Falling Edge Activation Timing: Set the DTA bit for the channel for which the DREQ pin is selected to 1. Figure 8.31 shows an example of DREQ pin falling edge activated single address mode transfer. Bus release DMA single Bus release DMA single Bus release φ DREQ Transfer source/ destination Address bus Transfer source/ destination DACK DMA control Channel Idle Single Request Idle Request clear period Single [1] [2] Request clear period Request Minimum of 2 cycles Idle Minimum of 2 cycles [3] [4] [5] Acceptance resumes [6] [7] Acceptance resumes Acceptance after transfer enabling; the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of φ, and the request is held. [2] [5] The request is cleared at the next bus break, and activation is started in the DMAC. [3] [6] Start of DMA cycle; DREQ pin high level sampling on the rising edge of φ starts. [4] [7] When the DREQ pin high level has been sampled, acceptance is resumed after the single cycle is completed. (As in [1], the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of φ, and the request is held.) [1] Note: In write data buffer mode, bus breaks from [2] to [7] may be hidden, and not visible. Figure 8.31 Example of DREQ Pin Falling Edge Activated Single Address Mode Transfer DREQ pin sampling is performed every cycle, with the rising edge of the next φ cycle after the end of the DMABCR write cycle for setting the transfer enabled state as the starting point. When the DREQ pin low level is sampled while acceptance by means of the DREQ pin is possible, the request is held in the DMAC. Then, when activation is initiated in the DMAC, the request is cleared, and DREQ pin high level sampling for edge detection is started. If DREQ pin high level sampling has been completed by the time the DMA single cycle ends, acceptance resumes after the end of the single cycle, DREQ pin low level sampling is performed again, and this operation is repeated until the transfer ends. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 325 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) DREQ Pin Low Level Activation Timing: Set the DTA bit for the channel for which the DREQ pin is selected to 1. Figure 8.32 shows an example of DREQ pin low level activated single address mode transfer. Bus release DMA single Bus release Bus release DMA single φ DREQ Transfer source/ destination Address bus Transfer source/ destination DACK DMA control Channel Idle Single Idle Request clear period Request Single [1] [2] Request clear period Request Minimum of 2 cycles Idle Minimum of 2 cycles [3] [4] [5] Acceptance resumes [6] [7] Acceptance resumes Acceptance after transfer enabling; the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of φ, and the request is held. [2] [5] The request is cleared at the next bus break, and activation is started in the DMAC. [3] [6] The DMAC cycle is started. [4] [7] Acceptance is resumed after the single cycle is completed. (As in [1], the DREQ pin low level is sampled on the rising edge of φ, and the request is held.) [1] Note: In write data buffer mode, bus breaks from [2] to [7] may be hidden, and not visible. Figure 8.32 Example of DREQ Pin Low Level Activated Single Address Mode Transfer DREQ pin sampling is performed every cycle, with the rising edge of the next φ cycle after the end of the DMABCR write cycle for setting the transfer enabled state as the starting point. When the DREQ pin low level is sampled while acceptance by means of the DREQ pin is possible, the request is held in the DMAC. Then, when activation is initiated in the DMAC, the request is cleared. After the end of the single cycle, acceptance resumes, DREQ pin low level sampling is performed again, and this operation is repeated until the transfer ends. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 326 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.5.12 Write Data Buffer Function DMAC internal-to-external dual address transfers and single address transfers can be executed at high speed using the write data buffer function, enabling system throughput to be improved. When the WDBE bit of BCRL in the bus controller is set to 1, enabling the write data buffer function, dual address transfer external write cycles or single address transfers and internal accesses (on-chip memory or internal I/O registers) are executed in parallel. Internal accesses are independent of the bus master, and DMAC dead cycles are regarded as internal accesses. A low level can always be output from the TEND pin if the bus cycle in which a low level is to be output is an external bus cycle. However, a low level is not output from the TEND pin if the bus cycle in which a low level is to be output from the TEND pin is an internal bus cycle, and an external write cycle is executed in parallel with this cycle. Figure 8.33 shows an example of burst mode transfer from on-chip RAM to external memory using the write data buffer function. DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA dead φ Internal address Internal read signal External address HWR, LWR TEND Figure 8.33 Example of Dual Address Transfer Using Write Data Buffer Function Figure 8.34 shows an example of single address transfer using the write data buffer function. In this example, the CPU program area is in on-chip memory. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 327 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) DMA read DMA single CPU read DMA single CPU read φ Internal address Internal read signal External address RD DACK Figure 8.34 Example of Single Address Transfer Using Write Data Buffer Function When the write data buffer function is activated, the DMAC recognizes that the bus cycle concerned has ended, and starts the next operation. Therefore, DREQ pin sampling is started one state after the start of the DMA write cycle or single address transfer. 8.5.13 DMAC Multi-Channel Operation The DMAC channel priority order is: channel 0 > channel 1, and channel A > channel B. Table 8.13 summarizes the priority order for DMAC channels. Table 8.13 DMAC Channel Priority Order Short Address Mode Full Address Mode Priority Channel 0A Channel 0 High Channel 0B Channel 1A Channel 1 Channel 1B Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 328 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Low Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) If transfer requests are issued simultaneously for more than one channel, or if a transfer request for another channel is issued during a transfer, when the bus is released the DMAC selects the highest-priority channel from among those issuing a request according to the priority order shown in table 8.13. During burst transfer, or when one block is being transferred in block transfer, the channel will not be changed until the end of the transfer. Figure 8.35 shows a transfer example in which transfer requests are issued simultaneously for channels 0A, 0B, and 1. DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA write DMA read DMA DMA write read φ Address bus RD HWR LWR DMA control Idle Read Channel 0A Idle Write Read Write Idle Read Write Read Request clear Channel 0B Request hold Selection Channel 1 Request hold Nonselection Bus release Channel 0A transfer Request clear Request hold Bus release Selection Channel 0B transfer Request clear Bus release Channel 1 transfer Figure 8.35 Example of Multi-Channel Transfer 8.5.14 Relation between External Bus Requests, Refresh Cycles, the DTC, and the DMAC There can be no break between a DMA cycle read and a DMA cycle write. This means that a refresh cycle, external bus release cycle, or DTC cycle is not generated between the external read and external write in a DMA cycle. In the case of successive read and write cycles, such as in burst transfer or block transfer, a refresh or external bus released state may be inserted after a write cycle. Since the DTC has a lower priority than the DMAC, the DTC does not operate until the DMAC releases the bus. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 329 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) When DMA cycle reads or writes are accesses to on-chip memory or internal I/O registers, these DMA cycles can be executed at the same time as refresh cycles or external bus release. However, simultaneous operation may not be possible when a write buffer is used. 8.5.15 NMI Interrupts and DMAC When an NMI interrupt is requested, burst mode transfer in full address mode is interrupted. An NMI interrupt does not affect the operation of the DMAC in other modes. In full address mode, transfer is enabled for a channel when both the DTE bit and the DTME bit are set to 1. With burst mode setting, the DTME bit is cleared when an NMI interrupt is requested. If the DTME bit is cleared during burst mode transfer, the DMAC discontinues transfer on completion of the 1-byte or 1-word transfer in progress, then releases the bus, which passes to the CPU. The channel on which transfer was interrupted can be restarted by setting the DTME bit to 1 again. Figure 8.36 shows the procedure for continuing transfer when it has been interrupted by an NMI interrupt on a channel designated for burst mode transfer. Resumption of transfer on interrupted channel DTE= 1 DTME= 0 [1] Check that DTE = 1 and DTME = 0 in DMABCRL [2] Write 1 to the DTME bit. [1] No Yes Set DTME bit to 1 [2] Transfer continues Transfer ends Figure 8.36 Example of Procedure for Continuing Transfer on Channel Interrupted by NMI Interrupt Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 330 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.5.16 Forced Termination of DMAC Operation If the DTE bit for the channel currently operating is cleared to 0, the DMAC stops on completion of the 1-byte or 1-word transfer in progress. DMAC operation resumes when the DTE bit is set to 1 again. In full address mode, the same applies to the DTME bit. Figure 8.37 shows the procedure for forcibly terminating DMAC operation by software. [1] Forced termination of DMAC Clear DTE bit to 0 Clear the DTE bit in DMABCRL to 0. If you want to prevent interrupt generation after forced termination of DMAC operation, clear the DTIE bit to 0 at the same time. [1] Forced termination Figure 8.37 Example of Procedure for Forcibly Terminating DMAC Operation Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 331 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.5.17 Clearing Full Address Mode Figure 8.38 shows the procedure for releasing and initializing a channel designated for full address mode. After full address mode has been cleared, the channel can be set to another transfer mode using the appropriate setting procedure. Clearing full address mode Stop the channel [1] [1] Clear both the DTE bit and the DTME bit in DMABCRL to 0; or wait until the transfer ends and the DTE bit is cleared to 0, then clear the DTME bit to 0. Also clear the corresponding DTIE bit to 0 at the same time. [2] Clear all bits in DMACRA and DMACRB to 0. [3] Clear the FAE bit in DMABCRH to 0. Initialize DMACR [2] Clear FAE bit to 0 [3] Initialization; operation halted Figure 8.38 Example of Procedure for Clearing Full Address Mode Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 332 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.6 Interrupts The sources of interrupts generated by the DMAC are transfer end and transfer break. Table 8.14 shows the interrupt sources and their priority order. Table 8.14 Interrupt Source Priority Order Interrupt Name Interrupt Source Interrupt Priority Order Short Address Mode Full Address Mode DEND0A Interrupt due to end of transfer on channel 0A Interrupt due to end of transfer on channel 0 DEND0B Interrupt due to end of transfer on channel 0B Interrupt due to break in transfer on channel 0 DEND1A Interrupt due to end of transfer on channel 1A Interrupt due to end of transfer on channel 1 DEND1B Interrupt due to end of transfer on channel 1B Interrupt due to break in transfer on channel 1 High Low Enabling or disabling of each interrupt source is set by means of the DTIE bit for the corresponding channel in DMABCR, and interrupts from each source are sent to the interrupt controller independently. The relative priority of transfer end interrupts on each channel is decided by the interrupt controller, as shown in table 8.14. Figure 8.39 shows a block diagram of a transfer end/transfer break interrupt. An interrupt is always generated when the DTIE bit is set to 1 while DTE bit is cleared to 0. DTE/ DTME Transfer end/transfer break interrupt DTIE Figure 8.39 Block Diagram of Transfer End/Transfer Break Interrupt In full address mode, a transfer break interrupt is generated when the DTME bit is cleared to 0 while DTIEB bit is set to 1. In both short address mode and full address mode, DMABCR should be set so as to prevent the occurrence of a combination that constitutes a condition for interrupt generation during setting. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 333 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 8.7 Usage Notes DMAC Register Access during Operation: Except for forced termination, the operating (including transfer waiting state) channel setting should not be changed. The operating channel setting should only be changed when transfer is disabled. Also, the DMAC register should not be written to in a DMA transfer. DMAC register reads during operation (including the transfer waiting state) are described below. (a) DMAC control starts one cycle before the bus cycle, with output of the internal address. Consequently, MAR is updated in the bus cycle before DMAC transfer. Figure 8.40 shows an example of the update timing for DMAC registers in dual address transfer mode. DMA last transfer cycle DMA transfer cycle DMA read DMA read DMA write DMA write DMA dead φ DMA Internal address DMA control DMA register operation Idle [1] Transfer source Transfer destination Read Write [2] Transfer destination Transfer source Read Idle [1] Write [2]' Dead [3] [1] Transfer source address register MAR operation (incremented/decremented/fixed) Transfer counter ETCR operation (decremented) Block size counter ETCR operation (decremented in block transfer mode) [2] Transfer destination address register MAR operation (incremented/decremented/fixed) [2'] Transfer destination address register MAR operation (incremented/decremented/fixed) Block transfer counter ETCR operation (decremented, in last transfer cycle of a block in block transfer mode) [3] Transfer address register MAR restore operation (in block or repeat transfer mode) Transfer counter ETCR restore (in repeat transfer mode) Block size counter ETCR restore (in block transfer mode) Notes: 1. In single address transfer mode, the update timing is the same as [1]. 2. The MAR operation is post-incrementing/decrementing of the DMA internal address value. Figure 8.40 DMAC Register Update Timing Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 334 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Idle Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) (b) If a DMAC transfer cycle occurs immediately after a DMAC register read cycle, the DMAC register is read as shown in figure 8.41. DMA transfer cycle CPU longword read MAR upper word read MAR lower word read DMA read DMA write φ DMA internal address DMA control DMA register operation Idle [1] Transfe source Transfer destination Read Write Idle [2] Note: The lower word of MAR is the updated value after the operation in [1]. Figure 8.41 Contention between DMAC Register Update and CPU Read Module Stop: When the MSTPA7 bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, the DMAC clock stops, and the module stop state is entered. However, 1 cannot be written to the MSTPA7 bit if any of the DMAC channels is enabled. This setting should therefore be made when DMAC operation is stopped. When the DMAC clock stops, DMAC register accesses can no longer be made. Since the following DMAC register settings are valid even in the module stop state, they should be invalidated, if necessary, before a module stop. • Transfer end/suspend interrupt (DTE = 0 and DTIE = 1) • TEND pin enable (TEE = 1) • DACK pin enable (FAE = 0 and SAE = 1) Medium-Speed Mode: When the DTA bit is 0, internal interrupt signals specified as DMAC transfer sources are edge-detected. In medium-speed mode, the DMAC operates on a medium-speed clock, while on-chip supporting modules operate on a high-speed clock. Consequently, if the period in which the relevant interrupt source is cleared by the CPU, DTC, or another DMAC channel, and the next interrupt is generated, is less than one state with respect to the DMAC clock (bus master clock), edge detection may not be possible and the interrupt may be ignored. Also, in medium-speed mode, DREQ pin sampling is performed on the rising edge of the mediumspeed clock. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 335 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Write Data Buffer Function: When the WDBE bit of BCRL in the bus controller is set to 1, enabling the write data buffer function, dual address transfer external write cycles or single address transfers and internal accesses (on-chip memory or internal I/O registers) are executed in parallel. (a) Write Data Buffer Function and DMAC Register Setting If the setting of is changed during execution of an external access by means of the write data buffer function, the external access may not be performed normally. The register that controls external accesses should only be manipulated when external reads, etc., are used with DMAC operation disabled, and the operation is not performed in parallel with external access. (b) Write Data Buffer Function and DMAC Operation Timing The DMAC can start its next operation during external access using the write data buffer function. Consequently, the DREQ pin sampling timing, TEND output timing, etc., are different from the case in which the write data buffer function is disabled. Also, internal bus cycles maybe hidden, and not visible. (c) Write Data Buffer Function and TEND Output A low level is not output from the TEND pin if the bus cycle in which a low level is to be output from the TEND pin is an internal bus cycle, and an external write cycle is executed in parallel with this cycle. Note, for example, that a low level may not be output from the TEND pin if the write data buffer function is used when data transfer is performed between an internal I/O register and on-chip memory. If at least one of the DMAC transfer addresses is an external address, a low level is output from the TEND pin. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 336 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Figure 8.42 shows an example in which a low level is not output at the TEND pin. DMA read DMA write φ Internal address Internal read signal Internal write signal External address HWR, LWR TEND Not output External write by CPU, etc. Figure 8.42 Example in Which Low Level is Not Output at TEND Pin Activation by Falling Edge on DREQ Pin: DREQ pin falling edge detection is performed in synchronization with DMAC internal operations. The operation is as follows: [1] Activation request wait state: Waits for detection of a low level on the DREQ pin, and switches to [2]. [2] Transfer wait state: Waits for DMAC data transfer to become possible, and switches to [3]. [3] Activation request disabled state: Waits for detection of a high level on the DREQ pin, and switches to [1]. After DMAC transfer is enabled, a transition is made to [1]. Thus, initial activation after transfer is enabled is performed by detection of a low level. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 337 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 8 DMA Controller (DMAC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Activation Source Acceptance: At the start of activation source acceptance, a low level is detected in both DREQ pin falling edge sensing and low level sensing. Similarly, in the case of an internal interrupt, the interrupt request is detected. Therefore, a request is accepted from an internal interrupt or DREQ pin low level that occurs before execution of the DMABCRL write to enable transfer. When the DMAC is activated, take any necessary steps to prevent an internal interrupt or DREQ pin low level remaining from the end of the previous transfer, etc. Internal Interrupt after End of Transfer: When the DTE bit is cleared to 0 by the end of transfer or an abort, the selected internal interrupt request will be sent to the CPU or DTC even if DTA is set to 1. Also, if internal DMAC activation has already been initiated when operation is aborted, the transfer is executed but flag clearing is not performed for the selected internal interrupt even if DTA is set to 1. An internal interrupt request following the end of transfer or an abort should be handled by the CPU as necessary. Channel Re-Setting: To reactivate a number of channels when multiple channels are enabled, use exclusive handling of transfer end interrupts, and perform DMABCR control bit operations exclusively. Note, in particular, that in cases where multiple interrupts are generated between reading and writing of DMABCR, and a DMABCR operation is performed during new interrupt handling, the DMABCR write data in the original interrupt handling routine will be incorrect, and the write may invalidate the results of the operations by the multiple interrupts. Ensure that overlapping DMABCR operations are not performed by multiple interrupts, and that there is no separation between read and write operations by the use of a bit-manipulation instruction. Also, when the DTE and DTME bits are cleared by the DMAC or are written with 0, they must first be read while cleared to 0 before the CPU can write a 1 to them. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 338 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.1 Overview The H8S/2633 Group includes a data transfer controller (DTC). The DTC can be activated by an interrupt or software, to transfer data. 9.1.1 Features The features of the DTC are: • Transfer possible over any number of channels Transfer information is stored in memory One activation source can trigger a number of data transfers (chain transfer) • Wide range of transfer modes Normal, repeat, and block transfer modes available Incrementing, decrementing, and fixing of source and destination addresses can be selected • Direct specification of 16-Mbyte address space possible 24-bit transfer source and destination addresses can be specified • Transfer can be set in byte or word units • A CPU interrupt can be requested for the interrupt that activated the DTC An interrupt request can be issued to the CPU after one data transfer ends An interrupt request can be issued to the CPU after the specified data transfers have completely ended • Activation by software is possible • Module stop mode can be set The initial setting enables DTC registers to be accessed. DTC operation is halted by setting module stop mode Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 339 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 9.1 shows a block diagram of the DTC. The DTC’s register information is stored in the on-chip RAM*. A 32-bit bus connects the DTC to the on-chip RAM (1 kbyte), enabling 32-bit/1-state reading and writing of the DTC register information. Note: * When the DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR must be set to 1. Internal address bus On-chip RAM CPU interrupt request Register information MRA MRB CRA CRB DAR SAR DTC Control logic DTC service request DTVECR Interrupt request DTCERA to DTCERF, DTCERI Interrupt controller Internal data bus Legend: MRA, MRB: DTC mode registers A and B CRA, CRB: DTC transfer count registers A and B SAR: DTC source address register DAR: DTC destination address register DTCERA to DTCERF, DTCERI: DTC enable registers A to F and I DTVECR: DTC vector register Figure 9.1 Block Diagram of DTC Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 340 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.1.3 Register Configuration Table 9.1 summarizes the DTC registers. Table 9.1 DTC Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address*1 DTC mode register A MRA Undefined DTC mode register B MRB —*2 —*2 —*3 —*3 SAR —*2 Undefined DTC destination address register DAR — *2 Undefined DTC transfer count register A CRA Undefined DTC transfer count register B CRB —*2 —*2 Undefined —*3 —*3 DTC enable registers DTCER R/W H'00 H'FE16 to H'FE1E DTC vector register DTVECR R/W H'00 H'FE1F Module stop control register MSTPCRA R/W H'3F H'FDE8 DTC source address register Undefined —*3 —*3 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Registers within the DTC cannot be read or written to directly. 3. Register information is located in on-chip RAM addresses H'EBC0 to H'EFBF. It cannot be located in external memory space. When the DTC is used, do not clear the RAME bit in SYSCR to 0. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 341 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.2 Register Descriptions 9.2.1 DTC Mode Register A (MRA) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SM1 SM0 DM1 DM0 MD1 MD0 DTS Sz Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — MRA is an 8-bit register that controls the DTC operating mode. Bits 7 and 6—Source Address Mode 1 and 0 (SM1, SM0): These bits specify whether SAR is to be incremented, decremented, or left fixed after a data transfer. Bit 7 Bit 6 SM1 SM0 Description 0 — SAR is fixed 1 0 SAR is incremented after a transfer (by +1 when Sz = 0; by +2 when Sz = 1) 1 SAR is decremented after a transfer (by –1 when Sz = 0; by –2 when Sz = 1) Bits 5 and 4—Destination Address Mode 1 and 0 (DM1, DM0): These bits specify whether DAR is to be incremented, decremented, or left fixed after a data transfer. Bit 5 Bit 4 DM1 DM0 Description 0 — DAR is fixed 1 0 DAR is incremented after a transfer (by +1 when Sz = 0; by +2 when Sz = 1) 1 DAR is decremented after a transfer (by –1 when Sz = 0; by –2 when Sz = 1) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 342 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bits 3 and 2—DTC Mode (MD1, MD0): These bits specify the DTC transfer mode. Bit 3 Bit 2 MD1 MD0 Description 0 0 Normal mode 1 Repeat mode 0 Block transfer mode 1 — 1 Bit 1—DTC Transfer Mode Select (DTS): Specifies whether the source side or the destination side is set to be a repeat area or block area, in repeat mode or block transfer mode. Bit 1 DTS Description 0 Destination side is repeat area or block area 1 Source side is repeat area or block area Bit 0—DTC Data Transfer Size (Sz): Specifies the size of data to be transferred. Bit 0 Sz Description 0 Byte-size transfer 1 Word-size transfer 9.2.2 Bit DTC Mode Register B (MRB) : Initial value: R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CHNE DISEL — — — — — — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — Undefined — MRB is an 8-bit register that controls the DTC operating mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 343 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 7—DTC Chain Transfer Enable (CHNE): Specifies chain transfer. With chain transfer, a number of data transfers can be performed consecutively in response to a single transfer request. In data transfer with CHNE set to 1, determination of the end of the specified number of transfers, clearing of the interrupt source flag, and clearing of DTCER is not performed. Bit 7 CHNE Description 0 End of DTC data transfer (activation waiting state is entered) 1 DTC chain transfer (new register information is read, then data is transferred) Bit 6—DTC Interrupt Select (DISEL): Specifies whether interrupt requests to the CPU are disabled or enabled after a data transfer. Bit 6 DISEL Description 0 After a data transfer ends, the CPU interrupt is disabled unless the transfer counter is 0 (the DTC clears the interrupt source flag of the activating interrupt to 0) 1 After a data transfer ends, the CPU interrupt is enabled (the DTC does not clear the interrupt source flag of the activating interrupt to 0) Bits 5 to 0—Reserved: These bits have no effect on DTC operation in the H8S/2633 Group, and should always be written with 0. 9.2.3 Bit DTC Source Address Register (SAR) : Initial value: R/W : 23 22 21 20 19 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined — — — — — 4 3 2 1 0 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined — — — — — SAR is a 24-bit register that designates the source address of data to be transferred by the DTC. For word-size transfer, specify an even source address. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 344 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.2.4 DTC Destination Address Register (DAR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 23 22 21 20 19 4 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined — — — — — 3 2 1 0 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined — — — — — DAR is a 24-bit register that designates the destination address of data to be transferred by the DTC. For word-size transfer, specify an even destination address. 9.2.5 Bit DTC Transfer Count Register A (CRA) : Initial value: R/W : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — CRAH CRAL CRA is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC. In normal mode, the entire CRA functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65,536). It is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. In repeat mode or block transfer mode, the CRA is divided into two parts: the upper 8 bits (CRAH) and the lower 8 bits (CRAL). CRAH holds the number of transfers while CRAL functions as an 8-bit transfer counter (1 to 256). CRAL is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and the contents of CRAH are sent when the count reaches H'00. This operation is repeated. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 345 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.2.6 Bit DTC Transfer Count Register B (CRB) 15 : 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Unde- Undefined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined fined — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Initial value: R/W 14 : CRB is a 16-bit register that designates the number of times data is to be transferred by the DTC in block transfer mode. It functions as a 16-bit transfer counter (1 to 65,536) that is decremented by 1 every time data is transferred, and transfer ends when the count reaches H'0000. 9.2.7 Bit DTC Enable Registers (DTCER) : Initial value: R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DTCE7 DTCE6 DTCE5 DTCE4 DTCE3 DTCE2 DTCE1 DTCE0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The DTC enable registers comprise seven 8-bit readable/writable registers, DTCERA to DTCERF and DTCERI, with bits corresponding to the interrupt sources that can control enabling and disabling of DTC activation. These bits enable or disable DTC service for the corresponding interrupt sources. The DTC enable registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit n—DTC Activation Enable (DTCEn) Bit n DTCEn Description 0 DTC activation by this interrupt is disabled (Initial value) [Clearing conditions] 1 • When the DISEL bit is 1 and the data transfer has ended • When the specified number of transfers have ended DTC activation by this interrupt is enabled [Holding condition] When the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended (n = 7 to 0) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 346 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) A DTCE bit can be set for each interrupt source that can activate the DTC. The correspondence between interrupt sources and DTCE bits is shown in table 9.4, together with the vector number generated for each interrupt controller. For DTCE bit setting, use bit manipulation instructions such as BSET and BCLR for reading and writing. If all interrupts are masked, multiple activation sources can be set at one time by writing data after executing a dummy read on the relevant register. 9.2.8 Bit DTC Vector Register (DTVECR) : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SWDTE DTVEC6 DTVEC5 DTVEC4 DTVEC3 DTVEC2 DTVEC1 DTVEC0 Initial value: R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/(W)*1 R/W*2 R/W*2 R/W*2 R/W*2 R/W*2 R/W*2 R/W*2 Notes: 1. Only 1 can be written to the SWDTE bit. 2. Bits DTVEC6 to DTVEC0 can be written to when SWDTE = 0. DTVECR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables DTC activation by software, and sets a vector number for the software activation interrupt. DTVECR is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Bit 7—DTC Software Activation Enable (SWDTE): Enables or disables DTC activation by software. Bit 7 SWDTE Description 0 DTC software activation is disabled (Initial value) [Clearing conditions] 1 • When the DISEL bit is 0 and the specified number of transfers have not ended • When 0 s written to the DISEL bit after a software-activated data transfer end interrupt (SWDTEND) request has been sent to the CPU DTC software activation is enabled [Holding conditions] • When the DISEL bit is 1 and data transfer has ended • When the specified number of transfers have ended • During data transfer due to software activation Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 347 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bits 6 to 0—DTC Software Activation Vectors 6 to 0 (DTVEC6 to DTVEC0): These bits specify a vector number for DTC software activation. The vector address is expressed as H'0400 + ((vector number) << 1). <<1 indicates a one-bit leftshift. For example, when DTVEC6 to DTVEC0 = H'10, the vector address is H'0420. 9.2.9 Bit Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTPA7 MSTPA6 MSTPA5 MSTPA4 MSTPA3 MSTPA2 MSTPA1 MSTPA0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCRA is a 8-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control. When the MSTPA6 bit in MSTPCRA is set to 1, the DTC operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. However, 1 cannot be written in the MSTPA6 bit while the DTC is operating. For details, see section 24.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCRA is initialized to H'3F by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in manual reset and software standby mode. Bit 6—Module Stop (MSTPA6): Specifies the DTC module stop mode. Bit 6 MSTPA6 Description 0 DTC module stop mode cleared 1 DTC module stop mode set Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 348 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.3 Operation 9.3.1 Overview When activated, the DTC reads register information that is already stored in memory and transfers data on the basis of that register information. After the data transfer, it writes updated register information back to memory. Pre-storage of register information in memory makes it possible to transfer data over any required number of channels. Setting the CHNE bit to 1 makes it possible to perform a number of transfers with a single activation. Figure 9.2 shows a flowchart of DTC operation. Start Read DTC vector Next transfer Read register information Data transfer Write register information CHNE=1 Yes No Transfer Counter= 0 or DISEL= 1 Yes No Clear an activation flag Clear DTCER End Interrupt exception handling Figure 9.2 Flowchart of DTC Operation Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 349 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) The DTC transfer mode can be normal mode, repeat mode, or block transfer mode. The 24-bit SAR designates the DTC transfer source address and the 24-bit DAR designates the transfer destination address. After each transfer, SAR and DAR are independently incremented, decremented, or left fixed. Table 9.2 outlines the functions of the DTC. Table 9.2 DTC Functions Address Registers Transfer Mode Activation Source Transfer Source Transfer Destination • Normal mode • IRQ 24 bits 24 bits One transfer request transfers one byte or one word • TPU TGI • 8-bit timer CMI Memory addresses are incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 • SCI TXI or RXI • A/D converter ADI Up to 65,536 transfers possible • DMAC DEND • Software • Repeat mode One transfer request transfers one byte or one word Memory addresses are incremented or decremented by 1 or 2 After the specified number of transfers (1 to 256), the initial state resumes and operation continues • Block transfer mode One transfer request transfers a block of the specified size Block size is from 1 to 256 bytes or words Up to 65,536 transfers possible A block area can be designated at either the source or destination Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 350 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.3.2 Activation Sources The DTC operates when activated by an interrupt or by a write to DTVECR by software. An interrupt request can be directed to the CPU or DTC, as designated by the corresponding DTCER bit. An interrupt becomes a DTC activation source when the corresponding bit is set to 1, and a CPU interrupt source when the bit is cleared to 0. At the end of a data transfer (or the last consecutive transfer in the case of chain transfer), the activation source or corresponding DTCER bit is cleared. Table 9.3 shows activation source and DTCER clearance. The activation source flag, in the case of RXI0, for example, is the RDRF flag of SCI0. Table 9.3 Activation Source and DTCER Clearance When the DISEL Bit Is 0 and the Specified Number of Activation Source Transfers Have Not Ended When the DISEL Bit Is 1, or when the Specified Number of Transfers Have Ended Software activation The SWDTE bit is cleared to 0 The SWDTE bit remains set to 1 An interrupt is issued to the CPU Interrupt activation The corresponding DTCER bit remains set to 1 The activation source flag is cleared to 0 The corresponding DTCER bit is cleared to 0 The activation source flag remains set to 1 A request is issued to the CPU for the activation source interrupt Figure 9.3 shows a block diagram of activation source control. For details see section 5, Interrupt Controller. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 351 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Source flag cleared Clear controller Clear DTCER Clear request On-chip supporting module IRQ interrupt Interrupt request Selection circuit Select DTVECR DTC Interrupt controller CPU Interrupt mask Figure 9.3 Block Diagram of DTC Activation Source Control When an interrupt has been designated a DTC activation source, existing CPU mask level and interrupt controller priorities have no effect. If there is more than one activation source at the same time, the DTC operates in accordance with the default priorities. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 352 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.3.3 DTC Vector Table Figure 9.4 shows the correspondence between DTC vector addresses and register information. Table 9.4 shows the correspondence between activation and vector addresses. When the DTC is activated by software, the vector address is obtained from: H'0400 + (DTVECR[6:0] << 1) (where << 1 indicates a 1-bit left shift). For example, if DTVECR is H'10, the vector address is H'0420. The DTC reads the start address of the register information from the vector address set for each activation source, and then reads the register information from that start address. The register information can be placed at predetermined addresses in the on-chip RAM. The start address of the register information should be an integral multiple of four. The configuration of the vector address is the same in both normal* and advanced modes, a 2-byte unit being used in both cases. These two bytes specify the lower bits of the address in the on-chip RAM. Note: * Not available in the H8S/2633 Group. DTC vector address Register information start address Register information Chain transfer Figure 9.4 Correspondence between DTC Vector Address and Register Information Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 353 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Table 9.4 Interrupt Sources, DTC Vector Addresses, and Corresponding DTCEs Interrupt Source Origin of Interrupt Source Vector Number Vector Address Write to DTVECR Software DTVECR IRQ0 External pin DTCE* Priority H'0400+ (DTVECR [6:0] <<1) — High 16 H'0420 DTCEA7 IRQ1 17 H'0422 DTCEA6 IRQ2 18 H'0424 DTCEA5 IRQ3 19 H'0426 DTCEA4 IRQ4 20 H'0428 DTCEA3 IRQ5 21 H'042A DTCEA2 IRQ6 22 H'042C DTCEA1 IRQ7 23 H'042E DTCEA0 ADI (A/D conversion end) A/D 28 H'0438 DTCEB6 TGI0A (GR0A compare match/ input capture) TPU channel 0 32 H'0440 DTCEB5 TGI0B (GR0B compare match/ input capture) 33 H'0442 DTCEB4 TGI0C (GR0C compare match/ input capture) 34 H'0444 DTCEB3 TGI0D (GR0D compare match/ input capture) 35 H'0446 DTCEB2 40 H'0450 DTCEB1 41 H'0452 DTCEB0 44 H'0458 DTCEC7 45 H'045A DTCEC6 TGI1A (GR1A compare match/ input capture) TPU channel 1 TGI1B (GR1B compare match/ input capture) TGI2A (GR2A compare match/ input capture) TPU channel 2 TGI2B (GR2B compare match/ input capture) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 354 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Low Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Interrupt Source Origin of Interrupt Source TGI3A (GR3A compare match/ input capture) TPU channel 3 Vector Number Vector Address DTCE* Priority 48 H'0460 DTCEC5 High TGI3B (GR3B compare match/ input capture) 49 H'0462 DTCEC4 TGI3C (GR3C compare match/ input capture) 50 H'0464 DTCEC3 TGI3D (GR3D compare match/ input capture) 51 H'0466 DTCEC2 56 H'0470 DTCEC1 57 H'0472 DTCEC0 60 H'0478 DTCED5 61 H'047A DTCED4 TGI4A (GR4A compare match/ input capture) TPU channel 4 TGI4B (GR4B compare match/ input capture) TGI5A (GR5A compare match/ input capture) TPU channel 5 TGI5B (GR5B compare match/ input capture) CMIA0 (compare match A0) 8-bit timer channel 0 64 H'0480 DTCED3 65 H'0482 DTCED2 8-bit timer channel 1 68 H'0488 DTCED1 69 H'048A DTCED0 DMAC 72 H'0490 DTCEE7 DEND0B (channel 0B transfer end) 73 H'0492 DTCEE6 DEND1A (channel 1/channel 1A transfer end) 74 H'0494 DTCEE5 DEND1B (channel 1B transfer end) 75 H'0496 DTCEE4 RXI0 (reception complete 0) SCI channel 0 81 H'04A2 DTCEE3 TXI0 (transmit data empty 0) 82 H'04A4 DTCEE2 RXI1 (reception complete 1) SCI channel 1 85 H'04AA DTCEE1 TXI1 (transmit data empty 1) 86 H'04AC DTCEE0 RXI2 (reception complete 2) SCI channel 2 89 H'04B2 DTCEF7 TXI2 (transmit data empty 2) 90 H'04B4 DTCEF6 CMIB0 (compare match B0) CMIA1 (compare match A1) CMIB1 (compare match B1) DEND0A (channel 0/channel 0A transfer end) Low Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 355 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Interrupt Source CMIA2 (compare match A2) CMIB2 (compare match B2) Origin of Interrupt Source 8-bit timer channel 2 Vector Number Vector Address DTCE* Priority 92 H'04B8 DTCEF5 High 93 H'04BA DTCEF4 96 H'04C0 DTCEF3 97 H'04C2 DTCEF2 CMIB3 (compare match B3) 8-bit timer channel 3 IICI0 (1-byte transmit/reception complete) IIC channel 0 (option) 100 H'04C8 DTCEF1 IICI1 (1-byte transmit/reception complete) IIC channel 1 (option) 102 H'04CC DTCEF0 RXI3 (reception complete 3) SCI channel 3 121 H'04F2 DTCEI7 CMIA3 (compare match A3) TXI3 (transmit data empty 3) 122 H'04F4 DTCEI6 RXI4 (reception complete 4) SCI channel 4 125 H'04FA DTCEI5 TXI4 (transmit data empty 4) 126 H'04FC DTCEI4 Low Note: * DTCE bits with no corresponding interrupt are reserved, and should be written with 0. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 356 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.3.4 Location of Register Information in Address Space Figure 9.5 shows how the register information should be located in the address space. Locate the MRA, SAR, MRB, DAR, CRA, and CRB registers, in that order, from the start address of the register information (contents of the vector address). In the case of chain transfer, register information should be located in consecutive areas. Locate the register information in the on-chip RAM (addresses: H'FFEBC0 to H'FFEFBF). Lower address Register information start address Chain transfer 0 1 2 3 MRA SAR MRB DAR CRA Register information CRB MRA SAR MRB DAR CRA Register information for 2nd transfer in chain transfer CRB 4 bytes Figure 9.5 Location of Register Information in Address Space Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 357 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.3.5 Normal Mode In normal mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data. From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, a CPU interrupt can be requested. Table 9.5 lists the register information in normal mode and figure 9.6 shows memory mapping in normal mode. Table 9.5 Register Information in Normal Mode Name Abbreviation Function DTC source address register SAR Designates source address DTC destination address register DAR Designates destination address DTC transfer count register A CRA Designates transfer count DTC transfer count register B CRB Not used SAR DAR Transfer Figure 9.6 Memory Mapping in Normal Mode Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 358 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.3.6 Repeat Mode In repeat mode, one operation transfers one byte or one word of data. From 1 to 256 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, the initial state of the transfer counter and the address register specified as the repeat area is restored, and transfer is repeated. In repeat mode the transfer counter value does not reach H'00, and therefore CPU interrupts cannot be requested when DISEL = 0. Table 9.6 lists the register information in repeat mode and figure 9.7 shows memory mapping in repeat mode. Table 9.6 Register Information in Repeat Mode Name Abbreviation Function DTC source address register SAR Designates source address DTC destination address register DAR Designates destination address DTC transfer count register AH CRAH Holds number of transfers DTC transfer count register AL CRAL Designates transfer count DTC transfer count register B CRB Not used SAR or DAR DAR or SAR Repeat area Transfer Figure 9.7 Memory Mapping in Repeat Mode Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 359 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.3.7 Block Transfer Mode In block transfer mode, one operation transfers one block of data. Either the transfer source or the transfer destination is designated as a block area. The block size is 1 to 256. When the transfer of one block ends, the initial state of the block size counter and the address register specified as the block area is restored. The other address register is then incremented, decremented, or left fixed. From 1 to 65,536 transfers can be specified. Once the specified number of transfers have ended, a CPU interrupt is requested. Table 9.7 lists the register information in block transfer mode and figure 9.8 shows memory mapping in block transfer mode. Table 9.7 Register Information in Block Transfer Mode Name Abbreviation Function DTC source address register SAR Designates source address DTC destination address register DAR Designates destination address DTC transfer count register AH CRAH Holds block size DTC transfer count register AL CRAL Designates block size count DTC transfer count register B CRB Transfer count Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 360 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) First block SAR or DAR · · · Block area DAR or SAR Transfer Nth block Figure 9.8 Memory Mapping in Block Transfer Mode Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 361 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.3.8 Chain Transfer Setting the CHNE bit to 1 enables a number of data transfers to be performed consectutively in response to a single transfer request. SAR, DAR, CRA, CRB, MRA, and MRB, which define data transfers, can be set independently. Figure 9.9 shows the memory map for chain transfer. Source Destination Register information CHNE = 1 DTC vector address Register information start address Register information CHNE = 0 Source Destination Figure 9.9 Chain Transfer Memory Map In the case of transfer with CHNE set to 1, an interrupt request to the CPU is not generated at the end of the specified number of transfers or by setting of the DISEL bit to 1, and the interrupt source flag for the activation source is not affected. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 362 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.3.9 Operation Timing Figures 9.10 to 9.12 show an example of DTC operation timing. φ DTC activation request DTC request Data transfer Vector read Address Read Write Transfer information read Transfer information write Figure 9.10 DTC Operation Timing (Example in Normal Mode or Repeat Mode) φ DTC activation request DTC request Data transfer Vector read Address Read Write Read Write Transfer information read Transfer information write Figure 9.11 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Block Transfer Mode, with Block Size of 2) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 363 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) φ DTC activation request DTC request Data transfer Data transfer Read Write Read Write Vector read Address Transfer information read Transfer Transfer information information write read Transfer information write Figure 9.12 DTC Operation Timing (Example of Chain Transfer) 9.3.10 Number of DTC Execution States Table 9.8 lists execution statuses for a single DTC data transfer, and table 9.9 shows the number of states required for each execution status. Table 9.8 DTC Execution Statuses Mode Vector Read I Register Information Read/Write Data Read J K Data Write L Internal Operations M Normal 1 6 1 1 3 Repeat 1 6 1 1 3 Block transfer 1 6 N N 3 N: Block size (initial setting of CRAH and CRAL) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 364 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Table 9.9 Number of States Required for Each Execution Status Object to be Accessed Bus width Access states OnChip RAM OnChip ROM 32 16 On-Chip I/O Registers 8 External Devices 16 8 16 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 3 SI — 1 — — 4 6+2m 2 3+m SJ 1 — — — — — — — Byte data read SK 1 1 2 2 2 3+m 2 3+m Word data read SK 1 1 4 2 4 6+2m 2 3+m Byte data write SL 1 1 2 2 2 3+m 2 3+m Word data write SL 1 1 4 2 4 6+2m 2 3+m Internal operation SM Execution Vector read status Register information read/write 1 The number of execution states is calculated from the formula below. Note that Σ means the sum of all transfers activated by one activation event (the number in which the CHNE bit is set to 1, plus 1). Number of execution states = I · SI + Σ (J · SJ + K · SK + L · SL) + M · SM For example, when the DTC vector address table is located in on-chip ROM, normal mode is set, and data is transferred from the on-chip ROM to an internal I/O register, the time required for the DTC operation is 13 states. The time from activation to the end of the data write is 10 states. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 365 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.3.11 Procedures for Using DTC Activation by Interrupt: The procedure for using the DTC with interrupt activation is as follows: [1] Set the MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB register information in the on-chip RAM. [2] Set the start address of the register information in the DTC vector address. [3] Set the corresponding bit in DTCER to 1. [4] Set the enable bits for the interrupt sources to be used as the activation sources to 1. The DTC is activated when an interrupt used as an activation source is generated. [5] After the end of one data transfer, or after the specified number of data transfers have ended, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0 and a CPU interrupt is requested. If the DTC is to continue transferring data, set the DTCE bit to 1. Activation by Software: The procedure for using the DTC with software activation is as follows: [1] Set the MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB register information in the on-chip RAM. [2] Set the start address of the register information in the DTC vector address. [3] Check that the SWDTE bit is 0. [4] Write 1 to SWDTE bit and the vector number to DTVECR. [5] Check the vector number written to DTVECR. [6] After the end of one data transfer, if the DISEL bit is 0 and a CPU interrupt is not requested, the SWDTE bit is cleared to 0. If the DTC is to continue transferring data, set the SWDTE bit to 1. When the DISEL bit is 1, or after the specified number of data transfers have ended, the SWDTE bit is held at 1 and a CPU interrupt is requested. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 366 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.3.12 Examples of Use of the DTC (1) Normal Mode An example is shown in which the DTC is used to receive 128 bytes of data via the SCI. [1] Set MRA to fixed source address (SM1 = SM0 = 0), incrementing destination address (DM1 = 1, DM0 = 0), normal mode (MD1 = MD0 = 0), and byte size (Sz = 0). The DTS bit can have any value. Set MRB for one data transfer by one interrupt (CHNE = 0, DISEL = 0). Set the SCI RDR address in SAR, the start address of the RAM area where the data will be received in DAR, and 128 (H'0080) in CRA. CRB can be set to any value. [2] Set the start address of the register information at the DTC vector address. [3] Set the corresponding bit in DTCER to 1. [4] Set the SCI to the appropriate receive mode. Set the RIE bit in SCR to 1 to enable the reception complete (RXI) interrupt. Since the generation of a receive error during the SCI reception operation will disable subsequent reception, the CPU should be enabled to accept receive error interrupts. [5] Each time reception of one byte of data ends on the SCI, the RDRF flag in SSR is set to 1, an RXI interrupt is generated, and the DTC is activated. The receive data is transferred from RDR to RAM by the DTC. DAR is incremented and CRA is decremented. The RDRF flag is automatically cleared to 0. [6] When CRA becomes 0 after the 128 data transfers have ended, the RDRF flag is held at 1, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0, and an RXI interrupt request is sent to the CPU. The interrupt handling routine should perform wrap-up processing. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 367 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) (2) Chain Transfer An example of DTC chain transfer is shown in which pulse output is performed using the PPG. Chain transfer can be used to perform pulse output data transfer and PPG output trigger cycle updating. Repeat mode transfer to the PPG’s NDR is performed in the first half of the chain transfer, and normal mode transfer to the TPU’s TGR in the second half. This is because clearing of the activation source and interrupt generation at the end of the specified number of transfers are restricted to the second half of the chain transfer (transfer when CHNE = 0). [1] Perform settings for transfer to the PPG’s NDR. Set MRA to source address incrementing (SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), fixed destination address (DM1 = DM0 = 0), repeat mode (MD1 = 0, MD0 = 1), and word size (Sz = 1). Set the source side as a repeat area (DTS = 1). Set MRB to chain mode (CHNE = 1, DISEL = 0). Set the data table start address in SAR, the NDRH address in DAR, and the data table size in CRAH and CRAL. CRB can be set to any value. [2] Perform settings for transfer to the TPU’s TGR. Set MRA to source address incrementing (SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), fixed destination address (DM1 = DM0 = 0), normal mode (MD1 = MD0 = 0), and word size (Sz = 1). Set the data table start address in SAR, the TGRA address in DAR, and the data table size in CRA. CRB can be set to any value. [3] Locate the TPU transfer register information consecutively after the NDR transfer register information. [4] Set the start address of the NDR transfer register information to the DTC vector address. [5] Set the bit corresponding to TGIA in DTCER to 1. [6] Set TGRA as an output compare register (output disabled) with TIOR, and enable the TGIA interrupt with TIER. [7] Set the initial output value in PODR, and the next output value in NDR. Set bits in DDR and NDER for which output is to be performed to 1. Using PCR, select the TPU compare match to be used as the output trigger. [8] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1, and start the TCNT count operation. [9] Each time a TGRA compare match occurs, the next output value is transferred to NDR and the set value of the next output trigger period is transferred to TGRA. The activation source TGFA flag is cleared. [10]When the specified number of transfers are completed (the TPU transfer CRA value is 0), the TGFA flag is held at 1, the DTCE bit is cleared to 0, and a TGIA interrupt request is sent to the CPU. Termination processing should be performed in the interrupt handling routine. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 368 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) (3) Software Activation An example is shown in which the DTC is used to transfer a block of 128 bytes of data by means of software activation. The transfer source address is H'1000 and the destination address is H'2000. The vector number is H'60, so the vector address is H'04C0. [1] Set MRA to incrementing source address (SM1 = 1, SM0 = 0), incrementing destination address (DM1 = 1, DM0 = 0), block transfer mode (MD1 = 1, MD0 = 0), and byte size (Sz = 0). The DTS bit can have any value. Set MRB for one block transfer by one interrupt (CHNE = 0). Set the transfer source address (H'1000) in SAR, the destination address (H'2000) in DAR, and 128 (H'8080) in CRA. Set 1 (H'0001) in CRB. [2] Set the start address of the register information at the DTC vector address (H'04C0). [3] Check that the SWDTE bit in DTVECR is 0. Check that there is currently no transfer activated by software. [4] Write 1 to the SWDTE bit and the vector number (H'60) to DTVECR. The write data is H'E0. [5] Read DTVECR again and check that it is set to the vector number (H'60). If it is not, this indicates that the write failed. This is presumably because an interrupt occurred between steps 3 and 4 and led to a different software activation. To activate this transfer, go back to step 3. [6] If the write was successful, the DTC is activated and a block of 128 bytes of data is transferred. [7] After the transfer, an SWDTEND interrupt occurs. The interrupt handling routine should clear the SWDTE bit to 0 and perform other wrap-up processing. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 369 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 9 Data Transfer Controller (DTC) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 9.4 Interrupts An interrupt request is issued to the CPU when the DTC finishes the specified number of data transfers, or a data transfer for which the DISEL bit was set to 1. In the case of interrupt activation, the interrupt set as the activation source is generated. These interrupts to the CPU are subject to CPU mask level and interrupt controller priority level control. In the case of activation by software, a software activated data transfer end interrupt (SWDTEND) is generated. When the DISEL bit is 1 and one data transfer has ended, or the specified number of transfers have ended, after data transfer ends, the SWDTE bit is held at 1 and an SWDTEND interrupt is generated. The interrupt handling routine should clear the SWDTE bit to 0. When the DTC is activated by software, an SWDTEND interrupt is not generated during a data transfer wait or during data transfer even if the SWDTE bit is set to 1. 9.5 Usage Notes Module Stop: When the MSTPA6 bit in MSTPCRA is set to 1, the DTC clock stops, and the DTC enters the module stop state. However, 1 cannot be written in the MSTPA6 bit while the DTC is operating. On-Chip RAM: The MRA, MRB, SAR, DAR, CRA, and CRB registers are all located in on-chip RAM. When the DTC is used, the RAME bit in SYSCR must not be cleared to 0. DMAC Transfer End Interrupt: When the DTC is activated with a DMAC transfer end interrupt, the DMAC's DTE bit is not controlled by the DTC regardless of the transfer counter and DISEL bit, and write data takes precedence. For this reason, there may be no interrupt generated by the CPU even if the DTC transfer counter is cleared to 0. DTCE Bit Setting: For DTCE bit setting, use bit manipulation instructions such as BSET and BCLR. If all interrupts are masked, multiple activation sources can be set at one time by writing data after executing a dummy read on the relevant register. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 370 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.1 Overview The H8S/2633 Group has 10 I/O ports (ports 1, 3, 7 and A to G), and two input-only port (ports 4 and 9). Table 10A.1 summarizes the port functions. The pins of each port also have other functions. Each I/O port includes a data direction register (DDR) that controls input/output, a data register (DR) that stores output data, and a port register (PORT) used to read the pin states. The input-only ports do not have a DR or DDR register. Ports A to E have a built-in pull-up MOS function, and in addition to DR and DDR, have a MOS input pull-up control register (PCR) to control the on/off state of MOS input pull-up. Ports 3, and A to C include an open-drain control register (ODR) that controls the on/off state of the output buffer PMOS. When ports 10 to 13, 70 to 73, and A to G are used as the output pins for expanded bus control signals, they can drive one TTL load plus a 50pF capacitance load. Those ports in other cases, and ports 14 to 17, 3, and 74 to 77, can drive one TTL load and a 30pF capacitance load. All I/O ports can drive Darlington transistors when set to output. See appendix C, I/O Port Block Diagrams, for a block diagram of each port. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 371 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Table 10A.1 Port Functions Port Description Port 1 • 8-bit I/O port • Schmitttriggered input (P16, P14) Pins P17/PO15/TIOCB2/ PWM3/TCLKD P16/PO14/TIOCA2/ PWM2/IRQ1 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/ TCLKC P14/PO12/TIOCA1/ Mode 4 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/ TCLKB/A23 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/ TCLKA/A22 P11/PO9/TIOCB0/ DACK1/A21 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/ /A20 DACK0 P37 /TxD4 P36/RxD4 • Open-drain P35/SCK1/SCK4/ output SCL0/IRQ5 capability P34 /RxD1/SDA0 • SchmittP33 /TxD1/SCL1 triggered input (P35, P32) Mode 6 8-bit I/O port also functioning as DMA controller output pins (DACK0, DACK1), TPU I/O pins (TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD, TIOCA0, TIOCB0, TIOCC0, TIOCD0, TIOCA1, TIOCB1, TIOCA2, TIOCB2), PPG output pins (PO15 to PO8), interrupt input pins (IRQ0, IRQ1), 14-bit PWM output pins (PWM2, PWM3), and address outputs (A20 to A23) IRQ0 Port 3 • 8-bit I/O port Mode 5 Mode 7 8-bit I/O port also functioning as DMA controller output pins (DACK0, DACK1), TPU I/O pins (TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD, TIOCA0, TIOCB0, TIOCC0, TIOCD0, TIOCA1, TIOCB1, TIOCA2, TIOCB2), PPG output pins (PO15 to PO8), interrupt input pins (IRQ0, IRQ1), and 14-bit PWM output pins (PWM2, PWM3) 8-bit I/O port also functioning as SCI (channel 0, 1, and 4) I/O pins (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0, IrTxD, IrRxD, TxD1, RxD1, SCK1, TxD4, RxD4, SCK4), interrupt input pins (IRQ4, IRQ5), and IIC (channel 0 and 1) I/O pins (SCL0, SDA0, SCL1, SDA1) P32 /SCK0/SDA1/IRQ4 P31 /RxD0/IrRxD P30 /TxD0/IrTxD Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 372 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Port Description Port 4 • 8-bit input port Pins P47 /AN7/DA1 P46 /AN6/DA0 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 8-bit input port also functioning as A/D converter analog inputs (AN7 to AN0) and D/A converter analog outputs (DA1, DA0) P45 /AN5 P44 /AN4 P43 /AN3 P42 /AN2 P41 /AN1 P40/AN0 Port 7 • 8-bit I/O port P77/TxD3 P76/RxD3 P75/TMO3/SCK3 P74/TMO2/MRES P73/TMO1/TEND1/ CS7 P72/TMO0/TEND0/ CS6 P71/TMRI23/TMCI23/ DREQ1/ CS5 P70/TMRI01/TMCI01/ DREQ0/ CS4 Port 9 • 8-bit input port P97/AN15/DA3 P96/AN14/DA2 8-bit I/O port also functioning as 8-bit timer I/O pins (TMRI01, TMCI01, TMRI23, TMCI23, TMO0, TMO1, TMO2, TMO3), DMAC I/O pins (DREQ0, TEND0, DREQ1, TEND1), bus control output pins (CS4 to CS7), SCI I/O pins (SCK3, RxD3, TxD3), and the manual reset input pin (MRES) 8-bit I/O port also functioning as 8-bit timer I/O pins (TMRI01, TMCI01, TMRI23, TMCI23, TMO0, TMO1, TMO2, TMO3), DMAC I/O pins (DREQ0, TEND0, DREQ1, TEND1), SCI I/O pins (SCK3, RxD3, TxD3), and the manual reset input pin (MRES) 8-bit input port also functioning as A/D converter analog inputs (AN15 to AN8) and D/A converter analog outputs (DA3, DA2) P95/AN13 P94/AN12 P93/AN11 P92/AN10 P91/AN9 P90/AN8 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 373 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Port Description Port A • 4-bit I/O port • Built-in MOS input pull-up Pins PA3/A19/SCK2 PA2/A18/RxD2 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 4-bit I/O port also functioning as SCI (channel 2) I/O pins (TxD2, RxD2, SCK2) and address outputs (A19 to A16) 4-bit I/O port also functioning as SCI (channel 2) I/O pins (TxD2, RxD2, SCK2) 8-bit I/O port also functioning as TPU I/O pins (TIOCB5, TIOCA5, TIOCB4, TIOCA4, TIOCD3, TIOCC3, TIOCB3, TIIOCA3) and address outputs (A15 to A8) 8-bit I/O port also functioning as TPU I/O pins (TIOCB5, TIOCA5, TIOCB4, TIOCA4, TIOCD3, TIOCC3, TIOCB3, TIIOCA3) PA1/A17/TxD2 PA0/A16 • Open-drain output capability Port B • 8-bit I/O port • Built-in MOS input pull-up PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB4/A12/TIOCA4 • Open-drain PB3/A11/TIOCD3 output PB2/A10/TIOCC3 capability PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 Port C • 8-bit I/O port • Built-in MOS input pull-up PC7/A7/PWM1 PC6/A6/PWM0 PC5/A5 PC4/A4 • Open-drain PC3/A3 output PC2/A2 capability PC1/A1 8-bit I/O port also functioning as 14-bit PWM 8-bit I/O port (channel 1 and 0) output pins (PWM1, PWM0) also functionand address outputs (A7 to A0) ing as 14-bit PWM (channel 1 and 0) output pins (PWM1, PWM0) PC0 /A0 Port D • 8-bit I/O port • Built-in MOS input pull-up PD7 /D15 Data bus input/output PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PD0 /D8 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 374 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 I/O port Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Port Description Port E • 8-bit I/O port • Built-in MOS input pull-up Pins Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 PE7/D7 In 8-bit-bus mode: I/O port PE6/D6 In 16-bit-bus mode: data bus input/output Mode 7 I/O port PE5/D5 PE4/D4 PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0 /D0 Port F • 8-bit I/O port PF7/φ When DDR = 0: input port When DDR = 1 (after reset): φ output When DDR = 0 (after reset): input port When DDR = 1: φ output PF6 /AS/LCAS RD HWR PF5 /RD ADTRG PF4 /HWR When LCASS = 0: AS output PF3/LWR/ADTRG/ When RMTS2 to RMTS0 = B'001 to B'011, CW2 = 0, and LCASS = 1: LCAS output IRQ3 PF2/LCAS/WAIT/ BREQO , , LWR outputs , IRQ3 input When WAITE = 0 and BREQOE = 0 (after reset): I/O port I/O port , IRQ3 ADTRG input I/O port When WAITE = 1 and BREQOE = 0: WAIT input When WAITE = 0 and BREQOE = 1: BREQO input When RMTS2 to RMTS0 = B'001 to B'011, CW2 = 0, and LCASS = 0: LCAS output PF1/BACK/BUZZ When BRLE = 0 (after reset): I/O port BUZZ output PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 When BRLE = 1: BREQ input, BACK output IRQ2 BUZZ output, IRQ2 input I/O port input Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 375 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Port Description Port G • 5-bit I/O port Pins PG4 /CS0 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 When DDR = 0*1: input port Mode 7 I/O port When DDR = 1*2: CS0 output PG3 /CS1 When DDR = 0 (after reset): input port PG2 /CS2 When DDR = 1: CS1, CS2, CS3 outputs PG1 /CS3/ OE/IRQ7 OE PG0 /CAS/ IRQ6 DRAM space set: CAS output output, IRQ7 input Otherwise (after reset): I/O port IRQ6 Notes: 1. After a reset in mode 6 2. After a reset in modes 4 or 5 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 376 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 I/O port, IRQ7 input input I/O port, IRQ6 input Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.2 Port 1 10A.2.1 Overview Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 1 pins also function as PPG output pins (PO15 to PO8), TPU I/O pins (TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD, TIOCA0, TIOCB0, TIOCC0, TIOCD0, TIOCA1, TIOCB1, TIOCA2, and TIOCB2), DMAC output pins (DACK0 and DACK1), 14-bit PWM output pins (PWM2 and PWM3), external interrupt input pins (IRQ0 and IRQ1), and address bus output pins (A23 to A20). Port 1 pin functions change according to the operating mode. Figure 10A.1 shows the port 1 pin configuration. Port 1 pins Pin functions in modes 4 to 6 P17 (I/O) / PO15 (output) / TIOCB2 (I/O) / PWM3 (output) / TCLKD (input) P16 (I/O) / PO14 (output) / TIOCA2 (I/O) / PWM2 (output) / IRQ1 (input) P15 (I/O) / PO13 (output) / TIOCB1 (I/O) / TCLKC (input) Port 1 P14 (I/O) / PO12 (output) / TIOCA1 (I/O) / IRQ0 (input) P13 (I/O) / PO11 (output) / TIOCD0 (I/O) / TCLKB (input) / A23 (output) P12 (I/O) / PO10 (output) / TIOCC0 (I/O) / TCLKA (input) / A22 (output) P11 (I/O) / PO9 (output) / TIOCB0 (I/O) / DACK1 (output) / A21 (output) P10 (I/O) / PO8 (output) / TIOCA0 (I/O) / DACK0 (output) / A20 (output) Pin functions in mode 7 P17 (I/O) / PO15 (output) / TIOCB2 (I/O) / PWM3 (output) / TCLKD (input) P16 (I/O) / PO14 (output) / TIOCA2 (I/O) / PWM2 (output) / IRQ1 (input) P15 (I/O) / PO13 (output) / TIOCB1 (I/O) / TCLKC (input) P14 (I/O) / PO12 (output) / TIOCA1 (I/O) / IRQ0 (input) P13 (I/O) / PO11 (output) / TIOCD0 (I/O) / TCLKB (input) P12 (I/O) / PO10 (output) / TIOCC0 (I/O) / TCLKA (input) P11 (I/O) / PO9 (output) / TIOCB0 (I/O) / DACK1 (output) P10 (I/O) / PO8 (output) / TIOCA0 (I/O) / DACK0 (output) Figure 10A.1 Port 1 Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 377 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.2.2 Register Configuration Table 10A.2 shows the port 1 register configuration. Table 10A.2 Port 1 Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port 1 data direction register P1DDR W H'00 H'FE30 Port 1 data register P1DR R/W H'00 H'FF00 Port 1 register PORT1 R Undefined H'FFB0 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W : P1DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 1. P1DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. Setting a P1DDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 1 pin an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. P1DDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Because PPG, TPU, DMAC, and PWM are initialized at a manual reset, pin states are determined by P1DDR and P1DR. Port 1 Data Register (P1DR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P17DR P16DR P15DR P14DR P13DR P12DR P11DR P10DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P1DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 1 pins (P17 to P10). P1DR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 378 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Port 1 Register (PORT1) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P17 —* P16 —* P15 —* P14 —* P13 —* P12 —* P11 —* P10 —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by state of pins P17 to P10. PORT1 is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of output data for the port 1 pins (P17 to P10) must always be performed on P1DR. If a PORT1 read is performed while P1DDR bits are set to 1, the P1DR values are read. If a PORT1 read is performed while P1DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. After a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, PORT1 contents are determined by the pin states, as P1DDR and P1DR are initialized. PORT1 retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. 10A.2.3 Pin Functions Port 1 pins also function as PPG output pins (PO15 to PO8), TPU I/O pins (TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD, TIOCA0, TIOCB0, TIOCC0, TIOCD0, TIOCA1, TIOCB1, TIOCA2, and TIOCB2), DMAC output pins (DACK0 and DACK1), external interrupt input pins (IRQ0 and IRQ1), 14-bit PWM output pins (PWM2 and PWM3), and address bus output pins (A23 to A20). Port 1 pin functions are shown in table 10A.3. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 379 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Table 10A.3 Port 1 Pin Functions Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P17/PO15/ TIOCB2/PWM3/ TCLKD The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 2 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR2, bits IOB3 to IOB0 in TIOR2, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR2), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR0 and TCR5, OEB bit in DACR3, bit NDER15 in NDERH, and bit P17DDR. TPU Channel 2 Setting Table Below (1) Table Below (2) OEB — 0 0 0 1 P17DDR — 0 1 1 — NDER15 — — 0 1 — Pin function TIOCB2 output P17 P17 PO15 PWM3 input output output output TIOCB2 input*1 TCLKD input*2 Notes: 1. TIOCB2 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOB3 = 1. 2. TCLKD input when the setting for either TCR0 or TCR5 is: TPSC2 to TPSC0 = B'111. TCLKD input when channels 2 and 4 are set to phase counting mode. TPU Channel 2 Setting MD3 to MD0 IOB3 to IOB0 CCLR1, CCLR0 Output function (2) (1) (2) B'0000, B'01xx B'0010 B'0000 B'0001 to — B'0100 B'0011 B'1xxx B'0101 to B'0111 — — — — Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 380 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Output compare output — (2) B'xx00 — — (1) (2) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 Other B'10 than B'10 PWM — mode 2 output x: Don’t care Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P16/PO14/ TIOCA2/PWM2/ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 2 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR2, bits IOA3 to IOA0 in TIOR2, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR2), OEA bit in DACR3, bit NDER14 in NDERH, and bit P16DDR. IRQ1 TPU Channel 2 Setting Table Below (1) Table Below (2) OEA — 0 0 0 1 P16DDR — 0 1 1 — NDER14 — — 0 1 — TIOCA2 output P16 input P16 output Pin function IRQ1 TPU Channel 2 Setting MD3 to MD0 IOA3 to IOA0 CCLR1, CCLR0 Output function (2) (1) (2) B'0000, B'01xx B'001x B'0000 B'0001 to B'xx00 B'0100 B'0011 B'1xxx B'0101 to B'0111 — — — — Output compare output — PO14 output TIOCA2 input*1 PWM2 output input (1) (1) (2) B'0010 B'0011 Other than B'xx00 — Other B'01 than B'01 — PWM PWM mode 1 mode 2 output*2 output x: Don’t care Notes: 1. TIOCA2 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOA3 = 1. 2. TIOCB2 output is disabled. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 381 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P15/PO13/ TIOCB1/TCLKC The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 1 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR1, bits IOB3 to IOB0 in TIOR1, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR1), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR0, TCR2, TCR4, and TCR5, bit NDER13 in NDERH, and bit P15DDR. TPU Channel 1 Setting Table Below (1) Table Below (2) P15DDR — 0 1 1 NDER13 — — 0 1 TIOCB1 output P15 input P15 output PO13 output Pin function TIOCB1 input*1 TCLKC input *2 Notes: 1. TIOCB1 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOB3 to IOB0 = B'10xx. 2. TCLKC input when the setting for either TCR0 or TCR2 is: TPSC2 to TPSC0 = B'110; or when the setting for either TCR4 or TCR5 is TPSC2 to TPSC0 = B'101. TCLKC input when channels 2 and 4 are set to phase counting mode. TPU Channel 1 Setting MD3 to MD0 IOB3 to IOB0 CCLR1, CCLR0 Output function (2) (1) (2) B'0000, B'01xx B'0010 B'0000 B'0001 to — B'0100 B'0011 B'1xxx B'0101 to B'0111 — — — — Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 382 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Output compare output — (2) B'xx00 — — (1) (2) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 Other B'10 than B'10 — PWM mode 2 output x: Don’t care Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P14/PO12/ TIOCA1/IRQ0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 1 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR1, bits IOA3 to IOA0 in TIOR1, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR1), bit NDER12 in NDERH, and bit P14DDR. TPU Channel 1 Setting Table Below (1) Table Below (2) P14DDR — 0 1 1 NDER12 — — 0 1 TIOCA1 output P14 input P14 output PO12 output Pin function TIOCA1 input*1 IRQ0 TPU Channel 1 Setting MD3 to MD0 IOA3 to IOA0 CCLR1, CCLR0 Output function (2) (1) (2) B'0000, B'01xx B'001x B'0000 B'0001 to B'xx00 B'0100 B'0011 B'1xxx B'0101 to B'0111 — — — — Output compare output — input (1) B'0010 Other than B'xx00 (1) (2) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 — Other B'01 than B'01 PWM PWM — mode 1 mode 2 output*2 output x: Don’t care Notes: 1. TIOCA1 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOA3 to IOA0 = B'10xx. 2. TIOCB1 output is disabled. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 383 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P13/PO11/ TIOCD0/TCLKB/ A23 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode, and the TPU channel 0 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR0, bits IOD3 to IOD0 in TIOR0L, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR0), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR0 to TCR2, bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit NDER11 in NDERH, and bit P13DDR. Modes 4 to 6 Operating mode AE3 to AE0 TPU Channel 0 Setting B'0000 to B'1110 Table Below (1) B'1111 Table Below (2) — P13DDR — 0 1 1 — NDER11 — — 0 1 — TIOCD0 output P13 input P13 output PO11 output A23 output Pin function TIOCD0 input*1 TCLKB input*2 Mode 7 Operating mode AE3 to AE0 TPU Channel 0 Setting — Table Below (1) Table Below (2) P13DDR — 0 1 1 NDER11 — — 0 1 TIOCD0 output P13 input P13 output PO11 output Pin function TIOCD0 input*1 TCLKB input*2 Notes: 1. TIOCD0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOD3 to IOD0 = B'10xx. 2. TCLKB input when the setting for TCR0 to TCR2 is: TPSC2 to TPSC0 = B'101. TCLKB input when channels 1 and 5 are set to phase counting mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 384 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P13/PO11/ TIOCD0/TCLKB/ A23 (cont) TPU Channel 0 Setting MD3 to MD0 IOD3 to IOD0 CCLR2 to CCLR0 Output function (2) (1) (2) B'0000 B'0010 B'0000 B'0001 to — B'0011 B'0100 B'1xxx B'0101 to B'0111 — — — — Output compare output — (2) B'xx00 — — (1) (2) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 Other than B'110 B'110 — PWM mode 2 output x: Don’t care Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 385 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P12/PO10/ TIOCC0/TCLKA/ A22 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode, and the TPU channel 0 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR0, bits IOC3 to IOC0 in TIOR0L, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR0), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR0 to TCR5, bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit NDER10 in NDERH, and bit P12DDR. Modes 4 to 6 Operating mode AE3 to AE0 TPU Channel 0 Setting B'0000 to B'1110 Table Below (1) B'1111 Table Below (2) — P12DDR — 0 1 1 — NDER10 — — 0 1 — TIOCC0 output P12 input P12 output PO10 output A22 output Pin function TIOCC0 input*1 TCLKA input*2 Mode 7 Operating mode AE3 to AE0 TPU Channel 0 Setting — Table Below (1) Table Below (2) P12DDR — 0 1 1 NDER10 — — 0 1 TIOCC0 output P12 input P12 output PO10 output Pin function TIOCC0 input*1 TCLKA input*2 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 386 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P12/PO10/ TIOCC0/TCLKA/ A22 (cont) TPU Channel 0 Setting MD3 to MD0 IOC3 to IOC0 CCLR2 to CCLR0 Output function (2) (1) (2) B'0000 B'001x B'0000 B'0001 to B'xx00 B'0100 B'0011 B'1xxx B'0101 to B'0111 — — — — Output compare output — (1) (1) (2) B'0010 B'0011 Other than B'xx00 — PWM mode 1 3 output* Other than B'101 B'101 — PWM mode 2 output x: Don’t care Notes: 1. TIOCC0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOC3 to IOC0 = B'10xx. 2. TCLKA input when the setting for TCR0 to TCR5 is: TPSC2 to TPSC0 = B'100. TCLKA input when channels 1 and 5 are set to phase counting mode. 3. TIOCD0 output is disabled. When BFA = 1 or BFB = 1 in TMDR0, output is disabled and setting (2) applies. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 387 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P11/PO9/TIOCB0/ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of DACK1/A21 the operating mode, and the TPU channel 0 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR0, and bits IOB3 to IOB0 in TIOR0H), bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit NDER9 in NDERH, SAE1 bit in DMABCRH, and bit P11DDR. Modes 4 to 6 Operating mode AE3 to AE0 B'0000 to B'1101 SAE1 B'1110 to B'1111 0 TPU Channel 0 Setting Table Below (1) Table Below (2) 1 — — — P11DDR — 0 1 1 — — NDER9 — — 0 1 — — TIOCB0 output P11 input P11 output PO9 output DACK1 A21 output Pin function output * TIOCB0 input Mode 7 Operating mode AE3 to AE0 — SAE1 0 TPU Channel 0 Setting Table Below (1) 1 Table Below (2) — P11DDR — 0 1 1 — NDER9 — — 0 1 — TIOCB0 output P11 input P11 output Pin function Note: * PO9 output TIOCB0 input* DACK1 output TIOCB0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOB3 to IOB0 = B'10xx. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 388 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P11/PO9/TIOCB0/ TPU Channel DACK1/A21 (cont) 0 Setting MD3 to MD0 IOB3 to IOB0 CCLR2 to CCLR0 Output function (2) (1) (2) B'0000 B'0010 B'0000 B'0001 to — B'0011 B'0100 B'1xxx B'0101 to B'0111 — — — — Output compare output — (2) B'xx00 — — (1) (2) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 Other than B'010 B'010 — PWM mode 2 output x: Don’t care Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 389 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P10/PO8/TIOCA0/ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of DACK0/A20 the operating mode, and the TPU channel 0 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR0, bits IOA3 to IOA0 in TIOR0H, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR0), bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, bit NDER8 in NDERH, SAE0 bit in DMABCRH, and bit P10DDR. Modes 4 to 6 Operating mode AE3 to AE0 B'0000 to B'1110 SAE0 TPU Channel 0 Setting B'1101 to B'1111 0 Table Below (1) Table Below (2) 1 — — — P10DDR — 0 1 1 — — NDER8 — — 0 1 — — TIOCA0 output P10 input P10 output DACK0 A20 output Pin function PO8 output TIOCA0 input*1 Mode 7 Operating mode AE3 to AE0 — SAE0 TPU Channel 0 Setting P10DDR NDER8 Pin function output 0 Table Below (1) — 1 Table Below (2) 0 1 1 1 — — 0 TIOCA0 output P10 input P10 output Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 390 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 — PO8 output TIOCA0 input*1 — — DACK0 output Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P10/PO8/TIOCA0/ TPU Channel DACK0/A20 (cont) 0 Setting MD3 to MD0 IOA3 to IOA0 CCLR2 to CCLR0 Output function (2) (1) (2) B'0000 B'001x B'0000 B'0001 to B'xx00 B'0100 B'0011 B'1xxx B'0101 to B'0111 — — — — Output compare output — (1) (1) (2) B'0010 B'0011 Other than B'xx00 — PWM mode 1 2 output* Other than B'001 B'001 — PWM mode 2 output x: Don’t care Notes: 1. TIOCA0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOA3 to IOA0 = B'10xx. 2. TIOCB0 output is disabled. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 391 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.3 Port 3 10A.3.1 Overview Port 3 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 3 is a multi-purpose port for SCI I/O pins (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0, IrTxD, IrRxD, TxD1, RxD1, SCK1, TxD4, RxD4, and SCK4), external interrupt input pins (IRQ4 and IRQ5) and IIC I/O pins (SCL0, SDA0, SCL1, and SDA1). All of the port 3 pin functions have the same operating mode. The configuration for each of the port 3 pins is shown in figure 10A.2. Port 3 pins P37 (I/O) / TxD4 (output) P36 (I/O) / RxD4 (input) P35 (I/O) / SCK1 (I/O) / SCK4 (I/O) / SCL0 (I/O) / IRQ5 (input) Port 3 P34 (I/O) / RxD1 (input) / SDA0 (I/O) P33 (I/O) / TxD1 (input) / SCL1 (I/O) P32 (I/O) / SCK0 (I/O) / SDA1 (I/O) / IRQ4 (input) P31 (I/O) / RxD0 (input) / IrRxD (input) P30 (I/O) / TxD0 (output) / IrTxD (output) Figure 10A.2 Port 3 Pin Functions 10A.3.2 Register Configuration Table 10A.4 shows the configuration of port 3 registers. Table 10A.4 Port 3 Register Configuration Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port 3 data direction register P3DDR W H'00 H'FE32 Port 3 data register P3DR R/W H'00 H'FF02 Port 3 register PORT3 R Undefined H'FFB2 Port 3 open drain control register P3ODR R/W H'00 H'FE46 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 392 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR) Bit 7 : 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W : P3DDR is an 8-bit write-dedicated register, which specifies the I/O for each port 3 pin by bit. Read is disenabled. If a read is carried out, undefined values are read out. By setting P3DDR to 1, the corresponding port 3 pins become output, and be clearing to 0 they become input. P3DDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. The previous state is maintained by a manual reset and in software standby mode. In manual reset SCI and IIC are initialized, so the pin state is determined by the specification of P3DDR and P3DR. Port 3 Data Register (P3DR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P37DR P36DR P35DR P34DR P33DR P32DR P31DR P30DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P3DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register, which stores the output data of port 3 pins (P35 to P30). P3DR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. The previous state is maintained by a manual reset and in software standby mode. Port 3 Register (PORT3) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P37 P36 P35 P34 P33 P32 P31 P30 —* —* —* —* —* —* —* —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by the state of pins P37 to P30. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 393 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) PORT3 is an 8-bit read-dedicated register, which reflects the state of pins. Write is disenabled. Always carry out writing off output data of port 3 pins (P37 to P30) to P3DR without fail. When P3DDR is set to 1, if PORT3 is read, the values of P3DR are read. When P3DDR is cleared to 0, if PORT3 is read, the states of pins are read out. P3DDR and P3DR are initialized by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, so PORT3 is determined by the state of the pins. The previous state is maintained by a manual reset and in software standby mode. Port 3 Open Drain Control Register (P3ODR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P37ODR P36ODR P35ODR P34ODR P33ODR P32ODR P31ODR P30ODR Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P3ODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register, which controls the on/off of port 3 pins (P37 to P30). By setting P3ODR to 1, the port 3 pins become an open drain out, and when cleared to 0 they become CMOS output. P3ODR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. The previous state is maintained by a manual reset and in software standby mode. 10A.3.3 Pin Functions The port 3 pins double as SCI I/O input pins (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0, IrTxD, IrRxD, TxD1, RxD1, SCK1, TxD4, RxD4, SCK4), external interrupt input pins (IRQ4, IRQ5), and IIC I/O pins (SCL0, SDA0, SCL1, SDA1). The functions of port 3 pins are shown in table 10A.5. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 394 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Table 10A.5 Port 3 Pin Functions Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P37/TxD4 Switches as follows according to combinations of SCR TE bit of SCI4 and the P37DDR bit. TE 0 P37DDR Pin function 1 0 1 — P37 input pin P37 output pin* TxD4 output pin Note: * When P37ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output. P36/RxD4 Switches as follows according to combinations of SCR RE bit of SCI4 and the P36DDR bit. RE 0 P36DDR Pin function 1 0 1 — P36 input pin P36 output pin* RxD4 input pin Note: * When P36ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output. P35/SCK1/ SCK4/SCL0/ Switches as follows according to combinations of ICCR0 ICE bit of IIC0, SMR C/A bit of SCI1 or SCI4, SCR CKE0 and CKE1 bits, and the P35DDR bit. IRQ5 When used as a SCL0 I/O pin, always be sure to clear the following bits to 0: SMR C/A bits of SCI1 or SCI4, and SCR CKE0 and CKE1 bits. Do not set SCK1 and SCK4 to simultaneous output. The SCL0 output format is NMOS open drain output, enabling direct bus driving. ICE 0 CKE1 (SCI1) CKE1 (SCI4) 0 0 C/A (SCI1) C/A (SCI4) Pin function 0, 1, 1 1, 0, 1 0 0 1 1 — 0 0 0, 1, 1*2 1, 0, 1*2 — — 0 0 — — — — 0 0 CKE0 (SCI1) CKE0 (SCI4) P35DDR 1 0 0 0 P35 input pin 1 P35 SCK1/SCK4 SCK1/SCK4 SCK1/SCK4 SCL0 output pin*1 output pin*1 output pin*1 input pin I/O pin IRQ5 input Notes: 1. Output type is NMOS push-pull. When P35ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output. 2. SCK1 and SCK4 must not be output simultaneously. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 395 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P34/RxD1/ SDA0 Switches as follows according to combinations of ICCR0 ICE bit of IIC0, SCR RE bit of SCI1, and the P34DDR bit. The SDA0 output format becomes NMOS open drain output, enabling direct bus driving. ICE 0 RE 0 P34DDR Pin function 1 1 0 1 — — — P34 output pin* RxD1 input pin P34 input pin SDA0 I/O pin Note: * Output type is NMOS push-pull. When P34ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain tray. P33/TxD1/ SCL1 Switches as follows according to combinations of ICCR1 ICE bit of IIC1, SCR TE bit of SCI1 and the P33DDR bit. The SCL1 output format becomes NMOS open drain output, enabling direct bus driving. ICE 0 TE 0 P33DDR Pin function 1 0 1 — 1 — — * * P33 output pin TxD1 output pin SCL1 I/O pin* P33 input pin Note: * When P33ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output. P32/SCK0/ SDA1/IRQ4 Switches as follows according to combinations of ICCR1 ICE bit of IIC1, SMR C/A bit of SCI0, SCR CKE0 and CKE1 bits, and the P32DDR bit. If using as an SDA1 input pin, always set SMR C/A bit of SCI0 and SCR CKE0 and CKE1 bits to 0 without fail. The SDA1 output format becomes NMOS open drain output, enabling direct bus driving. ICE 0 CKE1 0 C/A 0 CKE0 P32DDR Pin function 1 0 0 P32 input pin 1 1 0 1 — 0 1 — — 0 — — — — P32 SCK0 SCK0 SCK0 output pin output pin* output pin* input pin IRQ4 input Note: * When P32ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 396 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 SDA1 I/O pin Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P31/RxD0/ IrRxD Switches as follows according to combinations of SCR RE bit of SCI0 and the P31DDR bit. RE P31DDR Pin function 0 1 0 1 — P31 input pin P31 output pin* RxD0/IrRxD input pin Note: * When P31ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output. P30/TxD0/ IrTxD Switches as follows according to combinations of SCR TE bit of SCI0 and the P30DDR bit. TE P30DDR Pin function 0 1 0 1 — P30 input pin P30 output pin* TxD0/IrTxD output pin* Note: * When P30ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 397 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.4 Port 4 10A.4.1 Overview Port 4 is an 8-bit input-only port. Port 4 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins (AN0 to AN7) and D/A converter analog output pins (DA0 and DA1). Port 4 pin functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 10A.3 shows the port 4 pin configuration. Port 4 pins P47 (input) / AN7 (input) / DA1 (output) P46 (input) / AN6 (input) / DA0 (output) P45 (input) / AN5 (input) Port 4 P44 (input) / AN4 (input) P43 (input) / AN3 (input) P42 (input) / AN2 (input) P41 (input) / AN1 (input) P40 (input) / AN0 (input) Figure 10A.3 Port 4 Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 398 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.4.2 Register Configuration Table 10A.6 shows the port 4 register configuration. Port 4 is an input-only port, and does not have a data direction register or data register. Table 10A.6 Port 4 Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port 4 register PORT4 R Undefined H'FFB3 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 4 Register (PORT4): The pin states are always read when a port 4 read is performed. Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P47 —* P46 —* P45 —* P44 —* P43 —* P42 —* P41 —* P40 —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by state of pins P47 to P40. 10A.4.3 Pin Functions Port 4 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins (AN0 to AN7) and D/A converter analog output pins (DA0 and DA1). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 399 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.5 Port 7 10A.5.1 Overview Port 7 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 7 is a multipurpose port for the 8-bit timer I/O pins (TMRI01, TMCI01, TMRI23, TMCI23, TMO0, TMO1, TMO2, and TMO3), DMAC I/O pins (DREQ0, TEND0, DREQ1, and TEND1), bus control output pins (CS4 to CS7), SCI I/O pins (SCK3, RxD3, and TxD3) and manual reset input pin (MRES). The pin functions for P77 to P74 are the same in all operating modes. P73 to P70 pin functions are switched according to operating mode. Figure 10A.4 shows the configuration for port 7 pins. Port 7 Port 7 pins Pin functions in modes 4 to 6 P77 / TxD3 P77 (I/O) / TxD3 (output) P76 / RxD3 P76 (I/O) / RxD3 (input) P75 / TMO3 / SCK3 P75 (I/O) / TMO3 (output) / SCK3 (I/O) P74 / TMO2 / MRES P74 (I/O) / TMO2 (output) / MRES (input) P73 / TMO1 / TEND1 / CS7 P73 (input) / TMO1 (output) / TEND1 (output) / CS7 (output) P72 / TMO0 / TEND0 / CS6 P72 (input) / TMO0 (output) / TEND0 (output) / CS6 (output) P71 / TMRI23 / TMCI23 / DREQ1 / CS5 P71 (input) / TMRI23 (input) / TMCI23 (input) / DREQ1 (input) / CS5 (output) P70 / TMRI01 / TMCI01 / DREQ0 / CS4 P70 (input) / TMRI01 (input) / TMCI01 (input) / DREQ0 (input) / CS4 (output) Pin functions in mode 7 P77 (I/O) / TxD3 (output) P76 (I/O) / RxD3 (input) P75 (I/O) / TMO3 (output) / SCK3 (I/O) P74 (I/O) / TMO2 (output) / MRES (input) P73 (I/O) / TMO1 (output) / TEND1 (output) P72 (I/O) / TMO0 (output) / TEND0 (output) P71 (I/O) / TMRI23 (input) / TMCI23 (input) / DREQ1 (input) P70 (I/O) / TMRI01 (input) / TMCI01 (input) / DREQ0 (input) Figure 10A.4 Port 7 Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 400 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.5.2 Register Configuration Table 10A.7 shows the port 7 register configuration. Table 10A.7 Port 7 Register Configuration Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port 7 data direction register P7DDR W H'00 H'FE36 Port 7 data register P7DR R/W H'00 H'FF06 Port 7 register PORT7 R Undefined H'FFB6 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 7 Data Direction Register (P7DDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P77DDR P76DDR P75DDR P74DDR P73DDR P72DDR P71DDR P70DDR Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W : P7DDR is an 8-bit write-dedicated register, which specifies the I/O for each port 7 pin by bit. Read is disenabled. If a read is carried out, undefined values are read out. By setting P7DDR to 1, the corresponding port 7 pins become output, and by clearing to 0 they become input. P7DDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. The previous state is maintained by a manual reset and in software standby mode. DMAC, 8-bit timer and SCI are initialized by a manual reset, so the pin state is determined by the specification of P7DDR and P7DR. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 401 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Port 7 Data Register (P7DR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P77DR P76DR P75DR P74DR P73DR P72DR P71DR P70DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P7DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register, which stores the output data of port 7 pins (P77 to P70). P7DR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. The previous state is maintained by a manual reset and in software standby mode. Port 7 Register (PORT7) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P77 P76 P75 P74 P73 P72 P71 P70 —* —* —* —* —* —* —* —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by the state of pins P77 to P70. PORT7 is an 8-bit read-dedicated register, which reflects the state of pins. Write is disenabled. Always carry out writing off output data of port 7 pins (P77 to P70) to P7DR without fail. When P7DDR is set to 1, if PORT7 is read, the values of P7DR are read. When P7DDR is cleared to 0, if PORT7 is read, the states of pins are read out. P7DDR and P7DR are initialized by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, so PORT7 is determined by the state of the pins. The previous state is maintained by a manual reset and in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 402 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.5.3 Pin Functions The pins of port 7 are multipurpose pins which function as 8-bit timer I/O pins, (TMRI01, TMCI01, TMRI23, TMCI23, TMO0, TMO1, TMO2, and TMO3), DMAC I/O pins (DREQ0, TEND0, DREQ1, and TEND1), bus control output pins (CS4 to CS7), SCI I/O pins (SCK3, RxD3, and TxD3) and manual reset input pin (MRES). Table 10A.8 shows the functions of port 7 pins. Table 10A.8 Port 7 Pin Functions Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P77/TxD3 Switches as follows according to combinations of SCR TE bit of SCI3, and the P77DDR bit. TE 0 P77DDR Pin function P76/RxD3 0 1 — P77 input pin P77 output pin TxD3 output pin Switches as follows according to combinations of SCR RE bit of SCI3 and the P76DDR bit. RE 0 P76DDR Pin function P75/TMO3/ SCK3 1 1 0 1 — P76 input pin P76 output pin RxD3 I/O pin Switches as follows according to combinations of SMR C/A bit of SCI3, SCR CKE0 and CKE1 bits, TCSR3 OS3 to OS0 bits of the 8-bit timer, and the P75DDR bit. OS3 to OS0 All 0 CKE1 0 C/A Pin function 1 — 1 — — 1 — — — — — — — SCK3 input pin TMO3 output 0 CKE0 P75DDR Any is 1 0 0 P75 input pin 1 P75 SCK3 SCK3 output pin output pin output pin Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 403 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P74/TMO2/ Switches as follows according to combinations of TCSR2 OS3 to OS0 bits of the 8bit timer, SYSCR MRESE bit and the P74DDR bit. MRES MRESE 0 OS3 to OS0 All 0 P74DDR Pin function P73/TMO1/ TEND1/CS7 Any is 1 — — 0 1 — P74 input pin P74 output pin TMO2 output MRES input pin Switches as follows according to combinations of operating mode and DMATCR TEE1 bit of DMAC, TCSR1 OS3 to OS0 bits of the 8-bit timer, and the P73DDR bit. Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 TEE1 0 OS3 to OS0 P73DDR Pin function P72/TMO0/ TEND0/CS6 1 All 0 Mode 7 1 Any is 1 — 0 All 0 1 Any is 1 — 0 1 — — 0 1 — — P73 input pin CS7 TMO1 output TEND1 P73 input pin P73 output pin TMO1 output TEND1 output pin output output Switches as follows according to combinations of operating mode and DMATCR TEE0 bit of DMAC, OS3 to OS0 bits of 8-bit timer TCSR0, and the P72DDR bit. Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 TEE0 0 OS3 to OS0 P72DDR Pin function All 0 Mode 7 1 Any is 1 — 0 All 0 1 Any is 1 — 0 1 — — 0 1 — — P72 input pin CS6 TMO0 output TEND1 P72 input pin P72 output pin TMO0 output TEND1 output pin Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 404 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 output output Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P71/TMRI23/ Switches as follows according to operating mode and P71DDR. TMCI23/ Operating Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7 DREQ1/CS5 Mode P71DDR Pin function 0 P71 input Pin 1 CS5 output — DREQ0, TMRI23, TMCI23 input 0 1 P71 input pin P71 output pin , TMRI23, TMCI23 input DREQ0 P70/TMRI01/ Switches as follows according to operating mode and P70DDR. TMCI01/ Operating Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7 DREQ0/CS4 Mode P70DDR Pin function 0 P70 input pin DREQ0, TMRI01, TMCI01 input 1 CS4 output — 0 1 P70 input pin P70 output pin , TMRI01, TMCI01 input DREQ0 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 405 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.6 Port 9 10A.6.1 Overview Port 9 is an 8-bit input-only port. Port 9 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins (AN8 to AN15) and D/A converter analog output pins (DA2 and DA3). Port 9 pin functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 10A.5 shows the port 9 pin configuration. Port 9 pins P97 (input) / AN15 (input) / DA3 (output) P96 (input) / AN14 (input) / DA2 (output) P95 (input) / AN13 (input) Port 9 P94 (input) / AN12 (input) P93 (input) / AN11 (input) P92 (input) / AN10 (input) P91 (input) / AN9 (input) P90 (input) / AN8 (input) Figure 10A.5 Port 9 Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 406 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.6.2 Register Configuration Table 10A.9 shows the port 9 register configuration. Port 9 is an input-only port, and does not have a data direction register or data register. Table 10A.9 Port 9 Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port 9 register PORT9 R Undefined H'FFB8 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 9 Register (PORT9): The pin states are always read when a port 9 read is performed. Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P97 —* P96 —* P95 —* P94 —* P93 —* P92 —* P91 —* P90 —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by state of pins P97 to P90. 10A.6.3 Pin Functions Port 9 pins are multipurpose pins which function as A/D converter analog input pins (AN8 to AN15) and D/A converter analog output pins (DA2 and DA3). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 407 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.7 Port A 10A.7.1 Overview Port A is a 4-bit I/O port. Port A pins also function as SCI2 I/O pins (SCK2, RxD2, and TxD2) and as address bus outputs. The pin functions change according to the operating mode. Port A has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. Figure 10A.6 shows the port A pin configuration. Port A Port A pins Pin functions in modes 4 to 6 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3 (I/O) / A19 (output) / SCK2 (I/O) PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2 (I/O) / A18 (output) / RxD2 (input) PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1 (I/O) / A17 (output) / TxD2 (output) PA0/A16 PA0 (I/O) / A16 (output) Pin functions in mode 7 PA3 (I/O) / SCK2 (output) PA2 (I/O) / RxD2 (input) PA1 (I/O) / TxD2 (output) PA0 (I/O) Figure 10A.6 Port A Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 408 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.7.2 Register Configuration Table 10A.10 shows the port A register configuration. Table 10A.10 Port A Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value*2 Address*1 Port A data direction register PADDR W H'0 H'FE39 Port A data register PADR R/W H'0 H'FF09 Port A register PORTA R Undefined H'FFB9 Port A MOS pull-up control register PAPCR R/W H'0 H'FE40 Port A open-drain control register PAODR R/W H'0 H'FE47 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Value of bits 3 to 0. Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 — — — — 3 2 1 0 PA3DDR PA2DDR PA1DDR PA0DDR Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W : — — — — PADDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port A. PADDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. Bits 7 and 6 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read. PADDR is initialized to H'0 (bits 3 to 0) by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. The OPE bit in SBYCR is used to select whether the address output pins retain their output state or become high-impedance when a transition is made to software standby mode. See section 24.2.1, Standby Control Register (SBYCR), for details. • Modes 4 to 6 The corresponding port A pins become address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, irrespective of the value of bits PA3DDR to PA0DDR. When pins are not used as address outputs, setting a PADDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port A pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 409 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) • Mode 7 Setting a PADDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port A pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Port A Data Register (PADR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — — PA3DR PA2DR PA1DR PA0DR 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined R/W : — — — — PADR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port A pins (PA3 to PA0). Bits 7 to 4 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. PADR is initialized to H'0 (bits 3 to 0) by a powr-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port A Register (PORTA) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — — PA3 —* PA2 —* PA1 —* PA0 —* R R R R Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined R/W : — — — — Note: * Determined by state of pins PA3 to PA0. PORTA is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of output data for the port A pins (PA3 to PA0) must always be performed on PADR. Bits 7 to 4 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. If a PORTA read is performed while PADDR bits are set to 1, the PADR values are read. If a PORTA read is performed while PADDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. After a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTA contents are determined by the pin states, as PADDR and PADR are initialized. PORTA retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 410 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Port A MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PAPCR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 — — — — 3 : — — — 1 0 PA3PCR PA2PCR PA1PCR PA0PCR Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined R/W 2 — 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W PAPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function incorporated into port A on an individual bit basis. Bits 7 to 4 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. In modes 4 to 6, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in PFCR, in the SCI’s SCMR, SMR, and SCR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PAPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. In mode 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the SCI’s SCMR, SMR, and SCR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PAPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. PAPCR is initialized by a manual reset or to H'0 (bits 3 to 0) by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. Port A Open Drain Control Register (PAODR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 — — — — 3 : — — — — 1 0 PA3ODR PA2ODR PA1ODR PA0ODR Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined R/W 2 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W PAODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls whether PMOS is on or off for each port A pin (PA3 to PA0). Bits 7 to 4 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. When pins are not address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, setting a PAODR bit makes the corresponding port A pin an NMOS open-drain output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin a CMOS output. PAODR is initialized to H'0 (bits 3 to 0) by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 411 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.7.3 Pin Functions Modes 4 to 6: In modes 4 to 6, port A pins function as address outputs according to the setting of AE3 to AE0 in PFCR; when they do not function as address outputs, the pins function as SCI I/O pins and I/O ports. Port A pin functions in modes 4 to 6 are shown in figure 10A.7. PA3 (I/O) / A19 (output) / SCK2 (I/O) PA2 (I/O) / A18 (output) / RxD2 (input) Port A PA1 (I/O) / A17 (output) / TxD2 (output) PA0 (I/O) / A16 (output) Figure 10A.7 Port A Pin Functions (Modes 4 to 6) Mode 7: In mode 7, port A pins function as I/O ports and SCI2 I/O pins (SCK2, TxD2, and RxD2). Input or output can be specified for each pin on an individual bit basis. Setting a PADDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port A pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Port A pin functions are shown in figure 10A.8. PA3 (I/O) / SCK2 (I/O) Port A PA2 (I/O) / RxD2 (input) PA1 (I/O) / TxD2 (output) PA0 (I/O) Figure 10A.8 Port A Pin Functions (Mode 7) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 412 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.7.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function Port A has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. MOS input pull-up can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis. In modes 4 to 6, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in PFCR, in the SCI’s SCMR, SMR, and SCR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PAPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. In mode 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the SCI’s SCMR, SMR, and SCR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PAPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. The prior state is retained by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Table 10A.11 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 10A.11 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port A) Pin States Power-On Reset Address output or OFF SCI output Other than above Hardware Standby Mode Manual Reset Software Standby Mode In Other Operations OFF OFF OFF OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Legend: OFF: MOS input pull-up is always off. ON/OFF: On when PADDR = 0 and PAPCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 413 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.8 Port B 10A.8.1 Overview Port B is an 8-bit I/O port. Port B pins also function as TPU I/O pins (TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCC3, TIOCD3, TIOCA4, TIOCB4, TIOCA5, and TIOCB5) and as address outputs; the pin functions change according to the operating mode. Port B has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. Figure 10A.9 shows the port B pin configuration. Port B Port B pins Pin functions in modes 4 to 6 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7 (I/O) / A15 (output) / TIOCB5 (I/O) PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6 (I/O) / A14 (output) / TIOCA5 (I/O) PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5 (I/O) / A13 (output) / TIOCB4 (I/O) PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4 (I/O) / A12 (output) / TIOCA4 (I/O) PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3 (I/O) / A11 (output) / TIOCD3 (I/O) PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB2 (I/O) / A10 (output) / TIOCC3 (I/O) PB1/A9 /TIOCB3 PB1 (I/O) / A9 (output) / TIOCB3 (I/O) PB0/A8 /TIOCA3 PB0 (I/O) / A8 (output) / TIOCA3 (I/O) Pin functions in mode 7 PB7 (I/O) / TIOCB5 (I/O) PB6 (I/O) / TIOCA5 (I/O) PB5 (I/O) / TIOCB4 (I/O) PB4 (I/O) / TIOCA4 (I/O) PB3 (I/O) / TIOCD3 (I/O) PB2 (I/O) / TIOCC3 (I/O) PB1 (I/O) / TIOCB3 (I/O) PB0 (I/O) / TIOCA3 (I/O) Figure 10A.9 Port B Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 414 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.8.2 Register Configuration Table 10A.12 shows the port B register configuration. Table 10A.12 Port B Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port B data direction register PBDDR W H'00 H'FE3A Port B data register PBDR R/W H'00 H'FF0A Port B register PORTB R Undefined H'FFBA Port B MOS pull-up control register PBPCR R/W H'00 H'FE41 Port B open-drain control register PBODR R/W H'00 H'FE48 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PB7DDR PB6DDR PB5DDR PB4DDR PB3DDR PB2DDR PB1DDR PB0DDR Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W : PBDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port B. PBDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. PBDDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. The OPE bit in SBYCR is used to select whether the address output pins retain their output state or become high-impedance when a transition is made to software standby mode. • Modes 4 to 6 The corresponding port B pins become address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, irrespective of the value of the PBDDR bits. When pins are not used as address outputs, setting a PBDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port B pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. • Mode 7 Setting a PBDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port B pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 415 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Port B Data Register (PBDR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PB7DR PB6DR PB5DR PB4DR PB3DR PB2DR PB1DR PB0DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PBDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port B pins (PB7 to PB0). PBDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port B Register (PORTB) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PB7 —* PB6 —* PB5 —* PB4 —* PB3 —* PB2 —* PB1 —* PB0 —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by state of pins PB7 to PB0. PORTB is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of output data for the port B pins (PB7 to PB0) must always be performed on PBDR. If a PORTB read is performed while PBDDR bits are set to 1, the PBDR values are read. If a PORTB read is performed while PBDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. After a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTB contents are determined by the pin states, as PBDDR and PBDR are initialized. PORTB retains its prior state in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 416 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Port B MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PBPCR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PB7PCR PB6PCR PB5PCR PB4PCR PB3PCR PB2PCR PB1PCR PB0PCR Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PBPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function incorporated into port B on an individual bit basis. In modes 4 to 6, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in PFCR, in the TPU’s TIOR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PBPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. In mode 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the TPU’s TIOR and in DDR, setting the corresponding PBPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. PBPCR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port B Open Drain Control Register (PBODR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PB7ODR PB6ODR PB5ODR PB4ODR PB3ODR PB2ODR PB1ODR PB0ODR Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PBODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the PMOS on/off state for each port B pin (PB7 to PB0). When pins are not address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, setting a PBODR bit makes the corresponding port B pin an NMOS open-drain output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin a CMOS output. PBODR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 417 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.8.3 Pin Functions Modes 4 to 6: In modes 4 to 6, the corresponding port B pins become address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR. When pins are not used as address outputs, they function as TPU I/O pins and I/O ports. Port B pin functions in modes 4 to 6 are shown in figure 10A.10. PB7 (I/O) / A15 (output) / TIOCB5 (I/O) PB6 (I/O) / A14 (output) / TIOCA5 (I/O) PB5 (I/O) / A13 (output) / TIOCB4 (I/O) PB4 (I/O) / A12 (output) / TIOCA4 (I/O) Port B PB3 (I/O) / A11 (output) / TIOCD3 (I/O) PB2 (I/O) / A10 (output) / TIOCC3 (I/O) PB1 (I/O) / A9 (output) / TIOCB3 (I/O) PB0 (I/O) / A8 (output) / TIOCA3 (I/O) Figure 10A.10 Port B Pin Functions (Modes 4 to 6) Mode 7: In mode 7, port B pins function as I/O ports and TPU I/O pins (TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCC3, TIOCD3, TIOCA4, TIOCB4, TIOCA5, and TIOCB5). Input or output can be specified for each pin on an individual bit basis. Setting a PBDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port B pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Port B pin functions in mode 7 are shown in figure 10A.11. PB7 (I/O) / TIOCB5 (I/O) PB6 (I/O) / TIOCA5 (I/O) PB5 (I/O) / TIOCB4 (I/O) Port B PB4 (I/O) / TIOCA4 (I/O) PB3 (I/O) / TIOCD3 (I/O) PB2 (I/O) / TIOCC3 (I/O) PB1 (I/O) / TIOCB3 (I/O) PB0 (I/O) / TIOCA3 (I/O) Figure 10A.11 Port B Pin Functions (Mode 7) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 418 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.8.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function Port B has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. MOS input pull-up can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis. In modes 4 to 6, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in PFCR, in the TPU’s TIOR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PBPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. In mode 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the TPU’s TIOR and in DDR, setting the corresponding PBPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. The prior state is retained by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Table 10A.13 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 10A.13 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port B) Pin States Address output or TPU output Other than above Power-On Reset Hardware Standby Mode Manual Reset Software Standby Mode In Other Operations OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Legend: OFF: MOS input pull-up is always off. ON/OFF: On when PBDDR = 0 and PBPCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 419 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.9 Port C 10A.9.1 Overview Port C is an 8-bit I/O port. Port C pins also function as a 14-bit PWM output (PWM0 and PWM1) and as an address bus outputs. The pin functions change according to the operating mode. Port C has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. Figure 10A.12 shows the port C pin configuration. Port C Port C pins Pin functions in modes 4 and 5 PC7/A7/PWM1 A7 (output) PC6/A6/PWM0 A6 (output) PC5/A5 A5 (output) PC4/A4 A4 (output) PC3/A3 A3 (output) PC2/A2 A2 (output) PC1/A1 A1 (output) PC0/A0 A0 (output) Pin functions in mode 6 Pin functions in mode 7 When PCDDR = 1 When PCDDR = 0 PC7 (I/O) / PWM1 (output) A7 (output) PC7 (input) / PWM1 (output) PC6 (I/O) / PWM0 (output) A6 (output) PC6 (input) / PWM0 (output) PC5 (I/O) A5 (output) PC5 (input) PC4 (I/O) A4 (output) PC4 (input) PC3 (I/O) A3 (output) PC3 (input) PC2 (I/O) A2 (output) PC2 (input) PC1 (I/O) A1 (output) PC1 (input) PC0 (I/O) A0 (output) PC0 (input) Figure 10A.12 Port C Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 420 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.9.2 Register Configuration Table 10A.14 shows the port C register configuration. Table 10A.14 Port C Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port C data direction register PCDDR W H'00 H'FE3B Port C data register PCDR R/W H'00 H'FF0B Port C register PORTC R Undefined H'FFBB Port C MOS pull-up control register PCPCR R/W H'00 H'FE42 Port C open-drain control register PCODR R/W H'00 H'FE49 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port C Data Direction Register (PCDDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PC7DDR PC6DDR PC5DDR PC4DDR PC3DDR PC2DDR PC1DDR PC0DDR Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W : PCDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port C. PCDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. PCDDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. The OPE bit in SBYCR is used to select whether the address output pins retain their output state or become high-impedance when the mode is changed to software standby mode. • Modes 4 and 5 The corresponding port C pins are address outputs irrespective of the value of the PCDDR bits. • Mode 6 Setting a PCDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port C pin an address output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. • Mode 7 Setting a PCDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port C pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 421 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Port C Data Register (PCDR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PC7DR PC6DR PC5DR PC4DR PC3DR PC2DR PC1DR PC0DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PCDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port C pins (PC7 to PC0). PCDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port C Register (PORTC) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PC7 —* PC6 —* PC5 —* PC4 —* PC3 —* PC2 —* PC1 —* PC0 —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by state of pins PC7 to PC0. PORTC is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of output data for the port C pins (PC7 to PC0) must always be performed on PCDR. If a PORTC read is performed while PCDDR bits are set to 1, the PCDR values are read. If a PORTC read is performed while PCDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. After a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTC contents are determined by the pin states, as PCDDR and PCDR are initialized. PORTC retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 422 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Port C MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PCPCR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PC7PCR PC6PCR PC5PCR PC4PCR PC3PCR PC2PCR PC1PCR PC0PCR Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PCPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function incorporated into port C on an individual bit basis. In modes 6 and 7, if PCPCR is set to 1 when the port is in the input state in accordance with the settings of DACR and PCDDR in PWM, the MOS input pull-up is set to ON. PCPCR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port C Open Drain Control Register (PCODR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PC7ODR PC6ODR PC5ODR PC4ODR PC3ODR PC2ODR PC1ODR PC0ODR Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PCDDR is an 8-bit read/write register and controls PMOS on/off of each pin (PC7 to PC0) of port C. If PCODR is set to 1 by setting AE3 to AE0 in PFCR in mode other than address output mode, port C pins function as NMOS open drain outputs and when the setting is cleared to 0, the pins function as CMOS outputs. PCODR is initialized to H'00 in power-on reset mode or hardware standby mode. PCODR retains the last state in manual reset mode or software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 423 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.9.3 Pin Functions for Each Mode (1) Modes 4 and 5 In modes 4 and 5, port C pins function as address outputs automatically. Figure 10A.13 shows the port C pin functions. A7 (output) A6 (output) A5 (output) Port C A4 (output) A3 (output) A2 (output) A1 (output) A0 (output) Figure 10A.13 Port C Pin Functions (Modes 4 and 5) (2) Mode 6 In mode 6, port C pints function as address outputs or input ports and I/O can be specified in bit units. When each bit in PCDDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as an address output and when the bit cleared to 0, the pin functions as a PWM output and an input port. Figure 10A.14 shows the port C pin functions. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 424 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Port C PCDDR= 1 PCDDR= 0 A7 (output) PC7 (input) / PWM1 (output) A6 (output) PC6 (input) / PWM0 (output) A5 (output) PC5 (input) A4 (output) PC4 (input) A3 (output) PC3 (input) A2 (output) PC2 (input) A1 (output) PC1 (input) A0 (output) PC0 (input) Figure 10A.14 Port C Pin Functions (Mode 6) (3) Mode 7 In mode 7, port C pins function as PWM outputs and I/O ports and I/O can be specified for each pin in bit units. When each bit in PCDDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as an output port and when the bit is cleared to 0, the pin functions as an input port. Figure 10A.15 shows the port C pin functions. PC7 (I/O) / PWM1 (output) PC6 (I/O) / PWM0 (output) PC5 (I/O) Port C PC4 (I/O) PC3 (I/O) PC2 (I/O) PC1 (I/O) PC0 (I/O) Figure 10A.15 Port C Pin Functions (Mode 7) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 425 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.9.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function Port C has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used in modes 6 and 7, and can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis. In modes 6 and 7, when PCPCR is set to 1 in the input state by setting of DACR and PCDDR, the MOS input pull-up is set to ON. The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. The prior state is retained by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Table 10A.15 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 10A.15 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port C) Pin States Address output or PWM output Power-On Reset Hardware Standby Mode Manual Reset Software Standby Mode In Other Operations OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Other than above Legend: OFF: MOS input pull-up is always off. ON/OFF: On when PCDDR = 0 and PCPCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 426 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.10 Port D 10A.10.1 Overview Port D is an 8-bit I/O port. Port D has a data bus I/O function, and the pin functions change according to the operating mode. Port D has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. Figure 10A.16 shows the port D pin configuration. Port D Port D pins Pin functions in modes 4 to 6 PD7/D15 D15 (I/O) PD6/D14 D14 (I/O) PD5/D13 D13 (I/O) PD4/D12 D12 (I/O) PD3/D11 D11 (I/O) PD2/D10 D10 (I/O) PD1/D9 D9 (I/O) PD0/D8 D8 (I/O) Pin functions in mode 7 PD7 (I/O) PD6 (I/O) PD5 (I/O) PD4 (I/O) PD3 (I/O) PD2 (I/O) PD1 (I/O) PD0 (I/O) Figure 10A.16 Port D Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 427 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.10.2 Register Configuration Table 10A.16 shows the port D register configuration. Table 10A.16 Port D Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port D data direction register PDDDR W H'00 H'FE3C Port D data register PDDR R/W H'00 H'FF0C Port D register PORTD R Undefined H'FFBC Port D MOS pull-up control register PDPCR R/W H'00 H'FE43 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port D Data Direction Register (PDDDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PD7DDR PD6DDR PD5DDR PD4DDR PD3DDR PD2DDR PD1DDR PD0DDR Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W : PDDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port D. PDDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. PDDDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. • Modes 4 to 6 The input/output direction specification by PDDDR is ignored, and port D is automatically designated for data I/O. • Mode 7 Setting a PDDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port D pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 428 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Port D Data Register (PDDR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PD7DR PD6DR PD5DR PD4DR PD3DR PD2DR PD1DR PD0DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PDDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port D pins (PD7 to PD0). PDDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port D Register (PORTD) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PD7 —* PD6 —* PD5 —* PD4 —* PD3 —* PD2 —* PD1 —* PD0 —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by state of pins PD7 to PD0. PORTD is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of output data for the port D pins (PD7 to PD0) must always be performed on PDDR. If a PORTD read is performed while PDDDR bits are set to 1, the PDDR values are read. If a PORTD read is performed while PDDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. After a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTD contents are determined by the pin states, as PDDDR and PDDR are initialized. PORTD retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 429 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Port D MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PDPCR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PD7PCR PD6PCR PD5PCR PD4PCR PD3PCR PD2PCR PD1PCR PD0PCR Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PDPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function incorporated into port D on an individual bit basis. When a PDDDR bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting) in mode 7, setting the corresponding PDPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for the corresponding pin. PDPCR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. 10A.10.3 Pin Functions Modes 4 to 6: In modes 4 to 6, port D pins are automatically designated as data I/O pins. Port D pin functions in modes 4 to 6 are shown in figure 10A.17. D15 (I/O) D14 (I/O) D13 (I/O) Port D D12 (I/O) D11 (I/O) D10 (I/O) D9 (I/O) D8 (I/O) Figure 10A.17 Port D Pin Functions (Modes 4 to 6) Mode 7: In mode 7, port D pins function as I/O ports. Input or output can be specified for each pin on an individual bit basis. Setting a PDDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port D pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 430 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Port D pin functions in mode 7 are shown in figure 10A.18. PD7 (I/O) PD6 (I/O) PD5 (I/O) Port D PD4 (I/O) PD3 (I/O) PD2 (I/O) PD1 (I/O) PD0 (I/O) Figure 10A.18 Port D Pin Functions (Mode 7) 10A.10.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function Port D has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used in mode 7, and can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis. When a PDDDR bit is cleared to 0 in mode 7, setting the corresponding PDPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. The prior state is retained by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Table 10A.17 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 10A.17 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port D) Modes Power-On Reset Hardware Standby Mode Manual Reset Software Standby Mode In Other Operations 4 to 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF 7 Legend: OFF: MOS input pull-up is always off. ON/OFF: On when PDDDR = 0 and PDPCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 431 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.11 Port E 10A.11.1 Overview Port E is an 8-bit I/O port. Port E has a data bus I/O function, and the pin functions change according to the operating mode and whether 8-bit or 16-bit bus mode is selected. Port E has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. Figure 10A.19 shows the port E pin configuration. Port E Port E pins Pin functions in modes 4 to 6 PE7/D7 PE7 (I/O) / D7 (I/O) PE6/D6 PE6 (I/O) / D6 (I/O) PE5/D5 PE5 (I/O) / D5 (I/O) PE4/D4 PE4 (I/O) / D4 (I/O) PE3/D3 PE3 (I/O) / D3 (I/O) PE2/D2 PE2 (I/O) / D2 (I/O) PE1/D1 PE1 (I/O) / D1 (I/O) PE0/D0 PE0 (I/O) / D0 (I/O) Pin functions in mode 7 PE7 (I/O) PE6 (I/O) PE5 (I/O) PE4 (I/O) PE3 (I/O) PE2 (I/O) PE1 (I/O) PE0 (I/O) Figure 10A.19 Port E Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 432 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.11.2 Register Configuration Table 10A.18 shows the port E register configuration. Table 10A.18 Port E Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port E data direction register PEDDR W H'00 H'FE3D Port E data register PEDR R/W H'00 H'FF0D Port E register PORTE R Undefined H'FFBD Port E MOS pull-up control register PEPCR R/W H'00 H'FE44 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port E Data Direction Register (PEDDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PE7DDR PE6DDR PE5DDR PE4DDR PE3DDR PE2DDR PE1DDR PE0DDR Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W : PEDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port E. PEDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. PEDDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. • Modes 4 to 6 When 8-bit bus mode has been selected, port E pins function as I/O ports. Setting a PEDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port E pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. When 16-bit bus mode has been selected, the input/output direction specification by PEDDR is ignored, and port E is designated for data I/O. For details of 8-bit and 16-bit bus modes, see section 7, Bus Controller. • Mode 7 Setting a PEDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port E pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 433 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Port E Data Register (PEDR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PE7DR PE6DR PE5DR PE4DR PE3DR PE2DR PE1DR PE0DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PEDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port E pins (PE7 to PE0). PEDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port E Register (PORTE) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PE7 —* PE6 —* PE5 —* PE4 —* PE3 —* PE2 —* PE1 —* PE0 —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by state of pins PE7 to PE0. PORTE is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of output data for the port E pins (PE7 to PE0) must always be performed on PEDR. If a PORTE read is performed while PEDDR bits are set to 1, the PEDR values are read. If a PORTE read is performed while PEDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. After a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTE contents are determined by the pin states, as PEDDR and PEDR are initialized. PORTE retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port E MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PEPCR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PE7PCR PE6PCR PE5PCR PE4PCR PE3PCR PE2PCR PE1PCR PE0PCR Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 434 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) PEPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function incorporated into port E on an individual bit basis. When a PEDDR bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting) with 8-bit bus mode selected in modes 4, 5, or 6, or in mode 7, setting the corresponding PEPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for the corresponding pin. PEPCR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. 10A.11.3 Pin Functions Modes 4 to 6: In modes 4 to 6, when 8-bit access is designated and 8-bit bus mode is selected, port E pins are automatically designated as I/O ports. Setting a PEDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port E pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. When 16-bit bus mode is selected, the input/output direction specification by PEDDR is ignored, and port E is designated for data I/O. Port E pin functions in modes 4 to 6 are shown in figure 10A.20. Port E 8-bit bus mode 16-bit bus mode PE7 (I/O) D7 (I/O) PE6 (I/O) D6 (I/O) PE5 (I/O) D5 (I/O) PE4 (I/O) D4 (I/O) PE3 (I/O) D3 (I/O) PE2 (I/O) D2 (I/O) PE1 (I/O) D1 (I/O) PE0 (I/O) D0 (I/O) Figure 10A.20 Port E Pin Functions (Modes 4 to 6) Mode 7: In mode 7, port E pins function as I/O ports. Input or output can be specified for each pin on a bit-by-bit basis. Setting a PEDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port E pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Port E pin functions in mode 7 are shown in figure 10A.21. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 435 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) PE7 (I/O) PE6 (I/O) PE5 (I/O) Port E PE4 (I/O) PE3 (I/O) PE2 (I/O) PE1 (I/O) PE0 (I/O) Figure 10A.21 Port E Pin Functions (Mode 7) 10A.11.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function Port E has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used in modes 4 to 6 when 8-bit bus mode is selected, or in mode 7, and can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis. When a PEDDR bit is cleared to 0 in modes 4 to 6 when 8-bit bus mode is selected, or in mode 7, setting the corresponding PEPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. The prior state is retained by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Table 10A.19 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 10A.19 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port E) Modes Power-On Reset Hardware Standby Mode Manual Reset Software Standby Mode In Other Operations 7 OFF OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF 4 to 6 8-bit bus 16-bit bus Legend: OFF: MOS input pull-up is always off. ON/OFF: On when PEDDR = 0 and PEPCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 436 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.12 Port F 10A.12.1 Overview Port F is an 8-bit I/O port. Port F pins also function as external interrupt input pins (IRQ2 and IRQ3), BUZZ output pin, A/D trigger input pin (ADTRG), bus control signal input/output pins (AS, RD, HWR, LWR, LCAS, WAIT, BREQO, BREQ, and BACK) and the system clock (φ) output pin. Figure 10A.22 shows the port F pin configuration. Port F Port F pins Pin functions in modes 4 to 6 PF7/φ PF7 (input) / φ (output) PF6/AS/LCAS AS (output) / LCAS (output) PF5/RD RD (output) PF4/HWR HWR (output) PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3 PF3 (I/O) / LWR (output) / ADTRG (input) / IRQ3 (input) PF2/LCAS/WAIT/BREQO PF2 (I/O) / LCAS (output) / WAIT (input) / BREQO (output) PF1/BACK/BUZZ PF1 (I/O) / BACK (output) / BUZZ (output) PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 PF0 (I/O) / BREQ (input) / IRQ2 (input) Pin functions in mode 7 PF7 (input) / φ (output) PF6 (I/O) PF5 (I/O) PF4 (I/O) PF3 (I/O) / ADTRG (input) / IRQ3 (input) PF2 (I/O) PF1 (I/O) / BUZZ (output) PF0 (I/O) / IRQ2 (input) Figure 10A.22 Port F Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 437 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.12.2 Register Configuration Table 10A.20 shows the port F register configuration. Table 10A.20 Port F Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address*1 Port F data direction register PFDDR W H'80/H'00*2 H'FE3E Port F data register PFDR R/W H'00 H'FF0E Port F register PORTF R Undefined H'FFBE Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Initial value depends on the mode. Port F Data Direction Register (PFDDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PF7DDR PF6DDR PF5DDR PF4DDR PF3DDR PF2DDR PF1DDR PF0DDR Modes 4 to 6 Initial value : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W : W W W W W W W W Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Mode 7 : PFDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port F. PFDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. PFDDR is initialized by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode, to H'80 in modes 4 to 6, and to H'00 in mode 7. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. The OPE bit in SBYCR is used to select whether the bus control output pins retain their output state or become high-impedance when a transition is made to software standby mode. • Modes 4 to 6 Pin PF7 functions as the φ output pin when the corresponding PFDDR bit is set to 1, and as an input port when the bit is cleared to 0. The input/output direction specified by PFDDR is ignored for pins PF6 to PF3, which are automatically designated as bus control outputs (AS, RD, HWR, and LWR). PF6 functions as a bus control output (LCAS) by setting of the bus controller. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 438 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pins PF2 to PF0 are designated as bus control input/output pins (LCAS, WAIT, BREQO, BACK, and BREQ) by means of bus controller settings. At other times, setting a PFDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port F pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. • Mode 7 Setting a PFDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port F pin PF6 to PF0 an output port, or in the case of pin PF7, the φ output pin. Clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Port F Data Register (PFDR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PF7DR PF6DR PF5DR PF4DR PF3DR PF2DR PF1DR PF0DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PFDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port F pins (PF7 to PF0). PFDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port F Register (PORTF) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PF7 —* PF6 —* PF5 —* PF4 —* PF3 —* PF2 —* PF1 —* PF0 —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by state of pins PF7 to PF0. PORTF is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of output data for the port F pins (PF7 to PF0) must always be performed on PFDR. If a PORTF read is performed while PFDDR bits are set to 1, the PFDR values are read. If a PORTF read is performed while PFDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. After a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTF contents are determined by the pin states, as PFDDR and PFDR are initialized. PORTF retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 439 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.12.3 Pin Functions Port F pins also function as external interrupt input pins (IRQ2 and IRQ3), BUZZ output pin, A/D trigger input pin (ADTRG), bus control signal input/output pins (AS, RD, HWR, LWR, LCAS, WAIT, BREQO, BREQ, and BACK) and the system clock (φ) output pin. The pin functions differ between modes 4 to 6, and mode 7. Port F pin functions are shown in table 10A.21. Table 10A.21 Port F Pin Functions Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions PF7/φ The pin function is switched as shown below according to bit PF7DDR. PF7DDR Pin function PF6/AS/LCAS 0 1 PF7 input pin φ output pin The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode and bits RMTS2 to RMTS0, LCASS, BREQOE, WAITE, ABW5 to ABW2, and PF2DDR. Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7 LCASS 0 1* PF6DDR — — Pin function AS output pin — 0 1 PF6 input pin PF6 output pin LCAS output pin Note: * Restricted to RMTS2 to RMTS0=B'001 to B'011, DRAM space 16-bit access in modes 4 to 6 only PF5/RD The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bit PF5DDR. Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 PF5DDR — Pin function RD Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 440 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 output pin Mode 7 0 1 PF5 input pin PF5 output pin Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions PF4/HWR The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bit PF4DDR. Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 PF4DDR — Pin function HWR Mode 7 output pin 0 1 PF4 input pin PF4 output pin PF3/LWR/ADTRG/ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, IRQ3 the bus mode, A/D converter bits TRGS1 and TRGS0, and bit PF3DDR. Modes 4 to 6 Operating mode Bus mode 16-bit bus mode PF3DDR — Pin function Mode 7 8-bit bus mode 0 — 1 0 1 output PF3 input PF3 output PF3 input PF3 output pin pin pin pin pin 1 ADTRG input pin* LWR IRQ3 input pin*2 Notes: 1. ADTRG input when TRGS0 = TRGS1 = 1. 2. When used as an external interrupt input pin, do not use as an I/O pin for another function. PF2/LCAS/WAIT/ BREQO The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode and bits RMTS2 to RMTS0, LCASS, BREQOE, WAITE, ABW5 to ABW2, and PF2DDR. Modes 4 to 6 Operating Mode LCASS 0* BREQOE — WAITE — PF2DDR — Mode 7 1 — 0 0 0 1 1 — 1 — — — — 0 1 Pin function LCAS PF2 PF2 WAIT BREQO PF2 PF2 output input output input output input output pin pin pin pin pin pin pin Note: * Restricted to RMTS2 to RMTS0=B'001 to B'011, DRAM space 16-bit access in modes 4 to 6 only. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 441 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions PF1/BACK/ BUZZ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode and bits BRLE, BUZZE, and PF1DDR. Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 BRLE 0 BUZZE PF1DDR Pin function PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 Mode 7 1 0 — 1 — 0 1 — — 0 0 1 — 1 PF1 input pin PF1 output pin BUZZ output pin BACK output pin PF1 input pin PF1 output pin BUZZ output pin The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode, and bits BRLE and PF0DDR. Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 BRLE 0 PF0DDR Pin function Mode 7 1 — 0 1 — 0 1 PF0 input pin PF0 output pin BREQ input pin PF0 input pin PF0 output pin IRQ2 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 442 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 input pin Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.13 Port G 10A.13.1 Overview Port G is a 5-bit I/O port and also used as external interrupt input pins (IRQ6 and IRQ7) and bus control signal output pins (CS0 to CS3, CAS, and OE). Figure 10A.23 shows the configuration of port G pins. Port G pin Port G Pin Functions in Modes 4 to 6 PG4 / CS0 PG4 (input) / CS0 (output) PG3 / CS1 PG3 (input) / CS1 (output) PG2 / CS2 PG2 (input) / CS2 (output) PG1 / CS3 / OE / IRQ7 PG1 (input) / CS3 (output) / OE (output) / IRQ7 (input) PG0 / CAS / IRQ6 PG0 (I/O) / CAS (output) / IRQ6 (input) Pin Functions in Mode 7 PG4 (I/O) PG3 (I/O) PG2 (I/O) PG1 (I/O) / IRQ7 (input) PG0 (I/O) / IRQ6 (input) Figure 10A.23 Port G Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 443 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) 10A.13.2 Register Configuration Table 10A.22 shows the port G register configuration. Table 10A.22 Port G Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value*2 Address*1 Port G data direction register PGDDR W H'10/H'00*3 H'FE3F Port G data register PGDR R/W H'00 H'FF0F Port G register PORTG R Undefined H'FFBF Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Value of bits 4 to 0. 3. The initial value varies according to the mode. Port G Data Direction Register (PGDDR) Bit : 7 6 5 — — — 4 3 2 1 0 PG4DDR PG3DDR PG2DDR PG1DDR PG0DDR Modes 4 and 5 Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined 1 0 0 0 0 R/W : W W W W W — — — Modes 6 and 7 Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined 0 0 0 0 0 R/W : W W W W W — — — PGDDR is an 8-bit write only register and specifies I/O of each pin of port G in bit units. Read processing is invalid. Bits 7 to 5 are reserved bits. When the contents are read, undefined values are read. In modes 4 and 5, the PGDDR bits are initialized to H'10 (bits 4 to 0) in power-on reset or hardware standby mode, in modes 6 and 7, the bits are initialized to H'00 (bits 4 to 0). In manual reset or software standby mode, PGDDR retains the last status. Use the OPE bit of SBYCR to select whether the bus control output pin retains the output state or becomes the high-impedance when the mode is changed to a software standby mode. • Modes 4 to 6 When PGDDR is set to 1, pins PG4 to PG1 function as bus control signal output pins (CS0 to CS3 and OE). When PGDDR is cleared to 0, the pins function as input ports. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 444 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) When the DRAM interface is set, pin PG0 functions as the CAS output pin. When PGDDR is set to 1, the pin functions as an output port. When PGDDR is cleared to 0, the pin functions as an input port. See section 7, Bus Controller, for the DRAM interface. • Mode 7 PGDDR to 1 it becomes an output port, and by clearing it to 0 it becomes an input port. Port G Data Register (PGDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — PG4DR PG3DR PG2DR PG1DR PG0DR Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined R/W : — — — 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PGDR is an 8-bit read/write register and stores output data of port G output pins (PG4 to PG0). Bits 7 to 5 are reserved bits. When the contents are read, undefined values are read. Write processing is invalid. In power-on reset or hardware standby mode, PGDR is initialized to H'00 (bits 4 to 0). In manual reset or software standby mode, PGDR retains the last state. (3) Port G Register (PORTG) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — PG4 PG3 PG2 PG1 PG0 —* —* —* —* —* R R R R R Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined R/W : — — — Note: * Determined by the state of PG4 to PG0 PORTG is an 8-bit read only register and reflects the pin state. Write processing is invalid. Write processing of output data of port G pins (PG4 to PG0) must be performed for PGDR. Bits 7 to 5 are reserved bits. When the contents are read, undefined values are read. Write processing is invalid. If PORTG is read when PGDDR is set to 1, the value in PGDR is read. If PORTG is read when PGDDR is cleared to 0, the pin state is read. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 445 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) In power-on reset or hardware standby mode, port G is determined by the pin state because PGDDR and PGDR are initialized. In manual reset or software standby mode, the last state is retained. 10A.13.3 Pin Functions Port G is used also as external interrupt input pins (IRQ6 and IRQ7) and bus control signal output pins (CS0 to CS3, CAS, and OE). The pin functions are different between modes 4 and 6, and mode 7. Table 10A.23 shows the port G pin functions. Table 10A.23 Port G Pin Functions Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions PG4/CS0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bit PG4DDR. Modes 4 to 6 Operating Mode PG4DDR Pin function PG3/CS1 0 1 PG4 input pin CS0 output pin 0 1 PG4 input pin PG4 output pin The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bit PG3DDR. Modes 4 to 6 Operating Mode PG3DDR Pin function PG2/CS2 Mode 7 0 Mode 7 1 PG3 input pin CS1 output pin 0 1 PG3 input pin PG3 output pin The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bit PG2DDR. Operating Mode PG2DDR Pin function Modes 4 to 6 0 PG2 input pin Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 446 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Mode 7 1 CS2 output pin 0 1 PG2 input pin PG2 output pin Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions PG1/CS3/ OE/IRQ7 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bits OES and PG1DDR in BCRL. Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 PG1DDR 0 OES — 0 PG1 input pin Pin function Mode 7 1 0 1 1 — — CS3 OE output pin output pin PG1 input pin PG1 output pin IRQ7 PG0/CAS/ IRQ6 input The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bits RMTS2 to RMTS0 in BCRH. Modes 4 to 6 Operating Mode B'000 RMTS2 to RMTS0 PG0DDR Pin function Mode 7 — B'001 to B'011 0 1 — 0 1 PG0 input pin PG0 output pin CAS PG0 input pin PG0 output pin output pin IRQ6 input Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 447 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10A I/O Ports (H8S/2633, H8S/2632, H8S/2631, H8S/2633R) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 448 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.1 Overview The H8S/2633 Group has 10 I/O ports (ports 1, 3, 7 and A to G), and two input-only port (ports 4 and 9). Table 10B.1 summarizes the port functions. The pins of each port also have other functions. Each I/O port includes a data direction register (DDR) that controls input/output, a data register (DR) that stores output data, and a port register (PORT) used to read the pin states. The input-only ports do not have a DR or DDR register. Ports A to E have a built-in pull-up MOS function, and in addition to DR and DDR, have a MOS input pull-up control register (PCR) to control the on/off state of MOS input pull-up. Ports 3, and A to C include an open-drain control register (ODR) that controls the on/off state of the output buffer PMOS. When ports 10 to 13, 70 to 73, and A to G are used as the output pins for expanded bus control signals, they can drive one TTL load plus a 50pF capacitance load. Those ports in other cases, and ports 14 to 17, 3, and 74 to 77, can drive one TTL load and a 30pF capacitance load. All I/O ports can drive Darlington transistors when set to output. See Appendix C, I/O Port Block Diagrams, for a block diagram of each port. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 449 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Table 10B.1 Port Functions Port Description Port 1 • 8-bit I/O port • Schmitttriggered input (P16, P14) Pins P17/TIOCB2/TCLKD P16/TIOCA2//IRQ1 P15/TIOCB1/TCLKC P14/TIOCA1/IRQ0 Mode 4 P13/TIOCD0/TCLKB/ A23 P11/TIOCB0/A21 P10/TIOCA0/A20 P37/TxD4 P36/RxD4 • Open-drain P35/SCK1/SCK4/ IRQ5 output P34 /RxD1 capability • Schmitttriggered input (P35, P32) Mode 6 8-bit I/O port also functioning as TPU I/O pins (TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD, TIOCA0, TIOCB0, TIOCC0, TIOCD0, TIOCA1, TIOCB1, TIOCA2, TIOCB2), interrupt input pins (IRQ0, IRQ1), and address outputs (A20 to A23) P12/TIOCC0/TCLKA/ A22 Port 3 • 8-bit I/O port Mode 5 Mode 7 8-bit I/O port also functioning as TPU I/O pins (TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD, TIOCA0, TIOCB0, TIOCC0, TIOCD0, TIOCA1, TIOCB1, TIOCA2, TIOCB2) and interrupt input pins (IRQ0, IRQ1) 8-bit I/O port also functioning as SCI (channel 0, 1, and 4) I/O pins (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0, TxD1, RxD1, SCK1, TxD4, RxD4, SCK4) and interrupt input pins (IRQ4, IRQ5) P33 /TxD1 P32 /SCK0/IRQ4 P31 /RxD0 P30 /TxD0 Port 4 • 8-bit input port P47 /AN7 P46 /AN6 8-bit input port also functioning as A/D converter analog inputs (AN7 to AN0) P45 /AN5 P44 /AN4 P43 /AN3 P42 /AN2 P41 /AN1 P40/AN0 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 450 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Port Description Port 7 8-bit I/O port Pins P77/TxD3 P76/RxD3 P75/SCK3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 8-bit I/O port also functioning as bus control output pins (CS4 to CS7), SCI I/O pins (SCK3, RxD3, TxD3), and the manual reset input pin (MRES) P74/MRES P73/CS7 P72/CS6 P71/CS5 Mode 7 8-bit I/O port also functioning as SCI I/O pins (SCK3, RxD3, TxD3) and the manual reset input pin (MRES) P70/CS4 Port 9 • 8-bit input port P97/AN15 P96/AN14 8-bit input port also functioning as A/D converter analog inputs (AN15 to AN8) P95/AN13 P94/AN12 P93/AN11 P92/AN10 P91/AN9 P90/AN8 Port A • 4-bit I/O port • Built-in MOS input pull-up PA3/A19/SCK2 PA2/A18/RxD2 4-bit I/O port also functioning as SCI (channel 2) I/O pins (TxD2, RxD2, SCK2) and address outputs (A19 to A16) 4-bit I/O port also functioning as SCI (channel 2) I/O pins (TxD2, RxD2, SCK2) 8-bit I/O port also functioning as TPU I/O pins (TIOCB5, TIOCA5, TIOCB4, TIOCA4, TIOCD3, TIOCC3, TIOCB3, TIIOCA3) and address outputs (A15 to A8) 8-bit I/O port also functioning as TPU I/O pins (TIOCB5, TIOCA5, TIOCB4, TIOCA4, TIOCD3, TIOCC3, TIOCB3, TIIOCA3) PA1/A17/TxD2 PA0/A16 • Open-drain output capability Port B 8-bit I/O port PB7/A15/TIOCB5 Built-in MOS PB6/A14/TIOCA5 input pull-up PB5/A13/TIOCB4 Open-drain PB4/A12/TIOCA4 output PB3/A11/TIOCD3 capability PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB1/A9/TIOCB3 PB0/A8/TIOCA3 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 451 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Port Description Port C 8-bit I/O port Pins Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 8-bit I/O port also functioning as address outputs (A7 to A0) 8-bit I/O port also functioning Data bus input/output I/O port PE7/D7 In 8-bit-bus mode: I/O port I/O port PE6/D6 In 16-bit-bus mode: data bus input/output PC7/A7 Built-in MOS PC6/A6 input pull-up PC5/A5 Open-drain PC4/A4 output PC3/A3 capability PC2/A2 PC1/A1 PC0 /A0 Port D • 8-bit I/O port • Built-in MOS input pull-up PD7 /D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PD0 /D8 Port E • 8-bit I/O port • Built-in MOS input pull-up PE5/D5 PE4/D4 PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0 /D0 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 452 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Port Description Port F • 8-bit I/O port Pins PF7/φ Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 When DDR = 0: input port When DDR = 1 (after reset): φ output Mode 7 When DDR = 0 (after reset): input port When DDR = 1: φ output PF6/AS RD HWR PF5/RD ADTRG , , LWR outputs , IRQ3 input I/O port , IRQ3 ADTRG input PF4/HWR PF3/LWR/ADTRG/ IRQ3 PF2/WAIT/BREQO When WAITE = 0 and BREQOE = 0 (after reset): I/O port I/O port When WAITE = 1 and BREQOE = 0: WAIT input When WAITE = 0 and BREQOE = 1: BREQO input PF1/BACK When BRLE = 0 (after reset): I/O port IRQ2 PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 When BRLE = 1: BREQ input, BACK output I/O port IRQ2 Port G • 5-bit I/O port input input PG4/CS0 When DDR = 0*1: input port When DDR = 1*2: CS0 output I/O port PG3/CS1 When DDR = 0 (after reset): input port PG2/CS2 When DDR = 1: CS1, CS2, CS3 outputs I/O port, IRQ7 input PG1/CS3/IRQ7 IRQ7 PG0/IRQ6 After reset: I/O port IRQ6 input input I/O port, IRQ6 input Notes: 1. After a reset in mode 6 2. After a reset in modes 4 or 5 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 453 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.2 Port 1 10B.2.1 Overview Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 1 pins also function as TPU I/O pins (TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD, TIOCA0, TIOCB0, TIOCC0, TIOCD0, TIOCA1, TIOCB1, TIOCA2, and TIOCB2), external interrupt pins (IRQ0 and IRQ1), and address bus output pins (A23 to A20). Port 1 pin functions change according to the operating mode. Figure 10B.1 shows the port 1 pin configuration. Port 1 pins Pin functions in modes 4 to 6 P17 (I/O) / TIOCB2 (I/O) / TCLKD (input) P16 (I/O) / TIOCA2 (I/O) / IRQ1 (input) P15 (I/O) / TIOCB1 (I/O) / TCLKC (input) Port 1 P14 (I/O) / TIOCA1 (I/O) / IRQ0 (input) P13 (I/O) / TIOCD0 (I/O) / TCLKB (input) / A23 (output) P12 (I/O) / TIOCC0 (I/O) / TCLKA (input) / A22 (output) P11 (I/O) / TIOCB0 (I/O) / A21 (output) P10 (I/O) / TIOCA0 (I/O) / A20 (output) Pin functions in mode 7 P17 (I/O) / TIOCB2 (I/O) / TCLKD (input) P16 (I/O) / TIOCA2 (I/O) / IRQ1 (input) P15 (I/O) / TIOCB1 (I/O) / TCLKC (input) P14 (I/O) / TIOCA1 (I/O) / IRQ0 (input) P13 (I/O) / TIOCD0 (I/O) / TCLKB (input) P12 (I/O) / TIOCC0 (I/O) / TCLKA (input) P11 (I/O) / TIOCB0 (I/O) P10 (I/O) / TIOCA0 (I/O) Figure 10B.1 Port 1 Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 454 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.2.2 Register Configuration Table 10B.2 shows the port 1 register configuration. Table 10B.2 Port 1 Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port 1 data direction register P1DDR W H'00 H'FE30 Port 1 data register P1DR R/W H'00 H'FF00 Port 1 register PORT1 R Undefined H'FFB0 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W : P1DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 1. P1DDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. Setting a P1DDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port 1 pin an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input pin. P1DDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Because TPU is initialized at a manual reset, pin states are determined by P1DDR and P1DR. Port 1 Data Register (P1DR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P17DR P16DR P15DR P14DR P13DR P12DR P11DR P10DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P1DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port 1 pins (P17 to P10). P1DR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 455 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Port 1 Register (PORT1) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P17 —* P16 —* P15 —* P14 —* P13 —* P12 —* P11 —* P10 —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by state of pins P17 to P10. PORT1 is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of output data for the port 1 pins (P17 to P10) must always be performed on P1DR. If a PORT1 read is performed while P1DDR bits are set to 1, the P1DR values are read. If a PORT1 read is performed while P1DDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. After a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, PORT1 contents are determined by the pin states, as P1DDR and P1DR are initialized. PORT1 retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 456 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.2.3 Pin Functions Port 1 pins also function as TPU I/O pins (TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC, TCLKD, TIOCA0, TIOCB0, TIOCC0, TIOCD0, TIOCA1, TIOCB1, TIOCA2, and TIOCB2), external interrupt input pins (IRQ0 and IRQ1), and address bus output pins (A23 to A20). Port 1 pin functions are shown in table 10B.3. Table 10B.3 Port 1 Pin Functions Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P17/TIOCB2/ TCLKD The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 2 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR2, bits IOB3 to IOB0 in TIOR2, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR2), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR0 and TCR5, and bit P17DDR. TPU Channel 2 Setting Table Below (1) Table Below (2) P17DDR — 0 1 Pin function TIOCB2 output P17 input P17 output TIOCB2 input*1 TCLKD input*2 Notes: 1. TIOCB2 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOB3 = 1. 2. TCLKD input when the setting for either TCR0 or TCR5 is: TPSC2 to TPSC0 = B'111. TCLKD input when channels 2 and 4 are set to phase counting mode. TPU Channel 2 Setting MD3 to MD0 IOB3 to IOB0 CCLR1, CCLR0 Output function (2) (1) (2) B'0000, B'01xx B'0010 B'0000 B'0001 to — B'0100 B'0011 B'1xxx B'0101 to B'0111 — — — — Output compare output — (2) B'xx00 — — (1) (2) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 Other B'10 than B'10 PWM — mode 2 output x: Don’t care Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 457 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P16/TIOCA2/ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 2 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR2, bits IOA3 to IOA0 in TIOR2, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR2), and bit P16DDR. IRQ1 TPU Channel 2 Setting Table Below (1) P16DDR Pin function Table Below (2) — 0 1 TIOCA2 output P16 input P16 output TIOCA2 input*1 IRQ1 TPU Channel 2 Setting MD3 to MD0 IOA3 to IOA0 CCLR1, CCLR0 Output function (2) (1) (2) B'0000, B'01xx B'001x B'0000 B'0001 to B'xx00 B'0100 B'0011 B'1xxx B'0101 to B'0111 — — — — Output compare output — input (1) (1) (2) B'0010 B'0011 Other than B'xx00 — Other B'01 than B'01 PWM PWM — mode 1 mode 2 output*2 output x: Don’t care Notes: 1. TIOCA2 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOA3 = 1. 2. TIOCB2 output is disabled. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 458 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P15/TIOCB1/ TCLKC The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 1 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR1, bits IOB3 to IOB0 in TIOR1, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR1), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR0, TCR2, TCR4, and TCR5, and bit P15DDR. TPU Channel 1 Setting Table Below (1) P15DDR Pin function Table Below (2) — 0 TIOCB1 output P15 input 1 P15 output TIOCB1 input*1 TCLKC input*2 Notes: 1. TIOCB1 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOB3 to IOB0 = B'10xx. 2. TCLKC input when the setting for either TCR0 or TCR2 is: TPSC2 to TPSC0 = B'110; or when the setting for either TCR4 or TCR5 is TPSC2 to TPSC0 = B'101. TCLKC input when channels 2 and 4 are set to phase counting mode. TPU Channel 1 Setting MD3 to MD0 IOB3 to IOB0 CCLR1, CCLR0 Output function (2) (1) (2) B'0000, B'01xx B'0010 B'0000 B'0001 to — B'0011 B'0100 B'1xxx B'0101 to B'0111 — — — — Output compare output — (2) B'xx00 — — (1) (2) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 Other B'10 than B'10 PWM — mode 2 output x: Don’t care Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 459 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P14/TIOCA1/ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the TPU channel 1 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR1, bits IOA3 to IOA0 in TIOR1, and bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR1), and bit P14DDR. IRQ0 TPU Channel 1 Setting Table Below (1) P14DDR Pin function Table Below (2) — 0 1 TIOCA1 output P14 input P14 output TIOCA1 input*1 IRQ0 TPU Channel 1 Setting MD3 to MD0 IOA3 to IOA0 CCLR1, CCLR0 Output function (2) (1) (2) B'0000, B'01xx B'001x B'0000 B'0001 to B'xx00 B'0100 B'0011 B'1xxx B'0101 to B'0111 — — — — Output compare output — input (1) B'0010 Other than B'xx00 (1) (2) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 — Other B'01 than B'01 PWM PWM — mode 1 mode 2 output*2 output x: Don’t care Notes: 1. TIOCA1 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000 or B'01xx, and IOA3 to IOA0 = B'10xx. 2. TIOCB1 output is disabled. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 460 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P13/TIOCD0/ TCLKB/A23 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode, and the TPU channel 0 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR0, bits IOD3 to IOD0 in TIOR0L, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR0), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR0 to TCR2, bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, and bit P13DDR. Modes 4 to 6 Operating mode AE3 to AE0 TPU Channel 0 Setting P13DDR Pin function B'0000 to B'1110 Table Below (1) B'1111 Table Below (2) — 0 TIOCD0 output P13 input — 1 P13 output TIOCD0 input*1 — A23 output TCLKB input*2 Operating mode Mode 7 AE3 to AE0 TPU Channel 0 Setting P13DDR Pin function — Table Below (1) Table Below (2) — 0 1 TIOCD0 output P13 input P13 output TIOCD0 input*1 TCLKB input*2 Notes: 1. TIOCD0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOD3 to IOD0 = B'10xx. 2. TCLKB input when the setting for TCR0 to TCR2 is: TPSC2 to TPSC0 = B'101. TCLKB input when channels 1 and 5 are set to phase counting mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 461 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P13/TIOCD0/ TCLKB/A23 (cont) TPU Channel 0 Setting MD3 to MD0 IOD3 to IOD0 CCLR2 to CCLR0 Output function (2) (1) (2) B'0000 B'0010 B'0000 B'0001 to — B'0011 B'0100 B'1xxx B'0101 to B'0111 — — — — Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 462 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Output compare output — (2) B'xx00 — — (1) (2) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 Other than B'110 B'110 — PWM mode 2 output x: Don’t care Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P12/TIOCC0/ TCLKA/A22 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode, and the TPU channel 0 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR0, bits IOC3 to IOC0 in TIOR0L, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR0), bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR0 to TCR5, bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, and bit P12DDR. Modes 4 to 6 Operating mode AE3 to AE0 TPU Channel 0 Setting P12DDR Pin function B'0000 to B'1110 Table Below (1) B'1111 Table Below (2) — 0 TIOCC0 output P12 input — 1 P12 output TIOCC0 input*1 — A22 output TCLKA input*2 Operating mode Mode 7 AE3 to AE0 TPU Channel 0 Setting P12DDR Pin function — Table Below (1) Table Below (2) — 0 1 TIOCC0 output P12 input P12 output TIOCC0 input*1 TCLKA input*2 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 463 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P12/TIOCC0/ TCLKA/A22 (cont) TPU Channel 0 Setting MD3 to MD0 IOC3 to IOC0 CCLR2 to CCLR0 Output function (2) (1) (2) B'0000 B'001x B'0000 B'0001 to B'xx00 B'0100 B'0011 B'1xxx B'0101 to B'0111 — — — — Output compare output — (1) (1) (2) B'0010 B'0011 Other than B'xx00 — PWM mode 1 3 output* Other than B'101 B'101 — PWM mode 2 output x: Don’t care Notes: 1. TIOCC0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOC3 to IOC0 = B'10xx. 2. TCLKA input when the setting for TCR0 to TCR5 is: TPSC2 to TPSC0 = B'100. TCLKA input when channels 1 and 5 are set to phase counting mode. 3. TIOCD0 output is disabled. When BFA = 1 or BFB = 1 in TMDR0, output is disabled and setting (2) applies. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 464 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P11/TIOCB0/A21 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode, and the TPU channel 0 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR0, and bits IOB3 to IOB0 in TIOR0H), bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, and bit P11DDR. Modes 4 to 6 Operating mode AE3 to AE0 TPU Channel 0 Setting P11DDR Pin function B'0000 to B'1101 Table Below (1) B'1110 to B'1111 Table Below (2) — — 0 1 — TIOCB0 output P11 input P11 output A21 output TIOCB0 input* Operating mode Mode 7 AE3 to AE0 TPU Channel 0 Setting P11DDR Pin function Note: * — Table Below (1) Table Below (2) — 0 TIOCB0 output P11 input 1 P11 output TIOCB0 input* TIOCB0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOB3 to IOB0 = B'10xx. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 465 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P11/TIOCB0/A21 (cont) TPU Channel 0 Setting MD3 to MD0 IOB3 to IOB0 CCLR2 to CCLR0 Output function (2) (1) (2) B'0000 B'0010 B'0000 B'0001 to — B'0011 B'0100 B'1xxx B'0101 to B'0111 — — — — Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 466 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Output compare output — (2) B'xx00 — — (1) (2) B'0011 Other than B'xx00 Other than B'010 B'010 — PWM mode 2 output x: Don’t care Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P10/TIOCA0/A20 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode, and the TPU channel 0 setting (by bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR0, bits IOA3 to IOA0 in TIOR0H, and bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR0), bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, and bit P10DDR. Modes 4 to 6 Operating mode AE3 to AE0 TPU Channel 0 Setting P10DDR Pin function B'0000 to B'1110 Table Below (1) — 0 P10 input P10DDR Pin function — 1 P10 output TIOCA0 input*1 — A20 output Mode 7 AE3 to AE0 TPU Channel 0 Setting Table Below (2) TIOCA0 output Operating mode B'1101 to B'1111 — Table Below (1) Table Below (2) — 0 1 TIOCA0 output P10 input P10 output TIOCA0 input*1 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 467 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P10/TIOCA0/A20 (cont) TPU Channel 0 Setting MD3 to MD0 IOA3 to IOA0 CCLR2 to CCLR0 Output function (2) (1) (2) B'0000 B'001x B'0000 B'0001 to B'xx00 B'0100 B'0011 B'1xxx B'0101 to B'0111 — — — — Output compare output — (1) (1) (2) B'0010 B'0011 Other than B'xx00 — PWM mode 1 2 output* Other than B'001 B'001 — PWM mode 2 output x: Don’t care Notes: 1. TIOCA0 input when MD3 to MD0 = B'0000, and IOA3 to IOA0 = B'10xx. 2. TIOCB0 output is disabled. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 468 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.3 Port 3 10B.3.1 Overview Port 3 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 3 is a multi-purpose port for SCI I/O pins (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0, TxD1, RxD1, SCK1, TxD4, RxD4, and SCK4) and external interrupt input pins (IRQ4 and IRQ5). All of the port 3 pin functions have the same operating mode. The configuration for each of the port 3 pins is shown in figure 10B.2. Port 3 pins P37 (I/O) / TxD4 (output) P36 (I/O) / RxD4 (input) P35 (I/O) / SCK1 (I/O) / SCK4 (I/O) / IRQ5 (input) Port 3 P34 (I/O) / RxD1 (input) P33 (I/O) / TxD1 (input) P32 (I/O) / SCK0 (I/O) / IRQ4 (input) P31 (I/O) / RxD0 (input) P30 (I/O) / TxD0 (output) Figure 10B.2 Port 3 Pin Functions 10B.3.2 Register Configuration Table 10B.4 shows the configuration of port 3 registers. Table 10B.4 Port 3 Register Configuration Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port 3 data direction register P3DDR W H'00 H'FE32 Port 3 data register P3DR R/W H'00 H'FF02 Port 3 register PORT3 R Undefined H'FFB2 Port 3 open drain control register P3ODR R/W H'00 H'FE46 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 469 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Port 3 Data Direction Register (P3DDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P37DDR P36DDR P35DDR P34DDR P33DDR P32DDR P31DDR P30DDR Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W : P3DDR is an 8-bit write-dedicated register, which specifies the I/O for each port 3 pin by bit. Read is disenabled. If a read is carried out, undefined values are read out. By setting P3DDR to 1, the corresponding port 3 pins become output, and be clearing to 0 they become input. P3DDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. The previous state is maintained by a manual reset and in software standby mode. SCI is initialized, so the pin state is determined by the specification of P3DDR and P3DR. Port 3 Data Register (P3DR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P37DR P36DR P35DR P34DR P33DR P32DR P31DR P30DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P3DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register, which stores the output data of port 3 pins (P35 to P30). P3DR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. The previous state is maintained by a manual reset and in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 470 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Port 3 Register (PORT3) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P37 P36 P35 P34 P33 P32 P31 P30 —* —* —* —* —* —* —* —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by the state of pins P37 to P30. PORT3 is an 8-bit read-dedicated register, which reflects the state of pins. Write is disenabled. Always carry out writing off output data of port 3 pins (P37 to P30) to P3DR without fail. When P3DDR is set to 1, if PORT3 is read, the values of P3DR are read. When P3DDR is cleared to 0, if PORT3 is read, the states of pins are read out. P3DDR and P3DR are initialized by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, so PORT3 is determined by the state of the pins. The previous state is maintained by a manual reset and in software standby mode. Port 3 Open Drain Control Register (P3ODR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P37ODR P36ODR P35ODR P34ODR P33ODR P32ODR P31ODR P30ODR Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P3ODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register, which controls the on/off of port 3 pins (P37 to P30). By setting P3ODR to 1, the port 3 pins become an open drain out, and when cleared to 0 they become CMOS output. P3ODR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. The previous state is maintained by a manual reset and in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 471 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.3.3 Pin Functions The port 3 pins double as SCI I/O input pins (TxD0, RxD0, SCK0, TxD1, RxD1, SCK1, TxD4, RxD4, SCK4), external interrupt input pins (IRQ4, IRQ5). The functions of port 3 pins are shown in table 10B.5. Table 10B.5 Port 3 Pin Functions Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P37/TxD4 Switches as follows according to combinations of SCR TE bit of SCI4 and the P37DDR bit. TE 0 P37DDR Pin function 1 0 1 — P37 input pin P37 output pin* TxD4 output pin Note: * When P37ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output. P36/RxD4 Switches as follows according to combinations of SCR RE bit of SCI4 and the P36DDR bit. RE 0 P36DDR Pin function 1 0 1 — P36 input pin P36 output pin* RxD4 input pin Note: * When P36ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output. P35/SCK1/ SCK4/IRQ5 Switches as follows according to combinations of the SMR C/A bit of SCI1 or SCI4, the SCR CKE0 and CKE1 bits, and the P35DDR bit. SCK1 and SCK4 should not be set to output simultaneously. CKE1 (SCI1) CKE1 (SCI4) C/A (SCI1) C/A (SCI4) 0 0 CKE0 (SCI1) CKE0 (SCI4) P35DDR Pin function 0*1 1*1 1*1 0*1 1 1 1 1 — — — — — — — — — — — 0 0 0, 1, 1*3 1, 0, 1*3 0 0 0 1 — *3 SCK1/SCK4 P35 input P35 output pin output pin pin — *3 SCK1/SCK4 output pin *3 0*2 SCK1/SCK4 input pin IRQ5 input Notes: 1. These settings are prohibited. 2. If SCK1 and SCK4 are used as input (clock input) pins on the H8S/2695, P35DDR must be cleared to 0. 3. The output format is CMOS output. It becomes NMOS open drain output if P35ODR is set to 1. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 472 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P34/RxD1 Switches as follows according to combinations of ICCR0 ICE bit of IIC0, SCR RE bit of SCI1, and the P34DDR bit. RE 0 P34DDR Pin function 1 0 1 — P34 input pin P34 output pin* RxD1 input pin Note: * Output type is NMOS push-pull. When P34ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain tray. P33/TxD1 Switches as follows according to combinations of ICCR1 ICE bit of IIC1, SCR TE bit of SCI1 and the P33DDR bit. TE 0 P33DDR Pin function 1 0 1 — P33 input pin P33 output pin* TxD1 output pin* Note: * When P33ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output. P32/SCK0/ IRQ4 Switches as follows according to combinations of SMR C/A bit of SCI0, SCR CKE0 and CKE1 bits, and the P32DDR bit. If using as an SDA1 input pin, always set SMR C/A bit of SCI0 and SCR CKE0 and CKE1 bits to 0 without fail. CKE1 0 C/A 0 CKE0 P32DDR Pin function 1 0 0 1 P32 input pin P32 output pin 1 — 1 — — — — — SCK0 output SCK0 output pin* pin* IRQ4 SCK0 input pin input Note: * When P32ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 473 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P31/RxD0 Switches as follows according to combinations of SCR RE bit of SCI0 and the P31DDR bit. RE P31DDR Pin function 0 1 0 1 — P31 input pin P31 output pin* RxD0 input pin Note: * When P31ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output. P30/TxD0 Switches as follows according to combinations of SCR TE bit of SCI0 and the P30DDR bit. TE P30DDR Pin function 0 1 0 1 — P30 input pin P30 output pin* TxD0 output pin* Note: * When P30ODR = 1, it becomes NMOS open drain output. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 474 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.4 Port 4 10B.4.1 Overview Port 4 is an 8-bit input-only port. Port 4 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins (AN0 to AN7). Port 4 pin functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 10B.3 shows the port 4 pin configuration. Port 4 pins P47 (input) / AN7 (input) P46 (input) / AN6 (input) P45 (input) / AN5 (input) Port 4 P44 (input) / AN4 (input) P43 (input) / AN3 (input) P42 (input) / AN2 (input) P41 (input) / AN1 (input) P40 (input) / AN0 (input) Figure 10B.3 Port 4 Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 475 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.4.2 Register Configuration Table 10B.6 shows the port 4 register configuration. Port 4 is an input-only port, and does not have a data direction register or data register. Table 10B.6 Port 4 Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port 4 register PORT4 R Undefined H'FFB3 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 4 Register (PORT4): The pin states are always read when a port 4 read is performed. Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P47 —* P46 —* P45 —* P44 —* P43 —* P42 —* P41 —* P40 —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by state of pins P47 to P40. 10B.4.3 Pin Functions Port 4 pins function as A/D converter analog input pins (AN0 to AN7). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 476 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.5 Port 7 10B.5.1 Overview Port 7 is an 8-bit I/O port. Port 7 is a multipurpose port for the bus control output pins (CS4 to CS7), SCI I/O pins (SCK3, RxD3, and TxD3), and manual reset input pin (MRES). The pin functions for P77 to P74 are the same in all operating modes. P73 to P70 pin functions are switched according to operating mode. Figure 10B.4 shows the configuration for port 7 pins. Port 7 Port 7 pins Pin functions in modes 4 to 6 P77 / TxD3 P77 (I/O) / TxD3 (output) P76 / RxD3 P76 (I/O) / RxD3 (input) P75 / SCK3 P75 (I/O) / SCK3 (I/O) P74 / MRES P74 (I/O) / MRES (input) P73 / CS7 P73 (I/O) / CS7 (output) P72 / CS6 P72 (I/O) / CS6 (output) P71 / CS5 P71 (I/O) / CS5 (output) P70 / CS4 P70 (I/O) / CS4 (output) Pin functions in mode 7 P77 (I/O) / TxD3 (output) P76 (I/O) / RxD3 (input) P75 (I/O) / SCK3 (I/O) P74 (I/O) / MRES (input) P73 (I/O) P72 (I/O) P71 (I/O) P70 (I/O) Figure 10B.4 Port 7 Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 477 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.5.2 Register Configuration Table 10B.7 shows the port 7 register configuration. Table 10B.7 Port 7 Register Configuration Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port 7 data direction register P7DDR W H'00 H'FE36 Port 7 data register P7DR R/W H'00 H'FF06 Port 7 register PORT7 R Undefined H'FFB6 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 7 Data Direction Register (P7DDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P77DDR P76DDR P75DDR P74DDR P73DDR P72DDR P71DDR P70DDR Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W : P7DDR is an 8-bit write-dedicated register, which specifies the I/O for each port 7 pin by bit. Read is disenabled. If a read is carried out, undefined values are read out. By setting P7DDR to 1, the corresponding port 7 pins become output, and by clearing to 0 they become input. P7DDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. The previous state is maintained by a manual reset and in software standby mode. SCI is initialized by a manual reset, so the pin state is determined by the specification of P7DDR and P7DR. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 478 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Port 7 Data Register (P7DR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P77DR P76DR P75DR P74DR P73DR P72DR P71DR P70DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W P7DR is an 8-bit readable/writable register, which stores the output data of port 7 pins (P77 to P70). P7DR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. The previous state is maintained by a manual reset and in software standby mode. Port 7 Register (PORT7) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P77 P76 P75 P74 P73 P72 P71 P70 —* —* —* —* —* —* —* —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by the state of pins P77 to P70. PORT7 is an 8-bit read-dedicated register, which reflects the state of pins. Write is disenabled. Always carry out writing off output data of port 7 pins (P77 to P70) to P7DR without fail. When P7DDR is set to 1, if PORT7 is read, the values of P7DR are read. When P7DDR is cleared to 0, if PORT7 is read, the states of pins are read out. P7DDR and P7DR are initialized by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, so PORT7 is determined by the state of the pins. The previous state is maintained by a manual reset and in software standby mode. 10B.5.3 Pin Functions The pins of port 7 are multipurpose pins which function as bus control output pins (CS4 to CS7), SCI I/O pins (SCK3, RxD3, and TxD3), and manual reset input pin (MRES). Table 10B.8 shows the functions of port 7 pins. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 479 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Table 10B.8 Port 7 Pin Functions Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P77/TxD3 Switches as follows according to combinations of SCR TE bit of SCI3, and the P77DDR bit. TE 0 P77DDR Pin function P76/RxD3 0 1 — P77 input pin P77 output pin TxD3 output pin Switches as follows according to combinations of SCR RE bit of SCI3 and the P76DDR bit. RE 0 P76DDR Pin function P75/SCK3 1 1 0 1 — P76 input pin P76 output pin RxD3 I/O pin Switches as follows according to combinations of SMR C/A bit of SCI3, SCR CKE0 and CKE1 bits, and the P75DDR bit. CKE1 0 C/A 0 CKE0 P75DDR Pin function P74/MRES 1 0 1 — 1 — — 0 1 — — — P75 input pin P75 output pin SCK3 output pin SCK3 output pin SCK3 input pin Switches as follows according to combinations of SYSCR MRESE bit and the P74DDR bit. MRESE P74DDR Pin function 0 1 0 1 P74 input pin P74 output pin Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 480 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 — MRES input pin Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions P73/CS7 Switches as follows according to combinations of operating mode and the P73DDR bit. Operating Mode P73DDR Pin function P72/CS6 Modes 4 to 6 0 output pin CS7 0 1 P73 input pin P73 output pin Switches as follows according to combinations of operating mode and the P72DDR bit. P72DDR Pin function Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7 0 1 P72 input pin output pin CS6 0 1 P72 input pin P72 output pin Switches as follows according to operating mode and P71DDR. Operating Mode P71DDR Pin function P70/CS4 1 P73 input pin Operating Mode P71/CS5 Mode 7 Modes 4 to 6 0 Mode 7 1 P71 input Pin CS5 output 0 1 P71 input pin P71 output pin Switches as follows according to operating mode and P70DDR. Operating Mode P70DDR Pin function Modes 4 to 6 0 P70 input pin Mode 7 1 CS4 output 0 1 P70 input pin P70 output pin Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 481 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.6 Port 9 10B.6.1 Overview Port 9 is an 8-bit input-only port. Port 9 pins also function as A/D converter analog input pins (AN8 to AN15). Port 9 pin functions are the same in all operating modes. Figure 10B.5 shows the port 9 pin configuration. Port 9 pins P97 (input) / AN15 (input) P96 (input) / AN14 (input) P95 (input) / AN13 (input) Port 9 P94 (input) / AN12 (input) P93 (input) / AN11 (input) P92 (input) / AN10 (input) P91 (input) / AN9 (input) P90 (input) / AN8 (input) Figure 10B.5 Port 9 Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 482 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.6.2 Register Configuration Table 10B.9 shows the port 9 register configuration. Port 9 is an input-only port, and does not have a data direction register or data register. Table 10B.9 Port 9 Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port 9 register PORT9 R Undefined H'FFB8 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port 9 Register (PORT9): The pin states are always read when a port 9 read is performed. Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P97 —* P96 —* P95 —* P94 —* P93 —* P92 —* P91 —* P90 —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by state of pins P97 to P90. 10B.6.3 Pin Functions Port 9 pins function as A/D converter analog input pins (AN8 to AN15). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 483 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.7 Port A 10B.7.1 Overview Port A is a 4-bit I/O port. Port A pins also function as SCI2 I/O pins (SCK2, RxD2, and TxD2) and address bus outputs. The pin functions change according to the operating mode. Port A has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. Figure 10B.6 shows the port A pin configuration. Port A Port A pins Pin functions in modes 4 to 6 PA3/A19/SCK2 PA3 (I/O) / A19 (output) / SCK2 (I/O) PA2/A18/RxD2 PA2 (I/O) / A18 (output) / RxD2 (input) PA1/A17/TxD2 PA1 (I/O) / A17 (output) / TxD2 (output) PA0/A16 PA0 (I/O) / A16 (output) Pin functions in mode 7 PA3 (I/O) / SCK2 (output) PA2 (I/O) / RxD2 (input) PA1 (I/O) / TxD2 (output) PA0 (I/O) Figure 10B.6 Port A Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 484 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.7.2 Register Configuration Table 10B.10 shows the port A register configuration. Table 10B.10 Port A Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value*2 Address*1 Port A data direction register PADDR W H'0 H'FE39 Port A data register PADR R/W H'0 H'FF09 Port A register PORTA R Undefined H'FFB9 Port A MOS pull-up control register PAPCR R/W H'0 H'FE40 Port A open-drain control register PAODR R/W H'0 H'FE47 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Value of bits 3 to 0. Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 — — — — 3 2 1 0 PA3DDR PA2DDR PA1DDR PA0DDR Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W : — — — — PADDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port A. PADDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. Bits 7 and 6 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read. PADDR is initialized to H'0 (bits 3 to 0) by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. The OPE bit in SBYCR is used to select whether the address output pins retain their output state or become high-impedance when a transition is made to software standby mode. See section 24.2.1, Standby Control Register (SBYCR), for details. • Modes 4 to 6 The corresponding port A pins become address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, irrespective of the value of bits PA4DDR to PA0DDR. When pins are not used as address outputs, setting a PADDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port A pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 485 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) • Mode 7 Setting a PADDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port A pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Port A Data Register (PADR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — — PA3DR PA2DR PA1DR PA0DR 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined R/W : — — — — PADR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port A pins (PA3 to PA0). Bits 7 to 4 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. PADR is initialized to H'0 (bits 3 to 0) by a powr-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port A Register (PORTA) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — — PA3 —* PA2 —* PA1 —* PA0 —* R R R R Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined R/W : — — — — Note: * Determined by state of pins PA3 to PA0. PORTA is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of output data for the port A pins (PA3 to PA0) must always be performed on PADR. Bits 7 to 4 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. If a PORTA read is performed while PADDR bits are set to 1, the PADR values are read. If a PORTA read is performed while PADDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. After a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTA contents are determined by the pin states, as PADDR and PADR are initialized. PORTA retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 486 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Port A MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PAPCR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 — — — — 3 : — — — 1 0 PA3PCR PA2PCR PA1PCR PA0PCR Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined R/W 2 — 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W PAPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function incorporated into port A on an individual bit basis. Bits 7 to 4 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. In modes 4 to 6, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in PFCR, in the SCI’s SCMR, SMR, and SCR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PAPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. In mode 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the SCI’s SCMR, SMR, and SCR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PAPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. PAPCR is initialized by a manual reset or to H'0 (bits 3 to 0) by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state in software standby mode. Port A Open Drain Control Register (PAODR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 — — — — 3 : — — — — 1 0 PA3ODR PA2ODR PA1ODR PA0ODR Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined R/W 2 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W PAODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls whether PMOS is on or off for each port A pin (PA3 to PA0). Bits 7 to 4 are reserved; they return an undetermined value if read, and cannot be modified. When pins are not address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, setting a PAODR bit makes the corresponding port A pin an NMOS open-drain output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin a CMOS output. PAODR is initialized to H'0 (bits 3 to 0) by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 487 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.7.3 Pin Functions Modes 4 to 6: In modes 4 to 6, port A pins function as address outputs according to the setting of AE3 to AE0 in PFCR; when they do not function as address outputs, the pins function as SCI I/O pins and I/O ports. Port A pin functions in modes 4 to 6 are shown in figure 10B.7. PA3 (I/O) / A19 (output) / SCK2 (I/O) PA2 (I/O) / A18 (output) / RxD2 (input) Port A PA1 (I/O) / A17 (output) / TxD2 (output) PA0 (I/O) / A16 (output) Figure 10B.7 Port A Pin Functions (Modes 4 to 6) Mode 7: In mode 7, port A pins function as I/O ports and SCI2 I/O pins (SCK2, TxD2, and RxD2). Input or output can be specified for each pin on an individual bit basis. Setting a PADDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port A pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Port A pin functions are shown in figure 10B.8. PA3 (I/O) / SCK2 (I/O) Port A PA2 (I/O) / RxD2 (input) PA1 (I/O) / TxD2 (output) PA0 (I/O) Figure 10B.8 Port A Pin Functions (Mode 7) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 488 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.7.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function Port A has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. MOS input pull-up can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis. In modes 4 to 6, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in PFCR, in the SCI’s SCMR, SMR, and SCR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PAPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. In mode 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the SCI’s SCMR, SMR, and SCR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PAPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. The prior state is retained by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Table 10B.11 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 10B.11 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port A) Pin States Power-On Reset Address output or OFF SCI output Other than above Hardware Standby Mode Manual Reset Software Standby Mode In Other Operations OFF OFF OFF OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Legend: OFF: MOS input pull-up is always off. ON/OFF: On when PADDR = 0 and PAPCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 489 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.8 Port B 10B.8.1 Overview Port B is an 8-bit I/O port. Port B pins also function as TPU I/O pins (TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCC3, TIOCD3, TIOCA4, TIOCB4, TIOCA5, and TIOCB5) and as address outputs; the pin functions change according to the operating mode. Port B has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. Figure 10B.9 shows the port B pin configuration. Port B Port B pins Pin functions in modes 4 to 6 PB7/A15/TIOCB5 PB7 (I/O) / A15 (output) / TIOCB5 (I/O) PB6/A14/TIOCA5 PB6 (I/O) / A14 (output) / TIOCA5 (I/O) PB5/A13/TIOCB4 PB5 (I/O) / A13 (output) / TIOCB4 (I/O) PB4/A12/TIOCA4 PB4 (I/O) / A12 (output) / TIOCA4 (I/O) PB3/A11/TIOCD3 PB3 (I/O) / A11 (output) / TIOCD3 (I/O) PB2/A10/TIOCC3 PB2 (I/O) / A10 (output) / TIOCC3 (I/O) PB1/A9 /TIOCB3 PB1 (I/O) / A9 (output) / TIOCB3 (I/O) PB0/A8 /TIOCA3 PB0 (I/O) / A8 (output) / TIOCA3 (I/O) Pin functions in mode 7 PB7 (I/O) / TIOCB5 (I/O) PB6 (I/O) / TIOCA5 (I/O) PB5 (I/O) / TIOCB4 (I/O) PB4 (I/O) / TIOCA4 (I/O) PB3 (I/O) / TIOCD3 (I/O) PB2 (I/O) / TIOCC3 (I/O) PB1 (I/O) / TIOCB3 (I/O) PB0 (I/O) / TIOCA3 (I/O) Figure 10B.9 Port B Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 490 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.8.2 Register Configuration Table 10B.12 shows the port B register configuration. Table 10B.12 Port B Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port B data direction register PBDDR W H'00 H'FE3A Port B data register PBDR R/W H'00 H'FF0A Port B register PORTB R Undefined H'FFBA Port B MOS pull-up control register PBPCR R/W H'00 H'FE41 Port B open-drain control register PBODR R/W H'00 H'FE48 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PB7DDR PB6DDR PB5DDR PB4DDR PB3DDR PB2DDR PB1DDR PB0DDR Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W : PBDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port B. PBDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. PBDDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. The OPE bit in SBYCR is used to select whether the address output pins retain their output state or become high-impedance when a transition is made to software standby mode. • Modes 4 to 6 The corresponding port B pins become address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, irrespective of the value of the PBDDR bits. When pins are not used as address outputs, setting a PBDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port B pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. • Mode 7 Setting a PBDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port B pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 491 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Port B Data Register (PBDR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PB7DR PB6DR PB5DR PB4DR PB3DR PB2DR PB1DR PB0DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PBDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port B pins (PB7 to PB0). PBDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port B Register (PORTB) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PB7 —* PB6 —* PB5 —* PB4 —* PB3 —* PB2 —* PB1 —* PB0 —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by state of pins PB7 to PB0. PORTB is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of output data for the port B pins (PB7 to PB0) must always be performed on PBDR. If a PORTB read is performed while PBDDR bits are set to 1, the PBDR values are read. If a PORTB read is performed while PBDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. After a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTB contents are determined by the pin states, as PBDDR and PBDR are initialized. PORTB retains its prior state in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 492 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Port B MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PBPCR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PB7PCR PB6PCR PB5PCR PB4PCR PB3PCR PB2PCR PB1PCR PB0PCR Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PBPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function incorporated into port B on an individual bit basis. In modes 4 to 6, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in PFCR, in the TPU’s TIOR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PBPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. In mode 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the TPU’s TIOR and in DDR, setting the corresponding PBPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. PBPCR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port B Open Drain Control Register (PBODR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PB7ODR PB6ODR PB5ODR PB4ODR PB3ODR PB2ODR PB1ODR PB0ODR Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PBODR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the PMOS on/off state for each port B pin (PB7 to PB0). When pins are not address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR, setting a PBODR bit makes the corresponding port B pin an NMOS open-drain output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin a CMOS output. PBODR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 493 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.8.3 Pin Functions Modes 4 to 6: In modes 4 to 6, the corresponding port B pins become address outputs in accordance with the setting of bits AE3 to AE0 in PFCR. When pins are not used as address outputs, they function as TPU I/O pins and I/O ports. Port B pin functions in modes 4 to 6 are shown in figure 10B.10. PB7 (I/O) / A15 (output) / TIOCB5 (I/O) PB6 (I/O) / A14 (output) / TIOCA5 (I/O) PB5 (I/O) / A13 (output) / TIOCB4 (I/O) PB4 (I/O) / A12 (output) / TIOCA4 (I/O) Port B PB3 (I/O) / A11 (output) / TIOCD3 (I/O) PB2 (I/O) / A10 (output) / TIOCC3 (I/O) PB1 (I/O) / A9 (output) / TIOCB3 (I/O) PB0 (I/O) / A8 (output) / TIOCA3 (I/O) Figure 10B.10 Port B Pin Functions (Modes 4 to 6) Mode 7: In mode 7, port B pins function as I/O ports and TPU I/O pins (TIOCA3, TIOCB3, TIOCC3, TIOCD3, TIOCA4, TIOCB4, TIOCA5, and TIOCB5). Input or output can be specified for each pin on an individual bit basis. Setting a PBDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port B pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Port B pin functions in mode 7 are shown in figure 10B.11. PB7 (I/O) / TIOCB5 (I/O) PB6 (I/O) / TIOCA5 (I/O) PB5 (I/O) / TIOCB4 (I/O) Port B PB4 (I/O) / TIOCA4 (I/O) PB3 (I/O) / TIOCD3 (I/O) PB2 (I/O) / TIOCC3 (I/O) PB1 (I/O) / TIOCB3 (I/O) PB0 (I/O) / TIOCA3 (I/O) Figure 10B.11 Port B Pin Functions (Mode 7) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 494 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.8.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function Port B has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. MOS input pull-up can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis. In modes 4 to 6, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in PFCR, in the TPU’s TIOR, and in DDR, setting the corresponding PBPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. In mode 7, if a pin is in the input state in accordance with the settings in the TPU’s TIOR and in DDR, setting the corresponding PBPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. The prior state is retained by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Table 10B.13 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 10B.13 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port B) Pin States Address output or TPU output Other than above Power-On Reset Hardware Standby Mode Manual Reset Software Standby Mode In Other Operations OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Legend: OFF: MOS input pull-up is always off. ON/OFF: On when PBDDR = 0 and PBPCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 495 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.9 Port C 10B.9.1 Overview Port C is an 8-bit I/O port. Port C has an address bus output function. The pin functions change according to the operating mode. Port C has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. Figure 10B.12 shows the port C pin configuration. Port C Port C pins Pin functions in modes 4 and 5 PC7/A7 A7 (output) PC6/A6 A6 (output) PC5/A5 A5 (output) PC4/A4 A4 (output) PC3/A3 A3 (output) PC2/A2 A2 (output) PC1/A1 A1 (output) PC0/A0 A0 (output) Pin functions in mode 6 Pin functions in mode 7 When PCDDR = 1 When PCDDR = 0 PC7 (I/O) A7 (output) PC7 (input) PC6 (I/O) A6 (output) PC6 (input) PC5 (I/O) A5 (output) PC5 (input) PC4 (I/O) A4 (output) PC4 (input) PC3 (I/O) A3 (output) PC3 (input) PC2 (I/O) A2 (output) PC2 (input) PC1 (I/O) A1 (output) PC1 (input) PC0 (I/O) A0 (output) PC0 (input) Figure 10B.12 Port C Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 496 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.9.2 Register Configuration Table 10B.14 shows the port C register configuration. Table 10B.14 Port C Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port C data direction register PCDDR W H'00 H'FE3B Port C data register PCDR R/W H'00 H'FF0B Port C register PORTC R Undefined H'FFBB Port C MOS pull-up control register PCPCR R/W H'00 H'FE42 Port C open-drain control register PCODR R/W H'00 H'FE49 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port C Data Direction Register (PCDDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PC7DDR PC6DDR PC5DDR PC4DDR PC3DDR PC2DDR PC1DDR PC0DDR Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W : PCDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port C. PCDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. PCDDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. The OPE bit in SBYCR is used to select whether the address output pins retain their output state or become high-impedance when the mode is changed to software standby mode. • Modes 4 and 5 The corresponding port C pins are address outputs irrespective of the value of the PCDDR bits. • Mode 6 Setting a PCDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port C pin an address output, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. • Mode 7 Setting a PCDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port C pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 497 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Port C Data Register (PCDR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PC7DR PC6DR PC5DR PC4DR PC3DR PC2DR PC1DR PC0DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PCDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port C pins (PC7 to PC0). PCDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port C Register (PORTC) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PC7 —* PC6 —* PC5 —* PC4 —* PC3 —* PC2 —* PC1 —* PC0 —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by state of pins PC7 to PC0. PORTC is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of output data for the port C pins (PC7 to PC0) must always be performed on PCDR. If a PORTC read is performed while PCDDR bits are set to 1, the PCDR values are read. If a PORTC read is performed while PCDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. After a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTC contents are determined by the pin states, as PCDDR and PCDR are initialized. PORTC retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 498 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Port C MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PCPCR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PC7PCR PC6PCR PC5PCR PC4PCR PC3PCR PC2PCR PC1PCR PC0PCR Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PCPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function incorporated into port C on an individual bit basis. In modes 6 and 7, if PCPCR is set to 1 when the port is in the input state in accordance with the settings of PCDDR, the MOS input pull-up is set to ON. PCPCR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port C Open Drain Control Register (PCODR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PC7ODR PC6ODR PC5ODR PC4ODR PC3ODR PC2ODR PC1ODR PC0ODR Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PCDDR is an 8-bit read/write register and controls PMOS on/off of each pin (PC7 to PC0) of port C. If PCODR is set to 1 by setting AE3 to AE0 in PFCR in mode other than address output mode, port C pins function as NMOS open drain outputs and when the setting is cleared to 0, the pins function as CMOS outputs. PCODR is initialized to H'00 in power-on reset mode or hardware standby mode. PCODR retains the last state in manual reset mode or software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 499 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.9.3 Pin Functions for Each Mode (1) Modes 4 and 5 In modes 4 and 5, port C pins function as address outputs automatically. Figure 10B.13 shows the port C pin functions. A7 (output) A6 (output) A5 (output) Port C A4 (output) A3 (output) A2 (output) A1 (output) A0 (output) Figure 10B.13 Port C Pin Functions (Modes 4 and 5) (2) Mode 6 In mode 6, port C pints function as address outputs or input ports and I/O can be specified in bit units. When each bit in PCDDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as an address output and when the bit cleared to 0, the pin functions as an input port. Figure 10B.14 shows the port C pin functions. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 500 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Port C PCDDR= 1 PCDDR= 0 A7 (output) PC7 (input) A6 (output) PC6 (input) A5 (output) PC5 (input) A4 (output) PC4 (input) A3 (output) PC3 (input) A2 (output) PC2 (input) A1 (output) PC1 (input) A0 (output) PC0 (input) Figure 10B.14 Port C Pin Functions (Mode 6) (3) Mode 7 In mode 7, port C pins function as I/O ports and I/O can be specified for each pin in bit units. When each bit in PCDDR is set to 1, the corresponding pin functions as an output port and when the bit is cleared to 0, the pin functions as an input port. Figure 10B.15 shows the port C pin functions. PC7 (I/O) PC6 (I/O) PC5 (I/O) Port C PC4 (I/O) PC3 (I/O) PC2 (I/O) PC1 (I/O) PC0 (I/O) Figure 10B.15 Port C Pin Functions (Mode 7) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 501 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.9.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function Port C has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used in modes 6 and 7, and can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis. In modes 6 and 7, when PCPCR is set to 1 in the input state by setting of PCDDR, the MOS input pull-up is set to ON. The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. The prior state is retained by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Table 10B.15 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 10B.15 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port C) Pin States Power-On Reset Hardware Standby Mode Address output OFF OFF Other than above Manual Reset In Other Operations OFF OFF OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF Legend: OFF: MOS input pull-up is always off. ON/OFF: On when PCDDR = 0 and PCPCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 502 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Software Standby Mode Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.10 Port D 10B.10.1 Overview Port D is an 8-bit I/O port. Port D has a data bus I/O function, and the pin functions change according to the operating mode. Port D has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. Figure 10B.16 shows the port D pin configuration. Port D Port D pins Pin functions in modes 4 to 6 PD7/D15 D15 (I/O) PD6/D14 D14 (I/O) PD5/D13 D13 (I/O) PD4/D12 D12 (I/O) PD3/D11 D11 (I/O) PD2/D10 D10 (I/O) PD1/D9 D9 (I/O) PD0/D8 D8 (I/O) Pin functions in mode 7 PD7 (I/O) PD6 (I/O) PD5 (I/O) PD4 (I/O) PD3 (I/O) PD2 (I/O) PD1 (I/O) PD0 (I/O) Figure 10B.16 Port D Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 503 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.10.2 Register Configuration Table 10B.16 shows the port D register configuration. Table 10B.16 Port D Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port D data direction register PDDDR W H'00 H'FE3C Port D data register PDDR R/W H'00 H'FF0C Port D register PORTD R Undefined H'FFBC Port D MOS pull-up control register PDPCR R/W H'00 H'FE43 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port D Data Direction Register (PDDDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PD7DDR PD6DDR PD5DDR PD4DDR PD3DDR PD2DDR PD1DDR PD0DDR Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W : PDDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port D. PDDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. PDDDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. • Modes 4 to 6 The input/output direction specification by PDDDR is ignored, and port D is automatically designated for data I/O. • Mode 7 Setting a PDDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port D pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 504 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Port D Data Register (PDDR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PD7DR PD6DR PD5DR PD4DR PD3DR PD2DR PD1DR PD0DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PDDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port D pins (PD7 to PD0). PDDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port D Register (PORTD) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PD7 —* PD6 —* PD5 —* PD4 —* PD3 —* PD2 —* PD1 —* PD0 —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by state of pins PD7 to PD0. PORTD is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of output data for the port D pins (PD7 to PD0) must always be performed on PDDR. If a PORTD read is performed while PDDDR bits are set to 1, the PDDR values are read. If a PORTD read is performed while PDDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. After a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTD contents are determined by the pin states, as PDDDR and PDDR are initialized. PORTD retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 505 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Port D MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PDPCR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PD7PCR PD6PCR PD5PCR PD4PCR PD3PCR PD2PCR PD1PCR PD0PCR Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PDPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function incorporated into port D on an individual bit basis. When a PDDDR bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting) in mode 7, setting the corresponding PDPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for the corresponding pin. PDPCR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. 10B.10.3 Pin Functions Modes 4 to 6: In modes 4 to 6, port D pins are automatically designated as data I/O pins. Port D pin functions in modes 4 to 6 are shown in figure 10B.17. D15 (I/O) D14 (I/O) D13 (I/O) Port D D12 (I/O) D11 (I/O) D10 (I/O) D9 (I/O) D8 (I/O) Figure 10B.17 Port D Pin Functions (Modes 4 to 6) Mode 7: In mode 7, port D pins function as I/O ports. Input or output can be specified for each pin on an individual bit basis. Setting a PDDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port D pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 506 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Port D pin functions in mode 7 are shown in figure 10B.18. PD7 (I/O) PD6 (I/O) PD5 (I/O) Port D PD4 (I/O) PD3 (I/O) PD2 (I/O) PD1 (I/O) PD0 (I/O) Figure 10B.18 Port D Pin Functions (Mode 7) 10B.10.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function Port D has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used in mode 7, and can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis. When a PDDDR bit is cleared to 0 in mode 7, setting the corresponding PDPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. The prior state is retained by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Table 10B.17 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 10B.17 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port D) Modes Power-On Reset Hardware Standby Mode Manual Reset Software Standby Mode In Other Operations 4 to 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF 7 Legend: OFF: MOS input pull-up is always off. ON/OFF: On when PDDDR = 0 and PDPCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 507 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.11 Port E 10B.11.1 Overview Port E is an 8-bit I/O port. Port E has a data bus I/O function, and the pin functions change according to the operating mode and whether 8-bit or 16-bit bus mode is selected. Port E has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. Figure 10B.19 shows the port E pin configuration. Port E Port E pins Pin functions in modes 4 to 6 PE7/D7 PE7 (I/O) / D7 (I/O) PE6/D6 PE6 (I/O) / D6 (I/O) PE5/D5 PE5 (I/O) / D5 (I/O) PE4/D4 PE4 (I/O) / D4 (I/O) PE3/D3 PE3 (I/O) / D3 (I/O) PE2/D2 PE2 (I/O) / D2 (I/O) PE1/D1 PE1 (I/O) / D1 (I/O) PE0/D0 PE0 (I/O) / D0 (I/O) Pin functions in mode 7 PE7 (I/O) PE6 (I/O) PE5 (I/O) PE4 (I/O) PE3 (I/O) PE2 (I/O) PE1 (I/O) PE0 (I/O) Figure 10B.19 Port E Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 508 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.11.2 Register Configuration Table 10B.18 shows the port E register configuration. Table 10B.18 Port E Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address* Port E data direction register PEDDR W H'00 H'FE3D Port E data register PEDR R/W H'00 H'FF0D Port E register PORTE R Undefined H'FFBD Port E MOS pull-up control register PEPCR R/W H'00 H'FE44 Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address. Port E Data Direction Register (PEDDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PE7DDR PE6DDR PE5DDR PE4DDR PE3DDR PE2DDR PE1DDR PE0DDR Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W : PEDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port E. PEDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. PEDDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. • Modes 4 to 6 When 8-bit bus mode has been selected, port E pins function as I/O ports. Setting a PEDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port E pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. When 16-bit bus mode has been selected, the input/output direction specification by PEDDR is ignored, and port E is designated for data I/O. For details of 8-bit and 16-bit bus modes, see section 7, Bus Controller. • Mode 7 Setting a PEDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port E pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 509 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Port E Data Register (PEDR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PE7DR PE6DR PE5DR PE4DR PE3DR PE2DR PE1DR PE0DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PEDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port E pins (PE7 to PE0). PEDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port E Register (PORTE) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PE7 —* PE6 —* PE5 —* PE4 —* PE3 —* PE2 —* PE1 —* PE0 —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by state of pins PE7 to PE0. PORTE is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of output data for the port E pins (PE7 to PE0) must always be performed on PEDR. If a PORTE read is performed while PEDDR bits are set to 1, the PEDR values are read. If a PORTE read is performed while PEDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. After a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTE contents are determined by the pin states, as PEDDR and PEDR are initialized. PORTE retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port E MOS Pull-Up Control Register (PEPCR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PE7PCR PE6PCR PE5PCR PE4PCR PE3PCR PE2PCR PE1PCR PE0PCR Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 510 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) PEPCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the MOS input pull-up function incorporated into port E on an individual bit basis. When a PEDDR bit is cleared to 0 (input port setting) with 8-bit bus mode selected in modes 4, 5, or 6, or in mode 7, setting the corresponding PEPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for the corresponding pin. PEPCR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. 10B.11.3 Pin Functions Modes 4 to 6: In modes 4 to 6, when 8-bit access is designated and 8-bit bus mode is selected, port E pins are automatically designated as I/O ports. Setting a PEDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port E pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. When 16-bit bus mode is selected, the input/output direction specification by PEDDR is ignored, and port E is designated for data I/O. Port E pin functions in modes 4 to 6 are shown in figure 10B.20. Port E 8-bit bus mode 16-bit bus mode PE7 (I/O) D7 (I/O) PE6 (I/O) D6 (I/O) PE5 (I/O) D5 (I/O) PE4 (I/O) D4 (I/O) PE3 (I/O) D3 (I/O) PE2 (I/O) D2 (I/O) PE1 (I/O) D1 (I/O) PE0 (I/O) D0 (I/O) Figure 10B.20 Port E Pin Functions (Modes 4 to 6) Mode 7: In mode 7, port E pins function as I/O ports. Input or output can be specified for each pin on a bit-by-bit basis. Setting a PEDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port E pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Port E pin functions in mode 7 are shown in figure 10B.21. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 511 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) PE7 (I/O) PE6 (I/O) PE5 (I/O) Port E PE4 (I/O) PE3 (I/O) PE2 (I/O) PE1 (I/O) PE0 (I/O) Figure 10B.21 Port E Pin Functions (Mode 7) 10B.11.4 MOS Input Pull-Up Function Port E has a built-in MOS input pull-up function that can be controlled by software. This MOS input pull-up function can be used in modes 4 to 6 when 8-bit bus mode is selected, or in mode 7, and can be specified as on or off on an individual bit basis. When a PEDDR bit is cleared to 0 in modes 4 to 6 when 8-bit bus mode is selected, or in mode 7, setting the corresponding PEPCR bit to 1 turns on the MOS input pull-up for that pin. The MOS input pull-up function is in the off state after a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. The prior state is retained by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Table 10B.19 summarizes the MOS input pull-up states. Table 10B.19 MOS Input Pull-Up States (Port E) Modes Power-On Reset Hardware Standby Mode Manual Reset Software Standby Mode In Other Operations 7 OFF OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF 4 to 6 8-bit bus 16-bit bus Legend: OFF: MOS input pull-up is always off. ON/OFF: On when PEDDR = 0 and PEPCR = 1; otherwise off. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 512 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.12 Port F 10B.12.1 Overview Port F is an 8-bit I/O port. Port F pins also function as external interrupt input pins (IRQ2 and IRQ3), A/D trigger input pin (ADTRG), bus control signal input/output pins (AS, RD, HWR, LWR, WAIT, BREQO, BREQ, and BACK), and the system clock (φ) output pin. Figure 10B.22 shows the port F pin configuration. Port F Port F pins Pin functions in modes 4 to 6 PF7/φ PF7 (input) / φ (output) PF6/AS AS (output) PF5/RD RD (output) PF4/HWR HWR (output) PF3/LWR/ADTRG/IRQ3 PF3 (I/O) / LWR (output) / ADTRG (input) / IRQ3 (input) PF2/WAIT/BREQO PF2 (I/O) / WAIT (input) / BREQO (output) PF1/BACK PF1 (I/O) / BACK (output) PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 PF0 (I/O) / BREQ (input) / IRQ2 (input) Pin functions in mode 7 PF7 (input) / φ (output) PF6 (I/O) PF5 (I/O) PF4 (I/O) PF3 (I/O) / ADTRG (input) / IRQ3 (input) PF2 (I/O) PF1 (I/O) PF0 (I/O) / IRQ2 (input) Figure 10B.22 Port F Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 513 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.12.2 Register Configuration Table 10B.20 shows the port F register configuration. Table 10B.20 Port F Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address*1 Port F data direction register PFDDR W H'80/H'00*2 H'FE3E Port F data register PFDR R/W H'00 H'FF0E Port F register PORTF R Undefined H'FFBE Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Initial value depends on the mode. Port F Data Direction Register (PFDDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PF7DDR PF6DDR PF5DDR PF4DDR PF3DDR PF2DDR PF1DDR PF0DDR Modes 4 to 6 Initial value : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W : W W W W W W W W Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W Mode 7 : PFDDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port F. PFDDR cannot be read; if it is, an undefined value will be read. PFDDR is initialized by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode, to H'80 in modes 4 to 6, and to H'00 in mode 7. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. The OPE bit in SBYCR is used to select whether the bus control output pins retain their output state or become high-impedance when a transition is made to software standby mode. • Modes 4 to 6 Pin PF7 functions as the φ output pin when the corresponding PFDDR bit is set to 1, and as an input port when the bit is cleared to 0. The input/output direction specified by PFDDR is ignored for pins PF6 to PF3, which are automatically designated as bus control outputs (AS, RD, HWR, and LWR). Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 514 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pins PF2 to PF0 are designated as bus control input/output pins (WAIT, BREQO, BACK, and BREQ) by means of bus controller settings. At other times, setting a PFDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port F pin an output port, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. • Mode 7 Setting a PFDDR bit to 1 makes the corresponding port F pin PF6 to PF0 an output port, or in the case of pin PF7, the φ output pin. Clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an input port. Port F Data Register (PFDR) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PF7DR PF6DR PF5DR PF4DR PF3DR PF2DR PF1DR PF0DR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PFDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for the port F pins (PF7 to PF0). PFDR is initialized to H'00 by a power-on reset, and in hardware standby mode. It retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Port F Register (PORTF) Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PF7 —* PF6 —* PF5 —* PF4 —* PF3 —* PF2 —* PF1 —* PF0 —* R R R R R R R R Note: * Determined by state of pins PF7 to PF0. PORTF is an 8-bit read-only register that shows the pin states. It cannot be written to. Writing of output data for the port F pins (PF7 to PF0) must always be performed on PFDR. If a PORTF read is performed while PFDDR bits are set to 1, the PFDR values are read. If a PORTF read is performed while PFDDR bits are cleared to 0, the pin states are read. After a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode, PORTF contents are determined by the pin states, as PFDDR and PFDR are initialized. PORTF retains its prior state by a manual reset or in software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 515 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.12.3 Pin Functions Port F pins also function as external interrupt input pins (IRQ2 and IRQ3), A/D trigger input pin (ADTRG), bus control signal input/output pins (AS, RD, HWR, LWR, WAIT, BREQO, BREQ, and BACK), and the system clock (φ) output pin. The pin functions differ between modes 4 to 6, and mode 7. Port F pin functions are shown in table 10B.21. Table 10B.21 Port F Pin Functions Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions PF7/φ The pin function is switched as shown below according to bit PF7DDR. PF7DDR Pin function PF6/AS PF7 input pin φ output pin Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 PF6DDR — AS output pin Mode 7 0 1 PF6 input pin PF6 output pin The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bit PF5DDR. Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 PF5DDR Pin function PF4/HWR 1 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode and bits BREQOE, WAITE, ABW5 to ABW2, and PF2DDR. Pin function PF5/RD 0 — RD output pin Mode 7 0 1 PF5 input pin PF5 output pin The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bit PF4DDR. Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 PF4DDR — Pin function HWR Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 516 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 output pin Mode 7 0 1 PF4 input pin PF4 output pin Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions PF3/LWR/ADTRG/ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode, IRQ3 the bus mode, A/D converter bits TRGS1 and TRGS0, and bit PF3DDR. Operating mode Modes 4 to 6 Bus mode 16-bit bus mode PF3DDR — Pin function Mode 7 8-bit bus mode 0 — 1 0 1 output PF3 input PF3 output PF3 input PF3 output pin pin pin pin pin 1 * ADTRG input pin LWR IRQ3 input pin*2 Notes: 1. ADTRG input when TRGS0 = TRGS1 = 1. 2. When used as an external interrupt input pin, do not use as an I/O pin for another function. PF2/ WAIT/ BREQO The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode and bits BREQOE, WAITE, ABW5 to ABW2, and PF2DDR. Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 BREQOE 0 WAITE PF2DDR Pin function PF1/BACK Mode 7 0 1 1 — — — 0 1 — — 0 1 PF2 input pin PF2 output pin WAIT BREQO input pin output pin PF2 input pin PF2 output pin The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode and bits BRLE and PF1DDR. Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 BRLE 0 PF1DDR Pin function 0 Mode 7 1 1 — PF1 input PF1 output BACK pin pin output pin — 0 1 PF1 input PF1 output pin pin Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 517 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions PF0/BREQ/IRQ2 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the combination of the operating mode, and bits BRLE and PF0DDR. Operating Mode Modes 4 to 6 BRLE Mode 7 0 PF0DDR Pin function 1 — 0 1 — 0 1 PF0 input pin PF0 output pin BREQ input pin PF0 input pin PF0 output pin IRQ2 input pin 10B.13 Port G 10B.13.1 Overview Port G is a 5-bit I/O port and also used as external interrupt input pins (IRQ6 and IRQ7) and bus control signal output pins (CS0 to CS3). Figure 10B.23 shows the configuration of port G pins. Port G pin Port G Pin Functions in Modes 4 to 6 PG4 / CS0 PG4 (input) / CS0 (output) PG3 / CS1 PG3 (input) / CS1 (output) PG2 / CS2 PG2 (input) / CS2 (output) PG1 / CS3 / IRQ7 PG1 (input) / CS3 (output) / IRQ7 (input) PG0 / IRQ6 PG0 (I/O) / IRQ6 (input) Pin Functions in Mode 7 PG4 (I/O) PG3 (I/O) PG2 (I/O) PG1 (I/O) / IRQ7 (input) PG0 (I/O) / IRQ6 (input) Figure 10B.23 Port G Pin Functions Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 518 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) 10B.13.2 Register Configuration Table 10B.22 shows the port G register configuration. Table 10B.22 Port G Registers Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value*2 Address*1 Port G data direction register PGDDR W H'10/H'00*3 H'FE3F Port G data register PGDR R/W H'00 H'FF0F Port G register PORTG R Undefined H'FFBF Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Value of bits 4 to 0. 3. The initial value varies according to the mode. Port G Data Direction Register (PGDDR) Bit : 7 6 5 — — — 4 3 2 1 0 PG4DDR PG3DDR PG2DDR PG1DDR PG0DDR Modes 4 and 5 Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined 1 0 0 0 0 R/W : W W W W W — — — Modes 6 and 7 Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined 0 0 0 0 0 R/W : W W W W W — — — PGDDR is an 8-bit write only register and specifies I/O of each pin of port G in bit units. Read processing is invalid. Bits 7 to 5 are reserved bits. When the contents are read, undefined values are read. In modes 4 and 5, the PGDDR bits are initialized to H'10 (bits 4 to 0) in power-on reset or hardware standby mode, in modes 6 and 7, the bits are initialized to H'00 (bits 4 to 0). In manual reset or software standby mode, PGDDR retains the last status. Use the OPE bit of SBYCR to select whether the bus control output pin retains the output state or becomes the high-impedance when the mode is changed to a software standby mode. • Modes 4 to 6 When PGDDR is set to 1, pins PG4 to PG1 function as bus control signal output pins (CS0 to CS3). When PGDDR is cleared to 0, the pins function as input ports. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 519 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) When PGDDR is set to 1, the PG0 pin functions as an output port, and when PGDDR is cleared to 0, it functions as an input port. • Mode 7 PGDDR to 1 it becomes an output port, and by clearing it to 0 it becomes an input port. Port G Data Register (PGDR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — PG4DR PG3DR PG2DR PG1DR PG0DR Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined R/W : — — — 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PGDR is an 8-bit read/write register and stores output data of port G output pins (PG4 to PG0). Bits 7 to 5 are reserved bits. When the contents are read, undefined values are read. Write processing is invalid. In power-on reset or hardware standby mode, PGDR is initialized to H'00 (bits 4 to 0). In manual reset or software standby mode, PGDR retains the last state. (3) Port G Register (PORTG) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — PG4 PG3 PG2 PG1 PG0 —* —* —* —* —* R R R R R Initial value : Undefined Undefined Undefined R/W : — — — Note: * Determined by the state of PG4 to PG0 PORTG is an 8-bit read only register and reflects the pin state. Write processing is invalid. Write processing of output data of port G pins (PG4 to PG0) must be performed for PGDR. Bits 7 to 5 are reserved bits. When the contents are read, undefined values are read. Write processing is invalid. If PORTG is read when PGDDR is set to 1, the value in PGDR is read. If PORTG is read when PGDDR is cleared to 0, the pin state is read. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 520 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) In power-on reset or hardware standby mode, port G is determined by the pin state because PGDDR and PGDR are initialized. In manual reset or software standby mode, the last state is retained. 10B.13.3 Pin Functions Port G is used also as external interrupt input pins (IRQ6 and IRQ7) and bus control signal output pins (CS0 to CS3). The pin functions are different between modes 4 and 6, and mode 7. Table 10B.23 shows the port G pin functions. Table 10B.23 Port G Pin Functions Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions PG4/CS0 The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bit PG4DDR. Modes 4 to 6 Operating Mode PG4DDR Pin function PG3/CS1 0 1 PG4 input pin CS0 output pin 0 1 PG4 input pin PG4 output pin The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bit PG3DDR. Modes 4 to 6 Operating Mode PG3DDR Pin function PG2/CS2 Mode 7 0 Mode 7 1 PG3 input pin CS1 output pin 0 1 PG3 input pin PG3 output pin The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bit PG2DDR. Operating Mode PG2DDR Pin function Modes 4 to 6 0 PG2 input pin Mode 7 1 CS2 output pin 0 1 PG2 input pin PG2 output pin Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 521 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 10B I/O Ports (H8S/2695) Pin Selection Method and Pin Functions PG1/CS3/ The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bits OES and PG1DDR in BCRL. IRQ7 Operating Mode PG1DDR Pin function Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7 0 1 0 1 PG1 input pin CS3 output pin PG1 input pin PG1 output pin IRQ7 PG0/IRQ6 input The pin function is switched as shown below according to the operating mode and bits RMTS2 to RMTS0 in BCRH. Operating Mode PG0DDR Pin function Modes 4 to 6 Mode 7 0 1 0 1 PG0 input pin PG0 output pin PG0 input pin PG0 output pin IRQ6 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 522 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 input Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.1 Overview The H8S/2633 Group has an on-chip 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU) that comprises six 16-bit timer channels. 11.1.1 Features • Maximum 16-pulse input/output A total of 16 timer general registers (TGRs) are provided (four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5), each of which can be set independently as an output compare/input capture register TGRC and TGRD for channels 0 and 3 can also be used as buffer registers • Selection of 8 counter input clocks for each channel • The following operations can be set for each channel: Waveform output at compare match: Selection of 0, 1, or toggle output Input capture function: Selection of rising edge, falling edge, or both edge detection Counter clear operation: Counter clearing possible by compare match or input capture Synchronous operation: Multiple timer counters (TCNT) can be written to simultaneously Simultaneous clearing by compare match and input capture possible Register simultaneous input/output possible by counter synchronous operation • • • • PWM mode: Any PWM output duty can be set Maximum of 15-phase PWM output possible by combination with synchronous operation Buffer operation settable for channels 0 and 3 Input capture register double-buffering possible Automatic rewriting of output compare register possible Phase counting mode settable independently for each of channels 1, 2, 4, and 5 Two-phase encoder pulse up/down-count possible Cascaded operation Channel 2 (channel 5) input clock operates as 32-bit counter by setting channel 1 (channel 4) overflow/underflow Fast access via internal 16-bit bus Fast access is possible via a 16-bit bus interface Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 523 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) • 26 interrupt sources For channels 0 and 3, four compare match/input capture dual-function interrupts and one overflow interrupt can be requested independently For channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, two compare match/input capture dual-function interrupts, one overflow interrupt, and one underflow interrupt can be requested independently • Automatic transfer of register data Block transfer, 1-word data transfer, and 1-byte data transfer possible by data transfer controller (DTC)* or DMA controller (DMAC)* • Programmable pulse generator (PPG)* output trigger can be generated Channels 0 to 3 compare match/input capture signals can be used as PPG output trigger • A/D converter conversion start trigger can be generated Channels 0 to 5 compare match A/input capture A signals can be used as A/D converter conversion start trigger • Module stop mode can be set As the initial setting, TPU operation is halted. Register access is enabled by exiting module stop mode Table 11.1 lists the functions of the TPU. Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 524 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 11.1 TPU Functions Item Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Count clock φ/1 φ/4 φ/16 φ/64 TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TCLKD φ/1 φ/4 φ/16 φ/64 φ/256 TCLKA TCLKB φ/1 φ/4 φ/16 φ/64 φ/1024 TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC φ/1 φ/4 φ/16 φ/64 φ/256 φ/1024 φ/4096 TCLKA φ/1 φ/4 φ/16 φ/64 φ/1024 TCLKA TCLKC φ/1 φ/4 φ/16 φ/64 φ/256 TCLKA TCLKC TCLKD General registers TGR0A TGR0B TGR1A TGR1B TGR2A TGR2B TGR3A TGR3B TGR4A TGR4B TGR5A TGR5B General registers/ buffer registers TGR0C TGR0D — — TGR3C TGR3D — — I/O pins TIOCA0 TIOCB0 TIOCC0 TIOCD0 TIOCA1 TIOCB1 TIOCA2 TIOCB2 TIOCA3 TIOCB3 TIOCC3 TIOCD3 TIOCA4 TIOCB4 TIOCA5 TIOCB5 Counter clear function TGR compare match or input capture TGR compare match or input capture TGR compare match or input capture TGR compare match or input capture TGR compare match or input capture TGR compare match or input capture — — Compare 0 output match 1 output output Toggle output Input capture function Synchronous operation PWM mode Phase counting mode Buffer operation — — — — Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 525 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Item Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 DMAC TGR0A activation* compare match or input capture TGR1A compare match or input capture TGR2A compare match or input capture TGR3A compare match or input capture TGR4A compare match or input capture TGR5A compare match or input capture DTC TGR activation* compare match or input capture TGR compare match or input capture TGR compare match or input capture TGR compare match or input capture TGR compare match or input capture TGR compare match or input capture A/D converter trigger TGR0A compare match or input capture TGR1A compare match or input capture TGR2A compare match or input capture TGR3A compare match or input capture TGR4A compare match or input capture TGR5A compare match or input capture PPG trigger* TGR0A/ TGR0B compare match or input capture TGR1A/ TGR1B compare match or input capture TGR2A/ TGR2B compare match or input capture — TGR3A/ TGR3B compare match or input capture — Interrupt sources 5 sources 4 sources 4 sources 5 sources 4 sources 4 sources • Compare • Compare • Compare • Compare • Compare • Compare match or match or match or match or match or match or input input input input input input capture 0A capture 1A capture 2A capture 3A capture 4A capture 5A • Compare • Compare • Compare • Compare • Compare • Compare match or match or match or match or match or match or input input input input input input capture 0B capture 1B capture 2B capture 3B capture 4B capture 5B • Compare • Overflow match or • Underflow input capture 0C • Overflow • Underflow • Compare • Overflow match or • Underflow input capture 3C • Compare match or input capture 0D • Compare match or input capture 3D • Overflow • Overflow Legend: : Possible —: Not possible Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 526 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 • Overflow • Underflow Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.1.2 Block Diagram TGRD TGRB TGRC TGRB A/D converter convertion start signal TGRB PPG output trigger signal TGRD TGRB TGRB TCNT Interrupt request signals Channel 3: TGI3A TGI3B TGI3C TGI3D TCI3V Channel 4: TGI4A TGI4B TCI4V TCI4U Channel 5: TGI5A TGI5B TCI5V TCI5U Internal data bus TGRC TGRA TCNT TCNT TGRA Bus interface TGRB TCNT TCNT TGRA TCNT TGRA Module data bus TGRA TSR TSR TIER TIER TSR TIOR TIORH TIORL TGRA TSR TIER TSR TSTR TSYR TIER TSR TIER TIOR TIOR Control logic TIOR TIER TMDR TIORH TIORL TCR TMDR Channel 4 TCR TMDR Channel 5 Common TCR TMDR TCR TMDR Channel 1 TCR Channel 0 TIOR (H, L): TIER: TSR: TGR (A, B, C, D): TMDR Channel 2 Legend: TSTR: Timer start register TSYR: Timer synchro register TCR: Timer control register TMDR: Timer mode register Control logic for channels 0 to 2 Input/output pins TIOCA0 Channel 0: TIOCB0 TIOCC0 TIOCD0 TIOCA1 Channel 1: TIOCB1 TIOCA2 Channel 2: TIOCB2 TCR Clock input Internal clock: ø/1 ø/4 ø/16 ø/64 ø/256 ø/1024 ø/4096 External clock: TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TCLKD Control logic for channels 3 to 5 Input/output pins Channel 3: TIOCA3 TIOCB3 TIOCC3 TIOCD3 TIOCA4 Channel 4: TIOCB4 TIOCA5 Channel 5: TIOCB5 Channel 3 Figure 11.1 shows a block diagram of the TPU. Interrupt request signals Channel 0: TGI0A TGI0B TGI0C TGI0D TCI0V Channel 1: TGI1A TGI1B TCI1V TCI1U Channel 2: TGI2A TGI2B TCI2V TCI2U Timer I/O control registers (H, L) Timer interrupt enable register Timer status register Timer general registers (A, B, C, D) Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of TPU Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 527 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 11.2 summarizes the TPU pins. Table 11.2 TPU Pins Channel Name Symbol I/O Function All Clock input A TCLKA Input External clock A input pin (Channel 1 and 5 phase counting mode A phase input) Clock input B TCLKB Input External clock B input pin (Channel 1 and 5 phase counting mode B phase input) Clock input C TCLKC Input External clock C input pin (Channel 2 and 4 phase counting mode A phase input) Clock input D TCLKD Input External clock D input pin (Channel 2 and 4 phase counting mode B phase input) Input capture/out compare match A0 TIOCA0 I/O TGR0A input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin Input capture/out compare match B0 TIOCB0 I/O TGR0B input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin Input capture/out compare match C0 TIOCC0 I/O TGR0C input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin Input capture/out compare match D0 TIOCD0 I/O TGR0D input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin Input capture/out compare match A1 TIOCA1 I/O TGR1A input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin Input capture/out compare match B1 TIOCB1 I/O TGR1B input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin Input capture/out compare match A2 TIOCA2 I/O TGR2A input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin Input capture/out compare match B2 TIOCB2 I/O TGR2B input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin 0 1 2 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 528 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Channel Name Symbol I/O Function 3 Input capture/out compare match A3 TIOCA3 I/O TGR3A input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin Input capture/out compare match B3 TIOCB3 I/O TGR3B input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin Input capture/out compare match C3 TIOCC3 I/O TGR3C input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin Input capture/out compare match D3 TIOCD3 I/O TGR3D input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin Input capture/out compare match A4 TIOCA4 I/O TGR4A input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin Input capture/out compare match B4 TIOCB4 I/O TGR4B input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin Input capture/out compare match A5 TIOCA5 I/O TGR5A input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin Input capture/out compare match B5 TIOCB5 I/O TGR5B input capture input/output compare output/PWM output pin 4 5 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 529 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.1.4 Register Configuration Table 11.3 summarizes the TPU registers. Table 11.3 TPU Registers Address*1 Channel Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value 0 Timer control register 0 TCR0 R/W H'00 H'FF10 Timer mode register 0 TMDR0 R/W H'C0 H'FF11 Timer I/O control register 0H TIOR0H R/W H'00 H'FF12 Timer I/O control register 0L TIOR0L R/W H'00 H'FF13 Timer interrupt enable register 0 TIER0 R/W H'FF14 Timer status register 0 TSR0 H'40 2 * R/(W) H'C0 Timer counter 0 TCNT0 R/W H'0000 H'FF16 Timer general register 0A TGR0A R/W H'FFFF H'FF18 Timer general register 0B TGR0B R/W H'FFFF H'FF1A Timer general register 0C TGR0C R/W H'FFFF H'FF1C Timer general register 0D TGR0D R/W H'FFFF H'FF1E 1 2 H'FF15 Timer control register 1 TCR1 R/W H'00 H'FF20 Timer mode register 1 TMDR1 R/W H'C0 H'FF21 Timer I/O control register 1 TIOR1 R/W H'00 H'FF22 Timer interrupt enable register 1 TIER1 R/W H'FF24 Timer status register 1 TSR1 H'40 2 * R/(W) H'C0 Timer counter 1 TCNT1 R/W H'0000 H'FF26 Timer general register 1A TGR1A R/W H'FFFF H'FF28 Timer general register 1B TGR1B R/W H'FFFF H'FF2A Timer control register 2 TCR2 R/W H'00 H'FF30 Timer mode register 2 TMDR2 R/W H'C0 H'FF31 Timer I/O control register 2 TIOR2 R/W H'00 H'FF32 H'FF25 Timer interrupt enable register 2 TIER2 R/W H'40 H'FF34 Timer status register 2 TSR2 R/(W) *2 H'C0 H'FF35 Timer counter 2 TCNT2 R/W H'0000 H'FF36 Timer general register 2A TGR2A R/W H'FFFF H'FF38 Timer general register 2B TGR2B R/W H'FFFF H'FF3A Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 530 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Channel Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address*1 3 Timer control register 3 TCR3 R/W H'00 H'FE80 Timer mode register 3 TMDR3 R/W H'C0 H'FE81 Timer I/O control register 3H TIOR3H R/W H'00 H'FE82 Timer I/O control register 3L TIOR3L R/W H'00 H'FE83 Timer interrupt enable register 3 TIER3 R/W H'FE84 Timer status register 3 TSR3 H'40 2 * R/(W) H'C0 H'FE85 Timer counter 3 TCNT3 R/W H'0000 H'FE86 Timer general register 3A TGR3A R/W H'FFFF H'FE88 Timer general register 3B TGR3B R/W H'FFFF H'FE8A Timer general register 3C TGR3C R/W H'FFFF H'FE8C Timer general register 3D TGR3D R/W H'FFFF H'FE8E Timer control register 4 TCR4 R/W H'00 H'FE90 4 5 All Timer mode register 4 TMDR4 R/W H'C0 H'FE91 Timer I/O control register 4 TIOR4 R/W H'00 H'FE92 Timer interrupt enable register 4 TIER4 R/W H'40 H'FE94 H'C0 H'FE95 *2 Timer status register 4 TSR4 R/(W) Timer counter 4 TCNT4 R/W H'0000 H'FE96 Timer general register 4A TGR4A R/W H'FFFF H'FE98 Timer general register 4B TGR4B R/W H'FFFF H'FE9A Timer control register 5 TCR5 R/W H'00 H'FEA0 Timer mode register 5 TMDR5 R/W H'C0 H'FEA1 Timer I/O control register 5 TIOR5 R/W H'00 H'FEA2 Timer interrupt enable register 5 TIER5 R/W H'FEA4 Timer status register 5 TSR5 H'40 2 * R/(W) H'C0 H'FEA5 Timer counter 5 TCNT5 R/W H'0000 H'FEA6 Timer general register 5A TGR5A R/W H'FFFF H'FEA8 Timer general register 5B TGR5B R/W H'FFFF H'FEAA Timer start register TSTR R/W H'00 H'FEB0 Timer synchro register TSYR R/W H'00 H'FEB1 Module stop control register A MSTPCRA R/W H'3F H'FDE8 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 531 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.2 Register Descriptions 11.2.1 Timer Control Register (TCR) Channel 0: TCR0 Channel 3: TCR3 Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value : R/W : Channel 1: TCR1 Channel 2: TCR2 Channel 4: TCR4 Channel 5: TCR5 Bit : — CCLR1 CCLR0 CKEG1 CKEG0 TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W : The TCR registers are 8-bit registers that control the TCNT channels. The TPU has six TCR registers, one for each of channels 0 to 5. The TCR registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. TCR register settings should be made only when TCNT operation is stopped. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 532 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bits 7, 6, and 5—Counter Clear 2, 1, and 0 (CCLR2, CCLR1, CCLR0): These bits select the TCNT counter clearing source. Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Channel CCLR2 CCLR1 CCLR0 Description 0, 3 0 0 0 TCNT clearing disabled 1 TCNT cleared by TGRA compare match/input capture 0 TCNT cleared by TGRB compare match/input capture 1 TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/ synchronous operation *1 0 TCNT clearing disabled 1 TCNT cleared by TGRC compare match/input 2 capture * 0 TCNT cleared by TGRD compare match/input capture *2 1 TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/ synchronous operation *1 1 1 0 1 Bit 7 Channel Reserved 1, 2, 4, 5 0 *3 (Initial value) Bit 6 Bit 5 CCLR1 CCLR0 Description 0 0 TCNT clearing disabled 1 TCNT cleared by TGRA compare match/input capture 0 TCNT cleared by TGRB compare match/input capture 1 TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another channel performing synchronous clearing/ synchronous operation *1 1 (Initial value) Notes: 1. Synchronous operation setting is performed by setting the SYNC bit in TSYR to 1. 2. When TGRC or TGRD is used as a buffer register, TCNT is not cleared because the buffer register setting has priority, and compare match/input capture does not occur. 3. Bit 7 is reserved in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 533 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bits 4 and 3—Clock Edge 1 and 0 (CKEG1, CKEG0): These bits select the input clock edge. When the input clock is counted using both edges, the input clock period is halved (e.g. φ/4 both edges = φ/2 rising edge). If phase counting mode is used on channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, this setting is ignored and the phase counting mode setting has priority. Bit 4 Bit 3 CKEG1 CKEG0 Description 0 0 Count at rising edge 1 Count at falling edge — Count at both edges 1 (Initial value) Note: Internal clock edge selection is valid when the input clock is φ/4 or slower. This setting is ignored if the input clock is φ/1, or when overflow/underflow of another channel is selected. (The clock is counted at the falling edge when φ/1 is selected.) Bits 2 to 0—Time Prescaler 2 to 0 (TPSC2 to TPSC0): These bits select the TCNT counter clock. The clock source can be selected independently for each channel. Table 11.4 shows the clock sources that can be set for each channel. Table 11.4 TPU Clock Sources Internal Clock Channel φ/1 φ/4 φ/16 φ/64 φ/256 φ/1024 0 1 2 3 4 5 Legend: : Setting Blank: No setting Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 534 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 φ/4096 Overflow/ Underflow External Clock on Another TCLKA TCLKB TCLKC TCLKD Channel Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 Description 0 0 0 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/1 1 Internal clock: counts on φ/4 1 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/16 1 Internal clock: counts on φ/64 0 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input 1 External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input 0 External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input 1 External clock: counts on TCLKD pin input 1 0 1 (Initial value) Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 Description 1 0 0 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/1 1 Internal clock: counts on φ/4 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/16 1 Internal clock: counts on φ/64 0 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input 1 External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/256 1 Counts on TCNT2 overflow/underflow 1 1 0 1 (Initial value) Note: This setting is ignored when channel 1 is in phase counting mode. Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 2 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/1 1 Internal clock: counts on φ/4 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/16 1 Internal clock: counts on φ/64 0 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input 1 External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input 0 External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input 1 Internal clock: counts on φ/1024 (Initial value) Note: This setting is ignored when channel 2 is in phase counting mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 535 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 Description 3 0 0 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/1 1 Internal clock: counts on φ/4 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/16 1 Internal clock: counts on φ/64 0 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input 1 Internal clock: counts on φ/1024 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/256 1 Internal clock: counts on φ/4096 1 1 0 1 (Initial value) Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 Description 4 0 0 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/1 1 Internal clock: counts on φ/4 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/16 1 Internal clock: counts on φ/64 0 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input 1 External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/1024 1 Counts on TCNT5 overflow/underflow 1 1 0 1 (Initial value) Note: This setting is ignored when channel 4 is in phase counting mode. Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel TPSC2 TPSC1 TPSC0 5 0 0 1 1 0 1 Description 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/1 1 Internal clock: counts on φ/4 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/16 1 Internal clock: counts on φ/64 0 External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input (Initial value) 1 External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input 0 Internal clock: counts on φ/256 1 External clock: counts on TCLKD pin input Note: This setting is ignored when channel 5 is in phase counting mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 536 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.2.2 Timer Mode Register (TMDR) Channel 0: TMDR0 Channel 3: TMDR3 Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — BFB BFA MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0 Initial value : 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W — — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — — MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0 : Channel 1: TMDR1 Channel 2: TMDR2 Channel 4: TMDR4 Channel 5: TMDR5 Bit : Initial value : 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W — — — — R/W R/W R/W R/W : The TMDR registers are 8-bit readable/writable registers that are used to set the operating mode for each channel. The TPU has six TMDR registers, one for each channel. The TMDR registers are initialized to H'C0 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. TMDR register settings should be made only when TCNT operation is stopped. Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Bit 5—Buffer Operation B (BFB): Specifies whether TGRB is to operate in the normal way, or TGRB and TGRD are to be used together for buffer operation. When TGRD is used as a buffer register, TGRD input capture/output compare is not generated. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, which have no TGRD, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 537 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 5 BFB Description 0 TGRB operates normally 1 TGRB and TGRD used together for buffer operation (Initial value) Bit 4—Buffer Operation A (BFA): Specifies whether TGRA is to operate in the normal way, or TGRA and TGRC are to be used together for buffer operation. When TGRC is used as a buffer register, TGRC input capture/output compare is not generated. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, which have no TGRC, bit 4 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Bit 4 BFA Description 0 TGRA operates normally 1 TGRA and TGRC used together for buffer operation (Initial value) Bits 3 to 0—Modes 3 to 0 (MD3 to MD0): These bits are used to set the timer operating mode. Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 MD3*1 MD2*2 MD1 MD0 Description 0 0 0 0 Normal operation 1 Reserved 0 PWM mode 1 1 PWM mode 2 0 Phase counting mode 1 1 Phase counting mode 2 0 Phase counting mode 3 1 Phase counting mode 4 * — 1 1 0 1 1 * * (Initial value) *: Don’t care Notes: 1. MD3 is a reserved bit. In a write, it should always be written with 0. 2. Phase counting mode cannot be set for channels 0 and 3. In this case, 0 should always be written to MD2. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 538 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.2.3 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR) Channel 0: TIOR0H Channel 1: TIOR1 Channel 2: TIOR2 Channel 3: TIOR3H Channel 4: TIOR4 Channel 5: TIOR5 Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IOD3 IOD2 IOD1 IOD0 IOC3 IOC2 IOC1 IOC0 Channel 0: TIOR0L Channel 3: TIOR3L Bit : Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: When TGRC or TGRD is designated for buffer operation, this setting is invalid and the register operates as a buffer register. The TIOR registers are 8-bit registers that control the TGR registers. The TPU has eight TIOR registers, two each for channels 0 and 3, and one each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. The TIOR registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. Care is required since TIOR is affected by the TMDR setting. The initial output specified by TIOR is valid when the counter is stopped (the CST bit in TSTR is cleared to 0). Note also that, in PWM mode 2, the output at the point at which the counter is cleared to 0 is specified. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 539 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bits 7 to 4— I/O Control B3 to B0 (IOB3 to IOB0) I/O Control D3 to D0 (IOD3 to IOD0): Bits IOB3 to IOB0 specify the function of TGRB. Bits IOD3 to IOD0 specify the function of TGRD. Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Channel IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 TGR0B is output compare register Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Output disabled 1 Initial output is 1 output 0 0 1 1 Note: 1 * * * 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match 1 1 (Initial value) 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match TGR0B is input capture register Capture input source is TIOCB0 pin Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input Input capture at TCNT1 1 source is channel count- up/count-down* 1/count clock *: Don’t care 1. When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR1 are set to B'000 and φ/1 is used as the TCNT1 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 540 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Channel IOD3 IOD2 IOD1 IOD0 Description 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 Output disabled TGR0D is output Initial output is 0 compare output 2 register* 1 1 0 1 0 Output disabled Initial output is 1 output 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 * * * 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match 1 0 (Initial value) 0 output at compare match 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match TGR0D Capture input is input source is capture TIOCD0 pin register*2 Capture input source is channel 1/count clock Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Input capture at TCNT1 1 count-up/count-down* *: Don’t care Notes: 1. When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR1 are set to B'000 and φ/1 is used as the TCNT1 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated. 2. When the BFB bit in TMDR0 is set to 1 and TGR0D is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 541 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Channel IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 TGR1B is output compare register Output disabled 1 1 0 1 Toggle output at compare match 0 Output disabled 1 Initial output is 1 output 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 * * * (Initial value) Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match output 1 output at compare match 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match TGR1B is input capture register Capture input source is TIOCB1 pin Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input Input capture at generation of source is TGR0C TGR0C compare match/input compare match/ capture input capture *: Don’t care Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Channel IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 TGR2B is output compare register Output disabled 1 1 0 1 Toggle output at compare match 0 Output disabled 1 Initial output is 1 output 0 1 1 * 0 0 1 1 * (Initial value) Initial output is 0 0 output at compare match output 1 output at compare match 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match TGR2B is input capture register Capture input source is TIOCB2 pin Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges *: Don’t care Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 542 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Channel IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 TGR3B is output compare register Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Output disabled 1 Initial output is 1 output 0 0 1 1 Note: 1 * * * 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match 1 1 (Initial value) 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match TGR3B is input capture register Capture input source is TIOCB3 pin Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input Input capture at TCNT4 source is channel count-up/count-down*1 4/count clock *: Don’t care 1. When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR4 are set to B'000 and φ/1 is used as the TCNT4 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 543 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Channel IOD3 IOD2 IOD1 IOD0 Description 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 Output disabled TGR3D is output Initial output is 0 compare output 2 register* 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Output disabled 1 Initial output is 1 output 0 0 1 1 1 * * * 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match 1 1 (Initial value) 0 output at compare match 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match TGR3D Capture input is input source is capture TIOCD3 pin register*2 Capture input source is channel 4/count clock Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Input capture at TCNT4 1 count-up/count-down* *: Don’t care Notes: 1. When bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR4 are set to B'000 and φ/1 is used as the TCNT4 count clock, this setting is invalid and input capture is not generated. 2. When the BFB bit in TMDR3 is set to 1 and TGR3D is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 544 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Channel IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description 4 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 TGR4B is output compare register Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Output disabled 1 Initial output is 1 output 0 0 1 1 1 * * * 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match 1 1 (Initial value) 0 output at compare match 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match TGR4B is input capture register Capture input source is TIOCB4 pin Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input Input capture at generation of source is TGR3C TGR3C compare match/ compare match/ input capture input capture *: Don’t care Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Channel IOB3 IOB2 IOB1 IOB0 Description 5 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 TGR5B is output compare register Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 1 1 0 1 * 0 0 Output disabled 1 Initial output is 1 output 0 0 1 1 * 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match 1 1 (Initial value) 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match TGR5B is input capture register Capture input source is TIOCB5 pin Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges *: Don’t care Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 545 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bits 3 to 0— I/O Control A3 to A0 (IOA3 to IOA0) I/O Control C3 to C0 (IOC3 to IOC0): IOA3 to IOA0 specify the function of TGRA. IOC3 to IOC0 specify the function of TGRC. Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 TGR0A is output compare register Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Output disabled 1 Initial output is 1 output 0 0 1 1 1 * * * 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match 1 1 (Initial value) 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match TGR0A is input capture register Capture input source is TIOCA0 pin Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input Input capture at TCNT1 source is channel count-up/count-down 1/ count clock *: Don’t care Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 546 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel IOC3 IOC2 IOC1 IOC0 Description 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 Output disabled TGR0C is output Initial output is 0 compare output 1 register* 0 1 0 Output disabled 1 Initial output is 1 output 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 Note: 1 * * * 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match 1 1 (Initial value) 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match TGR0C Capture input is input source is capture TIOCC0 pin register*1 Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input Input capture at TCNT1 source is channel count-up/count-down 1/count clock *: Don’t care 1. When the BFA bit in TMDR0 is set to 1 and TGR0C is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 547 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 TGR1A is output compare register Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 0 0 Output disabled 1 1 0 Initial output is 1 output 1 1 0 0 0 1 * * * 1 1 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match 1 1 (Initial value) 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match TGR1A is input capture register Capture input source is TIOCA1 pin Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input Input capture at generation of source is TGR0A channel 0/TGR0A compare compare match/ match/input capture input capture *: Don’t care Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 TGR2A is output compare register Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 1 1 0 1 * 0 0 Output disabled 1 Initial output is 1 output 0 0 1 1 * 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match 1 1 (Initial value) 0 output at compare match 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match TGR2A is input capture register Capture input source is TIOCA2 pin Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges *: Don’t care Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 548 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 TGR3A is output compare register Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Output disabled 1 Initial output is 1 output 0 0 1 1 1 * * * 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match 1 1 (Initial value) 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match TGR3A is input capture register Capture input source is TIOCA3 pin Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input Input capture at TCNT4 source is channel count-up/count-down 4/count clock *: Don’t care Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 549 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel IOC3 IOC2 IOC1 IOC0 Description 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 TGR3C Output disabled is output Initial output is 0 compare output register*1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Output disabled 1 Initial output is 1 output 0 0 1 1 Note: 1 * * * 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match 1 1 (Initial value) 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match TGR3C Capture input source is is input capture TIOCC3 pin register*1 Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input Input capture at TCNT4 source is channel count-up/count-down 4/count clock *: Don’t care 1. When the BFA bit in TMDR3 is set to 1 and TGR3C is used as a buffer register, this setting is invalid and input capture/output compare is not generated. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 550 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description 4 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 TGR4A is output compare register Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 Output disabled 1 Initial output is 1 output 0 0 1 1 1 * * * 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match 1 1 (Initial value) 0 output at compare match 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match TGR4A is input capture register Capture input source is TIOCA4 pin Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges Capture input Input capture at generation of source is TGR3A TGR3A compare match/input compare match/ capture input capture *: Don’t care Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Channel IOA3 IOA2 IOA1 IOA0 Description 5 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 TGR5A is output compare register Output disabled Initial output is 0 output 1 1 0 1 * 0 0 Output disabled 1 Initial output is 1 output 0 0 1 1 * 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match 1 1 (Initial value) 0 output at compare match 1 output at compare match Toggle output at compare match TGR5A is input capture register Capture input source is TIOCA5 pin Input capture at rising edge Input capture at falling edge Input capture at both edges *: Don’t care Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 551 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.2.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER) Channel 0: TIER0 Channel 3: TIER3 Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TTGE — — TCIEV TGIED TGIEC TGIEB TGIEA 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W — — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Channel 1: TIER1 Channel 2: TIER2 Channel 4: TIER4 Channel 5: TIER5 Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TTGE — TCIEU TCIEV — — TGIEB TGIEA 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W — R/W R/W — — R/W R/W The TIER registers are 8-bit registers that control enabling or disabling of interrupt requests for each channel. The TPU has six TIER registers, one for each channel. The TIER registers are initialized to H'40 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 552 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 7—A/D Conversion Start Request Enable (TTGE): Enables or disables generation of A/D conversion start requests by TGRA input capture/compare match. Bit 7 TTGE Description 0 A/D conversion start request generation disabled 1 A/D conversion start request generation enabled (Initial value) Bit 6—Reserved: This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Bit 5—Underflow Interrupt Enable (TCIEU): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TCIU) by the TCFU flag when the TCFU flag in TSR is set to 1 in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. In channels 0 and 3, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Bit 5 TCIEU Description 0 Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU disabled 1 Interrupt requests (TCIU) by TCFU enabled (Initial value) Bit 4—Overflow Interrupt Enable (TCIEV): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TCIV) by the TCFV flag when the TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1. Bit 4 TCIEV Description 0 Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV disabled 1 Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV enabled (Initial value) Bit 3—TGR Interrupt Enable D (TGIED): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGID) by the TGFD bit when the TGFD bit in TSR is set to 1 in channels 0 and 3. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 3 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Bit 3 TGIED Description 0 Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD bit disabled 1 Interrupt requests (TGID) by TGFD bit enabled (Initial value) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 553 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 2—TGR Interrupt Enable C (TGIEC): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIC) by the TGFC bit when the TGFC bit in TSR is set to 1 in channels 0 and 3. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 2 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Bit 2 TGIEC Description 0 Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC bit disabled 1 Interrupt requests (TGIC) by TGFC bit enabled (Initial value) Bit 1—TGR Interrupt Enable B (TGIEB): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIB) by the TGFB bit when the TGFB bit in TSR is set to 1. Bit 1 TGIEB Description 0 Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit disabled 1 Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit enabled (Initial value) Bit 0—TGR Interrupt Enable A (TGIEA): Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIA) by the TGFA bit when the TGFA bit in TSR is set to 1. Bit 0 TGIEA Description 0 Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit disabled 1 Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit enabled Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 554 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.2.5 Timer Status Register (TSR) Channel 0: TSR0 Channel 3: TSR3 Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — TCFV TGFD TGFC TGFB TGFA 0 R/(W)* 0 R/(W)* 0 R/(W)* 0 R/(W)* 0 R/(W)* Initial value : 1 1 0 R/W — — — : Note: * Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. Channel 1: TSR1 Channel 2: TSR2 Channel 4: TSR4 Channel 5: TSR5 Bit : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TCFD — TCFU TCFV — — TGFB TGFA 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 — R/(W)* R/(W)* — R/(W)* R/(W)* R — Note: * Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. The TSR registers are 8-bit registers that indicate the status of each channel. The TPU has six TSR registers, one for each channel. The TSR registers are initialized to H'C0 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 555 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 7—Count Direction Flag (TCFD): Status flag that shows the direction in which TCNT counts in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. In channels 0 and 3, bit 7 is reserved. It is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Bit 7 TCFD Description 0 TCNT counts down 1 TCNT counts up (Initial value) Bit 6—Reserved: This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Bit 5—Underflow Flag (TCFU): Status flag that indicates that TCNT underflow has occurred when channels 1, 2, 4, and 5 are set to phase counting mode. In channels 0 and 3, bit 5 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Bit 5 TCFU Description 0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value) When 0 is written to TCFU after reading TCFU = 1 1 [Setting condition] When the TCNT value underflows (changes from H'0000 to H'FFFF) Bit 4—Overflow Flag (TCFV): Status flag that indicates that TCNT overflow has occurred. Bit 4 TCFV Description 0 [Clearing condition] When 0 is written to TCFV after reading TCFV = 1 1 [Setting condition] When the TCNT value overflows (changes from H'FFFF to H'0000 ) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 556 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 3—Input Capture/Output Compare Flag D (TGFD): Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRD input capture or compare match in channels 0 and 3. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 3 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Bit 3 TGFD Description 0 [Clearing conditions] 1 (Initial value) • When DTC* is activated by TGID interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC* is 0 • When 0 is written to TGFD after reading TGFD = 1 [Setting conditions] • When TCNT = TGRD while TGRD is functioning as output compare register • When TCNT value is transferred to TGRD by input capture signal while TGRD is functioning as input capture register Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Bit 2—Input Capture/Output Compare Flag C (TGFC): Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRC input capture or compare match in channels 0 and 3. In channels 1, 2, 4, and 5, bit 2 is reserved. It is always read as 0 and cannot be modified. Bit 2 TGFC Description 0 [Clearing conditions] 1 (Initial value) • When DTC* is activated by TGIC interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC* is 0 • When 0 is written to TGFC after reading TGFC = 1 [Setting conditions] • When TCNT = TGRC while TGRC is functioning as output compare register • When TCNT value is transferred to TGRC by input capture signal while TGRC is functioning as input capture register Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 557 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Bit 1—Input Capture/Output Compare Flag B (TGFB): Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRB input capture or compare match. Bit 1 TGFB Description 0 [Clearing conditions] 1 (Initial value) • When DTC* is activated by TGIB interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC* is 0 • When 0 is written to TGFB after reading TGFB = 1 [Setting conditions] • When TCNT = TGRB while TGRB is functioning as output compare register • When TCNT value is transferred to TGRB by input capture signal while TGRB is functioning as input capture register Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Bit 0—Input Capture/Output Compare Flag A (TGFA): Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRA input capture or compare match. Bit 0 TGFA Description 0 [Clearing conditions] • • (Initial value) When DTC* is activated by TGIA interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC* is 0 When DMAC* is activated by TGIA interrupt while DTA bit of DMABCR in DMAC* is 1 • 1 When 0 is written to TGFA after reading TGFA = 1 [Setting conditions] • When TCNT = TGRA while TGRA is functioning as output compare register • When TCNT value is transferred to TGRA by input capture signal while TGRA is functioning as input capture register Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 558 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.2.6 Timer Counter (TCNT) Channel 0: TCNT0 (up-counter) Channel 1: TCNT1 (up/down-counter*) Channel 2: TCNT2 (up/down-counter*) Channel 3: TCNT3 (up-counter) Channel 4: TCNT4 (up/down-counter*) Channel 5: TCNT5 (up/down-counter*) Bit : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: * These counters can be used as up/down-counters only in phase counting mode or when counting overflow/underflow on another channel. In other cases they function as upcounters. The TCNT registers are 16-bit counters. The TPU has six TCNT counters, one for each channel. The TCNT counters are initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. The TCNT counters cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit unit. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 559 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.2.7 Bit Timer General Register (TGR) : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W The TGR registers are 16-bit registers with a dual function as output compare and input capture registers. The TPU has 16 TGR registers, four each for channels 0 and 3 and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. TGRC and TGRD for channels 0 and 3 can also be designated for operation as buffer registers*. The TGR registers are initialized to H'FFFF by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. The TGR registers cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; they must always be accessed as a 16-bit unit. Note: * TGR buffer register combinations are TGRA—TGRC and TGRB—TGRD. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 560 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.2.8 Bit Timer Start Register (TSTR) : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — CST5 CST4 CST3 CST2 CST1 CST0 Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W — — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W : TSTR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects operation/stoppage for channels 0 to 5. TSTR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. When setting the operating mode in TMDR or setting the count clock in TCR, first stop the TCNT counter. Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: Should always be written with 0. Bits 5 to 0—Counter Start 5 to 0 (CST5 to CST0): These bits select operation or stoppage for TCNT. Bit n CSTn Description 0 TCNTn count operation is stopped 1 TCNTn performs count operation (Initial value) n = 5 to 0 Note: If 0 is written to the CST bit during operation with the TIOC pin designated for output, the counter stops but the TIOC pin output compare output level is retained. If TIOR is written to when the CST bit is cleared to 0, the pin output level will be changed to the set initial output value. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 561 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.2.9 Bit Timer Synchro Register (TSYR) : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — SYNC5 SYNC4 SYNC3 SYNC2 SYNC1 SYNC0 Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W — — R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W : TSYR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects independent operation or synchronous operation for the channels 0 to 5 TCNT counters. A channel performs synchronous operation when the corresponding bit in TSYR is set to 1. TSYR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in hardware standby mode. Bits 7 and 6—Reserved: Should always be written with 0. Bits 5 to 0—Timer Synchro 5 to 0 (SYNC5 to SYNC0): These bits select whether operation is independent of or synchronized with other channels. When synchronous operation is selected, synchronous presetting of multiple channels*1, and synchronous clearing through counter clearing on another channel*2 are possible. Bit n SYNCn Description 0 TCNTn operates independently (TCNT presetting/clearing is unrelated to other channels) (Initial value) 1 TCNTn performs synchronous operation TCNT synchronous presetting/synchronous clearing is possible n = 5 to 0 Notes: 1. To set synchronous operation, the SYNC bits for at least two channels must be set to 1. 2. To set synchronous clearing, in addition to the SYNC bit , the TCNT clearing source must also be set by means of bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 562 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.2.10 Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTPA7 MSTPA6 MSTPA5 MSTPA4 MSTPA3 MSTPA2 MSTPA1 MSTPA0 Initial value : R/W : 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control. When the MSTPA5 bit in MSTPCRA is set to 1, TPU operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. Registers cannot be read or written to in module stop mode. For details, see section 24.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCRA is initialized to H'3F by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized by a manual reset and in software standby mode. Bit 5—Module Stop (MSTPA5): Specifies the TPU module stop mode. Bit 5 MSTPA5 Description 0 TPU module stop mode cleared 1 TPU module stop mode set (Initial value) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 563 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.3 Interface to Bus Master 11.3.1 16-Bit Registers TCNT and TGR are 16-bit registers. As the data bus to the bus master is 16 bits wide, these registers can be read and written to in 16-bit units. These registers cannot be read or written to in 8-bit units; 16-bit access must always be used. An example of 16-bit register access operation is shown in figure 11.2. Internal data bus H Bus master L Module data bus Bus interface TCNTH TCNTL Figure 11.2 16-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TCNT (16 Bits)] 11.3.2 8-Bit Registers Registers other than TCNT and TGR are 8-bit. As the data bus to the CPU is 16 bits wide, these registers can be read and written to in 16-bit units. They can also be read and written to in 8-bit units. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 564 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Examples of 8-bit register access operation are shown in figures 11.3, 11.4, and 11.5. Internal data bus H Bus master L Module data bus Bus interface TCR Figure 11.3 8-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TCR (Upper 8 Bits)] Internal data bus H Bus master L Module data bus Bus interface TMDR Figure 11.4 8-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TMDR (Lower 8 Bits)] Internal data bus H Bus master L Module data bus Bus interface TCR TMDR Figure 11.5 8-Bit Register Access Operation [Bus Master ↔ TCR and TMDR (16 Bits)] Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 565 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.4 Operation 11.4.1 Overview Operation in each mode is outlined below. Normal Operation: Each channel has a TCNT and TGR register. TCNT performs up-counting, and is also capable of free-running operation, synchronous counting, and external event counting. Each TGR can be used as an input capture register or output compare register. Synchronous Operation: When synchronous operation is designated for a channel, TCNT for that channel performs synchronous presetting. That is, when TCNT for a channel designated for synchronous operation is rewritten, the TCNT counters for the other channels are also rewritten at the same time. Synchronous clearing of the TCNT counters is also possible by setting the timer synchronization bits in TSYR for channels designated for synchronous operation. Buffer Operation: • When TGR is an output compare register When a compare match occurs, the value in the buffer register for the relevant channel is transferred to TGR. • When TGR is an input capture register When input capture occurs, the value in TCNT is transfer to TGR and the value previously held in TGR is transferred to the buffer register. Cascaded Operation: The channel 1 counter (TCNT1), channel 2 counter (TCNT2), channel 4 counter (TCNT4), and channel 5 counter (TCNT5) can be connected together to operate as a 32bit counter. PWM Mode: In this mode, a PWM waveform is output. The output level can be set by means of TIOR. A PWM waveform with a duty of between 0% and 100% can be output, according to the setting of each TGR register. Phase Counting Mode: In this mode, TCNT is incremented or decremented by detecting the phases of two clocks input from the external clock input pins in channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. When phase counting mode is set, the corresponding TCLK pin functions as the clock pin, and TCNT performs up- or down-counting. This can be used for two-phase encoder pulse input. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 566 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.4.2 Basic Functions Counter Operation When one of bits CST0 to CST5 is set to 1 in TSTR, the TCNT counter for the corresponding channel starts counting. TCNT can operate as a free-running counter, periodic counter, and so on. Example of count operation setting procedure: Figure 11.6 shows an example of the count operation setting procedure. [1] Select the counter clock with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. At the same time, select the input clock edge with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. Operation selection Select counter clock [1] Periodic counter Select counter clearing source [2] Select output compare register [3] Set period [4] Start count operation [5] <Periodic counter> [2] For periodic counter operation, select the TGR to be used as the TCNT clearing source with bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR. Free-running counter [3] Designate the TGR selected in [2] as an output compare register by means of TIOR. [4] Set the periodic counter cycle in the TGR selected in [2]. Start count operation <Free-running counter> [5] [5] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the counter operation. Figure 11.6 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 567 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Free-running count operation and periodic count operation: Immediately after a reset, the TPU’s TCNT counters are all designated as free-running counters. When the relevant bit in TSTR is set to 1 the corresponding TCNT counter starts up-count operation as a free-running counter. When TCNT overflows (from H'FFFF to H'0000), the TCFV bit in TSR is set to 1. If the value of the corresponding TCIEV bit in TIER is 1 at this point, the TPU requests an interrupt. After overflow, TCNT starts counting up again from H'0000. Figure 11.7 illustrates free-running counter operation. TCNT value H'FFFF H'0000 Time CST bit TCFV Figure 11.7 Free-Running Counter Operation When compare match is selected as the TCNT clearing source, the TCNT counter for the relevant channel performs periodic count operation. The TGR register for setting the period is designated as an output compare register, and counter clearing by compare match is selected by means of bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR. After the settings have been made, TCNT starts up-count operation as periodic counter when the corresponding bit in TSTR is set to 1. When the count value matches the value in TGR, the TGF bit in TSR is set to 1 and TCNT is cleared to H'0000. If the value of the corresponding TGIE bit in TIER is 1 at this point, the TPU requests an interrupt. After a compare match, TCNT starts counting up again from H'0000. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 568 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Figure 11.8 illustrates periodic counter operation. TCNT value TGR Counter cleared by TGR compare match H'0000 Time CST bit Flag cleared by software or DTC*/DMAC* activation TGF Note: * DMAC and DTC functions are not available in the H8S/2695. Figure 11.8 Periodic Counter Operation Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 569 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Waveform Output by Compare Match The TPU can perform 0, 1, or toggle output from the corresponding output pin using compare match. Example of setting procedure for waveform output by compare match: Figure 11.9 shows an example of the setting procedure for waveform output by compare match Output selection Select waveform output mode [1] [1] Select initial value 0 output or 1 output, and compare match output value 0 output, 1 output, or toggle output, by means of TIOR. The set initial value is output at the TIOC pin until the first compare match occurs. [2] Set the timing for compare match generation in TGR. Set output timing [2] Start count operation [3] [3] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. <Waveform output> Figure 11.9 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 570 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Examples of waveform output operation: Figure 11.10 shows an example of 0 output/1 output. In this example TCNT has been designated as a free-running counter, and settings have been made so that 1 is output by compare match A, and 0 is output by compare match B. When the set level and the pin level coincide, the pin level does not change. TCNT value H'FFFF TGRA TGRB Time H'0000 No change No change 1 output TIOCA TIOCB No change No change 0 output Figure 11.10 Example of 0 Output/1 Output Operation Figure 11.11 shows an example of toggle output. In this example TCNT has been designated as a periodic counter (with counter clearing performed by compare match B), and settings have been made so that output is toggled by both compare match A and compare match B. TCNT value Counter cleared by TGRB compare match H'FFFF TGRB TGRA Time H'0000 Toggle output TIOCB Toggle output TIOCA Figure 11.11 Example of Toggle Output Operation Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 571 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Input Capture Function The TCNT value can be transferred to TGR on detection of the TIOC pin input edge. Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected as the detected edge. For channels 0, 1, 3, and 4, it is also possible to specify another channel’s counter input clock or compare match signal as the input capture source. Note: When another channel’s counter input clock is used as the input capture input for channels 0 and 3, φ/1 should not be selected as the counter input clock used for input capture input. Input capture will not be generated if φ/1 is selected. Example of input capture operation setting procedure: Figure 11.12 shows an example of the input capture operation setting procedure. [1] Designate TGR as an input capture register by means of TIOR, and select rising edge, falling edge, or both edges as the input capture source and input signal edge. Input selection Select input capture input [1] Start count [2] [2] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. <Input capture operation> Figure 11.12 Example of Input Capture Operation Setting Procedure Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 572 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Example of input capture operation: Figure 11.13 shows an example of input capture operation. In this example both rising and falling edges have been selected as the TIOCA pin input capture input edge, falling edge has been selected as the TIOCB pin input capture input edge, and counter clearing by TGRB input capture has been designated for TCNT. Counter cleared by TIOCB input (falling edge) TCNT value H'0180 H'0160 H'0010 H'0005 Time H'0000 TIOCA TGRA H'0005 H'0160 H'0010 TIOCB TGRB H'0180 Figure 11.13 Example of Input Capture Operation 11.4.3 Synchronous Operation In synchronous operation, the values in a number of TCNT counters can be rewritten simultaneously (synchronous presetting). Also, a number of TCNT counters can be cleared simultaneously by making the appropriate setting in TCR (synchronous clearing). Synchronous operation enables TGR to be incremented with respect to a single time base. Channels 0 to 5 can all be designated for synchronous operation. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 573 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 11.14 shows an example of the synchronous operation setting procedure. Synchronous operation selection Set synchronous operation [1] Synchronous presetting Set TCNT Synchronous clearing [2] Clearing source generation channel? No Yes <Synchronous presetting> Select counter clearing source [3] Set synchronous counter clearing [4] Start count [5] Start count [5] <Counter clearing> <Synchronous clearing> [1] Set to 1 the SYNC bits in TSYR corresponding to the channels to be designated for synchronous operation. [2] When the TCNT counter of any of the channels designated for synchronous operation is written to, the same value is simultaneously written to the other TCNT counters. [3] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to specify TCNT clearing by input capture/output compare, etc. [4] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to designate synchronous clearing for the counter clearing source. [5] Set to 1 the CST bits in TSTR for the relevant channels, to start the count operation. Figure 11.14 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 574 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Example of Synchronous Operation: Figure 11.15 shows an example of synchronous operation. In this example, synchronous operation and PWM mode 1 have been designated for channels 0 to 2, TGR0B compare match has been set as the channel 0 counter clearing source, and synchronous clearing has been set for the channel 1 and 2 counter clearing source. Three-phase PWM waveforms are output from pins TIOC0A, TIOC1A, and TIOC2A. At this time, synchronous presetting, and synchronous clearing by TGR0B compare match, is performed for channels 0 to 2 TCNT counters, and the data set in TGR0B is used as the PWM cycle. For details of PWM modes, see section 11.4.6, PWM Modes. Synchronous clearing by TGR0B compare match TCNT0 to TCNT2 values TGR0B TGR1B TGR0A TGR2B TGR1A TGR2A Time H'0000 TIOC0A TIOC1A TIOC2A Figure 11.15 Example of Synchronous Operation Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 575 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.4.4 Buffer Operation Buffer operation, provided for channels 0 and 3, enables TGRC and TGRD to be used as buffer registers. Buffer operation differs depending on whether TGR has been designated as an input capture register or as a compare match register. Table 11.5 shows the register combinations used in buffer operation. Table 11.5 Register Combinations in Buffer Operation Channel Timer General Register 0 TGR0A TGR0C TGR0B TGR0D TGR3A TGR3C TGR3B TGR3D 3 Buffer Register • When TGR is an output compare register When a compare match occurs, the value in the buffer register for the corresponding channel is transferred to the timer general register. This operation is illustrated in figure 11.16. Compare match signal Buffer register Timer general register Comparator Figure 11.16 Compare Match Buffer Operation Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 576 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 TCNT Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) • When TGR is an input capture register When input capture occurs, the value in TCNT is transferred to TGR and the value previously held in the timer general register is transferred to the buffer register. This operation is illustrated in figure 11.17. Input capture signal Timer general register Buffer register TCNT Figure 11.17 Input Capture Buffer Operation Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure Figure 11.18 shows an example of the buffer operation setting procedure. [1] Designate TGR as an input capture register or output compare register by means of TIOR. Buffer operation [1] [2] Designate TGR for buffer operation with bits BFA and BFB in TMDR. Set buffer operation [2] [3] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. Start count [3] Select TGR function <Buffer operation> Figure 11.18 Example of Buffer Operation Setting Procedure Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 577 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Examples of Buffer Operation • When TGR is an output compare register Figure 11.19 shows an operation example in which PWM mode 1 has been designated for channel 0, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC. The settings used in this example are TCNT clearing by compare match B, 1 output at compare match A, and 0 output at compare match B. As buffer operation has been set, when compare match A occurs the output changes and the value in buffer register TGRC is simultaneously transferred to timer general register TGRA. This operation is repeated each time compare match A occurs. For details of PWM modes, see section 11.4.6, PWM Modes. TCNT value TGR0B H'0520 H'0450 H'0200 TGR0A Time H'0000 TGR0C H'0200 H'0450 H'0520 Transfer TGR0A H'0200 H'0450 TIOCA Figure 11.19 Example of Buffer Operation (1) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 578 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) • When TGR is an input capture register Figure 11.20 shows an operation example in which TGRA has been designated as an input capture register, and buffer operation has been designated for TGRA and TGRC. Counter clearing by TGRA input capture has been set for TCNT, and both rising and falling edges have been selected as the TIOCA pin input capture input edge. As buffer operation has been set, when the TCNT value is stored in TGRA upon occurrence of input capture A, the value previously stored in TGRA is simultaneously transferred to TGRC. TCNT value H'0F07 H'09FB H'0532 H'0000 Time TIOCA TGRA TGRC H'0532 H'0F07 H'09FB H'0532 H'0F07 Figure 11.20 Example of Buffer Operation (2) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 579 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.4.5 Cascaded Operation In cascaded operation, two 16-bit counters for different channels are used together as a 32-bit counter. This function works by counting the channel 1 (channel 4) counter clock upon overflow/underflow of TCNT2 (TCNT5) as set in bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. Underflow occurs only when the lower 16-bit TCNT is in phase-counting mode. Table 11.6 shows the register combinations used in cascaded operation. Note: When phase counting mode is set for channels 1 or 4, the counter clock setting is invalid and the counter operates independently in phase counting mode. Table 11.6 Cascaded Combinations Combination Upper 16 Bits Lower 16 Bits Channels 1 and 2 TCNT1 TCNT2 Channels 4 and 5 TCNT4 TCNT5 Example of Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure: Figure 11.21 shows an example of the setting procedure for cascaded operation. [1] Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in the channel 1 (channel 4) TCR to B'111 to select TCNT2 (TCNT5) overflow/underflow counting. Cascaded operation Set cascading [1] Start count [2] [2] Set the CST bit in TSTR for the upper and lower channel to 1 to start the count operation. <Cascaded operation> Figure 11.21 Cascaded Operation Setting Procedure Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 580 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Examples of Cascaded Operation: Figure 11.22 illustrates the operation when counting upon TCNT2 overflow/underflow has been set for TCNT1, TGR1A and TGR2A have been designated as input capture registers, and TIOC pin rising edge has been selected. When a rising edge is input to the TIOCA1 and TIOCA2 pins simultaneously, the upper 16 bits of the 32-bit data are transferred to TGR1A, and the lower 16 bits to TGR2A. TCNT1 clock TCNT1 H'03A1 H'03A2 TCNT2 clock TCNT2 H'FFFF H'0000 H'0001 TIOCA1, TIOCA2 TGR1A H'03A2 TGR2A H'0000 Figure 11.22 Example of Cascaded Operation (1) Figure 11.23 illustrates the operation when counting upon TCNT2 overflow/underflow has been set for TCNT1, and phase counting mode has been designated for channel 2. TCNT1 is incremented by TCNT2 overflow and decremented by TCNT2 underflow. TCLKC TCLKD TCNT2 TCNT1 FFFD FFFE 0000 FFFF 0000 0001 0002 0001 0001 0000 FFFF 0000 Figure 11.23 Example of Cascaded Operation (2) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 581 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.4.6 PWM Modes In PWM mode, PWM waveforms are output from the output pins. 0, 1, or toggle output can be selected as the output level in response to compare match of each TGR. Designating TGR compare match as the counter clearing source enables the period to be set in that register. All channels can be designated for PWM mode independently. Synchronous operation is also possible. There are two PWM modes, as described below. • PWM mode 1 PWM output is generated from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins by pairing TGRA with TGRB and TGRC with TGRD. The output specified by bits IOA3 to IOA0 and IOC3 to IOC0 in TIOR is output from the TIOCA and TIOCC pins at compare matches A and C, and the output specified by bits IOB3 to IOB0 and IOD3 to IOD0 in TIOR is output at compare matches B and D. The initial output value is the value set in TGRA or TGRC. If the set values of paired TGRs are identical, the output value does not change when a compare match occurs. In PWM mode 1, a maximum 8-phase PWM output is possible. • PWM mode 2 PWM output is generated using one TGR as the cycle register and the others as duty registers. The output specified in TIOR is performed by means of compare matches. Upon counter clearing by a synchronization register compare match, the output value of each pin is the initial value set in TIOR. If the set values of the cycle and duty registers are identical, the output value does not change when a compare match occurs. In PWM mode 2, a maximum 15-phase PWM output is possible by combined use with synchronous operation. The correspondence between PWM output pins and registers is shown in table 11.7. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 582 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 11.7 PWM Output Registers and Output Pins Output Pins Channel Registers PWM Mode 1 PWM Mode 2 0 TGR0A TIOCA0 TIOCA0 TGR0B TGR0C TIOCB0 TIOCC0 TGR0D 1 TGR1A TIOCD0 TIOCA1 TGR1B 2 TGR2A TGR3A TIOCA2 TIOCA3 TGR4A TIOCC3 TGR5A TGR5B TIOCC3 TIOCD3 TIOCA4 TGR4B 5 TIOCA3 TIOCB3 TGR3D 4 TIOCA2 TIOCB2 TGR3B TGR3C TIOCA1 TIOCB1 TGR2B 3 TIOCC0 TIOCA4 TIOCB4 TIOCA5 TIOCA5 TIOCB5 Note: In PWM mode 2, PWM output is not possible for the TGR register in which the period is set. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 583 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure: Figure 11.24 shows an example of the PWM mode setting procedure. PWM mode Select counter clock [1] [1] Select the counter clock with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. At the same time, select the input clock edge with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. [2] Use bits CCLR2 to CCLR0 in TCR to select the TGR to be used as the TCNT clearing source. Select counter clearing source Select waveform output level Set TGR [2] [3] [4] [3] Use TIOR to designate the TGR as an output compare register, and select the initial value and output value. [4] Set the cycle in the TGR selected in [2], and set the duty in the other the TGR. [5] Select the PWM mode with bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR. Set PWM mode [5] Start count [6] [6] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. <PWM mode> Figure 11.24 Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 584 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Examples of PWM Mode Operation: Figure 11.25 shows an example of PWM mode 1 operation. In this example, TGRA compare match is set as the TCNT clearing source, 0 is set for the TGRA initial output value and output value, and 1 is set as the TGRB output value. In this case, the value set in TGRA is used as the period, and the values set in TGRB registers as the duty. TCNT value TGRA Counter cleared by TGRA compare match TGRB H'0000 Time TIOCA Figure 11.25 Example of PWM Mode Operation (1) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 585 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Figure 11.26 shows an example of PWM mode 2 operation. In this example, synchronous operation is designated for channels 0 and 1, TGR1B compare match is set as the TCNT clearing source, and 0 is set for the initial output value and 1 for the output value of the other TGR registers (TGR0A to TGR0D, TGR1A), to output a 5-phase PWM waveform. In this case, the value set in TGR1B is used as the cycle, and the values set in the other TGRs as the duty. Counter cleared by TGR1B compare match TCNT value TGR1B TGR1A TGR0D TGR0C TGR0B TGR0A H'0000 Time TIOCA0 TIOCB0 TIOCC0 TIOCD0 TIOCA1 Figure 11.26 Example of PWM Mode Operation (2) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 586 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Figure 11.27 shows examples of PWM waveform output with 0% duty and 100% duty in PWM mode. TCNT value TGRB rewritten TGRA TGRB TGRB rewritten TGRB rewritten H'0000 Time 0% duty TIOCA Output does not change when cycle register and duty register compare matches occur simultaneously TCNT value TGRB rewritten TGRA TGRB rewritten TGRB rewritten TGRB H'0000 Time 100% duty TIOCA Output does not change when cycle register and duty register compare matches occur simultaneously TCNT value TGRB rewritten TGRA TGRB rewritten TGRB TGRB rewritten Time H'0000 TIOCA 100% duty 0% duty Figure 11.27 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 587 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.4.7 Phase Counting Mode In phase counting mode, the phase difference between two external clock inputs is detected and TCNT is incremented/decremented accordingly. This mode can be set for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. When phase counting mode is set, an external clock is selected as the counter input clock and TCNT operates as an up/down-counter regardless of the setting of bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 and bits CKEG1 and CKEG0 in TCR. However, the functions of bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR, and of TIOR, TIER, and TGR are valid, and input capture/compare match and interrupt functions can be used. When overflow occurs while TCNT is counting up, the TCFV flag in TSR is set; when underflow occurs while TCNT is counting down, the TCFU flag is set. The TCFD bit in TSR is the count direction flag. Reading the TCFD flag provides an indication of whether TCNT is counting up or down. Table 11.8 shows the correspondence between external clock pins and channels. Table 11.8 Phase Counting Mode Clock Input Pins External Clock Pins Channels A-Phase B-Phase When channel 1 or 5 is set to phase counting mode TCLKA TCLKB When channel 2 or 4 is set to phase counting mode TCLKC TCLKD Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure: Figure 11.28 shows an example of the phase counting mode setting procedure. [1] Select phase counting mode with bits MD3 to MD0 in TMDR. Phase counting mode Select phase counting mode [1] Start count [2] [2] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count operation. <Phase counting mode> Figure 11.28 Example of Phase Counting Mode Setting Procedure Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 588 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Examples of Phase Counting Mode Operation: In phase counting mode, TCNT counts up or down according to the phase difference between two external clocks. There are four modes, according to the count conditions. • Phase counting mode 1 Figure 11.29 shows an example of phase counting mode 1 operation, and table 11.9 summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions. TCLKA (channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (channels 2 and 4) TCLKB (channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (channels 2 and 4) TCNT value Up-count Down-count Time Figure 11.29 Example of Phase Counting Mode 1 Operation Table 11.9 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 1 TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4) TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4) High level Operation Up-count Low level Low level High level High level Down-count Low level High level Low level Legend: : Rising edge : Falling edge Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 589 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) • Phase counting mode 2 Figure 11.30 shows an example of phase counting mode 2 operation, and table 11.10 summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions. TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4) TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4) TCNT value Up-count Down-count Time Figure 11.30 Example of Phase Counting Mode 2 Operation Table 11.10 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 2 TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4) TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4) Operation High level Don’t care Low level Don’t care Low level Don’t care High level Up-count High level Don’t care Low level Don’t care High level Don’t care Low level Down-count Legend: : Rising edge : Falling edge Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 590 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) • Phase counting mode 3 Figure 11.31 shows an example of phase counting mode 3 operation, and table 11.11 summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions. TCLKA (channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (channels 2 and 4) TCLKB (channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (channels 2 and 4) TCNT value Down-count Up-count Time Figure 11.31 Example of Phase Counting Mode 3 Operation Table 11.11 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 3 TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4) TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4) Operation High level Don’t care Low level Don’t care Low level Don’t care High level Up-count High level Down-count Low level Don’t care High level Don’t care Low level Don’t care Legend: : Rising edge : Falling edge Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 591 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) • Phase counting mode 4 Figure 11.32 shows an example of phase counting mode 4 operation, and table 11.12 summarizes the TCNT up/down-count conditions. TCLKA (channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (channels 2 and 4) TCLKB (channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (channels 2 and 4) TCNT value Up-count Down-count Time Figure 11.32 Example of Phase Counting Mode 4 Operation Table 11.12 Up/Down-Count Conditions in Phase Counting Mode 4 TCLKA (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKC (Channels 2 and 4) TCLKB (Channels 1 and 5) TCLKD (Channels 2 and 4) High level Operation Up-count Low level Low level Don’t care High level High level Down-count Low level High level Low level Legend: : Rising edge : Falling edge Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 592 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Don’t care Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Phase Counting Mode Application Example: Figure 11.33 shows an example in which phase counting mode is designated for channel 1, and channel 1 is coupled with channel 0 to input servo motor 2-phase encoder pulses in order to detect the position or speed. Channel 1 is set to phase counting mode 1, and the encoder pulse A-phase and B-phase are input to TCLKA and TCLKB. Channel 0 operates with TCNT counter clearing by TGR0C compare match; TGR0A and TGR0C are used for the compare match function, and are set with the speed control period and position control period. TGR0B is used for input capture, with TGR0B and TGR0D operating in buffer mode. The channel 1 counter input clock is designated as the TGR0B input capture source, and detection of the pulse width of 2-phase encoder 4-multiplication pulses is performed. TGR1A and TGR1B for channel 1 are designated for input capture, channel 0 TGR0A and TGR0C compare matches are selected as the input capture source, and store the up/down-counter values for the control periods. This procedure enables accurate position/speed detection to be achieved. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 593 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Channel 1 TCLKA TCLKB Edge detection circuit TCNT1 TGR1A (speed period capture) TGR1B (position period capture) TCNT0 + TGR0A (speed control period) TGR0C (position control period) TGR0B (pulse width capture) TGR0D (buffer operation) Channel 0 Figure 11.33 Phase Counting Mode Application Example Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 594 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 – + – Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.5 Interrupts 11.5.1 Interrupt Sources and Priorities There are three kinds of TPU interrupt source: TGR input capture/compare match, TCNT overflow, and TCNT underflow. Each interrupt source has its own status flag and enable/disabled bit, allowing generation of interrupt request signals to be enabled or disabled individually. When an interrupt request is generated, the corresponding status flag in TSR is set to 1. If the corresponding enable/disable bit in TIER is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt is requested. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the status flag to 0. Relative channel priorities can be changed by the interrupt controller, but the priority order within a channel is fixed. For details, see section 5, Interrupt Controller. Table 11.13 lists the TPU interrupt sources. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 595 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Table 11.13 TPU Interrupts Channel Interrupt Source Description DMAC* Activation DTC* Activation Priority 0 TGI0A TGR0A input capture/compare match Possible Possible High TGI0B TGR0B input capture/compare match Not possible Possible TGI0C TGR0C input capture/compare match Not possible Possible TGI0D TGR0D input capture/compare match Not possible Possible TCI0V TCNT0 overflow Not possible Not possible TGI1A TGR1A input capture/compare match Possible TGI1B TGR1B input capture/compare match Not possible Possible TCI1V TCNT1 overflow Not possible Not possible TCI1U TCNT1 underflow Not possible Not possible TGI2A TGR2A input capture/compare match Possible TGI2B TGR2B input capture/compare match Not possible Possible TCI2V TCNT2 overflow Not possible Not possible TCI2U TCNT2 underflow Not possible Not possible TGI3A TGR3A input capture/compare match Possible TGI3B TGR3B input capture/compare match Not possible Possible TGI3C TGR3C input capture/compare match Not possible Possible TGI3D TGR3D input capture/compare match Not possible Possible TCI3V TCNT3 overflow Not possible Not possible 1 2 3 4 5 Possible Possible Possible TGI4A TGR4A input capture/compare match Possible TGI4B TGR4B input capture/compare match Not possible Possible Possible TCI4V TCNT4 overflow Not possible Not possible TCI4U TCNT4 underflow Not possible Not possible TGI5A TGR5A input capture/compare match Possible TGI5B TGR5B input capture/compare match Not possible Possible TCI5V TCNT5 overflow Not possible Not possible TCI5U TCNT5 underflow Not possible Not possible Low Possible Notes: This table shows the initial state immediately after a reset. The relative channel priorities can be changed by the interrupt controller. * DMAC and DTC functions are not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 596 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TGIE bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TGF flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of a TGR input capture/compare match on a particular channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the TGF flag to 0. The TPU has 16 input capture/compare match interrupts, four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. Overflow Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TCIEV bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of TCNT overflow on a channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the TCFV flag to 0. The TPU has six overflow interrupts, one for each channel. Underflow Interrupt: An interrupt is requested if the TCIEU bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TCFU flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of TCNT underflow on a channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing the TCFU flag to 0. The TPU has four underflow interrupts, one each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. 11.5.2 DTC/DMAC Activation (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) DTC Activation: The DTC can be activated by the TGR input capture/compare match interrupt for a channel. For details, see section 9, Data Transfer Controller (DTC). A total of 16 TPU input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as DTC activation sources, four each for channels 0 and 3, and two each for channels 1, 2, 4, and 5. DMAC Activation: It is possible to activate the DMAC by the TGRA input capture/compare match interrupt for each channel. See section 8, DMA Controller (DMAC) for details. In TPU, it is possible to set the TGRA input capture/compare match interrupts for each channel, giving a total of 6, as DMAC activation factors. 11.5.3 A/D Converter Activation The A/D converter can be activated by the TGRA input capture/compare match for a channel. If the TTGE bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TGFA flag in TSR is set to 1 by the occurrence of a TGRA input capture/compare match on a particular channel, a request to start A/D conversion is sent to the A/D converter. If the TPU conversion start trigger has been selected on the A/D converter side at this time, A/D conversion is started. In the TPU, a total of six TGRA input capture/compare match interrupts can be used as A/D converter conversion start sources, one for each channel. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 597 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.6 Operation Timing 11.6.1 Input/Output Timing TCNT Count Timing: Figure 11.34 shows TCNT count timing in internal clock operation, and figure 11.35 shows TCNT count timing in external clock operation. φ Internal clock Rising edge Falling edge TCNT input clock TCNT N–1 N N+1 N+2 Figure 11.34 Count Timing in Internal Clock Operation φ External clock Falling edge Rising edge Falling edge TCNT input clock TCNT N–1 N N+1 Figure 11.35 Count Timing in External Clock Operation Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 598 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 N+2 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Output Compare Output Timing: A compare match signal is generated in the final state in which TCNT and TGR match (the point at which the count value matched by TCNT is updated). When a compare match signal is generated, the output value set in TIOR is output at the output compare output pin (TIOC pin). After a match between TCNT and TGR, the compare match signal is not generated until the TCNT input clock is generated. Figure 11.36 shows output compare output timing. φ TCNT input clock N TCNT N+1 N TGR Compare match signal TIOC pin Figure 11.36 Output Compare Output Timing Input Capture Signal Timing: Figure 11.37 shows input capture signal timing. φ Input capture input Input capture signal TCNT TGR N N+1 N+2 N N+2 Figure 11.37 Input Capture Input Signal Timing Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 599 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Timing for Counter Clearing by Compare Match/Input Capture: Figure 11.38 shows the timing when counter clearing by compare match occurrence is specified, and figure 11.39 shows the timing when counter clearing by input capture occurrence is specified. φ Compare match signal Counter clear signal TCNT N TGR N H'0000 Figure 11.38 Counter Clear Timing (Compare Match) φ Input capture signal Counter clear signal TCNT N H'0000 N TGR Figure 11.39 Counter Clear Timing (Input Capture) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 600 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Buffer Operation Timing: Figures 11.40 and 11.41 show the timing in buffer operation. φ n TCNT n+1 Compare match signal TGRA, TGRB n TGRC, TGRD N N Figure 11.40 Buffer Operation Timing (Compare Match) φ Input capture signal TCNT N TGRA, TGRB n TGRC, TGRD N+1 N N+1 n N Figure 11.41 Buffer Operation Timing (Input Capture) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 601 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.6.2 Interrupt Signal Timing TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Compare Match: Figure 11.42 shows the timing for setting of the TGF flag in TSR by compare match occurrence, and TGI interrupt request signal timing. φ TCNT input clock TCNT N TGR N N+1 Compare match signal TGF flag TGI interrupt Figure 11.42 TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 602 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Input Capture: Figure 11.43 shows the timing for setting of the TGF flag in TSR by input capture occurrence, and TGI interrupt request signal timing. φ Input capture signal TCNT TGR N N TGF flag TGI interrupt Figure 11.43 TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 603 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) TCFV Flag/TCFU Flag Setting Timing: Figure 11.44 shows the timing for setting of the TCFV flag in TSR by overflow occurrence, and TCIV interrupt request signal timing. Figure 11.45 shows the timing for setting of the TCFU flag in TSR by underflow occurrence, and TCIU interrupt request signal timing. φ TCNT input clock TCNT (overflow) H'FFFF H'0000 Overflow signal TCFV flag TCIV interrupt Figure 11.44 TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing φ TCNT input clock TCNT (underflow) H'0000 H'FFFF Underflow signal TCFU flag TCIU interrupt Figure 11.45 TCIU Interrupt Setting Timing Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 604 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Status Flag Clearing Timing: After a status flag is read as 1 by the CPU, it is cleared by writing 0 to it. When the DTC* or DMAC* is activated, the flag is cleared automatically. Figure 11.46 shows the timing for status flag clearing by the CPU, and figure 11.47 shows the timing for status flag clearing by the DTC* or DMAC*. Note: * DMAC and DTC functions are not available in the H8S/2695. TSR write cycle T1 T2 φ Address TSR address Write signal Status flag Interrupt request signal Figure 11.46 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by CPU DTC*/DMAC* read cycle T1 T2 DTC*/DMAC* write cycle T1 T2 φ Address Source address Destination address Status flag Interrupt request signal Note: * DMAC and DTC functions are not available in the H8S/2695. Figure 11.47 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by DTC* or DMAC* Activation Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 605 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) 11.7 Usage Notes Note that the kinds of operation and contention described below occur during TPU operation. Input Clock Restrictions: The input clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 states in the case of single-edge detection, and at least 2.5 states in the case of both-edge detection. The TPU will not operate properly with a narrower pulse width. In phase counting mode, the phase difference and overlap between the two input clocks must be at least 1.5 states, and the pulse width must be at least 2.5 states. Figure 11.48 shows the input clock conditions in phase counting mode. Overlap Phase Phase differdifference Overlap ence Pulse width Pulse width TCLKA (TCLKC) TCLKB (TCLKD) Pulse width Pulse width Notes: Phase difference and overlap : 1.5 states or more : 2.5 states or more Pulse width Figure 11.48 Phase Difference, Overlap, and Pulse Width in Phase Counting Mode Caution on Period Setting: When counter clearing by compare match is set, TCNT is cleared in the final state in which it matches the TGR value (the point at which the count value matched by TCNT is updated). Consequently, the actual counter frequency is given by the following formula: f= φ (N + 1) Where f: Counter frequency φ: Operating frequency N: TGR set value Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 606 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations: If the counter clear signal is generated in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, TCNT clearing takes precedence and the TCNT write is not performed. Figure 11.49 shows the timing in this case. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 φ TCNT address Address Write signal Counter clear signal TCNT N H'0000 Figure 11.49 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operations Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 607 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations: If incrementing occurs in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the TCNT write takes precedence and TCNT is not incremented. Figure 11.50 shows the timing in this case. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 φ TCNT address Address Write signal TCNT input clock N TCNT M TCNT write data Figure 11.50 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operations Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 608 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match: If a compare match occurs in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the TGR write takes precedence and the compare match signal is inhibited. A compare match does not occur even if the same value as before is written. Figure 11.51 shows the timing in this case. TGR write cycle T1 T2 φ TGR address Address Write signal Compare match signal Inhibited TCNT N N+1 TGR N M TGR write data Figure 11.51 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 609 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match: If a compare match occurs in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the data transferred to TGR by the buffer operation will be the data prior to the write. Figure 11.52 shows the timing in this case. TGR write cycle T1 T2 φ Buffer register address Address Write signal Compare match signal Buffer register write data Buffer register TGR N M N Figure 11.52 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Compare Match Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 610 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture: If the input capture signal is generated in the T1 state of a TGR read cycle, the data that is read will be the data after input capture transfer. Figure 11.53 shows the timing in this case. TGR read cycle T1 T2 φ TGR address Address Read signal Input capture signal TGR Internal data bus X M M Figure 11.53 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 611 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture: If the input capture signal is generated in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the input capture operation takes precedence and the write to TGR is not performed. Figure 11.54 shows the timing in this case. TGR write cycle T1 T2 φ TGR address Address Write signal Input capture signal TCNT M M TGR Figure 11.54 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 612 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture: If the input capture signal is generated in the T2 state of a buffer write cycle, the buffer operation takes precedence and the write to the buffer register is not performed. Figure 11.55 shows the timing in this case. Buffer register write cycle T1 T2 φ Buffer register address Address Write signal Input capture signal TCNT TGR Buffer register N M N M Figure 11.55 Contention between Buffer Register Write and Input Capture Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 613 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Contention between Overflow/Underflow and Counter Clearing: If overflow/underflow and counter clearing occur simultaneously, the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is not set and TCNT clearing takes precedence. Figure 11.56 shows the operation timing when a TGR compare match is specified as the clearing source, and H'FFFF is set in TGR. φ TCNT input clock TCNT H'FFFF H'0000 Counter clear signal TGF Prohibited TCFV Figure 11.56 Contention between Overflow and Counter Clearing Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 614 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow/Underflow: If there is an up-count or downcount in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, and overflow/underflow occurs, the TCNT write takes precedence and the TCFV/TCFU flag in TSR is not set. Figure 11.57 shows the operation timing when there is contention between TCNT write and overflow. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 φ TCNT address Address Write signal TCNT TCNT write data H'FFFF M Prohibited TCFV flag Figure 11.57 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow Multiplexing of I/O Pins: In the H8S/2633 Group, the TCLKA input pin is multiplexed with the TIOCC0 I/O pin, the TCLKB input pin with the TIOCD0 I/O pin, the TCLKC input pin with the TIOCB1 I/O pin, and the TCLKD input pin with the TIOCB2 I/O pin. When an external clock is input, compare match output should not be performed from a multiplexed pin. Interrupts and Module Stop Mode: If module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to clear the CPU interrupt source or the DMAC* or DTC* activation source. Interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module stop mode. Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 615 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 11 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 616 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 12.1 Overview The H8S/2633 Group has a built-in programmable pulse generator (PPG) that provides pulse outputs by using the 16-bit timer-pulse unit (TPU) as a time base. The PPG pulse outputs are divided into 4-bit groups (group 3 and group 2) that can operate both simultaneously and independently. 12.1.1 Features PPG features are listed below. • 8-bit output data Maximum 8-bit data can be output, and output can be enabled on a bit-by-bit basis • Two output groups Output trigger signals can be selected in 4-bit groups to provide up to two different 4-bit outputs • Selectable output trigger signals Output trigger signals can be selected for each group from the compare match signals of four TPU channels • Non-overlap mode A non-overlap margin can be provided between pulse outputs • Can operate together with the data transfer controller (DTC) and DMA controller (DMAC) The compare match signals selected as output trigger signals can activate the DTC or DMAC for sequential output of data without CPU intervention • Settable inverted output Inverted data can be output for each group • Module stop mode can be set As the initial setting, PPG operation is halted. Register access is enabled by exiting module stop mode Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 617 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 12.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 12.1 shows a block diagram of the PPG. Compare match signals Control logic PO15 PO14 PO13 PO12 PO11 PO10 PO9 PO8 NDERH NDERL PMR PCR Pulse output pins, group 3 PODRH NDRH PODRL NDRL Pulse output pins, group 2 Pulse output pins, group 1 Pulse output pins, group 0 Legend: PMR: PCR NDERH: NDERL: NDRH: NDRL: PODRH: PODRL: PPG output mode register PPG output control register Next data enable register H Next data enable register L Next data register H Next data register L Output data register H Output data register L Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of PPG Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 618 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Internal data bus Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 12.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 12.1 summarizes the PPG pins. Table 12.1 PPG Pins Name Symbol I/O Function Group 2 pulse output Pulse output 8 PO8 Output Pulse output 9 PO9 Output Pulse output 10 PO10 Output Pulse output 11 PO11 Output Pulse output 12 PO12 Output Pulse output 13 PO13 Output Pulse output 14 PO14 Output Pulse output 15 PO15 Output Group 3 pulse output Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 619 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 12.1.4 Registers Table 12.2 summarizes the PPG registers. Table 12.2 PPG Registers Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address*1 PPG output control register PCR R/W H'FF H'FE26 PPG output mode register PMR R/W H'F0 H'FE27 Next data enable register H Next data enable register L*4 NDERH R/W H'00 H'FE28 NDERL R/W H'00 H'FE29 Output data register H Output data register L*4 PODRH H'00 H'FE2A PODRL R/(W)*2 R/(W)*2 H'00 H'FE2B Next data register H NDRH R/W H'00 Next data register L*4 NDRL R/W H'00 H'FE2C*3 H'FE2E H'FE2D*3 H'FE2F Port 1 data direction register P1DDR W H'00 H'FE30 Module stop control register A MSTPCRA R/W H'3F H'FDE8 Name Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. A bit that has been set for pulse output by NDER is read-only. 3. When the same output trigger is selected for pulse output groups 2 and 3 by the PCR setting, the NDRH address is H'FE2C. When the output triggers are different, the NDRH address is H'FE2E for group 2 and H'FE2C for group 3. Similarly, when the same output trigger is selected for pulse output groups 0 and 1 by the PCR setting, the NDRL address is H'FE2D. When the output triggers are different, the NDRL address is H'FE2F for group 0 and H'FE2D for group 1. 4. The H8S/2633 Group has no pins corresponding to pulse output groups 0 and 1. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 620 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 12.2 Register Descriptions 12.2.1 Next Data Enable Registers H and L (NDERH, NDERL) NDERH Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 NDER15 NDER14 NDER13 NDER12 NDER11 NDER10 NDER9 Initial value : R/W 0 NDER8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NDER7 NDER6 NDER5 NDER4 NDER3 NDER2 NDER1 NDER0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W NDERL Bit Initial value : R/W : NDERH and NDERL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that enable or disable pulse output on a bit-by-bit basis. If a bit is enabled for pulse output by NDERH or NDERL, the NDR value is automatically transferred to the corresponding PODR bit when the TPU compare match event specified by PCR occurs, updating the output value. If pulse output is disabled, the bit value is not transferred from NDR to PODR and the output value does not change. NDERH and NDERL are each initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are not initialized in software standby mode. NDERH Bits 7 to 0—Next Data Enable 15 to 8 (NDER15 to NDER8): These bits enable or disable pulse output on a bit-by-bit basis. Bits 7 to 0 NDER15 to NDER8 Description 0 Pulse outputs PO15 to PO8 are disabled (NDR15 to NDR8 are not transferred to POD15 to POD8) (Initial value) 1 Pulse outputs PO15 to PO8 are enabled (NDR15 to NDR8 are transferred to POD15 to POD8) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 621 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) NDERL Bits 7 to 0—Next Data Enable 7 to 0 (NDER7 to NDER0): These bits enable or disable pulse output on a bit-by-bit basis. However, the H8S/2633 Group has no output pins corresponding to NDRL. Bits 7 to 0 NDER7 to NDER0 Description 0 Pulse outputs PO7 to PO0 are disabled (NDR7 to NDR0 are not transferred to POD7 to POD0) (Initial value) 1 Pulse outputs PO7 to PO0 are enabled (NDR7 to NDR0 are transferred to POD7 to POD0) 12.2.2 Output Data Registers H and L (PODRH, PODRL) PODRH Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 POD15 POD14 POD13 POD12 POD11 POD10 POD9 POD8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 POD7 POD6 POD5 POD4 POD3 POD2 POD1 POD0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* Initial value : R/W PODRL Bit Initial value : R/W : Note: * A bit that has been set for pulse output by NDER is read-only. PODRH and PODRL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that store output data for use in pulse output. However, the H8S/2633 Group has no pins corresponding to PODRL. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 622 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 12.2.3 Next Data Registers H and L (NDRH, NDRL) NDRH and NDRL are 8-bit readable/writable registers that store the next data for pulse output. During pulse output, the contents of NDRH and NDRL are transferred to the corresponding bits in PODRH and PODRL when the TPU compare match event specified by PCR occurs. The NDRH and NDRL addresses differ depending on whether pulse output groups have the same output trigger or different output triggers. For details see section 12.2.4, Notes on NDR Access. NDRH and NDRL are each initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. They are not initialized in software standby mode. 12.2.4 Notes on NDR Access The NDRH and NDRL addresses differ depending on whether pulse output groups have the same output trigger or different output triggers. Same Trigger for Pulse Output Groups: If pulse output groups 2 and 3 are triggered by the same compare match event, the NDRH address is H'FE2C. The upper 4 bits belong to group 3 and the lower 4 bits to group 2. Address H'FE2E consists entirely of reserved bits that cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Address H'FE2C Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NDR15 NDR14 NDR13 NDR12 NDR11 NDR10 NDR9 NDR8 Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — — — — — — Address H'FE2E Bit : Initial value : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W — — — — — — — — : If pulse output groups 0 and 1 are triggered by the same compare match event, the NDRL address is H'FE2D. The upper 4 bits belong to group 1 and the lower 4 bits to group 0. Address H'FE2F consists entirely of reserved bits that cannot be modified and are always read as 1. However, the H8S/2633 Group has no output pins corresponding to pulse output groups 0 and 1. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 623 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Address H'FE2D Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NDR7 NDR6 NDR5 NDR4 NDR3 NDR2 NDR1 NDR0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — — — — — — Initial value : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W — — — — — — — — Initial value : R/W : Address H'FE2F Bit : : Different Triggers for Pulse Output Groups: If pulse output groups 2 and 3 are triggered by different compare match events, the address of the upper 4 bits in NDRH (group 3) is H'FE2C and the address of the lower 4 bits (group 2) is H'FE2E. Bits 3 to 0 of address H'FE2C and bits 7 to 4 of address H'FE2E are reserved bits that cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Address H'FE2C Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NDR15 NDR14 NDR13 NDR12 — — — — 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W — — — — 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — — NDR11 NDR10 NDR9 NDR8 Initial value : 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 R/W — — — — R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial value : R/W : Address H'FE2E Bit : : If pulse output groups 0 and 1 are triggered by different compare match event, the address of the upper 4 bits in NDRL (group 1) is H'FE2D and the address of the lower 4 bits (group 0) is H'FE2F. Bits 3 to 0 of address H'FE2D and bits 7 to 4 of address H'FE2F are reserved bits that cannot be modified and are always read as 1. However, the H8S/2633 Group has no output pins corresponding to pulse output groups 0 and 1. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 624 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Address H'FE2D Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NDR7 NDR6 NDR5 NDR4 — — — — 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W — — — — 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — — — NDR3 NDR2 NDR1 NDR0 Initial value : 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 R/W — — — — R/W R/W R/W R/W 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value : R/W : Address H'FE2F Bit 12.2.5 Bit : : PPG Output Control Register (PCR) : 7 6 5 G3CMS1 G3CMS0 G2CMS1 G2CMS0 G1CMS1 G1CMS0 G0CMS1 G0CMS0 Initial value : R/W : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects output trigger signals for PPG outputs on a group-by-group basis. PCR is initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bits 7 and 6—Group 3 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G3CMS1, G3CMS0): These bits select the compare match that triggers pulse output group 3 (pins PO15 to PO12). Bit 7 Bit 6 Description G3CMS1 G3CMS0 Output Trigger for Pulse Output Group 3 0 0 Compare match in TPU channel 0 1 Compare match in TPU channel 1 0 Compare match in TPU channel 2 1 Compare match in TPU channel 3 1 (Initial value) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 625 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bits 5 and 4—Group 2 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G2CMS1, G2CMS0): These bits select the compare match that triggers pulse output group 2 (pins PO11 to PO8). Bit 5 Bit 4 Description G2CMS1 G2CMS0 Output Trigger for Pulse Output Group 2 0 0 Compare match in TPU channel 0 1 Compare match in TPU channel 1 1 0 Compare match in TPU channel 2 1 Compare match in TPU channel 3 (Initial value) Bits 3 and 2—Group 1 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G1CMS1, G1CMS0): These bits select the compare match that triggers pulse output group 1 (pins PO7 to PO4). However, the H8S/2633 Group has no output pins corresponding to pulse output group 1. Bit 3 Bit 2 Description G1CMS1 G1CMS0 Output Trigger for Pulse Output Group 1 0 0 Compare match in TPU channel 0 1 Compare match in TPU channel 1 0 Compare match in TPU channel 2 1 Compare match in TPU channel 3 1 (Initial value) Bits 1 and 0—Group 0 Compare Match Select 1 and 0 (G0CMS1, G0CMS0): These bits select the compare match that triggers pulse output group 0 (pins PO3 to PO0). However, the H8S/2633 Group has no output pins corresponding to pulse output group 0. Bit 1 Bit 0 Description G0CMS1 G0CMS0 Output Trigger for Pulse Output Group 0 0 0 Compare match in TPU channel 0 1 Compare match in TPU channel 1 0 Compare match in TPU channel 2 1 Compare match in TPU channel 3 1 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 626 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 12.2.6 Bit PPG Output Mode Register (PMR) : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G3INV G2INV G1INV G0INV G3NOV G2NOV G1NOV G0NOV 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W PMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects pulse output inversion and non-overlapping operation for each group. The output trigger period of a non-overlapping operation PPG output waveform is set in TGRB and the non-overlap margin is set in TGRA. The output values change at compare match A and B. For details, see section 12.3.4, Non-Overlapping Pulse Output. PMR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Bit 7—Group 3 Inversion (G3INV): Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output group 3 (pins PO15 to PO12). Bit 7 G3INV Description 0 Inverted output for pulse output group 3 (low-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRH) 1 Direct output for pulse output group 3 (high-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRH) (Initial value) Bit 6—Group 2 Inversion (G2INV): Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output group 2 (pins PO11 to PO8). Bit 6 G2INV Description 0 Inverted output for pulse output group 2 (low-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRH) 1 Direct output for pulse output group 2 (high-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRH) (Initial value) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 627 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 5—Group 1 Inversion (G1INV): Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output group 1 (pins PO7 to PO4). However, the H8S/2633 Group has no pins corresponding to pulse output group 1. Bit 5 G1INV Description 0 Inverted output for pulse output group 1 (low-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRL) 1 Direct output for pulse output group 1 (high-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRL) (Initial value) Bit 4—Group 0 Inversion (G0INV): Selects direct output or inverted output for pulse output group 0 (pins PO3 to PO0). However, the H8S/2633 Group has no pins corresponding to pulse output group 0. Bit 4 G0INV Description 0 Inverted output for pulse output group 0 (low-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRL) 1 Direct output for pulse output group 0 (high-level output at pin for a 1 in PODRL) (Initial value) Bit 3—Group 3 Non-Overlap (G3NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse output group 3 (pins PO15 to PO12). Bit 3 G3NOV Description 0 Normal operation in pulse output group 3 (output values updated at compare match A in the selected TPU channel) (Initial value) 1 Non-overlapping operation in pulse output group 3 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 628 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 2—Group 2 Non-Overlap (G2NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse output group 2 (pins PO11 to PO8). Bit 2 G2NOV Description 0 Normal operation in pulse output group 2 (output values updated at compare match A in the selected TPU channel) (Initial value) 1 Non-overlapping operation in pulse output group 2 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel) Bit 1—Group 1 Non-Overlap (G1NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse output group 1 (pins PO7 to PO4). However, the H8S/2633 Group has no pins corresponding to pulse output group 1. Bit 1 G1NOV Description 0 Normal operation in pulse output group 1 (output values updated at compare match A in the selected TPU channel) (Initial value) 1 Non-overlapping operation in pulse output group 1 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel) Bit 0—Group 0 Non-Overlap (G0NOV): Selects normal or non-overlapping operation for pulse output group 0 (pins PO3 to PO0). However, the H8S/2633 Group has no pins corresponding to pulse output group 0. Bit 0 G0NOV Description 0 Normal operation in pulse output group 0 (output values updated at compare match A in the selected TPU channel) (Initial value) 1 Non-overlapping operation in pulse output group 0 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match A or B in the selected TPU channel) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 629 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 12.2.7 Bit Port 1 Data Direction Register (P1DDR) : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P17DDR P16DDR P15DDR P14DDR P13DDR P12DDR P11DDR P10DDR Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W W W W W W W W W : P1DDR is an 8-bit write-only register, the individual bits of which specify input or output for the pins of port 1. Port 1 is multiplexed with pins PO15 to PO8. Bits corresponding to pins used for PPG output must be set to 1. For further information about P1DDR, see sections 10A.2 and 10B.2, Port 1. 12.2.8 Bit Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTPA7 MSTPA6 MSTPA5 MSTPA4 MSTPA3 MSTPA2 MSTPA1 MSTPA0 Initial value : R/W : 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control. When the MSTPA3 bit in MSTPCRA is set to 1, PPG operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. Registers cannot be read or written to in module stop mode. For details, see section 24.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCRA is initialized to H'3F by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized by a manual reset and in software standby mode. Bit 3—Module Stop (MSTPA3): Specifies the PPG module stop mode. Bit 3 MSTPA3 Description 0 PPG module stop mode cleared 1 PPG module stop mode set Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 630 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 12.3 Operation 12.3.1 Overview PPG pulse output is enabled when the corresponding bits in P1DDR and NDER are set to 1. In this state the corresponding PODR contents are output. When the compare match event specified by PCR occurs, the corresponding NDR bit contents are transferred to PODR to update the output values. Figure 12.2 illustrates the PPG output operation and table 12.3 summarizes the PPG operating conditions. DDR NDER Q Q Output trigger signal C Q PODR D Q NDR D Internal data bus Pulse output pin Normal output/inverted output Figure 12.2 PPG Output Operation Table 12.3 PPG Operating Conditions NDER DDR Pin Function 0 0 Generic input port 1 Generic output port 0 Generic input port (but the PODR bit is a read-only bit, and when compare match occurs, the NDR bit value is transferred to the PODR bit) 1 PPG pulse output 1 Sequential output of data of up to 16 bits is possible by writing new output data to NDR before the next compare match. For details of non-overlapping operation, see section 12.3.4, NonOverlapping Pulse Output. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 631 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 12.3.2 Output Timing If pulse output is enabled, NDR contents are transferred to PODR and output when the specified compare match event occurs. Figure 12.3 shows the timing of these operations for the case of normal output in groups 2 and 3, triggered by compare match A. φ N TCNT TGRA N+1 N Compare match A signal n NDRH PODRH m PO8 to PO15 n m n Figure 12.3 Timing of Transfer and Output of NDR Contents (Example) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 632 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 12.3.3 Normal Pulse Output Sample Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output: Figure 12.4 shows a sample procedure for setting up normal pulse output. Normal PPG output Select TGR functions [1] Set TGRA value [2] Set counting operation [3] Select interrupt request [4] Set initial output data [5] Enable pulse output [6] Select output trigger [7] [1] Set TIOR to make TGRA an output compare register (with output disabled). [2] Set the PPG output trigger period. TPU setup Port and PPG setup TPU setup Set next pulse output data [8] Start counter [9] Compare match? No [3] Select the counter clock source with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. Select the counter clear source with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0. [4] Enable the TGIA interrupt in TIER. The DTC or DMAC can also be set up to transfer data to NDR. [5] Set the initial output values in PODR. [6] Set the DDR and NDER bits for the pins to be used for pulse output to 1. [7] Select the TPU compare match event to be used as the output trigger in PCR. [8] Set the next pulse output values in NDR. Yes Set next pulse output data [10] [9] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the TCNT counter. [10] At each TGIA interrupt, set the next output values in NDR. Figure 12.4 Setup Procedure for Normal Pulse Output (Example) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 633 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Example of Normal Pulse Output (Example of Five-Phase Pulse Output): Figure 12.5 shows an example in which pulse output is used for cyclic five-phase pulse output. TCNT value Compare match TCNT TGRA H'0000 Time 80 NDRH PODRH 00 C0 80 40 C0 60 40 20 60 30 20 10 30 18 10 08 18 88 08 80 88 C0 80 40 C0 PO15 PO14 PO13 PO12 PO11 Figure 12.5 Normal Pulse Output Example (Five-Phase Pulse Output) [1] Set up the TPU channel to be used as the output trigger channel so that TGRA is an output compare register and the counter will be cleared by compare match A. Set the trigger period in TGRA and set the TGIEA bit in TIER to 1 to enable the compare match A (TGIA) interrupt. [2] Write H'F8 in P1DDR and NDERH, and set the G3CMS1, G3CMS0, G2CMS1, and G2CMS0 bits in PCR to select compare match in the TPU channel set up in the previous step to be the output trigger. Write output data H'80 in NDRH. [3] The timer counter in the TPU channel starts. When compare match A occurs, the NDRH contents are transferred to PODRH and output. The TGIA interrupt handling routine writes the next output data (H'C0) in NDRH. [4] Five-phase overlapping pulse output (one or two phases active at a time) can be obtained subsequently by writing H'40, H'60, H'20, H'30. H'10, H'18, H'08, H'88... at successive TGIA interrupts. If the DTC or DMAC is set for activation by this interrupt, pulse output can be obtained without imposing a load on the CPU. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 634 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 12.3.4 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output Sample Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output: Figure 12.6 shows a sample procedure for setting up non-overlapping pulse output. [1] Set TIOR to make TGRA and TGRB an output compare registers (with output disabled). Non-overlapping PPG output Select TGR functions [1] Set TGR values [2] Set counting operation [3] Select interrupt request [4] Set initial output data [5] TPU setup PPG setup TPU setup Enable pulse output [6] Select output trigger [7] Set non-overlapping groups [8] Set next pulse output data [9] Start counter [10] Compare match? No [3] Select the counter clock source with bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR. Select the counter clear source with bits CCLR1 and CCLR0. [4] Enable the TGIA interrupt in TIER. The DTC or DMAC can also be set up to transfer data to NDR. [5] Set the initial output values in PODR. [6] Set the DDR and NDER bits for the pins to be used for pulse output to 1. [7] Select the TPU compare match event to be used as the pulse output trigger in PCR. [8] In PMR, select the groups that will operate in non-overlap mode. Yes Set next pulse output data [2] Set the pulse output trigger period in TGRB and the non-overlap margin in TGRA. [11] [9] Set the next pulse output values in NDR. [10] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the TCNT counter. [11] At each TGIA interrupt, set the next output values in NDR. Figure 12.6 Setup Procedure for Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 635 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Example of Non-Overlapping Pulse Output (Example of Four-Phase Complementary NonOverlapping Output): Figure 12.7 shows an example in which pulse output is used for fourphase complementary non-overlapping pulse output. TCNT value TGRB TCNT TGRA H'0000 NDRH PODRH Time 95 00 65 95 59 05 65 56 41 59 95 50 56 65 14 95 05 65 Non-overlap margin PO15 PO14 PO13 PO12 PO11 PO10 PO9 PO8 Figure 12.7 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output Example (Four-Phase Complementary) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 636 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) [1] Set up the TPU channel to be used as the output trigger channel so that TGRA and TGRB are output compare registers. Set the trigger period in TGRB and the non-overlap margin in TGRA, and set the counter to be cleared by compare match B. Set the TGIEA bit in TIER to 1 to enable the TGIA interrupt. [2] Write H'FF in P1DDR and NDERH, and set the G3CMS1, G3CMS0, G2CMS1, and G2CMS0 bits in PCR to select compare match in the TPU channel set up in the previous step to be the output trigger. Set the G3NOV and G2NOV bits in PMR to 1 to select non-overlapping output. Write output data H'95 in NDRH. [3] The timer counter in the TPU channel starts. When a compare match with TGRB occurs, outputs change from 1 to 0. When a compare match with TGRA occurs, outputs change from 0 to 1 (the change from 0 to 1 is delayed by the value set in TGRA). The TGIA interrupt handling routine writes the next output data (H'65) in NDRH. [4] Four-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output can be obtained subsequently by writing H'59, H'56, H'95... at successive TGIA interrupts. If the DTC or DMAC is set for activation by this interrupt, pulse output can be obtained without imposing a load on the CPU. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 637 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 12.3.5 Inverted Pulse Output If the G3INV, G2INV, G1INV, and G0INV bits in PMR are cleared to 0, values that are the inverse of the PODR contents can be output. Figure 12.8 shows the outputs when G3INV and G2INV are cleared to 0, in addition to the settings of figure 12.7. TCNT value TGRB TCNT TGRA H'0000 NDRH PODRL Time 95 00 65 95 59 05 65 56 41 59 95 50 56 65 14 95 05 PO15 PO14 PO13 PO12 PO11 PO10 PO9 PO8 Figure 12.8 Inverted Pulse Output (Example) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 638 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 65 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 12.3.6 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture Pulse output can be triggered by TPU input capture as well as by compare match. If TGRA functions as an input capture register in the TPU channel selected by PCR, pulse output will be triggered by the input capture signal. Figure 12.9 shows the timing of this output. φ TIOC pin Input capture signal NDR N PODR M PO M N N Figure 12.9 Pulse Output Triggered by Input Capture (Example) 12.4 Usage Notes Operation of Pulse Output Pins: Pins PO8 to PO15 are also used for other peripheral functions such as the TPU. When output by another peripheral function is enabled, the corresponding pins cannot be used for pulse output. Note, however, that data transfer from NDR bits to PODR bits takes place, regardless of the usage of the pins. Pin functions should be changed only under conditions in which the output trigger event will not occur. Note on Non-Overlapping Output: During non-overlapping operation, the transfer of NDR bit values to PODR bits takes place as follows. • NDR bits are always transferred to PODR bits at compare match A. • At compare match B, NDR bits are transferred only if their value is 0. Bits are not transferred if their value is 1. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 639 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 12 Programmable Pulse Generator (PPG) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Figure 12.10 illustrates the non-overlapping pulse output operation. DDR NDER Q Compare match A Compare match B C Q PODR D Pulse output pin Q NDR D Internal data bus Normal output/inverted output Figure 12.10 Non-Overlapping Pulse Output Therefore, 0 data can be transferred ahead of 1 data by making compare match B occur before compare match A. The NDR contents should not be altered during the interval from compare match B to compare match A (the non-overlap margin). This can be accomplished by having the TGIA interrupt handling routine write the next data in NDR, or by having the TGIA interrupt activate the DTC or DMAC. Note, however, that the next data must be written before the next compare match B occurs. Figure 12.11 shows the timing of this operation. Compare match A Compare match B Write to NDR Write to NDR NDR PODR 0 output 0/1 output Write to NDR Do not write here to NDR here 0 output 0/1 output Write to NDR Do not write here to NDR here Figure 12.11 Non-Overlapping Operation and NDR Write Timing Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 640 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 13.1 Overview The H8S/2633 Group includes an 8-bit timer module with four channels (TMR0, TMR1, TMR2, and TMR3). Each channel has an 8-bit counter (TCNT) and two time constant registers (TCORA and TCORB) that are constantly compared with the TCNT value to detect compare match events. The 8-bit timer module can thus be used for a variety of functions, including pulse output with an arbitrary duty cycle. 13.1.1 Features The features of the 8-bit timer module are listed below. • Selection of four clock sources The counters can be driven by one of three internal clock signals (φ/8, φ/64, or φ/8192) or an external clock input (enabling use as an external event counter) • Selection of three ways to clear the counters The counters can be cleared on compare match A or B, or by an external reset signal • Timer output control by a combination of two compare match signals The timer output signal in each channel is controlled by a combination of two independent compare match signals, enabling the timer to generate output waveforms with an arbitrary duty cycle or PWM output • Provision for cascading of two channels Operation as a 16-bit timer is possible, using channel 0 (channel 2) for the upper 8 bits and channel 1 (channel 3) for the lower 8 bits (16-bit count mode) Channel 1 (channel 3) can be used to count channel 0 (channel 2) compare matches (compare match count mode) • Three independent interrupts Compare match A and B and overflow interrupts can be requested independently • A/D converter conversion start trigger can be generated Channel 0 compare match A signal can be used as an A/D converter conversion start trigger • Module stop mode can be set As the initial setting, 8-bit timer operation is halted. Register access is enabled by exiting module stop mode Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 641 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 13.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 13.1 shows a block diagram of the 8-bit timer module (TMR0, TMR1). External clock source TMCI01 TMCI23 Internal clock sources φ/8 φ/64 φ/8192 Clock select Clock 1 Clock 0 TCORA0 Compare match A1 Compare match A0 Comparator A0 Overflow 1 Overflow 0 TMO0 TMRI01 TMRI23 TCNT0 TCORA1 Comparator A1 TCNT1 Clear 1 TMO1 Control logic Compare match B1 Compare match B0 Comparator B0 A/D conversion start request signal Comparator B1 TCORB0 TCORB1 TCSR0 TCSR1 TCR0 TCR1 CMIA0 CMIB0 OVI0 CMIA1 CMIB1 OVI1 Interrupt signals Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 642 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Internal bus Clear 0 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 13.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 13.1 summarizes the input and output pins of the 8-bit timer. Table 13.1 Pin Configuration Channel Name Symbol I/O Function 0 Timer output pin 0 TMO0 Output Outputs at compare match Timer clock input pin 01 TMCI01 Input Inputs external clock for counter Timer reset input pin 01 TMRI01 Input Inputs external reset to counter Timer output pin 1 TMO1 Output Outputs at compare match Timer clock input pin 23 TMCI23 Input Inputs external clock for counter Timer reset input pin 23 TMRI23 Input Inputs external reset to counter Timer output pin 2 TMO2 Output Outputs at compare match Timer clock input pin 23 TMCI23 Input Inputs external clock for counter Timer reset input pin 23 TMRI23 Input Inputs external reset to counter Timer output pin 3 TMO3 Output Outputs at compare match Timer clock input pin 01 TMCI01 Input Inputs external clock for counter Timer reset input pin 01 TMRI01 Input Inputs external reset to counter 1 2 3 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 643 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 13.1.4 Register Configuration Table 13.2 summarizes the registers of the 8-bit timer module. Table 13.2 8-Bit Timer Registers Channel Name 0 1 2 3 All Address*1 Abbreviation R/W Initial value Timer control register 0 TCR0 H'FF68 TCSR0 R/W R/(W)*2 H'00 Timer control/status register 0 H'00 H'FF6A Time constant register A0 TCORA0 R/W H'FF H'FF6C Time constant register B0 TCORB0 R/W H'FF H'FF6E Timer counter 0 TCNT0 R/W H'00 H'FF70 Timer control register 1 TCR1 R/W H'00 H'FF69 Timer control/status register 1 TCSR1 R/(W)*2 H'10 H'FF6B Time constant register A1 TCORA1 R/W H'FF H'FF6D Time constant register B1 TCORB1 R/W H'FF H'FF6F Timer counter 1 TCNT1 R/W H'00 H'FF71 Timer control register 2 TCR2 R/W H'00 H'FDC0 Timer control/status register 2 TCSR2 R/(W)*2 H'00 H'FDC2 Time constant register A2 TCORA2 R/W H'FF H'FDC4 Time constant register B2 TCORB2 R/W H'FF H'FDC6 Timer counter 2 TCNT2 R/W H'00 H'FDC8 Timer control register 3 TCR3 R/W H'00 H'FDC1 Timer control/status register 3 TCSR3 R/(W)*2 H'10 H'FDC3 Time constant register A3 TCORA3 R/W H'FF H'FDC5 Time constant register B3 TCORB3 R/W H'FF H'FDC7 Timer counter 3 TCNT3 R/W H'00 H'FDC9 Module stop control register A MSTPCRA R/W H'3F H'FDE8 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address 2. Only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. Each pair of registers for channel 0 (channel 2) and channel 1 (channel 3) is a 16-bit register with the upper 8 bits for channel 0 (channel 2) and the lower 8 bits for channel 1 (channel 3), so they can be accessed together by word transfer instruction. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 644 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 13.2 Register Descriptions 13.2.1 Timer Counters 0 to 3 (TCNT0 to TCNT3) TCNT0 (TCNT2) Bit : Initial value: R/W : TCNT1 (TCNT3) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCNT0 to TCNT3 are 8-bit readable/writable up-counters that increment on pulses generated from an internal or external clock source. This clock source is selected by clock select bits CKS2 to CKS0 of TCR. The CPU can read or write to TCNT0 to TCNT3 at all times. TCNT0 and TCNT1 (TCNT2 and TCNT3) comprise a single 16-bit register, so they can be accessed together by word transfer instruction. TCNT0 and TCNT1 (TCNT2 and TCNT3) can be cleared by an external reset input or by a compare match signal. Which signal is to be used for clearing is selected by clock clear bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 of TCR. When a timer counter overflows from H'FF to H'00, OVF in TCSR is set to 1. TCNT0 and TCNT1 are each initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 13.2.2 Time Constant Registers A0 to A3 (TCORA0 to TCORA3) TCORA0 (TCORA2) Bit TCORA1 (TCORA3) : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCORA0 to TCORA3 are 8-bit readable/writable registers. TCORA0 and TCORA1 (TCORA2 and TCORA3) comprise a single 16-bit register so they can be accessed together by word transfer instruction. TCORA is continually compared with the value in TCNT. When a match is detected, the corresponding CMFA flag of TCSR is set. Note, however, that comparison is disabled during the T2 state of a TCOR write cycle. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 645 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) The timer output can be freely controlled by these compare match signals and the settings of bits OS1 and OS0 of TCSR. TCORA0 and TCORA1 are each initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 13.2.3 Time Constant Registers B0 to B3 (TCORB0 to TCORB3) TCORB0 (TCORB2) Bit TCORB1 (TCORB3) : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCORB0 to TCORB3 are 8-bit readable/writable registers. TCORB0 and TCORB1 (TCORB2 and TCORB3) comprise a single 16-bit register so they can be accessed together by word transfer instruction. TCORB is continually compared with the value in TCNT. When a match is detected, the corresponding CMFB flag of TCSR is set. Note, however, that comparison is disabled during the T2 state of a TCOR write cycle. The timer output can be freely controlled by these compare match signals and the settings of output select bits OS3 and OS2 of TCSR. TCORB0 and TCORB1 are each initialized to H'FF by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 13.2.4 Bit Timer Control Registers 0 to 3 (TCR0 to TCR3) : Initial value: R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMIEB CMIEA OVIE CCLR1 CCLR0 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W TCR0 to TCR3 are 8-bit readable/writable registers that select the input clock source and the time at which TCNT is cleared, and enable interrupts. TCR0 and TCR1 are each initialized to H'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. For details of this timing, see section 13.3, Operation. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 646 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 7—Compare Match Interrupt Enable B (CMIEB): Selects whether CMFB interrupt requests (CMIB) are enabled or disabled when the CMFB flag of TCSR is set to 1. Bit 7 CMIEB Description 0 CMFB interrupt requests (CMIB) are disabled 1 CMFB interrupt requests (CMIB) are enabled (Initial value) Bit 6—Compare Match Interrupt Enable A (CMIEA): Selects whether CMFA interrupt requests (CMIA) are enabled or disabled when the CMFA flag of TCSR is set to 1. Bit 6 CMIEA Description 0 CMFA interrupt requests (CMIA) are disabled 1 CMFA interrupt requests (CMIA) are enabled (Initial value) Bit 5—Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable (OVIE): Selects whether OVF interrupt requests (OVI) are enabled or disabled when the OVF flag of TCSR is set to 1. Bit 5 OVIE Description 0 OVF interrupt requests (OVI) are disabled 1 OVF interrupt requests (OVI) are enabled (Initial value) Bits 4 and 3—Counter Clear 1 and 0 (CCLR1 and CCLR0): These bits select the method by which TCNT is cleared: by compare match A or B, or by an external reset input. Bit 4 Bit 3 CCLR1 CCLR0 Description 0 0 Clear is disabled 1 Clear by compare match A 0 Clear by compare match B 1 Clear by rising edge of external reset input 1 (Initial value) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 647 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bits 2 to 0—Clock Select 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits select whether the clock input to TCNT is an internal or external clock. Three internal clocks can be selected, all divided from the system clock (φ): φ/8, φ/64, and φ/8192. The falling edge of the selected internal clock triggers the count. When use of an external clock is selected, three types of count can be selected: at the rising edge, the falling edge, and both rising and falling edges. Some functions differ between channel 0 and channel 1. Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 1 1 0 Description 0 Clock input disabled 1 Internal clock, counted at falling edge of φ/8 0 Internal clock, counted at falling edge of φ/64 1 Internal clock, counted at falling edge of φ/8192 For channel 0: count at TCNT1 overflow signal* 0 (Initial value) For channel 1: count at TCNT0 compare match A* For channel 2: count at TCNT3 overflow signal* For channel 3: count at TCNT2 compare match A* 1 1 External clock, counted at rising edge 0 External clock, counted at falling edge 1 External clock, counted at both rising and falling edges Note: * If the count input of channel 0 (channel 2) is the TCNT1 (TCNT3) overflow signal and that of channel 1 (channel 3) is the TCNT0 (TCNT2) compare match signal, no incrementing clock is generated. Do not use this setting. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 648 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 13.2.5 Timer Control/Status Registers 0 to 3 (TCSR0 to TCSR3) TCSR0 Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMFB CMFA OVF ADTE OS3 OS2 OS1 OS0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Initial value: R/W : TCSR1, TCSR3 Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMFB CMFA OVF — OS3 OS2 OS1 OS0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 : R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* — R/W R/W R/W R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMFB CMFA OVF — OS3 OS2 OS1 OS0 Initial value : R/W TCSR2 Bit Initial value : R/W : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/(W)* R/(W)* R/(W)* R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: * Only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. TCSR0 to TCSR3 are 8-bit registers that display compare match and timer overflow statuses, and control compare match output. TCSR0 and TCSR2 are initialized to H'00, and TCSR1 and TCSR3 to H'10, by a reset and in hardware standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 649 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 7—Compare Match Flag B (CMFB): Status flag indicating whether the values of TCNT and TCORB match. Bit 7 CMFB Description 0 [Clearing conditions] 1 (Initial value) • Cleared by reading CMFB when CMFB = 1, then writing 0 to CMFB • When DTC is activated by CMIB interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0 [Setting condition] Set when TCNT matches TCORB Bit 6—Compare Match Flag A (CMFA): Status flag indicating whether the values of TCNT and TCORA match. Bit 6 CMFA Description 0 [Clearing conditions] 1 (Initial value) • Cleared by reading CMFA when CMFA = 1, then writing 0 to CMFA • When DTC is activated by CMIA interrupt while DISEL bit of MRB in DTC is 0 [Setting condition] Set when TCNT matches TCORA Bit 5—Timer Overflow Flag (OVF): Status flag indicating that TCNT has overflowed (changed from H'FF to H'00). Bit 5 OVF Description 0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value) Cleared by reading OVF when OVF = 1, then writing 0 to OVF 1 [Setting condition] Set when TCNT overflows from H'FF to H'00 Bit 4—A/D Trigger Enable (ADTE) (TCSR0 Only): Selects enabling or disabling of A/D converter start requests by compare-match A. TCSR1 to TCSR3 are reserved bits. When TCSR1 and TCSR3 are read, always 1 is read off. Write is disenabled. TCSR2 is readable/writable. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 650 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 4 ADTE Description 0 A/D converter start requests by compare match A are disabled 1 A/D converter start requests by compare match A are enabled (Initial value) Bits 3 to 0—Output Select 3 to 0 (OS3 to OS0): These bits specify how the timer output level is to be changed by a compare match of TCOR and TCNT. Bits OS3 and OS2 select the effect of compare match B on the output level, bits OS1 and OS0 select the effect of compare match A on the output level, and both of them can be controlled independently. Note, however, that priorities are set such that: toggle output > 1 output > 0 output. If compare matches occur simultaneously, the output changes according to the compare match with the higher priority. Timer output is disabled when bits OS3 to OS0 are all 0. After a reset, the timer output is 0 until the first compare match event occurs. Bit 3 Bit 2 OS3 OS2 Description 0 0 No change when compare match B occurs 1 0 is output when compare match B occurs 0 1 is output when compare match B occurs 1 Output is inverted when compare match B occurs (toggle output) 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 OS1 OS0 Description 0 0 No change when compare match A occurs 1 0 is output when compare match A occurs 0 1 is output when compare match A occurs 1 Output is inverted when compare match A occurs (toggle output) 1 (Initial value) (Initial value) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 651 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 13.2.6 Bit Module Stop Control Register A (MSTPCRA) : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTPA7 MSTPA6 MSTPA5 MSTPA4 MSTPA3 MSTPA2 MSTPA1 MSTPA0 Initial value : R/W : 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCRA is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs module stop mode control. When the MSTPA4 and MSTPA0 bits in MSTPCR is set to 1, the 8-bit timer operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 24.5, Module Stop Mode. MSTPCRA is initialized to H'3F by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized by a manual reset and in software standby mode. Bit 4—Module Stop (MSTPA4): Specifies the TMR0 and TMR1 module stop mode. Bit 4 MSTPA4 Description 0 TMR0, TMR1 module stop mode cleared 1 TMR0, TMR1 module stop mode set (Initial value) Bit 0—Module Stop (MSTPA0): Specifies the TMR2 and TMR3 module stop mode. Bit 0 MSTPA0 Description 0 TMR2, TMR3 module stop mode cleared 1 TMR2, TMR3 module stop mode set Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 652 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 13.3 Operation 13.3.1 TCNT Incrementation Timing TCNT is incremented by input clock pulses (either internal or external). Internal Clock: Three different internal clock signals (φ/8, φ/64, or φ/8192) divided from the system clock (φ) can be selected, by setting bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR. Figure 13.2 shows the count timing. φ Internal clock Clock input to TCNT TCNT N–1 N N+1 Figure 13.2 Count Timing for Internal Clock Input External Clock: Three incrementation methods can be selected by setting bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR: at the rising edge, the falling edge, and both rising and falling edges. Note that the external clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 states for incrementation at a single edge, and at least 2.5 states for incrementation at both edges. The counter will not increment correctly if the pulse width is less than these values. Figure 13.3 shows the timing of incrementation at both edges of an external clock signal. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 653 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) φ External clock input Clock input to TCNT N–1 TCNT N N+1 Figure 13.3 Count Timing for External Clock Input 13.3.2 Compare Match Timing Setting of Compare Match Flags A and B (CMFA, CMFB): The CMFA and CMFB flags in TCSR are set to 1 by a compare match signal generated when the TCOR and TCNT values match. The compare match signal is generated at the last state in which the match is true, just before the timer counter is updated. Therefore, when TCOR and TCNT match, the compare match signal is not generated until the next incrementation clock input. Figure 13.4 shows this timing. φ TCNT N TCOR N Compare match signal CMF Figure 13.4 Timing of CMF Setting Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 654 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 N+1 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Timer Output Timing: When compare match A or B occurs, the timer output changes a specified by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR. Depending on these bits, the output can remain the same, change to 0, change to 1, or toggle. Figure 13.5 shows the timing when the output is set to toggle at compare match A. φ Compare match A signal Timer output pin Figure 13.5 Timing of Timer Output Timing of Compare Match Clear: The timer counter is cleared when compare match A or B occurs, depending on the setting of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR. Figure 13.6 shows the timing of this operation. φ Compare match signal TCNT N H'00 Figure 13.6 Timing of Compare Match Clear Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 655 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 13.3.3 Timing of External RESET on TCNT TCNT is cleared at the rising edge of an external reset input, depending on the settings of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR. The clear pulse width must be at least 1.5 states. Figure 13.7 shows the timing of this operation. φ External reset input pin Clear signal TCNT N–1 N H'00 Figure 13.7 Timing of External Reset 13.3.4 Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting The OVF in TCSR is set to 1 when the timer count overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00). Figure 13.8 shows the timing of this operation. φ TCNT H'FF H'00 Overflow signal OVF Figure 13.8 Timing of OVF Setting Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 656 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 13.3.5 Operation with Cascaded Connection If bits CKS2 to CKS0 in either TCR0 or TCR1 are set to B'100, the 8-bit timers of the two channels are cascaded. With this configuration, a single 16-bit timer could be used (16-bit timer mode) or compare matches of the 8-bit timer channel 0 (channel 2) could be counted by the timer of channel 1 (channel 3) (compare match counter mode). In this case, the timer operates as below. 16-Bit Counter Mode: When bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR0 are set to B'100, the timer functions as a single 16-bit timer with channel 0 (channel 2) occupying the upper 8 bits and channel 1 (channel 3) occupying the lower 8 bits. • Setting of compare match flags The CMF flag in TCSR0 and TCSR2 is set to 1 when a 16-bit compare match event occurs The CMF flag in TCSR1 and TCSR3 is set to 1 when a lower 8-bit compare match event occurs • Counter clear specification If the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR0 (TCR2) have been set for counter clear at compare match, the 16-bit counter (TCNT0 and TCNT1 (TCNT2 and TCNT3) together) is cleared when a 16-bit compare match event occurs. The 16-bit counter (TCNT0 and TCNT1 (TCNT2 and TCNT3) together) is cleared even if counter clear by the TMRI01 (TMRI23) pin has also been set The settings of the CCLR1 and CCLR0 bits in TCR1 and TCR3 are ignored. The lower 8 bits cannot be cleared independently • Pin output Control of output from the TMO0 (TMO2) pin by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR0 (TCSR2) is in accordance with the 16-bit compare match conditions Control of output from the TMO1 (TMO3) pin by bits OS3 to OS0 in TCSR1 (TCSR3) is in accordance with the lower 8-bit compare match conditions Compare Match Counter Mode: When bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCR1 (TCR3) are B'100, TCNT1 (TCNT3) counts compare match A’s for channel 0 (channel 2). Channels 0 to 3 are controlled independently. Conditions such as setting of the CMF flag, generation of interrupts, output from the TMO pin, and counter clear are in accordance with the settings for each channel. Note on Usage: If the 16-bit counter mode and compare match counter mode are set simultaneously, the input clock pulses for TCNT0 and TCNT1 (TCNT2 and TCNT3) are not generated and thus the counters will stop operating. Software should therefore avoid using both these modes. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 657 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 13.4 Interrupts 13.4.1 Interrupt Sources and DTC Activation (The H8S/2695 does not have a DTC function or an 8-bit timer) There are three 8-bit timer interrupt sources: CMIA, CMIB, and OVI. Their relative priorities are shown in table 13.3. Each interrupt source is set as enabled or disabled by the corresponding interrupt enable bit in TCR, and independent interrupt requests are sent for each to the interrupt controller. It is also possible to activate the DTC by means of CMIA and CMIB interrupts. Table 13.3 8-Bit Timer Interrupt Sources Channel Interrupt Source Description DTC Activation Priority 0 CMIA0 Interrupt by CMFA Possible High CMIB0 Interrupt by CMFB Possible OVI0 Interrupt by OVF Not possible CMIA1 Interrupt by CMFA Possible CMIB1 Interrupt by CMFB Possible OVI1 Interrupt by OVF Not possible CMIA2 Interrupt by CMFA Possible CMIB2 Interrupt by CMFB Possible OVI2 Interrupt by OVF Not possible CMIA3 Interrupt by CMFA Possible CMIB3 Interrupt by CMFB Possible OVI3 Interrupt by OVF Not possible 1 2 3 Low Note: This table shows the initial state immediately after a reset. The relative channel priorities can be changed by the interrupt controller. 13.4.2 A/D Converter Activation The A/D converter can be activated only by channel 0 compare match A. If the ADTE bit in TCSR0 is set to 1 when the CMFA flag is set to 1 by the occurrence of channel 0 compare match A, a request to start A/D conversion is sent to the A/D converter. If the 8-bit timer conversion start trigger has been selected on the A/D converter side at this time, A/D conversion is started. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 658 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 13.5 Sample Application In the example below, the 8-bit timer is used to generate a pulse output with a selected duty cycle, as shown in figure 13.9. The control bits are set as follows: [1] In TCR, bit CCLR1 is cleared to 0 and bit CCLR0 is set to 1 so that TCNT is cleared by comparing and matching TCORA. [2] In TCSR, bits OS3 to OS0 are set to B'0110, causing the output to change to 1 at a TCORA compare match and to 0 at a TCORB compare match. With these settings, the 8-bit timer provides output of pulses at a rate determined by TCORA with a pulse width determined by TCORB. No software intervention is required. TCNT H'FF Counter clear TCORA TCORB H'00 TMO Figure 13.9 Example of Pulse Output Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 659 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 13.6 Usage Notes Application programmers should note that the following kinds of contention can occur in the 8-bit timer. 13.6.1 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the clear takes priority, so that the counter is cleared and the write is not performed. Figure 13.10 shows this operation. TCNT write cycle by CPU T1 T2 φ TCNT address Address Internal write signal Counter clear signal N TCNT H'00 Figure 13.10 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 660 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 13.6.2 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the write takes priority and the counter is not incremented. Figure 13.11 shows this operation. TCNT write cycle by CPU T1 T2 φ Address TCNT address Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNT N M Counter write data Figure 13.11 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 661 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 13.6.3 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare Match During the T2 state of a TCOR write cycle, the TCOR write has priority and the compare match signal is disabled even if a compare match event occurs. Figure 13.12 shows this operation. TCOR write cycle by CPU T1 T2 φ Address TCOR address Internal write signal TCNT N N+1 TCOR N M TCOR write data Compare match signal Disabled Figure 13.12 Contention between TCOR Write and Compare Match Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 662 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 13.6.4 Contention between Compare Matches A and B If compare match events A and B occur at the same time, the 8-bit timer operates in accordance with the priorities for the output statuses set for compare match A and compare match B, as shown in table 13.4. Table 13.4 Timer Output Priorities Output Setting Priority Toggle output High 1 output 0 output No change 13.6.5 Low Switching of Internal Clocks and TCNT Operation TCNT may increment erroneously when the internal clock is switched over. Table 13.5 shows the relationship between the timing at which the internal clock is switched (by writing to the CKS1 and CKS0 bits) and the TCNT operation. When the TCNT clock is generated from an internal clock, the falling edge of the internal clock pulse is detected. If clock switching causes a change from high to low level, as shown in case 3 in table 13.5, a TCNT clock pulse is generated on the assumption that the switchover is a falling edge. This increments TCNT. The erroneous incrementation can also happen when switching between internal and external clocks. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 663 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Table 13.5 Switching of Internal Clock and TCNT Operation No. 1 Timing of Switchover by Means of CKS1 and CKS0 Bits TCNT Clock Operation Switching from low to low*1 Clock before switchover Clock after switchover TCNT clock TCNT N N+1 CKS bit write 2 Switching from 2 low to high* Clock before switchover Clock after switchover TCNT clock TCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS bit write 3 Switching from high to low*3 Clock before switchover Clock after switchover *4 TCNT clock TCNT N N+1 CKS bit write Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 664 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 N+2 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) No. 4 Timing of Switchover by Means of CKS1 and CKS0 Bits TCNT Clock Operation Switching from high to high Clock before switchover Clock after switchover TCNT clock TCNT N N+1 N+2 CKS bit write Notes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 13.6.6 Includes switching from low to stop, and from stop to low. Includes switching from stop to high. Includes switching from high to stop. Generated on the assumption that the switchover is a falling edge; TCNT is incremented. Interrupts and Module Stop Mode If module stop mode is entered when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible to clear the CPU interrupt source or DMAC and DTC activation source. Interrupts should therefore be disabled before entering module stop mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 665 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 13 8-Bit Timers (TMR) (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 666 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 14.1 Overview The H8S/2633 Group has an on-chip 14-bit pulse-width modulator (PWM) with four output channels. Each channel can be connected to an external low-pass filter to operate as a 14-bit D/A converter. Both channels share the same counter (DACNT) and control register (DACR). 14.1.1 Features The features of the 14-bit PWM D/A are listed below. • The pulse is subdivided into multiple base cycles to reduce ripple. • Two resolution settings and two base cycle settings are available The resolution can be set equal to one or two system clock cycles. The base cycle can be set equal to T × 64 or T × 256, where T is the resolution. • Four operating rates The two resolution settings and two base cycle settings combine to give a selection of four operating rates. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 667 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 14.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 14.1 shows a block diagram of the PWM D/A module. Internal clock φ Internal data bus φ/2 Clock Clock selection Bus interface Basic cycle compare-match A PWM0 Fine-adjustment pulse addition A PWM1 Basic cycle compare-match B Fine-adjustment pulse addition B Comparator A DADRA Comparator B DADRB Control logic Basic cycle overflow DACNT DACR Module data bus Legend: DACR: DADRA: DADRB: DACNT: PWM D/A control register ( 6 bits) PWM D/A data register A (15 bits) PWM D/A data register B (15 bits) PWM D/A counter (14 bits) Figure 14.1 PWM D/A Block Diagram Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 668 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 14.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 14.1 lists the pins used by the PWM D/A module. Table 14.1 Input and Output Pins Name Abbr. I/O Function PWM output pin 0 PWM0 Output PWM output, channel 0A PWM output pin 1 PWM1 Output PWM output, channel 0B PWM output pin 2 PWM2 Output PWM output, channel 1A PWM output pin 3 PWM3 Output PWM output, channel 1B 14.1.4 Register Configuration Table 14.2 lists the registers of the PWM D/A module. Table 14.2 Register Configuration Channel Name Abbreviation R/W Initial value Address*1 0 PWM D/A control register 0 DACR0 R/W H'30 PWM D/A data register AH0 DADRAH0 R/W H'FF H'FDB8*2 H'FDB8*2 PWM D/A data register AL0 DADRAL0 R/W H'FF PWM D/A data register BH0 DADRBH0 R/W H'FF PWM D/A data register BL0 DADRBL0 R/W H'FF PWM D/A counter H0 DACNTH0 R/W H'00 PWM D/A counter L0 DACNTL0 R/W H'03 PWM D/A control register 1 DACR1 R/W H'30 PWM D/A data register AH1 DADRAH1 R/W H'FF PWM D/A data register AL1 DADRAL1 R/W H'FF PWM D/A data register BH1 DADRBH1 R/W H'FF PWM D/A data register BL1 DADRBL1 R/W H'FF PWM D/A counter H1 DACNTH1 R/W H'00 PWM D/A counter L1 DACNTL1 R/W H'03 H'FDBE*2 H'FDBF*2 Module stop control register B MSTPCRB R/W H'FF H'FDE9 1 All H'FDB9*2 H'FDBA*2 H'FDBB*2 H'FDBA*2 H'FDBB*2 H'FDBC*2 H'FDBC*2 H'FDBD*2 H'FDBE*2 H'FDBF*2 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. The same addresses are shared by DADRA and DACR, and by DADRB and DACNT. Switching is performed by the REGS bit in DACNT or DADRB. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 669 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 14.2 Register Descriptions 14.2.1 PWM D/A Counter (DACNT) DACNTH Bit (CPU) DACNTL : 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8 9 10 11 12 13 — — BIT (Counter) REGS Initial value : R/W : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W — 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 R/W DACNT is a 14-bit readable/writable up-counter that increments on an input clock pulse. The input clock is selected by the clock select bit (CKS) in DACR. The CPU can read and write the DACNT value, but since DACNT is a 16-bit register, data transfers between it and the CPU are performed using a temporary register (TEMP). See section 14.3, Bus Master Interface, for details. DACNT functions as the time base for both PWM D/A channels. When a channel operates with 14-bit precision, it uses all DACNT bits. When a channel operates with 12-bit precision, it uses the lower 12 (counter) bits and ignores the upper two (counter) bits. DACNT is initialized to H'0003 by a reset, in the standby modes, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode, and by the PWME bit. Bit 1 of DACNTL (CPU) is not used, and is always read as 1. DACNTL Bit 0—Register Select (REGS): DADRA and DACR, and DADRB and DACNT, are located at the same addresses. The REGS bit specifies which registers can be accessed. The REGS bit can be accessed regardless of whether DADRB or DACNT is selected. Bit 0 REGS Description 0 DADRA and DADRB can be accessed 1 DACR and DACNT can be accessed Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 670 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 14.2.2 PWM D/A Data Registers A and B (DADRA and DADRB) DADRH Bit (CPU) Bit (Data) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 — — DA13 DA12 DA11 DA10 DA9 DA8 DA7 DA6 DA5 DA4 DA3 DA2 DA1 DA0 CFS DADRA Initial value : 1 R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W DADRB — 1 — DA13 DA12 DA11 DA10 DA9 DA8 DA7 DA6 DA5 DA4 DA3 DA2 DA1 DA0 CFS REGS Initial value : R/W DADRL 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 : R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W There are two 16-bit readable/writable PWM D/A data registers: DADRA and DADRB. DADRA corresponds to PWM D/A channel A, and DADRB to PWM D/A channel B. The CPU can read and write the PWM D/A data register values, but since DADRA and DADRB are 16-bit registers, data transfers between them and the CPU are performed using a temporary register (TEMP). See section 14.3, Bus Master Interface, for details. The least significant (CPU) bit of DADRA is not used and is always read as 1. DADR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset, and in the standby modes, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Bits 15 to 3—PWM D/A Data 13 to 0 (DA13 to DA0): The digital value to be converted to an analog value is set in the upper 14 bits of the PWM D/A data register. In each base cycle, the DACNT value is continually compared with these upper 14 bits to determine the duty cycle of the output waveform, and to decide whether to output a fineadjustment pulse equal in width to the resolution. To enable this operation, the data register must be set within a range that depends on the carrier frequency select bit (CFS). If the DADR value is outside this range, the PWM output is held constant. A channel can be operated with 12-bit precision by keeping the two lowest data bits (DA0 and DA1) cleared to 0 and writing the data to be converted in the upper 12 bits. The two lowest data bits correspond to the two highest counter (DACNT) bits. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 671 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 1—Carrier Frequency Select (CFS) Bit 1 CFS Description 0 Base cycle = resolution (T) × 64 DADR range = H'0401 to H'FFFD 1 Base cycle = resolution (T) × 256 DADR range = H'0103 to H'FFFF (Initial value) Bit 0—Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. DADRB Bit 0—Register Select (REGS): DADRA and DACR, and DADRB and DACNT, are located at the same addresses. The REGS bit specifies which registers can be accessed. The REGS bit can be accessed regardless of whether DADRB or DACNT is selected. Bit 0 REGS Description 0 DADRA and DADRB can be accessed 1 DACR and DACNT can be accessed 14.2.3 Bit PWM D/A Control Register (DACR) : Initial value : R/W (Initial value) : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TEST PWME — — OEB OEA OS CKS 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W — — R/W R/W R/W R/W DACR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects test mode, enables the PWM outputs, and selects the output phase and operating speed. DACR is initialized to H'30 by a reset, and in the standby modes, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, and module stop mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 672 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 7—Test Mode (TEST): Selects test mode, which is used in testing the chip. Normally this bit should be cleared to 0. Bit 7 TEST Description 0 PWM (D/A) in user state: normal operation 1 PWM (D/A) in test state: correct conversion results unobtainable (Initial value) Bit 6—PWM Enable (PWME): Starts or stops the PWM D/A counter (DACNT). Bit 6 PWME Description 0 DACNT operates as a 14-bit up-counter 1 DACNT halts at H'0003 (Initial value) Bits 5 and 4—Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. Bit 3—Output Enable B (OEB): Enables or disables output on PWM D/A channel B. Bit 3 OEB Description 0 PWM (D/A) channel B output (at the PWM1/PWM3 pin) is disabled 1 PWM (D/A) channel B output (at the PWM1/PWM3 pin) is enabled (Initial value) Bit 2—Output Enable A (OEA): Enables or disables output on PWM D/A channel A. Bit 2 OEA Description 0 PWM (D/A) channel A output (at the PWM0/PWM2 pin) is disabled 1 PWM (D/A) channel A output (at the PWM0/PWM2 pin) is enabled (Initial value) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 673 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 1—Output Select (OS): Selects the phase of the PWM D/A output. Bit 1 OS Description 0 Direct PWM output 1 Inverted PWM output (Initial value) Bit 0—Clock Select (CKS): Selects the PWM D/A resolution. If the system clock (φ) frequency is 10 MHz, resolutions of 100 ns and 200 ns can be selected. Bit 0 CKS Description 0 Operates at resolution (T) = system clock cycle time (tcyc) 1 Operates at resolution (T) = system clock cycle time (tcyc) × 2 14.2.4 Bit (Initial value) Module Stop Control Register B (MSTPCRB) : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MSTPB7 MSTPB6 MSTPB5 MSTPB4 MSTPB3 MSTPB2 MSTPB1 MSTPB0 Initial value : R/W : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W MSTPCRB is an 8-bit readable/writable register, and is used to perform module stop mode control. When the MSTPB2 is set to 1, at the end of the bus cycle 14-bit PWM timer 0 operation is halted and a transition made to module stop mode. When the MSTPB1 is set to 1, at the end of the bus cycle PWM timer 1 operation is halted and a transition made to module stop mode. See section 24.5, Module Stop Mode, for details. MSTPCRB is initialized to H'FF by a power-on reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in manual reset or software standby mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 674 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 2—Module Stop (MSTPB2): Specifies PWM0 module stop mode. Bit 2 MSTPB2 Description 0 PWM0 module stop mode is cleared 1 PWM0 module stop mode is set (Initial value) Bit 1—Module Stop (MSTPB1): Specifies PWM1 module stop mode. Bit 1 MSTPB1 Description 0 PWM1 module stop mode is cleared 1 PWM1 module stop mode is set 14.3 (Initial value) Bus Master Interface DACNT, DADRA, and DADRB are 16-bit registers. The data bus linking the bus master and the on-chip supporting modules, however, is only 8 bits wide. When the bus master accesses these registers, it therefore uses an 8-bit temporary register (TEMP). These registers are written and read as follows (taking the example of the CPU interface). • Write When the upper byte is written, the upper-byte write data is stored in TEMP. Next, when the lower byte is written, the lower-byte write data and TEMP value are combined, and the combined 16-bit value is written in the register. • Read When the upper byte is read, the upper-byte value is transferred to the CPU and the lower-byte value is transferred to TEMP. Next, when the lower byte is read, the lower-byte value in TEMP is transferred to the CPU. These registers should always be accessed 16 bits at a time (by word access or two consecutive byte accesses), and the upper byte should always be accessed before the lower byte. Correct data will not be transferred if only the upper byte or only the lower byte is accessed. Figure 14.2 shows the data flow for access to DACNT. The other registers are accessed similarly. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 675 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Example 1: Write to DACNT MOV.W R0, @DACNT ; Write R0 contents to DACNT Example 2: Read DADRA MOV.W @DADRA, R0 ; Copy contents of DADRA to R0 Table 14.3 Read and Write Access Methods for 16-Bit Registers Read Write Register Name Word Byte Word Byte DADRA and DADRB Yes Yes Yes × DACNT Yes × Yes × Notes: Yes: Permitted type of access. Word access includes successive byte accesses to the upper byte (first) and lower byte (second). ×: This type of access may give incorrect results. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 676 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Upper-Byte Write CPU (H'AA) Upper byte Module data bus Bus interface TEMP (H'AA) DACNTH ( ) DACNTL ( ) Lower-Byte Write CPU (H'57) Lower byte Module data bus Bus interface TEMP (H'AA) DACNTH (H'AA) DACNTL (H'57) Figure 14.2 (a) Access to DACNT (CPU Writes H'AA57 to DACNT) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 677 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Upper-Byte Read CPU (H'AA) Upper byte Module data bus Bus interface TEMP (H'57) DACNTH (H'AA) DACNTL (H'57) Lower-Byte Read CPU (H'57) Lower byte Module data bus Bus interface TEMP (H'57) DACNTH ( ) DACNTL ( ) Figure 14.2 (b) Access to DACNT (CPU Reads H'AA57 from DACNT) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 678 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 14.4 Operation A PWM waveform like the one shown in figure 14.3 is output from the PWMX pin. When OS = 0, the value in DADR corresponds to the total width (TL) of the low (0) pulses output in one conversion cycle (256 pulses when CFS = 0, 64 pulses when CFS = 1). When OS = 1, the output waveform is inverted and the DADR value corresponds to the total width (TH) of the high (1) output pulses. Figure 14.4 shows the types of waveform output available. 1 conversion cycle (T × 214 (= 16384)) tf Basic cycle (T × 64 or T × 256) tL T: Resolution m TL = ∑ tLn (when OS = 0) n=1 (When CFS = 0, m = 256; when CFS = 1, m = 64) Figure 14.3 PWM D/A Operation Table 14.4 summarizes the relationships of the CKS, CFS, and OS bit settings to the resolution, base cycle, and conversion cycle. The PWM output remains flat unless DADR contains at least a certain minimum value. Table 14.4 indicates the range of DADR settings that give an output waveform like the one in figure 14.3, and lists the conversion cycle length when low-order DADR bits are kept cleared to 0, reducing the conversion precision to 12 bits or 10 bits. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 679 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) Table 14.4 Settings and Operation (Examples when φ = 10 MHz) Fixed DADR Bits Resolution Base Conversion TL (if OS = 0) CKS T (µs) CFS Cycle (µs) Cycle (µs) TH (if OS = 1) Bit Data Conversion Precision (Bits) 3 2 1 0 Cycle* (µs) 0 14 0.1 0 6.4 1638.4 1. Always low (or high) (DADR = H'0001 to H'03FD) 2. (Data value) × T (DADR = H'0401 to H'FFFD) 1 25.6 1638.4 1. Always low (or high) (DADR = H'0003 to H'00FF) 2. (Data value) × T (DADR = H'0103 to H'FFFF) 1 0.2 0 12.8 3276.8 1. Always low (or high) (DADR = H'0001 to H'03FD) 2. (Data value) × T (DADR = H'0401 to H'FFFD) 1 51.2 3276.8 1. Always low (or high) (DADR = H'0003 to H'00FF) 2. (Data value) × T (DADR = H'0103 to H'FFFF) 1638.4 12 0 0 409.6 10 0 0 0 0 102.4 14 1638.4 12 0 0 409.6 10 0 0 0 0 102.4 14 3276.8 12 0 0 819.2 10 0 0 0 0 204.8 14 3276.8 12 0 0 819.2 10 0 0 0 0 204.8 Note: * This column indicates the conversion cycle when specific DADR bits are fixed. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 680 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 1. OS = 0 (DADR corresponds to TL) a. CFS = 0 [base cycle = resolution (T) × 64] 1 conversion cycle tf1 tL1 tf2 tf255 tL2 tL3 tL255 tf256 tL256 tf1 = tf2 = tf3 = · · · = tf255 = tf256 = T × 64 tL1 + tL2 + tL3 + · · · + tL255 + tL256 = TL Figure 14.4 (1) Output Waveform b. CFS = 1 [base cycle = resolution (T) × 256] 1 conversion cycle tf1 tL1 tf2 tL2 tf63 tL3 tL63 tf64 tL64 tf1 = tf2 = tf3 = · · · = tf63 = tf64 = T × 256 tL1 + tL2 + tL3 + · · · + tL63 + tL64 = TL Figure 14.4 (2) Output Waveform Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 681 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 14 14-Bit PWM D/A (This function is not available in the H8S/2695) 2. OS = 1 (DADR corresponds to TH) a. CFS = 0 [base cycle = resolution (T) × 64] 1 conversion cycle tf1 tH1 tf2 tf255 tH2 tH3 tH255 tf256 tH256 tf1 = tf2 = tf3 = · · · = tf255 = tf256 = T × 64 tH1 + tH2 + tH3 + · · · + tH255 + tH256 = TH Figure 14.4 (3) Output Waveform b. CFS = 1 [base cycle = resolution (T) × 256] 1 conversion cycle tf1 tH1 tf2 tH2 tf63 tH3 tH63 tf1 = tf2 = tf3 = · · · = tf63 = tf64 = T × 256 tH1 + tH2 + tH3 + · · · + tH63 + tH64 = TH Figure 14.4 (4) Output Waveform Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 682 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 tf64 tH64 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) 15.1 Overview The H8S/2633 Group has a two channel inbuilt watchdog timer, (WDT0/WDT1). The WDT outputs an overflow signal ( ) if a system crash prevents the CPU from writing to the timer counter, allowing it to overflow. At the same time, the WDT can also generate an internal reset signal for the H8S/2633 Group. WDTOVF When this watchdog function is not needed, the WDT can be used as an interval timer. In interval timer operation, an interval timer interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows. 15.1.1 Features WDT features are listed below. • Switchable between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode • output when in watchdog timer mode If the counter overflows, the WDT outputs . It is possible to select whether the LSI is internally reset or an NMI interrupt is generated at the same time. This internal reset is effected by either a power-on reset or a manual reset. • Interrupt generation when in interval timer mode If the counter overflows, the WDT generates an interval timer interrupt. • WDT0 and WDT1 respectively allow eight and sixteen types of counter input clock to be selected The maximum interval of the WDT is given as a system clock cycle × 131072 × 256. A subclock may be selected for the input counter of WDT1*. Where a subclock is selected, the maximum interval is given as a subclock cycle × 256 × 256. • Selected clock can be output from the BUZZ* output pin (WDT1)* WDTOVF WDTOVF Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 683 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) 15.1.2 Block Diagram Figure 15.1 (a) and 15.1 (b) show a block diagram of the WDT. Overflow WDTOVF Internal reset signal*1 Clock Clock select Reset control RSTCSR φ/2*2 φ/64*2 φ/128*2 φ/512*2 φ/2048*2 φ/8192*2 φ/32768*2 φ/131072*2 Internal clock sources TCNT TSCR Module bus Bus interface WDT Legend: TCSR: Timer control/status register TCNT: Timer counter RSTCSR: Reset control/status register Notes: 1. The type of internal reset signal depends on a register setting. There are two alternative types of reset, namely power-on reset and manual reset. 2. The φ in the subactive and subsleep mode is φSUB. Figure 15.1 (a) Block Diagram of WDT0 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 684 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Internal bus WOVI 0 (interrupt request signal) Interrupt control Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) Internal NMI Interrupt request signal Interrupt control Overflow Clock select Clock Reset control Internal reset signal* φ/2 φ/64 φ/128 φ/512 φ/2048 φ/8192 φ/32768 φ/131072 Internal clock BUZZ TCNT TCSR Bus interface Module bus φSUB/2 φSUB/4 φSUB/8 φSUB/16 φSUB/32 φSUB/64 φSUB/128 φSUB/256 Internal bus WOVI1 (Interrupt request signal) WDT Legend: TCSR: Timer control/status register TCNT: Timer counter Note: * An internal reset signal can be generated by setting the register. The reset thus generated is a power-on reset. This function is not available in the H8S/2695. Figure 15.1 (b) Block Diagram of WDT1 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 685 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) 15.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 15.1 describes the WDT output pin. Table 15.1 WDT Pin Name Symbol Watchdog timer overflow WDTOVF Buzzer output BUZZ* I/O Function Output Outputs counter overflow signal in watchdog timer mode Output Outputs clock selected by watchdog timer (WDT1) Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. 15.1.4 Register Configuration Table 15.2 summarizes the WDT register configuration. These registers control clock selection, WDT mode switching, and the reset signal. Table 15.2 WDT Registers Address*1 Channel Name 0 1 All Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Write*2 Read Timer control/status register 0 TCSR0 R/(W)*3 H'18 H'FF74 H'FF74 Timer counter 0 TCNT0 Reset control/status register RSTCSR H'FF76 H'FF77 Timer control/status register 1 TCSR1 R/W H'00 R/(W)*3 H'1F R/(W)*3 H'00 Timer counter 1 TCNT1 R/W H'00 H'FFA2 H'FFA3 Pin function control register PFCR R/W H'0D/H'00 H'FDEB H'FF74 H'FF75 H'FFA2 H'FFA2 Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. For details of write operations, see section 15.2.5, Notes on Register Access. 3. Only a write of 0 is permitted to bit 7, to clear the flag. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 686 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) 15.2 Register Descriptions 15.2.1 Timer Counter (TCNT) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W : TCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable* up-counter. When the TME bit is set to 1 in TCSR, TCNT starts counting pulses generated from the internal clock source selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR. When the count overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00), either the watchdog timer overflow signal ( ) or an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is generated, depending on the mode selected by the WT/ bit in TCSR. WDTOVF IT TCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in hardware standby mode, or when the TME bit is cleared to 0. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Note: * TCNT is write-protected by a password to prevent accidental overwriting. For details see section 15.2.5, Notes on Register Access. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 687 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) 15.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register (TCSR) TCSR0 Bit : 7 OVF Initial value : R/W : 0 R/(W)* 6 WT/ IT 5 4 3 2 1 0 TME — — CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 R/W R/W — — R/W R/W R/W 5 4 3 2 1 0 TME PSS CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Note: * Only a 0 can be written, for flag clearing. TCSR1*1 Bit : 7 OVF Initial value : R/W : 0 R/(W)*2 6 WT/ IT RST/ NMI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Notes: 1. In the case of the H8S/2695, only 0 should be written to the TCSR1 register. 2. Only a 0 can be written, for flag clearing. TCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable* register. Its functions include selecting the clock source to be input to TCNT, and the timer mode. TCSR0 (TCSR1) is initialized to H'18 (H'00) by a reset and in hardware standby mode. It is not initialized in software standby mode. Note: * TCSR is write-protected by a password to prevent accidental overwriting. For details see section 15.2.5, Notes on Register Access. Bit 7—Overflow Flag (OVF): Indicates that TCNT has overflowed from H'FF to H'00. Bit 7 OVF Description 0 [Clearing conditions] 1 • Cleared when 0 is written to the TME bit (Only applies to WDT1) • Cleared by reading TCSR when OVF = 1, then writing 0 to OVF (Initial value) [Setting condition] When TCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00) When internal reset request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, OVF is cleared automatically by the internal reset. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 688 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) In interval timer mode, to clear OVF flag in WOVI handling routine, reead TCSR when OVF = 1, then write with 0 to OVF, as stated above. When WOVI is masked and OVF flag is poling, if contention between OVF flag set and TCSR read is occurred, OVF = 1 is read but OVF can not be cleared by writing with 0 to OVF. In this case, reading TCSR when OVF = 1 two times meet the requirements of OVF clear condition. Please read TCSR when OVF = 1 two times before writing with 0 to OVF. Bit 6—Timer Mode Select (WT/IT): Selects whether the WDT is used as a watchdog timer or interval timer. When TCNT overflows, WDT0 generates the signal when in watchdog timer mode, or a WOVI interrupt request to the CPU when in interval timer mode. WDT1* generates a reset or NMI interrupt request when in watchdog timer mode, or a WOVI interrupt request to the CPU when in interval timer mode. WDTOVF Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. WDT0 Mode Select WDT0 WT/IT Description 0 Interval timer mode: WDT0 requests an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) from the CPU when the TCNT overflows. 1 Watchdog timer mode: WDT0 outputs a (Initial value) WDTOVF signal when the TCNT overflows.* Note: * For details on a TCNT overflow in watchdog timer mode, see section 15.2.3, Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR). WDT1* Mode Select WDT1 WT/IT Description 0 Interval timer mode: WDT1 requests an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) from the CPU when the TCNT overflows. 1 Watchdog timer mode: WDT1 requests a reset or an NMI interrupt from the CPU when the TCNT overflows. Note: * In the case of the H8S/2695, only 0 should be written to the WT/ register. (Initial value) IT bit in the TCSR1 Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 689 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 5—Timer Enable (TME): Selects whether TCNT runs or is halted. Bit 5 TME Description 0 TCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted 1 TCNT counts (Initial value) WDT0 TCSR Bit 4—Reserved Bit: This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. Note: In the case of the H8S/2695, only 0 should be written to the TME bit in the TCSR1 register. WDT1 TCSR Bit 4—Prescaler Select (PSS): This bit is used to select an input clock source for the TCNT of WDT1. See the descriptions of Clock Select 2 to 0 for details. WDT1 TCSR Bit 4 PSS Description 0 The TCNT counts frequency-division clock pulses of the φ based prescaler (PSM). 1 (Initial value) The TCNT counts frequency-division clock pulses of the φ SUB-based prescaler (PSS). Note: In the case of the H8S/2695, only 0 should be written to the PSS bit in the TCSR1 register. WDT0 TCSR Bit 3—Reserved Bit: This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified. WDT1 TCSR Bit 3—Reset or NMI (RST/NMI): This bit is used to choose between an internal reset request and an NMI request when the TCNT overflows during the watchdog timer mode. Bit 3 RTS/NMI Description 0 NMI request. 1 Internal reset request. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 690 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) Bits 2 to 0: Clock Select 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits select one of eight internal clock sources, obtained by dividing the system clock (φ) or subclock (φ SUB), for input to TCNT. Note: In the case of the H8S/2695, only 0 should be written to the RST/ register. NMI bit in the TCSR1 WDT0 Input Clock Select Description Bit 2 CKS2 Bit 1 CKS1 Bit 0 CKS0 Clock*2 Overflow Period*1 (where φ = 25 MHz) 0 0 0 φ/2 (Initial value) 20.4 µs 1 φ/64 655.3 µs 0 φ/128 1.3 ms 1 φ/512 5.2 ms 1 1 0 1 0 φ/2048 20.9 ms 1 φ/8192 83.8 ms 0 φ/32768 335.5 ms 1 φ/131072 1.34 s Notes: 1. An overflow period is the time interval between the start of counting up from H'00 on the TCNT and the occurrence of a TCNT overflow. 2. In the H8S/2633 Group, the φ in the subactive and subsleep mode is φSUB. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 691 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) WDT1*1 Input Clock Select Description Bit 4 PSS Bit 2 CKS2 Bit 1 CKS1 Bit 0 CKS0 Clock 2 Overflow Period* (where φ = 25 MHz) (where φ SUB = 32.768 kHz) 0 0 0 0 φ/2 (Initial value) 20.4 µs 1 φ/64 655.3 µs 0 φ/128 1.3 ms 1 φ/512 5.2 ms 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 φ/2048 20.9 ms 1 φ/8192 83.8 ms 0 φ/32768 335.5 ms 1 φ/131072 1.34 s 0 φSUB/2 15.6 ms 1 φSUB/4 31.3 ms 0 φSUB/8 62.5 ms 1 φSUB/16 125 ms 0 φSUB/32 250 ms 1 φSUB/64 500 ms 0 φSUB/128 1s 1 φSUB/256 2s Notes: 1. WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695. 2. An overflow period is the time interval between the start of counting up from H'00 on the TCNT and the occurrence of a TCNT overflow. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 692 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) 15.2.3 Bit Reset Control/Status Register (RSTCSR) : Initial value : R/W : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WOVF RSTE RSTS — — — — — 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 R/(W)* R/W R/W — — — — — Note: * Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. RSTCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable* register that controls the generation of the internal reset signal when TCNT overflows, and selects the type of internal reset signal. RSTCSR is initialized to H'1F by a reset signal from the reset signal caused by overflows. RES pin, but not by the WDT internal Note: * RSTCSR is write-protected by a password to prevent accidental overwriting. For details see section 15.2.5, Notes on Register Access. Bit 7—Watchdog Overflow Flag (WOVF): Indicates that TCNT has overflowed (changed from H'FF to H'00) during watchdog timer operation. This bit is not set in interval timer mode. Bit 7 WOVF Description 0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value) Cleared by reading RSTCSR when WOVF = 1, then writing 0 to WOVF 1 [Setting condition] Set when TCNT overflows (changed from H'FF to H'00) during watchdog timer operation Bit 6—Reset Enable (RSTE): Specifies whether or not a reset signal is generated in the H8S/2633 Group if TCNT overflows during watchdog timer operation. Bit 6 RSTE Description 0 Reset signal is not generated if TCNT overflows* 1 Reset signal is generated if TCNT overflows (Initial value) Note: * The modules within the H8S/2633 Group are not reset, but TCNT and TCSR within the WDT are reset. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 693 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) Bit 5—Reset Select (RSTS): Selects the type of internal reset generated if TCNT overflows during watchdog timer operation. For details of the types of reset, see section 4, Exception Handling. Bit 5 RSTS Description 0 Power-on reset 1 Manual reset (Initial value) Bits 4 to 0—Reserved: These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified. 15.2.4 Bit Pin Function Control Register (PFCR) : 7 CSS07 Initial value : R/W : 6 5 4 CSS36 BUZZE* LCASS 3 2 1 0 AE3 AE2 AE1 AE0 0 0 0 0 1/0 1/0 0 1/0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Note: * This function is not available in the H8S/2695. PFCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs address output control in external expanded mode. Only bit 5 is described here. For details of the other bits, see section 7.2.6, Pin Function Control Register (PFCR). Bit 5—BUZZ Output Enable (BUZZE): Enables or disables BUZZ output from the PF1 pin. The WDT1 input clock selected with bits PSS and CKS2 to CKS0 is output as the BUZZ signal. Bit 5 BUZZE Description 0 Functions as PF1 I/O pin 1 Functions as BUZZ output pin Note: In the case of the H8S/2695, only 0 should be written to the BUZZ bit. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 694 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 (Initial value) Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) 15.2.5 Notes on Register Access The watchdog timer’s TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR registers differ from other registers in being more difficult to write to. The procedures for writing to and reading these registers are given below. Writing to TCNT and TCSR: These registers must be written to by a word transfer instruction. They cannot be written to with byte instructions. Figure 15.2 shows the format of data written to TCNT and TCSR. TCNT and TCSR both have the same write address. For a write to TCNT, the upper byte of the written word must contain H'5A and the lower byte must contain the write data. For a write to TCSR, the upper byte of the written word must contain H'A5 and the lower byte must contain the write data. This transfers the write data from the lower byte to TCNT or TCSR. TCNT write 15 8 7 H'5A Address: H'FF74 0 Write data TCSR write 15 Address: H'FF74 8 7 H'A5 0 Write data Figure 15.2 Format of Data Written to TCNT and TCSR (WDT0) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 695 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) Writing to RSTCSR: RSTCSR must be written to by word transfer instruction to address H'FF76. It cannot be written to with byte instructions. Figure 15.3 shows the format of data written to RSTCSR. The method of writing 0 to the WOVF bit differs from that for writing to the RSTE and RSTS bits. To write 0 to the WOVF bit, the write data must have H'A5 in the upper byte and H'00 in the lower byte. This clears the WOVF bit to 0, but has no effect on the RSTE and RSTS bits. To write to the RSTE and RSTS bits, the upper byte must contain H'5A and the lower byte must contain the write data. This writes the values in bits 6 and 5 of the lower byte into the RSTE and RSTS bits, but has no effect on the WOVF bit. Writing 0 to WOVF bit 15 8 7 H'A5 Address: H'FF76 0 H'00 Writing to RSTE and RSTS bits 15 Address: H'FF76 8 7 H'5A 0 Write data Figure 15.3 Format of Data Written to RSTCSR (WDT0) Reading TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR (WDT0): These registers are read in the same way as other registers. The read addresses are H'FF74 for TCSR, H'FF75 for TCNT, and H'FF77 for RSTCSR. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 696 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) 15.3 Operation 15.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation IT To use the WDT as a watchdog timer, set the WT/ bit in TCSR and TME bit to 1. Software must prevent TCNT overflows by rewriting the TCNT value (normally be writing H'00) before overflows occurs. This ensures that TCNT does not overflow while the system is operating normally. If TCNT overflows without being rewritten because of a system crash or other error, in the WDT0 the signal is output. This is shown in figure 15.4 (a). This signal signal is output for 132 states when RSTE = 1, and can be used to reset the system. The for 130 states when RSTE = 0. WDTOVF WDTOVF WDTOVF If TCNT overflows when 1 is set in the RSTE bit in RSTCSR, a signal that resets the H8S/2633 Group internally is generated at the same time as the signal. This reset can be selected as a power-on reset or a manual reset, depending on the setting of the RSTS bit in RSTCSR. The internal reset signal is output for 518 states. WDTOVF RES pin occurs at the same time as a reset caused by a If a reset caused by a signal input to the pin reset has priority and the WOVF bit in RSTCSR is cleared to 0. WDT overflow, the RES In the case of WDT1, the chip is reset, or an NMI interrupt request is generated, for 516 system clock periods (516φ) (515 or 516 states when the clock source is φSUB (PSS = 1)). This is illustrated in figure 15.4 (b). An NMI request from the watchdog timer and an interrupt request from the NMI pin are both treated as having the same vector. So, avoid handling an NMI request from the watchdog timer and an interrupt request from the NMI pin at the same time. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 697 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) TCNT count Overflow H'FF Time H'00 WT/IT=1 TME=1 H'00 written to TCNT WT/IT=1 TME=1 WOVF=1 WDTOVF and internal reset are generated H'00 written to TCNT WDTOVF signal 132 states*2 Internal reset signal*1 518 states Legend: WT/IT: Timer mode select bit TME: Timer enable bit Notes: 1. The internal reset signal is generated only if the RSTE bit is set to 1. 2. 130 states when the RSTE bit is cleared to 0. Figure 15.4 (a) WDT0 Watchdog Timer Operation TCNT value Overflow H'FF Time H'00 WT/IT= 1 TME= 1 Write H'00 to TCNT WOVF= 1* WT/IT= 1 Write H'00 TME= 1 to TCNT Occurrence of internal reset Internal reset signal 515/516 states Legend: WT/IT: Timer Mode Select bit TME: Timer Enable bit Note: * The WOVF bit is set to 1 and then cleared to 0 by an internal reset. Figure 15.4 (b) WDT1 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 698 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) 15.3.2 Interval Timer Operation IT To use the WDT as an interval timer, clear the WT/ bit in TCSR to 0 and set the TME bit to 1. An interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is generated each time TCNT overflows, provided that the WDT is operating as an interval timer, as shown in figure 15.5. This function can be used to generate interrupt requests at regular intervals. TCNT count Overflow H'FF Overflow Overflow Overflow Time H'00 WT/IT=0 TME=1 WOVI WOVI WOVI WOVI Legend: WOVI: Interval timer interrupt request generation Figure 15.5 Interval Timer Operation 15.3.3 Timing of Setting Overflow Flag (OVF) The OVF flag is set to 1 if TCNT overflows during interval timer operation. At the same time, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is requested. This timing is shown in figure 15.6. With WDT1*, the OVF bit of the TCSR is set to 1 and a simultaneous NMI interrupt is requested when the TCNT overflows if the NMI request has been chosen in the watchdog timer mode. Note: * WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 699 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) φ TCNT H'FF H'00 Overflow signal (internal signal) OVF Figure 15.6 Timing of Setting of OVF 15.3.4 Timing of Setting of Watchdog Timer Overflow Flag (WOVF) In the WDT0, the WOVF flag is set to 1 if TCNT overflows during watchdog timer operation. At signal goes low. If TCNT overflows while the RSTE bit in RSTCSR the same time, the is set to 1, an internal reset signal is generated for the entire H8S/2633 Group chip. Figure 15.7 shows the timing in this case. WDTOVF φ TCNT H'FF H'00 Overflow signal (internal signal) WOVF 132 states WDTOVF signal Internal reset signal 518 states (WDT0) 515/516 states (WDT1) Figure 15.7 Timing of Setting of WOVF Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 700 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) 15.4 Interrupts During interval timer mode operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI). The interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSR. OVF must be cleared to 0 in the interrupt handling routine. If an NMI request has been chosen in the watchdog timer mode, an NMI request is generated when a TCNT overflow occurs. 15.5 Usage Notes 15.5.1 Contention between Timer Counter (TCNT) Write and Increment If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the write takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented. Figure 15.8 shows this operation. TCNT write cycle T1 T2 φ Address Internal write signal TCNT input clock TCNT N M Counter write data Figure 15.8 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 701 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) 15.5.2 Changing Value of PSS and CKS2 to CKS0 If bits PSS and CKS2 to CKS0 in TCSR are written to while the WDT is operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before changing the value of bits PSS and CKS2 to CKS0. 15.5.3 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode If the mode is switched from watchdog timer to interval timer, or vice versa, while the WDT is operating, errors could occur in the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before switching the mode. WDTOVF Signal If the WDTOVF output signal is input to the RES pin of the H8S/2633 Group, the H8S/2633 Group will not be initialized correctly. Make sure that the WDTOVF signal is not input logically to the RES pin. To reset the entire system by means of the WDTOVF signal, use the circuit shown 15.5.4 System Reset by in figure 15.9. H8S/2633 Group RES Reset input Reset signal to entire system Figure 15.9 Circuit for System Reset by 15.5.5 WDTOVF WDTOVF Signal (Example) Internal Reset in Watchdog Timer Mode The H8S/2633 Group is not reset internally if TCNT overflows while the RSTE bit is cleared to 0 during watchdog timer operation, but TCNT and TCSR of the WDT are reset. WDTOVF signal is low. Also note TCNT, TCSR, and RSTCSR cannot be written to while the that a read of the WOVF flag is not recognized during this period. To clear the WOVF falg, signal goes high, then write 0 to the WOVF flag. therefore, read RSTCSR after the WDTOVF Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 702 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) 15.5.6 OVF Flag Clearing in Interval Timer Mode When the OVF Flag setting conflicts with the OVF flag reading in interval timer mode, writing 0 to the OVF bit may not clear the flag even though the OVF bit has been read while it is 1. If there is a possibility that the OVF flag setting and reading will conflict, such as when the OVF flag is polled with the interval timer interrupt disabled, read the OVF bit while it is 1 at least twice before writing 0 to the OVF bit to clear the flag. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 703 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 15 Watchdog Timer (WDT1 is not available in the H8S/2695) Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 704 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) (The H8S/2695 is not equipped with an IrDA function) Section 16 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) (The H8S/2695 is not equipped with an IrDA function) 16.1 Overview The H8S/2633 is equipped with 5 independent serial communication interface (SCI) channels. The SCI can handle both asynchronous and clocked synchronous serial communication. A function is also provided for serial communication between processors (multiprocessor communication function). One of the five SCI channels is capable of sending and receiving IrDA communications waveforms (based on IrDA Version 1.0). 16.1.1 Features SCI features are listed below. • Choice of asynchronous or clocked synchronous serial communication mode Asynchronous mode Serial data communication executed using asynchronous system in which synchronization is achieved character by character Serial data communication can be carried out with standard asynchronous communication chips such as a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART) or Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter (ACIA) A multiprocessor communication function is provided that enables serial data communication with a number of processors Choice of 12 serial data transfer formats Data length: 7 or 8 bits Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits Parity: Even, odd, or none Multiprocessor bit: 1 or 0 Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the RxD pin level directly in case of a framing error Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 705 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) (The H8S/2695 is not equipped with an IrDA function) Clocked Synchronous mode Serial data communication synchronized with a clock Serial data communication can be carried out with other chips that have a synchronous communication function One serial data transfer format Data length: 8 bits Receive error detection: Overrun errors detected • Full-duplex communication capability The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception to be executed simultaneously Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous transmission and continuous reception of serial data • Choice of LSB-first or MSB-first transfer Can be selected regardless of the communication mode* (except in the case of asynchronous mode 7-bit data) Note: * Descriptions in this section refer to LSB-first transfer. • On-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected • Choice of serial clock source: internal clock from baud rate generator or external clock from SCK pin • Four interrupt sources Four interrupt sources — transmit-data-empty, transmit-end, receive-data-full, and receive error — that can issue requests independently The transmit-data-empty interrupt and receive data full interrupts can activate the DMA controller (DMAC) or data transfer controller (DTC) to execute data transfer • Module stop mode can be set As the initial setting, SCI operation is halted. Register access is enabled by exiting module stop mode Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 706 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) (The H8S/2695 is not equipped with an IrDA function) 16.1.2 Block Diagram Bus interface Figure 16.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI. Module data bus RxD TxD RDR TDR RSR TSR BRR φ Baud rate generator Transmission/ reception control Parity generation Parity check SCK Legend RSR: RDR: TSR: TDR: SMR: SCR: SSR: SCMR: BRR: SCMR SSR SCR SMR Internal data bus φ/4 φ/16 φ/64 Clock External clock TEI TXI RXI ERI Receive shift register Receive data register Transmit shift register Transmit data register Serial mode register Serial control register Serial status register Smart card mode register Bit rate register Figure 16.1 Block Diagram of SCI Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 707 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) (The H8S/2695 is not equipped with an IrDA function) 16.1.3 Pin Configuration Table 16.1 shows the serial pins for each SCI channel. Table 16.1 SCI Pins Channel Pin Name Symbol* I/O Function 0 Serial clock pin 0 SCK0 I/O SCI0 clock input/output Receive data pin 0 RxD0/IrRxD Input SCI0 receive data input (normal/IrDA) Transmit data pin 0 TxD0/IrTxD Output SCI0 transmit data output (normal/IrDA) Serial clock pin 1 SCK1 I/O SCI1 clock input/output Receive data pin 1 RxD1 Input SCI1 receive data input Transmit data pin 1 TxD1 Output SCI1 transmit data output Serial clock pin 2 SCK2 I/O SCI2 clock input/output Receive data pin 2 RxD2 Input SCI2 receive data input 1 2 3 4 Transmit data pin 2 TxD2 Output SCI2 transmit data output Serial clock pin 3 SCK3 I/O SCI3 clock input/output Receive data pin 3 RxD3 Input SCI3 receive data input Transmit data pin 3 TxD3 Output SCI3 transmit data output Serial clock pin 4 SCK4 I/O SCI4 clock input/output Receive data pin 4 RxD4 Input SCI4 receive data input Transmit data pin 4 TxD4 Output SCI4 transmit data output Note: * Pin names SCK, RxD, and TxD are used in the text for all channels, omitting the channel designation. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 708 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) (The H8S/2695 is not equipped with an IrDA function) 16.1.4 Register Configuration The SCI has the internal registers shown in table 16.2. These registers are used to specify asynchronous mode or clocked synchronous mode, the data format , and the bit rate, and to control transmitter/receiver. Table 16.2 SCI Registers Channel Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address*1 0 Serial mode register 0 SMR0 R/W H'00 Bit rate register 0 BRR0 R/W H'FF H'FF78*3 H'FF79*3 Serial control register 0 SCR0 R/W H'00 Transmit data register 0 TDR0 R/W Serial status register 0 SSR0 H'FF 2 * R/(W) H'84 H'FF7A*3 H'FF7B*3 Receive data register 0 RDR0 R H'00 H'FF7C*3 H'FF7D*3 Smart card mode register 0 SCMR0 R/W H'F2 H'FF7E*3 IrDA control register IrCR R/W H'00 Serial mode register 1 SMR1 R/W H'00 H'FDB0 H'FF80*3 Bit rate register 1 BRR1 R/W H'FF Serial control register 1 SCR1 R/W H'00 Transmit data register 1 TDR1 R/W H'FF Serial status register 1 SSR1 R/(W)*2 H'84 Receive data register 1 RDR1 R H'00 Smart card mode register 1 SCMR1 R/W H'F2 H'FF85*3 H'FF86*3 Serial mode register 2 SMR2 R/W H'00 H'FF88 1 2 H'FF81*3 H'FF82*3 H'FF83*3 H'FF84*3 Bit rate register 2 BRR2 R/W H'FF H'FF89 Serial control register 2 SCR2 R/W H'00 H'FF8A Transmit data register 2 TDR2 R/W H'FF H'FF8B *2 Serial status register 2 SSR2 R/(W) H'84 H'FF8C Receive data register 2 RDR2 R H'00 H'FF8D Smart card mode register 2 SCMR2 R/W H'F2 H'FF8E Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 709 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) (The H8S/2695 is not equipped with an IrDA function) Channel Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address*1 3 Serial mode register 3 SMR3 R/W H'00 H'FDD0 Bit rate register 3 BRR3 R/W H'FF H'FDD1 4 All Serial control register 3 SCR3 R/W H'00 H'FDD2 Transmit data register 3 TDR3 R/W H'FF H'FDD3 Serial status register 3 SSR3 R/(W)*2 H'84 H'FDD4 Receive data register 3 RDR3 R H'00 H'FDD5 Smart card mode register 3 SCMR3 R/W H'F2 H'FDD6 Serial mode register 4 SMR4 R/W H'00 H'FDD8 Bit rate register 4 BRR4 R/W H'FF H'FDD9 Serial control register 4 SCR4 R/W H'00 H'FDDA Transmit data register 4 TDR4 R/W H'FDDB Serial status register 4 SSR4 H'FF 2 * R/(W) H'84 Receive data register 4 RDR4 R H'00 H'FDDD Smart card mode register 4 SCMR4 R/W H'F2 H'FDDE Module stop control register B MSTPCRB R/W H'FF H'FDE9 Module stop control register C MSTPCRC R/W H'FF H'FDEA H'FDDC Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. 2. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing. 3. Some of the SCI registers are allocated to the same addresses as other registers. The IICE bit of the serial timer control register X (SCRX) selects the respective registers. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 710 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) (The H8S/2695 is not equipped with an IrDA function) 16.2 Register Descriptions 16.2.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R/W : — — — — — — — — RSR is a register used to receive serial data. The SCI sets serial data input from the RxD pin in RSR in the order received, starting with the LSB (bit 0), and converts it to parallel data. When one byte of data has been received, it is transferred to RDR automatically. RSR cannot be directly read or written to by the CPU. 16.2.2 Bit Receive Data Register (RDR) : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial value : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W R R R R R R R R : RDR is a register that stores received serial data. When the SCI has received one byte of serial data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR to RDR where it is stored, and completes the receive operation. After this, RSR is receive-enabled. Since RSR and RDR function as a double buffer in this way, enables continuous receive operations to be performed. RDR is a read-only register, and cannot be written to by the CPU. RDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode or module stop mode. Rev. 5.00 Mar 28, 2005 page 711 of 1422 REJ09B0234-0500 Section 16 Serial Communication Interface (SCI, IrDA) (The H8S/2695 is not equipped with an IrDA function) 16.2.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) Bit : 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R/W : — — — — — — — — TSR is a register used to transmit serial data. To perform serial data transmission, the SCI first transfers transmit data from TDR to TSR, then se